JP2023072200A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of further enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: special condition determination means for determining whether an execution result of a game satisfies a special condition; special game state control means capable of performing control to a special game state capable of granting predetermined game value to a player after completion of a game when it is determined that a special condition is satisfied; game state control means capable of controlling a game state at least including a normal game state, a specific game state more advantageous to a player than the normal game state, and a game-disabled state for disabling a game by a player as a game state in which a game is executed; threshold determination means capable of determining whether the number of times of execution of a special game state or a game value number granted to a player reaches a predetermined threshold; and restriction means capable of controlling a game state controlled by the game state control means to a normal game state or a game-disabled state on the basis of determination by the threshold determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 330

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, a game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the game machine enters the start hole, changes the big win hole to an open state, and changes the big win hole 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines (so-called two-type pachinko gaming machines) that control a jackpot game state on the condition that a game ball hit enters a specific area.

Furthermore, in pachinko machines, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game, there are also so-called 1 type 2 type pachinko machines, which are a mixture of the so-called 1 type pachinko machine and the so-called 2 type pachinko machine. known (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-178259 A

However, it is desired not only to mix the so-called type 1 type pachinko game machine and the so-called type 2 type pachinko game machine, but also to create a game that has never existed before and to improve the interest of the game. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., an eighth pachinko gaming machine) is provided with game executing means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition; A special condition determining means for determining whether or not an execution result satisfies a special condition, and a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player after the game is finished when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied. a special game state control means capable of controlling the game at any time; a normal game state, a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state as the game states in which the game is executed, and a game disabled by the player. game state control means capable of controlling any game state including at least a game impossible state; game execution mode determination means; threshold determination means capable of determining whether or not the number of times the special game state is executed or the number of game values given to the player reaches a predetermined threshold; a limiting means capable of controlling the game state controlled by the game state control means to the normal game state or the game impossible state based on the judgment of the means, wherein the special game state is a predetermined special game state; , a specific special game state in which the game value given to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and the game state control means, when being controlled to the specific game state; When the predetermined special game state is executed a predetermined number of times, it is possible to control the game state to the normal game state after the predetermined special game state is completed, and the threshold value determination means determines the predetermined special game. It is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not the counted threshold reaches the predetermined threshold after executing a process of counting a predetermined count value to the threshold based on the transition to the state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the front right diagonally above. It is an example of the exploded perspective view when the 1st pachinko game machine is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) An example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine, (B) An example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at the time of start-up in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a power-off process in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update process of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving setting processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the normal game state of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead per type production pattern determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of losing) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the big hit-type look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving per-system look-ahead performance form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big win-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process of changing a pending image from a dedicated common winning-type look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning-type look-ahead performance form. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal that is output to the outside according to the game state. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and (A) opening mode of the specific area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. It is an example of a special design determination table in the expansion example. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the expansion example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) of the specific area FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a case where the open mode is the first open mode, and (B) a case where the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a winning type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the C time saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A reduced working hours gaming state and the B reduced working hours gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of limiter frequency update processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of a normal electric accessory in a normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the release mode of the normal electric role product in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state and the C time saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the release mode of the normal electric accessory in the normal game state or C time reduction game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an explanatory diagram explaining the bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining a bonus time effect in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the sixth pachinko game machine is seen from the front and obliquely upper right. It is an example of the conceptual diagram which shows the change of the operation mode of the production|presentation button apparatus of a 6th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) which shows an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) which shows an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the production flow of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the production flow of the right hitting game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table for a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the second half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon display scenario determination table of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon set order scenario determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table of confrontation reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a lotus blossom advance notice determination table in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the folding fan advance notice determination table of the jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (1) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (2) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the normal display image of the west army mode and the east army mode in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (No. 1) explaining the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (No. 2) explaining the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (No. 1) explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (Part 2) explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (No. 3) explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (Part 1) explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image (Part 2) explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining the showdown ready-to-win effect in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image (Part 2) explaining the showdown ready-to-win effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining the performance of the lotus flower notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (Part 1) explaining the effect of the battle ready-to-win in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the effect of battle reach in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation effect time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the effect button device in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "external information 3" among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the time saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a transition diagram of a special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the prefetch related data of the special symbol in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of an opening pattern determination table for normal electric accessories in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the operation contents of the ordinary electric accessory in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a right-handed instruction period setting table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game state setting process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game state control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the production flow of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the symbol effect pattern determination table in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a determination table at the start of the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the symbol effect pattern determination table in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the symbol production pattern determination table of the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table other than the final variation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the symbol production pattern determination table at the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the notice effect pattern determination table of the window notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a pending notice effect pattern determination table of the pending change notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a winning notice effect pattern determination table for flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a prohibition condition setting table of the look-ahead effect in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a small hit production pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a V passing effect pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the production stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (1) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (2) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prefetch effect|action determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the normal display image of the 1st normal game state in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining card effects and door effects in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the production|presentation of the Sengoku rush chance of the 1st time saving game state in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the display image explaining selection of the production|presentation stage by the player in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the Sengoku time production when the male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the Sengoku time production when the female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the effect performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining an effect when the Sengoku time ends in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the production|presentation of the continuous battle of the 2nd normal game state in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a small hit type determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state related setting table in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state or special time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the general time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of prefetch related data of special symbols in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an opening pattern determination table of normal electric accessories in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving management processing in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of small hit number of times update processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing during small winning game closing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing during the opening of the small winning game in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game state end processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of limiter information update processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (2) which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the announcement effect pattern determination table of the time saving game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the production flow of the game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the battle production in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining a card effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the ending effect in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining a card effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the advance notice effect in the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a small hit type determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state related setting table in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the time saving game state in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of prefetch related data of special symbols in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the opening pattern determination table of the second start opening in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the B time-saving game state transition determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing during closing of the small winning game in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing during the opening of the small winning game in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game state end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal per symbol end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in a 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining the effect of the BONUS state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front side, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear side, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left side. The right side when viewed from the front of the machine is the right direction, the top side of the pachinko machine is the top side, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is the bottom side, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is the clockwise direction. , and vice versa, define the counterclockwise direction as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In addition, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine that mixes a so-called type 1 type game machine called digipachi and a type 2 type game machine called Hanemono. It is a game machine. The third pachinko machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example in which only one of them is variably displayed will be described. However, it is not intended to exclude the pachinko game machine of one kind and two kinds of machines capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

It should be noted that, in this specification, when simply referred to as "special design", it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

Further, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes, for example, both "variable display" in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner and "stop display" in which patterns are displayed in a stopped state. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination process (Hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") results are finalized. It should be noted that although the design appears to be stopped, the results of the special design hit determination process and the normal design hit determination process are not finalized (for example, temporary stop mode). However, such aspects are included in the variable representation above. Even if the symbols are temporarily stopped, for example, the results of the hit determination processing of the special symbols and the hit determination processing of the normal symbols are not determined at this time, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

Also, in this specification, in describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the second special symbol). pattern) will be described as an example. However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko machine]
First, the first pachinko game machine will be explained.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variation machine") in which, for example, the start condition of the second special symbol is established preferentially over the start condition of the first special symbol when the display is suspended, and the first There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is established in the winning order including the starting opening and the second starting opening.

In the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol are being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, etc., is established when all certain requirements are satisfied. In addition, in the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variable. It is established when all certain requirements are met, such as that the display is withheld.

In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the first special symbol is variably displayed. It is established when at least all of the conditions of being suspended and that the earliest suspension is suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol are satisfied. In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variably displayed. It is established when at least all of the conditions of being suspended and that the earliest suspension is suspension of variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, the priority change machine will be described as an example.

[1-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view when the first pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 . Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained. Details will be described later. It should be noted that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island facilities of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as a payout unit 8, a substrate unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, etc., which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin plate of metal, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it becomes possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a substrate unit 9 attached to the back side thereof and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. - 特許庁In addition, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, and the upper end A glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges at the middle portion and the middle portion, and a plate unit 5 is journaled by the hinges at the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the tray unit 5 forward together or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

In addition, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached to the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. there is The speaker 32 outputs, for example, sound effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, sound effects such as voice notification, error notification, and the like.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 to the hinge (that is, the right end). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3 .

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member with an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see later-described FIG. 4) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front while the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be formed by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) glasses with a gap between them, or by unitizing a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. may Furthermore, in the case of a unitized one, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to be made of glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, below the glass door 4, there is provided an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, the player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated on the hall menu screen by the manager of the game arcade or the like.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 is provided above the glass door 4 . Furthermore, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4 , and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46 . Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for the sake of convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46 . The LED group 46 is, for example, light emitting means for performing lighting effects such as notification with light and various variations of light emitting effects. may be

(dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is formed by unitizing an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. - 特許庁The tray unit 5 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4 . As described above, the tray unit 5 is configured to be opened and closed by rotating it with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integral plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided so as to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are shot from the shooting device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, a performance button 54, and the like. A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 53 to an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Also, the functions of the operation unit 66 may be shared.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 . The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out to the lower tray 52 through the payout port 55. - 特許庁

The bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is formed with an opening (without reference numerals) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52 . In addition, when a so-called each-machine counting system is provided for each machine, not only does the ball box not be required, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are reused. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The shooting device 6 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and to the lower right side of the pan unit 5 . The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 62 .

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3 .

The shooting handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61 . The driving device described above is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the shooting handle 62, the game ball is shot by the operation of the driving device. When operating the shooting handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (the amount of operation), the stronger the shooting strength of the game ball.

A game ball shot from a shooting device 6 arranged on the lower right side of the plate unit 5 passes through a shooting rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. The area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) is embossed. In addition, the arrangement position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5 , and may be the lower left side of the dish unit 5 . In this case, the above launch rail is not required, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, making it possible to enhance versatility.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various game-related effect images, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100 . The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. may be In the display area of the display device 7, for example, a performance identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or a special pattern hit determination process result is displayed. A performance image, a performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10. However, if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. You may enable it to be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above various effect images. An image may be displayed.

(Dispensing unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and comprises a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). The payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to the upper tray 51, for example, when the payout condition is satisfied. A power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(substrate unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the rear side of the base door 3 . Various control boards and the like are provided in the board unit 9 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted on a payout/launch control board 93, and a power supply circuit 450 (shown in the diagram below) for supplying power. 6) is mounted on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/fire control board 93 and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all accommodated in the board case. ing.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, not limited to this, for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and a character control circuit 307 (all of which will be described later in FIG. 6) can be provided on a separate substrate. By doing so, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 10, a game area 105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 105. center accessory 115, first starting port 120, general prize winning port 122, passage gate unit 125, special electric accessory unit 130, second starting port 140, and normal electric accessory unit 145 , an LED unit 160 , an out port 178 , and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10 . Incidentally, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7 . A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be seen from the front. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 105 is partitioned (demarcated) by the guide rails 110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and has an arcuate center rail 116 above it. The game balls shot toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

In this first pachinko game machine, of the game area 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is called a left area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is called a right area 107. The definitions of the left side area and the right side area are the same for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine which will be described later.

A game ball shot toward the game area 105 by the shooting device 6 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 107 .

In this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the shooting handle 62, a method of shooting a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method that causes the game ball to flow down the right side region 107 is referred to as "left hitting". A method of shooting a game ball is called "right-handed hitting". In this way, the player can hit the game ball either toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 .

In addition, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp entrance 117 at its left outer peripheral edge, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 . The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119 at the first start. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, and the random number for selecting the effect of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the various data thus obtained are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as "fluctuation starting condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first 1 special symbol symbol random value, reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values of the first special symbol effect selection random value, etc.) is referred to as start information of the first special symbol. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right region 107, and includes a passing gate 126 constructed so that a game ball hit to the right can pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of a game ball to the passing gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected by the passing gate switch 127, various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols) are extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, a maximum of 4) is stored. The stored various data are usually provided for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107 .

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbols) etc.) is usually referred to as starting information of the design. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 integrates a big prize slot 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passage) of a game ball into the big prize slot 131, and a special electric role product 133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right area 107 .

The big winning opening 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning hole 131, a big winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played on the upper part of the center accessory 115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

Also, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) a prize when controlled in a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the prize-winning entrance. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 131, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134 . The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134, is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 or is easily opened, and in which a game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize winning port 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. is.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is difficult or impossible to win a game ball hit to the left due to, for example, a game nail. is configured to be guided to the vicinity of However, it is not essential to configure the second starting port 140 in this manner, and it may be provided in the right region 107, for example. Also, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that left-handed game balls can win.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for second special symbols, random numbers for reach judgment for second special symbols, and random numbers for selecting effects of second special symbols, etc.) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the various data thus obtained are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the second special symbol start condition (also referred to as "second special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second start port 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left area 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first start port 120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) the game balls. It is a unit body that integrates a prize winning hole, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 146.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141 .

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric movable member 147, which is a so-called electric chew and made of, for example, a blade member, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the general electric movable member 147. . The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the ordinary electric movable member 147 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second start port 140, and in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second start port 140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from possible or difficult closed states. In addition, the general electric movable member 147 includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(out port)
The out port 178 is launched toward the game area 105, but does not win any of the various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the big winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.). It is for ejecting missing game balls out of the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 122, so that the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged out of the machine. can be

(back unit)
A back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided behind the transparent game panel 100 . This back unit includes a performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub-control circuit 300 . The performance accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 58 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display portion 161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol display portion 163, a second special symbol display portion 164, and a first special symbol reservation display. A part 165, a second special symbol reservation display part 166, a probability variation notification display part 167, and a time reduction notification display part 168 are provided.

(Normal pattern display part)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of normal symbols") is established, the variable display of normal symbols is started, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. be. When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is lit and the normal symbol display LED 161b is extinguished. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 Winning (passing) of game balls to is facilitated.

(Reserved display for normal symbols)
The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable displays of normal symbols that are being held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of pending normal symbols") when the starting information of the normal symbols, that is, the variable display is being held. It is provided with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected, and various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of normal symbols, etc.) applied to the normal symbols are It refers to the state from extraction to establishment of the starting condition of the normal symbol. It should be noted that the starting condition of the normal symbol is established when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not being variably displayed and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable display pending normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol pending display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols is normally one, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design lights up and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design goes out. Also, when the number of reserved symbols is normally two, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols light up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is normally 3, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design flashes and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols is normally four, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols blink. However, the display mode of the normal design reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal design reservations is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164 . The first special symbol display unit 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also has a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 Or the variable display of the 1st special design which repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display portion 163 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 Or the variable display of the 2nd special design in which a part repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display portion 164 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol pending display unit displays the number of variable display of special symbols that are suspended (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") when the start information of the special symbols, that is, the variable display is suspended. It comprises a first special symbol reservation display portion 165 and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166 .

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. Prepare. "Variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, the first It refers to the state until the starting condition of the special symbol is established.

The first special symbol holding display unit 165 displays the number of variable display holdings of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol holding display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reserved first special symbols is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a lights up and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is two, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. Further, when the number of reserved first special symbols is 3, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved first special symbols is four, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is not limited to this.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of second special symbols pending when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. Prepare. "Variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, the second It refers to the state until the starting condition of the special symbol is established.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of pending variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a lights up and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of pending second special symbols is not limited to this.

(Probability notification display unit)
The variable probability notification display unit 167 can be lit during execution of the variable probability control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variation notification display unit 167 may be turned on during execution of the probability variation control, but for example, by not lighting so as not to be able to grasp that the probability variation control is being performed from the appearance, the probability variation control is being executed may be concealed.

However, when the power is cut off during execution of the variable probability control, the data indicating that the variable probability control is being executed does not disappear due to the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later. Therefore, when the power is turned off during execution of variable probability control and then turned on, the variable probability notification display unit 167 lights up in such a manner that the variable probability control is being performed.

In addition, even if whether or not the probability variation control is being executed is kept secret before the power is turned off, the probability variation notification display unit 167 is lit when the power is turned on. By doing so, it is configured to be able to grasp that the variable probability control is being executed.

(Display unit for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In the present embodiment, the time reduction notification display unit 168 has, for example, a first time reduction notification display unit 168a and a second time reduction notification display unit 168b. Not limited.

Further, although the details will be described later, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state and a C time saving game state. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp which time-saving gaming state by a combination of lighting or extinguishing by the first time-saving information display unit 168a and the second time-saving information display unit 168b.

The time saving notification display unit 168 may light the first time saving information display unit 168a or / and the second time saving information display unit 168b according to the time saving control being executed, but for example, the time saving control Whether it is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed can not be grasped by the appearance (for example, all lights off, all lights, modes unrelated to time saving control being executed) By turning on or off, The fact that the time saving control is being executed and the type of the time saving control being executed may be kept secret so as not to be grasped from the appearance. In particular, it may be possible to grasp from the appearance whether or not time-saving control is being executed, but it may be difficult to grasp from the appearance which time-saving control is being executed. Interest can be heightened by making secret the kind of time saving control of inside.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of time-saving control, not only the data indicating that the time-saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of time-saving control being executed by the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later. does not disappear either. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the execution of the time saving control and then the power is turned on, the time saving notification display unit 168 lights up or goes out.

Before the power is turned off, even if the fact that time saving control is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In this case, the display unit 168 for time saving notification is lit and / and extinguished in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be grasped from the appearance.

[1-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450 .

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset It has a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected with a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, and the like. The main CPU 201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko game machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202 .

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 to store various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200 . For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the normal symbol display portion 161, the normal symbol reservation display portion 162, the first special symbol display portion 163, the second special symbol display portion 164, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 165. , Second special symbol holding display portion 166, probability variation notification display portion 167, time reduction notification display portion 168, general electric solenoid 148, and special electric solenoid 135 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205 .

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, which will be described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 200 are the first starter switch 121, the second starter switch 141, the passage gate switch 127, the count switch 132, the general winning switch 123, and the like. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205 .

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 186 that controls the pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 184, the setting key 174 operated when changing or confirming the setting value in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared in response to the operation of . In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. "Within a given case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also only the corresponding parts of the case corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game hall to expose the back surface, the manager of the game hall can press the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured to allow contact with the clear switch 176 .

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 .

[1-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 200 . Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302 . In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200 .

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 301 .

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7 . The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, image data is provided as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7 . In this manner, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 32 . The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 32 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 .

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 58). The role item control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

[1-2-3. Dispensing/launching control circuit]
The payout/shooting control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, and a game ball to shoot. A launching device 6 capable of controlling ball rental, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180 . The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving a ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180 . The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 180 . The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) when the firing handle 62 is turned clockwise. It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

[1-2-4. power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, and the like.

The power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450 . The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions of game states. It should be noted that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood visually.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball enters various prize-winning ports (for example, the first start port 120, etc.), the game ball is released. A payout control process is performed. Pachinko games include a "special symbol game" using special symbols and a "normal symbol game" using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls into the starting ports 120 and 140, and whether or not to shift to a big win game state is determined. In addition, the normal symbol game, for example, executes the normal symbol hit determination process based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and operates the normal electric accessory 146 to operate the winning opening (the second game in this embodiment) This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140). In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, for example, the normal symbol game and the operation unit such as the production button 54 ( For example, see FIG. 1) is included in "games".

Also, in this specification, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, until this variable display is finished and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is confirmed (derived) (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, when the game is controlled to the big win game state after the result of the special symbol win determination process is derived, the special symbol game lasts until the end of the big win game state. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko game machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination is performed. After the result of the processing is derived, if the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, one special symbol game is performed until the small winning game state ends.

In the special symbol game, when the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, the game is controlled to the big win game state. In the jackpot game state, the operation of the special electric accessory 133 executes a round game in which the jackpot 131 is open for a predetermined time (for example, maximum 30000 msec), and the possibility of winning the jackpot 131 is relatively high. be done.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating the winning of the normal symbols in the normal symbol game is drawn to the normal symbol display unit 161, the operation of the normal electric accessory 146 causes the winning opening (for example, the second start opening 140 in this embodiment) to open. It becomes an open state, and the winning possibility to the 2nd starting port 140, for example is relatively increased.

In addition, the game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol start winning process which is performed when there is a winning (passing) through the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, and a special symbol game. Includes special symbol control processing, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for design, a reach judgment Various random numbers such as random numbers for use and random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each random value extracted is retained as starting information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the special symbol is established. When the starting condition of the special pattern is established, the random number value for judging the big win extracted from the counter for judging the big win of the special pattern is referred to, and the special pattern hit judging process for judging whether or not it is a ``big hit'' is performed. After that, stop symbol determination processing for determining a stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol win determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability flag is ON, the variable probability control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, if the probability variation flag is off, it is determined that it is a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as a "jackpot probability".

The variable probability flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not variable probability control is to be executed. When the probability variation flag is on, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, in the present embodiment high probability short-time gaming state) in which probability variation control is executed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, the normal game state or the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which the probability variation control is not executed.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the random number, the result of the above-described special symbol hit determination process, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern is obtained. (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7, sound effects such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32, etc. is performed. Note that the effect control processing is performed by the sub CPU 301 .

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and the performance control process are finished, and if the game is a big win, a big win game control process is carried out. The big-hit game control process is a process executed in the big-hit game state. When the big win game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-big win game state is performed. In this case, the game state shifts according to the type of the big win. For example, when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to ON, the game moves to a high probability time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine in which the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win, if a small win is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. In addition, when it is not a big hit but a time saving hit described later, the game shifts to a time saving game state.

Then, each time the starting condition for the special symbol is established, various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of game balls to the starting ports 120 and 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, starting information of special symbols extracted when a game ball enters the starting ports 120, 140 (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for special symbols, random numbers for judging reach, and random numbers for selecting effects) Various data such as various random numbers such as numerical values) are withheld until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the starting information of special symbols can be reserved up to a total of 4 pieces of starting information of the first special symbols and 4 pieces of starting information of the second special symbols. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the starting information of the first special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the second special symbol, or the starting information of the second special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the first special symbol. can be

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is extracted at the time of winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 after the special symbol starts winning and before the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Pre-reading determination (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) to determine the winning/losing (whether or not "big hit" winning) and variation patterns prior to the special symbol hit determination process based on the starting information, and this pre-reading determination A look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result may be provided. The above-mentioned look-ahead determination may be performed before or after the starting information extracted by the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 is withheld.

[1-3-2. Normal pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol starting passage process which is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and when a normal symbol starting condition is established. Normal design control processing, etc. are included.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, normal symbol start passage processing is executed. In the normal symbol starting passage processing, normal symbol starting information (for example, normal symbol winning determination random number value, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the normal symbol winning determination counter, and the extracted starting information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the condition for starting the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not to set the "normal symbol hit". A pattern hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal design hit determination process is referred to, and the normal design variation pattern is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the results of the win determination process for the normal symbols and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols, and performs variable display control processing for controlling the variable display of the normal symbols and a predetermined effect. Perform production control processing. Note that the effect control process may not be executed.

When the normal symbol variable display control process and effect control process are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been drawn to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). determine whether When determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes normal symbol winning game control processing. In this normal per symbol game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) operates, and the winning of the game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). It becomes an open state in which (passing) is possible or easy. On the other hand, when determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is not derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in the game state (for example, normal game state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability of deriving the stop display mode indicating the normal winning may be set to 0. Time-saving control is, compared to when time-saving control is not executed, a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, the third 2 starting port 140 (see FIG. 4)), the control in which at least one of the electric sapo control that increases the frequency of opening the start port 140 (see FIG. 4) is performed. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control.

The electric sapo control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal pattern", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) of the normal electric accessory 146. It is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and the winning probability of "per normal symbol" , the variable display time of normal symbols, or/and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.). Improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball into a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). That is, when the electric sapo control is executed, compared with the case where the electric sapo control is not executed, the winning probability of "per normal symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, or / and normal electric accessories Winning facilitation (increasing the number of openings, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) is performed by 146.

Then, each time the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 during the normal design control processing, the normal design start passage processing is executed. In addition, normal symbol start information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, normal symbol hit determination random number) is withheld until the normal symbol start condition is established.

In addition, the start of the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the order of being held, and when the start condition of the normal symbols is satisfied, the variable display of the start information that is held first among the start information of the held normal symbols is displayed. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number of the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, the random number for judging the big hit of the second special symbol, The pattern random number value of the second special symbol, the reach determination random number value of the second special symbol, and the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol, etc.) are extracted within a predetermined range ( width) may be used, or a hard random number method may be used in which a random number is extracted from a counter in a random number generator whose random number is updated at predetermined intervals.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol win determination processing, the non-jackpot game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. In addition, the explanation about the small winning game state shall be omitted.

The non-jackpot game state is divided into a low-probability state in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol win determination process is relatively low, and a high probability game state in which the probability of winning the big win in the win determination process of the special symbol is relatively high. can be broadly classified.

The high certainty gaming state includes a high certainty short working hours gaming state (high certainty high base) in which time saving control is executed. It should be noted that, although not included in the high certainty gaming state in the first pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. state may be included.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving game state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state, and a C time saving game state.

The A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a special symbol game of a specified number of times is executed or transitioned to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is changed. finish. When the A time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the state shifts to the normal game state.

In the B time-saving gaming state, for example, the jackpot gaming state ends, and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high certainty gaming state (that is, the gaming state in which the probability variation flag is off) has started, and the later-described RAM has been cleared. When the number of variable display times of special symbols (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times) starting from such as, it is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted, and whether the special symbol game is executed for the specified number of times , When it shifts to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

The C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of the time-saving winning is derived. When the prescribed number of special symbol games determined by winning the time-saving win are executed or the game is shifted to a big win game state, the C time-saving game state is terminated. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, for example, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the C time-saving game state continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed repeatedly, the conditions for shifting to the time-saving gaming state are established in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for shifting to multiple time-saving gaming states are established at the same time To do, the time saving game state is referred to as “overlapping”. Then, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the control of the main CPU 201 internally activates any of the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally activates the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Running in parallel is called "overlapping". However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving gaming states, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving gaming states. That is, even when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner, the player perceives that the game is controlled to one of the plurality of time-saving game states.

Next, the game state transition will be described.

Normal game state, reduced working hours game state (A reduced working hours game state, B reduced working hours game state, C reduced working hours game state), and high certainty game state (for example, high certainty reduced working hours game state) Even if it is controlled, special symbols If the result of the hit determination process is a big hit, the state shifts to a big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it can be shifted to any of a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a high-certainty game state (for example, a high-certainty time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled to the high-precision game state, it does not shift from the high-precision game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state, except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, from the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, it does not shift to the high-accuracy gaming state unless it passes through the big-hit gaming state.

When it is controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the B time reduction game state or C time reduction game state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time reduction game state unless the jackpot game state is passed. However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if it is controlled to either the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, when the special symbol game of the specified number of times is executed, it will shift to the normal game state. It is also possible to shift from the game state to the normal game state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving game states will be described.

When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, the number of time saving times that can be executed in the A time saving game state is set to a number less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transition to the B time saving game state, so from the A time saving game state to B It does not shift to the time saving game state. In addition, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the B time saving game state to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, so the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state can overlap. . However, since the A time-saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state as described above, there is no transition from the C time-saving game state to the A time-saving game state.

If it is controlled in the B time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time-saving gaming state is established, and the B time-saving gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state are established. can be duplicated. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state can overlap.

When it is controlled to the C time saving game state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is established, and the C time saving game state and the C time saving game state are established. can be duplicated.

In addition, the detail about duplication of a time-saving game state is mentioned later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, basic specifications of the first pachinko game machine will be described.

In the first pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is not executed A low-probability, time-saving game state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 201 can progress the game in any one of these game states. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability short-time game state, the right-handed hit is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of hitting that is regarded as a regular game mode. The "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (for example, shooting mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, using the above-described setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6 for both), a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6, for example, can be set. Any one of these can be set. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol win determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is not executed is off game state (in this embodiment, for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state) the jackpot probability in the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special For example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1/309. 1/304, setting 5 is about 1/299, setting 6 is about 1/294. In addition, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is executed is on (in this embodiment, for example, a high probability short-time gaming state). Setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

It should be noted that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all set values, unlike the jackpot probability. For example, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is 1/160, and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, the time saving probability is 1/240. there is The time saving hit probability may be different between when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but may be the same.

However, even if the time saving per probability is a common probability with all set values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the time saving number of times to be set) may be varied according to the setting value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times are set as the number of time saving can be

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the small win is not included in the lottery target, but the small win may be included in the lottery target. When small hits are included in the lottery targets, the small hit probability may be a common probability for all set values. In addition, when the small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit is won only when the hit determination processing of one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (for example, the second special pattern) is performed. You can make it soothing. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the aspect of not performing the determination itself of whether or not the small hit was won, whether or not the small hit probability was set to 0 may be determined.

The above-mentioned short-time hit probability and the small hit probability when including the small hit in the lottery target are common probabilities for all set values as described above, but not limited to this, as different probabilities depending on the set value good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but it is not limited to this. A plurality of setting values may have the same jackpot probability, such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot probability common to setting 5 and setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, the big win probability differs according to the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the big win probability. For example, in a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a specific winning hole may be varied according to the set value. It should be noted that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time saving hit" based on the big hit determination random number extracted when the game ball wins in the start ports 120 and 140. , a table to be referred to when determining a "big hit" or "losing" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery target is "time saving hit", "big hit" and "losing", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first start port 120 or / and When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "lose" based on the extracted big hit determination random number value in the first special symbol win determination process. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the variable probability flag is off, and when the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the variable probability flag is on.

In addition, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines, in the same way as in the first special symbol win determination process, based on the extracted big win determination random number value, a “time-saving win”, a “big win”, or a “loss”. ” is decided. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 ”, and the hit-loss determination value data is determined as “time saving hit determination value data”. Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and hits and drops. The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Further, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Also, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit". It judges and decides judgment value data as "time reduction per judgment value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for judging the big hit generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the hit judging process of the first special symbol), It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data) excluding big hit judgment value data and loss judgment value data. Also, from the predetermined value, the end (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag is turned from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or decreases) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared with the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, when "time saving hit" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and when the "time saving win" is won just before the time saving game state ends, the time saving game state is activated. It will be extended substantially, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, even if the variable probability flag is ON or OFF, it is possible to win the "time saving hit". However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal game state, time reduction game state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time reduction game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time reduction hit", but the probability variation flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[1-4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining a stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting ports 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs the selected symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs a selected symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the design designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the hit/lose determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for judging a big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command may be determined together.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12(A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is referred to when making a decision according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. 1-byte control signal. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) forming the first special symbol display portion 163 on a one-to-one basis. For example, the first special symbol area 0 corresponds to 163a, the first special symbol area 1 corresponds to 163b, the first special symbol area 2 corresponds to 163c, and the first special symbol area 3 corresponds to 163d. , the first special symbol area 4 corresponds to 163e, the first special symbol area 5 corresponds to 163f, the first special symbol area 6 corresponds to 163g, and the first special symbol area 7 corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each area of 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display section 164 one to one. For example, the second special symbol area 0 corresponds to 164a, the second special symbol area 1 corresponds to 164b, the second special symbol area 2 corresponds to 164c, and the second special symbol area 3 corresponds to 164d. , the second special symbol area 4 corresponds to 164e, the second special symbol area 5 corresponds to 164f, the second special symbol area 6 corresponds to 164g, and the second special symbol area 7 corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (time saving win display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol The LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163, and the first special symbol area. The LED 163b corresponding to 1 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163 and the first special symbol area. 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, so that the first special symbol display part 163 is stopped and displayed. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the second special symbol LED 164b corresponding to area 1 and LED 164h corresponding to area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display portion 164, and the second special symbol area. 2 and the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the display mode of the LEDs (big hit display mode) led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201, of the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163, the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 and the first special symbol The LED 163e corresponding to the area 4 and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6 are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display part 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol area. 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display part 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol area. LED 163e corresponding to 4, LED 163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, the first special symbol display It decides to stop displaying the part 163 . When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display unit 164, and the second special symbol area. 4 and the LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the second special symbol area. 5 is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", the display mode of the LEDs (losing display mode) led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the first special symbol area 7 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163, LED is turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display portion 164, and lights the other LEDs. is turned off, and the second special symbol display portion 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol stop mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED to constitute, and controls the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 .

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display portion 163 and the display mode of the LED led to the second special symbol display portion 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable to transmit the control signals separately for the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 .

FIG. 12B is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The decorative pattern stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the decorative pattern stop mode (symbol combination) derived when the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 is stopped, according to the pattern designation command. be done. It should be noted that the "remarks" column shown in FIG.

Since the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display device 7 is controlled so that the display effect for the special symbol being displayed is performed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display effect in such a manner that it is possible to grasp whether the special symbol variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 are composed of 9 patterns, for example, 1 to 9, for the left pattern, and 10 patterns, for example, 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern, for the middle pattern. , and the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving design is a design stopped and displayed when the game state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special design lottery is a time-saving winning. By stop-displaying the medium pattern as the time-saving pattern, the player can grasp that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in the present embodiment, the odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, the symbols constituting the medium symbols may include a small win symbol. (symbols stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can know that a small win has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols. As such, for example, the left and right symbols are stopped at even-numbered symbols, and the middle symbols are stopped at time-saving symbols.

If the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (if the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301, as a mode of stopping the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol are odd numbers. The pattern is stopped, and the medium pattern is stopped by the time-saving pattern. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case of "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z7"), the number of set time reductions is large, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301, as a mode of stopping the decorative symbols, for example, left symbol, right symbol and middle symbol is stopped at a matching pattern of odd patterns (zorome).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 determines, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol as the mode of stopping the decorative symbols. is stopped at a matching pattern of even patterns (zorome). It should be noted that the symbol designation command "zA4" is, as can be seen from FIG. There is a case where the probability variation flag is not set to ON (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop when the even-numbered symbols are aligned (zorome). In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a probability variable flag is set to ON).

Also, as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the design designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, the design designation command is "zA3" or "zA8 ”, the expected value that the probability variation flag is set to ON after the end of the jackpot gaming state is small. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "Loss"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols at random. A loose stitch corresponds to, for example, a stop mode in which at least one of the left, right, and middle symbols is different from the other symbols.

In FIG. 12(B), the decorative pattern stop mode according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the design designation command is "zA1", the left design "2", the middle design "time saving", the right design "4") Although illustrated, the stop mode shown in the column of the decorative pattern stop mode in FIG. 12B is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state in accordance with the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state, so the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of times of time saving to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z8", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of times of time saving to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", since it is not controlled to the big win game state, the mode of the big win game state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, the time saving number of times to be set is the same and However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time reduction times to be set may be changed according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" as shown in FIG. In the case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, the high certainty game state is continued without controlling to the C time saving game state. can be

In addition, the main CPU 201 draws a lottery for "shorter working hours" when the variable probability flag is on, and even if the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly displayed on the special symbol display unit. 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the big hit judgment random value, that is, the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery result (special symbol hit judgment processing result) hit A determination process may be performed. In this case, when the probability variation flag is off, the time saving hit determination value data is assigned to the big hit determination random number value, and when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the width of the random number assigned to the time saving per judgment value data when the probability variation flag is off is instead of the time saving per judgment value data, the loss judgment value data, the big hit judgment value data, or the loss judgment value It is assigned to both the data and the big hit judgment value data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine that can be controlled to a high probability non-time-saving game state such that the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit" You may make it transfer to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. Further, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the variable probability number and the time saving number are both set to 10000 times. In these cases, the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, then controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, can control to the high-accuracy short-time game state. becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. Further, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the variable probability number and the time saving number are both set to 10000 times. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it can be controlled to the high-accuracy time-saving game state. Become.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 200 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the aspect of the big win gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 300 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is also the A time saving game state.

In addition, it is preferable that the time saving performance in the high probability time saving game state is the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 changes the mode of the big win game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), as described above, the mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 13.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Win/lose determination value data is determined based on the random number value (win/lose determination is performed), and win/lose (“time-saving hit”, “big hit” or “losing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. Based on the value data, the selected symbol command is determined, and the type of display mode derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164 (the type of time-saving hit or the type of big hit) is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5"), or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z1" and "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z2" and "z8"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit".

In addition, instead of the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state being higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. may be set higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. In this FIG. 14, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" and "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving gaming state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7") or 200 times ( If the selected pattern command is "z2", "z8"). Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

In this specification, similarly to the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

A time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in main RAM203 like a probability variation flag, and is a flag for managing whether time saving control is performed.

Moreover, the number of times of shortening of working hours is the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed by continuing the shortening of working hours control. That is, for example, when the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50", if variable display of special symbols is performed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time saving game state, this time saving game state is terminated and non-time saving game is played. It shifts to a state (for example, normal game state).

In addition, "10000" of the probability variable number of times and the time saving number shown in FIG. .

[1-4-6. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. The column of "remarks" in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience so that it is easy to understand. Time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, big hit system reach A, B, C is a reach effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is possible for both time-saving hits and big hits. In addition, FIG. 15 is a special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140. - 特許庁Determining fluctuation patterns. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 15 is a table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 of FIG. 28 described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win or lose), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value, or / And, although it is determined based on the random number value for effect selection or the like, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values or the like instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 120 is a specific random number. The sub CPU 301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect when a look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the variable probability flag is on.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead effect) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a look-ahead flag may be set (a look-ahead effect may be performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to whether the time saving flag is on regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, as the time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared. These time-saving game states will be described below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". is. That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for shifting to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, the condition that prevents the transition to the A time-saving gaming state is established instead of always moving to the A time-saving gaming state (for example, if the backup is cleared) etc.) does not shift to the A time-saving game state.

In addition, the end condition of the A time-saving game state is determined in response to the selected symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "A specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see column "Number of times of shortening of hours" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the starting point is when the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-certainty gaming state (for example, the normal game state and the low-certainty time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) is started. , the ceiling counter is updated (1 is added), and the time saving game state is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving gaming state may be when the variable display of special symbols when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "final ceiling fluctuation") is started, or when the ceiling final fluctuation is finished. Alternatively, it may be the time when the variable display of the special symbol following the final ceiling change is started. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the ceiling final variation is started and when the variable display of the next special symbol is started. In addition, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process in the final ceiling change is "losing", the display mode of losing is derived to the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but the transition to the B time saving game state is performed. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays to the player that the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state have been established (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). , a special effect by a character, or a effect of both of these) may be controlled to be displayed on the display device 7 . It should be noted that even if the condition to transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established, it does not necessarily shift to the B time-saving gaming state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established (for example, a special When the result of the pattern hit determination process is a big hit, etc.), the game state is not shifted to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and when the probability variation flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, unless the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is "big hit", the game is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In a pachinko game machine including a small win in the result of special symbol win determination processing, when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is "small win" when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the display mode of the small win. is led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164, the B time-saving game state may be started, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the end of the small winning game state. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 only display the display mode of the small win. , the above-described display effect for showing the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is not displayed. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may differ according to the setting value. In addition, when the result of the special symbol win determination processing when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "big win", the game is controlled to the big win game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, when the power is turned on, when the ceiling counter is controlled to the jackpot game state, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the backup clear switch 176 When another switch (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, in a game machine that can change the normal per symbol probability, when the high probability of the normal per symbol probability ends, etc. is reset when the condition is met. Then, when the update of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated each time the variable display of the special pattern is executed. For example, if the variable probability flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Note that the ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined unique to the pachinko game machine instead of being set each time.

If the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot game state is ended, the main CPU 201 controls the first variable display of the special symbol at the start or end. Update (+1) the ceiling counter. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but if it is a specification that performs a ST machine or a variable drop lottery, for example, the probability variable flag The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the is turned off. In addition, in the case of specifications that perform a variable drop lottery, the variable flag will be changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special design, so if you update the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special design, the special design If the variable probability flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine with specifications in which a variable probability drop lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect that suggests that the variable probability drop lottery has been won, and a high probability game It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing of starting the count by the ceiling counter, that is, the timing of transition to the B time saving game state based on the display effect etc. displayed on the display device 7, and it is interesting. It is possible to provide a game with When it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, a countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state or a fake countdown effect is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further enhance interest.

In addition, when the clearing process (backup clearing process) of the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is performed, the main CPU 201 starts variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the clearing process of the work area in the RAM 203. Update (+1) the ceiling counter at time or end.

Furthermore, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 causes the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated. update (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and a predetermined prescribed number of times (hereinafter It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied, out of the case where the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state, "When the variable display of the special symbols for the B time-saving specified number of times is executed", is the B time-saving specified number of times of the special design variable display (hereinafter "B time-saving final variation ”) may be started, or may be when the B time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the B time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this B time-saving final variation is completed.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". That is, the condition for transitioning to the C time saving gaming state is to win the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8" time saving hit), and the time saving per display mode is a special symbol. It is derived (determined display) on the display units 163 and 164 . It should be noted that even if the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established, instead of always shifting to the C time-saving gaming state, if the conditions that prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established (for example, the B time-saving gaming state and (details will be described later), and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), C time-saving game Do not transition to state. It should be noted that, when the condition to prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is established despite the fact that the condition for shifting to the C time-saving gaming state is established, the main CPU 201 does not cause the shift to the C time-saving gaming state. to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

In addition, the end condition of the C time-saving game state is determined in response to the selection symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see "Number of times of shortening" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied. The C time-saving specified number of times, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the time-saving number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time-saving final variation"). It may be when it is done, or it may be when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time-saving gaming state may be between when the C time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this C time-saving final variation is completed.

In addition, the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. In addition, the time saving performance of two time saving game states out of the A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state is the same, and the time saving performance of these two time saving game states and the other one time saving game state You may make it differ from time saving performance. Furthermore, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

In addition, in addition to the above, for the end condition of the A time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state, and the end condition of the C time saving game state, for example, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times Alternatively, the fact that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, the fact that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 146, and the like may be included. In addition, in a pachinko game machine including a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the fact that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times may be included in the termination condition. Furthermore, a time-saving falling lottery may be performed, and winning of the time-saving falling lottery may be included in the above termination conditions.

[1-4-8. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table that is referred to when determining "per normal symbol" or "losing" by lottery based on the random number value and (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in FIG. 43 described later). .

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value. In the normal symbol hit determination table, for each type of time saving, the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined as "normal symbol hit" and the normal symbol per determination value data corresponding to this The relationship and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol determined to be "losing" and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto are defined.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number is any one of 0 to 79 as a "normal symbol win". Then, the hit/lose determination value data is determined as "normal symbol hit determination value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal winning symbol", and sets the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state C, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". ” is decided.

Thus, in this embodiment, among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state (shown in FIG. 16 selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is also the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the type of time saving, the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol. "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be. The normal symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal even if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 99. , "fz0" is selected as a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, and select "fz2" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, select "fz5" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, select "fz8" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), the normal symbol per selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal per symbol type determination table selects an opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to a normal per symbol select symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 which is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 of FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined such that the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the normal winning symbol is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 2000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 2500 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2500 msec.

Further, when the selected symbol command at the time of the normal winning symbol is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 3000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz4" and "fz7", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, no wait time, no second release.

In addition, when the normal winning symbol selection command is "fz5" and "fz8", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second open time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal winning symbol selection command is "fz6" and "fz9", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, wait time 600 msec, second open time 2500 msec.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the non-time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric auditors 146 (see FIG. 4) is the non-time-saving game State, A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state in the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146, the most advantageous degree becomes a disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the normal electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is a non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the C time saving game state, the degree of advantage is the most advantageous mode.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol win" is the normal symbol hit determination in the C time saving game state. Although the degree of advantage is the same as that of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "normal pattern hit", the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 19 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (that is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). It is referred to when The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4), normal Determine the variation pattern of the design. The normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 300000 msec, regardless of whether the normal symbol effect selection random number is 0-99. The variable display time of normal symbols in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is one of 0 to 89, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. , the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and when the normal symbol effect selection random number is any of 80 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. be.

In addition, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. , the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and when the normal symbol effect selection random number is any of 80 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. be.

In this way, the variable display time of normal symbols per one variable display is A The expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state is the shortest. Therefore, the A time saving game state is the shortest time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released among the non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state.

Also, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time saving game state, but it is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Time saving number of times set at time saving hit]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol win determination process is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time saving times set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode for the time-saving win to the special symbol display unit, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving game state, and continues to control to the high-accuracy game state. By the way, for example, like a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, there is known a game machine that turns off a probability variation flag from ON when variable display of special symbols is executed over a specified number of times. In such a ST machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol performed in the final game as a high probability game state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability variation flag. When the processing for deriving the mode is performed later, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode for the time-saving win.

[1-5-2. Overlap of time-saving game state]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state overlap. When the time saving game state overlaps in this way, the time saving game state may be overlapped and executed, or the time saving game state may not be overlapped (that is, the "time saving win" may be ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the condition for ending the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game state overlaps, a mode in which the time-saving game state is overlapped and a mode in which the time-saving game state is not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. Aspect of executing the time-saving game state repeatedly]
As a mode of overlapping and executing the time saving game state when the time saving game state overlaps, the time saving win is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C. Sometimes, there is a mode in which the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and a mode in which the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state and C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 displays the time saving hit in the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Derive the display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state, and adopts as the number of times of time-savings the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed before the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, in the A time-saving gaming state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the remaining number of time-savings in the A time-saving gaming state is greater than the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 is the A time-saving game. While maintaining the time-saving performance in the game state, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state is exhausted unless a ``big hit'' is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 200 times, "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of the time, although the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, the time saving number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win the "time saving hit" in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state, the appearance of the time saving number and time saving performance is "time saving It is the same as the case where the A time-saving game state is continued without winning the "hit".

On the other hand, for example, in the A time-saving gaming state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving winning" is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 While maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state, the game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the number of times of time-saving set based on the 'time-saving win' is completed unless a 'big win' is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 20 times, "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of times, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of times of the time saving game state A, after that, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, special symbols over 30 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

[1-5-2-1-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but the following description includes the case where the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win. .

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the remaining number of time saving times in the C time saving game state is larger than the B time saving specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. , Unless a "jackpot" is derived, control to the time-saving game state is performed until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 300 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and when the B time saving prescribed number of times is 200 times, the C time saving game state While maintaining the time saving performance of , the number of times of time saving from here is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving game state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the B time-saving specified number of times is greater than the time-saving remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. At the same time, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is completed. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed in the B time saving game state is 300 times. In the case, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 300 times unless a “jackpot” is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special design is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, after that, while maintaining the time reduction performance of the C time reduction game state, the special design over 280 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

When the variable display of the special symbols ends in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 . That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", a small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the losing display mode is derived. . When the small-hit display mode is derived, the game is controlled to the small-hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag turned on even during the small-hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final fluctuation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final fluctuation, the conditions for transition to the B time saving game state and the transition conditions to the C time saving game state are A case where it is established will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol win determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and when the result of the special symbol win determination process is Different control can be executed in the case where the control of the B time-saving gaming state is started after being led to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 .

First, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. It is already controlled to the B time-saving game state at the time of being done. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless a “jackpot” is derived, the larger one of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the time saving number of times in the C time saving game state is consumed. Control to the time-saving game state.

Next, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At the time when it is done, it is not yet controlled to the B time saving game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, and the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, derivation of the display mode of the big win, derivation of the display mode of the small win or a specific small win, etc.) are established. Unless otherwise, control is made to the time saving game state until the larger number of times of time saving of the prescribed number of times of B time saving and the number of times of time saving of C time saving game state is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time saving game state in which the time saving performance is maintained or executed are established, the time saving game state may be terminated.

In addition, when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied in the ceiling final fluctuation, the sub CPU 301 performs B time reduction performed only when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied. A special display effect different from the transition display effect and the C time saving transition display effect performed when only the condition for transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied may be performed. Alternatively, for example, when the time saving performance of the B time saving game state is maintained, the B time saving transition display effect is performed, and when the time saving performance of the C time saving game state is maintained, the C time saving transition display effect is performed. It is good also as giving priority to one display production|presentation among B time-saving transition display effects, and C time-saving transition display effects, such as performing.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the ceiling final change is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state, B time saving game To control to a jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time saving performance when executing multiple time saving game states repeatedly]
In the above, the aspect which overlaps and performs C time saving game state on one time saving game state, and the aspect which overlaps and performs B time saving game state on C time saving game state were demonstrated.

In the case of the specification that allows execution of a plurality of time-saving game states in this manner, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state previously executed is maintained. In a pachinko machine with such specifications, the time-saving performances of the multiple time-saving game states that can be overlapped may be different, but the time-saving performances of the multiple time-saving game states that can be overlapped may be the same. preferable.

For example, in the case of a specification that allows the C time-saving game state to be superimposed on one time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state the same. Further, when the specification is such that the B time-saving game state can be superimposed on the C time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state the same.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later in addition to the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first is, for example, the time-saving gaming state that is executed first. One time saving performance same as the time saving gaming state and another time saving performance different from this one time saving performance may be provided. Then, when the time-saving game state is executed in addition to the time-saving game state that is being executed first, one time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If it is not executed repeatedly, other time-saving performances may be activated.

For example, if it is a pachinko game machine with specifications that can be executed by overlapping the B time-saving game state with the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the same as the C time-saving game state, and this one time-saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances with other time-saving performances different from the performance are provided. Then, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not in any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Aspect in which the time-saving game state is not repeatedly executed]
As a mode that does not run the time saving game state repeatedly, there is a mode in which the winning determination process is performed so that the "time saving win" is not included in the lottery target in the time saving game state, and a "time saving win" is included in the lottery target in the time saving game state. A mode (hereinafter referred to as "the latter mode") in which the time-saving game state is not performed repeatedly even if the time-saving game state overlaps is conceivable. As the latter mode, even if winning is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, this is ignored and the time saving game state is repeated. Two modes are conceivable, ie, a non-execution mode and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, this is ignored and the B time saving game state is not repeated. The above two aspects considered as the latter aspect will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode that does not overlap the C time-saving game state with one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display units 163 and 164 as described above. , derives the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time-saving gaming state based on the “time-saving hit” unless the last special symbol is variablely displayed in one time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving final variation”). The game is controlled to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is consumed. In this case, being controlled to one time saving game state (excluding the time saving final variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when "time saving hit" is won in the time saving final variation in one time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the one time saving gaming state is displayed before the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Different control can be executed in the case of ending and in the case of ending one time-saving gaming state when the display mode for time-saving per is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. - 特許庁

First, when one time-saving gaming state ends before the time-saving winning display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 derives the time-saving winning display mode, and then enters the C time-saving gaming state. Start controlling.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the time-saving per display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, that is, the derivation of the time-saving per display mode and the end of one time-saving gaming state When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode for time saving is performed prior to the end process of one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls one time saving game state without controlling to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode for the time saving game prior to the ending process of the time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode of the time saving per is performed after the end process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls to the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance of the one time saving game state, but sets the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the one time-saving gaming state without controlling to the C time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the one time-saving gaming state is unprocessed at the time when the display mode for the time-saving winning is derived, If the end processing of one time-saving game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is not superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

In the C time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination processing in the final ceiling change is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "losing", the main CPU 201 completes the time saving remaining number of times in the C time saving game state. Control to the C time saving game state until it is done.

However, when the remaining time saving count in the C time saving game state is 0 in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the B time saving game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed prior to the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and controls to the B time saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed after the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state without controlling to the B time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the C time-saving gaming state is not processed at the time when the B time-saving gaming state is to be started, and the C time-saving gaming state is terminated. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving game state after the start processing of the B time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the B time saving game state.

In the final ceiling change, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C short game state and starts control of the big win game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. FIG. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power failure signal is at High level (S11). It goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table, although not shown, prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at High level (NO in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power failure signal is at the High level (when S11 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S12.

At S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the ON/OFF state of the backup clear switch 176 and the ON/OFF state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the ON/OFF states of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are stored in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the activation wait of the sub-control circuit 300 side is performed. The startup waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation of the sub-control circuit 300, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, interrupt request signal check processing, WDT output processing when an interrupt request signal is generated, and initialization of various sensors at a predetermined timing. Output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S<b>14 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before activation (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203, it is determined whether the power interruption is normal or abnormal.

If it is determined in S14 that the power was not cut normally (NO in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (if S14 determines YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15). Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the collation result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, that it is normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (if determined as YES in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

At S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination is NO, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off and either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is turned off. If one of them is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO determination in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. Note that the processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170 . As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up to display an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are determined to be on, the first pachinko gaming machine is not allowed to play a game.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S<b>21 , the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . This processing is performed at the time of abnormal start-up, and stores again the value indicating that the setting has been changed. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

In S<b>22 , the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, based on the value of the activation control flag stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203, the current activation state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a clearing process (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.) of a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is performed. It should be noted that this processing is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S<b>25 , the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. In this process, an initial setting process is performed according to the current activation state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clearing). Note that the details of the startup initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 . After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power-off processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. Details of the power-off process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 .

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial random number. In this process, the initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, a special symbol jackpot determination random number counter, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (when S29 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26, and performs the processes after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 saves the register. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S<b>32 , the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Also, this processing is performed using an area (outside area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

At S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has passed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (eg, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO determination in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, within the main control main process, before the execution of various processes (for example, processing of S37 ~ S44) relating to the game control described later, for example, 6 msec interruption prohibited section (processing section of S26 ~ S35) is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system period), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (eg, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system periodic management timer area within the working area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

At S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. The details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

At S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. The details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, the setting process of the display data output to each display part (for example, 1st special design display part 163, 2nd special design display part 164 etc.) of the LED unit 160 is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

At S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, processing of setting the output data, processing of generating the test firing test signal, and the like are performed. Note that the process of generating the test-firing test signal is performed using an area (outside area) separate from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs state monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), transmission of a firing position command is reserved. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26, and performs the processes after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed at S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S<b>52 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating power failure recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating recovery from power interruption (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, it is a value indicating RAM clear (NO determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag indicates the setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation command transmission reservation process. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

At S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the first normal game preprocessing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power interruption process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is ON (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not ON (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 terminates the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S<b>63 , the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203 . In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access inhibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a demonstration display command. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S72), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S72 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO determination in S73), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S73 determines YES), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S75. Move.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S74 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S74), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S74 determines YES), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S75. Move.

At S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 140 .

[1-6-5. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0", the special symbol management process is the second special symbol to be processed when the process of S73 (see FIG. 26) is YES, and the process of S74 (see FIG. 26). ) is a YES determination, the first special symbol is to be processed. Further, when the control state number is not "0", the special symbol management process is performed on the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (when S81 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

At S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S83 based on the control state number read out in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S83 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S84 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S85.

At S85, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S85 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S86.

At S86, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This process of S86 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S87.

At S87, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S87 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot ending process. This process of S88 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S91), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol variable display start process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S91 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is a time saving hit, and sets the big win flag to ON when the special symbol win determination processing result is a big win. do. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but if the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, the special symbol win When the result of the judgment processing is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94. The time saving flag is turned off when shifting to the C time saving game state, and the big win flag is turned off when the big win game state is started. If the pachinko game machine includes a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process for determining whether or not the hit is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the process is not a big hit, a process for determining whether or not the time saving hit is performed, If it is determined in this process that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined to be a loss.

At S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the above-described "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referenced, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of winning types, a plurality of losing types may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but the result of the special symbol win determination process may include a small win, and a plurality of types of such small wins may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value Or/and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection and the like. It should be noted that the variation pattern table to be referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different according to the game state or the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

At S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 27 S84) is performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S99.

At S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited interval, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S100), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S101)) during the interrupt prohibited interval. preferably in-house.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S111), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 27). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when S111 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

At S112, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S113.

At S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S114.

At S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S121), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol game determination process and performs the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S121 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S122, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the big win (when S122 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S122 that the special symbol is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO in S122), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124. Signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 131 (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S127), game state designation parameter setting processing (S128), and transmission reservation processing (S129) of a big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S127) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 27 S86) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

At S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

At S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

At S133, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S134). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management process]
Next, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S131 during the special symbol game ending processing (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. The details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, referring to FIG. 33, counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 at S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S151). The details of this time saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 . After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a process when a plurality of time saving game states are superimposed and executed when a plurality of time saving game states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. In addition, when shifting to the high certainty gaming state, the probability variation flag is set to ON.

The time saving counter indicates the number of time saving times executed in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state.

When the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state, B time saving game state or/and C time saving game state is satisfied, a time saving counter for the time saving game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, the time saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time saving game state is terminated when the time saving counter reaches 0, but this is not the only method. Instead, an addition system may be adopted in which the time saving counter is added when the variable display of special symbols is completed, and the time saving game state is ended when the time saving counter reaches the set time saving number. In addition, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special design ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special design, and when the time-saving counter becomes 0 ( The time saving game state may be ended when the time saving counter is set (in the case of the subtraction method) or the number of time saving counters is set (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, if it is determined that both the time saving flag ON and that the time saving counter is greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S161), the main CPU 201 terminates the time saving counter update process and continues the process. Return to the update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S<b>163 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S164.

In addition, the C time saving counter is a counter which is set when the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied during the time saving game state. Although not shown in the flow chart, the C time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time reduction counter, which will be described later, is set.

Time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are superimposed and executed. In the present embodiment, the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the previously executed time saving game state, "time saving mode=3" is set. Further, when the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the time-saving game state that is being executed first, the "time-saving mode=2" is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S163 that both of the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S163), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C short working hours counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S165.

In S<b>165 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S166.

In addition, the B time saving counter is a counter that is set when the transition condition to the B time saving game state is established during the time saving game state (in the present embodiment, during the C time saving game state). Although not shown in the flowchart, the B time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time saving counter is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S165 that both of the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S165), the main CPU 201 terminates the time saving counter update process. , the process returns to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In addition, although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S164, or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S166, the main CPU 201 Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are overlapped and executed, not only two time-saving game states are overlapped, but three or more time-saving game states may be overlapped and executed. In this case, since the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time saving game states overlap is the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S152 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the variable probability flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The ceiling counter value is stored in the main RAM 203 .

In addition, the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko game machine as a transition condition to the B time-saving game state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when the dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. You may make it process.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if the determination in S171 is NO), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is OFF (determined as YES in S171), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

At S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 36, counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S181). The details of this time saving shift determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 . After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

In S<b>182 , the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. The details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 . After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S<b>183 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than one.

When it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S183), that is, when the time saving counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

In addition, when it is determined that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 in S183 (S183 is YES determination), both the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some trouble may occur in executing the processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time reduction counter or the time reduction counter is 1 or more despite the determination being YES in S183 , an abnormality warning may be output, or other abnormality processing may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormal time process, when S183 is determined as YES, not only turn off the time saving flag (see S184), but also reset the B time saving counter and C time saving counter. You may make it match|compatibility with a counter, a B time saving counter, and a C time saving counter.

At S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S186) of the time saving transition command. In addition, the time-saving transition command transmitted in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time reduction shift determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time reduction transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S181 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S191).

In S191, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S191), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process, and the process is changed to the counter determination process (Fig. 36). That is, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the variable probability flag is off (when S191 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter is the ceiling value.

When it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (when S192 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

At S195, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time reduction transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S182 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S202).

In S202, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (if the determination in S202 is NO), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition processing, and shifts the processing to the counter determination processing (FIG. 36 reference). By doing so, when the probability variation flag is ON, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S202 that the variable probability flag is off (YES in S202), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not ON (NO in S203), that is, if the ceiling flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is ON (determination of YES in S203), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, setting the time reduction mode to 2, time reduction performance and the like are determined. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

In addition, the number of times of time saving set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON.

In S206, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO determination in S206), that is, if the time saving hitting flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and performs the counter determination process ( 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S206 that the time saving hit flag is ON (S206 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the C time saving counter, setting the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance and the like are determined. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

In addition, the number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to a hit type determination table (see, for example, FIG. 13). Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. The details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting processing]
Next, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 . FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 at S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is ON (when S211 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S212.

If S211 is YES determination, the probability variation flag is off, for example, when the B time-saving gaming state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving gaming state is being executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value case), or when the C time-saving game state is executed in a state where the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first (when winning the “time-saving hit”) is equivalent. do.

In addition, although not shown, when the B time-saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time-saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2" and determines in S205. B Set the time saving counter. In addition, when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first, and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode=3". Along with this, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is not ON (S211 determines NO), that is, when the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-savings (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and compares the current time-saving counter. It is determined whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of times of time saving.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of times of time-saving (if the determination in S212 is NO), that is, if the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time-savings, the main CPU 201 will The setting process is ended, and the process is returned to the time saving shift process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S212 that the current time saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time saving (when S212 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where it is, the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter (that is, the number of remaining time-savings) and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In addition, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, or the state where the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first , the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the previously executed time saving game state. That is, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed earlier is changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, or the time-saving game corresponding to the larger one of the current time-saving counter and the new time-saving number of times It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

The time-saving performance, as described above, is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), , the variable display time of normal symbols, and/or the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.) of normal electric accessories 146, and the like.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter, it is possible to manage that the two time-saving game states are being overlapped internally. Then, in the time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter and the new number of times of time-savings is reset as a new time-savings counter. However, even if the two time-saving gaming states are executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears superficially (that the player can grasp) is the two time-saving gaming states that are internally overlapped. Among them, it is only the time saving performance for any one time saving game state. Therefore, without managing that the two time-saving game states are run in piles internally (that is, without providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter), when multiple time-saving game states are run repeatedly , You may make it reset as a new time-saving counter the number of times of time-savings which is larger among the value of the present time-saving counter and the number of times of new time-savings.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is, if S211 is NO determination, that is, if it is executed by shifting from the non-time-saving gaming state to the B time-saving gaming state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or from the non-time-saving gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state It is a process that is performed when it is moved to and executed (when it is elected to "time saving"). In this process, the time saving frequency and time saving performance determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) or the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

Thus, in the above-described time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine that includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process, the first in the final ceiling fluctuation The result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs the process of shifting to the B time-saving game state based on the end of the small win game state. do it.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change ends. However, it is not limited to this, and based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, the transition processing to the B time saving game state may be performed. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, B time saving game It is preferable to perform state transition processing. This is because, when the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is completed, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made, during the variable display of one of the special patterns as the final ceiling change, the other special pattern is variable. This is because, when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbols cannot receive the benefits of the B time-saving game state, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, variable display of special symbols is not performed with a long variation such as 600000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine capable of variable display of special symbols with such a long variation, transition processing to the B time-saving game state is performed based on the start of variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling variation. As a result, delay in starting the B time-saving game state can be avoided even when variable display of the special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is performed in a long variation.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is changed to the C time saving game state. (See S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), but it is not limited to this. For example, the C time reduction control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time reduction game state is prioritized over the B time reduction control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state. You can also use

Further, in the ceiling counter updating process described above with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35), the ceiling counter is not updated. can't For example, in a ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability drop lottery, even if the variable probability flag is ON, the ceiling counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state is not performed, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state may be made. . In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time-saving gaming state only when "ceiling counter=ceiling value", but shifts to the B time-saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value. processing will be performed.

In addition, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (if the set value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

In addition, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the B time saving gaming state, is up to a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by a specified number (for example, the denominator of the jackpot probability of 3. up to 8 times). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), both the prescribed number of B time reduction and the prescribed number of C time reduction are approximately 1212 (319 × 3.8) is preferably set as the upper limit. In addition, it is not essential to set the upper limit of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the upper limit of the C time saving prescribed number of times to the same value.

By the way, as in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above , Time saving per probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number (eg, 3.0) regardless of the set value. In this case, the ceiling value will differ according to the set value, and there is a risk that the set value will be seen through by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of which set value is set, the ceiling value is determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modified example related to time saving management processing]
In addition, in the above-described time-saving management process (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of the present embodiment") explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is (see FIG. 31). Further, the processing related to the transition to the B time saving game state is given priority over the processing related to the transition to the C time saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are provided separately, and when the ceiling flag is on, it is shifted to the B time-saving game state, When the time saving hit flag is ON, it is made to shift to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state It is not restricted to the above about whether it makes a shift flag separate or it is made common, but can perform time saving management processing by various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

Also, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of stopping the fluctuation, and after confirming that the "time saving hit" is not elected when reaching the ceiling, it is shifted to the B time saving game state. good.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

Furthermore, when a plurality of time-saving game states are not executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0; should not be subtracted.

[1-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S86 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S251), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S251 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

At S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. A count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S253 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254. On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

At S254, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S254) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (Fig. 27 S88) is performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

At S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

At S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 131, the number of prize balls when winning the large winning opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

At S259, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the process of generating the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 131 is performed. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S260.

At S260, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S260) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

At S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

At S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S271 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

At S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 131 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) for counting the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 131 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S272), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S273.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number (when S272 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

At S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40) has passed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has not elapsed (NO determination in S273), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process ( 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed (when S273 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

At S<b>274 , the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

At S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S275) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

At S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S281), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot ending process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S281 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

At S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning mouth winning counter, etc.) Set the value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S283.

At S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 43 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. For convenience, each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S291).

When it is determined in S291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 terminates the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is 0 (when S291 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292.

At S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S293 based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

At S293, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process, and the normal symbol hit determination process. 146 opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) setting processing is performed. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending variable display of normal symbols. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S295.

At S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal design game determination process, the determination process of the normal design derivation result (for example, normal design hit or loss) is performed. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S296.

At S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This process of S296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), the normal symbol hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 99, for example, 0 to 79. It is normally used as per design judgment value data (in the case of non-time-saving game state). Since the normal symbol winning probability is determined by the number of normal symbol winning determination value data with respect to the total random number of the winning judgment random numbers of the normal symbols, for example, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability per normal symbol is different between when the time reduction control is executed and when the time reduction control is not executed, but it may be the same or substantially the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600000 msec in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not executed. Only runs for a short time. Thus, when the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessary product opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 44, external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of main CPU 201 will be described. This processing is interrupt processing that is performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when power is cut off. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

At S<b>302 , the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205 . For the predetermined input ports mentioned above, for example, the states of power interruption detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. are set. is an input port that After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S<b>303 , the main CPU 201 determines whether power failure is detected.

If it is determined in S303 that the power failure has not been detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that power failure has been detected (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area within the work area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 terminates the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 45, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, the power failure is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, the power failure is not detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 reads the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

At S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permitted state based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start-up control flag is a flag for determining which of power-off recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like, the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined to be in the game permitted state, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined not to be in the game permitted state.

The activation control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, power failure recovery is performed. If both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed. If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (when S315 determines NO), the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of, for example, 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. Details of the setting control process in S316 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the shooting of game balls from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6), sets a specific switch (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). etc.), it is preferable to set the disabling of various switches, prohibition of payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (when S315 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec) management, and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area within the work area of the main RAM 203 .

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot judgment random number counters, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S322.

At S322, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S311, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed at S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

When it is determined in S331 that the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (when S331 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting change processing (S332). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates confirmation of setting.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the setting confirmation (when S333 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO determination in S333), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, the currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S336.

At S336, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, the command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 25) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S336, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, referring to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 .

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (NO in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S<b>342 , the main CPU 201 performs update processing within the set value range. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. You may enable it to change a setting value by operating.

At S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, as described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed at S334 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the above-described setting change process (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO determination in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (when S351 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing (S352). The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, as described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also carried out as the initial setting processing when the RAM is cleared in the initial setting processing at startup (see FIG. 24) when none of the recovery from power failure, setting change and setting confirmation is performed. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, the area in the main RAM 203 in which backup data is stored when the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as "backup area") is cleared (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area in which data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Also, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203 . That is, the data backed up when the power is cut off is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, and the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs initialization command transmission reservation processing. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When the first normal game pre-processing is finished, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed at S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area within the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the constructed work area within the main RAM 203 . The above data are, for example, game state information, ON/OFF states of special symbol and normal symbol hit flags, pending number information, and other various information necessary for the progress of the game. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is entered. After executing the RAM setting process (S371) at power failure recovery, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable probability flag is ON. This processing is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S372), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is ON (when S372 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability variation notification flag to ON. This is done in order to notify the state of the variable probability flag at the time of power failure recovery. When the probability variation notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability variation notification LED (not shown) to be lit. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the variable probability flag is on when power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201 . The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes starting opening winning detection processing (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S382). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the special winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set when a prize is won in the special winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passing detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, based on the fact that the passage gate switch 127 has detected that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126, various random numbers for normal symbols (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted. . It should be noted that the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers (normal symbol hit determination random numbers, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126, and reserves the normal symbol until the conditions for starting the normal symbol are satisfied. It has a starting memory area (1) to a normal symbol starting memory area (4). Then, in the ball passing detection process, it is extracted based on whether or not there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is also determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting entrance winning detection process]
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201 . The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 121 (NO determination in S391), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the first starting port switch 121 (YES in S391), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the first special symbol symbol random number, the first special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the first special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning to the first start port 120 is less than four, for example. The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 until the starting condition is satisfied. It has an area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, if it is the upper limit of 4 (NO determination in S393), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (YES in S393), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S394.

At S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

At S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 203 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch determination processing. This process is a process of determining a variation pattern of special symbols, performing a hit determination process, etc., using the random number value extracted in S392 prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28). It also determines whether or not the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the time when the random number value is extracted in S392 and the time when the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. Considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect before and after the process of S395, for example, it is preferable to perform the process before and after. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

At S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information to increase the reserved number of the first special symbol by 1, the variation pattern information of the first special symbol (that is, the variation pattern command of the special symbol), etc. In this process, The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

At S<b>398 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 has detected a game ball.

When it is determined that the game ball has not been detected by the second starting opening switch 141 (NO determination in S398), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process, and switches the process to the switch input detection process (FIG. 51). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the second starting port switch 141 (when S398 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the second special symbol jackpot determination random number, the second special symbol symbol random number, the second special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the second special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning to the second starting port 140 is less than four, for example.

In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the starting condition is satisfied. It has a symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). . In addition to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to second special symbol start storage area (4), the main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, if the upper limit is 4 (NO determination in S400), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and switches the process to the switch input detection process ( 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4 (YES in S400), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of second special symbols. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

At S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the second special symbol (S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command including information to increase the number of reserved second special symbols by 1, variation pattern information of the second special symbol, etc., and the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 terminates the start opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

Note that the initialization process (S501) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) The manner of sound production and the like are determined.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the content of the effect, and based on the generated animation request, generates various requests (for example, a drawing request) for operating various effect devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, and character requests). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the role product request to the role product control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of effect mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs effect mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200. FIG.

Sub CPU301, as one of the various processes performed in the production mode determination process, for example, the production pattern of the sub-variation production corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as "the relevant fluctuation") (hereinafter "sub-variation A sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern"), a prefetch effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern of the prefetch effect (hereinafter referred to as a "prefetch effect pattern"), etc. are performed. In addition, in the effect mode determination process, the effect mode is determined, for example, a countdown effect that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, or a B time-saving game state transition effect that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. Processing, etc., is also performed for determination processing of various effects related to the progress of the game.

The sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation production pattern is a production pattern that is performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbols (for example, a variation pattern of decorative symbols or a character production patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation production, depending on the sub-variation production pattern to be executed, with the passage of time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol, the expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol It is possible to indicate that the degree is maintained or increased.

The sub-fluctuation effect patterns include, for example, time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, big hit system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 to be described later. is included. As described above, the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C is a reach indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a big hit) It is a performance. The jackpot type reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

In addition, for example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect indicating the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the ready-to-win effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 preferentially executes one of the effects. good.

The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a special symbol variation pattern determined as a result of the look-ahead determination process. The look-ahead effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process. is provided for the hit determination processing of the special symbols (until the variable display of the special symbols is started), it is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301.

In the look-ahead effect, according to the look-ahead effect pattern to be executed, when in the pending state, with the passage of time (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the previously held start information), the look-ahead judgment It is possible to indicate that the degree of expectation for the outcome of the processing is maintained or increased.

The look-ahead effect is performed using a pending image displayed on the display device 7, for example. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status.

The look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead determination process, that is, a result type of the special symbol hit determination process (whether it is a time-saving hit or a big hit). A look-ahead expected value production pattern capable of suggesting an expected value for the result of the win determination process being a win (big win or short-time win) is included. That is, in the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process and the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process to be a hit. is. Also, in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. See) is performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-fluctuation effect pattern decision processing]
First, the sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table (detailed description is omitted) in the game state (normal game state) in which the time saving flag is off. This sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the gaming state (high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probable short-time gaming state) in which the time-saving flag is on, but the description is omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation production pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, displays as a variation production pattern corresponding to the variation. A sub-variation effect pattern (illustrated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-fluctuation production pattern includes time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, jackpot system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E. there is

The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C are reach performances indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving winning as described above, and are ready-to-reach performances in which the possibility of time-saving winning can be grasped from the appearance. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Fig. 15). reference). This time-saving hit type reach A is not a prefetch target sub-variation production pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a pre-read sub-variation production pattern. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C are the same or substantially the same in appearance appearance. However, the time saving system reach B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern for prefetching, while the time saving per system reach C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern for prefetching ("prefetching flag" column in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and See FIG. 55 below).

The big hit system reach A, B, and C are the reach effects indicating the possibility of the big win as described above, and are the reach effects that allow the player to grasp the possibility of the big win from the appearance. The big hit system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a "time-saving hit", but is a big hit determination reach production that is displayed only when it is a "big hit" (Fig. 15). reference). This big hit type ready-to-win A is not a prefetch target sub-fluctuation effect pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a prefetch-type sub-fluctuation effect pattern. The big-hit reach B and the big-hit reach C have the same or substantially the same performance mode in appearance. However, the big-hit ready-to-win B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead, while the big-hit ready-to-win C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead (refer to the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15).

The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach performances indicating that there is a possibility of either a big hit or a short time hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a short time hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode that it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility. The common reach A is a win (big hit, short time hit) fixed reach production which is not displayed when the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is a loss, and is displayed only when it is a big hit or a "short time hit". (See FIG. 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance mode. Further, the common reach D is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C. Furthermore, the common reach E is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the big hit system reach C. In addition, common reach A and common reach B are not prefetch target sub-variation effect patterns, while common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are pre-read target sub-variation effect patterns ("Prefetch in FIG. 15 flags column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub-variation effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub fluctuation effect pattern.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process and a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process, which are performed as the look-ahead effect pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, in the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6), the first special symbol start storage area (0) provided in the main RAM 203, the first special symbol start storage area (1), the first special symbol start storage area (2) , the first special symbol start storage area (3), and the first special symbol start storage area (4) as areas corresponding to the first sub reservation area (0), the first sub reservation area (1), the first There is provided one sub-reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3) and a first sub-reservation area (4). In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), various items related to the extracted random value Hold information is stored. In addition, information corresponding to the variation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command for the first starting opening winning, it stores the received information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. As areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second sub-reserving area (0), the second sub-reserving area (1), the second sub-reserving area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3) and a second sub-reservation area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, but is not limited to this, and in other game states (for example, high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) It may be performed, or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 . In the display area of the display device 7, the 0th area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0), the first reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (1), the first A second reservation area corresponding to the sub reservation area (2), a third reservation area corresponding to the first sub reservation area (3), and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub reservation area (4) are provided. there is

[1-9-2-1. Table referred to in look-ahead per type effect pattern determination processing]
A table referred to in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process will be described.

By the way, in the form of the pending image in which the prefetch effect is executed in the determined prefetch hit type effect pattern, there is a time saving prefetch effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time saving hit and a possibility of a big hit. A big hit system look-ahead effect form shown and a common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility for both a time saving hit and a big hit are included.

The read-ahead winning type production pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win-type read-ahead production form to a time-saving winning-type read-ahead production form, or changes from a common winning-type look-ahead production form to a big win-type look-ahead production form. Thus, it is an effect pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value with respect to the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

FIG. 55 is an example of a read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table. In FIG. 55, only the fluctuation patterns to be read ahead among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 54 are shown. Also, FIG. 56 is an example of a per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in the look-ahead hit type production pattern determination table number determination table in FIG. , based on the variation pattern and the pending number. The pending number here includes start information to be prefetched. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting port 120 is withheld, the number of reservations after the reservation corresponds to the number of reservations shown in FIG.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the variation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56 to determine the look-ahead hit type effect pattern. More specifically, as shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "prefetching winning type effect pattern determination table number" is indicated as "SASPT number", and the "prefetching winning type effect pattern" is indicated as "SAS effect pattern". The sub effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command for a special symbol is received.

For example, when the read-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "55", the read-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "07H". Further, for example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "77", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (corresponding to reservation) in FIG. 56 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a time-saving hit system look-ahead performance form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a time-saving hit. When the pending image is displayed in the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of the time-saving hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a big hit type look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit. When the pending image is displayed in the big-hit look-ahead presentation mode, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of a big-hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a common winning type look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is possible for both the time saving winning and the big winning. When the reserved image is displayed in the common winning type look-ahead presentation mode, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether there is a possibility of a time-saving win or a big win.

For example, if the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form "C" is displayed in the third reservation area, and even in the second reservation area after shifting from the third reservation area A common hit type look-ahead effect form "C" is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the common winning system prefetching production form 'C' changes to the time saving prefetching production form 'A', and in the first reservation area, the time saving prefetching production form "A" is displayed.

Further, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form "C" is displayed in the third reservation area. Then, when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area, the common hit system look-ahead production form "C" changes to the big hit system look-ahead production form "B", and is shifted from the second reservation area and the second reservation area. In the first reservation area after the game, a big-hit look-ahead effect form "B" is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes the following patterns a) to e). In addition, in this embodiment, a pattern that changes from the big hit system prefetch production form "B" to the time saving system prefetch production form "A", and the time saving system prefetch production form "A" to the large and short hit prefetch production form "B" , is not included in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, but these patterns may be included in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern.
B) At the time of suspension, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed, and after that, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed without changing the production form. "09H").
b) A pre-reading big hit effect pattern (for example, a pre-reading hit type effect pattern "17H") in which the big hit type prefetch effect form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big win type prefetch effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. ).
c) A common winning type look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and then a look-ahead common winning performance pattern A (for example, a look-ahead winning type look-ahead performance pattern "24H") that changes to a time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form.
d) A read-ahead common win effect pattern B (for example, a look-ahead win type effect pattern "12H") that is displayed in a common win-type look-ahead effect form at the time of suspension and then changes to a big win-type look-ahead effect form.
E) A look-ahead common win effect pattern C (for example, a look-ahead common win effect pattern C in which the common win-type look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the common win-type look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter (for example, a look-ahead win type look-ahead effect pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55), and based on the variation pattern and the number of reservations, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number ). Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and based on the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the sub effect selection random number value 1, A look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the time-saving hit system look-ahead performance form "A" is displayed at the time of suspension, and then the look-ahead hit type look-ahead performance pattern that changes to the big hit system look-ahead performance form "B" is not shown. In this way, the sub CPU 301 may determine the look-ahead hit type effect pattern that changes from the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form "A" to the big hit type look-ahead effect form "B". By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

Also, in FIG. 56, the big-hit look-ahead effect form "B" is, as described above, a big-hit look-ahead effect indicating that there is a possibility that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit (that is, there is a possibility of losing). In addition to this, it is also possible to display a big hit determination look-ahead performance mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit determination. In this case, the look-ahead winning type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the following look-ahead type effect patterns f) to h).
f) A look-ahead big-win determination performance pattern A in which the big-win determination look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big-hit determination look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter.
g) At the time of suspension, other prefetch production forms (for example, time saving prefetch production form 'A', big hit prefetch production form 'B', common hit prefetch production form 'C', etc.) are displayed, and then , a look-ahead big-hit determination performance pattern B that changes to a big-hit determination look-ahead performance form.
H) At the time of suspension, another look-ahead effect form (for example, time-saving win-type look-ahead effect form 'A', common win-type look-ahead effect form 'C', etc.) is displayed, and then a big win-type look-ahead effect form 'B'. is displayed, and furthermore, a look-ahead big-hit confirmation performance pattern C that changes to a big-hit determination look-ahead performance form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, of the time saving per system prefetch performance form "A" and the big hit system prefetch performance form "B" and the common per system prefetch performance form "C", at the time of suspension, the common per system prefetch performance form Although "C" has the highest display frequency, it is not limited to this. For example, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form 'A' may be the highest, and at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the big-hit look-ahead performance form 'B' may be the highest. You may do so. Furthermore, the display frequency of the common win-based look-ahead effect form "C" may be the lowest at the time of suspension.

Also, in FIG. 56, a random number 1 for sub-effect selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all "prefetched per-type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)", but this is not restrictive, and specific SASPT numbers are assigned. No sub effect selection random number value is assigned only to (that is, the distribution rate of a specific SASPT number is set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Table referenced in look-ahead expected value production pattern determination process]
Next, the table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of winning) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is "shorter working hours" or "big hit". Also, FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs in the effect form according to the expected value for the hit (time-saving hit, big hit).

When a pending image is displayed as a look-ahead effect form for saving time, for example, the shape of the pending image, which is usually represented by a triangle, is changed to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest when the retained image is a rectangle and highest when it is a star.

Also, when a pending image is displayed as a big-hit look-ahead effect form, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, is changed in color such as "blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest if the pending image is blue and highest if the pending image is a rainbow.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the case where the pending image is displayed as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit, the pending image is set to, for example, the expected value for the big hit It may be represented by both a color indicating a level and a shape indicating an expected value level for a time-saving hit, or may be represented by a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form.

The reserved image in which the anticipation effect is performed can change from the effect form with the relatively low expected value to the effect form with the relatively high expected value, but the expected value is relatively high from the effect form with the relatively high expected value It is preferable not to change to a low production mode. Also, when changing the presentation form of the hold image, it is not necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow". , for example, "pentagon→circle" or "yellow→rainbow". Also, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the lowest expected value, such as a square or blue, but may be, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (response to reservation) in FIG. 57 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively, as in FIG.

Also, in each column of "1" to "4" in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 57, " 0” to “5” indicate the height of the expected value for the hit (time saving hit, big hit). For example, the above "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". "Hexagon" and "green" above correspond to "3", "circle" and "red" above correspond to "4", and "star" and "rainbow" above correspond to "5". Equivalent to

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 57, " 0” to “5” are referred to as expected value levels “0” to “5”.

The look-ahead expected value effect pattern when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" is shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) in FIG. 57, for example, It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number 2 for sub effect selection. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the random number value 2 for sub effect selection. The sub effect selection random number value 2 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command for a special symbol is received. In FIGS. 57 and 58, only the case where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" is illustrated, and the illustration when the number of reservations is "4" is omitted for the sake of convenience.

For example, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a big hit, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "43H". . When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area. to "3", and when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the expected value level changes from "3" to "5".

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". be done. For example, when the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reservation area, and the second reservation area to the first reservation The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting to the region.

In this way, the sub CPU 301, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (see FIG. 58) ), and based on the number of reservations and the sub-effect selection random number value 2, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value production pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate is.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the selection rate of the look-ahead expected value production pattern (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) with a relatively low expected value level is increased. However, it is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as even distribution.

Further, in FIGS. 57 and 58, the sub effect selection random number value 2 having a predetermined width is assigned to all the "prefetch expected value effect patterns", but this is not restrictive, and a specific "prefetch expected value effect pattern" is assigned. ” (that is, the distribution rate of the specific “forecasting expected value effect pattern” may be set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is an example of a flow chart showing a prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As shown in FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not it has received a winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 301 terminates the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (YES in S3001), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the prefetch target suspension is not at the current time, that is, whether or not the prefetch effect is being executed for the current suspension. When there are a plurality of suspensions, the look-ahead effect may be performed on a plurality of suspended images, but in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one suspended image.

If the prefetch effect is being executed for the current hold (NO determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the look-ahead effect is not executed for the current hold (YES determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation pattern information received by the winning command is for prefetching (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not for prefetching (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetching effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received by the winning command is to be read ahead (YES determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling price and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number (for example, 4 or 8) that can be held. This processing is for avoiding the transition to the B time-saving game state before execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the suspension of the read-ahead performance despite the execution of the read-ahead performance. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number that can be reserved, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern information received by the winning command is When it is a prefetch target (when S3003 is YES determination), it may be determined whether or not it is larger than the pending number including the prefetch target. The ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as commands, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201 .

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) is referred to, and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process is a "time saving win" or a "big win". In this process, the result of the special pattern hit determination process is determined based on the variation pattern information received in the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by transmitting special symbol winning/losing information from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301, it is possible to determine a "time-saving win" or a "big win".

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value production pattern (at the time of winning) determination processing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) of FIG. 57 is referenced to determine the look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of winning). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect pattern determination processing when losing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (when lost) of FIG. 58 is referenced to determine a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (when lost). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effect by performing look-ahead effect, example of expansion of look-ahead effect]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, the expected value of the hit (big hit, time-saving hit) is not only interesting, such as whether it changes to a big hit type look-ahead effect form or a time saving type look-ahead effect form depending on the form change of the pending image. It is possible to change the level, and it is possible to enhance the interest by performing a new production that has never existed before. In addition, the timing of changing the form of the pending image is not limited to when the pending is shifted, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Also, the form of the pending image performed as a prefetch effect (for example, the form of the pending image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserving area (4) to the first sub-reserving area (1)) is the first start port 120 It may be determined at the time of winning a prize, and the form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbols of the variation may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

By the way, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) in which the prefetching effect is executed in the prefetching time short hit effect pattern, and the variation in which the prefetching effect is executed in the prefetching big hit effect pattern Comparing the probabilities determined by the patterns (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the probability of the former is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). That is, the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect is higher in the read-ahead short hit effect pattern than the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead big hit effect pattern. Therefore, as compared with the conventional pachinko game machine in which the look-ahead performance is performed only when there is a possibility of a big win, the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance can be increased while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of winning, and the interest is enhanced. can be increased.

In addition, the execution ratio of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big hit performance pattern may be higher than the execution ratio of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead short hit performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big win is higher than the expected value for the time-saving win, so it is possible to increase the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the game state (in this embodiment, normal game state, low probability time-saving game state) in which the probability variation flag is off, it is possible to win "time-saving hit" in the special symbol hit determination process (Fig. 10 reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-probability short-time game state. Even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the low probability time saving game state is "time saving hit", when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the A time saving game state, and for the A time saving game state In any case where the C time saving game state is not repeatedly executed, the possibility of increasing the time saving number of times is low. Therefore, by minimizing the player's knowledge of the possibility of winning the "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving win" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-probability short-time game state, and the look-ahead effect is performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-probability short-time game state and high-probability low-time short game state. may Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the look-ahead effect is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect may be performed for the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, time-saving hit system reach, big hit system reach, or common reach can be executed. In this embodiment, as can be seen by referring to FIGS. 15 and 54 to 56, when the sub CPU 301 executes the prefetch effect with the prefetch time saving effect pattern, the time saving hit system reach is executed as the sub variable effect pattern. And do not execute jackpot reach. In addition, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big-hit performance pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the big-hit type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-type ready-to-win.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time saving effect pattern or the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, it can perform the time saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern. However, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern when the pre-read effect is executed in the pre-read big hit effect pattern.

In addition, the prefetch big hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56) and the prefetch short time hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56) ”) or the look-ahead common winning effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) “27H” shown in FIG. 56) is executed, the sub CPU 301 performs the sub-fluctuation effect pattern As a common reach (for example, the sub-fluctuation pattern "0AH", "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) may be executed.

Moreover, after executing the time-saving winning system reach and clearly showing the loss in the time-saving winning system reach, a performance pattern may be provided in which the big winning system is executed. In this case, since the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end whether or not the jackpot-type ready-to-win with a high profit rate will be executed, the interest of the player can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E is executed in the variable display of the special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, the common reach E and the common reach C After the common performance is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the jackpot type ready-to-win C. On the other hand, when the performance common to the common reach C is not executed at all, the game does not shift to the jackpot type reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the performance common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the short-time winning system reach C. On the other hand, when the performance common to the common reach C is not executed at all, it does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when a look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "big hit look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit, has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 Do not execute look-ahead effects. Even in a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect when a big hit look-ahead effect has already been performed.

For example, any one hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") in which variable display of special symbols is started after this first hold ), and when the prefetching jackpot production pattern (for example, the prefetching hit type production pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is executed in the first reservation, the prefetching production is performed in the second reservation Even if executed, the look-ahead effect in this second hold may not make sense. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and is controlled to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state is terminated, the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state, for example, the "time-saving win" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving win", and in this case, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, when the big win look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to carry out the look-ahead performance for the suspension to be executed after the suspension in which the big win look-ahead performance is executed.

Even if the first suspension is the suspension of the big win (the suspension from which the big win is derived), if the look-ahead performance is not executed for the first suspension, the look-ahead performance is executed in the second suspension. may or may not be executed.

In addition, even when a fake big hit look-ahead effect (for example, a look-ahead winning type effect pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if the time-saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “05H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first suspension, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second suspension. may This is because, even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, in the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine that includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, a small win is included in the first reservation. Even when the hit look-ahead effect is being executed, the big win look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be executed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. ) is executed in the first reservation, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be performed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, when the start information is suspended by winning the first start opening 120 during the execution of the jackpot-type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this suspension.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as “specific suspension” in the paragraph), and whether the look-ahead effect is executed or not performed for this specific suspension, the sub CPU 301 will be executed after the jackpot game state ends. , If it is not in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko game machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability short-time game state, a low-probability short-time game state), it is specified when the jackpot display mode is derived. When there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold after the end of the big win game state.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as "specific suspension" in the paragraph), even if this specific suspension is a suspension of "time saving hit", the main CPU 201, after the jackpot gaming state is over, will play a C time saving game based on "time saving hit". It may not be controlled by the state. For example, when the time-saving gaming state overlaps, it is a specification that does not execute multiple time-saving gaming states, and if it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead effect]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. FIG. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute a look-ahead effect using a pending image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

[1-10-1. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching jackpot effect pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead effect pattern includes the look-ahead hit type effect pattern and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern. Here, first, as the above-mentioned look-ahead hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a look-ahead big hit effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of the read-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the big-hit-type read-ahead effect patterns showing the possibility of a big win change. It is a figure which shows a process. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H" or "78H" in FIG. Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f), a first reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. FIG. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas indicating whether reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. Also, the 0th area 410 is an area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the reservation information is stored in the first sub reservation area, the sub CPU 301 designates the reservation areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub reservation area in which the reservation information is stored as indicated by triangles. A reserved image (hereinafter simply referred to as a “held image”) is displayed. Further, when the reservation information is not stored in the first sub reservation area, the sub CPU 301 displays only the frame of the reservation area without displaying the reservation image.

In FIG. 60(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving areas (1) to (3) and no pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that the reservation information is newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved images shown in the first to fourth reserved areas 411 to 414 differently according to the expected value for the big hit. In this embodiment, except for the rainbow, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white. The color of the pending image displayed is blue (expected level "1").

FIG. 60(c) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , a change from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reservation area 413 .

FIG. 60(d) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from yellow to green (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , a change from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 60(f) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. , is an image showing a change from red to rainbow (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the pending image indicating the expected value for the big hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the pending is shifted, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the variation. .

Also, in FIG. 60, the change in the expected value from which the big win is derived is shown by changing the big hit look-ahead effect form. The sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect that changes to the effect mode. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-2. Specific example when prefetching production is performed with prefetching time saving production pattern]
Next, a specific example in which a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time saving performance pattern as the look-ahead hit type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61 .

Figure 61 (a) ~ Figure 61 (f) is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit system It is a figure which shows the process which changes. Incidentally, the look-ahead time saving type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) corresponds to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH" or "6AH" in FIG. Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). Sub CPU301, as described above, displays the form (for example, shape) of the pending image shown in the first to fourth pending areas 411 to 414 differently depending on the expected value for the time saving hit.

Thus, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big win is represented by the color of the pending image, and the expected value for the time saving win is represented by the shape of the pending image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first to third reserved areas 411 to 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape shown in the fourth reserved area 414 The shape of the retained image that is displayed is a rectangle (expectation value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413. FIG.

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412. FIG.

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 61(f) is an image obtained by shifting one hold from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a circle to a star (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

It should be noted that the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for the time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star", for example, change to "pentagon → circle" You may let

In addition, the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for the time saving per (expected value level) does not necessarily need to be changed when the hold shifts, for example, even if it is changed during the variable display of the special pattern of the fluctuation good.

In addition, in FIG. 61, by changing the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived is shown. It may be executed by the sub CPU 301 . In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big-win fixed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed with prefetching common hit effect pattern]
Next, a specific example in which the prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching common winning effect pattern as the above prefetching winning effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 62 .

FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of the look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which a pending|holding image changes from a system look-ahead production form to a big-hit system look-ahead production form. Changes in the common winning system look-ahead production form include changes in the expected value level of the win (shorter time win, big win) and changes in which it is clear whether the type of win is a big win or a short time win. is included. 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to "43H" in FIG.

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit are used as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit. is displayed.

In FIG. 62 (a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, the normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third reservation area 413 and the fourth reservation area 414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color and shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the hit (big hit or time saving hit). . In this embodiment, if the look-ahead effect is not executed or if the expected value for winning is the lowest, the pending image is displayed as a white triangle, and "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow The expected value for short hits increases in the order of "star".

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the third reserved area The form of the pending image shown at 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 62(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from a yellow pentagon to a green hexagon (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 62(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , When shifted to the first reservation area 411, from the green hexagon (common hit-type look-ahead production form of expected value level "3") to the rainbow triangle (big hit-type look-ahead production form of expected value level "5") It is an image showing that it changed to

That is, the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(b) and FIG. 62(c) is a form showing an expected value for the big hit or a form showing the expected value for the time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(d), the form of the pending image indicates the expected value for the big hit, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level "5"). It is possible to grasp something.

Thus, in this embodiment, according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the look-ahead performance is a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern indicating the expected value for the time-saving hit, and a look-ahead big hit performance pattern indicating the expected value for the big hit. , and a look-ahead common hit effect pattern indicating an expected value for a hit (big hit or time saving hit). Then, when the read-ahead performance is executed in the read-ahead common winning performance pattern, the player is given interest in whether the reserved image changes to the big win system look-ahead performance form or the time-saving winning system look-ahead performance form. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the form of the pending image showing the expected value for time saving does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of “blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star” Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → red triangle (big hit system look-ahead production form)", or "green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → It may be changed to "triangular star (time-saving hit system look-ahead production form)". In addition, it is not always necessary to start the form of the pending image showing the expected value for the win from the blue square with the lowest expected value, and for example, it may be started from the red circle.

Also, the form of the hold image indicating the expected value for the win does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 62, by changing the common winning system look-ahead production mode, the expected value for deriving any winning (big win or short-time winning) is changed, or the expected win is changed from an unknown state to a big win. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, the sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect shown below. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
A look-ahead effect that changes from a common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big win-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big-win determination look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-4. Modified example of common hit system look-ahead production form]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common hit system look-ahead production form that indicates that there is a possibility for both the jackpot and the time saving hit is not necessarily the color that indicates the expected value for the jackpot and the shape that indicates the expected value for the time saving hit. and is not limited to the form represented by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit-based look-ahead effect form may be provided. When a dedicated common hit system look-ahead performance form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both the big win and the short-time win, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it will be possible to adapt to future changes in the performance mode. The game can be played with anticipation, and interest can be improved.

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) show an example of a prefetch effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show a pending image from a dedicated common win system prefetch effect form to a big win system prefetch effect form. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 63(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

Also, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are an example of the prefetch effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and from the dedicated common winning system prefetch effect form to the time saving system prefetch effect form FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a process in which a held image changes to . 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H" or "63H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 64(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

In Figure 63 (a) and Figure 64 (a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, the normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third reservation area 413 and the second reservation area 413 No reserved image is displayed in the 4 reserved area 414, and only a frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both FIG. 63(b) and FIG. 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form, for example, a glittering form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. It is an image showing that the look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and in FIG. It is an image showing that the common hit system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

FIG. 63(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , when shifted to the first reservation area 411, the image shows a change from the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form to a red triangle (big hit expected value level "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 64(d) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(c), and in FIG. When the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it is an image showing that it has changed from the dedicated common winning system look-ahead production form to a white circle (expected value level "4" for time saving).

In this way, even when the look-ahead performance form is represented by the dedicated common win-type look-ahead performance form, the special common win-type look-ahead performance form is changed to the big win-type look-ahead performance form and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form. It is possible to make the player have interest in which way it will change, and to increase interest.

[1-11. Signals output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained. In addition, although the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described in this embodiment, it may be possible to input the signal from the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8 ”, “prize information 2” and “security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, CN1 outputs a "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko game machine to the outside are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" out of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, a payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the big winning opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 winning balls are paid out, and the starting opening (first starting opening 120 or second For example, three prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the starting port 140 (see FIG. 4), and four balls enter the general winning port 122 (see FIG. 4). prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for 120 msec, for example, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for, for example, 120 msec at the timing when the tenth prize ball payout detection switch is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Information 1” signal is output. It should be noted that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on is merely an example. Any period from when it is turned on to when it is turned off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting it for 120 msec is just an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of the "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine, will be described. A "security" signal is a signal output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of the errors in the first pachinko game machine. FIG. 67 is a table showing release triggers in , output times of "security" signals (illustrated as "security signals" in FIG. 67), and remarks;

Although the first pachinko game machine does not have a small-hit big winning opening, FIG. 67 also shows a small-hitting big winning opening abnormal winning error for the sake of convenience. In addition, in FIG. 67, the big winning opening 131 is described as a big winning opening.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, errors not shown in FIG. 67 may be judged to be errors. You may do so. Examples of errors that are not shown in FIG. 67 include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or longer, a large winning opening (large winning jackpot) If there is a game ball that has not been ejected from the inside of the winning hole or the big winning hole for small wins, or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, there will be an error when the big winning hole enters and is ejected, and the vibration sensor has been on for a predetermined time. Vibration sensor error, etc., when on for a long period of time. Also, for example, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening for big hit, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the big winning game control, the probability variable control is executed after the big winning game control is finished. , it will be judged as an error even if there is no undischarged game ball inside the big winning opening for the big win, but the game ball passes through the specific area. preferably configured.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection information executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6 for both) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where an abnormal winning error occurs in the big winning opening for big winning.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning prize is detected before the first big winning big winning opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) It is determined that an abnormal prize winning error has occurred, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, it transmits to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, since the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, an external device (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6) ) and the island computer (not shown)) can recognize the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot ascertain the content of the error. However, without being limited to this, for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. good too.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, a big winning opening abnormal winning error for a big win, for example, it executes all or part of the following notification control, and receives the fraud detection-related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is terminated.
Information control for displaying characters such as "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304;
- Notification control for outputting a voice such as "It is a special winning opening abnormal winning error" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
• Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305 .
Information control for causing the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) through the LED control circuit 306 to light up in red, for example.

Note that if there is a power failure before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the sub CPU 301 terminates the above-described notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal jackpot winning error during execution of the above-described notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-described Re-execute notification control.

Next, the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine in accordance with the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of signals output to the outside according to the game state in the first pachinko game machine. In FIG. 68, signals to be output are indicated by ◯, and signals not to be output are indicated by x.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, different signals are output depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201 . For example, during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability variation / time reduction), neither signal is output, ” and “external information 7” signals are output, and the signals of “external information 3”, “external information 5” and “external information 7” are output during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot and during the small hit) output. In addition, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, signals of “external information 3” and “external information 6” are output during a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during a big hit, other than during a small hit) be done.

In this way, by varying the signal output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state other than). Similarly, the signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the low-probability short-time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the low-probability short-time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), The signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the high-probability short-time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high-probability short-time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and the small hit game The signal output during the control process (during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small winning game control process in the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to ascertain whether or not However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small-win game control process different from the signal output when the small-win game control process is not being performed, the small-win game machine that is the source of the external information can win a small win. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by an external device capable of receiving a signal.

In addition, during the low-probability short-time gaming state shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small winning game control process (during the high-probability time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control are being executed, and only the electric sapo control is executed among the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control It may be said that the time saving control is being executed when there is, and it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when only the special figure shortening control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control.

In addition, in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine described above, it is possible to control the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state by the control of the main CPU (function of the A time-saving game state, B The function of the time saving game state and the function of the C time saving game state are installed), but it is not limited to this. For example, only one of the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function (for example, the function of the A time-saving game state) is installed, and the other function ( For example, it may be a pachinko game machine that does not include the function of the B time saving game state and the function of the C time saving game state). Also, among the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function, two functions (for example, the A time-saving game state function, and the B time-saving game state function or C time-saving It may be a pachinko game machine that has only the function of the game state) and does not have other functions (for example, the function of the B time-saving game state or the function of the C time-saving game state).

In addition, for example, like a pachinko machine called ST machine, in a pachinko machine in which the probability variation flag is set to ON with a probability of 100% after the end of the jackpot game state, the function of the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the function of the C time-saving game state may be configured so as not to be installed.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. The second pachinko machine is, as described above, a type 1 pachinko machine called digipachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

Also, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration explained with reference to the drawings used in the explanation of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, in the explanation of the second pachinko game machine, even if the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings is the same as the first pachinko game machine in terms of functions, etc., the first pachinko game Description will be made using reference numerals and step numbers different from those of the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example Including a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variation machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first and second starting openings. There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is satisfied in the order of winning.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010 .

Various members arranged in the game area 1105 of the second pachinko game machine (for example, the first start port 1120, etc.) are arranged in the game area 105 (see FIG. 4) of the first pachinko game machine. There are some things in common, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110. A center accessory 1115, a first starting port 1120, a general prize winning port 1122, a passage gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting port 1140A, 1140B, and a normal electric role. It has an object unit 1145, a small win unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 1010. - 特許庁Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007 . In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) or the like is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 1105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 1105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 1110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 1105 by the shooting device 1006 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 1106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 1107 .

Further, the center accessory 1115 is formed with a warp entrance 1117 at its left outer peripheral edge portion into which a game ball flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115 . The stage 1118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007 . Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 1118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 1120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 1120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball enters the general winning opening 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passing gate 1126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the start information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal design is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). . The reserved starting information of the normal symbol is usually subjected to the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 1127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 1125 may be located in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107 .

Also, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (for example, a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device are activated, but the stop display mode indicating the jackpot. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the character product continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later), the accessory continuous operation device is activated. You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a big win big winning hole 1131 and a big winning big winning hole count switch 1132 (see later-described FIG. 70) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the big winning big winning hole 1131. , and the special electric accessory 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right area 1107 .

The big winning opening 1131 for big hits is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning big winning opening 1131, a big winning big winning opening that can win a left-handed game ball, or a center accessory 1115 A big winning opening for winning a game ball may be arranged in the upper part of the .

In addition, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled in a big winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the winning entrance. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is detected by the big winning opening counting switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later), ten winning balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 1131 for big win is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134 . The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the shutter 1134 for special electric, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 1131 for a big win, and to enter (pass through) a game ball to the big winning opening 1131 for a big hit. ) is configured to allow state transitions to and from impossible or difficult closing states. It should be noted that the state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 1131 for big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. It is in play state.

(Second start port)
In this embodiment, as the second start opening, a second start opening 1140A and a second start opening 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105, and these second start openings 1140A and 1140B are both right-handed. A game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later). Even if the game ball wins in any of the second start ports 1140A and 1140B, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is detected by the second starting port switches 1141A and 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The received starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second start ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in the present embodiment, on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit to the right but does not win the big winning opening 1131, there are two flow paths 1107a and 1107b vertically as the flow path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without winning the big winning hole 1131 for a big hit is moved to an upper flow path 1107a or a lower flow path 1107b by a branch peg 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example. distributed.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure so that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a win the second starting port 1140A. Alternatively, a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a may be configured to be able to win. In addition, game balls that have flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but have not won the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the out port 1178 to the outside of the machine.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win prizes.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is disposed on the lower flow path 1107b side, and includes a winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body in which a switch for detecting winning of a game ball and a normal electric accessory 1146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential to use the above winning opening as the second starting opening 1140B. For example, the first starting opening may be used as the above winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) for operating the shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the normal electric shutter 1147 is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 1140B or is easily opened, and a game ball cannot enter the second start port 1140B. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. It should be noted that instead of the shutter 1147 for general electric power that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member such as a blade member called a so-called electric tulip may be employed. Further, the movable member includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(small hit unit)
The small-hit unit 1150 includes a small-hit large winning opening 1151 and a small-hitting large winning opening count switch 1152 for detecting the winning (passage) of the game ball to the small-hitting large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). , a small-hit shutter 1153 that can move forward and backward, and a small-hit solenoid 1154 that can operate the small-hit shutter 1153 are integrated.

The small-hit shutter 1153 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction to enable or facilitate the entry (passage) of the game ball to the small-hit large winning opening 1151, and the game to the small-hitting large winning opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to win a prize.

When the game ball wins when the small-hit big winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small-hitting big winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch 1152 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 1151 for small winning is not limited to ten.

Also, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 1145 in the downward flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning big winning port 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. Before reaching the big winning opening 1151 for winning, it is difficult (or impossible) to win the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning because the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side is won.

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning and the big winning opening 1151 for small winning are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

(out port)
The out port 1178 is any of various prize-winning ports (eg, the first starting port 1120, the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, the big winning port 1131 for big wins, the general winning port 1122, etc.) of those shot toward the game area 1105. This is for ejecting game balls that did not win any prizes outside the machine. This out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 1122, between the normal electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. A game ball flowing down the region 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit is provided with a performance role group 1058 such as a movable role controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 for controlling the effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450 .

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset It has a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected with a main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like. The main CPU 1201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko game machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202 .

The main RAM 1203 is provided with storage areas for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 1206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 1300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200 . For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display portion 1161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 1162, a first special symbol display portion 1163, a second special symbol display portion 1164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 1165, a 2 Special symbol reservation display unit 1166, probability variation notification display unit 1167, time reduction notification display unit 1168, general electric solenoid 1148, special electric solenoid 1135, and small winning solenoid 1154 etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuitry 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205 .

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first starter switch 1121, second starter switches 1141A and 1141B, a passage gate switch 1127, a big win win count switch 1132, a general win win switch 1123 and a small win big win. A mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205 .

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 1184, a setting key 1174 operated to change or confirm setting values in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are stored by the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with the operation of is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game center to expose the back surface, the manager of the game center operates the setting key 1174 and/or the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 1176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 .

[2-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a character control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 1200 . Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302 . In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

A work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 1301 .

A display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007 . The display control circuit 1304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data relating to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 1032 . The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 1032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 1032 .

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 1058). The role item control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

The payout/shooting control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls and causing game balls to be shot. A launching device 1006 capable of controlling ball lending, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180 . The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180 . The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180 . Although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise. (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450 . The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function is omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time reduction control is executed, the high probability time-saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time reduction control are executed, and the time reduction control although the variable probability control is executed A high-probability short-time gaming state that is not executed, and a low-probability short-time gaming state in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed are prepared. It is possible to proceed with However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state progresses. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game progresses in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state, and the game does not progress in the high-probability non-short-time game state. good.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display a regular game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 71 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78 to be described later), that is, the game ball wins in the first start port 1120 or the second start ports 1140A, 1140B. It is a table referred to when "time-saving win", "minor win", "big win" or "losing" is determined by lottery based on the random number for big win determination extracted at the time. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the winning determination process for the first special symbol are "time-saving win", "big win", and "lose", and "minor win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "time-saving hit", "minor hit", "big hit", and "losing". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving win", "big win", or "lose" in the first special symbol win determination process based on the extracted big win determination random number value. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

Also, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines a “time saving win”, “minor win”, “big win” or “lose” based on the extracted big win determination random number value. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) relationship with the data, the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the relationship with the corresponding judgment value data for judging a big hit, the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "losing" and the corresponding loss determination value data are stipulated. be.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 ”, and the hit-loss determination value data is determined as “time saving hit determination value data”. In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and hits and drops. The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Also, if the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Also, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Also, if the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit". It judges and decides judgment value data as "time reduction per judgment value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines "losing" and determines The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Also, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "losing", and determines The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for judging the big hit generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the hit judging process of the second special symbol), It is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding big hit determination value data and loss determination value data. Also, from the predetermined value, the end (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing so, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or reduces) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the big hit probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data and small hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared to the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving game state when winning the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state, when the "time-saving win" is won just before the time-saving game state ends, the time-saving game state is substantially It will be extended, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving win" regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. . However, when the variable probability flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU 1201 controls the time saving game state, but the probability change flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[2-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 72 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1140A, 1140B and the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data. This table is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "designated symbol command" that determine the (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78 described later). The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol specification command" is a symbol to be displayed when the special symbol variable display is stopped. This is the command to specify. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 determines the selected symbol. "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA5" is selected as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 issues a selection symbol command "z10" is selected as the symbol designation command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 executes a small hit game control process. In the small-hit game control process, for example, by operating the small-hit shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69), the winning (passing) of the game ball to the small-hit big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is possible or easily opened. Execution of the control to become the state, the prize balls can be paid out.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), the hit/lose determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for judging a big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command may be determined together.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of the time saving win, the big win display mode, the small win display mode or the losing display mode based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. Also, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub-control circuit 1300 .

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the winning game state and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (that is, when determining the mode of the game state after that) When executing the hit type determination process of S1036 of FIG. 78). The mode of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 shows the mode of the big winning game state or the mode of the small winning game state. Further, the aspect of the game state after that indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the winning game state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so the mode of the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z8", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, since the winning game state is not controlled when the result of the special symbol hitting determination process is "time saving hit", the aspect of the winning game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the hit determination process of this special symbol is performed, the number of times of time saving to be set is the same. . However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time reduction times to be set may be changed according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" as shown in FIG. In this case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving win" is won is derived to the special symbol display parts 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly changed to a special symbol. The information may be led out to display units 1163 and 1164 . Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON, the time saving hit decision value data is not assigned to the big hit decision random number value, that is, the winning decision process not including the "time saving hit" in the lottery result may be performed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) to 1 as the mode of the small winning gaming state. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "small win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described small win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then the determined small win big win. By setting the number of openings of the mouth 1151, it becomes possible to control the small winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small hit game state. Return to the game state just before the game.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot gaming state, Of the flags, it is decided to set ON only the variable probability flag and to set the variable probability number to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and after the jackpot game state ends, can be controlled to the high-accuracy non-work-time-saving game state. becomes.

When the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5" and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds and 10 rounds, respectively, as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. to decide. In addition, as a form of the game state after that, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variable number of times and the time saving number of times are both set to 10000 times. . In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively, as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it is determined to set ON only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag. Also, the number of times of time reduction to be set is determined to be set to 200 times, for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", and determined to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable in a time-saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state. In addition, the mode of time saving control in the high probability time saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in A time saving .

Also, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201 determines the mode of the winning game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, the figure 73.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Win/lose determination value data is determined (performs hit/lose determination) based on the random number value for big hit determination, and hit/lose (“time-saving hit”, “small hit”, “big win” or “losing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. The selection symbol command is determined based on the winning/losing determination value data, and the type of display mode derived to the special symbol display parts 1163 and 1164 (for example, the type of time-saving winning, the type of big winning) is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

Also, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit". For example, despite winning the "jackpot", it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to being disadvantageous compared to the case of not winning the "jackpot" (the case of winning the "shorter working hours") becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time-saving gaming state higher than the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state You may make it higher than an expected value. Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

[2-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Also, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the columns of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A, 1140B. Determine the variation pattern of the design. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S1037 of FIG. 78 described later.

In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to a special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in FIG. If so, set the readahead flag. The sub CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, in a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, or a low-probability short-time game state, for example, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, but is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the special symbol variation pattern is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hit-or-lose), the reach determination random number, and the effect selection random number. determined by However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start of FIG. 75, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start of FIG. The expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time is greater than when it is determined. In particular, when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variable over a very long period of time, for example, approximately 600000 msec (eg, long variation A to C). display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for a very short period of time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super-speed variation). .

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301 . The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201 .

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for each setting value, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection is changed so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different. good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74) is referred to determine the special symbol variation pattern, for example, high probability short game state, high probability non In the time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of special symbols for high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of variable display times of special symbols per unit time are provided, for example, according to the type of time-saving gaming state, special symbols Different tables may be referred to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 have the possibility of a time-saving hit as a result of the special symbol hit determination processing (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a reach production that shows. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, as in the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a normal per symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control processing will be described below, and description of other processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 86), etc. ), hereinafter, the special symbol control process will be described again, including the same process as the process performed in the first pachinko game machine, with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201, when executing the special symbol control process, performs an address setting process of setting the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001. .

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs the transmission reservation processing of the demonstration display command for the first special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols is constant. When it is "0" for more than the time, the transmission reservation processing of the demonstration display command for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state in which the left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the right-handed hitting is the regular game state (for example, a high-accuracy short-time game state , high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbols, display effects such as characters, and voice effects for the main special symbols. For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect. In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-probability short-time game state, instead of the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, which is the main special design, other effects An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of times of time saving until the time saving game state ends) may be displayed.

At S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1001.

When it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not the time to start the variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process to S1003. For example, NO determination is made in S1002 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

At S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

At S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

At S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process to S1006. For example, NO determination is made in S1005 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S1005), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

At S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1006, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

At S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

At S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1007.

When it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1008), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is reached (when S1008 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1009.

At S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1009, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

At S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

At S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1010.

When it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not the time to start variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and shifts the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is reached (YES in S1011), no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1012.

At S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[2-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, special symbol management processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1003, S1006, S1009 and S1012 during the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, for example, when the special symbol management process is called in S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process and executed, the second special symbol becomes the processing target, and the special symbol management process is S1006 or S1006 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S1012, the first special symbol is to be processed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the special symbol wait time is not 0 (NO determination in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (when S1021 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

At S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023. It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes after S1023 based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S1023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S1024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

At S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S1025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1026.

At S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

At S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The processing of this S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S1028 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 when the special symbol management process is called at S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 when the special symbol management process is called at S1006, and calls at S1009. If so, the process returns to S1010, and if called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S1023 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S1023 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1031), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (FIG. 77). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S1031), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1032.

At S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is YES determination (that is, even if the special symbol start condition is satisfied), the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, if it is on (S1032 is NO If it is a judgment), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

If it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off in S1032, that is, it is on (NO determination in S1032), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 displays the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S1032 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1033.

At S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination process is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. It is determined whether there is In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a time saving hit, and turns on the small winning flag when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a small win. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the big hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1035. The time-saving winning flag is turned off when shifting to the C time-saving game state, the small winning flag is turned off when the small winning game state is started, and the big winning flag is turned off when the big winning game state is started.

In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving hit, and if it is determined that it is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss.

At S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, time-saving hit, small hit, big hit, or loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referred to, and the above-described "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. A stop symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of the winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a winning (a time-saving winning, a small winning, or a big winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or a plurality of types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the reach determination random number or/and the effect selection random number. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value or the like. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state) where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, a special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75 ) to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1038.

At S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is determined as the special symbol variation time. be. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1039.

At S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 77 S1024) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1040.

At S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1041.

At S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1041, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

At S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 sets an interruption prohibited section, and interrupts the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S1041) and the special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)). It is preferable to perform it within the prohibited section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 77). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when S1051 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

At S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

At S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded at S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (NO determination in S1053), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (FIG. 77). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S1053 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

At S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1055.

At S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1056.

At S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1057.

At S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small win.

In S1057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO in S1057), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1057 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (when S1057 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1058.

At S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

At S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big win.

In S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a big hit (when S1059 determines NO), the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined at S1059 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit (when S1059 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

At S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

At S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (NO determination in S1061), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing and proceeds to special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77). back to

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (when S1061 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

At S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test-firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a failure. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1064.

At S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the win flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this processing, when the result of the hit determination processing for the special symbol to be processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol hits. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1065.

At S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

At S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting a predetermined fixed waiting time to the timer for the other special symbol. In this process, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the loss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

At S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1068.

At S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

At S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78). If the result of (2) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly making the variable display of the other special symbol a failure is performed.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S1071), the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol game determination process and performs the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S1071 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S1072, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073. On the other hand, in S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (if YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S1073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074.

At S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (when S1073 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process for the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process. In this processing, signals output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning) (S1077), the external terminal board 1184 Big hit signal set processing (S1078), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), game state designation parameter setting processing (S1080), and transmission reservation processing for the big hit start display command (S1081 ), etc. In addition, by performing the process (S1079) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol game determination process ends, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 77 S1026) is performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1074 during the special symbol game determination processing (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

At S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

At S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[2-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1026 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S1101), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 77). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S1101 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

At S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small hit game control process. It should be noted that the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the small winning big winning opening 1151) reaches the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of openings of the big-hit big winning opening 1131 opened in the big-hit gaming state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small-hit large winning opening 1151 opened in the small-hit game state is, for example, one.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S1103 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1104.

At S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the processing (S1104) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (Fig. 77 S1028) is performed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1105.

At S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S1106). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1103), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening has been opened. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1108.

At S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the small winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. A big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning big winning opening 1151), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the winning of the big winning opening The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when the big winning game control process is executed, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 1151 for small winnings when the small winning game control process is executed. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1110.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 30000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 1800 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 5 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening is set to 10 for both the big winning opening 1131 and the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning, for example. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating open/close control data for the big winning openings (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1111.

At S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S1111) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1112.

At S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

At S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S1121), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S1121 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls winning the big winning openings (the big winning opening 1131 for the big winning, the big winning opening for the small winning 1151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, a large winning opening winning counter (for example, a big winning opening counting switch 1132 for big winning and a big winning opening counting switch 1152 for small winning (see FIG. 70) etc.) is the value of the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 .

In S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S1122), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is the maximum winning number (when S1122 is YES determination) , the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 1151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has passed.

When it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) has not elapsed (NO determination in S1123), the main CPU 1201 determines that the winning opening has not occurred. The mouth opening control process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) has passed (if YES in S1123), the main CPU 1201 The process moves to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs closing processing of the big winning openings (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1151 for small winning). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1125.

At S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1125) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1126.

At S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called at S1028 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called at S1028 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

When it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S1131), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S1131 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1132.

At S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, the value of various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) is set or reset, and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, pattern fixed number counter, number of times the big winning opening is opened) counter, big winning opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) is set or reset. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high-probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is on. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1133.

At S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small winning rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, and a low-probability short-time game state are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is one of these game states. Control to any game state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode. In addition, in other game states (high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state), since hitting to the right is a regular game mode, the game to the second start port 1140A, 1140B A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting opening, the first The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 1151 is another game state (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed one.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, a game ball struck to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126 . In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second start opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the big hit game control process is executed, the big winning opening 1131 for the big hit will not be in the open state, so the frequency that the second start opening 1140B will be in the open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state Therefore, if the small winning large winning opening 1151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small winning large winning opening 1151.例文帳に追加When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 1151 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win the second starting port 1140A. When the game ball wins in the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), a stop indicating a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/3 (approximate) Not only the display mode is derived, but also super-speed fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for high start (see FIG. 75). The winning frequency of the game ball to the winning opening 1151 is increased compared with other game states (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small winning rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) paid out per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, high accuracy time saving game state, low accuracy time saving game state), the second start port 1140B is opened by executing the electric sapo control, and is struck to the right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b end up winning the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small-hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the expectation value of the game ball winning the small-hitting large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow-down path 1107a enters the second start port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the ball that is hit to the right and is distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enters the second start port 1140A. Of the game balls distributed to the path 1107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win prizes. Thus, in the gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) to be paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 and the normal symbol hit is displayed in a stop display mode. When pulled out, the normal electric accessory 1146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small winning big winning opening 1151 is opened by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 1140B. However, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). Even if it does, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any one of the long variations A to C having extremely long variation times, and the frequency of opening the small winning big winning opening 1151 is extremely small. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first start opening, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state is set to 0, for example, so as not to generate the actual profit of hitting to the right. good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be a small hit rush in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be made to be a small hit rush in a high-probability short-time gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is performed without performing the electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and has a first route and a second route as routes until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is A first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. In the second route, the V-attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a prize released", and the game ball entering the released V-attacker is V This is the case of winning the V winning slot in the attacker.

The third pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and establishes the starting condition of the second special symbol with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variator to However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko game machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 2120, etc.) arranged in the game area 2105 of the third pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 2105. center accessory 2115, first starting port 2120, second starting port 2140, general prize winning port 2122, passage gate unit 2125, special electric accessory unit 2130, and ordinary electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this third pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007 . A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 2105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 2110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 2105 by the shooting device 2006 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 2106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 2107 .

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the left outer peripheral edge thereof into which a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115 . The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 2118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 2120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win in the first starting port 2120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting port 2140 .

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. FIG. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right area 2107, and includes a passing gate 2126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 2125 may be located in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 to be described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107 .

The big winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the large winning hole 2131, a large winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played on the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled to a big win game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 2131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134 . The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be transitionable to and from a closed state. The big winning port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big win game state is entered through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state through the first route is to pay out a large amount of game balls as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big win port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that enables

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls to the winning opening, a normal electric It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146 and arranged in the right region 2107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141 .

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 2147 for normal electric power that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for normal electric power 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) for operating the shutter 2147 for normal electric power. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the normal electric shutter 2147, is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 2140 or is easily opened, and in which the game ball cannot enter the second start port 2140. or difficult closed state. It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107 . The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning port 2151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V-attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. Attacker count switch 2153, V winning port 2155 through which game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 are V A V winning opening switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball has entered (passed through) a winning opening 2155, and a game ball that has entered the interior of the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning opening 2151 but has not entered the V winning opening 2155. A loss port 2157 into which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a V winning. A locking member 2160 capable of holding only one of the game balls entered inside the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126 or may be provided in the left area 2106 .

The V-attacker 2152 consists of members along an arc, and is always in a closed state to close the open/close winning opening 2151 . Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and a stop display mode indicating that it is a "accessory hit" described later is derived, almost simultaneously with the completion of the variable display of the special symbols, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 ( (see FIG. 88, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 operates, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is activated once, the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened for 1800 msec, for example. While the open/close winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

It should be noted that the manner in which the V-attacker 2152 is released when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory hit" is derived is not limited to the above. It may be closed based on a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 .

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 . When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and performs the functions of the main CPU 2201. The value of the V Attacker Winning Counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 activates the V-attacker 2152 to open or close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) for opening the opening/closing winning port 2151 has not elapsed. Mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 . That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the big hit game state via the above-described second route.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 2155 . When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects that a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V-attacker 2152 has been opened, the main CPU 2201 continues opening control of the V-attacker 2152 . That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning port 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route is executed. When it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the route, a round game is executed to shift the V attacker 2152 from the closed state to the open state. However, not limited to this, for example, when controlled to the big win game state through the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, a large winning opening A round game may be executed to move 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in an open state), the V winning opening and the big hit game The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball enters the V prize opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. enters, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state through the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss port 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, when all the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is terminated without being continued. do.

V-shutter 2158 operates a V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later) to operate a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through V-winning opening 2155, and a game ball opening to V-winning opening 2155. A constant movement is always performed between the open mode in which the ball can (or easily) pass through. In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a cycle of 7000 msec, which repeats the operation of "6000 msec closed→1000 msec open→6000 msec closed".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155 and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 . A game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is ejected out of the machine through the loss port 2157 . Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged out of the machine through the loss port 2157.例文帳に追加

In addition, the locking member 2160 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown) after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated. The game ball that is unlocked in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, it wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it passes through the losing opening 2157 . In addition, without providing the locking member 2160 , the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 .

(out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the big winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of those shot toward the game area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any of the machines to the outside of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 2178 described above, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general prize winning ports 2122, between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, etc. A game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 2100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and has a performance role group 2058 such as a movable role controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300 , a payout/fire control circuit 2400 , and a power supply circuit 2450 .

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main CPU 2201 is connected with a main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like. The main CPU 2201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202 .

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 2203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I/O port 2205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200 . For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display portion 2161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 2162, a first special symbol display portion 2163, a second special symbol display portion 2164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 2165, a 2 Special symbol holding display unit 2166, time saving display unit 2168, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, and V shutter solenoid 2159 etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuitry 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205 .

Performance display data, set values, and the like are displayed on the performance display monitor 2170 under the control of the main CPU 2201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starter switch 2121, a second starter switch 2141, a pass gate switch 2127, a big prize draw count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V win drawer switch 2156, and a general switch. A winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205 .

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a hall computer 2186 which manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 2184, setting key 2174 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in main RAM 2203 can be transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too.

Also, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 corresponding to the case. When the notch is provided and the key managed by the person in charge of the game hall is used to rotate the pachinko game machine from the island facility to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 2176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 .

[3-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a character control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 2200 . Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302 . In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200 .

A work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 2301 .

A display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007 . The display control circuit 2304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data relating to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 2032 . The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 2032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 2032 .

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 2058). The role item control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands transmitted from main control circuit 2200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. and a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180 . The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180 . The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180 . The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the clockwise rotation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450 . The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. FIG. The third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, probability variation control is not performed in the 3rd pachinko game machine. In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display a hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007 .

[3-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 89 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball wins (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number value. Then, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes) through the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 performs the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol jackpot determination random number value. The result of the hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "accessory release hit".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". , It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") compared to the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential to avoid being determined to be "losing" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but if it is determined to be "losing", "accessory open hit" It may be set to be higher than the probability determined by 1, or may be set to be lower than the probability determined by ``per chance to unlock the role item''.

In the special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning of the first start port 2120 include "time saving hit", "big hit ” Or the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as “losing”, and the judgment value data corresponding to it (“time saving judgment value data”, “jackpot judgment value data”, “losing judgment value data”) relationship is stipulated. In addition, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning to the second start port 2140, the big hit determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "accessory open hit" The range (width) of the random number for judgment and the relationship between the judgment value data corresponding to it ("time reduction hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value data", "accessory open hit judgment value data") are stipulated. there is

This third pachinko game machine does not have a function of changing the probability of a big win determined as a "big win", but this is not essential. It may be set so as to increase the probability of a big hit.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

If the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving winning probability as a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the winning probability of opening the role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning mouth 2155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting port 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, for example. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 outputs the selected symbol command as Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the accessory release hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted for the third pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described for the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164, the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, the display mode of the winning prize or the display mode of losing is derived based on the result of the special symbol win determination processing. be. Further, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub-control circuit 2300 .

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine. In the hit type determination table, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the aspect of the subsequent game state (more specifically, It is referred to when determining time saving flag and time saving end condition). The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state. "L" shown in the column of time-saving end conditions in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. It should be noted that the remarks column in FIG. 91 is provided for convenience to facilitate understanding.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big hit game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 and determines not to set the time saving flag to ON. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the main CPU 2201 , the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the time saving flag is set on, and the time saving end conditions are determined to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory released", if the big win game state is not controlled through the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the big win game state. Not only does it not, the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing the control based on the winning of the opening of the role, the game state immediately before the opening of the role is returned.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the mode of the jackpot game state and the mode of the subsequent game state. Do not set either. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the aspect of the jackpot game state and the aspect of the subsequent game state as described above Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 91.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this, different conditions may be used. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, or the A time saving game state and B Only one of the time saving game state and the C time saving game state may be different. Also, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. , A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state may be changed only in one of the time saving game state. That is, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to at least one of the A time reduction game state, B time reduction game state, and C time reduction game state. You may make it differ in a game state.

[3-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the third pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the "remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. 2 Determine the variation pattern of the special design.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving winning", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the first start port 2120 and the game ball wins. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when (passing).

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "losing", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the value of the time saving flag, the game ball entering the first start port 2120 (passing ) is determined based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for effect selection extracted at the time of ). It should be noted that, in the time-saving game state, since hitting to the right is the normal game mode, it is considered that the game ball rarely enters the first start hole 2120 .

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second start port 2140. It is determined based on the extracted random number for effect selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the effect extracted when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. A variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins at 2140.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item open" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the variation time. is determined to be a very long long-fluctuation performance of, for example, 600000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball does not win (pass) to the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not always essential.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 2120 is a specific random number. The sub CPU 2301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

For the sake of convenience, it does not appear in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. If the probability variation flag is on, do not set the look-ahead flag.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead effect) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a look-ahead flag may be set (a look-ahead effect may be performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301 . The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201 .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, as in the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table, and the like. (See FIG. 17), a normal per symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 103), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a demonstration display command. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the third pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine that can variably display the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

When it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S2002), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S2002 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S2004), the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S2004 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2005. Move.

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, i.e., the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S2003 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2005. to

At S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 2140 .

[3-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol to be processed when S2003 is YES determination, and the first special symbol when S2004 is YES determination. A special design is a processing object. In addition, when the control state number is not 0 (when S2002 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is for the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO determination in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

At S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2013. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes after S2013 based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

At S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The processing of this S2015 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. The processing of this S2016 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

At S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

At S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 . If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The process of S2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this big winning hole opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 . If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. The processing of this S2020 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 94). reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S2021), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing object, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. Also, if the second special symbol is the object of processing, it is determined which of the time saving hit, the big hit, and the accessory release hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2024.

At S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time saving hit, a big hit, a role release hit or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a winning (time-saving winning, big winning, accessor product opening winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is, for example, a prize-opening hit is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the prize-opening hit. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and accessory-opening wins. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and/or prize release wins, a plurality of losing types may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random value or / And the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection and the like. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

At S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

At S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

At S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

At S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S2030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) during the interrupt prohibited interval. preferably in-house.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 94). reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

At S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

At S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

At S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, you may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the probability variable remaining number and the time-saving remaining number. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called at S2015 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S2051 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

At S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is not a big win, that is, it is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory, and when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of big hit game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In addition, in the big hit game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 2131 (S2055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), game state designation parameter setting processing (S2058), and transmission reservation processing (S2059) of the big hit start display command. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of this special symbol game determination process. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S2060, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a win, ie, that the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbols are in the stop display mode indicating the winning of the released role (if determined as YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2061. Move.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the game control per release of the accessory. In this processing, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting a winning winning prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing for setting a game state designation parameter (S2065). ), and transmission reservation processing (S2066) of the per-accessory-per-release start display command. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

At S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a one-type and two-type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy game state, the time-saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is similar to that shown in Fig. 32 in the first pachinko game machine. There are some differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set on. In the pachinko game machine of No. 3, it is not controlled to a high certainty game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON when the variable probability flag is set to ON and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to ON only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. different in Also, in the first pachinko game machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether the probability variation flag is off (see S191), on the condition that the probability variation flag is off Although the processing of S192 is performed, the third pachinko gaming machine is different in that the processing of S192 is performed without performing the processing of S191 because it is not controlled to the high accuracy game state as described above. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

At S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

At S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S2081 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of times of opening as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to perform only one opening for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. , the first time may be opened for, for example, a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for, for example, a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns are provided within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the role item, and among these multiple release patterns, for example, which one is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol Either one open pattern may be set. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

At S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

At S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the processing (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the V winning device opening control processing (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed after the V winning device opening preparation processing ends. will be performed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

At S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S2091 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 2150 when the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. be. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

In S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2092 that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2092 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 2151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has passed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not passed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing ( (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has passed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

At S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V prize detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not there is detection by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. It should be noted that the above-mentioned specified time may be a time related to entry of the game ball into the V winning device 2150. For example, within the specified time after the V attacker 2152 starts to operate, The above specified time may be within a specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that a V prize has been detected (when S2095 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, a V hit signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). You can get a lot of prize balls as well. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V per game control of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 2152), which is first executed based on the winning prize, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, the V-per-game control executed by determining that there was a V winning prize detection (S2095 was determined YES) will be started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of operations of the V attacker 2152) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), and the V hit start display command transmission reservation process (S2103). In addition, by performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined at S2095 that no V winning has been detected (NO at S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

At S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S2111 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

At S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The round counter value (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 . After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

At S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S2113 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

At S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". Thus, by performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the big winning opening opening preparation process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

At S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S2116). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

At S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived (S2052 in FIG. 97 is YES). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the jackpot 2131 is selected as the jackpot to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the winning of the opening of the role, and the stop display mode indicating the opening of the role is derived (YES determination in S2060 of FIG. 97), and V winning is detected (Fig. 100 S2095 is determined YES) If it is the V winning game control started by, the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening and closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

At S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the large winning The number of winning balls and the like at the time of winning to the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

It should be noted that the "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened, out of the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

At S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

At S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, by performing the processing (S2121) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the completion of the preparation processing for opening the large winning opening, the control processing for opening the large winning opening (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is executed. will be performed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

At S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

At S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO determination in S2131), the main CPU 2201 terminates the big winning opening control process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when S2131 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88) that counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2131 or a V attacker count switch that counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 88) is the value of the maximum winning number. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2132), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2132 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134. .

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has passed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and continues the process. Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

At S<b>2134 , the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 . After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

At S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

At S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO determination in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when S2141 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

At S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning mouth winning counter, etc.) Set the value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

At S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Extension example]
An expansion example common to the above-described first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine and third pachinko game machine will be described below. In addition, since the symbols attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following description, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third Codes are omitted unless the explanation is limited to the pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Extension example of variable probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is set to ON according to the type of jackpot, and if the variable probability flag is set to ON, the variable probability number is determined. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be adopted.

For example, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the big winning opening is passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, a big hit It may be a so-called V probability variation machine that sets the probability variation flag to ON at the end of the game control process. It should be noted that the specific area, for example, by operating the movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the open state in which the passage of the game ball is possible or easy, and the entry of the game ball is prohibited It can be displaced into a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variation machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process can be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. A diagram showing when the open mode of the area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. It should be noted that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

In addition, although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the big winning hole is opened for a short time and then long open, the opening mode of the big winning hole is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the big winning hole is open, except for a predetermined time after the start of the long opening of the big winning hole. It has become. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening to the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is set to ON very easily at the end of the big hit game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, during the short opening of the special prize opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special prize opening is started (these two times are short ), the specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening passes through the specific area, it can be either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, when the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability variation flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. set.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area as an example of the opening mode of the specific area. , the first opening mode and the second opening mode are provided. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two modes. It is possible to use only one mode, or three or more modes.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is difficult to pass through the specific area. As an example of , the example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot, it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area. The mode is not limited, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the hit/lose determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second The winning selection symbol command of 2 special symbols is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. selected, with a selectivity of 50%, "z2" is selected. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. selected, with a selectivity of 35%, "z5" is selected.

FIG. 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C).

That is, according to the above FIGS. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined to be the 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%, and 10%. 10R normal jackpot A is determined at a selection rate of 10R, and 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined at a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the type of the big win is determined to be the 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to have different probabilities of being set on.

It should be noted that, in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball into the big winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is a big winning (Example of control to be in an open state based on winning a prize in the mouth), when (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second It is a figure which shows when it is an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is opened, the first game ball enters the big winning hole, and the big winning hole is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, based on this detection, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. When the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the big winning hole is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is in the open state, the first game ball wins the big winning hole, Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the specific area remains until the winning hole is closed. does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, it is more difficult for even one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability changes at the end of the big hit game control process. Flag is set on.

It should be noted that, in the above, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the example in which the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but not limited to this, for example , When the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area. Although the example provided has been described, it is not limited to this, and for example, an open mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an open mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Although the example that can be determined to the difficult third mode has been described, it is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area is determined.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is opened twice during a short opening of the special winning opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special winning opening is started. Although it is in the open state for a short period of time (in both cases), if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the number of times the specific area is opened may be one or more times. There may be.

In addition, the specific area is closed according to the elapse of a predetermined opening time, the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or the specified number of big winning openings or winning in the specific area. and so on. Also, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variation control is executed (for example, high probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state, etc.) are a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until it is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is a game state in which probability variation control is not executed. (For example, normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is controlled. At this time, the loop count is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of times of the limiter may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, or determined by a predetermined lottery. In the case of a setting machine, the number of limiter times may be changed according to the set value.

It should be noted that, in the above, the jackpot game state and the game state in which probability variation control is executed alternately and repeatedly executed until reaching the limiter number of times so-called limiter machine has been described, but not limited to this, for example, the jackpot game state , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be repeatedly executed alternately until the number of times of the limiter is reached. In particular, it is effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-described V probability variation machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the game state in which the probability variation control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is set to N times, for example, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, assuming that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, The game state after the jackpot game control process is finished is controlled to the game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, although it does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, the specific area is played during the execution of the big hit game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the big hit game control process is finished is controlled to a game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, etc.) in which probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are performed is controlled to a predetermined When the special symbol game of the number of times is performed, it may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a game state (for example, normal game state, time saving game state, etc.) in which variable probability control is not executed. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which variable probability control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "ST number") may be a fixed number of times, or may be different each time. In the case of a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may differ according to the set value. Furthermore, for example, it may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the variable probability control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery. , It may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.

[4-2. Extension example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big win, time saving control can be executed after the big win game control process is finished. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number out of the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start hole (for example, for special symbol hit determination) A random number, a symbol random number of a special symbol, etc.) may be used to perform a time-saving winning/losing determination process for determining whether or not to execute time-saving control separately from the special symbol winning determination process. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, when performing a time-saving win-loss determination, for example, the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol random When it is a numerical value, it can be determined to be "time saving hit" in which time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time saving winning/losing determination processing separately from the special symbol hitting determining processing, the time saving winning/losing determining processing may be executed prior to the special symbol winning determining processing in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving win-lose determination process, the random number for time-saving win-lose determination exclusively provided for the time-saving win-lose determination process is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving win-lose is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time saving winning/losing.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the start opening, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, It may be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a large prize winning opening or the like. Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process is provided, and based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area, for example, a random value that is used for the time-saving win-lose determination process is extracted. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special symbol winning/losing determination process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbols from which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the final display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub CPU can grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit" or "time-saving loss" by appearance or easy effect image (for example, variable effect of decorative pattern or character It is preferable to execute control to display a display effect by ) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving win" or "time-saving loss" by appearance, time-saving win-lose determination A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variable effect of decorative patterns, a display effect by characters, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss". You may execute the control displayed in the . In this case, interest can be maintained until the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a game ball shooting method recommended in the big win game state. It is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit", the sub CPU, when the time saving control is executed Control is performed so that an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball shooting method is displayed on the display device. However, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", the effect image showing the method of shooting the game ball recommended when the time-saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on the "time reduction hit" is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), etc., it is not displayed. You may do so. In addition, said specific condition is not restricted to what makes a condition the number of times of time saving, It can be set as arbitrary conditions suitably.

In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed before the special symbol winning determination process is executed, the sub CPU is under the condition of "time-saving hit" (that is, the time-saving flag is set to ON). Whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed may be controlled to display a performance image that can be grasped from the appearance or is easily grasped on the display device.

In addition, the type of random number used in the time saving judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time saving judgment process, the condition to be determined as time saving in the time saving judgment process, the execution timing of the time saving judgment process, the time saving judgment process can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the time-saving number of times set at the time of the time-saving hit, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the time-saving number of times, the time-saving hit probability, and the time-saving judgment Processing related to time saving, such as processing result display, is summarized below.

(Types of random numbers used for time-saving hit-loss judgment processing)
The random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process are, for example, random numbers for special symbol per determination, random numbers for special symbol determination, random numbers for normal hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for special symbol fall determination, and It may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers such as a dedicated time-saving hit-or-lose determination random number. Moreover, if it is a setting machine, when changing the setting, the time saving win-lose determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used for the time saving judgment process is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving judgment random number value), but multiple types of random number values (for example, the special symbol per judgment random number value and the random number value for design determination ) may be used for determination.

(Timing of extracting random numbers used for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extracting the random number used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is when the game ball enters the starting port, which triggers the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit determination process. It may be any timing, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving hit-or-lose determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process may be performed based on the winning of a specific prize winning opening where prize balls are dispensed, or a specific gate or specific out where no prize balls are dispensed. It may also be based on passage through the mouth or the like.

It should be noted that, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the start opening, the game ball wins either the first start opening or the second start opening. Even if there is, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted, or only when the game ball wins in any one of the specific start openings, the time saving win-lose determination random number may be extracted.

(Conditions that are determined to be time-saving in the time-saving hit/loss determination process)
When performing time saving judgment processing using the extracted random number for time saving judgment processing, the extracted random number for time saving judgment judgment is a specific random number for time saving judgment judgment (for example, specific time saving judgment value data). It is good to make it determined that it is a time-saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving hit-loss determination process using the random number value for special symbol hit determination, when it is specific loss determination value data, specific small hit determination value data or / and specific big hit determination value data, time saving It is preferable to make it judged as a hit. In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving hit is determined when it is a specific losing symbol, a particular small winning symbol, or a specific big winning symbol. . Also, when the time-saving hit-loss determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random number value, it may be determined that the time-saving hit is determined when the random number data for the special symbol fall determination is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time saving win-lose determination process using the setting value after the change, it is good to be determined to be a time saving hit when it is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case of performing time-saving winning/losing determination processing using random numbers for normal hit determination and random numbers for determining normal symbols. Furthermore, the conditions for determining that the time-saving win-lose determination process is not limited to the above conditions, can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving hit", the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S2023 in FIG. And when the game ball entering the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 2152 is opened, whether or not the time saving control is executed and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of the opening of the accessory. It is better to Then, the jackpot game control process is executed without detecting the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the accession hit and the V attacker 2152 has opened. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time saving control and the number of times of time saving based on the "time saving win" if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". However, the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving loss", the result of the special symbol winning determination process is the opening hit, and the game ball entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens. does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
When executing the time-saving win-lose determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the time-saving win-lose determination random number obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting port, the main CPU provides the start information of the special symbol. In the same way, it is better to reserve the random number value for the time saving judgment that was obtained.

In addition, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win-lose determination process immediately after extracting the random number to be used for the time-saving win-lose determination process (for example, before being suspended), or suspend the extracted random number, The time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state that can execute time-saving win-lose determination processing)
The time-saving hit/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or the game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). Also, for example, the conditions for executing the time-saving win-lose determination process, such as executing the time-saving win-lose determination process in any game state or executing the time-saving win-lose determination process only in a specific game state, are determined in advance. It may be so that the time-saving win-lose determination process is executed when the conditions are satisfied.

(Aspect of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and when time-saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to ON. In this case, when the 1st time saving flag is set to ON, and when the 2nd time saving flag is set to ON, it is good to perform time saving control with a different function. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both special figure shortening control and electric sapo control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, special figure shortening control and electric sapo Only one of the controls can be performed. Also, when the first time saving flag is set to ON, control to the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, and the second time saving flag is turned on If it is set to , it may be controlled to the second time-saving game state in which only the electric sapo control is performed out of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, for example, it may be determined based on the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is executed It may be determined according to the game state when it is played.

(Time saving number of times set at time saving hit)
It is preferable that the number of times of time saving set when the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, not limited to this, for example, if a plurality of time saving hit-or-loss judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the number of time saving times to be set to the game state when the time saving hit-or-fall judgment process is performed Instead or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination. For example, if the random number value for time saving hit/loss determination extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first time saving hit determination value data, the number of time saving times is determined to be "100", and the second time saving is determined. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of times of time saving to be "50".

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may newly set the number of times of time saving determined based on the 'time saving hit' instead of the remaining number of times of saving time (that is, reset the remaining number of times of saving time). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of times of saving time is greater or less than the remaining number of times of saving time, and the range of game characteristics is expanded, and the time saving game state with the time saving flag turned on is interesting. It is possible to make it have and increase interest.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction win" to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of times of time saving does not become less than the current remaining number of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the game state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit ”, the main CPU replaces the number of times of time saving determined based on the “time saving hit” with the remaining number of times of time saving and newly sets the number of time saving times determined based on the “time saving hit” to the number of time saving remaining. Among the processing to be added to the number of times, any one may be determined in advance, and the number of times of working hours may be set in a mode that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine that performs time saving control with different functions when the first time saving flag is set on and when the second time saving flag is set on, time saving win-lose determination processing If the result is "time saving hit", the main CPU, the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are time saving control of the same function and time saving of different functions You may make it change the process which sets the number of times of time saving with the case of control. For example, if the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function of time saving control, the number of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" to the remaining number of time saving In addition, if the time saving control that is executed based on the time saving control being executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" is a time saving control with a different function, instead of the time saving remaining number of times that is being executed, based on the "time saving hit" You may make it newly set the number of times of time saving determined by (that is, reset the remaining number of times of time saving). In addition, if the time-saving control that is executed based on the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control that is executed based on the "time-saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time-saving times during execution are consumed, time-saving based on the "time-saving hit" You may make it perform control.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is set based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "hit", the number of times of time saving may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time saving to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set to ON even though the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit". In addition, when the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process performed during the execution of the time-saving control is 'time-saving win' and the number of times of time-saving is set to '0', the time-saving control being executed is terminated.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is the special symbol winning determination process in the same frame. If performed earlier, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, invalidate the "time-saving hit" (based on "time-saving hit" It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set to ON based on the winning time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to ON depending on the type of big win).

Moreover, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving winning" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, in the same frame, if the time saving hit/loss determination process is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination process, based on the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process, immediately (before the special symbol hit determination process is performed) even if the time saving control is started. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number used for the time saving judgment process and the execution of the time saving judgment process, and it is possible to enhance the interest becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win-lose determination process becomes "time saving hit", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU executes the fanning effect of whether or not the time saving control is started, It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the fact that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends Based on, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the big hit. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a per access (a per access for opening the time saving control) and when the V attacker 2152 opens, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 Also when big-hit game control is performed by having detected, it is good to start time saving control based on the end of big-hit game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the role release hit Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU is based on the closure of the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the time saving based on the "time saving winning". It is good to start controlling.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the set number of time saving times", "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed , When it is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or "When the number of times of time reduction is set to 0 times even though the result of the time reduction hit/loss determination process was a time reduction hit" etc. is.

In addition, in the game state in which the time saving control is executed, if the small hitting game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control continues to be executed even after the small hitting game control process ends be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by deriving a stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a prize open hit. However, when the V-attacker 2152 is opened, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control processing is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to operate even after the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to implement time saving control.

(Time-saving number of rewrites)
In the game state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, time-saving game state, etc.) in which time-saving control is executed, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, and when the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination processing is "time-saving hit", the main CPU , You may rewrite the number of times of working hours, and do not rewrite the number of times of working hours (that is, to execute the time saving control until the number of times of working time saving control is digested).

In addition, when rewriting the number of times of time saving, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of times of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" at the time when the number of times of time saving in the time saving control being executed is consumed, It may be set at the time of execution of the special design hit determination process, it may be set at the time of starting or stopping the variable display of the special design, it may be set at the time of the time saving success determination process, and it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving hit-loss determination processing, the time saving number of times determined based on the "time saving hit" will be overwritten to the time saving number of times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, one of "rewrite the number of time saving" and "add to the previous number of time saving" may be determined in advance, and the number of time saving may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When the time reduction win-lose determination processing is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port or the second start port, the time reduction win-lose determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port (hereinafter referred to as "the 1 time reduction hit/loss determination process") and time reduction hit/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time reduction hit/loss determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port, the time reduction hit probability may be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed, or the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when it is done, or when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed and the second time saving win/loss determination process The time saving hit probability may be the same or almost the same probability as in the case where is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win-lose judgment processing)
A time saving judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time saving judgment process (whether it is a time saving hit or a time saving loss) or / and the time saving number determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process (time saving hit) A win-time reduction number display unit for displaying may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section may be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU, for example, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, even if it displays the number of times of time saving determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process and / and the time saving hit. good.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, It may be longer than the interval time when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the winning of the opening of the role and the big winning game control process is not executed based on the opening of the role, the main CPU 2201 performs the time saving winning/losing. When the result of the judgment process is "time saving win", the interval time after the action for opening the accessory is longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving win-lose judgment process is "time saving loss". may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and offer benefits (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. (balls, prize data, etc.) can be applied to all types of gaming machines. In other words, a game is played by shooting or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by physical actions of the player, and the game media are paid out based on the results of the game. Alternatively, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media owned by the player and enable a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, the game media held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game media management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game media.

In the case of a gaming machine in which a game is played by circulating enclosed game balls, the game balls as game media are not discharged to the outside so that the game can be played. Prize ball data as a game medium is provided instead. In this specification, "game value to be paid out" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, when the player wins a winning slot with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is provided in the case of an enclosed game machine. Also, the game value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media management device connected to the main control circuit manages, the game media management device is a device provided in the gaming machine having ROM and RWM (or RAM), and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to a game medium handling device and a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media for the game medium lending operation (that is, when the player performs the game medium insertion operation). or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (the winning combination is established) (Acquisition action), or an action of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media, the owned game medium management device displays the number of owned game media on the front of the pachinko machine. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to being directly operated by the player, it has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between it and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As the game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent from the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. In addition, it is also possible to eject cash or a cash equivalent instead of just ejecting the recording medium, or to store the information in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted, and the member recording medium is stored so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to execute a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In the above description, the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, but the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine using game balls, or a sealed game machine. It can also be provided so that the game media of the player can be managed.

Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. can be reduced, the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed type game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and a communication cable for transmitting data related to the increase or decrease in the game medium associated with consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected to enable transmission and reception by optical signals via a game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the shooting device is positioned above the game area and shoots game balls as game media from above to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the waiting state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Also, a subtraction sensor is provided on the route from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of possessed balls. In this way, since game balls as game media are shot from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in enclosed type game machines. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the shooting device. Game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed type game machine, and a fixed number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. In addition, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism for taking in the game balls polished outside the game machine are provided without providing a ball polishing device. good too. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the game area.

Since game balls are not ejected to the outside of the game machine, enclosed type game machines are not provided with an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the closed-type game machine, the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the game is played. In an enclosed type game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a ball by lending it from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. As game balls are shot from the shooting device, the balls in the player's possession are consumed, and the number of balls in the player's possession decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective prize winning openings provided in the game area, the number of payouts according to the conditions set according to the winning openings is performed, and the number of possessed balls is increased. Furthermore, the number of balls in possession is increased by lending out from the game medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game is over, all the game values (that is, the balls in possession) stored in the enclosed gaming machine are cleared, or some of the balls in possession are transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls is reduced. . Furthermore, a game machine of the type in which game balls are shot from above the game area does not have the concept of foul balls. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine that shoots game balls from below, the number of held balls increases or decreases depending on the presence or absence of foul balls. It should be noted that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates consumption, lending, and payout of held balls. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, or payout. Also, "data on increase/decrease in game media associated with consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on decrease in possessed balls due to shooting game balls and increase in possessed balls due to lending and payout.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of game balls through the winning openings. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is shot, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held by the player to the game medium management device. The liquid crystal display device is positioned above the gaming machine and receives requests for conversion of game value managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. These requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls in possession. Here, the "game value" includes money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In this embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted number of balls in hand can be used for prize exchanges and the like in a game arcade where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, this backup power supply may be used to continuously detect opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the game machine when the power is turned on.

It should be noted that the enclosed type game machine only needs to be configured so that the player cannot touch the game balls, for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the game machine without circulating the game balls in the island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate in the island facility but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed game machines.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, the game This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

In this manner, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determines whether or not they are the same. It is possible to confirm that the message has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section for modulating a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation section is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to have a demodulator for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission/reception signal between the game machine and the game media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher the signal. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission signal is received from the transmission source, the transmission destination transmits an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible not only to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game media management device, and the main control circuit and the game media management device are connected via the frame control circuit. A communication connection may be established with the game media management device. Also, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game media management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpot symbols. Take action to prevent it from happening.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the other symbol is displayed. The special symbols are forcibly stopped with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a big hit symbol, the state is shifted from the general game state to the big win game state as described above. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game is executed. Based on the transition from the state to the small winning game state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning pattern), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning game state to the general game state ( Based on the end of the small winning game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning pattern, the general game state shifts to the small winning game state as described above. None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are being performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU is under variable display. As for the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the group of LEDs is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the clocking of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine have been described as examples. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technique described in this specification is applied to a pachinko gaming machine or a pachislot machine, an effect accompanied by a temporary stop of symbols may include a temporary stop of the reels. The "stop" of the symbol includes a permanent stop and a temporary stop, and any interpretation of the "stop" is acceptable. Further, the operation for playing the game by the player may be operation of a lever, a handle, a button, or the like, touch, or the like.

In a pachinko game machine, there are cases where the administrator of the gaming machine sets effects, etc. by operating the effect buttons, but there are cases where the player starts the game after setting the effect buttons. be. In this case, it is conceivable that an operation by the manager may result in an operation for the player to play a game. Similarly, in pachislot, it may be assumed that the administrator performs a 2-bet game and the player performs a 3-bet game in a state where the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established. In this case, the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game. bet game, etc.), selection of a hole menu, etc., may be operations for the player to play the game.

In the pachinko machine, the game method of the player is managed by notifying whether the game is right-handed or left-handed under the control of the main CPU. The fact that it is unintended may be notified by the control of the sub CPU.

In pachislot, there are cases where the player's playing method, such as the player's pressing order (assist), is managed by the control of the main CPU. The unintended game may be notified by the control of the sub CPU.

Further, in the pachinko game machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be mounted on one board. In pachi-slot, there may be no payout control board, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the main control board and the payout control board may be separated.

In addition, pachislot machines usually have a rectangular housing containing devices necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed to the housing. It is possible. On the other hand, in pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as the housing, the outer frame and the base door are regarded as the housing, and the entire game machine consisting of the outer frame, the base door, the glass door and the plate unit is regarded as the housing. is possible. Between the housing and the door, or between the frame and the door, there may be a unit provided with various control boards, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc., or a door, a frame, a housing, etc. Various control boards, display means, decorations, accessories, etc. may be present in the device.

[5. First embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko game machine will be explained. The fourth pachinko machine has a first embodiment and a second embodiment, and both of these embodiments are called a 1-type 2-type mixing machine, similar to the third pachinko machine. It is a pachinko machine. The first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko machine differ from the third pachinko machine in terms of the basic specifications of playability, and along with that, the various members placed in the game area are different. The configuration is partly different.

It should be noted that the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine do not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, as in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a priority variation machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is preferentially established over the starting condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

First, after describing the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Hereinafter, in describing the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are assigned to the same constituent elements as the first pachinko game machine, and the configuration and A detailed description of the processing is omitted.

<First Embodiment of Fourth Pachinko Machine>
[5-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 108, the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 3010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 3010 includes a game panel 3100, various members are arranged on the game panel 3100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side surface of the game panel 3100, in which the shot game ball can roll and flow. .

As shown in FIG. 108, the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly includes the first passage gate 3126A and the second pass gate 3126A compared to the first pachinko game machine. The passage gate 3126B, the first starting port 3120, the second starting port 3140, the normal electric accessory unit 3145, the special electric accessory unit 3130, and the V winning device 3150 are different in configuration and arrangement. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

(first passage gate)
The first passage gate 3126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can pass through (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to pass through). ing. The first pass gate 3126A is provided with a first pass gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 109 described later) for detecting passage of a game ball to the first pass gate 3126A.

(Second passage gate)
The second passage gate 3126B is arranged below the normal electric accessory unit 3145, which will be described later, in the right area 107, and is arranged so that only right-handed game balls can pass through. The second pass gate 3126B is provided with a second pass gate switch 3127B (see later-described FIG. 109) for detecting passage of a game ball to the second pass gate 3126B.

When the game ball passes through the first pass gate 3126A or the second pass gate 3126B (hereinafter also referred to as "pass gates 3126A, 3126B" as appropriate), normal symbol lottery and normal symbol variable display are performed. In this embodiment, no prize ball is paid out even if the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

Also, the passage gates 3126A and 3126B may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating, the accessory continuous operating device may be operated upon passage of the game ball through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B to shift to the jackpot game state.

This is the same for the passage gate 126 of the first pachinko game machine and the passage gate 2126 of the third pachinko game machine described above.

(First start port)
The first starting port 3120 is the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the first pass gate 3126A (that is, directly under the first pass gate 3126A), and the distance of about one game ball from the first pass gate 3126A are placed in close proximity to each other. Furthermore, the first starting port 3120 is arranged so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the game ball with a game nail or the like, except for the game ball that has passed through the first passage gate 3126A.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed, or a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls) is paid out. Become.

In this embodiment, the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passage gate 3126A is approximately one game ball, but it may be approximately one or two game balls. Essentially, the shorter the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passage gate 3126A, the better. Between the 1 starting port 3120 and the first passage gate 3126A, it is desirable to open a distance of at least one game ball.

Thus, by arranging the first starting port 3120 close to directly under the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting port 3120. Then, the start timing of the variable display of normal symbols triggered by the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, and the start of the variable display of the special symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 3120 It is possible to coordinate with the timing (the variable display can be started substantially at the same time).

In addition, by arranging the first starting port 3120 so that it is difficult to enter a game ball other than the game ball that has passed through the first passage gate 3126A, although the variable display of normal symbols is not performed, the variable display of special symbols is performed. To prevent the event of only being performed, the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 3120, and the ordinary The variable display of the pattern can be operated as a set.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 3140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can be entered (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter).

When the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, or a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out. Become.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 includes a winning opening for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when the game balls enter, a switch for detecting the entry of game balls into the winning opening, and a normal electric role. It is a unit body integrated with the object 3146 and is arranged in the right area 107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 3140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 3141 .

The normal electric accessory 3146 includes a projecting plate-type shutter 3147 for normal electric power that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for normal electric power 3148 (see FIG. 109 described later) for operating the shutter 3147 for normal electric power. The normal electric accessory 3146, that is, the normal electric shutter 3147, has an open state in which a game ball can or easily enter the second start port 3140, and a game ball cannot or cannot enter the second start port 3140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states.

Specifically, the general electric shutter 3147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion arranged in front of the entrance of the second start port 3140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second start port 3140. consists of When the general electric shutter 3147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry preventing portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball to prevent the game ball from entering the second start port 3140. Without hindrance, the plate-like entrance ball guide part protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and moves the received game ball to the second 2 Guide to the starting port 3140 . On the other hand, when the general electric shutter 3147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second starting port 3140. The plate-like ball-entering guide portion that inhibits ball-entering is buried in the surface of the game panel 3100 and causes the game ball that has flowed down to the right region 107 to flow downward without receiving it. It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 3147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 includes a large winning slot 3131, a large winning slot count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109 to be described later) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the large winning slot 3131, and a special electric role product 3133. It is an integrated unit body. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is arranged below in the right area 107 .

The big winning opening 3131 is arranged in the right area 107 so that a right-handed game ball can be entered (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter). However, it is not limited to this, and a large winning opening into which a left-handed game ball can enter is arranged, or a large winning opening into which a game ball can enter is arranged in the upper part of the center accessory 115. You may make it so.

The big winning opening 3131 is a winning opening that is opened so that up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be entered when controlled to a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. be. When game balls enter the big winning hole 3131, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

The transition of the big winning port 3131 from the closed state to the open state is the first route when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is "big hit" is derived, and the special symbol determination. V-attacker 3152 is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the above is "a winning prize", and the game ball that has entered the released V-attacker 3152 is a V winning opening in the V-attacker 3152. This is the time of the second route when winning a prize.

The special electric accessory 3133 includes a special electric shutter 3134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 3135 (see FIG. 109 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 3134 . The special electric accessory 3133, that is, the special electric shutter 3134, has an open state in which a game ball can or easily enter the big winning opening 3131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the big winning opening 3131. It is configured to be able to transition to and from states.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 3134 is composed of an open/close door pivotally supported at the bottom. When the special electric shutter 3134 is in an open state, the opening/closing door falls to the front side to open the large winning opening 3131, receive the game balls flowing down to the right side area 107, and pass the received gaming balls to the large winning opening 3131. Induce. On the other hand, when the special electric shutter 3134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted to close the big winning opening 3131, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 3131.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 3150 is provided downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 3145 in the right region 107 . The V winning device 3150 has an opening/closing winning port 3151 that is open so that a game ball can enter inside the V winning device 3150, a V attacker 3152 that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 3151, and this V attacker 3152. A V-attacker solenoid 3154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning port 3151, a V attacker count switch 3153 that detects the entry of a game ball into the opening and closing winning port 3151, and from the opening and closing winning port 3151 to the inside of the V winning device 3150 A game that enters inside the V winning device 3150 from the V winning opening 3155 through which the entered game ball can pass, the V winning opening switch 3156 that detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 3155, and the opening/closing winning opening 3151 A loss port 3157 through which game balls that have not entered the V winning port 3155 among the balls can pass, a V shutter 3158 for opening and closing the V winning port 3155, and the V shutter 3158 to open and close the V winning port 3155. A V-shutter solenoid 3159 is provided. Note that the V winning device 3150 may be provided upstream of the normal electric accessory unit 3145 or may be provided in the left area 106 .

The V-attacker 3152 is made of a protruding plate-shaped plate-like member that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. , the V-attacker 3152 is retracted backward to allow the entry of game balls into the open/close winning opening 3151, or to easily shift to an open state.

The open/close winning opening 3151 is a winning opening that is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 at the time of "accessory opening hit", and up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be entered per opening. It has become. When a game ball enters the opening/closing winning hole 3151, the value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added, and predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

V winning a prize mouth 3155, V attacker 3152 opens, on condition that the game ball passes within specified time (for example, 4000msec), through the above-mentioned 2nd route, it becomes the opportunity which is controlled to big hit game state. This is the prize-winning entrance.

When the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the release of the V attacker 3152 when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155 is regarded as the first round, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155. After that (after the second round), a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 3131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, so that the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued, even after the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155 (after the second round), A round game in which the V-attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state may be performed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 3133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 3134 is in an open state), etc., the V winning opening and the big hit game The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 3134 is opened, and the game ball enters the V prize opening 3155 provided inside the special electric accessory 3133. enters, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state through the second route).

The losing opening 3157 is configured such that a game ball that has entered the interior of the V winning device 3150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 3155 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss port 3157 is discharged out of the machine. In addition, all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 pass through the loss opening 3157, and if there is no game ball passing through the V winning opening 3155, the game ends without being controlled to the big win game state. becomes.

V-shutter 3158 operates a V-shutter solenoid 3159 (see FIG. 109 to be described later) to operate a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through V-winning opening 3155, and a game ball opening to V-winning opening 3155. It operates between an open mode in which the passage of the ball is possible (or easy).

[5-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 109, the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game and a It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling effects, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 is partially different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine includes a general electric solenoid 3148, a special electric solenoid 3135, a V attacker solenoid 3154, a V shutter solenoid 3159, a first start switch 3121, a second The configurations of the starting gate switch 3141, the first passage gate switch 3127A, the second passage gate switch 3127B, the big winning gate count switch 3132, the V attacker count switch 3153, and the V winning gate switch 3156 are partially different. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

Further, since the fourth pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment does not execute probability variation control, the probability variation notification display unit 167 in the first pachinko gaming machine is not provided. Furthermore, as will be described later, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine does not have a holding function for holding the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, so in the first pachinko gaming machine The normal symbol reservation display portion 162, the first special symbol reservation display portion 165, and the second special symbol reservation display portion 166 are not provided.

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 3148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 3147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 3148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 3147 advances forward to open the second start port 3140 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the solenoid 3148 . If not (if it is OFF), the general electric shutter 3147 is retracted rearward to close the second starting port 3140 .

(solenoid for special train)
A special electric solenoid 3135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates a special electric shutter 3134 consisting of an opening/closing door. When the special electric solenoid 3135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the special electric shutter 3134 is tilted forward to open the big winning opening 3131, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF) Then, the special electric shutter 3134 is inverted backward to close the big winning opening 3131 .

(Solenoid for V attacker)
The V-attacker solenoid 3154 is an electromagnetic solenoid that activates the V-attacker 3152 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the V-attacker solenoid 3154 (it is ON), the V-attacker 3152 retreats backward to open the open/close winning port 3151. If the main CPU 201 does not energize ( If it is OFF), the V-attacker 3152 advances forward to close the open/close winning port 3151 .

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 3159 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 3158 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the V-shutter solenoid 3159 (it is ON), the V-shutter 3158 is retracted backward to open the V winning port 3155. If the main CPU 201 does not energize the solenoid 3159 ( If it is OFF), the V shutter 3158 is moved forward to close the V prize opening 3155 . Further, in this embodiment, the V shutter solenoid 3159 is operated 200 msec after the open/close winning opening 3151 is opened to open the V winning opening 3155 . That is, the V winning opening 3155 is opened after 200 msec from the opening of the opening/closing winning opening 3151.

(First start switch)
The first starting port switch 3121 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120 . When the first starting port switch 3121 detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the first special symbol, and converts the starting information of the extracted special symbol to the first special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, performs the variable display process of the first special symbol, or instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to pay out a predetermined prize ball (for example, 3 game balls). .

(Second starting switch)
The second starting port switch 3141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the second starting port 3140 . When the second starting port switch 3141 detects the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the second special symbol, and converts the starting information of the extracted special symbol to the second special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, performs the variable display process of the second special symbol, or instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to pay out a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball). .

(First pass gate switch)
The first passage gate switch 3127A is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A. When the first passage gate switch 3127A detects the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbols, and applies the extracted starting information of the normal symbols to the hit determination process of the normal symbols. It is used, and the variable display processing of the normal pattern is performed.

(Second pass gate switch)
The second pass gate switch 3127B is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the second pass gate 3126B. When the second passage gate switch 3127B detects passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbols, and applies the extracted starting information of the normal symbols to the hit determination process of the normal symbols. It is used, and the variable display processing of the normal pattern is performed.

When the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A, and when the passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B is detected by the second passage gate switch 3127B. The hit determination process of the same normal symbol is performed without distinction. Further, even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gates 3126A, 3126B is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B (hereinafter also referred to as "passage gate switches 3127A, 3127B"), the prize No balls are paid out.

(Grand prize mouth count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 3132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 3131 . When the big winning hole count switch 3132 detects that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 3131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls game balls) is instructed to the payout/launch control circuit 400.

(V attacker count switch)
The V-attacker count switch 3153 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of game balls into the open/close winning opening 3151 . When the V-attacker count switch 3153 detects that a game ball has entered the opening/closing winning hole 3151, the main CPU 201 adds the value of the V-attacker winning counter and pays out predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls). It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the processing. When the V-attacker winning prize counter reaches a specified value, the V-attacker solenoid 3154 operates the V-attacker 3152 to close the opening/closing winning port 3151 even if the maximum time for opening the opening/closing winning port 3151 has not passed. will be

(V prize opening switch)
The V winning opening switch 3156 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 3155 . When the V winning opening switch 3156 detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 3155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 3152 is opened, the main CPU 201 performs transition control to the jackpot game state. It will be. Even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 3155 is detected by the V winning opening switch 3156, the winning ball is not paid out.

[5-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 120, basic specifications of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Although the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the description relating to the setting function is omitted below.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, although variable probability control is not executed, a time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared. It is possible to progress the game in the state or the time-saving game state. In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the variable probability control is not executed, but this is not essential, for example, the variable probability flag is set to ON according to the type of jackpot etc. may be executable.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, although details will be described later, the number of consecutive jackpots that have shifted to the jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving game state) is counted. It has a "limiter function" that partially regulates the game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game state when a predetermined limiter number of times is reached.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the game mode between left-handed and right-handed is appropriately changed depending on the open mode of the normal electric accessary 3146 . The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of hitting that is regarded as a regular game mode.

[5-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 110 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 110 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

In the special symbol hit determination table, data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the first start port 3120 includes "big hit", "accessory open hit" or " The range (width) of the random number value for judging the jackpot determined for the time-saving hit and the judgment value data corresponding to it ("jackpot judgment value data", "accessory open hit judgment value data", "time-saving hit judgment value data" ) is stipulated. In addition, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning to the second start port 3140, the big hit determination random number determined as "big hit" or "accessory open hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding determination value data (“jackpot determination value data”, “accessory release per determination value data”) is defined. Incidentally, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

As shown in FIG. 110, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, the main CPU 201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol big hit determination random number value. The result of the special pattern hit determination process is determined to be "big hit", "accessory release hit" or "time saving hit". In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for judging the big hit of the second special symbol. The result of the processing is determined as "jackpot" or "accessory release".

In addition, when the hit determination process of the 1st special design is performed, it may be configured such that "losing" is determined. Further, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, it may be configured so that the "accessory release hit" is not determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, it is an essential requirement that a "big hit" or a "time saving hit" is determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. However, other requirements can be freely changed in design.

Also, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, it may be configured so that "losing" is determined, but when it is determined to be "losing", the first special symbol It is preferable to set the probability to be relatively low so that the determination performed in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process. Moreover, when the hit determination process of the 2nd special design is performed, you may comprise so that "time saving hit" may be determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "jackpot" or a "accessory release hit" is determined when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed. However, other requirements can be freely changed in design.

In addition, when the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory is set to be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. should be In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may However, even if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving winning probability as a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning a role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 3152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 3150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 3155 may be changed for each set value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 3155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big hit, the probability of opening a role, the frequency of opening the V winning mouth 3155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 3152), the opening time, and the number of times of continuous time reduction By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[5-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start port 3120 and the second start port 3140 and the aforementioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting a "selected pattern command" and a "designated pattern command".

The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3. In this case, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the winning determination value data for opening the first special symbol is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, when the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" is selected as the symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 89, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning judgment value data for opening the first special symbol is obtained as a result of the winning judgment processing for the first special symbol, the special symbol judgment table shown in FIG. 111 is used as the selected symbol command , "z6"<"z5"<"z4".

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, for example, the selected symbol. "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA3" is selected as the design designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines the selected symbol. "z8" is selected as the command, and "zA4" is selected as the design designation command.

Furthermore, when the winning determination value data for opening the role product is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 , selects "z9" as the selection symbol command, and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (Fig. 12 (A ), a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to ) is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 109) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a design command. Further, in the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, and the display mode of the open-access prize are displayed. Alternatively, a display mode of failure is derived. The program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 also stores a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine.

[5-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 112 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Incidentally, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 112(a) is an example of a winning type determination table that is referred to when the limiter function is not in operation (limiter function is not in operation), and FIG. It is an example of a hit type determination table that is referred to when the function is activated).

As shown in FIG. 112, the hit type determination table is, for the selected symbol command, the opening mode of the role product opening hit, the mode of the jackpot game state, the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time saving flag and time saving count ), the mode of opening the winning prize, and the number of times of the limiter at the time of the first winning are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table, and based on the selected symbol command, the opening mode of the winning of the accessory, the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the game state after the big win game state (time saving flag and time saving number of times), The mode of opening per opening of the role item and the number of limiters are determined.

The ``open mode for winning a prize open'' indicates the mode of opening the opening/closing winning opening 3151 (opening mode of the V winning device 3150) opened at the time of ``winning a winning prize for a role product''. The "first open mode" is an opening mode in which the open/close winning opening 3151 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 200 msec in this embodiment), which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, as described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening of the opening/closing winning opening 3151, so that the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened in the first opening mode, and the game ball is released. Even if a ball enters the opening/closing winning opening 3151, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155, and from this point of view, the opening mode is disadvantageous for the player. The "second opening mode" is an opening mode in which the open/close winning opening 3151 is open for a long time (for example, 18000 msec), which is advantageous for the player. Then, when the opening and closing winning port 3151 is opened in the second open mode and the game ball enters the opening and closing winning port 3151, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the V winning port 3155. It is an opening mode that is advantageous for the person.

In the present embodiment, the opening time of the opening and closing winning port 3151 is short in the "first opening mode", and the opening time of the opening and closing winning port 3151 is long in the "second open mode". The opening time of the open/close winning port 3151 is set to be substantially the same between the "open mode" and the "second open mode", and the V shutter 3158 is easier to operate in the "second open mode" than in the "first open mode" ( By opening the V winning opening 3155, the game ball may easily pass through the V winning opening 3155).

"Aspect of jackpot gaming state" indicates an opening mode of the big winning opening 3131 opened at the time of "jackpot", and indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot in this embodiment. In addition to the number of rounds for big wins, the opening time per round and the big winning openings to be opened may be determined.

"Aspect of subsequent game state" indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, and means the setting of the "time saving flag" and the "time saving number of times". In addition, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the jackpot game state, and the 'time-saving flag' and the 'time-saving number of times' are set.

"Limiter count" indicates the number of limiters set at the time of a big hit in a state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state, B time-saving game state or C time-saving game state). The number of limiters is decremented each time a transition to a big hit game state occurs under specific conditions (A time-saving game state), and when the number of limiters becomes 0, the limiter function is activated, and the hit type is determined as shown in FIG. 112(b). A table will be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), when the selected symbol command "z4 to z6" corresponding to the "accessory hit" as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 When the ``first opening mode'' disadvantageous to the player is determined as the ``hitting opening mode'', and the selected symbol command ``z9'' corresponding to the ``accessory opening winning'' as a result of the winning determination processing of the second special symbol. , "second release mode" that is advantageous to the player is determined as "release mode per winning access".

In the present embodiment, as described above, either the "big win" or the "accessory release win" is determined in the second special symbol win determination process. Then, when the "accessory opening hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, the "second opening mode" advantageous for the player is determined, and the game ball is placed in the opening/closing winning opening 3151. It is easy to pass through the winning opening 3155, and it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the second route. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second start port 3140, it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball enters the second start port 3140. It is configured to be able to shift to a jackpot game state as a matter of course.

On the other hand, even if the "accessory prize winning" is determined as a result of the winning determination processing of the first special symbol, the "first opening mode" disadvantageous to the player is determined and the big win from the second route is determined. It is difficult to shift to the game state. Therefore, the winning of the accessory release triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated substantially in the same manner as the losing. In addition, although the accessory release hit triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 3120 is handled in the same manner as the loss, it is referred to for switching the variation pattern table described later.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "accessory hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the "open mode of the accession hit" is set as the "first prize" that is disadvantageous to the player. Although it is configured so that only the "open mode" is determined, it may be configured so that the "second open mode" that is advantageous to the player is determined. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the ``second opening mode'', which is advantageous to the player, is less likely to be selected than the ``first opening mode,'' which is disadvantageous to the player. .

Also, as shown in FIG. 112(a), when the selected symbol command "z1 to z3" corresponding to the "jackpot" as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 turns on the time saving flag. Decide to set and decide to set the number of times of time saving to 100 times. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, and determines to set the number of limiter times to 5 only in the case of a big hit in a state other than the time-saving game state A. . Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines to set the number of limiter times to 3 only in the case of a big hit in a state other than the time-saving game state A. . Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines to set the number of limiter times to 3 only in the case of a big hit in a state other than the time-saving game state A. .

In this way, in the case of a "jackpot" as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, different numbers of rounds and limiter times are set according to the selected symbol command. As a result, the profit given to the player can be differentiated for each type (symbol) of the big win, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), when the result of the first special symbol win determination process is the selected symbol command "z7" corresponding to "time saving win", the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag. is set to ON and the number of times of time saving is set to 1 time.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the time saving game state of an extremely short period is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol as compared with "big hit". will be

The hit type determination table when the limiter function is activated shown in FIG. The setting of the "number of times" is different, and the setting of the "open mode for winning the accessory" and the "mode of the jackpot game state" are the same. As shown in FIG. 112(b), since the limiter function is in operation, naturally the "limiter count" is not set.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Since there is no such thing, similarly to FIG. 112(a), a time saving flag and a time saving number of times are set.

However, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" or "accessory open hit", any selected symbol command will be accepted. Also, as a mode of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set to OFF and the number of times of time saving is not set. That is, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), the game state after the jackpot game state ends is shifted to the normal game state.

[5-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
113 to 116 are examples of the special symbol variation pattern table of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 113 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 114 is a C time saving game in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the state. Also, FIG. 115 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, and FIG. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment. 113 to 116 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 113 to 116, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the special symbol type, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the reach determination random number, the effect selection random number, and the special symbol. A symbol variation pattern and a variable display time of a special symbol are associated with each other. Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the columns of "remarks" in FIGS. 113 to 116 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the special symbol variation pattern tables of FIGS. The variation pattern of the special symbols and the variable display time of the special symbols are determined based on the result of determination processing, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection.

Further, when determining the variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . In addition, the variation pattern command is a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 3120, or a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 3140. It is configured to be identifiable.

The jackpot type reach and jackpot type normal reach shown in the column of "remarks" in FIGS. It is a reach performance. Chance variation is a variation production that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a time saving hit.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) and the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. and a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113(3). In addition, the number of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

In the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1), after the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared (that is, the variation pattern table of the initial values), "accessories are released". After the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is stopped and displayed, after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated, the hit determination process of the first special symbol for the first time is performed. It is a variation pattern table selected after the completion (that is, after transition from the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1) to be described later).

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" for "accessing the role" is stopped and displayed. .

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113(3) is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" for "accessing the role" is stopped and displayed. .

113 (1) to (3) in the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIG. A variation pattern "01H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance variation A") whose display time is longer than the variable display time of normal symbols, and a variation pattern "02H" whose variable display time of special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of normal symbols. (hereinafter also referred to as “chance variation B”).

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, in the normal game state, the chance variation A longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols is the second chance variation due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbols. The starting port 3140 tends to be in an unfavorable open state, and the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol for the chance variation B shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. open mode.

The variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIGS. The chance variation B that tends to open the second start port 3140 in the normal game state is advantageous, and is configured to be easily selected in the order of special symbol variation pattern table T1<special symbol variation pattern table T2<special symbol variation pattern table T3. It is

Therefore, among the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. In addition, since the selected symbol commands are configured to be easily selected in the order of "z6" < "z5" < "z4", the special symbol variation pattern table T3 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is the most selected. It is configured to be difficult to

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in C time saving game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) and the special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. There are three variation pattern tables, that is, a symbol variation pattern table C2 and a special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3). In addition, the number of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the C time saving game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) is the first special symbol command "z4" that corresponds to the selected symbol command "z4" after the normal game state has shifted to the C time saving game state. This is a variation pattern table selected after the symbols are stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114(2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" for "accessing the role" is stopped and displayed. .

The special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3) is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" for "accessing the role" is stopped and displayed. .

Also in the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time saving game state shown in FIGS. When the result of the hit determination process of 1 special design is "time saving hit", the variable display time of the special design is longer than the variable display time of the normal design "chance variation A" and the variable display time of the special design is the normal design. Any variation pattern of "chance variation B" shorter than the variable display time of is selected.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 138, even in the C time saving game state, the chance variation A, which is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, is usually caused by the operation of the electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbols. The second starting port 3140 is likely to be in a disadvantageous open state, and the chance variation B shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is usually caused by the operation of the electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. is likely to be an advantageous open mode.

The variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the special symbols in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIGS. Chance variation B, in which the second starting port 3140 tends to be in an advantageous open mode in the C time-saving gaming state, is likely to be selected in the order of special symbol variation pattern table C1<special symbol variation pattern table C2<special symbol variation pattern table C3. It is configured.

For this reason, among the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table C3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. Thus, since the selected symbol commands are configured to be easily selected in the order of "z6" < "z5" < "z4", the special symbol variation pattern table C3 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is the most It is configured to be difficult to be selected.

In addition, the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 113 and the variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the special symbols in the C time-saving game state shown in FIG. Although common, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is the "accessory hit". That is, in the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIG. is determined to be a long-variation performance with a very long variation time of, for example, 500000 msec or 600000 msec. This is because, in the normal game state, basically the game ball does not enter (pass through) the second start port 3140, but if an unforeseen situation occurs and the game ball enters the second start port 3140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous person even if the prize is won, but it is not always essential to do so.

For this reason, the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the normal game state shown in FIG. 113 and the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the C time saving game state shown in FIG. 114 are common. may be adopted.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in A reduced working hours gaming state or B reduced working hours gaming state)
The variation pattern table A of special symbols shown in FIG. 115 is a variation pattern table selected when being controlled to the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state.

The special symbol variation pattern table A is configured such that the variable display time of the special symbol is relatively short except when the result of the hit determination process is "big hit". As a result, in the time-saving game state A or the time-saving game state B, the game ball passes through the V winning port 3155 in the opening/closing winning port 3151 to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route in a short time. can be done.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated)
The special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1) is a specific variation pattern table selected in the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. be.

In the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1), when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the second start port 3140 is an advantageous opening mode in the normal game state. The configuration is such that the chance variation B, which is likely to be, is always selected.

When the chance variation B is selected in the normal game state, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous open mode, and the game ball easily enters the second starting port 3140. And, in the present embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is easy to transition to the big hit game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball is the second By entering the start hole 3140, it is possible to shift to a big hit game state.

For this reason, even if the continuous game in the time-saving game state is completed by the operation of the limiter function, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state is "time-saving hit", again Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 is configured so that the chance variation B is always selected when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", It may be configured such that chance variation A, which tends to cause the second starting port 3140 to be in an unfavorable open mode, is selected with a lower probability than chance variation B.

In addition, after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated and after the first special symbol hit determination process is completed, the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1) Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) is selected.

The special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116 (2) is a modification of the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. , a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table Z2 is configured to select the chance variation A with a probability of 20% and the chance variation B with a probability of 80% when the result of the win determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving win". are doing.

Even in this way, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state is "time saving hit", the probability of moving to the big win game state via the second route again. is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol variation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 are variation pattern tables selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. Not limited to the first time, for example, in the case of having a special symbol reservation function, it may be a variation pattern table selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to the fourth time, or up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times The variation pattern table may be selected based on the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the chance variation A and the chance variation B are set to one, but based on the variable display time of the normal symbol, special It comprises a plurality of chance variation groups A in which the variable display time of patterns is longer than the variable display time of normal symbols and a plurality of chance variation groups B in which the variable display time of special patterns is shorter than the variable display time of normal patterns. good too.

[5-3-5. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 117 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random value extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B. It is a table referred to when determining "normal design per" or "losing" by lottery based on and.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117, the game state, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (width), and the normal symbol hit determination value data ("normal symbol hit" or "losing"). are defined in association with each other.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117, and determines the normal symbol hit determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value is any one of 0 to 89 as "normal symbol win", and sets the win/lose determination value data. "Normal per design judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 90 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal winning symbol", and sets the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 89, determines that it is a “normal symbol hit”, and sets the hit/lose determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 90 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 89, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 90 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state (selection shown in FIG. 117 rate (approximate)) is the highest.

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time saving game state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal game state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time saving game state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the normal game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not be changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the normal game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[5-3-6. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 118 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the hit/lose determination value data described above and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B. It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit". "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be.

In the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, the normal symbol per determination value data ("normal symbol per" or "losing"), normal symbol random number value, and normal symbol per selection symbol command are associated with each other. stipulated by Incidentally, the normal symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, and determines the normal winning select symbol command based on the normal symbol winning determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command at normal symbol hit if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29. Select "fz1" as the normal symbol random number value of 30 to 69, then select "fz2" as the selected symbol command when the normal symbol is per normal symbol, and the normal symbol random number value is 70 to 99 If it is either, "fz3" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning", regardless of the game state, the hit/lose determination value data (normal symbol hit determination process result) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, it is configured to be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 117), and determines win/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 118), the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but it is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[5-3-7. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 119 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 119 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal per symbol type determination table is a normal electric role as an opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 according to the game state and the normal symbol per selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. It is referenced when determining the release pattern of the object 3146 .

In the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 119, the game state, the selection symbol command at normal per symbol, and the release pattern as the release mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 119, and determines the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 based on the game state and the selection symbol command for normal winning symbols. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 3146 release pattern.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201, in the case of the normal game state, if it is a selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning, the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is any of the selection symbol commands at the time of normal symbol winning. is determined to be a first opening time of 200 msec, no waiting time, and no second opening.

In addition, in the case of the normal game state, the first open time may be varied according to the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning. For example, in the case of the normal game state, if the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, is set to 200 msec for the first opening time, and the normal symbol hit is performed. When the time selection symbol command is "fz2", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, is set to 250 msec for the first opening time, and when the normal symbol per time selection symbol command is "fz3", normal The opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the electric accessory 3146, may be set to 300 msec for the first opening time, and may be set to 0 for the second opening time regardless of the selected symbol command at the time of any normal symbol winning.

Further, in the case of the time saving game state A, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, to the first opening time of 2000 msec. , a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 2000 msec. Further, in the case of the time saving game state A, if the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 2500 msec. , a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 2500 msec. Further, in the case of the time saving game state A, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 3000 msec. , a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 3000 msec.

In addition, in the case of the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, to 1. It is determined that the opening time for the first time is 2500 msec, no waiting time, and no opening for the second time. In addition, in the case of the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, to 1. The opening time for the first time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the opening time for the second time is 2000 msec. In addition, in the case of the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, when the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, to 1. The opening time for the first time is set to 2500 msec, the wait time is set to 600 msec, and the opening time for the second time is set to 2500 msec.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the selected symbol command (for example, "fz1") at the time of winning the normal symbol is the same, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is configured to be different according to the game state. ing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol win determination process in the normal game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the opening of the normal electric accessory 3146 in each game state. Among the patterns, the most advantageous degree becomes the disadvantageous aspect. Incidentally, the degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting port 3140 when the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the most advantageous among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 3146 in each game state. The degree becomes an advantageous aspect.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time reduction game state is "normal symbol hit" is the normal symbol hit determination process result in the C time reduction game state. The degree of advantage is the same as the open pattern of the ordinary electric accessary 3146 in the case of "ordinary winning pattern", but it is not limited to this.

[5-3-8. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 120 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120 includes a game state, a normal symbol effect selection random number extracted when a game ball passes through passage gates 3126A and 3126B, a normal symbol variation pattern, and a normal symbol. is associated with the variable display time of Incidentally, the normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B, the normal symbol variation. A pattern and a variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After determining the variation pattern of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the normal game state or C time-saving game state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 10000 msec regardless of whether the normal symbol effect selection random number is 0 to 99.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is one of 0 to 89, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. , the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any of 80 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. be.

Thus, the variable display time of the normal symbols per one variable display is the shortest expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the A short-time game state among the variable display times of the normal symbols in each game state. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time until the normal electric accessary 3146 is released is the shortest among the game states.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state and the C time saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is fixed at 10000 msec. Therefore, in the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, as described above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the normal symbol variable display time The longer chance variation A has a variable display time of 13000 msec longer than 10000 msec, and the chance variation B shorter than the variable display time of normal symbols has a variable display time of 9000 msec shorter than 10000 msec. Details will be described later using FIGS. 137 and 138, but from the relationship between the game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol, the normal electric role as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 The object 3146 opening pattern (opening mode of the second starting port 3140) will change.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the switch input detection process are partially different, the other processes are the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the switch input detection process will be described below, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIG. 42 , FIG. 133), etc.), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[5-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S3001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S3001, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S3001 when executing the special symbol control process.

At S3002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded at S3001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

When it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S3002), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S3002 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display.

When it is determined in S3003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display (NO determination in S3003), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is to start variable display.

If it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol does not start variable display (NO determination in S3004), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process, and the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol is to start variable display (when S3004 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3005.

Returning to S3003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is to start variable display (when S3003 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3005.

At S3005, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S3003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S3001 to S3005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S3002 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol to be processed when S3003 is YES determination, and the first special symbol when S3004 is YES determination. A special design is a processing object. In addition, when the control state number is not 0 (when S3002 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is to be processed for the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numbers (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 122 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S3011).

If it is determined in S3011 that the special symbol wait time is not 0 (NO in S3011), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S3011), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3012.

At S3012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S3012, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3013. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S3013 based on the control state number read in the process of S3012.

At S3013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S3013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3014.

In S3014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S3014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3015.

At S3015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S3015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3016.

In S3016, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. The process of S3016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3017.

At S3017, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S3017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3018.

At S3018, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This process of S3018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131 . If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3019.

At S3019, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The process of S3019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3020.

At S3020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot ending process. The process of S3020 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S3013 to S3020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[5-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S3013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S3013 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S3021).

If it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S3021), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 122 reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3021), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3022.

In S3022, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 110) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value stored in the special symbol determination area. will be In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing target, it is determined which one of the big hit, the accessory release hit, and the time saving hit. Also, if the second special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a prize release hit. After executing the process of S3022, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3023.

At S3023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a stop symbol of a special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) (for example, a big hit, a role release hit and a time saving hit). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 111) is referred to, and the special symbol random number value stored in the special symbol determination area is used to determine the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" or "designated symbol command". be done. After executing the process of S3023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit, accessory release hit and time saving hit). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 112) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S3023). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is, for example, an open-accessory hit is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning opening 3155 opened based on the open-accessory hit. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Also, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and prizes to be released, but the number of jackpots and/or prizes to be opened may be one. Furthermore, it is good also considering the kind of time reduction hit as multiple kinds. After executing the process of S3024, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3025.

In S3025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, one of the special symbol variation pattern tables of FIGS. 113 to 116 is determined according to the game state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referred to, the type of special symbol, the hit of the special symbol A variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on the result of determination processing, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection. The details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3026.

At S3026, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the determined variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 113 to 116) determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S3025). Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process of S3026, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3027.

In S3027, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, from the ceiling counter update process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter and the time saving counter A time saving counter update process for subtracting 1 is performed. Specifically, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), the specified number of times is set in the time saving number counter, and the B time saving game state is identified Time saving identification Set the number = 2, and control the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. Also, when the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag and the time saving identification number are cleared, and the transition control from the time saving game state to the normal game state is performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, which is called a one-type and two-type mixed machine, it is not controlled to a high-quality game state, so time-saving management performed in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine The processing is also different from the processing described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set on. In the first embodiment of the pachinko game machine No. 4, it is not controlled to the high certainty game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON when the variable probability flag is set to ON and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to ON only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. different in Also, in the first pachinko game machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether the probability variation flag is off (see S191), on the condition that the probability variation flag is off Although the processing of S192 is performed, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, since it is not controlled to the high accuracy game state as described above, the processing of S192 is performed without performing the processing of S191. . Then, even in the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38), without performing the process of S202, the ceiling flag turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value Controls the transition to the B time saving game state (see S208) will take place. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S3027, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3028.

At S3028, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S3014 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process ends. It will happen. After executing the process of S3028, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3029.

At S3029, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, the remaining number of time-savings, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S3029, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3030.

At S3030, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this processing, mainly update processing of various flags (for example, a time saving flag, etc.) relating to management of the game state is performed. After executing the process of S3030, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3031.

At S3031, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S3030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S3031)) during the interrupt prohibited interval. preferably in-house.

[5-4-4. Special Symbol Variation Pattern Decision Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3025 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123) will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the limiter operation flag is ON (S3025-1). In S3025-1, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3025-2 if it is determined that the limiter operation flag is ON, and advances the process to S3025-2 if it is determined that the limiter operation flag is not ON. Move to 5.

Here, the "limiter operation flag" counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving game state), and is a flag that operates when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter count. , is turned on in limiter count update processing (see FIG. 127), which will be described later.

In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter=0. In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3025-3 if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0, or to S3025-5 if it is determined that the ceiling counter is not 0. Move.

Unlike the first pachinko game machine, the "ceiling counter" updates the ceiling counter (adds 1) when the variable display of the special pattern is started, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the B time-saving game state. This is a counter for controlling In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed, the ceiling counter has not yet been incremented in the "time saving management process" of S3027, so the ceiling counter = 0 , means the time when the first variable display of the special symbols in the normal game state is started.

In S3025-3, the main CPU 201 turns off the limiter activation flag and shifts the process to S3025-4.

At S3025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) as the specific variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated. Incidentally, as shown in the modified example, the special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116(2) may be determined.

In addition, in S3025-4, the small winning symbol switching information to be described later=0 is set, and from the next time onwards, from the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 or Z2 shown in FIG. 116, the special symbol shown in FIG. Preparations are made so that the variation pattern table T1 is selected.

In S3025-5, the main CPU 201 determines which of the normal game state, the reduced working hours game state A, the reduced working hours game state B, and the reduced working hours game state C is currently being controlled. Then, get the information of the game state (time saving identification number).

In S3025-6, the main CPU 201 displays the information of the symbol stop-displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 when it was previously determined that the first special symbol win was determined to be a "accessory hit" as a result of the hit determination process. (hereinafter referred to as "small hit symbol switching information") is acquired.

The "small winning design switching information" is updated by overwriting one piece of information in the later-described overwriting process of the small winning design switching information (see S3062 in FIG. 126). When the first special symbol is determined to be a "accessory hit" as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is stopped and displayed, the small winning symbol switching information = When 0 is stored and the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" is stopped and displayed, small winning symbol switching information=1 is stored and the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is displayed. When it is stopped and displayed, the small winning symbol switching information=2 is stored.

At S3025-7, the main CPU 201 determines one variation pattern table from a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the acquired game state information and the small winning symbol switching information.

Specifically, when determining that the main CPU 201 is under control in the normal game state, the small winning symbol switching information corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is 0, as shown in FIG. 113(1). The special symbol variation pattern table T1 is determined, and when the small winning symbol switching information = 1 according to the selection symbol command "z5", the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in Fig. 113 (2) is determined and selected. When the small winning symbol switching information corresponding to the symbol command "z6"=2, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113(3) is determined.

Further, when determining that the main CPU 201 is controlled in the C time-saving gaming state, the special symbol shown in FIG. The symbol variation pattern table C1 is determined, and when the small winning symbol switching information = 1 according to the selected symbol command "z5", the special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in Fig. 114 (2) is determined, and the selected symbol When the small winning symbol switching information corresponding to the command "z6"=2, the special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3) is determined.

Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that it is controlled in the A reduced working hours gaming state or the B reduced working hours gaming state, it determines the special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115 regardless of the small winning symbol switching information. do.

In S3025-8, the main CPU 201 acquires the type of the special symbol and win/lose information (big win, bonus release win, and time saving win) as a result of the special symbol win determination process.

At S3025-9, the main CPU 201 acquires the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection from the special symbol determination area.

At S3025-10, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table determined at S3025-4 or S3025-7 above, and obtains the type of special symbol, winning/losing information, random number for reach determination, and effect selection. A variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on a random number value.

[5-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

Incidentally, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S3014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S3014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S3041).

When it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S3041), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 122 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S3041), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3042.

At S3042, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S3015 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S3042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3043.

At S3043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3043, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3044.

At S3044, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times a special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-6. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called at S3015 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S3015 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S3051).

When it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S3051), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol game determination process and performs the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S3051), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3052.

At S3052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S3052, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO in S3052), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3061. On the other hand, in S3052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (if YES in S3052), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory release, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the loss, a NO determination is made in S3052.

In S3053, the main CPU 201 decrements the number of limiters each time the game state shifts to the jackpot game state in the time saving game state A, and performs limiter number update processing for determining whether or not to activate the limiter function. The number-of-limiter update process in S3053 is a process that is updated when shifting from the first route to the jackpot game state. As will be described later, when the state is shifted from the second route to the jackpot game state, the number of limiters is updated in the V winning device opening control process (see FIG. 130) (see S3096). Details of the limiter count update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 . After executing the process of S3053, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3054.

In S3054, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of big hit game control. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S3054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3055.

In addition, in the big hit game control start setting process of S3054, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S3055, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 3131 (S3056), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3057), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S3058), game state designation parameter setting processing (S3059), and transmission reservation processing (S3060) of the big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S3058) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S3061, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a prize-open win, that is, the stop display mode indicates a time-saving win or a loss (NO in S3061), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3071. On the other hand, in S3061, when it is determined that the special symbol is a winning prize, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize (YES in S3061), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S3062. Move.

In S3062, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected symbol command when the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is determined to be "a prize released", and when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects a small winning symbol. The switching information is overwritten with ``0'' for updating, when the selected pattern command is ``z5'', the small winning pattern switching information is overwritten with ``1'' for updating, and when the selected pattern command is ``z6'', the small winning pattern is updated. Overwrite and update the switching information with "2". In addition, when it is determined as "accessory release hit" as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S3063 without overwriting the small winning symbol switching information. After executing the process of S3062, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3063.

In S3063, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of the game control per release of the accessory. In this processing, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S3063, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3064.

At S<b>3064 , the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 3150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 3150 set in this process is, for example, one. After executing the process of S3064, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3065.

At S3064, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting a winning winning prize signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3065), processing for setting the special symbol control state number to "3" (S3066), and processing for setting a game state designation parameter (S3067). ), and transmission reservation processing (S3068) of the per-accessory release start display command. By performing the process (S3066) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S3016 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3069, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a time saving open win.

In S3069, when it is determined that it is not the time saving hit, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3071. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3061 that it is a time saving win, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3070.

In S3070, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, determines the mode of the game state (time saving flag and time saving number of times) based on the selection symbol command "z7" for time saving winning, and determines the determined game. Sets the state aspect data. Specifically, while setting the time saving flag = 1 (turning on the time saving flag), setting the time saving number counter = 1, and setting the time saving identification number = 3 for identifying the C time saving game state. As for the time saving identification number, the time saving identification number=1 is set when shifting to the A time saving game state, and the time saving identification number=2 is set when moving to the B time saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the hit type determination table is provided with two hit type determination tables depending on whether or not the limiter function is activated. Refer to the hit type determination table at the time of operation. After executing the process of S3070, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3071.

At S3071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S3051 to S3071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-7. Limiter count update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, details of the limiter count update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3053 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of limiter count update processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not it is in the A time-saving gaming state (S3053-1). In S3053-1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-2 when it is determined to be in the A time saving game state, and when it is determined not to be in the A time saving game state, the process to S3053-5. Move.

In S3053-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the limiter count to update it. After executing the process of S3053-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3053-3.

In S3053-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the limiter count=0. If it is determined that the limiter count=0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3053-4. Return to the symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

Here, when it is determined that the number of limiter times=0, it means that the number of transitions to the jackpot game state has reached the limiter number of times in the time saving game state A.

At S3053-4, the main CPU 201 turns on the limiter activation flag. After executing the process of S3053-4, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter count update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

In S3053-5, the main CPU 201 performs a limiter number setting process for the first hit. The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table when the limiter function is inactive shown in FIG. 112(a), determines the number of limiters based on the selected symbol command, and sets the determined number of limiters. After executing the process of S3053-5, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter count update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-8. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3071 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S3072). Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S3072, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3073.

At S3073, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In addition, various random numbers stored in the special symbol determination area are cleared. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S3074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-9. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S3081).

If it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S3081), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 122 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S3081), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3082.

At S3082, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. (maximum opening count, etc.). In this embodiment, when the "first opening mode" is disadvantageous to the player, the opening pattern is set to perform only one opening for a maximum of 200 msec, and when the "second opening mode" is advantageous to the player, The release pattern is set so that the maximum 1800 msec release is performed only once. The opening pattern is not limited to this. For example, when the "second opening mode" is advantageous for the player, the opening may be performed for a maximum of 900 msec twice at maximum. It may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns are provided within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the role item, and among these multiple release patterns, for example, which one is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol Either one open pattern may be set.

Also, in S3082, the main CPU 201 determines the operating mode of the V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning port 3155, and sets the determined operating mode (for example, maximum opening time and maximum number of times of opening). In this embodiment, an operation mode is set in which the V winning port 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening of the V winning device 3150 . After executing the process of S3082, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3083.

At S3083, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 3155 is performed. After executing the process of S3083, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3084.

At S3084, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the processing (S3084) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the V winning device opening control processing (see S3017 in FIG. 122) is executed after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation processing. will be performed. After executing the process of S3084, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3085.

At S3085, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3085, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3086.

At S3086, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3086, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-10. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S3091).

If it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S3091), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 122). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S3091 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3092.

In S3092, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 3150 when the open/close winning opening 3151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 (see FIG. 109) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 3150 is the maximum winning number. be. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 3153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S3092, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning the V winning device 3150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S3092), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3092 that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 3150 is the maximum winning number (when S3092 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3094.

At S3093, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 3151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum open time set in the process of S3082 (see FIG. 129) has passed.

If it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has not passed (NO determination in S3093), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing ( 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has elapsed (YES in S3093), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3094.

At S3094, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the V winning device 3150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 3151). After executing the process of S3094, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3095.

At S3095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 3155 (that is, whether or not the V winning opening switch 3156 has detected it). It should be noted that the above-mentioned specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the interior of the V winning device 3150. For example, the specified time after the activation of the V attacker 3152 is defined as the above-mentioned specified time. can do.

When it is determined in S3095 that a V winning has been detected (when S3095 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3096.

At S3096, the main CPU 201 decrements the number of limiter counts each time the game state transitions to the jackpot game state in the time saving game state A, similarly to the above S3053, and performs limiter count update processing for determining whether or not to activate the limiter function. The number-of-limiter update process in S3096 is a process that is updated when the game moves from the second route to the jackpot game state. After executing the process of S3096, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3097.

In S3097, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, a V hit signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 112). You can win as many prizes as you would if you did. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. After executing the process of S3097, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3098.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V per game control of S3097, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S3098, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this processing, the opening of the V winning device 3150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 3152), which is first executed based on the winning of the accessory opening, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, the V-per-game control executed by determining that there was V winning a prize detection (S3095 was determined YES) will be started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S3098, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3099.

In S3099, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 3150 is opened (ie, the number of times the V attacker 3152 operates) (S3100), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3101). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), the game state designation parameter setting process (S3103), and the V hit start display command transmission reservation process (S3104). In addition, by performing the process (S3102) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3095, if it is determined at S3095 that V winning has not been detected (NO at S3095), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3105.

At S3105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 128 is performed. After executing the processing of S3105, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-11. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S3018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S3111).

If it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S3111), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 122). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S3111 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3112.

In S3112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. A count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S3112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3113.

At S3113, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S3113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S3113 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3114.

At S3114, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". Thus, by performing the process (S3114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot end process (see S3020 in FIG. 122) is performed after the big win opening preparation process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S3114, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3115.

At S3115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S3116). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S3116, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3113, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S3113), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3117.

In S3117, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S3117, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3118.

At S3118, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big winning hole 3131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened in the big winning game state. If the result of the special symbol win determination process is a big win and the big win game control process is started by deriving the stop display mode indicating the big win, the big win hole 3131 is used as the big win hole to be opened. It is the V winning game control started by selecting, the result of the winning determination processing of the special symbol being the winning of the opening of the role, the stop display mode indicating the opening of the role is derived, and the V win is detected. In this case, the V winning device 3150 (that is, the opening/closing winning opening 3151) may be selected instead of the large winning opening 3131 as the large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S3118, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3119.

At S3119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening 3131, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 3131, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening 3131, the number of winning balls when winning the big winning opening 3131, etc. are set. . The number of rounds corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 3131 . In addition, it is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening 3131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening 3131 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S3119, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3120.

At S3120, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 3131 or the V winning device 3150 is performed. After executing the process of S3120, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3121.

At S3121, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, by performing the processing (S3121) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the completion of the preparation processing for opening the large winning opening, the large winning opening opening control processing (see S3019 in FIG. 122) will be performed. After executing the process of S3121, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3122.

At S3122, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3123.

At S3123, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3123, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-12. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning hole opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S3131).

If it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO determination in S3131), the main CPU 201 terminates the big winning opening control process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 122). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when S3131 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3132.

At S3132, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 3131 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the big winning hole count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109) for counting the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum winning number. Incidentally, the value of the big winning hole counter counted by the big winning hole count switch 3132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S3132 that the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S3132), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3133.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3132 that the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum winning number (when S3132 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3134.

At S3133, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 3131 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S3119 in FIG. 131) has passed.

If it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 3131 has not elapsed (NO determination in S3133), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process ( 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 3131 has elapsed (YES in S3133), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3134.

At S<b>3134 , the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 3131 . After executing the process of S3134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3135.

At S3135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S3135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed again. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S3135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3136.

At S3136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3137.

In S3137, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-13. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S3141).

When it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO determination in S3141), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

When it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when S3141 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3142.

At S3142, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags are set and various counters (eg, ceiling counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing the process of S3142, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3143.

At S3143, the main CPU 201 performs state setting processing after the end of the big win. In this post-jackpot state setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the on/off state of the limiter operation flag, and if the limiter operation flag is off, determines the winning type determination table shown in FIG. If the operation flag is ON, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112(b) is determined. Then, with reference to the determined hit type determination table, the mode of the game state after the big win game state (time saving flag and the number of times of time saving) is determined, and data of the determined game state mode is set. Specifically, when the limiter operation flag is off, the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), the time saving number counter = 100 is set, and it is identified that it is in the A time saving game state. Time saving identification number = 1 is also set. Moreover, when the limiter operation flag is on, the time saving flag =0 is set (the time saving flag is turned off), and the time saving number counter=0 and the time saving identification number=0 are set. After executing the processing of S3143, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 121). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-14. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the normal symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 134, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 134 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 134 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the normal symbol waiting time is 0 (S3291).

When it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (when S3291 determines NO), the main CPU 201 normally terminates the symbol control process, and shifts the process to S41 of the main control main process (see FIG. 21). Move.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is 0 (when S3291 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3292.

At S3292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S3292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3293. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S3293 based on the control state number read out in the process of S3292.

At S3293, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S3293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3294.

In this normal symbol variable display start process, when various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 performs "normal symbol hit determination process", "normal symbol determination process", "normal symbol Design fluctuation pattern determination processing”, “ordinary drawing time saving management processing” are performed, and then processing for setting the control state number of normal design to “1” is performed. In addition, when the random number value for the normal design hit determination is not extracted (when various random values are not stored in the normal design determination area), the normal design hit determination process, normal design determination process, normal design The control state number of the normal symbol is held at "0" without performing the fluctuation pattern determination processing, etc., and waiting for the game ball to pass through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B.

In the normal symbol hit determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Win/lose judgment value data ("normal winning" or "losing") is determined based on the judgment random number value.

In the normal symbol determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol stored in the determination area, the ``selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol'' is determined.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the variation pattern of normal symbols and the variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined normal symbols, and causes the normal symbol display section 161 to start variable display of the normal symbols.

In normal pattern variable display start processing, it is determined whether or not the time saving number counter is 1 or more, and if the time saving number counter is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter. As a result of the subtraction, if the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag and the time saving identification number are cleared, and the shift control from the time saving game state to the normal game state is performed. Also, if the time saving number counter is not 1 or more, the time saving management process for the normal figure is ended, and even if the time saving number counter is 1 or more, the subtraction result from the time saving number counter is 0 Otherwise, without clearing the time saving flag and the time saving identification number, the current time saving management process for the normal map ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in any of the time-saving game state of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state, 1 is subtracted from the time-saving number counter at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol. Although it is configured, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern only when it is in the C time saving game state, and when it is in the A time saving game state and B time saving game state, the normal pattern 1 may be configured not to be subtracted from the time saving number counter at the start of the variable display.

At S3294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S3294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3295.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the normal symbol variable display time has ended, and when the normal symbol variable display time has ended, the normal symbol control state number is changed to " 2”. When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

At S3295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S3295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3296.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs determination processing of the normal symbol derivation result (for example, normal symbol win or loss). Then, when the result of the win determination process for the normal symbol is a hit for the normal symbol, the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, wait time) setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to " 3”. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number for the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146. - 特許庁

Further, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 in the normal symbol game determination process, referring to the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 3146 release pattern.

At S3296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This process of S3296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3297.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "5".

At S3297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S3297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In the normal symbol per end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of resetting (clearing) various parameters relating to the normal symbols determined in S3293 to S3296 and various random values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

As described above, the hit determination process of the normal symbol is the normal symbol variable display start process of S3293. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is based on the game state when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol) in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295. to be determined. Therefore, if the game state is changed while the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed, the normal symbols are changed based on the different game states when the variable display of the normal symbols is started and when the variable display of the normal symbols is ended. Hit determination and determination of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessories 146 are performed.

[5-4-15. Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, switch input detection processing executed by main CPU 201 at S320 during system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is provided with a holding function of holding the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number until the start condition is satisfied, compared with the first pachinko game machine. However, the processing contents of the starting opening winning detection process and the ball passing detection process are partially different. In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, compared with the first pachinko game machine, the configuration of the big winning opening count switch 3132, the V attacker count switch 3153, and the V winning opening switch 3156 is added. Therefore, some such processing is added.

First, the main CPU 201 executes a first start opening winning detection process (S3381). After executing the process of S3381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3382.

In this first start hole winning detection process, when the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 3120 is detected by the first start hole switch 3121, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the first start hole 3120. It is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in one first special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty area in one first special symbol determination area, various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the first special The symbol random number of the symbol, the reach determination random number of the first special symbol, and various random numbers such as the random number for the effect selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various random numbers are combined into one first It is stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no empty area in one first special symbol determination area, the first start opening winning detection process is terminated without extracting various random numbers.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a second start opening winning detection process (S3382). After executing the process of S3382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3383.

In this second start hole winning detection process, when the second start hole switch 3141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 3140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second start hole 3140. It is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in one second special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty area in one second special symbol determination area, various random numbers (for example, a second special symbol jackpot determination random number, a second special Pattern random number of the pattern, random number for reach determination of the second special pattern, and various random numbers such as random number for selection of the effect selection of the second special pattern, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various random numbers are combined into one second It is stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no empty area in one second special symbol determination area, the second start opening winning detection process is terminated without extracting various random numbers.

Thus, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the hit determination process of the second special symbol, only one first special symbol determination area and one second special symbol determination area are provided. However, the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) for holding the special symbol start information until the start condition is satisfied are not provided.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S3383). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S3383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (S3384). In the big winning hole passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 3131 by the big winning hole count switch 3132, it sets the payout information corresponding to the big winning hole 3131, A big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 3131 is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process of S3384, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3385.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs V-attacker passage detection processing (S3385). In the V-attacker passage detection process, the main CPU 201 detects payout information corresponding to the V winning device 3150 (open/close winning opening 3151) when the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 3131 is detected by the large winning opening count switch 3132. is set, and 1 is added to update the V attacker winning counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the V winning device 3150 (opening/closing winning opening 3151). After executing the process of S3385, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3386.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening detection processing (S3386). In the V winning opening passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 3155 is detected by the V winning opening switch 3156, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning opening passage flag. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155, the payout information is not set. After executing the process of S3386, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3387.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passage detection processing (S3387). In the ball passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A or the second passage gate 3126B is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B, one normal symbol determination area determines whether or not there is free space. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty area in one normal symbol determination area, various random numbers (for example, normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol random number and normal symbol start information) are generated. ) are extracted, and the extracted various random numbers are stored in one normal symbol start determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no empty area in one normal symbol start determination area, the ball passing detection process is terminated without extracting various random numbers.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in order to perform the normal design hit determination process, only one normal design determination area is provided, and the normal design for withholding the start information of the normal design until the start condition is satisfied. Start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4) are not provided.

[5-5. Game state transition diagram]
Next, referring to FIG. 136, the game state transition in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 136 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the game mode between left-handed and right-handed is appropriately changed depending on the open mode of the normal electric accessary 3146 .

Therefore, in the normal game state, the transition of the game state triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 3120 is performed, and in the A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state, the second start port 3140 The game state is shifted when the game ball enters the game. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the transition of the game state triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 3120 or the game ball entering the second start port 3140 will be performed. . Below, in the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the first start port 3120, and in the A time saving game state and B time saving game state, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the second start port 3140. I will explain as a premise.

As shown in FIG. 136, when a game ball enters the first start hole 3120 in the normal game state, it is determined as "big hit", "accessory open hit" or "time saving hit" (see FIG. 110).

In the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "jackpot" is determined, the game shifts to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, the game ball enters the first starting port 3120 to determine the "accessory release win", and when the game ball passes through the V winning port 3155, the state shifts to the jackpot game state, and the game ball enters. does not pass through the V winning opening 3155, the normal game state is maintained without shifting to the game state.

In addition, as described above, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "accessory win" is determined, the opening mode of the V winning device 3150 (opening and closing winning port 3151) is Since it becomes a disadvantageous opening mode, it is extremely difficult to shift to the jackpot game state. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first start port 3120 and "accessory release hit" is determined, the game state is not substantially changed, and the normal game state is maintained. .

Then, after shifting from the normal game state to the jackpot game state, it shifts to the A time-saving game state.

A time-saving game state is set to the fact that one of the conditions of "finishing the number of times of time-saving 100 times (see FIG. 112)" and "shifting to the jackpot game state" is established as the end condition of the A time-saving game state. there is

Here, "100 times of shortening of the time" means that "the total number of times of variable display of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol is counted 100 times".

In the present embodiment, "time saving number of times 100 ends" is defined as "the total number of variable displays of special symbol variable display and normal symbol variable display is counted 100 times", but "special symbol 100 times of variable display" and "100 times of variable display of normal symbols" may be satisfied, or "variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times It is also possible to use only "things".

Then, when shifting to the jackpot game state in the A time-saving game state (Consecutive play in the A time-saving game state), the number of limiters is counted, and if the number of times of the limiter is reached, the state is shifted to the normal game state, and the number of times of the limiter is reached. If not, it shifts to the A time-saving game state again.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first start port 3120 and the "time saving hit" is determined, the game state shifts to the C time saving game state.

The C time-saving game state is set to the fact that either one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, "end of time saving once (see FIG. 112)" or "shift to big hit game state", is established. there is

Here, "the number of times of time saving ends once" satisfies either of the conditions "that the variable display of the special symbol is counted once" and "the variable display of the normal symbol is counted once". means that In addition, in this embodiment, the counting of the "number of times of time reduction" is performed when the variable display of special symbols or normal symbols is performed, and if the transition to the jackpot game state is not performed, the first special symbol is counted. When the variable display is performed, or when the variable display of the normal symbols is performed for the first time, the C time-saving game state is terminated, and the state is shifted to the normal game state.

Further, after shifting from the C time-saving game state to the big win game state, it shifts to the A time-saving game state after finishing the big win game state.

Furthermore, in the normal game state, when the number of variable display times of special symbols (eg, ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value (eg, 1000 times), the normal game state is shifted to the B time-saving game state.

In the B time-saving gaming state, as the end condition of the B time-saving gaming state, one of the conditions "end of variable display of special symbols for a specified number of times (for example, 1212 times)" and "shift to big hit game state" is established. It's set for you.

In the time-saving game state B, when "end of variable display of special symbols for a specified number of times" is established, the game state is shifted from the time-saving game state B to the normal game state. In addition, after shifting from the B time-saving game state to the big win game state, it will shift to the A time-saving game state after the big win game state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, three time-saving game states, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, are provided as time-saving game states. You may comprise two time-saving game states, a game state and C time-saving game state.

[5-6. Opening mode of normal electric accessories]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in relation to the variable display time of normal symbols, the variable display time of special symbols when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit" By adjusting, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the normal electric accessory 3146 can be varied. An example of the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 will be described below.

FIG. 137 is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 138 is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Figures 137 and 138 show the variation and stop of the normal symbol display unit 161, the variation and stop of the first special symbol display unit 163, the operation and stop of the normal electric solenoid 3148 constituting the normal electric accessory 3146, The transition of the game state is shown up and down.

Also, FIGS. 137 and 138 are based on the premise that the result of the normal symbol win determination process is "normal symbol win" and the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "time saving win". Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol variable display time in the normal game state and the C time saving game state is fixed at 10000 msec (10 s) as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table of FIG.

Also, in FIGS. 137 and 138, as shown in the normal per symbol type determination table of FIG. ”, and an advantageous opening mode in which the opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the C time saving game state is long is illustrated as “long opening”. Further, the type of the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed corresponding to the "time saving hit" is illustrated as "stop with C time saving symbol".

In FIG. 137(a), in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state of FIG. It is an example of a time chart when "chance variation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 137(a), since the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, after the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (after the variation of the normal symbol ends), the game The state has shifted from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. As the release mode of the accessory 3146, "short release" in the normal game state is performed.

In FIG. 137(b), in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state of FIG. It is an example of a time chart when "chance variation B" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 137(b), since the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (before the end of the variation of the normal symbol), the game The state has shifted from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends), the game state is the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal symbol type determination table of FIG. As the opening mode of the electric accessary 3146, "long opening" in the C time saving game state is performed.

Here, in FIG. 137(b), it shows the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 when "fz1" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal symbol per time in the C time saving game state. solenoid 3148 is shown actuated (single open). When ``fz2'' or ``fz3'' is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol in the C time saving game state, the solenoid 3148 for general electricity is operated twice with a wait time interposed. This also applies to FIG. 138(b), which will be described later.

In FIG. 138(a), in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the C time-saving gaming state of FIG. It is an example of a time chart when the longer "chance variation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the variable display of one special symbol is performed in the C time-saving gaming state, the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state (end of the time-saving number of times) is established, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. While the variable display of the special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal game state, but after the variable display of the special symbols is finished and "stopped at the C time-saving design", the normal game state is changed to the C time-saving game state again. will be migrated.

Since the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, after the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (after the variation of the normal symbols ends), the game state changes from the normal game state to the C time reduction. It is transitioning to play state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. As the release mode of the accessory 3146, "short release" in the normal game state is performed.

In FIG. 138(b), in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the C time-saving gaming state of FIG. It is an example of a time chart when "chance variation B" with a short time is determined.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the variable display of one special symbol is performed in the C time saving game state, the end condition of the C time saving game state (end of the time saving number of times 1 time) is established, and the special symbol is variable At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. While the variable display of the special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal game state, but after the variable display of the special symbols is finished and "stopped at the C time-saving design", the normal game state is changed to the C time-saving game state again. will be migrated.

Since the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, before the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (before the end of the variation of the normal symbols), the game state changes from the normal game state to the C time reduction. It is transitioning to play state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends), the game state is the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal symbol type determination table of FIG. As the opening mode of the electric accessary 3146, "long opening" in the C time saving game state is performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, one of the termination conditions of the C time-saving gaming state, "finishing the number of time-saving times once," is "that the variable display of the special symbol is counted once. In addition to ", it is also a condition that "the variable display of normal symbols is counted once". Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 137(a) and 138(a), when the transition to the C time-saving game state is made after the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the game ball is hit rightward as an unintended game. Even if it passes through the second passage gate 3126B, the game state is shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, and the unintended "long open" as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146. can be prevented from occurring.

Thus, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the normal symbol win determination process is determined based on the game state when the normal symbol variable display is performed (when the normal symbol variation starts). Then, the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is determined based on the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols is completed (at the end of the variation of the normal symbols), so the variable of the normal symbols is determined. The change or maintenance of the game state while the display is being performed gives a new interest to the player, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol, by adjusting the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", The game state can be changed and maintained while the variable display of normal symbols is intentionally performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is the variable of the normal symbol. A variation pattern table of a plurality of special patterns having different selection rates of ``chance variation A'' longer than the display time and ``chance variation B'' having a variable display time shorter than the variable display time of the special symbols is provided, and is provided with a predetermined pattern table. Since the variation pattern table of the special symbols is switched according to the change condition of , interest in the switching of the variation pattern table of the special symbols can be made, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as a predetermined change condition, based on the information of the symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 163 (small winning symbol switching information) when it is determined that the "accessory hit" is determined. Since the variation pattern table of the special symbol can be switched, the interest in the "accessory release win" and the small winning symbol switching information can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, if the game ball enters the second start port 3140, the It is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the 1st route or the 2nd route. In particular, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the second starting port 3140 so as to be able to shift substantially to the jackpot game state. Therefore, as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, the value of the "long opening" that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start port 3140 is increased, and the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is made more interesting. , it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, although the limiter function is provided, even if the operation of the limiter function ends the continuous game in the A time-saving game state and shifts to the normal game state, the normal game state after the operation of the limiter function In the first special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is selected. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is a specific variation pattern table in which, in the normal game state, the advantageous chance variation B, which is likely to be "long open", is likely to be selected as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146. Therefore, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after shifting to the normal game state is "time saving hit", it is possible to shift to the big hit game state via the second route again. , it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the operation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the termination conditions of the C time-saving gaming state is set to "finishing the number of time-saving times once" as "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once", and the variable of the special symbol Since it is configured so that the game state can be shifted by subtracting the number of time saving times when the display is performed, the probability that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol will be "time saving hit" is increased. Also, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect of always controlling the time-saving game state, and to maintain the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one of the termination conditions of the C time-saving gaming state, "finishing the number of time-saving times once," is "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once." Since it is also a condition that the variable display is counted once, in the C time-saving gaming state, even if you hit the right as an unintended game and pass the game ball through the second passage gate 3126B, the normal symbol. At the start of the variable display, the game state is shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state, and it is possible to prevent unintended "long opening" as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 from being performed.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passage gate 3126B is arranged below the normal electric accessory unit 3145 in the right region 107, so in the C time saving game state, by chance Even if the game ball flows down the right area 107 and passes through the second passage gate 3126B, the game ball can be prevented from entering the normal electric accessory 3146 unintentionally.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 3120 is arranged close to directly under the first passing gate 3126A, so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting port 3120. When the ball is to be played, the normal symbol variation start time triggered by the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, and the special symbol variation start triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 3120. It is possible to adjust with the timing (the variable display can be started at approximately the same time).

[6. Second Embodiment of the Fourth Pachinko Machine]
Next, a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Unlike the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko machine differs from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in that the configuration of the game board unit (arrangement of passage gates), the start information of the normal symbols and the special symbols are set to a predetermined number. The difference is in the end conditions of the time-saving game state, in that it has a holding function that holds until.

Hereinafter, in describing the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are used for the same components as in the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine. , and a detailed description of its configuration and processing will be omitted.

[6-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 139, the game board unit 4010 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 4010 is also positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) as in the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine. reference).

FIG. 139 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 4010 is provided with a game panel 4100, various members are arranged on the game panel 4100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side surface of the game panel 4100 in which the shot game balls can roll and flow. .

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board unit 4010 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is mainly compared with the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The difference is that the right area 107 is not provided with the second pass gate 3126B of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second pass gate 3126B is not provided in the right area 107 because it has a holding function of holding the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. In order to prevent the right-handed game ball from passing through the second passage gate 3126B, the number of reservations of only normal symbols is stored, and the variable display time of normal symbols and special symbols cannot be adjusted. is.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 139, the LED unit 160 is provided with a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol reservation display portion 165, and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166. But they are different.

[6-2. electrical configuration]
As for the control circuit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, as compared with the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine (Fig. 109), the number of game balls passing through the second passage gate 3126B is higher. The configuration of the second passage gate switch 3127B for detecting passage is deleted, and the normal symbol reservation display unit 162, the first special symbol reservation display unit 165, and the second special symbol reservation display unit 166 in the first pachinko game machine. Since only the configuration of is added, detailed description is omitted.

Further, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the main RAM 203 stores a predetermined number of starting information of normal symbols and special symbols because it has a holding function of holding the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. The normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4) for holding up to, and the first special symbol start storage area (1) to hold the special symbol start information up to a predetermined number. It has a special symbol start storage area (4) and a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (4).

[6-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142, basic specifications of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, compared with the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in order to synchronize the fluctuation time between the special symbols and the normal symbols, the special symbols are mainly The fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern table of normal symbols, etc. are different.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, as the end condition of the A time-saving game state, one of the conditions of "end of time-saving 100 times" and "shift to big hit game state" is established. However, "time saving number of times 100 ends" is set to "variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times" without counting variable display of normal symbols. Similarly, as the condition for ending the time-saving game state C, it is set that either of the conditions “finish the number of times of time-saving once” and “shift to the big hit game state” is satisfied. End of times" is set to "variable display of special symbols is performed once" without counting variable displays of normal symbols.

In addition, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine includes a special symbol hit determination table (FIG. 110), a special symbol determination table (FIG. 111), and a hit type determination of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Since it is common to the table (Fig. 112), the normal symbol hit determination table (Fig. 117), the normal symbol determination table (Fig. 118) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (Fig. 119), detailed description will be omitted.

[6-3-1. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 140 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 141 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, since the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state is the same as that of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the explanation is omitted. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 includes the type of special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the random number value for effect selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display of the special symbol. is associated with time.

The main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table according to the game state, etc., refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and selects the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol win determination process, and the effect selection. A variation pattern of the special symbols and a variable display time of the special symbols are determined based on the random number value. After determining the variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 .

Here, in the column of "remarks" in FIGS. 140 and 141, "special electric accessary product opening end time" and "special figure processing end time" are described as reference.

"Special electric accessory opening end time" means the opening time of the open/close winning opening 3151 that is opened at the time of "accessory opening hit". If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "a prize released", as described in the hit type determination table of FIG. Since the opening time of the mouth 3151 is 200 msec, "200 msec" is shown as the "special electric accessory opening end time".

"Special symbol processing end time" means the time from the start of the special symbol management process shown in FIG. 122 to the start information of one special symbol until it ends. Specifically, it means the time from when the special symbol variable display start process (special symbol control state number=0) of FIG. 123 is performed until the special symbol game end process of FIG. 128 is performed.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state and C time saving game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table TC1 shown in FIG. 140 is the first pattern after the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is backed up and cleared, or in response to the selected symbol command "z4" for "per hit for opening the role". It is a variation pattern table selected after the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC2 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" for the "accessory win" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC3 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for the "accessory win" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIG. 140, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is the variable display time of the normal symbol (13300 or 13500 msec ) "chance variation A" of the above variation pattern "01H" and "chance variation B" of variation pattern "02H" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. is selected.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, similarly to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, from the relationship with the variable display time of normal symbols , Chance variation A tends to open the second starting port 3140 in an unfavorable opening state due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146, and short chance variation B is the opening state in which the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 easy to become.

Further, the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIGS. 140(1) to 140(3) are similar to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and the selection rate of the chance variation A and the chance variation B is different. In the normal game state and the C time saving game state, the second start port 3140 tends to be in an advantageous open state. It is configured to be easily selected in order.

Therefore, among the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3, the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. , 'z6'<'z5'<'z4', the variation pattern table TC3 of the special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command 'z6' is most difficult to be selected.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in the "special symbol processing end time" in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in Figure 140 (1) to (3) Focusing on it, it has the following characteristics.

The variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined as "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol is such that the "special symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec". , the variable display time of the special pattern is set.

In addition, the variation pattern (0BH) of the special symbol when it is determined to be a "accessory hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol is such that the "special symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec". A variable display time for special symbols is set.

That is, the variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined to be "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the hit determination process of the first special symbol "Open the role The variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the "special symbol processing end time" and the variation pattern (0BH) of the special symbol when it is determined to be "hit" are the same time.

Here, the variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined as "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the hit determination process of the first special symbol "Accessories The special symbol variation pattern (0BH) when determined as "open hit" is a special symbol variation pattern corresponding to "substantially special symbol loss" in the fourth pachinko game machine. And, the variable display time of the special symbol is set so that all the variation patterns (01H, 0BH) of the special symbol substantially corresponding to the loss of the special symbol have the same "special symbol processing end time".

(Variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated)
The special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1) is a specific variation pattern table selected in the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. be.

In the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1), when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the second start port 3140 is an advantageous opening mode in the normal game state. The configuration is such that the chance variation B, which is likely to be, is always selected.

As in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the chance variation B is selected in the normal game state, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous open mode, and the game ball enters the second starting port 3140. Easier to hit the ball. And, in the present embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is easy to transition to the big hit game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball is the second By entering the start hole 3140, it is possible to shift to a big hit game state.

For this reason, even if the continuous game in the time-saving game state is completed by the operation of the limiter function, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state is "time-saving hit", again Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 is configured so that the chance variation B is always selected when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". It may be configured such that chance variation A, which tends to cause the second starting port 3140 to be in an unfavorable open mode, is selected with a lower probability than chance variation B.

The special symbol variation pattern table ZC2 shown in FIG. 116 (2) is a modification of the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. , a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table ZC2 is configured such that when the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "time saving hit", the chance variation A is selected with a probability of 20% and the chance variation B with a probability of 80%. are doing.

Even in this way, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state is "time saving hit", the probability of moving to the big win game state via the second route again. is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol variation pattern tables ZC1 and ZC2 are variation pattern tables selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. Not limited to the first time, for example, in response to the special design reservation function, when the special design start information is reserved up to a specific reservation number (for example, 4 pieces), the special design hit determination process up to the specific reservation number , or may be a variation pattern table selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the chance variation A and the chance variation B are set to one, but based on the variable display time of the normal symbol, special A plurality of chance variation groups A in which the variable display time of symbols is longer than the variable display time of normal symbols and a plurality of chance variation groups B in which the variable display time of special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of normal symbols may be provided. good.

[6-3-2. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 142 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the variation pattern table of normal symbols shown in FIG. 142 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142 includes the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols, and the normal symbols extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126A. A random number for effect selection, a variation pattern of normal symbols, and a variable display time of normal symbols are associated with each other. Incidentally, the normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and extracts the game state when the normal symbol variable display is started, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126A. A variation pattern of normal symbols and a variable display time of normal symbols are determined based on the random number value for normal symbol performance selection. After determining the variation pattern of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols.

Here, in the column of "remarks" in FIG. 142, "game state at the end of variable display", "ordinary electric accessory opening end time" and "normal figure processing end time" are described as reference.

The "game state at the end of the variable display" means the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols ends, and may differ from the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols is started. In addition, in the "game state at the end of the variable display", there are also an A time saving game state and a B time saving game state, but since they are not related to the game characteristics of this embodiment, the explanation in the remarks is omitted. there is

"Normal electric accessory open end time" means the end time of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 (first open time + wait time + second open time). In the normal game state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as described in the normal symbol hit type determination table of FIG. Open end time. Also, in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as described in the normal symbol hit type determination table of FIG. 119, the first open time and wait time Any one of 2500 msec, 4600 msec, and 5600 msec, which is the total of the second opening time, is the normal electric accessary product opening end time.

"Normal design process end time" means the time from the start of the normal design control process shown in FIG. 134 to the start information of one normal design until it ends.

In particular, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when focusing on the "completion" column of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142, it has the following characteristics. ing.

When the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state or the C time saving game state, the normal symbol variation pattern (01H) when it is determined as "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol hit determination process is The normal symbol variable display time is set so that the "normal symbol processing end time" when the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state is both "13500 msec".

In addition, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state or the C time saving game state, the normal symbol variation pattern (02H ), the normal symbol variable display time is set so that the "normal symbol processing end time" is always "13500 msec" regardless of the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Here, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state or the C time-reduced game state, and the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state, in the hit determination process of the normal symbols. Even if it is determined to be a "normal win", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is a disadvantageous opening mode as shown in FIG. In addition, the fact that the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol loss" does not operate the normal electric accessory 3146, which is naturally disadvantageous to the player.

Therefore, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state or the C time-reduced game state, although it is determined that the normal symbol wins in the hit determination process of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols ends. A normal symbol variation pattern (predetermined 01H) in which the game state at the time becomes a normal game state, and a normal symbol variation pattern (02H) when it is determined as "normal symbol loss" in the normal symbol hit determination process. is a variation pattern of normal symbols corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss" disadvantageous to the player. Then, the variable display time of the normal symbols is set so that all the variation patterns of the normal symbols corresponding to "substantially lost in the normal symbols" have the same "normal symbol processing end time".

140 and 141 and the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Special figure processing end time (13500msec)" (see Figures 140 and 141) and "Normal figure processing end time (13500msec)" (see Figure 142) ) are configured to be the same time.

As a result, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 143, even if a holding function is provided to hold the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the deviation of the variable display start timing between the normal symbols and the special symbols is suppressed. can do.

[6-4. Main control processing]
In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are different from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The processing for performing the holding function of holding the start information of the special pattern up to a predetermined number, and the fact that the number of times of time reduction is not subtracted when the variable display of the normal pattern is performed are different, but the other processing is the same. The processing for performing this holding function is similar to that of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, but differences will be explained using the drawings used in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

(Special symbol variable display start process)
In the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3021), special The special symbol hit determination process is performed using the starting information stored in the symbol determination area (special symbol jackpot determination random number value, etc.) (S3022). However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3021), "the special symbol After the "starting information shift process" is performed, the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) is performed.

Specifically, in the "special symbol start information shift process", when the special symbol variable display start process is for the first special symbol, the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 The stored start information is shifted to the special symbol determination area, and the start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area (2) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start storage area ( 1) to shift to the first special symbol start storage area (3). In addition, when the special symbol variable display start processing is the second special symbol to be processed, instead of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), the second special symbol The start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) are shifted in the same manner as when the first special symbol is the object of processing.

(Normal symbol control process)
In the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area. If there is, the hit determination processing of the normal design is performed. However, in the normal symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the "special symbol start information shift process", after performing the normal symbol start information shift process, When various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area, normal symbol hit determination processing is performed. Also, in the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 134), the "normal symbol time reduction management process" in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is not performed. become.

(Switch input detection processing)
First start opening winning detection process (S3381), second starting opening winning detection process (S3382), ball passing detection process (S3387) of switch input detection process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine ), the extracted start information is stored in one special symbol determination area or normal symbol start determination area. However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the first special symbol start storage area (1) to first special symbol start storage area (4), and the second special symbol Start memory area (1) ~ second special symbol start memory area (4), first special symbol start memory area (1) ~ first special symbol start memory area (4), normal symbol start memory area (1) ~ normal The start information is stored while referring to the empty pattern start storage area (4). This is the same as the first pachinko game machine.

[6-5. Opening mode of normal electric accessories]
FIG. 143 is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of a normal electric accessory in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 143 shows the fluctuation and stop of the normal symbol display portion 161, the operation and stop of the normal electric solenoid 3148 constituting the normal electric accessory 3146, the fluctuation and stop of the first special symbol display portion 163, and the state of the game. The transitions are shown up and down.

In addition, in FIG. 143, as shown in the normal per symbol type determination table of FIG. 119, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal game state is short (200 msec). , and an advantageous opening mode in which the opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the C time saving game state is long (2000 to 3000 msec) is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed corresponding to the "time saving hit" is illustrated as "stop with C time saving design", and the opening time of the opening and closing winning opening 3151 opened at the time of "accessory opening hit" is illustrated as "accessory release end time".

In the period of (a) in FIG. 143, the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed for the first time are shown. The variable display time of the normal symbols corresponding to "losing" is started, and in the first special symbol display section 163, the variable display time of the first special symbols corresponding to "hit the role" is started. Also, with the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the game state has shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state.

Although the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to the "permissible role" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol loss", the variable display time of the first special symbol is "special electric "Special figure processing end time" added with "accessory release end time" is set to the same time as "ordinary figure processing end time" in normal symbols.

For this reason, at the time of (b) in FIG. 143, since it is set to the same time as the "special pattern processing end time" in the first special pattern and the "normal pattern processing end time" in the normal pattern, the second time The variation start timings of the first special symbols and the normal symbols that are variably displayed are substantially synchronized.

143 (b), when the game state is the normal game state, the normal symbol display unit 161 starts the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol win", and the first special symbol. In the display unit 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to the "time saving hit" is started.

The variable display time of the first special pattern of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to the ``time saving hit'' is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to the ``ordinary pattern hit'', and the variable display time of the normal pattern has ended. After that, the variable display time of the first special symbol ends, and the game state shifts from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "win normal symbol" is over, the variable display time of the first special symbol is not over, the game state is the normal game state, and the normal game state of FIG. As shown in the per-symbol type determination table, "short release" in the normal game state is performed as the release mode of the normal electric accessory.

Then, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to the "time saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", but the variable display time of the normal symbol. ``General pattern processing end time'', which is the ``short open end time'' that is the ``normal electric accessory open end time'', is set to the same time as the ``special symbol processing end time'' in the first special symbol. .

For this reason, even at the time of (c) in FIG. 143, since it is set to the same time as the "special pattern processing end time" in the first special pattern and the "normal pattern processing end time" in the normal pattern, the third time The fluctuation start timings of the first special symbol and the normal symbols which are variably displayed in .

At the time of (c) in FIG. 143, when the gaming state is the C time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol display unit 161 starts the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol winning", and the first special In the symbol display section 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the "time saving hit" is started. Also, with the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the game state has shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state.

At the time of (d) in FIG. 143, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the "time saving hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit". , The variable display time of the first special symbol ends immediately before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, and the game state shifts from the normal game state to the C time saving game state.

At the time of (E) in FIG. 143, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "per normal symbol" ends, the variable display time of the first special symbol has already ended and the game state changes to the C time-saving game state. As shown in the normal per symbol type determination table of FIG. 119, "long release" in the C time saving game state is performed as the release mode of the normal electric accessory.

Thus, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in addition to the configuration that produces the effects of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, special symbols corresponding to "substantially special symbol losing" "Special figure processing end time" in the fluctuation pattern (01H, 0BH) and "Normal figure processing end time" in the fluctuation pattern of the normal pattern corresponding to "substantially normal design loss" is the same time (Figs. 140-142). Thus, even if a holding function for holding start information of normal patterns and special patterns up to a prescribed number is provided, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the variation timing between the normal patterns and the special patterns until a big win is achieved.

<Modified Example of the Fourth Pachinko Machine>
Next, modified examples of the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the game balls flowing down from the left area 106 directly pass through the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120 while colliding with the game nails. / It is configured to be able to enter. However, in order to pass/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120, the game ball enters a distribution device (for example, a so-called Kroon), and the distribution device directs it to a specific discharge port. It may be configured such that only the sorted game balls pass/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. For example, the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 is used as a sorting device, and game balls entering the warp entrance 117 are sorted by the sorting device to a plurality of discharge ports (not shown), and are sent to specific discharge ports. It may be configured such that only the sorted game balls pass/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. In particular, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the holding function of holding the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number is not provided, the first passing gate per unit time Even if the passing/entering rate to 3126A and the first starting port 3120 is reduced, the interest of the game can be maintained by the sorting device.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the variable display time of the special symbols predetermined in the special symbol variation pattern table is However, when determining the variable display time of the special symbol, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed. You may For example, when the special symbol "chance variation B" advantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol shorter than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbols already variably displayed is calculated. Then (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol -1 second), the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation B. Further, when "chance variation A" of special symbols disadvantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol longer than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbols already variably displayed is calculated. Then, the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation A (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol + 1 second). In particular, when a holding function for holding the start information of normal patterns and special patterns up to a predetermined number is provided, it is effective because the end timing of the variable display time of normal patterns and special patterns can be adjusted in real time.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the right side area 107 of the game board unit 3010 is provided with the second passage gate 3126B, but as shown in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, In addition, the right area 107 of the game board unit 3010 may not be provided with the second pass gate 3126B.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the number of times of time saving is subtracted, and the time saving game state can be shifted to the normal game state. However, after the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the time saving number of times is subtracted, and the time saving game state can be shifted to the normal game state in the same way as the first to third pachinko game machines. good.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the number of consecutive big hits that transitioned to the big win game state under a specific condition (A time-saving game state) is counted, and the number of consecutive big wins is A "limiter function" is provided for partially regulating the game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game state when a predetermined limiter count is reached, but the limiter function does not have to be provided.

Further, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, it is configured to determine the "accessory hit". However, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, it may be configured so that the "accessory release hit" is not determined.

(others)
The above-mentioned fourth pachinko game machine can apply each other's technique between each embodiment including a modification. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Also, the effects described in the fourth pachinko game machine are merely a list of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the fourth pachinko game machine as long as there is no discrepancy in the game characteristics and control.

[7. Fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko game machine will be explained. The fifth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko machine. 5 pachinko machine is different in that it is mainly a "normal pattern game" using normal patterns, and along with that, the configuration of various members is partially different.

Also, unlike the first pachinko machine, the fifth pachinko machine does not have two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), but only one type of special symbol. not For this reason, there are no concepts such as "priority variator", "sequential variator", and "simultaneous variator" as described above. Incidentally, as in the first to third pachinko gaming machines, two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may be provided.

Hereinafter, in describing the embodiment of the fifth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be assigned the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and detailed descriptions of the configurations and processes will be omitted. .

[7-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 144, the game board unit 5010 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 5010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 144 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 5010 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 5010 includes a game panel 5100, various members are arranged on the game panel 5100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side surface of the game panel 5100, in which the shot game balls can roll and flow. .

As shown in FIG. 144, the game board unit 5010 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine mainly has a first passage port 5126A, a second passage port 5126B, The configuration and arrangement of the starting port 5140, the normal electric accessory unit 5145, and the special electric accessory unit 5130 are different. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

(First pass)
The first passage port 5126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can pass through (a right-handed game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass through). ing. Further, the first passage port 5126A is provided with a first passage port switch 5127A (see FIG. 145 described later) for detecting passage of a game ball to the first passage port 5126A. Then, the game ball that has passed through the first passage port 5126A flows down the channel on the back side of the game panel 5100 and is discharged out of the machine.

(Second Passage)
The second passage port 5126B is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 5145, which will be described later, in the right area 107, and is arranged so that only right-handed game balls can pass through. Further, the second passage port 5126B is provided with a second passage port switch 5127B (see FIG. 145 described later) for detecting passage of a game ball to the second passage port 5126B. Then, the game ball that has passed through the second passage port 5126B flows down the right region 107 toward the normal electric accessory unit 5145 .

When the game ball passes through the first passage opening 5126A or the second passage opening 5126B (hereinafter also referred to as "passage openings 5126A and 5126B" as appropriate), normal symbol lottery and normal symbol variable display are performed.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, when the game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A (when the first passage switch 5127A detects the game ball), a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game ball) is paid out, and when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B (when the second passage port switch 5127B detects the game ball), the prize ball is not paid out. there is
In addition, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out, and when the game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A, the prize balls are paid out. It may be configured not to

(starting port)
The starting port 5140 is arranged in the right region 107 so that a right-handed game ball can be entered (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter). In addition, it is arranged below the starting port 5140 so that the game ball that has passed through the second passing port 5126B can enter the starting port 5140 . Further, the starting port 5140 is provided with a starting port switch 5141 for detecting entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140 .

When the game ball enters the starting port 5140, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the special symbol is performed, or a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 5145 is a unit body in which the starting port 5140, the starting port switch 5141 for detecting the entry of the game ball into the starting port 5140, and the normal electric accessory 5146 are integrated. 107.

The normal electric accessory 5146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 5147 for normal electric power that can move forward and backward, and a solenoid for normal electric power 5148 (see FIG. 145 to be described later) that operates the shutter 5147 for normal electric power. The normal electric accessory 5146, that is, the normal electric shutter 5147, has an open state in which a game ball can enter the starting port 5140 or is easy, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the starting port 5140. It is configured to allow state transition to and from.

Specifically, the general electric shutter 5147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry preventing portion arranged in front of the entrance of the starting port 5140 and a plate-shaped ball entering guiding portion inclined toward the starting port 5140. there is When the general electric shutter 5147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry preventing portion moves from the surface of the game panel 5100 to a game ball non-contact point at a distance longer than the diameter of the game ball, to the start port 5140. The plate-shaped ball entry guide part moves from the surface of the game panel 5100 to the game ball contact point at a distance equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, and flows down to the right area 107. It accepts the game ball that is stuck and guides the accepted game ball to the starting port 5140.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the general electric shutter 5147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry preventing portion moves to the game ball contact portion to prevent the game ball from entering the starting port 5140, and the plate-shaped ball entry is prevented. The guide part is buried in the game panel 5100 and does not receive the game ball flowing down to the right area 107 and does not hinder the game ball from flowing down. Note that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 5147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 5130 is a unit body in which a large winning opening 5131, a large winning opening count switch 5132 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 5131, and a special electric accessory 5133 are integrated. . The special electric accessory unit 5130 is arranged below in the right area 107 . In addition, the special electric accessory unit 5130 may be arranged below the first passage opening 5126A or above the center accessory 115 .

The big winning opening 5131 is a winning opening that can shift from a closed state to an open state. The big winning opening 5131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is "big win" or "minor win" is derived. The big winning hole 5131 allows game balls up to a specified number (for example, 10) to enter when it is controlled in a big winning game state or a small winning game state, and when a game ball enters this big winning hole 5131 , prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) corresponding to the big winning opening 5131 are paid out.

The special electric accessory 5133 includes a projecting plate-type special electric shutter 5134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 5135 (see FIG. 145 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 5134 . The special electric accessory 5133, that is, the special electric shutter 5134, has an open state in which a game ball can or easily enter the big winning opening 5131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the big winning opening 5131. It is configured to be able to transition to and from states.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 5134 is composed of a plate-shaped roof that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the out port 178 side. When the special electric shutter 5134 is in an open state, the roof part is buried in the game panel 5100, the big winning opening 5131 is opened, and the game ball flowing down the right area 107 or rolling on the roof part A game ball can enter. When the special electric shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the roof protrudes from the game panel 5100, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 5131.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the special electric shutter 5134 is a gently inclined plate-shaped roof, and when the special electric shutter 5134 is closed, game balls can roll on the roof. Because of this configuration, even if it is controlled to a small winning game state and the big winning hole 5131 is opened for an extremely short time, one or a plurality of game balls rolling on the roof can be opened to the big winning hole. The game ball is dropped toward 5131 to enable entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 5131 .

[7-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 145, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 145 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 145, the fifth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 , a payout/fire control circuit 400 , and a power supply circuit 450 .

However, the fifth pachinko game machine is partially different in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 compared to the first pachinko game machine. Specifically, the fifth pachinko game machine includes a special symbol display unit 5160, a special symbol reservation display unit 5161, a general electric solenoid 5148, a special electric solenoid 5135, a start port switch 5141, a first passage port switch 5127A, The configurations of the second pass port switch 5127B and the big winning port count switch 5132 are partially different. Further, since the fifth pachinko gaming machine does not execute probability variation control, the probability variation notification display unit 167 in the first pachinko gaming machine is not provided. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display section 5160 displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs in the LED unit 160 . Specifically, the special symbol display portion 5160 is composed of an LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h corresponding to the special symbol display portion 5160 of the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 5).

When the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the special symbol") is satisfied, all or part of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the special symbol display unit 5160 alternately or A variable display of special symbols that alternately turns on and off is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the special symbols is started, the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbols is derived.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol pending display unit 5161, when the start information of the special symbol, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the number of variable display of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") ), and the LED unit 160 is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, the special symbol holding display unit 5161 is composed of an LED group consisting of two LEDs 165a and 165b corresponding to the first special symbol holding display unit 165 of the first pachinko game machine (Fig. 5). Here, "the variable display of the special symbol is suspended" means that the special symbol starting condition is established after the passage of the game ball to the starting port 5140 is detected and the special symbol starting information is extracted. refers to the state up to

The special symbol holding display unit 5161, like the first special symbol holding display unit 165 of the first pachinko game machine, is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs 165a and 165b, and the number of holding variable display of special symbols. display.

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 5148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 5147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 5148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 5147 advances forward to open the starting port 5140 . (If it is OFF), the general electric shutter 5147 is retracted rearward to close the starting port 5140 .

(solenoid for special train)
The special electric solenoid 5135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special electric shutter 5134 . When the special electric solenoid 5135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the special electric shutter 5134 is retracted backward to open the big winning opening 5131, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF) Then, the special electric shutter 5134 is moved forward to close the big winning opening 5131 .

(start switch)
The starting port switch 5141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140 . When the starting port switch 5141 detects that a game ball has entered the starting port 5140, the main CPU 201 extracts special symbol starting information (random number for judging a big hit, random number for design, random number for effect selection, etc.), The start information of the extracted special symbol is used for the hit determination process of the special symbol, the variable display process of the special symbol is performed, and the payout/emission control circuit 400 executes the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball). You will be instructed to

(First passage switch)
The first passage port switch 5127A is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the first passage port 5126A. When the first passage port switch 5127A detects the passage of the game ball to the first passage port 5126A, the main CPU 201 generates normal symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random number value, normal symbol random number value, normal symbol effect random number for selection, etc.), and use the extracted starting information of normal symbols for hit determination processing of normal symbols, perform variable display processing of normal symbols, or perform predetermined prize balls (for example, three game balls) to the payout/launch control circuit 400.

(Second passage switch)
The second passage port switch 5127B is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B. When the second passage port switch 5127B detects passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B, the main CPU 201 extracts normal symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random number value, normal symbol symbol random number value, etc.). Then, the starting information of the extracted normal symbol is used for the hit determination process of the normal symbol, or the variable display process of the normal symbol is performed. Even if the passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B is detected by the second passage port switch 5127B, the payout/emission control circuit 400 is not instructed to pay out the prize balls.

(Grand prize mouth count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 5132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 5131 . When the big winning hole count switch 5132 detects the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 5131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 5131 and the prize balls corresponding to the big winning hole 5131. The payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out (for example, 15 game balls).

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 144) is the same device as the first pachinko game machine, but the display area of the display device 7 variably displays the performance identification symbols corresponding to the special symbols in the normal game state. Instead, the difference is that in the normal game state, the production identification pattern corresponding to the normal pattern is variably displayed.

[7-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 153, basic specifications of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. The fifth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, although variable probability control is not executed, a time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is in the normal game state or the time-saving game state. It is possible to progress the game in . In this fifth pachinko game machine, variable probability control is not executed, but this is not essential. good.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of hitting that is regarded as a regular game mode. In the fifth pachinko game machine, although the B time saving game state is not executed, the B time saving game state may be executable.

[7-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 146 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 146 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine.

In the special symbol hit determination table, "big hit", "small hit" or "short hit" is determined as the data used for the special symbol hit determination process executed based on the entry into the starting port 5140. The range (width) of the random number value for judging a big hit and the judgment value data corresponding to it ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data", "time saving judgment value data") are defined in association with each other. ing. It should be noted that the total random number value for judging a big hit is 65,536. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

As shown in FIG. 146, when a game ball enters the start hole 5140, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing based on the special symbol hit determination processing using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. The result of is determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "time saving hit".

In this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the starting port 5140 to determine a "small hit" and shifts to a small win game state, a game ball can enter the big winning hole 5131, and a predetermined number of It is possible to pay out game balls (for example, 150). In addition, even if the "time saving hit" is determined, it is possible to shift to the C time saving game state and enter the game ball into the starting port 5140 again.
Therefore, if a game ball enters the starting port 5140, the game ball is paid out triggered by a "big win" or a "minor win", so the starting port 5140 is opened in the normal game state. Then, a game is played with the goal of making the game ball enter the starting port 5140 .

It should be noted that, when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed, it may be configured so that "losing" is determined. In the case of determining "losing", it is preferable to define that "minor winning" or "time-saving winning" is determined with a higher probability than "losing".

Incidentally, if the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the big win probability and/or the small win probability should be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of a small win may be set constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of a big win may be set low. Alternatively, the probability of a big win may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of a small win may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. However, even if the fifth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving hit probability as a common probability for all settings.

[7-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 147 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 147 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" and " This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command".

The "selection symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbol is a winning, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 0 to 49, the main CPU 201 outputs "z3" as the selected symbol command. is selected, and "zA2" is selected as the design designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 outputs the selected symbol command "z5 ”, and select “zA3” as the design designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the fifth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the special symbol stop mode derived to the special symbol display unit 5160 (see FIG. 145) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, according to the selected symbol command. It is a table where In addition, the special symbol display unit 5160 derives the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, the display mode of the small win, or the display mode of the loss based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. The program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 also stores a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine.

[7-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 148 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the hit type determination table, the mode of the big hit game state, the mode of the small win game state, and the mode of the game state (time saving flag and time saving number of times) for the selected symbol command. are mapped.

The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table and determines the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state, and the mode of the game state (time saving flag and time saving times) based on the selected symbol command.

Here, in the "jackpot game state", state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning port 5131 is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. For one round, when the opening time for which the big winning hole 5131 is open has passed, or when a specified number (10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 5131, the big winning hole 5131 is opened. to the closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the predetermined number of rounds is completed, the jackpot game state is terminated.

"Aspect of the jackpot game state" indicates the opening mode of the big winning opening 5131 opened in the jackpot game state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the opening time per round. ing. The number of openings may be determined such that the large winning opening 5131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round, or a plurality of large winning openings may be provided and the large winning opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, when 10 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131 for one round, one round ends, and every time a game ball enters the big winning hole 5131, 15 balls game balls (prize balls) are set to be paid out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148, when the selected symbol command "z1" corresponding to "big hit" is selected as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, 10 rounds are determined, and 10 rounds.times.10 balls.times.15 prize balls. = 1500 game balls can be put out, and when the selected symbol command is "z2", 4 rounds are decided, 4 rounds x 10 balls x 15 prize balls = 600 game balls can be put out.

In addition, in the "small winning game state", state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 5131 is performed over a predetermined number of opening times. When a predetermined number of opening times is completed for one small winning game state or when a specified number of game balls enter the big winning hole 5131, the big winning hole 5131 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, One small winning game state ends.

"Aspect of small-hit game state" indicates an opening mode of the large winning opening 5131 opened during the small-hit game state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of times of opening and the opening time in the small-hit game state. It should be noted that a plurality of large winning openings may be provided and the large winning opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, when 10 game balls enter the big winning opening 5131 for one small winning game state, the one small winning game state ends, and the game ball enters the big winning opening 5131. It is set so that 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out each time a ball is played. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148, when the selected symbol command "z3, z4" corresponding to the "small hit" is the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the number of times of opening is determined to be 10 times or 8 times. 10×15 prize balls=150 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, one open time (for example, 0.15 seconds) in the small winning game state is set shorter than one open time (for example, 29 seconds) in the big winning game state, and the big winning game state , the large winning opening 5131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and the big winning opening 5131 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. Furthermore, the total number of game balls (for example, 150) that can be paid out in one small win game state is larger than the total number of game balls (for example, 1500 or 600) that can be paid out in one big win game state. It can be said that the big win game state is an "advantageous special game state" and the small win game state is a "disadvantageous special game state" than the big win game state.

"Aspect of game state" indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state or after the time-saving hit, and indicates the setting of the "time-saving flag" and the "time-saving number of times". In addition, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the jackpot game state, and the 'time-saving flag' and the 'time-saving number of times' are set.

"Time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not a time saving game state is executed and the type of time saving game state to be executed, time saving flag = 0 indicates a normal game state, time saving flag = 1 indicates A time saving game state , and the time saving flag = 3 indicates the C time saving game state. In addition, in this embodiment, although the B time saving game state is not executed, when the B time saving game state is executable, the time saving flag = 2 indicates the B time saving game state.

In addition, the "number of times of time saving" is the number of times the special symbol hit determination process is performed in the time saving game state, that is, the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed. The number of times of time saving is subtracted when special symbol hit determination processing is performed, that is, when the variable display of special symbols is started, and when the number of times of time saving becomes 0, the time saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. It will be.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the selected symbol command "z1, z2" corresponding to the "jackpot" as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 indicates the A time-saving gaming state as a "time-saving flag". 1” is determined, and “10 times” is determined as the “time saving frequency”.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to the "time saving hit", the main CPU 201 sets "3" indicating the C time saving gaming state as the "time saving flag". ”, and “once” is determined as the “time saving frequency”.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to the "time saving hit" is the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "once" as the "time saving frequency". is configured to

In the present embodiment, the number of times of time saving is determined to be 10 times when a big hit is made, and the number of times of time saving is determined to be 1 time when a time-saving hit is made, because the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit". While the probability of being determined is low and it is a premier situation, by shifting to the A time-saving game state of 10 times as the number of times of time-saving after the jackpot game state is completed, while being controlled to the A time-saving game state of 10 times. , It is constructed so as to be able to shift to more small-hit game states. That is, in the present embodiment, by setting a large number of time-saving times, it is possible to shift the time-saving gaming state to more small-hit game states, and to make it possible to pay out a large number of game balls.

It should be noted that when the selected symbol command "z1, z2" corresponding to the "big hit" as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, similarly to when the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to the "time saving hit", " It may be configured to determine "once" as the number of times of time saving.

[7-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 149 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 149, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random number for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variable display time. It is The random number for effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the column of "remarks" in FIG. 149 is shown for the sake of convenience for easy understanding.

The main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, and based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process and the random number value for effect selection, determines the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variable display time. to decide. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, regardless of the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state (A time-saving gaming state, C time-saving gaming state), the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is referred to, but in the gaming state The variation pattern table to be referred to may be changed accordingly.

After determining the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

The "rewind effect" shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a production that suggests that there is a possibility that it will continue. Details of the "rewind effect" and "basic bonus time effect" will be described later with reference to FIG. The "full rotation reach" is an effect for notifying in advance that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. The "jackpot notification reach" is an effect suggesting that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may result in a jackpot. There will be a performance of whether or not. "Shortened variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short, but during the shortened variation and the small winning game state, the effect is "bonus time basic effect or bonus time special effect. A performance (special performance) will be held.

In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the special symbol variation pattern and special symbol variable display for performing "rewind effect" and is configured to determine the time.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variable display time for performing "all rotation reach" or "big hit notification reach" are determined. is configured as follows.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small win", the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variable display time for performing "reduced variation" or "big hit notification reach" are determined. is configured as follows.

When the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbols is "small hit", the variation pattern of the special symbols for performing the "shortening variation" is likely to be determined, and the variation pattern of the special symbols for performing the "shortening variation" is determined. A short variable display time is determined by Therefore, by determining a short variable display time as the variable display time of the special symbols, it is possible to shift the small winning game state a plurality of times in a short time.

Further, by determining the variation pattern of the special symbols for performing the ``reach for informing the jackpot'', when the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state is being executed, an effect corresponding to the lottery of the special symbols is performed. be able to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the special symbol variation pattern for performing the "big hit notification reach" is determined. However, "loss" is provided as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "loss", the special symbol fluctuation pattern for performing "big hit notification reach" It may be configured to be determined.

[7-3-5. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 150 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process. It is a table referred to when determining "normal design hit" or "normal design loss" by lottery based on numerical values.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150 includes the game state, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (width), and the hit/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol loss"). are defined in association with each other.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150, and determines hit/loss determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value is any one of 0 to 97 as a "normal symbol win", and sets the win/lose determination value data. "Normal per design judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" when the random number for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is either 98 or 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". to decide.

In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal winning symbol", and sets the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 97, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state C, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is either 98 or 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". ” is decided.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state (selection rate shown in FIG. 150) is the highest among the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. .

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time saving game state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not be changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the normal game state, the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[7-3-6. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 151 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the hit/lose determination value data of the normal symbol and the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage openings 5126A and 5126B. It is a table referred to when selecting the determining "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit".

"Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 corresponds to the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data ("normal symbol hit" or "losing"), the normal symbol symbol random number value, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command. are stipulated.

In addition, the column of "reference" in Fig. 151 refers to the total selection rate of the selection rate of the hit determination of the normal symbol in the normal game state (see Fig. 150) and the selection rate of the "selected symbol command when winning the normal symbol". As shown in the figure, in the normal game state, it is determined to be "normal symbol hit", and as described later, in the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147) is advantageously opened "normal symbol This is for explaining the "total selection rate in the normal game state" when the winning selection symbol command fz1 is determined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, and determines a normal winning selection symbol command based on the normal symbol hit/lose determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol win/loss determination value data, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be done.

For example, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command at normal symbol hit if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 162. If the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 163 to 65535, select "fz2" as the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol per hit.

Then, as shown in the "reference" column of FIG. 151, the selection rate of the normal symbol per determination value data in the normal game state is "98/100" (see FIG. 150), and the "normal symbol per selection symbol command fz1" selection rate is about "1/402.06", the "combined selection rate of the normal game state" for finally determining the "selected symbol command fz1 at the time of winning the normal symbol" in the normal game state. is set to approximately "1/410.3".

Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning", regardless of the game state, the normal symbol win-lose determination value data (normal symbol It is configured to be selected based on the result of the hit determination process) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 150), and determines the normal symbol win/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 151), the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but it is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[7-3-7. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 152 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 152 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal per symbol type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147) in accordance with the game state and the normal per symbol selection symbol command.

In the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 152, the game state, the selection symbol command at normal per symbol, and the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 152, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 based on the game state and the selection symbol command for normal winning symbols. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 5146 release pattern.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, if the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the first open time to 2000 msec, the wait time to 500 msec, and the second open time to 3000 msec. decide. Also, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the first open time is 100 msec, no wait time, and no second open time if the selected symbol command at normal winning is "fz2".

Therefore, even in the normal game state, when the selection symbol command "fz1" at the time of normal symbol winning is selected, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessary 5146 is determined, and the game ball to the starting port 5140 is determined. are allowed to enter the ball.

In addition, when the selection symbol command "fz1" at normal symbol hit is selected in the normal game state, a predetermined time (for example, 10000 msec) waiting time for opening is set before the first opening is performed. may By setting this waiting time for opening, time is secured for executing promotion effects (for example, effects such as displaying "Aim right!") to prompt the player to enter the ball into the normal electric accessary 5146. can be done. By executing this promotion performance, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a so-called puncture in which the game ball is not entered into the normal electric accessary 5146 even though the selection symbol command "fz1" at the time of normal symbol winning is selected. Since it becomes easier to play, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the first open time of 2000 msec and the wait time of 500 msec when the selected symbol command at normal symbol winning is "fz1" in the A time saving game state or the C time saving game state. , the second open time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, in the case of the time saving game state A or the time saving game state C, when the selection symbol command at normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the first opening time to 2500 msec, the waiting time to 500 msec, and the second opening time. Determine the time to be 2500 msec.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the selected symbol command (for example, "fz2") at the time of winning the same normal symbol is used, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is configured to be different according to the game state. ing.

Then, in the case of the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined for any of the normal symbol winning time selection symbol commands, and the opening pattern to the start port 5140 is determined. It is possible to enter a game ball.

It should be noted that, even if the selection symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" at the time of the normal symbol is selected in the A time saving game state or the C time saving game state, a predetermined time (for example, 5000 msec) is required before the first opening is performed. ) may be set.

[7-3-8. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 153 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is extracted when the gaming state, the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data, the normal symbol per selection symbol command, and the game ball passing through the passage openings 5126A and 5126B. The normal symbol effect selection random number value, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variable display time are associated with each other. In addition, the column of "remarks" in FIG. 153 is shown for convenience so that it is easy to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, and based on the game state, the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, and the normal symbol effect selection random number value. Then, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined.

Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Here, the "long opening" illustrated in the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning" in FIG. In the form, the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz1" in the normal game state, the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz1", "fz2" in the A time saving game state or C time saving game state. In addition, "short opening" refers to a disadvantageous opening pattern (see FIG. 152) in which the opening time of the normal electric accessory 5146 is short. , and is not performed in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state.

"Normal reach" shown in the column of "remarks" in Fig. 153 suggests that there is a possibility that the selected symbol command fz1 at the time of normal symbol winning, which is advantageously released by the normal electric accessory 5146 in the normal game state, has been determined. It is a performance to do. Also, "super reach" is an effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the selected symbol command fz1 at the time of normal symbol winning, in which the normal electric accessory 5146 is advantageously released in the normal game state, has been determined. Also, "special reach" is an effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the selected symbol command fz1 at the time of normal symbol winning, in which the normal electric accessory 5146 is advantageously opened in the normal game state, has been determined. That is, "Normal Reach", "Super Reach" and "Special Reach" are effects suggesting the possibility that "Long Open" has been determined in the normal game state, and the entry of the game ball into the starting port 5140 is possible. It can be said that it is a production that suggests that it will become.

Further, "normal fluctuation" means normal fluctuation of the variable display time of normal symbols, and "shortened fluctuation" means fluctuation of short variable display time of normal symbols.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, in the case of the normal game state, the normal symbol win/lose determination value data is "normal symbol hit determination value data", and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1". When , it is configured to determine the variation pattern of normal symbols and the variable display time of normal symbols for performing "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach".

In addition, in the case of the normal game state, when the hit/lose determination value data of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit determination value data" and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2", "normal fluctuation", "normal reach" ", "Super Reach" or "Special Reach", the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the winning/losing determination value data of normal symbols is "normal symbol losing determination value data", "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" is performed. It is configured to determine the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols for the purpose.

In addition, when it is in the A time saving game state or the C time saving game state, it is configured to determine the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols for performing the "shortening variation".

In the case of the A reduced working hours gaming state or the C reduced working hours gaming state, by determining a short variable display time as the variable display time of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, the normal electric accessory. By activating 5146 quickly, it is possible to increase the rate of entry of game balls into the starting port 5140 per unit time.

[7-4. Main control processing]
In the fifth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23), Although part of the normal symbol control process and the sub-control circuit process are different, the other processes are the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the sub-control circuit process will be described below, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine , including the same processing as , will be explained again with different step numbers.

[7-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 154, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S5001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S5001, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol working area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S5001 when executing the special symbol control process.

At S5002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded at S5001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

When it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S5002), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S5002), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5003.

In S5003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbols are to be displayed in a variable manner.

If it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol does not start variable display (NO determination in S5003), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and shifts the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). return.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol is to start variable display (when S5003 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5004.

At S5004, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S5003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S5001 to S5004) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[7-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5004 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 155 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S5021).

If it is determined in S5021 that the special symbol wait time is not 0 (NO determination in S5021), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S5021), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5022.

At S5022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S5022, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5023. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S5023 based on the control state number read in the process of S5022.

At S5023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The processing of this S5023 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5024.

At S5024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The processing of this S5024 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5025.

At S5025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S5025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5026.

At S5026, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The processing of this S5026 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 160 . If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5027.

At S5027, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The processing of this S5027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5028.

In S5028, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S5028 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S5023 to S5028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 154). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5004 when the special symbol management process is called at S5003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S5007 when the special symbol management process is called at S5006, and calls at S5009. If so, the process returns to S5010, and if called in S5012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[7-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 156, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S5031).

If it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S5031), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 155 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S5031), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5033.

At S5033, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. In this process, the start information stored in the special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the special symbol start storage area (2) to the special symbol start storage area (4) are shifted. The start information stored in is shifted to the special symbol start storage area (1) to the special symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S5033, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5034.

At S5034, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 146) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination process is performed using the special symbol big hit determination random number value stored in the special symbol determination area (0). . In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a small hit or a big hit. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a time-saving hit, and turns on the small-hit flag when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a small win. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the big hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S5034, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5035.

At S5035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S5034) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, big hit). In this process, referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 147), using the symbol random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0), the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" or "symbol designation command ” is determined. After executing the process of S5035, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5036.

In S5036, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of the winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a winning (a time-saving winning, a small winning, or a big winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 148) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S5035). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of hits, but the number of types of big wins may be one, the type of small wins may be one, and the number of types of time-saving wins may be plural. There may be types. After executing the process of S5036, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5037.

In S5037, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 149) is referred to, and based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process and the effect selection random number value stored in the special symbol determination area (0), the special symbol A variation pattern and a variable display time of special symbols are determined. In this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is referred to regardless of the game state, but the variation pattern table to be referred to may be changed according to the game state. After executing the process of S5037, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5038.

At S5038, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the special symbol variable display time determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S5037) is set to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol variable display is performed on the special symbol display section 5160. to start. The waiting time for this special symbol is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process which is performed at intervals of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process of S5038, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5039.

In S5039, the main CPU 201 performs time saving end management processing. In the fifth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, the number of times of time saving is subtracted "when variable display of special symbols is started". In this process, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter, and when the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag is cleared, and the shift control from the time saving game state to the normal game state is performed. After executing the process of S5039, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5040.

At S5040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 155 S5024) is performed. After executing the process of S5040, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5041.

At S5041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5041, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5042.

At S5042, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this processing, mainly update processing of various flags (for example, a time saving flag, etc.) relating to management of the game state is performed. After executing the process of S5042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5043.

At S5043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the variation pattern command of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited section, and interrupts the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S5042) and special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation processing (S5043)). It is preferable to perform it within the prohibited section.

[7-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S5051).

If it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO in S5051), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 155 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S5051), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5052.

At S5052, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S5015 in FIG. 155) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S5052, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5053.

At S5053, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5053, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5054.

At S5054, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times a special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours. After executing the process of S5054, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S5071).

If it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S5071), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S5071 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5072.

At S5072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S5072, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO in S5072), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5073. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5072 that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S5072), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5078.

At S5073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S5073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S5073), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5074. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a small win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a small win (YES in S5073), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5078.

In S5074, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a time saving open win.

In S5074, when it is determined that it is not the time saving hit, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5077. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5074 that it is a time saving win, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5075.

At S5075, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an A reduced working hours gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 201 refers to the time saving flag and determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is 1. Then, if it is determined that it is not in the A time-saving gaming state, the process is moved to S5076 to perform the C time-saving gaming state, and if it is determined that it is in the A time-saving gaming state, the C time-saving state setting processing is not performed. Then, the process is moved to S5077. By this processing, even if the "time saving win" is determined by the lottery of the special symbols during the time saving game state A, the determination of the "time saving win" can be invalidated.

In S5076, the main CPU 201 performs C time saving state setting processing. In this C time saving state setting process, referring to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. Set the game state mode data. Specifically, the time saving flag indicating the C time saving game state is set to 3 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving counter is set to 1. After executing the process of S5076, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5077.

At S5077, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155).

In S5078, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process. In this processing, signals output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 145 for both) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process of S5078, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5079.

In S5079, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 5131 (S5080) and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S5081).

At S5082, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 155) will be performed.

At S5083, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S5083). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter when the jackpot is won. In addition, at the time of a small hit, processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter is not performed. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In S5084, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big-hit start display command in the case of a big hit, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small-hit start display command in the case of a small hit. In addition, the big hit start display command or the small hit start display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. be done. After executing the process of S5084, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S5071 to S5084) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[7-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5077 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

At S5092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S5092, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5093.

At S5093, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command (S5094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S5094, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158).

[7-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S5026 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S5101).

If it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S5101), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 155). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S5101 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5102.

In S5102, the main CPU 201 loads the value of the counter value of the number of times of opening/closing of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening/closing execution number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of rounds in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed, the small winning game control It corresponds to a counter that counts the number of times the process is opened. It should be noted that the count value of the large winning opening opening/closing execution number counter (large winning opening opening/closing execution number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S5102, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5103.

In S5103, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the counter for the number of times of execution of opening and closing the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the hit type determination table of FIG. times or 10 times.

When it is determined in S5103 that the number of opening and closing execution times of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (YES in S5103), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5104.

At S5104, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S5104) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (Fig. 155 S5028) is performed. After executing the process of S5104, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5105.

At S5105, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed.

In S5106, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big-hit end display command when a big win is made, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small-hit end display command when a small win is made. In addition, the big hit end display command or the small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. be done. Then, after the process of S5106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

Returning to S5103, if it is determined that the number of opening/closing execution times of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S5103), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5107.

In S5107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the number of times of opening/closing of the big winning opening. After executing the process of S5107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5108.

At S5108, the main CPU 201 performs processing for determining the big winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the large winning opening to be opened, the large winning opening 5131 is determined when executing the big winning game control process, and the large winning opening 5131 is determined when executing the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S5108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5109.

In S5109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning hole 5131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 5131, the maximum number of balls entering the big winning hole 5131, the number of prize balls when entering the big winning hole, etc. are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the big winning game control process, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 5131 when executing the small winning game control process. In addition, it is not the meaning which excludes what the large winning a prize mouth 5131 is open|released multiple times in 1 round or small-hit game control processing. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 5131 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S5109, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5110.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to, for example, 29000 msec at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 1500 msec at maximum or 2000 msec at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. is set to The maximum number of balls entering the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 10 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls when entering the big prize opening 5131 is set to 15, for example. However, the values that are set or set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S5110, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening/closing control process for opening the large winning opening 5131. FIG. After executing the process of S5110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5111.

At S5111, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S5111) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S5027 in FIG. 155) is performed. After executing the process of S5111, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5112.

At S5112, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S5112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5113.

At S5113, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5113, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S5121).

If it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S5121), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 155). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S5121), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5122.

At S5122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 5131 is the maximum number of entering balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the big winning hole count switch 5132 (see FIG. 145) for counting the number of game balls entering the big winning hole is the maximum number of entering balls. . It should be noted that the large winning opening counter value counted by the large winning opening count switch 5132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S5122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 5131 is not the maximum winning number, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5123, and the number of gaming balls that have won the big winning opening 5131 reaches the maximum number. If it is determined to be the winning number, the process moves to S5128-1.

At S5128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the jackpot game state (jackpot flag is ON). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the big win game state, it shifts the process to S5124, and if it determines that it is not in the big win game state (that is, it is in the small win game state), it shifts the process to S5128-2. .

At S5123, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 5131 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S5109 in FIG. 160) has passed.

If it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 5131 has not elapsed (NO determination in S5123), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process ( 155).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 5131 has elapsed (YES in S5123), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5124.

At S<b>5124 , the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 5131 . After executing the process of S5124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5125.

At S5125, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S5125) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S5026 in FIG. 155) will be performed. After executing the process of S5125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5126.

At S5126, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S5126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5127.

In S5127, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command if it is in the jackpot gaming state. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. In addition, at the time of the small hit game state, transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command is not performed. After the process of S5127, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

At S5128-2, the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for closing the big winning opening 5131. FIG. After executing the process of S5128-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5128-3.

At S5128-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening control process, the jackpot end process (see S5028 in FIG. 155). will be performed. After executing the process of S5128-3, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5128-4.

At S5128-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S5128-4, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5128-5.

In S5128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a small hit end display command. The small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S5128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[7-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S5131).

When it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S5131), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S5131 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5132.

At S5132, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and the small win game state (large winning mouth open number counter value, big winning mouth winning counter value, etc.), time saving flag, small winning flag, big winning flag, pattern fixed number counter , etc. are cleared. After executing the process of S5132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5133.

In S5133, the main CPU 201 performs A time saving state setting processing. In this A time saving state setting process, referring to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. Set aspect data. Specifically, regardless of which of the selected symbol commands "z1" and "z2" per time saving, the time saving flag = 1 indicating the A time saving game state is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter = Set 10. After executing the process of S5132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5034.

At S5134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 159 is performed. After executing the processing of S5134, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[7-4-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 163, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 163 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S5300).

When it is determined in S5300 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and shifts the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5301.

At S5301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S5301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5310. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S5310 based on the control state number read in the process of S5301.

At S5310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S5310 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". The details of this normal symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5320.

At S5320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S5320 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended. ”. When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

At S5330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S5330 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs determination processing of the normal symbol derivation result (for example, normal symbol win or normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a hit for the normal symbol, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number for the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146. - 特許庁

In addition, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146, the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. Determine the release pattern (number of times of release, release time, wait time) and set the determined release pattern. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 5146 release pattern.

At S5340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessary product release processing. This process of S5340 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S5330. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

At S5350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S5350 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol per end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of resetting (clearing) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in the above S5310 to S5340 and various random values stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). .

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described normal symbol control process (S5300 to S5350) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[7-4-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 164, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 163) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S5311).

When it is determined in S5311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 163). On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5312.

At S5312, the main CPU 201 shifts the normal symbol starting information. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the normal symbol start storage area (2) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). The start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S5312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5313.

At S5313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determining value data ("normal design winning" or "normal design losing") is determined. After executing the process of S5313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5314.

At S5314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, the ``selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol'' is determined. After executing the process of S5314, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5315.

At S5315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. ), the variation pattern of the normal design and the variable display time of the normal design are determined based on the random number value for selecting the normal design production stored in the memory. After executing the process of S5315, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5316.

At S5316, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol variable display time determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S5315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display section 161. to start. The waiting time of this normal design is subtracted as a normal design timer counter in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process of S5316, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5317.

At S5317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (of FIG. 163 S5320) is performed. After executing the process of S5317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5318.

At S5318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the normal symbol variation pattern command. It should be noted that the variation pattern command of normal symbols reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[7-5. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 165, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S5500). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5510.

Note that the initialization process (S5500) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S5510, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 145). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 145) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5520.

In S5520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S5510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5530.

At S5530, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, a production pattern is determined, and based on the determined production pattern, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) for operating various production devices are executed. , lamp requests, and accessory requests). The details of this rendering mode determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5540.

In S5540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 145). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5550.

In S5550, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 145). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5560.

In S5560, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 145). Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5570.

At S5570, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the role product request to the role product control circuit 307 (see FIG. 145). Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[7-5-1. Production Mode Determination Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the effect mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 at S5530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 165) will be described. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect mode determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

At S5531, the sub CPU 301 executes effect pattern determination processing for determining the effect pattern. In this process, based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect pattern is determined that defines the mode of display effects displayed on the display device 7, the mode of sound effects output from the speaker 32, and the like. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5532.

In S5532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S5531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5533.

In S5533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5534.

In S5534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5535.

In S5535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5536.

In S5536, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product request generation process. In this process, a character request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 165).

[7-5-2. Effect pattern decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 at S5531 during the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166) will be described. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing an example of effect pattern determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

At S5531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command".

When it is determined in S5531-1 that it is a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-2. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "normal pattern variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-3.

At S5531-2, the sub CPU 301 performs a process for determining the variation effect of the identification symbol for effect. This "variation effect of the identification pattern for effect" is an effect that variably displays the identification pattern for effect in a predetermined variable mode as an effect suggesting that the "long open" of the normal electric accessory 5146 has been determined. . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "open pattern command for normal electric accessory corresponding to long open".

The "open pattern command for normal electric accessories corresponding to long opening" is, as described above, the normal symbol per selection symbol command "fz1" in the normal game state, the normal symbol in the A short game state or the C short game state. It refers to the selection symbol commands "fz1" and "fz2" at the time of winning.

If it is determined in S5531-3 that it is the "open pattern command for normal electric accessories corresponding to long opening", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be the "open pattern command for normal electric accessories corresponding to long opening", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-5.

At S5531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a start opening effect determination process. This "start opening effect" is an effect for notifying that the normal electric accessory 5146 is "long open" and the entry of a game ball into the start hole 5140 is enabled. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

At S5531-5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

When it is determined in S5531-5 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-6. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-11.

At S5531-6, the sub CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This "special effect" is a variable display of special symbols, a background effect performed during the small win game state, and is a common effect performed over a plurality of times of the small win game state. As this special effect, it has a "bonus time basic effect" and a "bonus time special effect", and the sub CPU 301 refers to the game state, and when it is in the normal game state or the C time reduction game state, the "bonus "Basic time performance" is determined, and "Bonus time special performance" is determined when the game is in the A reduced working hours game state. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-7, the sub CPU 301 performs a bonus time variation effect determination process for determining a special symbol variation effect in the bonus time, which will be described later, according to the type of the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

In this bonus time variation effect determination process, when it is a "time reduction per variation pattern command", the effect pattern for performing the "rewind effect" is determined so as to correspond to the effect of "remarks" in FIG. When it is the ``variation pattern command of the big win'', the production pattern for performing the ``full rotation reach'' or the ``reach for the notification of the big win'' is determined, and when it is the ``variation pattern command of the small win'', the ``shortening variation'' or the ``big win'' is determined. Decide the effect pattern for performing "notification reach". After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

At S5531-8, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "small hit start display command".

When it is determined in S5531-8 that it is the "small hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-9. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "small hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-10.

At S5531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This process is the same as S5531-6 above, and determines the "bonus time basic effect" when in the normal game state or the C time saving game state, and determines the "bonus time specialized effect" when in the A time saving game state. do. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

At S5531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "big hit start display command".

When it is determined in S5531-10 that it is the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-11. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-12.

In S5531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs bonus time special effect determination processing for determining the "bonus time special effect". After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

At S5531-12, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "game state specifying command".

If it is determined in S5531-12 that the command is the "game state designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-13. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be the "game state designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-14.

At S5531-13, the sub CPU 301 performs game state setting processing for setting the game state according to the type of the game state designation command. Specifically, if it is a game state designation command that indicates the normal game state, the normal game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if it is a game state designation command that indicates the A time saving game state, A time saving game The state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if it is a game state designation command indicating the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

At S5531-14, the sub CPU 301 also determines an effect pattern according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. FIG. After that, the sub CPU 301 executes the process of S5084, ends the effect pattern determination process, and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

The above-mentioned "bonus time basic effect or bonus time specialized effect (special effect)", "rewinding effect" and "start opening effect" will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

[7-6. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the game state transition in the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 168 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first passage port 5126A, the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination) determines "normal symbol hit", and the normal electric role A game ball can be entered into the starting port 5140 by determining the normal symbol hit selection symbol command fz1 corresponding to the "long release" of the object 5146 (probability of about 1/420.3).

When the game ball enters the starting port 5140, the starting information of the special symbol is extracted. And, in this embodiment, since the number of reserved special symbols is four, when five or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, the special symbol determination area (0) of the determination, four special symbols Start information is stored in the symbol start storage areas (1) to (4), and a special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination) is performed five times in total.

When a special symbol lottery (special symbol win determination) is determined to be a "big win" with a first probability (probability of about 1/319), the game state shifts to a big win game state. In the present embodiment, as described above, 1500 game balls can be put out in the jackpot game state of 10 rounds, and 600 game balls can be put out in the jackpot game state of 4 rounds. is configured to

When a special symbol lottery (special symbol win determination) is determined to be a "small hit" with a second probability (probability of about 1/1.64), the game state shifts to a small win game state. In this embodiment, as described above, 150 game balls are configured to be able to be paid out in the small winning game state. It should be noted that the game state does not shift with the shift to the small winning game state as a trigger.

When the lottery of the special symbols (hit determination of the special symbols) is determined to be a "time-saving win" with a third probability (probability of about 1/2.59), the game state shifts to the C time-saving game state.

After shifting to the jackpot game state, it shifts to the A time-saving game state. This A time-saving game state is set to the establishment of either condition of "end of 10 times of time-saving times (see FIG. 148)" or "transition to jackpot game state" as a termination condition of A time-saving game state. ing.

The C time-saving game state is set to the fact that one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, "time saving times end (see FIG. 148)" or "transition to the jackpot game state", has been established. there is

Further, in the present embodiment, the "number of times of time saving" is counted when the variable display of the special symbols is started, but may be performed when the variable display of the special symbols is finished.

In the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened” (see FIG. 152), so that the game ball can be entered into the start port 5140, and the special symbol is displayed again. You can get a lottery.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting port 5140 without determining a loss in the special symbol lottery, one of "big win", "minor win" or "time saving win" is determined. Then, if a "big hit" or "small hit" is determined, an opportunity to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as "bonus time") is provided, and if a "time saving hit" is determined, the C time saving game state is entered. After shifting, the game ball is entered into the starting port 5140 again, and the "bonus time" can be further extended. It should be noted that, as described above, it may be configured such that "losing" is determined with a relatively low probability in the lottery for special symbols.

By the way, the A time saving game state is set so that the number of times of time saving is increased compared to the C time saving game state. Therefore, when "time saving hit" is determined by special pattern lottery during A time saving game state, it is shifted from A time saving game state during stay to C time saving game state according to the determination of the "time saving win". As a result, there is a possibility that the number of times of time saving that should be possible to be executed is reduced, and as a result, it may be disadvantageous to the player.

Therefore, in the fifth pachinko game machine, even if the "time saving hit" is determined by the special symbol lottery during the A time saving game state, the processing to invalidate the determination of the "time saving hit" (shown in FIG. 158 By executing the processing of S5075), it is controlled not to shift from the A time saving game state to the C time saving game state. Therefore, even if "time saving win" is determined by lottery of special symbols during the A time saving game state, the A time saving game state being executed can be continued.

In addition, when the starting information for determining the "time saving hit" after the end of the A time saving game state remains in the pending storage and stored, C based on the starting information for determining this "time saving hit" Since it is possible to shift to the time-saving game state, even if it shifts to the A time-saving game state, the possibility of continuing the time-saving game state is maintained.

In addition, when "time saving win" is determined by lottery of special symbols during the C time saving game state, a new C time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the same way as the first pachinko game machine. Although this is ideal, in order to simplify the control process, it may be configured to invalidate the determination of the C time saving game state during the C time saving game state in the same way as the A time saving game state.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, two time-saving game states, A time-saving game state and C time-saving game state, are provided as time-saving game states. You may provide three time-saving game states of a state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

[7-7. Explanation of bonus time]
As described above, a “bonus time” is provided when a game ball enters the starting port 5140 . The mechanism of this "bonus time" will be explained. FIG. 169 is an example of an explanatory diagram explaining the bonus time in the fifth pachinko game machine.

Here, in FIG. 169, from the top, the "determination order" of the special symbol lottery, the "corresponding" indicating the special symbol determination area (0), and the special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) " "reserved memory" is illustrated, and the starting information stored in "this" and "reserved memory" is illustrated with "circles". In addition, the 'circle' of the starting information is 'small' when the starting information determines a small win, 'time' when the starting information determines a time-saving win, and the starting information determines a big win. Sometimes "large" is illustrated.

In FIG. 169(a), "long opening" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, 5 or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, and "small hit" is determined in all special symbol lotteries. This is an example of when

As shown in FIG. 169(a), when all the special symbol lotteries result in a "small win", a total of 5 small win games are played and the bonus time is over. In the case shown in FIG. 169(a), it is possible to pay out 600 game balls of small winning game×5 times=150×5=600.

In FIG. 169(b), "long opening" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, 5 or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, and "time saving hit" is determined by lottery of the fifth special symbol. It is an example of the following when it is done.

As shown in FIG. 169(b), in the lottery of the 1st to 4th special symbols, it is determined as "small hit", and the small hit game is performed, and in the lottery of the 5th special symbol, " Time-saving win" is determined, and after the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the state is shifted to the C time-saving game state.

When shifting to the C time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened” with the passage of the game ball through the second passage port 5126B as a trigger, and the game ball is entered into the start port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the lottery for the 5th special symbol, "this" and "reserved memory 1-4" are default data (blank data) (all the starting information of "this" and "reserved memory 1-4" are digested Therefore, when five or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, five pieces of starting information are newly stored in "relevant" and "reserved memory" with the C time-saving gaming state as a trigger. will be

As shown in FIG. 169(b), in the lottery of the 6th and 7th special symbols, it is determined as "small hit", and the small winning game is played, and in the lottery of the 8th special symbol, Again, it is determined as "time-saving hit", and after the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the state is shifted to the C time-saving game state.

When shifting to the C time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened” with the passage of the game ball through the second passage port 5126B as a trigger, and the game ball is entered into the start port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the lottery for the 8th special symbol, the starting information has already been stored in "relevant" and "reserved memory 1", and "reserved memory 2 to 4" are default data (blank data). , By entering three or more game balls into the starting port 5140, with the C time-saving gaming state as a trigger, three pieces of starting information are newly stored in "holding memories 2 to 4".

After that, in the lottery for the ninth to thirteenth special symbols, it is determined as "small win", the small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(b), it is possible to pay out 1650 game balls of small winning game×11 times=150×11=1650.

In FIG. 169(c), "long opening" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, 5 or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, and the fifth special symbol lottery determines "big hit". This is an example after when.

As shown in FIG. 169 (c), in the lottery of the 1st to 4th special symbols, it is determined as "small hit", and the small hit game is performed, and in the lottery of the 5th special symbol, " "Big win" is determined, and after the big win game state is completed, the state is shifted to the A time saving game state.

As described above, in the A time saving game state, the number of times of time saving is set to 10 times (see FIG. 148 etc.), and the A time saving game state can be continued until the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. In the A time-saving gaming state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened”, and the game ball can enter the start port 5140 again. be possible.

Then, when a ``big win'' is determined in the lottery of the fifth special symbol, and the transition to the A time-saving game state is made after the end of the big-hit game state, ten special symbol lotteries of the 6th to 15th special symbols are drawn in the A time-saving game state. will do.

Here, in the lottery of the 9th and 13th special symbols in the A time saving game state, it is determined as "time saving win". However, as described above, even if the "time saving hit" is determined by the special symbol lottery during the A time saving game state, the process of invalidating the determination of the "time saving hit" (the process of S5075 shown in FIG. 158) By executing it, the A time saving game state can be continuously executed without shifting from the A time saving game state to the C time saving game state.

The lottery of the 16th to 19th special symbols is based on the starting information (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining hold information") stored in "hold memory 1 to 4" after the end of the A time-saving game state. It is a lottery of patterns.

In the lottery of the 19th special design based on the remaining reservation information, it is determined as "time saving hit". Since this 19th special symbol lottery is performed in the normal game state after the A time-saving game state is completed, after the "time-saving hit" is determined, C after the variable display of the special symbol is ended. It will shift to the time saving game state. Therefore, even when the time saving game state A ends, the time saving game state can be continued again based on the remaining hold information, and the decline in the interest of the game due to the end of the time saving game state A is suppressed. can do.

When shifting to the C time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened” with the passage of the game ball through the second passage port 5126B as a trigger, and the game ball is entered into the start port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the lottery for the 19th special symbol, "relevant" and "reserved memory 1 to 4" are default data (blank data), so that 5 or more game balls enter the start port 5140. Therefore, with the C time-saving gaming state as a trigger, five pieces of starting information are newly stored in "relevant" and "reserved storage".

After that, in the lottery for the 20th to 24th special symbols, it is determined as a "small win", the small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(c), if the "jackpot" in the lottery of the fifth special symbol is "10R", the jackpot game (10R)×1 time=1500×1=“1500 pieces”, A total of "4500" game balls can be put out by adding small winning game x 20 times = 150 x 20 = "3000". In addition, if the "big hit" in the lottery of the fifth special symbol is "4R", the big hit game (4R) x 1 time = 600 x 1 = "600" and the small winning game x 20 times = 150 x 20. ＝“3000”, and a total of “3600” game balls can be put out.

As described above, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the "bonus time" can be extended if the "time saving win" is determined by the lottery of the special symbols. As a result, the end time of the "bonus time" can be made variable, allowing the player to enjoy how long the bonus time will continue, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. Incidentally, the end condition of the bonus time is also that "small wins are determined five times in a row in the special symbol lottery".

[7-8. Performance of bonus time]
Next, the effect of "bonus time" will be described. FIG. 170 is an example of a display image for explaining the effect of bonus time in the fifth pachinko game machine.

(Production when the time is reduced during the bonus time)
(a-1) to (d-1) in the left column of FIG. 170 are an example of the display image for explaining the effect when "time saving win" occurs during the bonus time, and FIG. 169(b) described above. It corresponds to the lottery of the 1st to 6th special symbols.

FIG. 170(a-1) is an example of the display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols in FIG. 169(b) described above. corresponds to

"Bonus time basic effect" is a effect commonly performed during variable display of special symbols in the normal game state or the C time saving game state and in the small winning game state. More specifically, the "bonus time basic effect" receives a game state designation command indicating the normal game state or the C time saving game state, and when it is the normal game state or the C time saving game state, a special symbol variation pattern command and when a small hit start display command is received in the normal game state or the C time reduction game state.

As shown in FIG. 170(a-1), as the "bonus time basic effect", "number of remaining rounds" is displayed in the upper left part of the display area, and "bonus time" is displayed in the upper central part of the display area. , "RIGHT HITTING" is displayed in the upper right part of the display area in order to notify the regular game mode. Further, a predetermined character image is displayed in the central portion of the display area, and "total number of rounds" and "acquired points" are displayed in the lower right portion of the display area.

Here, the ``remaining number of rounds'' is displayed by subtracting 1R from 5R corresponding to the end condition of the bonus time being ``5 consecutive small hits in the lottery of special symbols''. It is. In addition, the "total number of rounds" indicates the sum of the cumulative number of times controlled in the small winning game state and the total number of rounds executed in the big winning game state. The “acquired points” indicates the cumulative number of game balls paid out each time the game balls enter the big winning hole 5131 .

FIG. 170(b-1) is an example of the display image of the "rewind effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the time saving hit is determined by lottery of the special symbols, and FIG. 169 described above. This corresponds to the lottery for the fifth special symbol in (b).

"Rewind effect" is a effect that is performed when a variable pattern command of a special symbol for time saving is received (see FIG. 149), the bonus time basic effect is rewound, and the small winning game state may continue further. It is a production that suggests that there is. As shown in FIG. 170(b-1), as the rewind effect, a display as if the animation of the previous bonus time basic effect is rewound.

FIG. 170(c-1) is an example of a display image of "start opening effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 after the rewinding effect shown in FIG. 170(b-1) is performed. .

The “start opening effect” is an effect for notifying that entry of a game ball into the start hole 5140 is enabled. Specifically, the “start opening effect” is when the variable display of the special symbol for the time saving per is completed and the game state designation command indicating the C time saving game state is received, or when the game ball is the second passage opening 5126B is passed, and it is the production|presentation performed when the selection pattern command is received at the time of normal design per which long opening of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed. As shown in FIG. 170(c-1), as the starting hole opening effect, a display of "Aim for the chance starting hole!" It should be noted that "Right shot" is still displayed in the upper right part of the display area.

FIG. 170(d-1) is an example of the display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the game ball enters the start hole 5140 again. This corresponds to the 6th special symbol lottery of 169(b).

As shown in FIG. 170(d-1), when the game ball enters the start hole 5140 again after the "start opening effect", the "bonus time basic effect" is performed again. In this "bonus time basic effect", the "number of remaining rounds" is increased (rewound), and the character image is displayed to notify that the bonus time has been extended.

In this way, it is possible to notify that the bonus time has been extended by the "rewind effect" when the time saving hit is determined, and the player is entertained to see how long the bonus time will continue, thereby making the game more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of

(Production when a big hit is achieved during the bonus time)
(a-2) to (d-2) in the right column of FIG. 170 are examples of display images for explaining effects when a "jackpot" is achieved during the bonus time. It corresponds to the lottery of the 1st to 16th special symbols.

FIG. 170(a-2) is an example of the display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols in FIG. 169(c) described above. corresponds to The display contents such as “number of remaining rounds”, “bonus time”, “right shot”, “total number of rounds” and “acquired points” shown in FIG. 170(a-2) are the same as in FIG. 170(a-1). is.

FIG. 170(b-2) is an example of the display image of "jackpot notification reach" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the jackpot is determined by lottery of special symbols, and FIG. 169 described above. This corresponds to the lottery for the fifth special symbol in (c).

"Big hit notification reach" is an effect that is performed when a variable pattern command for a special big win pattern is received (see FIG. 149), and is an effect of whether or not three decorative patterns consisting of the characters "invincible" are aligned. is. As shown in FIG. 170(b-2), when the game is a big win, as a result of the effect of the big win notification reach, the three decoration symbols "Invincible", "Invincible" and "Invincible" are stop-displayed. When the game is not a big hit, decorative patterns such as "invincible", "x", and "invincible" are stopped and displayed as a result of the ready-to-win performance for informing the big hit.

FIG. 170(c-2) is an example of the display image of the "bonus time special effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the sixth to fifteenth special symbols in FIG. 169(c) described above. It corresponds to lottery.

"Bonus time specialized performance" is a performance performed in common during the variable display of special symbols in the big winning game state, the time saving game state A, and the small winning game state in the time saving game state A. More specifically, the "bonus time special effect" receives a game state designation command indicating the A time-saving game state when a jackpot start display command is received, and when it is in the A time-saving game state, a special symbol is displayed. It is an effect performed when a variation pattern command is received and when a small hit start display command is received in the case of the A time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 170(c-2), as the "bonus time special effect", "invincible mode" is displayed in the center of the display area, and in the upper right part of the display area to notify the regular game mode. "Right-handed" is displayed on . Then, in the lower right part of the display area, the "total number of rounds" and "acquired points" are displayed following the "bonus time basic effect". In this "total number of rounds", the sum of the cumulative number of times controlled in the small winning game state and the total number of rounds executed in the big winning game state are displayed, and in the "acquired points", the small winning game state is displayed. The cumulative payout number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the big winning opening 5131 in the state and the jackpot game state is displayed.

FIG. 170 (d-2) is an example of a display image of "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the A time-saving gaming state is finished and there are four pieces of remaining hold information. , corresponds to the lottery for the 16th special symbol in FIG. 169(c) described above.

As shown in FIG. 170(d-2), in the "bonus time basic effect" after the bonus time special effect ends, the "remaining number of rounds", "cumulative number of rounds" and The "acquired points" are continuously displayed, and the character image is displayed to notify that the bonus time has been restarted.

In addition, "number of remaining rounds" is displayed as "4R" corresponding to 4 remaining hold information, and if there are 3 remaining hold information after the end of the A time-saving gaming state, "3R" is displayed, If there are two remaining hold information after the end of the A time saving game state, "2R" is displayed, and if there is one remaining hold information after the end of the A time saving game state, "1R" is displayed, A time saving game state If there is no remaining pending information after the end of, "End" will be displayed.

In this way, the "bonus time special effect" performed during the big win and during the A short-time gaming state makes it possible to direct the guarantee period in which the bonus time does not end, so that the bonus time can be enjoyed with peace of mind, and further enhanced. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Thus, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in the normal game state, the main game is not the "special symbol game" consisting of the lottery of special symbols, but the "ordinary symbol game" composed of the lottery of normal symbols. The special pattern lottery can be treated as a ``bonus time'' as an opportunity to give out a predetermined number of game balls without determining ``losing'' in the pattern lottery, thus providing unprecedented new playability. can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, if "time saving hit" is determined by lottery of special symbols, the game ball can enter the starting port 5140 again by shifting to the time saving game state (C time saving game state), and the bonus time is extended. can be done. As a result, it is possible to make the end time of the bonus time variable, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, an effect is performed when a small winning is determined by a lottery of special symbols and a shortening variation of the special symbols is performed, and when it is controlled to a small winning game state. The production is a common "special production (bonus time basic production or bonus time special production)", and the production over continuous shortening fluctuation and small winning game state is also a common "special production (bonus time basic production or bonus time Specialized effect)”, it is possible to perform a plurality of small winning game states as one bonus time.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, when a special symbol lottery determines a "time-saving win" and variable display of the special symbols is performed, the bonus time basic effect is rewound and the small winning game state is further enhanced. A "rewind effect" is performed to suggest that there is a possibility of continuation. As a result, even when the special symbols are variably displayed, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified Example of the Fifth Pachinko Machine>
Next, a modification of the embodiment of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as a bonus time effect, as shown in FIG. 170, etc., a bonus time basic effect is rolled as a "rewind effect" when variable display of special symbols for time saving is performed. Returning, in the next bonus time basic effect, the "number of remaining rounds" is configured to be increased (rewound), but the "number of remaining rounds" is not displayed in the bonus time basic effect, Display the "maximum number of rounds" as the number of times that the small winning game state can be executed, and add the maximum number of rounds as the "maximum number of rounds additional effect" when the variable display of the special pattern for the time saving is performed. It may be configured to perform such a production.

In addition, as a bonus time basic effect, a battle effect is performed between ally characters and enemy characters. The HP of the ally character is set to 5 points, the enemy character attacks the ally character and subtracts 1 HP every time the game is controlled to the small win game state, and the ally character is added when the variable display of the special pattern for the time-saving win is performed. It may be constructed such that an effect is performed such that the HP of the character is recovered.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as the bonus time special effect, both the bonus time basic effect and the bonus time special effect can be executed. It may be configured as an effect that is summarized in the basic effect. In this case, in the jackpot game state, the "jackpot middle performance" for the jackpot game state can be executed, and in the A time reduction game state, the "number of remaining rounds" of the bonus time basic performance is set to the time reduction of the A time reduction game state. The number of rounds may be added, or a display such as "HOLD" or "STOP" may be displayed in the "number of remaining rounds".

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 148, it is configured to determine one time as the number of times of time saving in the case of a time saving hit, but it may be configured to determine two or more times of time saving. . Furthermore, a plurality of types of special symbols (a plurality of types of selection symbol commands) corresponding to time saving hits may be provided, and a plurality of types of times of time saving may be determined. In particular, in the present embodiment, by setting a large number of time-saving times, it is possible to shift the time-saving gaming state to a larger number of small winning game states, and to make it possible to pay out a large number of game balls.

In addition, the fifth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko machine, but like the third pachinko machine, it is configured as a type 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine. good too. In the fifth pachinko game machine, when configured as a one-type two-type mixing machine, a specific area and a non-specific area are provided inside the big winning hole 5131 (or another big winning hole to be added), and the game is played. It may be configured to control the jackpot game state by passing the ball through the specific area.

(others)
The fifth pachinko game machine described above can apply each other's techniques between the respective embodiments, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Also, the effects described in the fifth pachinko game machine are merely enumerations of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the fifth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancies in its game characteristics and control.

[8. Sixth pachinko machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel in the same manner as the second pachinko machine. However, the sixth pachinko gaming machine differs from the second pachinko gaming machine in terms of the basic specifications of the game performance, and along with this, some of the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are different.

Hereinafter, in describing the embodiment of the sixth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers are assigned to the same components as in the first pachinko game machine, and detailed descriptions of the configurations and processes will be omitted. .

The sixth pachinko machine is a "simultaneous variation machine" capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. It may be a "prioritized variable machine" in which any one of the starting conditions is established preferentially, or a "sequential variable machine" in which the starting conditions are established in order of winning, including the first and second starting openings. may be

[8-1. Appearance configuration]
With reference to FIG. 171, the external configuration of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 171 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction.

As shown in FIG. 171, the appearance configuration of the sixth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that the effect button device 6310 (first effect operation unit 6311) provided on the upper tray 51 The configuration is different.

The performance button device 6310 is an operating device that allows the player to operate the performance. In particular, the effect button device 6310 of the sixth pachinko game machine is configured such that its operation mode can be changed, and the effect function can be improved by changing the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 .

Below, the change of the operation mode of the production|presentation button apparatus 6310 is demonstrated.

[8-2. Manner of operation of production button device]
FIG. 172 is an example of a conceptual diagram showing changes in the operation mode of the effect button device of the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 172(a) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the first operation mode as the initial operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(a), the first operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the first effect operation section 6311 operable by the player is positioned on the upper surface side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the first operation mode, the player can press the first effect operation section 6311 .

FIG. 172(b) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the second operation mode changed from the first operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(b), in the second operation mode of the effect button device 6310, the operation drive unit 6313 is rotated by about 45 degrees toward the protective glass 43 by a drive device such as a motor, and the player can The operable second effect operation section 6312 is positioned on the front side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the second operation mode, it is possible for the player to obliquely press the second effect operation section 6312 .

FIG. 172(c) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the third operation mode changed from the second operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(c), in the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310, the operation driving portion 6313 rotates about 90 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second effect operation portion 6312 rotates toward the upper surface side. It is an operation mode located at . When the effect button device 6310 is in the third operation mode, it is possible for the player to press the second effect operation section 6312 directly downward.

FIG. 172(d) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fourth operation mode changed from the third operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(d), the fourth operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the second effect operation section 6312 protrudes upward from the operation drive section 6313. As shown in FIG. When the effect button device 6310 is in the fourth operation mode, it is possible for the player to press down the second effect operation section 6312 projecting upward.

FIG. 172(e) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fifth operation mode changed from the fourth operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(e), in the fifth operation mode of the effect button device 6310, the operation driving part 6313 rotates up to about 120 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second effect operation part 6312 protrudes. is operated in such a manner that it falls backward. When the effect button device 6310 is in the fifth operation mode, it is possible to pull the second effect operation part 6312 that has fallen backward to the front side.

Furthermore, the production button device 6310 has a built-in vibration device (not shown), and the production button device 6310 is configured to vibrate. Therefore, in more detail, the effect mode of the effect button device 6310 can be configured by combining the first to fifth operation modes and the vibration mode.

In addition, the operation mode of the production button device 6310 is not limited to the above-described operation mode and the number of changes thereof. For example, the effect button device 6310 may be an operation mode in which it moves back and forth, left and right, or an operation mode in which it only protrudes upward. Furthermore, the effect button device 6310 may not vibrate without incorporating a vibrating device.

[8-3. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 173, the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 6010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 173 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 6010 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 6010 includes a game panel 6100, various members are arranged on the game panel 6100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side surface of the game panel 6100, in which the shot game ball can roll and flow. .

As shown in FIG. 173, the game board unit 6010 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine mainly has a ball passage 6108, a deceleration wall portion 6109, and a game area 105 compared to the first pachinko game machine. center accessory 6115, first starting port (middle) 6120A, first starting port (right) 6120B, second starting port 6140, passage gate 6126, and ordinary electric accessory The unit 6145, the big-hit accessory unit 6130, and the small-hit accessory unit 6150 are different in configuration and arrangement. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

(ball passage)
The ball passage 6108 is arranged in the right region 107 and is composed of a downwardly inclined flat plate portion, and a game ball can roll on the plate portion. The plate portion of the ball passage 6108 is made of transparent resin, and the contact surface on which the game ball rolls is textured. By embossing the ball passage 6108, it is possible to decelerate the rolling game ball. In addition, by embossing the transparent resin, the light emitted from the LED or the like is diffusely reflected and decorated. You can also increase your sexuality. Note that the ball passage 6108 may be formed of a non-translucent member instead of being formed of a transparent resin.

(Deceleration wall)
The deceleration wall portion 6109 is arranged above the ball passage 6108 and is a surface processed portion in which the surface of the game panel 6100 is textured. A deceleration wall portion 6109 processed on the surface of the game panel 6100 can decelerate a rolling game ball. In addition, by configuring the game panel 6100 with transparent resin, light is emitted from an LED or the like. Light is diffusely reflected, and decorativeness can be enhanced.

(Center role)
The center accessory 6115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 6100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

The center accessory 6115 has a warp entrance 117, a stage 118, and a chance entrance 119 as in the first pachinko machine. is also provided.

The effect partitioning section 6116 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7 , and partitions the display area of the display device 7 . forming

In addition, in the display area of the display device 7, while the special symbols are variably displayed in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, the special symbols are variably displayed with the identification symbols for performance (for example, decorative symbols). Display the result of the hit determination process, the effect image according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the effect image during the jackpot game state, the demonstration effect image, the pending image showing the suspension status of the variable display of the special symbol, etc. to display.

(First start port)
The first starting port (middle) 6120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and it is possible to enter a left-handed game ball (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter). It's becoming When a game ball enters the first starting port (middle) 6120A, the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 6121A (see FIG. 174 described later).

The first starting port (right) 6120B is arranged in the right region 107 and is provided in a normal electric accessory unit 6145, which will be described later. It is possible to enter a game ball that has been hit (left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter). When the game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B, the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 6121B.

In the embodiment, the first starting port (middle) 6120A and the first starting port (right) 6120B are collectively referred to as "first starting ports 6120A and 6120B", and the first starting port switch 6121A and the first starting port The switches 6121B are also collectively referred to as "first start-up switches 6121A and 6121B".

1st starting port switch 6121A, 6121B first starting port 6120A, when the entry ball (passing) of the game ball to 6120B is detected, the starting information of the first special symbol (random number for judging a big hit, random number of symbol, random number for selection of the first effect, random number for selection of the second effect, etc.) are extracted, and the starting information of the extracted first special symbol is reserved up to "the first reserved number (for example, 4)". The reserved starting information of the first special symbol is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Also, when the game balls enter the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B, the first number of prize balls (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the first start ports 6120A and 6120B is not limited to this.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 6140 is located in the right region 107 and below (downstream) a normal electric accessory unit 6145, which will be described later. is difficult or impossible). When the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 6141 (see FIG. 174 described later).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second starting port 6140 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 6145 (the first starting port (right) 6120B), so the first starting port (right) 6120B is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down the right region 107 enters the first starting port (right) 6120B provided upstream before reaching the second starting port 6140, and the second It is difficult to enter the 2 starting hole 6140. This is the same when the first starting port (right) 6120B is in a time-saving gaming state where it is likely to be in an open state.

When the entry ball (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 6140 is detected by the second starting port switch 6141, the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the starting information of the extracted second special symbol ( Jackpot judgment random number, symbol random number, first effect selection random number, second effect selection random number, etc.) up to "second pending number (for example, 2)" which is less than the first pending number Reserved. The reserved starting information of the second special symbol is subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, a second number of prize balls (for example, one) smaller than the first number of prize balls is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 6140 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the second start port 6140, the number of holdings to hold the start information is smaller than when the game ball enters the first start ports 6120A and 6120B, and is paid out. The number of prize balls is also set to be small. However, when the game ball enters the second start port 6140 and when the game ball enters the first start ports 6120A and 6120B, it is set so that the number of reserved balls and the number of prize balls are the same. Alternatively, it may be set such that when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, the number of reserved balls or the number of prize balls is large.

(passage gate)
The passage gate 6126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 6145, which will be described later, in the right area 107, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. In addition, the passage gate 6126 is provided with a passage gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later) for detecting passage of a game ball to the passage gate 6126 . Then, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 6126 flows down the right region 107 toward the normal electric accessory unit 6145 .

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 6126 is detected by the passage gate switch 6127, the starting information of the normal design is extracted, and the starting information of the extracted normal design (random number for judgment per normal design, normal design design random numbers, etc.) are reserved up to a third reserved number (for example, four). The normally reserved starting information of the design is provided for the winning determination process of the normal design (lottery of the normal design) when the starting condition of the normal design is established. Also, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, the game ball is not paid out. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out.

Also, the passage gate 6126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. Here, the condition for transitioning to the jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device are activated. Although the conditional device is operated, it is possible not to operate the accessory continuous operating device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous operating device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later). You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 6145 is arranged in the right area 107 above (upstream side) the second starting port 6140 and below the passage gate 6126 so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. are placed in The normal electric accessory unit 6145 includes a first start port (right) 6120B, a first start port switch 6121B for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first start port (right) 6120B, and a normal electric accessory 6146. It is a unit body that integrates

The normal electric accessory 6146 includes a protruding plate type shutter 6147 for normal electric power that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for normal electric power 6148 (see FIG. 174 described later) for operating the shutter 6147 for normal electric power. The normal electric accessory 6146, that is, the normal electric shutter 6147, is an open state in which the game ball can enter the first start port (right) 6120B or is easy to enter, and the game ball can enter the first start port (right) 6120B. It is configured to be capable of transitioning to a closed state in which entry is impossible or difficult.

The general electric shutter 6147 is composed of a flat plate-like roof gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the second starting port 6140 side. When the general electricity shutter 6147 is in the open mode, the general electricity shutter 6147 is buried in the game panel 6100, the first start opening (right) 6120B is in an open state, and game balls flowing down the right region 107, A game ball rolling on the general electricity shutter 6147 can enter the first start opening (right) 6120B. When the general electric shutter 6147 is in the closed mode, the general electric shutter 6147 protrudes from the game panel 6100 to close the first starting port (right) 6120B, and the game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B. Ball becomes impossible or difficult. Also, when the normal electric shutter 6147 is in the closed mode, the game ball rolling on the normal electric shutter 6147 is guided to the second starting port 6140 or a small winning accessory unit 6150 which will be described later. Instead of the general electric shutter 6147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a blade member that is movable in the left-right direction, called a so-called electric chew, may be employed.

(jackpot accessory unit)
The jackpot accessory unit 6130 is arranged above the passage gate 6126 in the right area 107 . The big winning accessory unit 6130 integrates a first big winning slot 6131, a first big winning slot count switch 6132 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first big winning slot 6131, and a big winning accessory 6133. It is a unit body.

The first big prize winning port 6131 is a prize winning port that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In the present embodiment, the first big winning port 6131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is "big win" is derived. be. When the first big winning hole 6131 is controlled to the big winning game state, the game balls up to the first specified number (for example, 10) can enter, and the game balls enter this first big winning hole 6131. When the ball is thrown, the number of game balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first big winning hole 6131 will be paid out.

The big-hit accessory 6133 includes a protruding plate-type big-hit shutter 6134 that can move back and forth, and a big-hit solenoid 6135 (see FIG. 174 described later) that operates the big-hit shutter 6134 . The big-hit accessory 6133, that is, the big-hit shutter 6134, has an open state in which a game ball can enter the first big winning hole 6131 or is easy to enter, and a game ball cannot or cannot enter the first big winning hole 6131. It is configured to be transitionable into and out of a difficult closed state.

The big-hit shutter 6134 is composed of a flat plate-like roof gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the passage gate 6126 side. When the big-hit shutter 6134 is in the open mode, the big-hit shutter 6134 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the first big-winning opening 6131 is in an open state. A game ball rolling on is allowed to enter the first big winning hole 6131 . When the big win shutter 6134 is in the closed mode, the big win shutter 6134 protrudes from the game panel 6100 and the first big winning hole 6131 is closed, and the game ball cannot enter the first big winning hole 6131 or becomes difficult. Also, when the big win shutter 6134 is in the closed mode, it guides the game ball rolling on the big win shutter 6134 to the passage gate 6126 on the downstream side.

In the "jackpot game state" in which the jackpot accessory 6133 operates, the state transition from the closed state to the open state of the first jackpot 6131 is performed up to the maximum number of rounds. For one round, the maximum opening time in which the first big winning hole 6131 is open has passed, or the first specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the first big winning hole 6131 Then, the first big winning hole 6131 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the maximum number of rounds ends, the jackpot game state ends. Since the number of game balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first big winning hole 6131 is paid out every time the game ball enters the first big winning hole 6131, the jackpot game state is a large amount of game balls. is a game state in which it is possible to pay out

(small hit accessories unit)
The small hit accessory unit 6150 is arranged in the right region 107 above the second starting port 6140 and below the normal electric accessory unit 6145 . The small winning accessory unit 6150 integrates a second large winning opening 6151, a second large winning opening count switch 6152 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening 6151, and a small winning accessory 6153. It is a unit body.

The second big prize winning port 6151 is a prize winning port that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In the present embodiment, the second big winning port 6151 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit" is derived. is. When the second big winning hole 6151 is controlled in the small winning game state, the game balls up to the second specified number (for example, 4) can be entered, and the game balls enter the second big winning hole 6151. When the ball enters, the number of game balls (for example, 14) corresponding to the second big winning hole 6151 will be paid out.

The small-hit accessory unit 6150 includes a protruding plate-type small-hit shutter 6154 that can move back and forth, and a small-hit solenoid 6155 (see FIG. 174 described later) that operates the small-hit shutter 6154 . The small-hit accessory unit 6150, that is, the small-hit shutter 6154, has an open state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 6151 or is easy to enter, and a game ball cannot enter the second big winning hole 6151. It is configured to be transitionable to a possible or difficult closed state.

The small-hit shutter 6154 is composed of a flat plate-like roof gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the second starting port 6140 side. When the small winning shutter 6154 is in the open mode, the small winning shutter 6154 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the second big winning opening 6151 is in an open state, and the game balls flowing down the right region 107 and the small winning A game ball rolling on the shutter 6154 can enter the second big winning hole 6151.例文帳に追加When the small winning shutter 6154 is in the closed mode, the small winning shutter 6154 protrudes from the game panel 6100, the second large winning opening 6151 is closed, and the game ball cannot enter the second large winning opening 6151. possible or difficult. Moreover, when the shutter 6154 for small hits is in a closed mode, the game ball rolling on the shutter 6154 for small hits is guided to the second starting port 6140 on the downstream side.

In the "small winning game state" in which the small winning accessory unit 6150 operates, the state transition from the closed state to the open state of the second big winning opening 6151 is performed for a predetermined number of opening times. For one small winning game state, a predetermined number of times of opening is completed, or a second specified number (for example, 4) less than the first specified number (for example, 10) in the big win game state. When the ball enters the second big winning hole 6151, the second big winning hole 6151 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and one small winning game state ends. Each time a game ball enters the second large winning opening 6151, the number of winning balls corresponding to the second large winning opening 6151 (for example, 14) game balls are paid out, the small winning game state is a game state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the second specified number of the small hit game state (for example, 4 pieces) is set less than the first specified number of the big hit game state (for example, 10 pieces), but the small hit game state The second specified number may be set equal to the first specified number in the big win game state, or may be set larger than the first specified number in the big win game state. However, it is desirable to set the second specified number of the small winning game state within 10 pieces.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (for example, 14) corresponding to the second big prize opening 6151 is set smaller than the number of prize balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131. , The number of prize balls corresponding to the second big prize opening 6151 may be the same as the number of prize balls corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131, or may be set larger than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131. You may However, it is desirable to set the number of prize balls corresponding to the second big prize opening 6151 within 15 pieces.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first big winning hole 6131 and the second big winning hole 6151 are provided separately, but this is not the only option. The big winning opening opened when executing the winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

[8-4. electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 174 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 174, the sixth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 , a payout/fire control circuit 400 , and a power supply circuit 450 .

However, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the configuration of the sub-control circuit 300 are partially different from those of the first pachinko game machine. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

[8-4-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the sixth pachinko game machine has a general power solenoid 6148, a big win solenoid 6135, a small win solenoid 6155, and a first start port switch 6121A connected to the main control circuit 200. , 6121B, the second starting port switch 6141, the passage gate switch 6127, the first big winning port count switch 6132, and the second big winning port count switch 6152 are partially different.

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 6148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 6147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 6148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 6147 moves backward to open the first start port (right) 6120B. is not performed (OFF), the general electric shutter 6147 is advanced forward to close the first start opening (right) 6120B.

(Solenoid for jackpot)
The big win solenoid 6135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the big win shutter 6134 . When the big win solenoid 6135 is energized (turned ON) by the main CPU 201, the big win shutter 6134 moves backward to open the first big winning port 6131. (If it is OFF), the big win shutter 6134 is moved forward to close the first big winning hole 6131 .

(Solenoid for small hit)
The small winning solenoid 6155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the small winning shutter 6154 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the small win solenoid 6155 (it is ON), the main CPU 201 energizes the small win shutter 6154 to make the second big winning port 6151 open. If not (if it is OFF), the small win shutter 6154 is moved forward to close the second big prize opening 6151 .

(First start switch)
The first starting port switches 6121A and 6121B are penetrating proximity switches that detect entry of game balls into the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B. The first starter switch 6121A detects the entry of a game ball into the first starter (middle) 6120A, and the first starter switch 6121B detects the entry of a game ball into the first starter (right) 6120B. do.

(Second starting switch)
The second starter switch 6141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the second starter switch 6140 .

(Passing gate switch)
The passage gate switch 6127 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the passage gate switch 6126 .

(1st big prize mouth count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 6132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 6131 . When the first big winning hole count switch 6132 detects that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 6131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole per round, and counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole. The payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the first prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) corresponding to 6131 .

(Second big prize mouth count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 6152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 6151 . When the second big winning hole count switch 6152 detects the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole 6151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of the game balls entering per small winning game state, The payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the second prize balls (for example, 14 game balls) corresponding to the second big prize opening 6151 .

[8-4-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, and a command input port 308, as in the first pachinko game machine. , but the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and an effect button device 6310 are further provided.

(Button control circuit 310)
Button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving effect button device 6310 . That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 and vibrating the effect button device 6310 . The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button device 6310 according to the drive command from the sub CPU 301 .

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal relating to the player's operation detected by the effect button device 6310 . The button control circuit 310 outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301 when an operation signal is input from the production button device 6310 .

(Production button device)
The effect button device 6310, as shown in FIG. 1st operation part detection switch for detecting operation of game ball for 1 effect operation part 6311, second operation part detection switch for detecting operation of game ball for second effect operation part 6312, operation of game ball for operation drive part 6313 , a rotation motor for rotating the operation drive unit 6313, a button solenoid for projecting the second effect operation unit 6312, and a vibration motor for vibrating the vibrating body. configured as follows.

[8-5. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175-185, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, a "normal game state" in which a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state are controlled, a "high-probability time-saving game state" in which a high-probability game state and a short-time game state are controlled, and a high-probability game A "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" in which the state and non-time-saving gaming state are controlled, and a "low-probability short-time gaming state" in which the low-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state are controlled are prepared, and the main CPU 201 controls these It is possible to progress the game in one of the game states. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and any one of the normal game state, high-probability short-time game state, high-probability non-short-time game state, and low-probability short-time game state is progressed. You may choose not to do so.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display a regular game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) in the display area of the display device 7, for example.

Further, in the embodiment, the first starting port and the second starting port are collectively referred to as "starting port", and the first special design and second special design are collectively referred to as "special design". The hit determination process of the first special symbol is also called "first special symbol lottery", and the hit determination process of the second special symbol is also called "second special symbol lottery". The lottery is also collectively referred to as "lottery of special symbols".

[8-5-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 175 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 175 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big win", "minor win" or "losing" by lottery.

The special symbol hit determination table includes the type of special symbol (type of start port), the variable probability flag (whether or not variable probability control is executed), and the first start port 6120A, 6120B or the second start port 6140. The random value for judging a big hit extracted (obtained) based on the above, and the data used in the judging process for special symbols, the judgment value data corresponding to "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" ("big hit Judgment value data”, “small hit judgment value data”, and “losing judgment value data”) are defined in association with each other. It should be noted that the total random number value for judging a big hit is 65,536.

As shown in FIG. 175, when the game ball enters the first start openings 6120A and 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, based on the probability variation flag and the special symbol big hit determination random value, A "big hit" or "losing" is determined as the lottery result of the first special symbol. Here, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the probability variation flag is 1 (when probability variation control is executed), when the probability variation flag is 0 (when probability variation control is executed) than , the random number for judging a big hit is defined so as to determine a "big hit" with a high selection rate.

When the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the variable probability flag and the random number for judging the big hit of the special symbol. Determines "big win", "minor win" or "losing". Here, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the variable probability flag is 1, the random value for judging the big hit is defined so as to determine the "big hit" with a higher selection rate than when the variable probability flag is 0. However, the random number value for big hit determination is defined so that the selection rate for determining the "small hit" is the same selection rate regardless of the probability variation flag.

Incidentally, when the sixth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the big win probability and/or the small win probability should be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of a small win may be set constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of a big win may be set low. Alternatively, the probability of a big win may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of a small win may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting.

[8-5-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 176 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 176 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table for selecting "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" which determine the stop symbol of the special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

"Selected symbol information" is symbol information for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of winning when the special symbol lottery result is a winning, and "symbol specifying command" is a variable special symbol. This is a command for designating the pattern to be displayed when the display is stopped.

The special symbol determination table includes the types of special symbols (types of starting openings), and the special symbols extracted (obtained) based on the ball entering the first starting openings 6120A, 6120B or the second starting opening 6140. Numerical values, hit/lose determination value data, and "selected symbol information" and "symbol specifying command" for determining the stop symbol are defined in association with each other. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

As shown in FIG. 176, when a game ball enters the first starting openings 6120A and 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol Based on the symbol random number value, the selected symbol information "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 30/100, the selected symbol information "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 30/100, and the selected symbol is selected with a selection rate of 40/100. Select information "z3". When the selected symbol information "z1" is selected, "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command, and when the selected symbol information "z2" is selected, "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command, and the selected symbol information "zA1" is selected. When "z3" is selected, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designating command.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start openings 6120A and 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z4" when the win/lose determination value data is the loss determination value data. Then, "zA4" is selected as the design designation command.

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z5" when the hit/lose determination value data is the big hit determination value data, "zA5" is selected as the design designation command.

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z6" when the hit/lose determination value data is the small hit determination value data. , "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z7" when the win/lose determination value data is the loss determination value data, "zA7" is selected as the design designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the sixth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 174) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making decisions according to pattern information. Also, in the first special symbol display portion 163 and the second special symbol display portion 164, a big win display mode, a small win display mode, or a losing display mode is derived based on the special symbol lottery result. The program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 also stores a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine.

[8-5-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 177 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The hit type determination table is a table for determining "mode of big win game state", "mode of small win game state" and "mode of subsequent game state (probability variable flag, probability variable number of times, time saving flag, time saving number of times)". .

"Open mode of big win game state" indicates an open mode of the first big winning opening 6131 opened in the big win game state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) and the closing time (for example, 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot gaming state are defined in advance. It shows the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state. It should be noted that the maximum opening time per round may be determined, or the closing time of each round (round interval time) may be determined. Furthermore, the number of times of opening and the opening time may be determined so that the first big prize winning opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

"Open mode of small winning game state" indicates the opening mode of the second big winning opening 6151 that is opened during the small winning game state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) and the closing time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning game state are defined in advance, and the maximum in the small winning game state Indicates the number of openings. The maximum opening time per opening may be determined, or the closing time for each opening may be determined.

Here, one maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the small winning game state is set shorter than the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) for one round in the big winning game state, In the state, the first big winning hole 6131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and the second big winning hole 6151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. It can be said that it is open.

In addition, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (for example, 3R x 10 (first specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 450), one small win The total number of game balls that can be paid out in the game state (for example, 1 small win x 4 (second specified number) x 14 (number of prize balls) = 56) is set smaller, and the big win game is set. It can be said that the state is an advantageous "first special game" and the small winning game state is a "second special game" with a lower profit than the big winning game state.

``Subsequent game state mode'' indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, and indicates the setting of the ``probability variation flag'', ``probability variation number'', ``time saving flag'' and ``time saving number of times''.

"Probability variation flag" is a flag indicating whether it is a low probability gaming state or a high probability gaming state, probability variation flag = 0 indicates "low probability gaming state", probability variation flag = 1 indicates "high probability gaming state. In addition, the "probability variable number" indicates the number of special symbol lotteries in the high probability gaming state, that is, the number of variable display of special symbols.

"Time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether it is a non-working time saving game state or a working time saving game state, time saving flag = 0 indicates "non working time saving game state", time saving flag = 1 indicates "time saving game state" is shown. In addition, the "number of times of time saving" indicates the number of times of lottery of special symbols in the time saving game state, that is, the number of times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "time saving number of times" is different depending on the game state ("normal game state" or "other" game state) at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big hit. The hit type determination table is configured so that determination can be made.

As shown in FIG. 177, in the hit type determination table, for the selected symbol information, "open state of big win game state", "open state of small win game state", and " Probability variable flag", "probability variable number of times", "time saving flag" and "time saving number of times" are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201, based on the selected symbol information, "open mode of the jackpot game state", "open mode of the small win game state", "probability variable flag", "probability variable number of times", "time saving flag" and "time saving number of times". to determine. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol information is "z4" and "z7"), the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are determined, it is not originally provided in the hit type determination table of FIG. 177 . However, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "losing", to clarify that none of the mode of the big hit game state, the mode of the small win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined , are shown in FIG. 177 for convenience.

When the special symbol lottery result is "big win", the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. When the information is ``z1'', ``10R'' is determined as the ``open mode of the jackpot game state'', and when the selected symbol information corresponding to the jackpot of the first special pattern is ``z2'', the ``open mode of the jackpot game state'' is determined. , and when the selected symbol information is ``z3'' corresponding to the big hit of the first special symbol, ``3R'' is determined as the ``release mode of the big win game state'', and the big hit of the second special symbol is determined. When it is the selected symbol information "z5" corresponding to , "2R" is determined as the "open mode of the jackpot game state".

177 after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. Decide "1" to indicate a high probability gaming state as "120 times" as "probability variable number", "1" to indicate a time saving gaming state as "time saving flag", "Time saving number" as " 100 times”. Further, when the selected symbol information "z5" corresponding to the second special symbol jackpot, "1" indicating a high probability gaming state is determined as the "probability variation flag", and "120 times" is determined as the "probability variation number". Then, "1" indicating the time-saving gaming state is determined as the "time-saving flag". Then, when the selected symbol information "z5" corresponding to the second special symbol jackpot and the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a jackpot is the normal game state, the "number of times of time saving" is "100". If the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win is not the normal game state, '10000 times' is determined as the 'time saving number of times'.

In addition, when a “small win” is determined as the lottery result of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. ', '6 times' is determined as the 'release mode of the small winning game state'.

It should be noted that after the end of the small winning game state, even if it is the selected symbol information "z5" corresponding to the small winning of the second special symbol, the aspect of the subsequent game state is not determined. That is, the game state does not shift (change) with the small winning game state as a trigger.

Thus, in this embodiment, after all the jackpot game states are completed, the game moves to the "high-probability short-time game state" in which both the time-saving game state and the high-probability game state are executed. For this reason, after all the big win game states are finished, the chances of shifting to the big win game state again are increased (so-called consecutive game opportunities are given), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of all the jackpot game state, since the probability variable number of high-probability game state (120 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times to guarantee the transition to the jackpot game state, By the time the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches the probability variable number of times, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to a big hit game state, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the number of times of time reduction (100) is set to a shorter number of times than the number of times of variable probability (120 times). For this reason, after the end of the first special symbol jackpot game state, after shifting to the first half (1 to 100 times) "high-accuracy short-time game state", if it does not shift to the jackpot game state again, the second half (101 to 120 times) can be shifted to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the latter half of the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is transitioned, the expected value of the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1, as will be described later. It is possible to plunge into "small hit RUSH". Here, if the probability variable number of high probability gaming state (120 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times to guarantee the transition to the big hit gaming state, each time the number of times of variable display of the special symbol approaches the probability variable number of times, again Generally, the expected value of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state (the so-called expected value of Renso) decreases, and the interest in the game decreases. However, in this embodiment, every time the number of times of variable display of special symbols approaches the probability variable number, the expected value of entering the "small hit RUSH" is increased, so the expected value of shifting to the big win game state is increased. The decrease is complemented by the expected value that rushes into the "small winning RUSH", and the improvement of the interest in the game can be maintained.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state with the second special symbol, the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a jackpot is not a "normal game state", that is, right-handed as a regular game mode When you are in the "high-probability short-time game state", "high-probability non-short-time game state" and "low-probability short-time game state", the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state (10000 times) turns into a big hit game state It is set to the number of times that guarantees migration. For this reason, when the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state" (especially "high-probability non-short-time gaming state") are hitting to the right, the second A big hit with a special pattern can be expected, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140, which is the second special symbol lottery trigger, is when the game ball is in a non-time-saving gaming state that is hitting to the right, that is, "high accuracy The main opportunity is when you are in a non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the "high probability non-time-saving game state" that can be shifted to the second half after the end of the big hit game state, that is, the "small hit RUSH", the payout of the game ball is expected, and the transition to the next big hit game state is made. The guaranteed big hit of the second special symbol can also be expected, and the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state with the second special symbol, when the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the "normal game state", the number of times of the time saving game state ( 100 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times to guarantee the transition to the jackpot game state. This is because, when it is in the "normal game state", the left-hand hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 6140 is not recognized as the game property of the present embodiment, and the " This is because it corresponds to an "irregular jackpot".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big hit after the end of the second special symbol jackpot game state is the "normal game state" (it was an irregular jackpot time), the same number of times as the number of times of time saving (100 times) of the time saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol is set as the number of times of time saving (100 times) of the time saving game state. However, it may be set to a number less than the number of times of time saving in the time saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, or it is not necessary to set the time saving flag and the number of time saving times (the number of time saving times 0 times).

[8-5-4. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the game state transition explained in FIG. 177 will be explained in order. FIG. 178 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the "normal game state" left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state , right-handed hitting is the regular game mode.

(Normal game state)
In the normal game state for hitting left, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first start hole (middle) 6120A (see FIG. 173).

In the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first start hole (middle) 6120A and the "jackpot" is determined by lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot game state of the first special symbol ends. Later, it will shift to a "high-probability time-saving game state" in which the number of times of time-saving is set to "100 times" and the number of times of variable probability is set to "120 times".

(High-precision time-saving gaming state)
In the high-probability time-saving game state that hits to the right, the passage gate switch 6126 is configured so that the game ball can pass through, and the time-saving game state is controlled. The first starting port (right) 6120B is opened by the accessory 6146, and a game ball can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B (see FIG. 173).

In the high probability time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the first start port (right) 6120B and the "jackpot" is determined by the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol jackpot game state. After the end of , the time saving number of times and probability variable number of times etc. are reset, and it will shift to the high probability time saving game state again (so-called Renso).

Here, in the high-precision time-saving game state, since the time-saving game state is controlled, the first start port (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric accessory 6146, so that the first start port (right ) It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 6140 provided on the downstream side of 6120B. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 6140, and the first start port ( Right) A first special symbol lottery will be held when a game ball enters 6120B.

Then, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the lottery of special symbols is not determined to be a big hit, and when the number of times of lottery of special symbols reaches the set number of times of time-saving (the number of times of time-savings ends 100 times), the control of the time-saving game state ends. , It will shift to "high probability non-time-saving game state".

(High accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
In the high-precision non-time-saving game state that hits to the right, since the time-saving game state is not controlled, the first start port (right) 6120B is almost closed by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the normal electric shutter 6147 The game ball rolling upward is guided to the small winning accessory unit 6150 or the second starting port 6140, and the game ball can enter the second big prize winning port 6151 or the second starting port 6140. (See FIG. 173).

Therefore, in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first start port (right) 6120B. A lottery for the second special symbol will be performed when the game ball enters the second start port 6140 .

In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 and the "small hit" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the second big winning port 6151 is in an open state. Then, every time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 6151, the number of game balls (for example, 14) corresponding to the second big winning hole 6151 is paid out. In the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. Hit RUSH" is executed, and the acquisition of game balls increases.

In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the game ball enters the second start port 6140 and the "big hit" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the big winning gaming state of the second special symbol ends. After that, it will shift to a "high-probability time-saving game state" in which the number of time-saving times is set to "10000 times" and the probability variable number of times is set to "120 times", which guarantees the transition to the jackpot game state.

In a high-probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol lottery is not determined to be a big hit, and the probability variable number set by the special symbol lottery number after the end of the first special symbol jackpot game state (finished 120 times of the probability variable number). Then, the control of the high-probability game state is finished, and the game returns to the "normal game state" in which the player hits to the left.

(Low-probability short-time gaming state)
The low-probability short-time gaming state for hitting to the right is not determined as a big hit in the lottery of the special symbols in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" shifted after the end of the big-hit game state of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is a big hit. It is a game state to be shifted when the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the end of the game state becomes the set probability change number (120 times of the probability change number ends).

In the low-probability short-time gaming state, as well as the high-probability short-time gaming state, since the time-saving gaming state is controlled, when the game ball passes through the passage gate switch 6126, the first start port ( Right) 6120B is in an open state, and is configured so that a game ball can enter the first start opening (right) 6120B (see FIG. 173).

Then, even in the low-probability short-time gaming state, as in the high-probability short-time gaming state, since the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the second special triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 6140 It is difficult to draw a lottery for a symbol, and a lottery for a first special symbol will be performed when a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B.

Even if it shifts to this low-probability time-saving game state, since the remaining number of time-saving times is "9880 times", the time-saving game state does not end, and it is guaranteed to shift to the big hit game state again. there is

As described above, in this embodiment, the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 173), the content of the lottery for special symbols (see FIG. 175), the transition rule to the game state (see FIG. 177), etc. are organically associated. , it is possible to create a game that has never existed before, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko machine, the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state" in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode are collectively It is also called right-handed playing state.

[8-5-5. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
Figures 179 to 181 are examples of variation pattern tables for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 179 is an example of a special symbol first half variation pattern table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 180 is a special symbol second half variation pattern table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An example. In addition, FIG. 181 shows the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine ("high-probability short-time game state", "high-probability non-short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state") It is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols. 179 to 181 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In addition, the ``variation pattern of special symbols'' of the sixth pachinko game machine includes a ``first half variation pattern'' corresponding to the first half of variable display of special symbols, and a ``second half variation pattern'' corresponding to the second half of variable display of special symbols. It is composed of two combinations of In addition, like the first pachinko game machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern may be combined into one variation pattern. Also, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern are collectively referred to as a "variation pattern" as appropriate.

(First half fluctuation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 179, the special symbol first half variation pattern table in the normal game state includes the type of special symbol (type of starting port), the lottery result of the special symbol, and the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B. Alternatively, the first effect selection random value obtained based on the entry to the second start port 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variable display time" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern ” is associated with. The random number for selecting the first effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the column of "remarks" in FIG. 179 indicates the details of the presentation for the sake of convenience.

When the main CPU 201 is in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol first half variation pattern table in the normal game state shown in FIG. A first half variation pattern of special symbols and a first half variable display time of special symbols are determined based on the random number value for selecting one effect. The main CPU 201 determines the first-half variation pattern and the first-half variable display time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B, and the game ball entering the second starting port 6140 When based on the entering ball, the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the second special symbol are determined.

Here, "pseudo run" shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. This shows a "pseudo-continuous effect" in which the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed are variably displayed again. The term "temporary stop display" refers to a mode in which the decorative symbols sway slightly or are slightly deformed to give the player the impression that the decorative symbols are stopped. This pseudo-continuous effect can be performed a plurality of times, and the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is performed is indicated as "X pseudo-continuous effects". In addition, "pseudo-continuous agitation" indicates an effect for inciting whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed. "NR" is an abbreviation for normal reach. Also, "long fluctuation" is a fluctuation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long.

"Road to the decisive battle" and "Road to the ultimate decisive battle" are the same type of specific production, and the player is made to operate the production button device 6310 a predetermined number of times, and up to a specific number (10) of " It is a production to collect character icons. The "number of icons in the first half" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed until the road to the decisive battle or the road to the decisive battle is performed. The road to the decisive battle, the road to the ultimate decisive battle, character icons, etc. will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the design, the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time corresponding to any of "Normal variation", "Pseudo continuous X times", "Road to the decisive battle" and "Road to the ultimate decisive battle" are decided. be done.

Then, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
The random number value for selecting the first effect is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "1 pseudo-run"<"2 pseudo-runs"<"3 pseudo-runs".

Then, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
The random number for selecting the first effect is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "Road to the decisive battle"<"Road to the decisive battle".

Also, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. A first half variation pattern of "long variation" in which the variable display time is set to be extremely long is determined.

Here, in the sixth pachinko game machine, when it is in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and when left-handed hitting is performed, the game ball enters the second start hole 6140. Although it is difficult or impossible to do so, if the game ball is hit to the right as an unintended game mode, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second start hole 6140 . However, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. Since the first half variation pattern of ``long variation'' is determined, the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol per unit time is made extremely small, and it is constructed so that there is no real benefit for the player to hit right in the normal game state. .

(Latter half fluctuation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 180, the special symbol second half variation pattern table in the normal game state includes the first half variation pattern number, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the first start port 6120A, 6120B or the second start port 6140. The second effect selection random value acquired based on the ball entering the ball, the "second half variation pattern number" indicating the second half variation pattern, and the "second half variable display time" of the special symbol in the second half variation pattern are associated. ing. The random number for selecting the second effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the column of "remarks" in FIG. 180 shows the details of the presentation for the sake of convenience.

When the main CPU 201 is in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol second half variation pattern table in the normal game state shown in FIG. A second half variation pattern of special symbols and a second half variable display time of special symbols are determined based on the random number value. The main CPU 201 determines the second-half variation pattern and the second-half variable display time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first start ports 6120A and 6120B, and determines the second-half variable display time of the first special symbol, and the game ball enters the second start port 6140. When based on the entering ball, the latter half variation pattern and the latter variable display time of the second special symbol are determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern combines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern so that the type of the special symbol can be identified. A command is sent to the sub CPU 301 . Specifically, a 3-byte variation pattern command (for example, 83H00H00H) consisting of “83H”, “first half variation pattern number” and “second half variation pattern number” is transmitted as “first special symbol variation pattern command”. , Transmits a 3-byte variation pattern command (for example, 84HF1H00H) consisting of "84H", "first half variation pattern number" and "second half variation pattern number" as "second special symbol variation pattern command". Then, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 calculates the total variable display time by adding the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Here, "none" shown in the column of "remarks" in Fig. 180 means that the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbols are not determined, and the second half variation pattern of the special symbols is determined. If not, only the first half variation pattern of the special symbol will be executed. "Normal Reach", "Ninja Reach", "Confrontation Reach" and "Great Decisive Reach" are reach effects suggesting that the lottery results of special symbols in the normal game state may result in a big win. The "number of icons in the second half" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed after the road to the decisive battle or the road to the decisive battle. The confrontation reach, character icon, etc. will be described later in detail.

According to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. First half variation only)”, “Normal reach”, “Ninja reach”, “Confrontation reach”, and “Great decisive battle reach”, and the second half change pattern and the second half variable display time are determined.

Then, according to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
The random number for selecting the second effect is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "normal reach"<"ninja reach"<"confrontation reach"<"great battle reach".

Further, according to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. Not determined. Therefore, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, only the first half variation pattern corresponding to the "long variation" which is the first half variation pattern of the special symbol is executed.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in right-handed game state)
FIG. 181 (a) shows the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine ("high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state") It is an example of the first half variation pattern table of special symbols. FIG. 181(b) is an example of a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The variable display time is not determined, and there is no need to provide this table, but it is shown for convenience in order to clarify that the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of special symbols are not determined in the right-handed game state. be.

As shown in FIG. 181 (a), the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state includes the type of special symbols (type of starting port), the winning result which is the lottery result of special symbols, and the first start. The first effect selection random number obtained based on the ball entering the opening 6120A, 6120B or the second starting opening 6140, the "first half fluctuation pattern number" indicating the first half fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol " first half variable display time".

When the main CPU 201 is in the right-handed gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state shown in FIG. A first half variation pattern of special symbols and a first half variable display time of special symbols are determined based on the lottery result and the random number value for selecting the first performance. The main CPU 201 determines the first-half variation pattern and the first-half variable display time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B, and the game ball entering the second starting port 6140 When based on the entering ball, the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the second special symbol are determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbols in the right-handed game state, it does not determine the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time, and does not execute the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern. A special symbol variation pattern command combined with the default second half variation pattern number (00H) shown is transmitted to the sub CPU 301. Then, the main CPU 201 calculates the first half variable display time as the total variable display time in the right-handed game state. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Here, "battle challenge", "battle reach", "door opening effect" and "eye opening effect" shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a reach production that suggests that the result may be a big hit. In addition, the "ultra-shortened variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbols is set to be extremely short.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time corresponding to any one of "super shortened variation", "battle challenge" and "battle reach" are determined. For this reason, "battle challenge" and "battle reach" are also reach effects suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol may result in a big hit in the right-handed gaming state.

Then, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG.
The random number for selecting the first effect is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "battle challenge"<"battle reach".

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of one special symbol, the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time corresponding to any one of "ultra shortening variation", "door opening effect" and "eye opening effect" are determined. For this reason, the "door opening effect" and "eye opening effect" are also ready-to-win effects suggesting that the lottery result of the second special symbol may result in a big hit in the right-handed game state.

Then, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG.
The random number for selecting the first effect is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "door opening effect"<"eye opening effect".

Also, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. A first half variation pattern is determined. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is "small win", the first half variation pattern of "super-shortened variation" is determined without determining the first half variation pattern for the ready-to-win performance.

For this reason, when in the right-handed game state, unlike the normal game state, the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol per unit time are increased, and in the right-handed game state, the player moves to the right. It is configured so that there is a real benefit to beating.

Here, the entry of the game ball into the second start port 6140, which is the second special symbol lottery trigger, is mainly triggered by the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, which is one of the right-handed gaming states. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is likely to be determined as "small hit" (see Fig. 175), and if the lottery result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the second big winning port 6151 is immediately shifted to the open state. (See FIG. 181). Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to realize a "small hit RUSH" in which the rate of game balls entering the second big winning hole 6151 per unit time is increased.

[8-5-6. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 182 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the hit determination table of normal symbols shown in FIG. 182 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process. It is a table referred to when determining "normal design hit" or "normal design loss" by lottery based on.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182 includes the game state, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (width), and the hit/lose determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol loss"). are defined in association with each other.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182, and determines hit/lose determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is 0, and determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and sets the hit/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". judgment value data”. In addition, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" when the random value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 1 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". to decide.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol winning", and sets the winning/losing determination value data to "normal symbol". hit judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 judges as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

[8-5-7. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 183 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the hit/lose determination value data of the above normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126. It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit".

"Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 corresponds to the normal symbol win-lose determination value data ("normal symbol hit" or "losing"), the normal symbol symbol random number value, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command. are stipulated.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, and determines a normal winning selection symbol command based on the normal symbol hit/lose determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit/loss determination value data, for example, the normal symbol per selection symbol command is selected as follows. be done.

For example, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command at normal symbol hit if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 49. If the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 50 to 100, select "fz2" as the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol per hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning", regardless of the game state, the normal symbol win-lose determination value data (normal symbol Based on the result of the hit determination process) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, it is configured to select the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit".

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 182), and determines the normal symbol win/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 183), the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the winning/losing of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[8-5-8. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 184 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 184 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal per symbol type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 (normal shutter 6147) according to the game state and the normal per symbol select symbol command.

In the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 184, the game state, the selection symbol command at normal per symbol, and the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 184, and determines the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 based on the game state and the selection symbol command for normal winning symbols. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 6146 release pattern.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "01H" of the normal electric accessory 6146 when the selected symbol command at normal symbol winning is "fz1" or "fz2" in the non-time-saving gaming state. Then, 210 msec is determined as the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, even if it is a selection symbol command at the time of any normal symbol, a disadvantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined, to the first start port (right) 6120B of game balls are difficult or impossible to enter.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "02H" of the normal electric accessory 6146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1" or "fz2" in the time saving game state. , 5820 msec is determined as the opening time of the normal electric accessories 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the case of the time-saving gaming state, even if it is a selection symbol command at the time of any normal symbol, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined, and the first start port (right) 6120B. It is possible to enter a game ball.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146, it is configured to perform only one opening, but it is configured to set a wait time and perform multiple openings. You may

[8-5-9. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 185 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185 corresponds to the game state, the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variable display time. attached.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185, and based on the game state, the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol The variable display time of the pattern is determined.

Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

In this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbols is relatively short so that the number of times of lottery of the normal symbols per unit time is increased. In particular, in the time-saving game state, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "win", it is possible to immediately shift the first start port (right) 6120B to the open state. It is possible to increase the rate of entry of game balls into the 1 starter (right) 6120B.

[8-6. Main control processing]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the special symbol control process performed during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23), normal symbol Although the control processing and sub-control circuit processing are partially different, the other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the sub-control circuit process will be described below, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing, the normal symbol control processing and the sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, Including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, the step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[8-6-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 186, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S6001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S6001, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S6001 when executing the special symbol control process. .

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the demonstration display command for the first special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols is constant. When it is "0" for more than the time, the transmission reservation processing of the demonstration display command for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the sixth pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state and the time-saving game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state), and the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the high-probability non-time-saving game state. It is a special design. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects such as characters for the main special symbols, and voice effects for the main special symbols. For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect.

At S6002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S6001.

When it is determined in S6002 that the second special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (NO determination in S6002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process to S6003. For example, NO determination is made in S6002 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

At S6003, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S6003, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6004.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6002 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S6002), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6004.

At S6004, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S6004, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6005.

At S6005, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S6004.

When it is determined in S6005 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S6005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process to S6006. For example, NO determination is made in S6005 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

At S6006, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S6006, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6007.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6005 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S6005), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6007.

At S6007, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S6007, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6008.

At S6008, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S6007.

When it is determined in S6008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S6008), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6010.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the timing of starting variable display in S6008 (when S6008 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6009.

At S6009, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S6009, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6010.

At S6010, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S6010, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6011.

At S6011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S6010.

When it is determined in S6011 that the first special symbol is not the time to start the variable display (NO determination in S6011), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and shifts the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6011 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (when S6011 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6012.

At S6012, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S6012, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S6001 to S6012) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[8-6-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, special symbol management processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S6003, S6006, S6009 and S6012 during the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 186) will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, for example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed in S6003 or S6009 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is processed, and the special symbol management process is S6006 or S6006 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S6012, the first special symbol is to be processed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 187 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S6021).

If it is determined in S6021 that the special symbol wait time is not 0 (NO determination in S6021), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S6021), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6022.

At S6022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S6022, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6023. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S6023 based on the control state number read in the process of S6022.

At S6023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6024.

In S6024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S6024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6025.

At S6025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S6025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6026.

At S6026, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S6026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 . If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6027.

At S6027, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This process of S6027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6028.

In S6028, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S6028 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S6023 to S6028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 186). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6004 when the special symbol management process is called at S6003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S6007 when the special symbol management process is called at S6006, and calls it at S6009. If so, the process returns to S6010, and if called in S6012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[8-6-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 188, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6031).

When it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S6031), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 187). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S6031 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S6032.

In S6032, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value, and determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the loaded special symbol pause flag value. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S6032, even if S6031 is YES determination (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, if it is on (S6032 is NO If it is a judgment), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

When it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on in S6032 (NO determination in S6032), as described above, the special symbol variable display start processing does not proceed, and the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6032 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S6032 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6033.

At S6033, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. In the shift process of the start information of the first special symbol for the first special symbol to be processed, since the number of reserved first special symbols is four, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 The stored start information is shifted to the first special symbol determination area (0), and the start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area (2) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) is shifted to the first special Shift to the symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (3). In addition, in the shift processing of the second special symbol start information for the second special symbol to be processed, the number of reserved second special symbols is two, so the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (1 ) is shifted to the second special symbol determination area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol start storage area (2) is shifted to the second special symbol start storage area (1). do. After executing the process of S6033, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6034.

In S6034, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 175) is referred to, and the game state (presence or absence of probability variation flag) and the special symbol jackpot determination random value stored in the special symbol determination area (0) Based on this, special symbol hit determination processing is performed. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a big hit or a loss, and it is determined whether the second special symbol is a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Further, the main CPU 201 sets the small win flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a small win, and sets the big win flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a big win. do. After executing the process of S6034, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6035.

At S6035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S6034) (for example, a small hit, a big hit, or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 176) is referred to, and the determination result of the above-described special symbol hit determination process (win/lose) and the special symbol random number value stored in the special symbol determination area (0) "Selected pattern information" and "symbol designation command" are determined based on the above. In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. A stop symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process of S6035, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6036.

In S6036, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of determining the type of a hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (a small win or a big win). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 177) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol information" determined in the special symbol determination process (S6035). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the number of types of small winnings may be multiple. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to the multiple types of winning, multiple types of other winnings (for example, time-saving winnings) may be provided, or multiple types of losing may be provided. good. After executing the process of S6036, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6037.

In S6037, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, first, after the first half variation pattern determination process is performed, the second half variation pattern determination process is performed.

In the first half variation pattern determination process, if it is in the normal game state, the first half variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. 179 is determined, and if it is in the right-handed game state, the first half variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. Determined, with reference to the first half variation pattern table of the determined special symbol, the determination result (hit-or-lose) of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, and the first effect selection random value stored in the special symbol determination area (0) Based on, the first half variation pattern of the special design is determined.

In the second half variation pattern determination process, if it is in the normal game state, the second half variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. A second half variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on the result (hit-lose) and the random number value for selecting the second effect stored in the special symbol determination area (0). Also, when it is in the right-handed game state, the default second half variation pattern number (00H) indicating that the second half variation pattern is not executed is determined. After executing the process of S6037, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6038.

In S6038, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, when it is in the normal game state, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 179 and 180, the first half variable display time of the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process and the second half variation pattern determination process A total variable display time is calculated by summing the second half variable display time of the second half variation pattern determined in . In addition, when it is in the right-handed game state, the first half variable display time of the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process is calculated as the total variable display time by referring to the first half variation pattern table shown in FIG. . Then, the calculated total variable display time is set in the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display units 163 and 164 are caused to start variable display of the special symbols. The waiting time for this special symbol is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process which is performed at intervals of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process of S6038, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6039.

In S<b>6039 , the main CPU 201 performs time saving probability variable number subtraction processing. In this process, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability gaming state), and if the probability variation flag = 1, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number. In addition, if probability variation flag = 1, probability variation frequency is not subtracted. Also, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag = 1 (time saving game state), and if the time saving flag = 1, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number of times. In addition, if it is time saving flag = 0, the number of times of time saving is not subtracted.

At S6040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 187 S6024) is performed. After executing the process of S6040, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6041.

At S6041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6041, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6042.

At S6042, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S6042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6043.

At S6043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In this process, transmission reservation processing of "symbol designation command" and "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol effect start command. As transmission reservation processing of the design designation command, transmission reservation processing of the design designation command determined in S6035 is performed. In addition, as transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command, transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command combining the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern determined in S6037 so that the type of the special symbol can be known I do. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, game state management processing (S6042) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S6043)) is interrupt prohibited. It is preferable to perform it within the interval.

[8-6-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. 189 and 190 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S6051).

If it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S6051), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 187). reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S6051), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6052.

In S6052, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value, and determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the loaded special symbol pause flag value.

If it is determined in S6052 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on (NO determination in S6052), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (FIG. 187). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6052 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S6052 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6053.

In S6053, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol finalization time setting process. In this process, a predetermined special symbol determination time (for example, 540 msec) is set to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display units 163 and 164 are caused to stop variable display of the special symbols. . The waiting time for this special symbol is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process which is performed at intervals of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process of S6053, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6054.

In addition, the design determination time of the special design may differ depending on the type of hit, and may differ according to the game state. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit or a loss, the first symbol determination time (for example, 540 msec) is set, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, A second symbol fixing time (for example, 24 msec) shorter than the first symbol fixing time may be set. In particular, as in the sixth pachinko game machine, when creating a small win RUSH, it is desirable to shorten the symbol fixation time extremely in the case of a small win.

At S6054, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S6025 in FIG. 187) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S6054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6055.

At S6055, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6055, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6056.

At S6056, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the number of times of probability variation and the number of times of reduced working hours. can be managed. After executing the process of S6056, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6057.

In S6057, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a small win.

In S6057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is not a small hit (NO in S6057), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6059.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6057 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a small hit (when S6057 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6058.

At S6058, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S6058, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6059.

In S6059, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a big win.

In S6059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is not a big hit (when S6059 determines NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, when it is determined at S6059 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a big hit (when S6059 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6060.

At S6060, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S6060, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6061.

At S6061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (NO determination in S6061), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and proceeds to special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187). back to

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (YES in S6061), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6062.

At S6062, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. After executing the process of S6062, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6063.

In S6063, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test-firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a failure. After executing the process of S6063, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6064.

At S6064, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the win flag of the other special symbol to lose and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) of the special symbol to be processed is a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed, and the other special symbol Even if the result of the hit determination process of the symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S6064, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6065.

At S6065, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S6065, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6066.

At S6066, the main CPU 201 performs a symbol fixing time setting process for the other special symbol. In this process, a predetermined symbol fixing time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time for the other special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display units 163 and 164 stop variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S6066, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6067.

At S6067, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process of S6067, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6068.

At S6068, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6068, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6069.

At S6069, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6069, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188). If the result of (2) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol is performed.

[8-6-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S6025 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S6025 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6071).

When it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S6071), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol game determination process and performs the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S6071 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6072.

At S6072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S6072, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO in S6072), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6073. On the other hand, when it is determined in S6072 that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S6072), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6075.

In S6073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S6073, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S6073), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6082.

On the other hand, in S6073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (when S6073 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6075.

In S6075, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process. In this processing, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 174 for both) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process of S6075, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6076.

In S6076, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the first big winning hole 6131 is opened (S6077), and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S6078).

At S6079, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (see S6026 in FIG. 187) will be performed.

At S6080, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this processing, the main CPU 201 also performs processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability number, a time saving flag, and a time saving number of times when the jackpot is won. In addition, at the time of a small hit, processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as probability variation flag, probability variation number, time saving flag, and time saving number of times is not performed. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In S6081, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big-hit start display command when it is a big hit, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small-hit start display command when it is a small hit. In addition, the big hit start display command or the small hit start display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. be done. After executing the process of S6081, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

At S6082, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state transition determination processing. In this game state transition determination process, the "low probability game state transition determination process" to determine the transition to the low probability game state and the "non-time reduction game state transition determination process" to determine the transition to the non-time reduction game state Both processes are performed. After executing the process of S6082, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6083.

In the low probability game state transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability game state), and if the probability variation flag = 1, then it is determined whether the probability variation number = 0 Then, if probability variable number = 0, probability variable flag = 0 (low probability game state) is set, and the high probability game state is shifted to the low probability game state. Also, if the probability variation flag = 0, the low probability game state transition determination process is terminated, and if the probability variation number = 0, the low probability variation flag = 1 is retained and the low probability game state transition determination processing is terminated.

In the non-time-saving gaming state transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the time-saving flag = 1 (time-saving gaming state), and if the time-saving flag = 1, then it is determined whether or not the time-saving number of times = 0 , If the number of times of time saving = 0, the time saving flag = 0 (non-time-saving game state) is set, and the time-saving game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state. Also, if the time saving flag = 0, the non-time saving game state transition determination process is ended, and if the time saving number = 0, the non time saving game state transition determination process is ended while the time saving flag = 1 is held.

At S6083, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S6071 to S6081) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[8-6-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6083 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 191) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

At S6092, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S6092, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6093.

At S6093, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6093, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6094.

At S6094, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S6094, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 191).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a loss, the main CPU 201 sets or resets neither the variable probability flag nor the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[8-6-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S6026 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing an example of a big winning opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special winning opening opening preparation process is called at S6026 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S6026 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S6101).

If it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S6101), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 187). reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S6101), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6102.

At S6102, the main CPU 201 loads the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening. The value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the count value for counting the number of rounds in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed, the small winning game It corresponds to a count value that counts the number of times the control process is opened. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening opening frequency counter is stored in the main RAM 203 in the large winning opening opening frequency counter. After executing the process of S6102, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6103.

In S6103, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the hit type determination table shown in FIG. The upper limit of the number of times is 6 times.

When it is determined in S6103 that the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (YES in S6103), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6104.

At S6104, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the processing (S6104) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening preparation processing, the jackpot end processing (Fig. 187 S6028) is performed. After executing the process of S6104, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6105.

At S6105, the main CPU 201 performs game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command as transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command if after the jackpot game state ends, and if after the jackpot game state ends, a small hit. Transmission reservation processing of the end display command is performed (S6106). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

Returning to S6103, when it is determined that the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S6103), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6107.

At S6107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening has been opened. After executing the process of S6107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6108.

At S6108, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning opening to be opened, the first big winning opening 6131 is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the second big winning opening 6151 is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. be done. After executing the process of S6108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6109.

In S6109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening, etc. are set. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S6109, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6110.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 28000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 100 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 4 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. As for the number of prize balls at the time of winning the big prize hole, 15 balls are set for the first big prize hole 6131 and 14 balls are set for the second big prize hole 6151 . However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S6110, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening setting process for opening the big winning openings (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151). After executing the process of S6110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6111.

At S6111, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S6111) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S6027 in FIG. 187) is performed. After executing the process of S6111, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6112.

At S6112, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6112, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S6027 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S6027 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S6121).

If it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S6121), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 187). reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S6121), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6122.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the big winning openings (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the large winning opening winning counter that counts the number of winning game balls into the large winning opening is the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S6122, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning the big winning opening (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151) is not the maximum winning number, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6123. , When it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning holes (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151) is the maximum winning number, the process moves to S6128-1.

At S6128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the jackpot gaming state (jackpot flag is ON). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the big win game state, it shifts the process to S6124, and if it determines that it is not in the big win game state (that is, it is in the small win game state), it shifts the process to S6128-2. .

In S6123, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S6109 in FIG. 193) has passed.

If it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 6131, the second big winning opening 6151) has not elapsed (if the determination in S6123 is NO), the main CPU 201 closes the big winning opening. The open control process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151) has passed (if YES in S6123), the main CPU 201 performs processing. to S6124.

In S6124, the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for closing the big winning openings (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151). After executing the process of S6124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6125.

At S6125, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S6125) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S6026 in FIG. 187) will be performed. After executing the process of S6125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6126.

At S6126, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S6126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6127.

In S6127, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command if it is in the jackpot gaming state. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. In addition, at the time of the small hit game state, transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command is not performed. After the process of S6127, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In S6128-2, the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for closing the big winning openings (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151). After executing the process of S6128-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6128-3.

At S6128-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening control process, the jackpot end process (see S6028 in FIG. 187) will be performed. After executing the process of S6128-3, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6128-4.

At S6128-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S6128-4, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6128-5.

At S6128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a small hit end display command. The small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called at S6028 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S6028 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S6131).

When it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S6131), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S6131), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6132.

At S6132, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and the small win game state (large winning mouth opening number counter value, big winning mouth winning counter value, etc.), small winning flag, big winning flag, value of the pattern fixed number counter, special A process of clearing the symbol pause flag or the like is performed. After executing the process of S6132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6133.

At S6133, the main CPU 201 performs game state setting processing. In this game state setting process, referring to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 177, based on the selected symbol information, probability variable flag, probability variable number of times, time saving flag and time saving number of times are set. Specifically, as shown in the hit type determination table in FIG. 177, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, set probability variation flag = 1 (high probability game state), set probability variation frequency = 120 Then, the time saving flag = 1 (time saving game state) is set, and the number of time saving times = 100 is set. Also, after the end of the jackpot game state with the second special symbol, set the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability game state), set the probability variation number = 120, set the time reduction flag = 1 (time reduction game state), When the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win is the normal game state, the number of times of time saving is set to 100, and when the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win is not the normal game state, the time saving is performed. Set the number of times=10000. In addition, after the end of the small hit game state, none of the data of the probability variation flag, the probability variation number, the time saving flag and the time saving number of times is set. That is, the game state does not shift (change) with the small winning game state as a trigger. After executing the process of S5133, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6034.

At S6134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 192 is performed. After executing the processing of S6134, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[8-6-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 196, normal symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 196, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 196 are control state numbers of normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the wait time for normal symbols is 0 (S6300).

When it is determined in S6300 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and shifts the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6301.

At S6301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S6301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6310. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S6310 based on the control state number read in the process of S6301.

At S6310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6310 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". The details of this normal symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6320.

At S6320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S6320 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6330.

In this normal symbol variable display ending process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended. is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". The waiting time of this normal design is subtracted as a normal design timer counter in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

It should be noted that the normal symbol determination time may vary depending on the type of hit, and may vary according to the game state. For example, in the case of the normal game state, the first design confirmation time (for example, 540 msec), and in the case of the time saving game state, the second design confirmation time shorter than the first design confirmation time (for example, 132 msec). In particular, as in the sixth pachinko game machine, when creating a small hit RUSH, it is desirable to make the symbol fixation time extremely short in the time-saving game state.

At S6330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S6330 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs determination processing of the normal symbol derivation result (for example, normal symbol win or normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is the hit for the normal design, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal design is set to "3". On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 6146. - 特許庁

In the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 6146, the normal electric accessory 6146 is opened based on the game state and the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit by referring to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. A pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 6146 release pattern.

At S6340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S6340 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric accessory 6146 opening process according to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S6330. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 6146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

At S6350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S6350 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In the normal symbol per end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of resetting (clearing) various parameters related to the normal symbols determined in S6310 to S6340 and various random values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described normal symbol control process (S6300 to S6350) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[8-6-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 196) will be described. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S6311).

When it is determined in S6311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 196). On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6312.

At S6312, the main CPU 201 shifts the normal symbol starting information. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the normal symbol start storage area (2) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). The start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S6312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6313.

At S6313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determining value data ("normal design winning" or "normal design losing") is determined. After executing the process of S6313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6314.

At S6314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, the ``selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol'' is determined. After executing the process of S6314, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6315.

At S6315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. A variation pattern and a variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After executing the process of S6315, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6316.

At S6316, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol variable display time determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S6315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 161. to start. The waiting time of this normal design is subtracted as a normal design timer counter in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process of S6316, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6317.

At S6317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (of FIG. 196) S6320) is performed. After executing the process of S6317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6318.

At S6318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the normal symbol variation pattern command. It should be noted that the variation pattern command of normal symbols reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Small hit RUSH]
In the sixth pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to achieve a "small win RUSH". Below, the mechanism of the small hit RUSH will be described.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the frequency of the game ball entering the second large winning opening 6151 is in another game state (for example, the normal game state, the high-probability short-time gaming state, the low-probability By being increased compared to the time-saving game state), the expected value of the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) becomes a small hit RUSH that can exceed 1.

As shown in FIG. 173, a game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 6126 and the normal electric accessory unit 6145 . In the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, since the non-time-saving gaming state is controlled, it is difficult for the general electricity shutter 6147 to be in the open mode (see FIGS. 182 to 184), and the general electricity shutter 6147 protrudes from the game panel 6100 and guides the game ball rolling on the general electric shutter 6147 to the second big winning opening 6151 and the second starting opening 6140 .

Therefore, if the second big winning hole 6151 is open, the game ball struck to the right is guided to the normal electric shutter 6147 and can enter the second big winning hole 6151 . Each time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 6151, for example, 14 game balls are paid out.

Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, a stop display indicating a small hit with an extremely high probability of 1/1.07 (approximate) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 175). Not only the mode is derived, but also super shortened variation with extremely short variable display time is executed as shown in the variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state (see FIG. 181 (a)), so the second The ball entry frequency of the game ball to the large winning opening 6151 is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability short working hours game state, low probability short working hours gaming state).

In this way, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to realize a small hit RUSH in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1. It has become.

On the other hand, in the game state (high-precision time-saving gaming state, low-precision time-saving gaming state) in which the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the general electric shutter 6147 is likely to be an open state buried in the game panel 6100 (see FIGS. 182 to 184) , Most of the right-handed game balls enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B. Therefore, even if the second big winning hole 6151 is opened, the expected value of the game ball winning the second big winning hole 6151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out.

In this way, in the gaming state in which the time-saving gaming state is controlled (high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state), the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) The expected value does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, since the non-time-saving gaming state is controlled, the right-handed game ball is the second start port It becomes possible for a game ball to enter 6140 . However, as described above, as shown in the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state (see FIG. 179), when the game ball is entered into the second starting port 6140, the special symbols are variable. Since the first half variation pattern of ``long variation'' in which the display time is set to be extremely long is determined, the number of lotteries of the second special symbols per unit time is made extremely small, and the player hits right in the normal game state. not configured.

In addition, in the present embodiment, although it is configured to be a small hit RUSH in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is not limited to this. For example, there is a special figure reduction control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol without executing the electric sapo control that increases the frequency of opening the first start port (right) 6120B by operating the normal electric accessory 6146. It may be made to be a small hit RUSH in the high-probability time-saving game state to be executed.

[8-8. Production flow]
Next, the outline of the effect performed in the sixth pachinko game machine will be described using the flow of the entire effect. FIG. 198 is an example of the production flow of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. Moreover, FIG. 199 is an example of the production|presentation flow of the right-handed game state in the 6th pachinko game machine.

(Direction flow in normal game state)
In the normal game state of hitting left, the game ball can be entered into the first start hole (middle) 6120A, and the variable display of the decorative pattern for the first special pattern, the display effect of the character, etc., the sound effect, The change effect of the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, the decorative patterns are composed of three main patterns, ie, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and sub-patterns that are much smaller than the main patterns. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to this.

In addition, in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game is characterized mainly by collecting "character icons" and aiming for a big win.

When a game ball enters the first start opening (middle) 6120A, all decorative symbols start to be displayed in a random manner at high speed in the display area of the display device 7 ("variation start of all symbols").

When all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to perform any of the "line notice", "button challenge notice", and "cherry blossom accumulation notice". Note that other notices may be possible.

"Dialogue notice" is, for example, one of a plurality of characters displayed, and by the displayed character's dialog, it is a notice effect suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a big hit. .

The "button challenge notice" is, for example, a predetermined number of "character icons" obtained by operating (continuously hitting) the effect button device 6310, or the degree of expectation of a big hit (eg, intense heat), or the content of reach that develops (eg, This is a notice effect that displays whether or not the "character icon" showing SP) can be acquired. It should be noted that there are cases where none of the icons can be acquired for the "button challenge notice".

In the "cherry blossom accumulation notice", for example, the cherry blossoms are scattered over the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are accumulated step by step. It is a preview performance. Then, when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or "gokudo icons" indicating that they will develop into "road to ultimate battle" are displayed, and "gokudo icons" are displayed. And develops into "the road to the ultimate battle". These cherry blossoms can be accumulated up to 3 levels over the fluctuation or multiple fluctuations due to prefetching, and the more the cherry blossoms accumulate, the more expected the "gangster icon" will be displayed, and the " It is set so that the number of "character icons" increases. The details of the effects of this "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the number of "character icons" displayed so far is five ("obtain 5 character icons"), it progresses to "road to decisive battle".

After all patterns start to fluctuate, after the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed ("right and left pattern temporary stop"), it will be "losing" in which all patterns are stopped and displayed, or will it be a "pseudo continuous fanning effect"? It is possible to perform one of the "normal reach" effects.

In the "pseudo continuous fanning effect", the right symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed again (right symbol sliding), and it is an effect to incite whether or not the "character icon" will stop at the position of the middle symbol. Then, when the "character icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, the above-described "pseudo continuous effect" is performed, and if the "character icon" does not stop at the position of the middle symbol, it becomes "lost". In addition, multiple "character icons" can also be stopped at the position of the middle pattern.

"Normal ready-to-win" is a ready-to-win effect that is performed when the left and right symbols are of the same type. In the ``normal reach'', if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the left and right patterns, it is ``losing'', and if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in the same kind of pattern as the left and right patterns, it is ``big hit''. In addition, in the "Normal Reach" mode, if the "Character Icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol without being displayed, it will develop into a "Pseudo Continuous Effect". ” develops into.

"Ninja Reach" is a reach performance in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than normal reach. In ``Ninja Reach'', if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the left and right patterns, it is ``losing'', and if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in the same kind of pattern as the left and right patterns, it is ``big hit''. In addition, in the "Ninja Reach", if the medium symbol is not stopped and displayed and the "Great Battle Icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, it develops into the "Great Battle Reach".

In addition, when the "character icon" stops and the "pseudo continuous effect" is performed, if the number of "character icons" displayed so far is five (acquisition of five character icons), the "pseudo continuous effect ”, it develops into “Road to the Decisive Battle”.

"Road to the decisive battle" and "Road to the decisive battle" refer to the same type of specific icon that allows the player to operate the production button device 6310 a predetermined number of times and collect up to a specific number (10) of "character icons". It is a production of "Road to decisive battle" and "Road to decisive battle" will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 220 to 222. FIG.

"Road to the Decisive Battle" has already acquired five character icons, so the effect is to have the player operate the effect button device 6310 five times to collect the remaining five "character icons". be.

"Road to the ultimate battle" is an effect in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 10 times to collect 10 "character icons" since the character icon has not yet been obtained.

Then, if the collected "character icon" is less than 10 ("acquire less than 10 character icons") in the "Road to the Decisive Battle" or "Road to the Ultimate Battle", it will develop into a "Confrontation Reach" and collect If there are 10 "character icons" ("10 character icons acquired"), it will develop into a "great decisive battle reach".

"Confrontation Reach" is a reach performance in which the expectation of a big win is higher than that of Ninja Reach. is. Furthermore, in the "Confrontation Reach", a reach performance using the "Character Icons" collected in the "Road to the Decisive Battle" will be performed. In addition, in the "showdown reach", when the "great battle icon" stops at the position of the medium pattern, the "showdown reach" develops into the "great battle reach". The details of this "match reach" will be described later with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224. FIG.

"Big Battle Reach" is a reach effect with the highest expectation of a big hit among the reach effects in the normal game state. It is a reach production that will be "losing" if defeated.

(Production flow in right-handed game state)
Among the right-handed game states, in the "high-probability short-time game state" and "low-probability short-time game state", the game ball can enter the first start port (right) 6120B, and as a special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol By giving priority to the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbols for the first special symbol, the display effect of the character, etc., the voice effect, the change effect of the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. are performed. In addition, in the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state", the game ball can enter the second start port 6140, and the second special symbol is preferentially corresponded as the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol, and the second special symbol Variable display of decorative patterns, display production of characters, etc., sound production, production change production of the operation mode of the production button device 6310, etc. are performed. In the right-handed game state, when only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is variably displayed, the special symbol variably displayed is made to correspond to the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. may

When the game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B in the "high-probability short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state", all the decorative patterns fluctuate at high speed in the display area of the display device 7. Display is started (“start of variation of all symbols”). In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 6140 in the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state", in the display area of the display device 7, all the decorative patterns are scattered and start changing at high speed ("all patterns start of fluctuation”).

When all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to perform either the "notice inside the jewel" or the "notice of the lotus flower".

"Presentation inside the jewel" is, for example, a pre-announcement effect that displays the degree of expectation of a big hit (for example, intense heat) in the upper display area 7a of the display device 7 (see FIG. 173).

The “lotus flower notice” is, for example, a notice effect suggesting that a bud is displayed and the bud opens to develop into a “door opening effect”. The display of the buds can be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations due to the look-ahead, and the display of the buds is continued even when the small winning game state is being performed. The details of the presentation of the “lotus flower notice” will be described later with reference to FIG. 225 .

In addition, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", it is possible to perform a reach performance of "battle challenge" or "battle reach".

In the "battle challenge", the production button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode (see FIG. 172(d)), the second production operation unit 6312 projecting upward is operated once (one shot), and the production role When the object group 58 (see FIG. 173) falls, it is a ready-to-win effect that the first special symbol hits the jackpot.

In the "battle reach", the friendly character and the enemy boss face each other, and each time the friendly character attacks, the production button device 6310 changes (grows) in the operation mode, and the final operation mode of the production button device 6310 is reached. , and when the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) falls, it is a ready-to-win performance in which the first special symbol hits the jackpot. Details of the effects of this "Battle Reach" will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In addition, in the "high-probability non-time-saving game state", it is possible to perform a reach effect of "door opening effect" or "eye opening effect".

"Door opening performance" is a ready-to-win performance in which the performance button device 6310 is operated (continuously hit) a plurality of times to gradually open the door, and when the door is completely opened, the second special symbol is a big hit.

The "eye-opening effect" is a ready-to-win effect in which the ally character gradually opens its eyes, and when the eye-opening succeeds, the second special symbol becomes a big hit.

In addition, the above-mentioned "development" includes the display of necessary information when the game or production progresses, and the progress of the game or production itself, and the game or production progresses directly or indirectly. It is a concept that includes In addition, in the "development" that displays necessary information when the game or production progresses, predetermined development information (for example, icons, etc.) is displayed, or the displayed development information is displayed by adding or subtracting it. It is a concept that also includes doing.

[8-9. sub control circuit]
In order to execute the effects as described above, the contents of control of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 209. FIG.

[8-9-1. Symbol effect pattern determination table in normal game state]
A symbol effect pattern determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 200 is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The "symbol effect pattern" is the information that defines the display effect of the related characters and the like, the sound effect, the change effect of the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. Say. In addition to the pattern effect pattern, various display effects such as an advance notice effect pattern can be superimposed and executed.

In addition, the pattern production patterns in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine are a "pre-reach production pattern" corresponding to the first half variation pattern of the special symbols and a "ready-to-win production pattern" corresponding to the second half variation pattern of the special symbols. It is composed of a combination of

As shown in FIG. 200, in the symbol effect pattern determination table in the normal game state, in the first special symbol, the "first half variation pattern number" of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and the character icon, which will be described later, are displayed in the second half. The "second half icon number" and "pre-ready effect pattern" to be executed are associated, and the "second half variation pattern number", "second half icon number", and "ready effect pattern" of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol are associated. are associated. When the second half variation pattern number is "00H", the "effect end information" is determined so that only the pre-reach effect pattern is executed as the ready-to-win effect pattern.

In this embodiment, the combination of the first half variation pattern number (09H to 10H) and the second half variation pattern number (14H to 16H, 24H to 26H) reaches the "road to the final battle" or "the road to the final battle" After execution of any one of the pre-production patterns 9-32, any one of the ready-to-reach production patterns 4-8 and 12-16 of "showdown reach" or "great decisive battle reach" can be executed. And the pre-reach production patterns 9-32 of "Road to the Decisive Battle" or "Road to the Final Battle", and reach production patterns 4-8, 12-16 of "Confrontation Reach" or "Great Decisive Battle Reach" Since it is determined based on the number of icons in the second half, the effects of both are related by the number of icons in the second half. If the number of icons in the second half is 8 or 9, reach effect patterns 4 to 7 and 12 to 15 of "showdown reach" can be executed.

In the symbol effect pattern determination table in the normal game state, in the second special symbol, all the variation pattern commands of the second special symbol are associated with the "standby effect pattern".

This "standby effect pattern" is a sub-symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, while the three main symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are kept on standby (stopped display) without being variably displayed as decorative symbols. Only is displayed blinking. Even if this standby effect pattern is executed, the so-called irregular variation can be quietly ended without the player paying attention to the variable display of the second special symbol.

[8-9-2. Symbol effect pattern determination table for right-handed game state]
A symbol effect pattern determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern in the right-handed game state will be described. FIG. 201 is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table for a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 201, the symbol effect pattern determination table for the right-handed gaming state includes special symbol variation pattern commands (first half variation pattern number, second half variation pattern number), selection rate (first random number), and " "symbol production pattern" is associated.

Here, the "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number consisting of the first random number range. , is read as the selectivity. The selectivity may include 0% as well as 1 to 100%, and the term 0% selectivity is not excluded. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in FIGS. 202 to 209 and the like. In the present embodiment, a large number of random numbers of different random number ranges are provided, and description of the types of random numbers will be omitted as appropriate.

Also, the first symbol effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol, and the second symbol effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. When both of the second symbol production patterns are executed at the same time (such as when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating simultaneously), the "high probability time-saving game state" or the "low probability time-saving game state" , priority is given to execution of the first symbol effect pattern, and priority is given to execution of the second symbol effect pattern in the "high probability non-time-saving game state". ,

[8-9-3. Normal game state second half icon number determination table]
The second half icon number determination table for determining the second half icon number in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 202 is an example of the second half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the determination of the number of icons in the second half is performed prior to determination of the symbol effect pattern (see FIG. 200) in the normal game state.

"Second half icon count" refers to the total number of character icons that are displayed in the end in "Road to the Decisive Battle" and "Road to the Final Battle", and in this embodiment, the maximum number is 10. However, the number is not limited. In addition, the "number of icons in the second half" includes the number of "icons in the first half", which will be described later, and the relational expression "number of icons in the second half"="number of icons in the first half"+α is established.

As shown in FIG. 202, in the second half icon number determination table, the variation pattern command (second half variation pattern number) of the first special symbol, the selection rate (second random value), and the "second half icon number" are associated with each other. It is

In this embodiment, when the "great decisive battle ready-to-win (ready-to-win effect pattern 8, 16: see FIG. 200)" is performed corresponding to the second half variation pattern number (16H, 26H), the maximum number of icons in the second half is 10. The second half icon number determination table is configured so that the number of icons is determined. As a result, when 10 character icons are finally displayed in the "Road to the Decisive Battle" or the "Road to the Decisive Battle", the "Great Decisive Battle Reach" will be performed.

[8-9-4. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon number determination table for determining the first half icon number in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 203 is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "number of icons in the first half" refers to the total number of character icons that are displayed in the end in the "normal variation" and "pseudo continuous effect". is not limited.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the first half icon number determination table, the first special symbol winning command (first half variation pattern number), selection rate (third random number value), and "first half icon number" are associated with each other. ing.

Here, the "first special symbol winning command" is, as described in the first pachinko gaming machine, information to increase the number of reserved first special symbols by 1, or variation pattern information of the first special symbol ( That is, it is a command including a variation pattern command of the first special symbol) and the like. This first special symbol winning command is reserved for transmission when the game ball enters the first start port 6120A, 6120B (see S397 in FIG. 52), and transmission of the effect control command during the next system timer interrupt process. It is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the process (see S322 in FIG. 45). This also applies to the "second special symbol winning command" described later (see S403 in FIG. 52).

In this embodiment, the number of icons in the first half is determined so that the maximum number of icons in the first half is 5 when "Road to the Decisive Battle" is played corresponding to the first half variation pattern numbers (09H to 0FH). A decision table is constructed. As a result, when five character icons are finally displayed in the "normal variation" or "pseudo continuous effect", the "road to decisive battle" is performed.

[8-9-5. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon display scenario determination table for determining the first half icon display scenario in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 204 is an example of the first half icon display scenario determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The “first half icon display scenario” refers to information that defines display timing, display timing, and display number, such as where, when, and how many character icons are to be displayed in the first half.

As shown in FIG. 204, the first half icon display scenario determination table includes the first special symbol winning command (first half variation pattern number), the determined number of first half icons, the selection rate (fourth random value), and " First Half Icon Display Scenario".

In the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of the first half icon display scenario" are shown for reference. In addition, the 'variation' refers to the variable display of the decorative design based on the lottery for the special design for the starting information for which the first half icon display scenario was determined.

In this embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured such that one or a plurality of character icons can be displayed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed one to three times. As a result, the player can expect that the character icon will be added each time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured so that one or more character icons can be displayed in the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" or the "button challenge notice" before the pseudo continuous effect is performed. there is The execution timings of the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" and the "button challenge notice" are different, and both are configured to be executable.

[8-9-6. Normal game state first half icon set order scenario determination table]
The first half icon gathering order scenario determination table for determining the first half icon gathering order scenario in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 205 is an example of an icon set order scenario determination table in the first half of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "first half assembly order scenario" refers to information that defines the display order in which character icons of types corresponding to the number of icons in the first half are to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 205, the first half icon assembly order scenario determination table includes the winning command of the first special symbol, the determined first half icon number, the selection rate (fifth random value), and the "first half assembly order scenario." are associated with.

In the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of the first half assembly order scenario" are shown for reference. Character icons A to E in the "Western army mode" described later are illustrated as "A" to "E", and character icons F to J in the "Eastern army mode" described later are illustrated as "F" to "J". showing. In addition, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. The display position of "J" corresponds and has a similar role.

The numbers at the end of the first half collection order scenarios shown in FIG. 205 indicate “first half icon count”−“display order pattern”. Display order pattern 1” is shown.

In this embodiment, as the "display order pattern" of the first half set order scenario,
Character icons are displayed in order from A (F) to the top (see FIG. 214) such as “A→B→C→D→E (F→G→H→I→J)”. Pattern 1" and
Starting with E (J) at the end, characters are drawn in order from D (I) downward (see Fig. 214), such as "D -> C -> B -> A -> E (I -> H -> G -> F ->J)"."Display order pattern 2" in which icons are displayed,
After displaying D (I), such as "D → A → B → C → E (I → F → G → H → J)", return to A (F), then move up from A (F) "Display order pattern 3" in which the character icons are displayed in order (see FIG. 214);
Character icons are displayed in order from E (J) to the bottom (see FIG. 214) such as “E→D→C→B→A (J→I→H→G→F)”. pattern 4”. Note that the number of display order patterns and the content of the order are not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, "display order pattern 1" is a normal display order pattern, "display order pattern 2" is a display order pattern that improves the expectation of a big hit, and "display order pattern 3" is a pseudo consecutive notice. The display order pattern "display order pattern 4", which suggests that the road of the decisive battle or the road of the ultimate decisive battle, is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the order in which the characters are displayed also makes it possible to make the player interested in future game contents and to improve the interest in the game.

[8-9-7. Sakura Accumulation Notice Determination Table in Normal Game State]
The cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table for determining the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice in the normal game state will now be described. FIG. 206 is an example of a cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 206, the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table is determined by "first special symbol winning command (first half variation pattern number)", "number of reserved first special symbols", and first half icon display scenario. The "number of displayed character icons" (see FIG. 204) displayed in the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice, the selection rate (sixth random number value), and the "cherry accumulation advance notice effect pattern" are associated with each other.

In the rightmost column of the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table, "contents of the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice effect pattern" are shown for reference. In addition, the 'variation' refers to the variable display of the decorative pattern performed based on the lottery for the special pattern for the starting information for which the cherry blossom accumulation notice effect pattern was determined. "Advance fluctuation" means the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern that is started before "the relevant fluctuation". Regarding this preliminary variation, it is executed a plurality of times according to the reserved number of the first special symbols, and if the reserved number of the first special symbols is 4, the preliminary variation will be performed three times from the next variation, If the reserved number of the first special symbol is 3, two preliminary variations will be executed from the next variation, and if the reserved number of the first special symbol is 2, one preliminary variation will be performed from the next variation. will be executed. In the present embodiment, up to two advance fluctuations can be executed, but up to three advance fluctuations may be executed.

As mentioned above, the "Sakura Accumulation Notice" is a notice effect that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, and when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or "gangster icons" are displayed. It is the content to be done. For this reason, it can be said that the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is composed of a step effect of accumulating cherry blossoms in stages and an icon display effect of displaying an icon.

Then, the step effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the pre-variation and the variation, and the icon display effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable in the variation.

In addition, in the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the cherry blossoms flutter over the entire display area of the display device 7 and are about to be sucked into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, but the cherry blossoms are not accumulated. It is also possible to execute a failed notice effect (Cherry blossom accumulation 0 stage notice -YK0). As a result, it is possible to increase the appearance rate of the cherry blossom accumulation notice as a whole, and to make people interested in whether or not the cherry blossoms will accumulate.

In this embodiment, it is expected that the "gangster icon" will be displayed each time the step effect of cherry blossom accumulation advance notice develops (in the order of cherry accumulation step 1 notice <cherry accumulation step 2 notice <sakura accumulation step 3 notice). The cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table is configured so that the number of times and the number of displayed "character icons" are increased. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the development of the stage presentation (accumulation of cherry blossoms), and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, since the step effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the advance variation and the variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game over a plurality of variations.

[8-9-8. Support Icon Display Scenario Determination Table for Confrontation Reach in Normal Game State]
A support icon display scenario determination table for displaying support icons in confrontation reach in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 207 is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for confrontation reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "support icon display scenario" is the display content displayed by the support icon triggered by the player's operation of the effect button device 6310 in the confrontation reach, and the number of operations of the effect button device 6310 and the display content are associated. Information defined by Further, the “support icon” of the confrontation reach will be described in detail later using FIGS. 223 and 224. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 207, the support icon display scenario determination table includes a ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the showdown reach (see FIG. 200), the determined number of icons in the second half, the selection rate (seventh random value), and " support icon display scenario".

In the rightmost column of the support icon display scenario determination table, "support icon display scenario" is shown for reference. Here, "line" means that the character's line corresponding to the support icon is displayed, "opportunity" means that the character of opportunity is displayed and there is an expectation of a big hit, and "hot" is displayed. shows that the character of intense heat is displayed and the expectation of a big hit is higher than "opportunity". Further, "LED" means that the LED group 46 performs predetermined light emission, and "great battle" means that a "great battle icon" is displayed. Note that the contents displayed by the "support icon display scenario" are not limited to the above. Characters such as "Direction Accessory" and "Change of Directive Button" for changing the operation mode of the directive button device 6310 may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the support icon display scenario determination table is configured so that the "great battle icon" is always displayed in the reach production patterns 6, 7, 14, and 15 that develop from confrontation reach to decisive battle reach. It is As a result, when the "great battle icon" is displayed by the support icon of the confrontation reach, the great battle reach can be performed.

[8-9-9. Lotus flower advance notice determination table in right-handed game state]
The lotus blossom advance notice determination table for determining the lotus blossom advance notice in the right-handed game state will now be described. FIG. 208 is an example of a lotus blossom advance notice determination table for a right-handed gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 208, the lotus flower advance notice determination table includes "second special symbol winning command (first half variation pattern number and second half variation pattern number)", "number of reserved second special symbols", and selection A rate (eighth random number) is associated with a "lotus flower forewarning effect pattern".

As described above, the "lotus flower notice" is a notice effect suggesting that a bud is displayed and the bud opens to develop into a "door opening effect". The display of buds can be displayed over multiple fluctuations (prior fluctuations).

As for the lotus flower notice effect pattern, a notice effect pattern of "lotus flower success notice" and a notice effect pattern of "lotus flower failure notice" are prepared. The notice effect pattern of "Lotus Flower Success Notice" will be displayed from the next change (previous change) after the decision of the lotus flower notice effect pattern triggered by the winning command of the second special symbol. It is a production pattern in which the buds will open. In addition, the notice effect pattern of "lotus flower failure notice" is displayed from the next change (previous change) after the decision of the lotus flower notice effect pattern triggered by the winning command of the second special symbol. It is a production pattern that buds disappear when it changes.

In this embodiment, when the "door opening effect" is performed corresponding to the first half variation pattern numbers (41H, 45H), the notice effect pattern of "lotus flower success notice" is determined at a predetermined selection rate. , the lotus flower advance notice determination table is configured. As a result, after the lotus flower success notice is performed, the door opening effect is performed.

[8-9-10. Fan notice decision table of jackpot game state]
A folding fan announcement determination table for determining the folding fan announcement in the jackpot game state will be described. FIG. 209 is an example of a folding fan advance notice determination table for a jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "fan notice" in the jackpot game state is that in the jackpot game state with the first special symbol, every time a game ball enters the first jackpot 6131, the fan falls from the display area of the display device 7. This is a notice suggesting whether or not the start information stored in the special symbol start storage area is a big hit by the color of the folding fan. That is, in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, it is a notice suggesting a so-called reserve consecutive house. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "fan notice" is performed only in the jackpot game state with the first special symbol, but the "fan notice" is also performed in the jackpot game state with the second special symbol. You may

In addition, the "fan notice" indicates that the number of reserved second special symbols is two, which is the upper limit number (the start information is stored in each of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (2). ) is the condition. In addition, regardless of the number of reserved second special symbols, the "fan notice" may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 209, the fan notice determination table includes start information (big hit information, round information) stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4), and second special symbol start storage. The starting information (big hit information, round information) stored in the areas (1) and (2), the selection rate (9th random number value), and the "folding fan announcement effect pattern" are associated with each other.

Also, the big-hit information means a big-hit judging random number value to be judged as a big-hit, and the round information means a pattern random number value for determining the number of rounds in the big-hit game state.

In addition, the fan notice production pattern is a notice production pattern of "white fan notice" in which a white fan falls, a notice production pattern of "red fan notice" in which a red fan falls, and a notice production pattern of "rainbow fan" in which a rainbow-colored fan falls. A notice effect pattern of "Notice" and a notice effect pattern of "Gold Fan Notice" in which a golden folding fan falls are prepared.

In the present embodiment, the notice effect pattern of "red fan notice" suggests that the start information of the jackpot of 3R or more (3R, 5R, 10R) is stored in the first special symbol start storage area. The lotus blossom notice determination table is constructed such that the notice performance pattern of "rainbow fan notice" suggests that the start information of the 10R jackpot is stored in the first special symbol start storage area.

In addition, the lotus blossom notice determination table is constructed such that the notice performance pattern of "golden fan notice" suggests that the 2R jackpot start information is stored in the second special symbol start storage area. .

For this reason, the notice effect pattern of "red fan notice" and the notice effect pattern of "rainbow fan notice" are fan notices suggesting a big hit with the first special symbol, and the notice effect pattern of "golden fan notice". can be said to be a fan announcement suggesting a big hit with the second special pattern.

In the present embodiment, when the start information of the big hit is stored in both the first special symbol start storage area and the second special symbol start storage area, the second special symbol big hit is suggested. The notice effect pattern of "notice" can not be determined, and the notice effect pattern of "red fan notice" or "rainbow fan notice" that suggests the big hit of the first special pattern can be determined. A flower notice determination table is configured.

[8-9-11. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 210, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S6500). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6510.

Note that the initialization process (S6500) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S6510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing for inputting data. In this data input process, both the read process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button device 6310 are performed.

In the reading process of the command input port 308, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

In addition, in the input processing of the effect button device 6310 , operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button device 6310 is input from the button control circuit 310 . Further, when the operation information is input from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the input operation information is valid or invalid and is discarded. , the valid time for validating the input operation information, and the invalid period for invalidating the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button device 6310 are finished, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6520.

In S6520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S6510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6530.

At S6530, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, a production pattern is determined, and based on the determined production pattern, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) for operating various production devices are executed. , lamp requests, accessory requests, production button drive requests, etc.). Details of this rendering mode determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6540.

In S6540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 174). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6550.

In S6550, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 174). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6560.

In S6560, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 174). Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6570.

At S6570, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the role product request to the role product control circuit 307 (see FIG. 174). Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6580.

At S6580, the sub CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310 (see FIG. 174). The button control circuit 310 changes the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 based on a message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, and performs drive control such as vibrating the effect button device 6310. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[8-9-12. Production Mode Determination Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 211, details of the effect mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 at S6530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 210) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing an example of effect mode determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

At S6531, the sub CPU 301 executes effect pattern determination processing for determining the effect pattern. In this process, based on the command sent from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7, the mode of the sound effect output from the speaker 32, the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. are determined. A performance pattern is determined. Details of this rendering mode determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6532.

In S6532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6533.

In S6533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S6532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6534.

In S6534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6535.

In S6535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6536.

In S6536, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product request generation process. In this process, a role item request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6537.

At S6537, the sub CPU 301 executes the process of generating the effect button drive request. In this process, an effect button drive request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 210).

[8-9-13. Effect pattern decision processing]
Next, details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 at S6531 during the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 211) will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. 212 and 213 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "first special symbol winning command".

When it is determined in S6531-1 that it is the "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-2. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-2, the sub CPU 301 updates the reserved number of the first special symbols and performs the first reserved update display process for updating and displaying the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbols. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-3.

At S6531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the current game state is the "normal game state".

If it is determined in S6531-3 that the game is in the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-4. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not in the “normal gaming state”, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs first half icon number determination processing for determining the first half icon number in the normal game state.

In the first half icon number determination process, the first half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 203 is referred to, and the first half icon number is determined based on the winning command of the first special symbol and the third random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-5.

In S6531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs icon scenario determination processing. In this icon scenario determination process, both the first half icon display scenario determination process for determining the first half icon display scenario and the first half assembly order scenario determination process for determining the first half assembly order scenario are performed.

In the first half icon display scenario determination process, the first half icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, the first half icon display scenario is determined.

In the first half collection order scenario determination process, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table shown in FIG. , determine the first half set order scenario.

When both the first half icon display scenario determination process and the first half assembly order scenario determination process are completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-6.

In S6531-6, the sub CPU 301 performs cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination processing for determining the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice in the normal game state.

In the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination process, the cherry accumulation advance notice determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of icons to be displayed and the sixth random number value, a cherry blossom accumulation notice effect pattern is determined. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-7, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "second special symbol winning command".

When it is determined in S6531-7 that it is the "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-8. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-10.

At S6531-8, the sub CPU 301 updates the reserved number of the second special symbols and performs a second reserved update display process for updating and displaying the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbols. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-9.

In S6531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs a lotus blossom advance notice determination process for determining the lotus blossom advance notice in the right-handed gaming state.

In the lotus flower advance notice determination process, the lotus flower advance notice determination table shown in FIG. A flower notice production pattern is determined. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "win command for the big winning opening".

When it is determined in S6531-10 that it is the "win command for the big winning opening", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-11. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "win command for the big winning opening", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-20.

At S6531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs fan announcement determination processing for determining the fan announcement in the big hit game state.

In the folding fan announcement determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot game state is established, and if not the first special symbol jackpot game state, the fan announcement determination process is terminated. Next, if the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the second special symbol is the upper limit number of two, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is two of the upper limit number. Otherwise, the fan notice determination process is terminated. Then, when it is in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol and the number of reserved second special symbols is two, which is the upper limit number, the fan announcement determination table shown in FIG. 209 is referred to, and the first special symbol start memory A folding fan announcement performance pattern is determined based on the start information stored in the area, the start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area, and the ninth random number. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

When it is determined in S6531-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-21. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-30.

At S6531-21, the sub CPU 301 performs second half icon number determination processing for determining the number of second half icons in the normal game state.

In the second half icon number determination process, the second half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 202 is referenced, and the second half icon number is determined based on the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-22.

At S6531-22, the sub CPU 301 performs a symbol effect pattern determination process for determining a symbol effect pattern. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-23.

In the symbol effect pattern determination process, the game state is first referred to. If the normal game state, the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is determined.If the right-handed game state, the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. decide.

When the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is determined, the determined symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is referred to. Based on the command and the number of second half icons determined in S6531-21 above, a pre-reach effect pattern and a ready-reach effect pattern are determined. In addition, if it is the normal game state and the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the standby performance pattern is determined.

In addition, when the ready-to-win effect pattern is determined in the normal game state, referring to the support icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. , determine the support icon display scenario.

When the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined, the determined symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. to decide.

At S6531-23, the sub CPU 301 performs other notice effect pattern determination processing for determining the dialog notice and the button challenge notice. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In addition, in the dialogue notice in the notice effect pattern determination process, a dialogue notice determination table (not shown) is referred to so that the displayed character's dialogue can suggest the possibility of a big hit. Based on the selection rate (10th random number value, etc.), the speech announcement effect pattern is determined.

In addition, in the button challenge notice in the other notice effect pattern determination process, first, the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5 is referred to, and the number of character icons to be displayed in the button challenge notice according to the first half icon display scenario. If there is, the first button challenge notice effect pattern in which the display number of character icons are displayed is determined. In this first button challenge notice effect pattern, when the player operates the effect button device 6310 a plurality of times, the displayed number of character icons are displayed, but the player does not operate the effect button device 6310. Even in this case, the display number of character icons are displayed after the reception time of the effect button device 6310 is over.

On the other hand, in the button challenge notice in the other notice effect pattern determination process, if there is no number of character icons displayed in the button challenge notice due to the first half icon display scenario, the character icon showing the expectation level of the jackpot and the content of the developing reach will be displayed. To enable display, a button challenge notice determination table (not shown) is referred to, and based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined selection rate (eleventh random number value, etc.), a second button challenge notice effect pattern is created. to decide. In this second button challenge notice effect pattern, character icons are displayed by the player operating the effect button device 6310 a plurality of times. In the second button challenge notice effect pattern, when the player does not operate the effect button device 6310, the character icon is not displayed, but the character icon is displayed after the end of the effect button acceptance time. You may do so.

At S6531-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "design designation command".

When it is determined in S6531-30 that it is a "design designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "design designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-40.

At S6531-31, the sub CPU 301 performs decorative design determination processing for determining the decorative design to be stopped and displayed according to the type of the design designation command. Also, when the type of the symbol designation command is a command corresponding to the big win symbol, the number data of rounds of the big win are set. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command".

When it is determined in S6531-40 that it is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "special symbol effect stop command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-50.

At S6531-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative design stop process for stopping display of the decorative design. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "big hit start display command".

When it is determined at S6531-50 that it is the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-51. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-60.

At S6531-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot effect determination process for determining a jackpot effect pattern for performing a jackpot effect. In this big hit effect determination process, a big hit effect pattern is determined according to the big hit round number data set in S6531-31. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-60, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command".

If it is determined at S6531-60 that it is a "game state designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-61. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be the "game state designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-70.

At S6531-61, the sub CPU 301 performs game state setting processing for setting the game state according to the type of the game state designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-62.

At S6531-62, the sub CPU 301 performs effect mode determination processing for determining the effect mode.

In this production mode determination process, when the "high-probability time-saving game state" is set, the "battle mode" is set as the production mode, and when the "high-probability non-time-saving game state" is set, the "golden hour mode" is set as the production mode, In the case of the "low-probability short-time gaming state", the "dream mode" is set as the production mode. Also, in the "normal game state", the "west mode" and the "east mode" are alternately shifted based on a predetermined transition rate (the 12th random number value, etc.). Also, in the "normal game state", regardless of the predetermined transition rate (the 12th random number value, etc.), the transition between the "Western army mode" and the "Eastern army mode" is made according to the predetermined number of fluctuations of the special symbols. can be configured to In addition, in the normal game state, the game is not limited to the two production modes of the "Western army mode" and the "Eastern army mode", and three or more production modes may be configured to be transitionable. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined at S6531-70 that the command is a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-71. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not a “demonstration display command”, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-73.

At S6531-71, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect pattern determination process for determining a demonstration display effect pattern for effecting a game standby effect. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-72.

At S6531-73, the sub CPU 301 instructs the button control circuit 310 to return the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 to the first operation mode (see FIG. 172(a)) as the initial operation mode. conversion processing. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

The effect button initialization process is configured to be performed when the "demonstration display command" is received, but in addition to this, at least the "special symbol winning command" and "special symbol variation pattern command" , It may also be configured to be performed when any one of the "special symbol effect stop command" or "big hit start display command" is received.

Also, the effect button initialization process may be performed according to the current game state and various commands. For example, the production button initialization process is performed regardless of the game state when the "demonstration display command" is received. It may be configured so that it is performed also when any one of the "production stop command" is received. In particular, since the average fluctuation time of special symbols differs depending on the game state and the operation frequency of the effect button device 6310 differs, the effect button device 6310 can be initialized while considering the game state.

At S6531-13, the sub CPU 301 also determines an effect pattern according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

[8-10. Production content]
An example of the effect content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with respect to the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, and the like.

(Normal display image)
First, the normal display images in the "Western army mode" and "Eastern army mode" in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 214 is an example of the normal display image of the West mode and the East mode in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 214(a) shows the normal display image of the West mode in the normal game state. This is an example, and FIG. 214(b) is an example of the normal display image in the East mode in the normal game state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 173, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the effect section 6116, which is an annular structure, is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, and inside the effect section 6116 , an upper display area 7a is formed as a display area of the display device 7. As shown in FIG. Various icons, characters, etc., which will be described later, are displayed in the upper display area 7a.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), in the normal display image of the West army mode in the normal game state, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 7 as the main symbol on the left. A pattern 6071L, a middle pattern 6071C, and a right pattern 6071R are configured to be displayable. In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-design 6071A as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the first special design and a second design as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design are displayed. The secondary symbol 6072A is configured to be small and displayable. In the normal game state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the left symbol 6071L, the middle symbol 6071C, the right symbol 6071R and the first sub-symbol 6071A is performed, but the second special symbol is variably displayed. When the variable display is performed, the variable display of only the second sub-symbol 6072A is performed.

In addition, in the normal display image of the Western army mode, the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed according to the number of reserved first special symbols. Special 1 first reservation image 6072a indicating that the start information is stored in the special symbol start storage area (1), Special 1 indicating that the start information is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (2) Second reserved image 6072b, special first third reserved image 6072c indicating that start information is stored in first special symbol start storage area (3), start information is stored in first special symbol start storage area (4) A special first fourth reserved image 6072d indicating that the reservation has been made is configured to be displayable. In addition, although the reserved number of the second special symbols is not displayed in the present embodiment, a number or the like indicating the reserved number of the second special symbols can also be displayed.

In the normal display image in the West army mode, a West army icon display portion 6074L is formed on the left side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that the character icon is displayed. The West Army icon display portion 6074L displays an icon A display image 6074a indicating that a character icon A (for example, West Army General A participates) and a character icon B (for example, West Army General B participates) are displayed. An icon B display image 6074b indicating that the An icon D display image 6074d indicating that a character icon E (for example, General E of the Western Army has entered the war) is displayed, and an icon E display image 6074e indicating that a character icon E has been displayed can be displayed. Although the details will be described later, when each character icon is displayed, the icon display image of the West Army icon display section 6074L corresponding to the character icon is lit and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 214(b), in the normal display image of the eastern mode in the normal game state, the left symbol 6071L, the middle symbol 6071C, the right symbol 6071R, the first secondary symbol 6071A, the third 2 sub-symbol 6072A, special 1 first reserved image 6072a, special 1 second reserved image 6072b, special 1 third reserved image 6072c, special 1 fourth reserved image 6072d are configured to be displayable.

In the normal display image of the East mode, an East icon display portion 6074R is formed on the right side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that the character icon is displayed. The East Army icon display portion 6074R displays an icon F display image 6074f indicating that a character icon F (for example, East Army General F Participation) and a character icon G (for example, East Army General G Participation) are displayed. An icon G display image 6074g indicating that the An icon I display image 6074i indicating that a character icon J (for example, the eastern army general J participating in the war) is displayed can be displayed. Although the details will be described later, when each character icon is displayed, the icon display image of the East army icon display section 6074R corresponding to the character icon is lit and displayed.

In this embodiment, in the West army mode of the normal game state, the character icons A to E correspond to the above-described "first half icons", and the icon display images lit up in the West army icon display section 6074L are displayed. The number corresponds to the "first half icon number" described above. In addition, in the Eastern army mode in the normal game state, the character icons F to J correspond to the "first half icon", and the number of icon display images lit and displayed in the eastern army icon display section 6074R is the number described above. It corresponds to the "number of icons in the first half".

In the present embodiment, the West army icon display part 6074L and the East army icon display part 6074R are configured using the display device 7 as predetermined display images, but LEDs for effect that can individually light up a plurality of locations are used. An indicator may be provided separately, and an LED indicator for presentation may be used.

(Production of cherry blossom accumulation notice)
Next, the rendering of the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described. FIGS. 215 and 216 are examples of display images for explaining effects of cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine.

214. In the description of the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the characters attached in FIG. Also, the illustration of the first sub-symbol 6071A and the second sub-symbol 6072A, which are displayed extremely small, is also omitted. This is the same for the effects described with reference to FIGS. 217-227.

Using FIGS. 215 and 216, a staged effect of accumulating cherry blossoms in stages is performed in two stages, a preliminary variation and the start of variation of the variation, and a cherry blossom accumulation that displays "two character icons" in the variation. 2-stage advance notice-The effect of accumulating cherry blossoms corresponding to the notice effect pattern of YK7 (see Fig. 206) or the stage effect of accumulating cherry blossoms in stages is performed in two stages of advance fluctuation and the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation. , an example of the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the notice effect pattern of the cherry accumulation two-stage notice-YK24 (see FIG. 206) that displays the "gangster icon" with the change will be described.

FIG. 215(a) is an example of a display image when the decorative symbols are stopped when the reserved number of the first special symbols is two. In addition, as shown in FIG. 215(a), none of the icon display images are illuminated in the West Army icon display section.

FIG. 215(b) is an example of a display image when the variable display of decorative symbols is started as a preliminary variation from the state of FIG. 215(a). As shown in FIG. 215(b), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the cherry blossoms flutter over the entire display area of the display device 7 and are sucked into the upper display area 7a at the start of the preliminary variation. The intended display image is produced.

FIG. 215(c) is an example of a display image when the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a from the state of FIG. 215(b) and the decorative pattern is stopped. As shown in FIG. 215(c), when the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a, a one-step accumulation image indicating that one stage of cherry blossoms has been accumulated is displayed in the upper display area 7a. Stop display. If the cherry blossoms are about to be sucked into the upper display area 7a, but the cherry blossoms are to be accumulated but the cherry blossoms are to be accumulated in advance (zero level of cherry blossom accumulation - YK0), one level is accumulated in the upper display area 7a. The image will not be displayed.

FIG. 215(d) is an example of a display image when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in the state of FIG. 215(c) or as the variation. As shown in FIG. 215(d), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the cherry blossoms flutter over the entire display area of the display device 7 and the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a at the start of the variation. The intended display image is produced.

FIG. 216(e) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are drawn into the upper display area 7a from the state of FIG. 215(d). As shown in FIG. 216(e), when cherry blossoms are newly sucked into the upper display area 7a, a two-stage accumulated image is displayed in the upper display area 7a indicating that the cherry blossoms have been accumulated in two stages.

FIG. 216(f) is an example of a display image when the character icon A (for example, General A of the Western Army participates in the war) is displayed by button challenge notice or the like from the state of FIG. 216(e). As shown in FIG. 216(f), when character icon A (for example, West Army general A participates in war) is displayed by a button challenge notice or the like different from the cherry accumulation notice, the icon A display image is displayed in the West Army icon display area. It is illuminated, and a two-step accumulated image and a character image indicating the number of character icons, "Concentration of one person", are displayed in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 216(g) is an example of the display image when the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released. As shown in FIG. 216(g), at a predetermined timing such as before reach, the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released, and a display is performed in which the cherry blossoms cover the entire display area. The timing at which the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released can be freely changed in design.

FIG. 216(h-1) is an example of the display image when the "gokudo icon" indicating that the cherry blossoms are released and the road to the final battle is displayed. As shown in FIG. 216(h-1), in the case of cherry blossom accumulation 2-step notice -YK24, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, the "gangster icon" indicating that it will lead to a final battle will appear. Is displayed. After that, the production of the road to the final battle will be performed.

FIG. 216(h-2) is an example of a display image when two character icons are displayed after the cherry blossoms are released. As shown in FIG. 216(h-2), in the case of cherry blossom accumulation 2-step notice -YK7, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, character icon B (for example, General B of the Western army participates in the war) and character icon C ( For example, two character icons such as "Western army general C participation" are displayed. Then, the icon B display image and the icon C display image are lit and displayed in the West Army icon display portion, and "Three-person gathering" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

In FIGS. 215 and 216, an example of cherry blossom accumulation advance notice corresponding to the advance notice production patterns of cherry accumulation two-step notice-YK7 and cherry accumulation two-step notice-YK24 has been described. The same applies to the announcement effect pattern (see FIG. 206).

In this way, the cherry blossom accumulation notice of the present embodiment gradually improves the expectation of the game by developing the staged effect over the advance variation and the variation (or only with the variation), and the display It is possible to make the player more interested in the result and improve the interest in the game.

(Performance of pseudo-continuous performance)
Next, the effect of the "pseudo-continuous effect" will be described. FIGS. 217 to 219 are examples of display images for explaining the pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine.

217 to 219, corresponding to icon display scenarios A38 and A39 (see FIG. 204) in the first half, in which pseudo continuous effects are performed twice, five character icons are displayed, and the path to the decisive battle develops. An example of the pseudo continuous effect will be described. 217 to 219, the display order of the character icons in the pseudo continuous effect is based on the first half set order scenario 5-1 (see FIG. 205) corresponding to the display order pattern 1. FIG.

FIG. 217(a) is an example of a display image when all the left, middle and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 217(a), the icon A display image and the icon B display image of the West Army icon display portion are lit and displayed, and the character image indicating the number of character icons is displayed in the upper display area 7a. is displayed.

FIG. 217(b) is an example of a display image when the right symbol is also temporarily stopped after the left symbol is temporarily stopped.

FIG. 217(c) is an example of a display image when the right symbol, which is temporarily stopped and displayed, starts changing display again (right symbol sliding) from the state of FIG. 217(b).

FIG. 217(d) is an example of the display image when the first pseudo-continuous effect is being performed to indicate whether or not the predetermined character icon will stop at the position of the middle symbol. As shown in FIG. 217(d), when the variable display of the right pattern is being performed, a display prompting whether or not "character icon C (participation in Western army general C)" will stop is displayed at the position of the middle pattern. done.

FIG. 218(e) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol and the first simulated continuous effect is successful. As shown in FIG. 218(e), when the simulated continuation effect is successful and "Character icon C (Western army general C participates)" stops at the middle symbol position, the icon C display image is displayed in the West army icon display area. is lit up, and "three people united" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

In addition, when the first pseudo-fighting effect fails, "Character icon C (Western army general C participation)" is erased, and after performing a temporary stop display with the right pattern different from the left pattern, all The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed as "losing".

FIG. 218(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the middle symbol position and the first pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 218(f), as the first pseudo-continuous effect, "pseudo x 1 time" indicating the first pseudo-continuous effect is displayed, and all decorations of the left, middle and right symbols are displayed. Symbols start to change display.

FIG. 218(g) is an example of a display image when the second simulated continuous effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 218(g), when the left symbol is temporarily stopped, "Character Icon D (Western Army General D Participation)" and "Character Icon E (Western Army General E Participation)" are displayed at the position of the middle symbol. ” is displayed to incite whether or not to stop.

FIG. 218(h) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol and the second pseudo-continuous effect is successful. As shown in FIG. 218(h), when "Character Icon D (West Army General D Participation)" and "Character Icon E (West Army General E Participation)" stop at the position of the middle pattern, the West Army icon display section The icon D display image and the icon E display image are lit and displayed, and a character image indicating the number of character icons "Concentration of 5 characters" is displayed in the upper display area 7a.

Also, when the second simulated hype effect fails, "Character Icon D (Western Army General D Participation)" and "Character Icon E (Western Army General E Participation)" are erased, and the right pattern is the same as the left pattern. Temporary stop display is performed with the pattern of , and normal reach is performed.

FIG. 219(i) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the middle symbol position and the second pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 219(i), as the second pseudo-continuous effect, "Pseudo x 2 times" indicating the second pseudo-continuous effect is displayed, and all decorations of the left, middle and right symbols are displayed. Symbols start to change display.

FIG. 219(j) is an example of a display image when all the icon display images are lit and displayed in the West army icon display area, and a "road icon" indicating that the road to the decisive battle is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 219(j), after the start of the second simulated continuous effect, all the icon display images are illuminated in the West Army icon display area, indicating that the path to the decisive battle will develop. A "road icon" indicating After that, the production of the road to the decisive battle will be performed.

217 to 219, an example of a pseudo continuous effect corresponding to the first half icon display scenario A38 or A39 and the first half assembly order scenario 5-1 has been described. ) and other pseudo-continuous effects corresponding to the first half set order scenario (see FIG. 205).

In this way, the pseudo-continuous effect of the present embodiment is not only based on whether or not re-change is performed, but also the number of character icons displayed at the time of re-change, the types of character icons, the display order of character icons, and the like. It is possible to give a new interest to the player and improve the interest of the game.

(Direction of the road to the decisive battle)
Next, the production of "Road to the Decisive Battle" will be described. FIGS. 220 and 221 are examples of display images for explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using FIGS. 220 and 221, pre-reach production patterns 9 and 12 are the production of the road to the decisive battle that develops from the western army mode, where eight character icons are displayed and develops into the confrontation reach. , 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 (see FIG. 200).

Here, the road to the decisive battle is an effect aiming to collect 10 character icons by having the player operate the effect button device 6310 for the first number of operations before the end of the predetermined time. An "operation effect time" is set during which the effect button device 6310 can be operated for one operation. In the present embodiment, one set (4 seconds) is defined as 3 seconds for reception of the effect button device 6310 and 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result, and 5 times as the number of times of first operation of the effect button. In order to be able to operate the device 6310, the "operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle" is set to 20 seconds. The configuration of the operation effect time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the effect button device 6310 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 228 .

As shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, the production of the road to the decisive battle developed from the West Army mode is based on the premise that all the icon display images in the West Army icon display section are lit. Therefore, in the vicinity of the West army icon display part, a character image of "Western army rally" is displayed indicating that all the icon display images of the West army icon display part are illuminated. Also, a “countdown display image” that counts down the number of seconds until the “operation presentation time for the road to the decisive battle” is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7 . In this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the effect button device 6310 (see FIG. 228). A frequency image indicating the number of operations may be displayed.

FIG. 220(a) is an example of a display image when the effect button device 6310 can be operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 220(a), when it is possible to operate the effect button device 6310, a effect button image for prompting the player to operate the effect button device 6310 and a effect button image are displayed below the effect button image. A gauge image showing the reception time of the button device 6310 is displayed. This is the same for the production of the road to the final battle.

FIG. 220(b) is an example of when "character icon H (eastern army general H participates)" is displayed as a predetermined icon when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 220(b), when "Character Icon H (Eastern Army General H Participates)" is displayed, the icon H display image is illuminated in the Eastern Army icon display area, and the character icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a. A character image indicating the number is displayed as "6 people gathering".

FIG. 220(c) is an example of a display image when the effect button device 6310 can be operated for the second time.

FIG. 220(d) is an example of a display image when "Approaching!?" This "Approaching!?" , etc., to adjust the displayed icons.

FIG. 221(e) is an example of a display image when the third and fourth operations of the effect button device 6310 are completed and the fifth (final) operation of the effect button device 6310 can be performed. .

FIG. 221(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined icon is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the fifth time (final time). As shown in FIG. 221(f), when "character icon G (east general G participation)" and "character icon F (east general F participation)" are displayed as predetermined icons, the east army icon display area is displayed. The icon G display image and the icon F display image are lit and displayed in the upper display area 7a, and "Concentration of 8 characters" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 221(g) is an example of a display image when the countdown display image becomes zero and the final number of character icons is displayed.

FIG. 221(h) is an example of a display image when a character image indicating development to confrontation reach is displayed after the final number of character icons is displayed. Here, in confrontation ready-to-win, since an effect using the displayed character icons is performed, as shown in FIG. ing. After the display shown in FIG. 221(h) is performed, an effect of confrontation ready-to-win is performed.

In FIGS. 220 and 221, it is the production of the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western army mode, and the production patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 before reach are shown. An example of the corresponding Road to Decisive Battle production has been explained, but the Road to Decisive Battle production developed from the East Army mode and other pre-reach production patterns (see Fig. 200) that perform the Road to the Decisive Battle have been explained. The same is true for

In this way, the effect of the road to the decisive battle of the present embodiment is an effect aiming to collect 10 character icons by the player's operation of the effect button device 6310 by the end of the predetermined time. It is possible to actively encourage participation in the game and improve the interest in the game.

(Direction of the road to the final battle)
Next, the production of "The Road to the Final Battle" will be explained. FIG. 222 is an example of a display image explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko game machine.

Fig. 222 shows a pre-reach production pattern 32 (see Fig. 200), which is a presentation of the path to the decisive battle developed from the western army mode, in which 10 character icons are displayed and progresses to the great decisive battle reach. An example of the production of the road to the ultimate battle corresponding to the will be described.

Here, the road to the decisive battle is a specific effect of the same kind as the road to the decisive battle, and the player is made to operate the effect button device 6310 the second number of times before the predetermined time is over. This is an effect for collecting character icons, and an "operation effect time" is set during which the effect button device 6310 can be operated for the second number of times. In the present embodiment, the reception time of the effect button device 6310 is 3 seconds and the display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result is set as 1 set (4 seconds). The "operation performance time of the road to the final battle" is set to 40 seconds so that the performance button device 6310 can be operated 10 times.

As shown in FIG. 222, in the presentation of the path to the final battle developed from the West army mode, the "operation presentation time of the path to the final battle" ends at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7. A "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until is displayed. In this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the effect button device 6310. Images may be displayed.

FIG. 222(a) is an example of a display image when the effect button device 6310 can be operated for the first time. At the start of the production of the road to the ultimate battle, the icon display image lit up in the West army icon display section is continuously displayed until the production of the road to the ultimate battle is started. In FIG. 222(a), the character icon A has already been displayed before the production of the road to the final battle begins, and the lighting display of the icon A display image is continued in the West army icon display section.

FIG. 222(b) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon D is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 222(b), when "character icon D (Western army general D participates)" and "character icon H (West army general H participates)" are displayed as predetermined icons, the West army icon display area is displayed. The icon D display image and the icon H display image of the East Army icon display portion are lit up, and "Three People Gathering" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 222(c) is an example of a display image when the tenth operation of the effect button device 6310 is completed, the countdown display image becomes zero, and the final number of character icons is displayed. In FIG. 222(c), all the icon display images of the West army icon display part and the East army icon display part are illuminated.

FIG. 222(d) is an example of a display image when a character image indicating that the final number of character icons is displayed and then a character image indicating that the game will progress to the Great Decisive Battle Reach is displayed. At this time, the character image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is erased. After the display shown in FIG. 222(d) is performed, the effect of the big decisive battle ready-to-win is performed.

In addition, in FIG. 222, the pre-reach production pattern 32, which is the production of the road to the decisive battle that develops from the western army mode and progresses to the great decisive battle ready with 10 character icons displayed, is shown. An example of the production of the road to the ultimate decisive battle has been explained, but the production of the road to the ultimate decisive battle that is developed from the eastern army mode and other pre-reach production patterns that perform the road to the great decisive battle (Fig. 200) See also).

In the present embodiment, the number of icon display images lit and displayed in the West icon display section and the East icon display section in the presentation of the road to the decisive battle or the presentation of the road to the final battle is the same as the above-mentioned "second half icon display". It is equivalent to "the number of

(Direction of confrontation reach)
Next, a description will be given of the production of the "fight reach". FIGS. 223 and 224 are examples of display images for explaining effects of confrontation ready-to-win in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

223 and 224, an example of the effect corresponding to the ready-to-win effect patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14 (see FIG. 200) in which confrontation ready-to-win is performed after eight character icons are displayed will be described.

FIG. 223(a) is an example of a display image when confrontation reach is started. As shown in FIG. 223(a) (and FIG. 221(h)), the character image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the production of the road to the decisive battle and the road to the decisive battle continues in the upper display area 7a. is displayed as

FIG. 223(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is converted into the number of support icons displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the display device 7. . Note that the decorative pattern is moved slightly to the lower right of the display area of the display device 7 so as not to impair the performance of the character.

FIG. 223(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons is converted to the number of support icons and displayed. As shown in FIG. 223(b), the upper display area 7a displays a text image indicating eight character icons, "Concentration of 8 characters", converted to "Support x 8" as the number of support icons. An image is rendered. In addition, when the text image indicating the number of 9 character icons is displayed in the upper display area 7a, the display is converted and displayed to the number of support icons, ie, "Support x 9". An image rendering will be performed.

FIG. 223(c) is a display image when an enemy character appears, and is an example of a display image when 8 character icons are converted into 8 support icons following FIG. 223(b). is.

FIG. 223(d) is a display image when the ally character is facing off against the enemy character, and is an example of the display image when the support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a. As shown in FIG. 223(d), the upper display area 7a displays a character image of "PUSH" for prompting the player to operate the production button device 6310, and a A support icon consisting of a face image (for example, the face of General A of the Western Army) corresponding to the displayed character icon is displayed.

FIG. 224(e) is a display image when the friend character is facing off against the enemy character, and when the effect button device 6310 is operated and a predetermined effect result is displayed in the upper display area 7a. is an example of a display image of . In FIG. 224(e), when the support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a, the effect button device 6310 is operated, and the characters "opportunity" are displayed as a predetermined effect result. It should be noted that what is displayed as the predetermined result is not limited to "opportunity", but is based on the support icon display scenario (see FIG. 207), "line", "opportunity", "extreme heat", "LED , 'great battle icon' can be displayed.

FIG. 224(f) is a display image when the ally character is facing off against the enemy character, when the effect button device 6310 is operated and the "great battle icon" is displayed in the upper display area 7a. is an example of a display image of . After the display shown in FIG. 224(f) is performed, the effect of the big decisive battle ready-to-win is performed.

FIG. 224(g) is an example of a display image when the support icon disappears and the ally character confronts the enemy character and displays the final result. As shown in FIG. 224(h-1), if the ally character wins, it is a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 224(h-2), if the ally character is defeated, it is a loss.

In addition, in FIGS. 223 and 224, an example of the production corresponding to the ready-to-reach production patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14 in which the confrontation reach is performed has been described. The same is true for the effects of other ready-to-win effects patterns (see FIG. 200).

In this way, the production of the showdown reach of the present embodiment can be performed by the number of character icons collected until the showdown reach (production of the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle), and the operation production can be performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Production of lotus flower announcement)
Next, the rendering of the "lotus flower notice" will be described. FIG. 225 is an example of a display image for explaining the performance of the lotus flower notice in the sixth pachinko game machine.

With reference to FIG. 225, an example of the lotus flower foretelling effect corresponding to the lotus flower success foretelling foretelling effect pattern (see FIG. 208) will be described.

FIG. 225(a) is an example of a display image when buds are displayed in advance variation in the "golden hour mode" which is a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 225 (a), in the "golden hour mode" which is a high probability non-time-saving game state, the character image "golden hour" showing the golden hour mode and the right-handed state A count display image "Tama" for counting the total number of game balls paid out after entering the 1st prize winning opening 6131 and the second prize winning opening 6151, and an operation instruction image "Tama" for right-hand hitting. "Right shot" is displayed.

FIG. 225(b) is an example of a display image when buds continue to be displayed even though the prior variation has ended. In addition, the buds continuously displayed from the prior fluctuation are also continuously displayed at the start of the fluctuation of the relevant fluctuation.

Here, the bud continuously displayed from the preliminary variation is continuously displayed from the preliminary variation to the small winning game state to the variation even if the preliminary variation is a variation corresponding to the small winning. Therefore, in the production of the lotus flower notice of the present embodiment, the lotus flower can be continuously drawn without interrupting the production by the small winning game state that is easily shifted when the game ball enters the second start port 6140. You can enjoy the flower notice.

FIG. 225(c) is an example of a display image when the buds are opened and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started. It is suggested that the opening of this bud develops into the “door opening effect” shown in FIG. 225(d).

In FIG. 225, an example of the lotus flower notice effect corresponding to the lotus flower success notice notice effect pattern has been described. The same applies to the performance of the flower notice of the flower.

(Direction of battle reach)
Next, the production of the "battle reach" will be described. FIGS. 226 and 227 are examples of display images for explaining effects of battle ready-to-win in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

226 and 227, the final operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes to the first pattern production pattern 3, 4, 8, 9 (see FIG. 201) in the fourth operation mode or the fifth operation mode. An example of the production of the corresponding battle reach will be described.

FIG. 226(a) is an example of a display image of a button promotion chance effect that is performed when battle reach is started. In battle reach, it is possible to perform button promotion chance production first.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), above the display area of the display device 7, "button operation icons" indicating the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 are scrolled from left to right. In addition, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, an "effect button state image" indicating the state of the current operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is displayed.

FIG. 226(b) is an example of a display image when the button operation icon is stopped and displayed and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is changed.

As shown in FIG. 226(b), in the upper display area 7a, the button operation icon of "Lv 3 consecutive hits" indicating the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is stopped and displayed. Correspondingly, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, the effect button state image showing the state of the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is changed and displayed.

FIG. 226(c) is an example of a display image when a friendly character and an enemy boss are facing each other.

As shown in FIG. 226(c), in the upper display area 7a, the button operation icon of "Lv 3 successive hits" indicating the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is continuously displayed.

FIG. 226(d) is an example of a display image when the ally character's attack hits the enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 226(d), when the ally character's attack hits the enemy boss, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a rises by one level to indicate the fourth operation mode of the effect button device 6310. It changes to the button operation icon of "Lv4 blow" and is displayed. Note that if the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy boss, or if the enemy boss attacks the ally character, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a does not change.

FIG. 227(e) is an example of a display image when the operation mode of the production button device 6310 is changed following FIG. 226(d).

As shown in FIG. 226(e), since the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a has changed to the button operation icon for "Lv4 blow", the effect button is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7. The effect button state image showing the state of the fourth operation mode of the device 6310 is changed and displayed.

FIG. 227(f-1) shows the case where the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy boss is repeated, the operation mode of the production button device 6310 finally becomes the fourth operation mode, and the player operates the production button device 6310. is an example of a display image of .

FIG. 227(f-2) shows the case where the confrontation between the friend character and the enemy boss is repeated, the operation mode of the production button device 6310 finally becomes the fifth operation mode, and the player operates the production button device 6310. is an example of a display image of .

In FIG. 227(g-1), the player operates the production button device 6310 from the state of FIG. 227(f-1) or FIG. is an example of a display image showing that the has fallen (not shown) and has resulted in a big hit.

In FIG. 227(g-2), the player operates the production button device 6310 from the state of FIG. 227(f-1) or FIG. is an example of a display image indicating that the is not dropped (not shown) and is lost.

Incidentally, in FIGS. 226 and 227, an example of the battle ready-to-win production corresponding to the first pattern production patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 was explained, but the first pattern production patterns 2 and 7 (see FIG. 201) The same applies to the production of the corresponding battle reach.

In this way, the effect of the battle reach of the present embodiment changes the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 according to the result of the effect content, so the effect that the player will directly operate from now on. A change in the operation mode of the button device 6310 (growth of the effect button) can arouse a new interest, and the game can be made more interesting.

[8-11. Configuration of operation presentation time and reception time]
Next, the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle, reception time of the performance button device 6310, etc. will be described. FIG. 228 is an example of a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation effect time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the effect button device in the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 228(1) is a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle.

As shown in FIG. 228(1), one operation time of the effect button device 6310 in the effect of the road to the decisive battle consists of 3 seconds for reception and 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result. The "operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the performance button device 6310 can be operated five times. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310 is reduced by a "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "operation production time for the road to the decisive battle" ends. It is suggesting. This also applies to the production of the road to the final battle, although the number of operations differs.

Further, when the performance button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, a predetermined icon is continuously displayed from the time of operation until the end of the display time, and the performance button device 6310 is operated within the reception time. Otherwise, a predetermined icon will be displayed from the end of the reception time to the end of the display time.

When the effect button device 6310 is operated within such reception time, the reception time ends and a predetermined image is displayed (predetermined effect is performed) from the time of operation. The production is called "one-time operation production", and the same applies to the production of the road to the decisive battle.

FIG. 228(2a) is a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the acceptance time of the one-time operation effect.

As shown in FIG. 228(2a), the reception time of the effect button device 6310 for the one-time operation effect is the first period (for example, 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately after the start of the reception time. The operation of the effect button device 6310 is invalidated during the second period (for example, 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately before the end of the reception time, which is set as the “start invalid period” during which the operation of the device 6310 is determined to be invalid. It is set as the "end invalid period" for determination, and the "valid period" for determining that the operation of the effect button device 6310 is valid is set between the "start invalid period" and the "end invalid period".

As shown in FIG. 228(2b), even if the period immediately before the start of the reception time is set as the "start invalid period" without including the "start invalid period" and the "end invalid period" in the reception time. Alternatively, the period immediately after the reception time ends may be set as the "end invalid period". In this case, the reception time corresponds to the "effective time" as it is.

On the other hand, even if the performance button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, the reception time does not end and the performance button device 6310 can be operated a plurality of times within the reception time. For example, button challenge notice, door opening effect, battle reach when the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally becomes the third operation mode (Lv 3 consecutive hits, etc.)”, the reception time configuration is different.

FIG. 228(3) is a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the acceptance time of the continuous hit operation effect.

As shown in FIG. 228(3), "start invalid period", "end invalid period", and "effective period (initial)" are set in the acceptance time of the continuous-hit operation effect because of the one-time operation effect. It is the same as the structure of reception hours.

Then, when the effect button device 6310 is operated within the "effective period (initial)", the sub CPU 301 sets the "operation invalid period" for determining that the operation of the effect button device 6310 is invalid for a predetermined period after the operation. is newly set by

This "operation invalid period" is set to a different period by the sub CPU 301 according to the content of the effect triggered by the operation of the effect button device 6310. FIG. For example, when the effect progresses, the effect button device 6310 vibrates, and a third period (eg, 5 frames, 5/60 seconds, etc.) is set as the "operation invalid period". On the other hand, when the effect does not progress, the effect button device 6310 does not vibrate, and a fourth period shorter than the third period (for example, 4 frames, 4/4 frames) is set as the “operation invalid period”. 60 seconds, etc.) is set.

In this way, in the continuous hitting operation effect, different periods are set according to the effect contents triggered by the operation of the effect button device 6310, so that the effect contents triggered by the operation of the effect button device 6310 are reliably performed. be able to.

[8-12. Signals output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the sixth pachinko machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 generates “external information 1” to “external information 8” in the gaming state designation parameter setting process, and sends the generated “external information 1” to “external information 8” to the external terminal board 184. will output. The external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8 ”, “prize information 2” and “security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 229 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. In the sixth pachinko game machine, similarly to the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 65), from each CH, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8”, “prize ball information 2” and “security” are output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. However, the sixth pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in part in the output condition of the signal of "external information 3" output from the connector CH3. Output conditions and the like for "external information 3" will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 229, "external information 3" is "output during all jackpots, during probability variation and time reduction" as in the first pachinko machine, and "variation started during probability variation" A new output condition of "output until the end of the variation of the special symbol" is added.

Here, in the "simultaneous variation machine" in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, a specification consisting of a high-accuracy short-time gaming state, a high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state, and a low-accuracy short-time gaming state Although the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started from the game state, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, the game is played with the special symbol whose variable display has ended first. An error case may occur in which the state is shifted to the normal game state, and the special symbol whose variable display ends later is judged to be a big hit, loss, etc. in the normal game state. By adding the above-mentioned new output conditions to the "external information 3", the occurrence of the above error case is eliminated, and in the "simultaneous variation machine", the number of big wins and the number of consecutive games that became a big win triggered by the specific game state etc. can be measured accurately. This will be specifically explained by taking the timing chart of the signal of "external information 3" as an example.

FIG. 230 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "external information 3" among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 230 vertically illustrates the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol, the output and stop of the external information 3, and the transition of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, which is one of the specific gaming states, the first special symbol starts the variable display of the 119th rotation after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Thereafter, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the second special symbol starts variable display in the 120th rotation after the end of the jackpot game state.

The variable display of the second special symbol is finished before the first special symbol is displayed, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the second special symbol is stopped, the game state shifts from the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state to the normal game state.

The first special symbol is displayed variably from the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, but it is stopped and displayed in the normal game state.

The external information 3 is a first special symbol according to a new output condition that "output until the end of the variation of the special symbol that started the variation during the probability variation" even if the high probability non-time-saving gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state. Output continues until the variable display of is completed.

As a result, even if the first special symbol of the 119th rotation results in a big win, the number of big wins triggered by the specific game state can be counted.

Thus, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as described with reference to FIG. (See FIG. 177) etc. are organically related, and at the end of all the jackpot game states, the expectation of the jackpot is high. When the state ends and the expectation of the big hit consecutive house is lowered, it is shifted to "(second half) high probability non-time-saving game state: small hit RUSH", and the shifted "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state: small hit RUSH". , it is possible to anticipate the payout of the game balls and also the big hit of the second special symbol that guarantees the transition to the next big win game state, thereby creating unprecedented game characteristics and making the game more enjoyable. Interest can be improved.

Further, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as explained in FIG. 198 and the like, when the yakuza icon is displayed by carrying out the cherry blossom accumulation notice, it develops into the production of the road to the ultimate battle, and the pseudo-continuous production is performed. When 5 character icons are collected by doing this, it develops into the production of the road to the decisive battle. Then, when it develops into the production of the road to the ultimate battle or the production of the road to the decisive battle, it is possible to execute the same type of specific production (the production aiming to collect 10 character icons). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by associating various effects with each other.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko machine, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is a step effect in which the cherry blossoms are accumulated step by step, and a predetermined number of "character icons" or "gangster icons" are displayed by releasing the accumulated cherry blossoms. It is composed of an icon display effect that displays Then, the step effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the pre-variation and the variation, and the icon display effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable in the variation. In addition, the step effect of cherry blossom accumulation notice is set so that the more cherry blossoms are accumulated, the higher the degree of expectation for the display of the "gangster icon" and the greater the number of "character icons" to be displayed.
For this reason, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" of the present embodiment gradually improves the expectation of the game by developing staged effects over the advance variation and the variation (or only with the variation). The display result can also arouse the interest of the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "pseudo continuous effect" is such that when any one of a plurality of character icons stops, a pseudo continuous effect is performed, and one or more character icons are displayed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. It is possible to collect. And when five character icons are collected, it develops into the production of the road to the decisive battle. Further, the content of future games is suggested by the number of character icons to be collected, the types of character icons, the order of character icon collection (display order), and the like.
For this reason, the "pseudo-continuous effect" of the present embodiment is not only determined whether or not re-change is performed, but also the number of character icons displayed at the time of re-change, the type of character icons, and the display order of character icons. It is possible to give a new interest to the game, etc., and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "production of the road to the decisive battle" and the "production of the road to the decisive battle" are executed by the player's operation of the production button device 6310 until the predetermined time is over. It is a production that allows you to aim to collect character icons. And when 10 character icons are collected, it develops into a big decisive battle reach with the highest expectation of a big win. Further, it is also possible to suggest future contents of the game based on the number of character icons to be collected, the types of character icons, the order in which character icons are collected (display order), and the like.
For this reason, the "production of the road to the decisive battle" and the "production of the road to the decisive battle" of the present embodiment prompt the player to actively participate in the game (operation of the production button device 6310), and the game can be played more effectively. It is possible to improve the interest of

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "confrontation reach" converts the character icons collected up to the confrontation reach (production of the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle) into support icons, and a production button device. By operating 6310, it is possible to produce an effect using a support icon.
Therefore, in the "fight reach" of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an operation effect using the icons collected up to the fight reach, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko machine, the "lotus flower notice" is configured to be executable over the prior variation and the variation, and even if the prior variation is a variation corresponding to a small hit, the prior variation to the small It is configured to be displayed continuously over the winning game state to the variation.
For this reason, the "lotus flower notice" of the present embodiment is a small hit game state that easily shifts when the game ball enters the second start port 6140, so that the lotus flower can be continuously drawn without interrupting the production. You can enjoy the flower notice.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, "battle reach" is an effect in which the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is changed according to the result of the content of the effect.
For this reason, the "battle reach" of the present embodiment arouses new interest in the change in the operation mode of the production button device 6310 (growth of the production button) that the player will directly operate from now on, and makes the game more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of

(others)
The sixth pachinko game machine described above can apply each other's techniques to each embodiment including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Also, the effects described in the sixth pachinko game machine are merely enumerations of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the sixth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancies in its game characteristics and control.

[9. Seventh pachinko machine]
Next, the seventh pachinko game machine will be explained. The seventh pachinko machine, like the third pachinko machine, is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind machine. The seventh pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of game playability, presentation contents, and the like, and along with this, some of the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are also different.

It should be noted that the seventh pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the second special symbol than the starting condition of the first special symbol It is a priority variation machine in which the starting condition of the special symbol is preferentially established. However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

Hereinafter, in describing the seventh pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine are denoted by the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and detailed description of the configuration and processing will be omitted.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, "a game ball is entered" at a ball entrance (for example, a start opening or a big winning opening) that can provide a player with a predetermined profit (payout of a game ball, transition of a game state). "Playing the ball" is also referred to as "winning" as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the “variable display” of the symbols includes, for example, both “variable display” in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner and “stopped display” in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display".

[9-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 231, the game board unit 7010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 7010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 231 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 7010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine. The game board unit 7010 includes a game panel 7100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 7100, and on the front side surface of the game panel 7100, there is a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow. formed.

As shown in FIG. 231, the game board unit 7010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine mainly includes a passage gate 7126, a second start port 7140, a normal electric The structure and arrangement of the role product unit 7145, the first special electric role product unit 7130, and the second special electric role product unit 7150 are different. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

In addition, the first start port 7120 arranged in the game area 105 of the seventh pachinko game machine is functionally common to the first start port 120 arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. However, due to the relationship with the second start port 7140, a different code from the first pachinko game machine will be used to explain again.

(passage gate)
The passage gate 7126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 7145, which will be described later, in the right area 107, and allows passage of a game ball hit to the right (difficult or impossible passage of a game ball hit to the left). ing. The passage gate 7126 is provided with a passage gate switch 7127 (see later-described FIG. 232) for detecting passage of a game ball to the passage gate 7126 .

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126, it will be used for normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination processing) and normal symbol variable display. In this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passage gate 7126, no prize ball is paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

Also, the passage gate 7126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating (that the special symbol for the big hit is stopped and displayed), the accessory continuous operating device is operated by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 7126, and the big win game state. You may make it shift to .

(First start port)
The first starting port 7120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit left-handed to enter, and a game ball hit right-handed by a game nail or the like to enter. Configured to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 7120 is provided with a first starting port switch 7121 (see FIG. 232 described later) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first starting port 7120 .

When the game ball enters the first start port 7120, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination processing), the variable display of the first special symbol, the prize balls for the first start port (for example, 3 game balls) are paid out. The processing after the game ball enters the first starting port 7120 will be described later in detail.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 7140 is located in the right region 107 and below (downstream side) a passage gate 7126 described later, and is provided in a normal electric accessory unit 7145 described later, and is a game ball hit to the right. is possible to enter (a game ball hit left is difficult or impossible to enter). The second starting port 7140 is provided with a second starting port switch 7141 (see later-described FIG. 232) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7140 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second starting port 7140 is arranged below (downstream side) of the passage gate 7126, so that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 7126 is operating, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 7140.

When the game ball enters the second start port 7140, the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination processing), the variable display of the second special symbol, the prize ball for the second start port (for example, 1 game balls) are paid out. The processing after the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 will be described later in detail.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 7145 is arranged in the right area 107 below (downstream side) the passage gate 7126, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric accessory unit 7145 is a unit body that integrates the second start port 7140, the second start port switch 7141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start port 7140, and the normal electric accessory 7146. is.

The normal electric accessory 7146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 7147 for normal electric power that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for normal electric power 7148 (see FIG. 232 described later) for operating the shutter 7147 for normal electric power. The ordinary electric accessory 7146, that is, the ordinary electric shutter 7147, has an open state in which a game ball can enter the second start port 7140 or is easy to enter, and a game ball cannot or cannot enter the second start port 7140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states.

Specifically, the general electric shutter 7147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed near the entrance of the second start port 7140 and a flat plate-like ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second start port 7140. consists of When the general electric shutter 7147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry preventing portion is positioned in a region facing the entrance of the second start port 7140 and prevents the ball from entering the second start port 7140. , the plate-shaped ball-entering guide part is buried in the surface of the game panel 7100 and allows the game ball to flow downward without receiving the game ball flowing down to the right region 107 . On the other hand, when the general electric shutter 7147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion is positioned in the avoidance area not facing the entrance of the second start port 7140 to prevent the ball from entering the second start port 7140. Without hindrance, the flat plate-like entrance guide part protrudes from the surface of the game panel 7100 , receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107 , and guides the received game ball to the second start port 7140 . Note that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 7147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 7146 is in the open state of the second start port 7140, when the game ball of the specified number (for example, 1) for the normal electric enters, the opening time has not passed. Both cause the second starting port 7140 to be closed.

(First special electric accessories unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 7130 is arranged below (downstream side) the passage gate 7126, the normal electric accessory unit 7145, and the second special electric accessory unit 7150 described later in the right area 107. The first special electric accessory unit 7130 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passage gate 7126, the normal electric accessory unit 7145, and the second special electric accessory unit 7150, which will be described later. It may be provided in the left region 106 .

The first special electric accessory unit 7130 includes a first big winning hole 7131 and a first big winning hole count switch 7132 (see FIG. 232 described later) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 7131. , a first special electric shutter 7134 that can move back and forth, and a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see FIG. 232 described later) that operates the first special electric shutter 7134 are integrated.

The first big winning hole 7131 is a winning hole that is opened at the time of a big win, and the maximum winning number (for example, 7 individual) are stipulated. Each time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 7131, prize balls for the first big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The transition of the first big winning port 7131 from the closed state to the open state is the first route when a special stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. , The second big winning port 7151 is opened by deriving a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "small hit", and the game entered into the opened second big winning port 7151 It is the time of the second route when the ball enters the V winning hole in the second big winning hole 7151 .

The first special electric shutter 7134 is operated by a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see FIG. 232 described later) to open a state in which a game ball can or easily enter the first large winning opening 7131. A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning opening 7131 can be transitioned to.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 7134 is configured by an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivotally supported. When the first special electric shutter 7134 is in an open state, the opening/closing door falls down to the front side, the first big winning opening 7131 opens, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and receives the received game ball. Guide to the 1st prize winning opening 7131 . On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted to close the first big winning port 7131, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning port 7131. Become.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 7150 is provided below (downstream side) the passage gate 7126 and the normal electric accessory unit 7145 in the right area 107 . The second special electric accessory unit 7150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passage gate 7126 or the normal electric accessory unit 7145, or may be provided in the left region 106.

The second special electric role product unit 7150 includes a second big prize winning port 7151 opened so that game balls can enter inside the second special electric role product unit 7150, and a game ball to the second big prize winning port 7151. A second special electric shutter 7154 capable of opening and closing the second large winning opening 7151, and a second special electric shutter 7154 that operates to activate the second large winning opening count switch 7152 that detects the entry of a ball. A second special electric solenoid 7155 (see FIG. 232 described later) that opens and closes the winning opening 7151, a V winning opening 7156 through which the game ball entering the second big winning opening 7151 can pass, and a game ball in the V winning opening 7156 A V winning opening switch 7157 that detects passing, a losing opening 7158 through which a game ball that has not entered the V winning opening 7156 among the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 7151 can pass, and a V winning opening 7156 and a V-shutter solenoid 7160 (see later-described FIG. 232) that operates the V-shutter 7159 to open and close the V-winning opening 7156 are integrated.

The second big winning hole 7151 is a winning hole that is opened at the time of a small win. stipulated. Each time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 7151, prize balls for the second big winning hole (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 7154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second large prize winning port 7151 by advancing, and a second special electric shutter 7154 is retracted backward to allow the game ball to enter the second large prize winning port 7151. It is configured so that the ball can transition between a possible or easy open state.

The V winning opening 7156 is a winning opening that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 7159, and is a winning opening that triggers control to the jackpot game state via the above-described second route when the game ball passes through.

When the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 7151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 is regarded as the first round, and the game ball to the V winning hole 7156 (after the second round), a round game is executed to shift the first big winning port 7131 from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, even after the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 (after the second round), the second big winning opening 7151 changes from the closed state to the open state. A transitional round game may be played for a predetermined number of rounds.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the first big winning opening 7131, etc., one V winning opening and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating the "small win" is derived, the first big winning hole 7131 is opened, and the game ball enters the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 7131. is entered, the jackpot game state (jackpot game state through the second route) may be controlled.

The losing hole 7158 is configured such that a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 7151 but has not passed through the V winning hole 7156 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss port 7158 is discharged out of the machine. In addition, all of the game balls that have entered the second big winning opening 7151 pass through the losing opening 7158, and if there is no passing of the gaming ball to the V winning opening 7156, the game ends without being controlled to the big winning game state. becomes.

The V shutter 7159 is operated by a V shutter solenoid 7160 (see FIG. 232 to be described later) to switch between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156, and a game opening to the V winning opening 7156. It is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the ball can (or easily) pass through.

[9-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 232, the control circuit of the seventh pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 232 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 232, the seventh pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 , a payout/fire control circuit 400 , and a power supply circuit 450 .

However, the seventh pachinko game machine is partially different in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 compared to the first pachinko game machine. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

[9-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 7148, a first special electric solenoid 7135, a second special electric solenoid 7155, and a V shutter solenoid 7160 connected to the main control circuit 200 compared to the first pachinko game machine. , 1st starting opening switch 7121, 2nd starting opening switch 7141, passage gate switch 7127, 1st big winning opening count switch 7132, 2nd big winning opening counting switch 7152, V winning opening switch 7157 are partially different. there is

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 7148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 7147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 7148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 7147 advances forward to open the second start port 7140 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 7148 . If not (if it is OFF), the general electric shutter 7147 is retracted rearward to close the second starting port 7140 .

(No. 1 special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 7135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 7134 consisting of an open/close door. When the first special electric solenoid 7135 is energized (turned ON) by the main CPU 201 , the first special electric shutter 7134 is tilted forward to open the first prize winning opening 7131 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the first special electric solenoid 7135 . If it is not performed (if it is OFF), the first special electric shutter 7134 is inverted backward to close the first big prize winning opening 7131 .

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 7155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 7154 . When the second special electric solenoid 7155 is energized (turned ON) by the main CPU 201 , it causes the second special electric shutter 7154 to move backward to open the second big prize winning opening 7151 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 7155 . is not performed (if it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 7154 is moved forward to close the second big prize winning opening 7151 .

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 7160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 7159 . When the main CPU 201 energizes (turns ON) the V shutter solenoid 7160, the V shutter 7159 moves backward to open the V winning port 7156. If the main CPU 201 does not energize the V shutter solenoid 7160 ( If it is OFF), the V shutter 7159 is moved forward to close the V prize opening 7156 . Further, in this embodiment, the V-shutter solenoid 7160 operates in conjunction with the opening of the second big winning opening 7151 to open the V winning opening 7156 . That is, the V winning opening 7156 is in an open state from the time of opening the second large winning opening 7151, and when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 7151, it passes through the V winning opening 7156 as a general rule.

(First start switch)
The first starting port switch 7121 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the first starting port 7120 .

When the first starting port switch 7121 detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 7120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first starting condition is satisfied, and determines that the first special symbol starting information (jackpot determination random number for use, random number for design, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.). The obtained start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (first special symbol start storage area (1) to first are stored in the special symbol start storage area (4) in order), and the first special symbol determination start condition (for example, the special electric accessory is not operating, the special symbol is not variablely displayed, etc.) is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 7120 is detected by the first start hole switch 7121, the main CPU 201 performs payout processing of the prize balls for the first start hole (for example, three game balls). to the payout/launch control circuit 400 .

(Second starting switch)
The second starting port switch 7141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7140 .

When the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 7140 is detected by the second starting port switch 7141, the main CPU 201 assumes that the second starting condition is satisfied, and determines that the second special symbol starting information (jackpot determination). random number for use, random number for design, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.). The acquired second special symbol start information is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (second special symbol start storage area (1) to second stored in the special symbol start storage area (3) in order), and the second special symbol determination start condition (for example, the special electric accessory is not operating, the special symbol variable display is not performed, etc.) is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 7140 is detected by the second start hole switch 7141, the main CPU 201 performs the payout process of the prize ball for the second start hole (for example, one game ball). to the payout/launch control circuit 400 .

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is "lottery of the first special symbol", and the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is selected. The hit determination process is also called "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively called "special symbol lottery".

(Passing gate switch)
Pass gate switch 7127 is a penetration type proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to pass gate 7126 .

When the passage gate switch 7127 detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126, the main CPU 201 acquires normal symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol random number, etc.). The acquired normal symbol start information is stored in the normal symbol start storage area (normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4) of the main RAM 203 up to "the number of normal symbols held (for example, 4)". ), and when the normal pattern judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric accessory is not operating, the normal pattern variable display is not performed, etc.) is established, the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern hit judgment processing) and normal symbols will be used for variable display. Even if the passage gate switch 7127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126, the prize ball is not paid out.

(1st big prize mouth count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 7132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 7131 . When the first big winning hole count switch 7132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 7131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of winning game balls into the first big winning hole 7131 per round. At the same time, the payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole.

(Second big prize mouth count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 7152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 7151 . When the second big winning hole count switch 7152 detects the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole 7151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of winning game balls into the second big winning hole 7151, The payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) for the big winning opening.

(V prize opening switch)
The V winning opening switch 7157 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 7156 . When the V winning opening switch 7157 detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 7156, the main CPU 201 performs transition control to the jackpot game state. Even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 7156 is detected by the V winning opening switch 7157, the winning ball is not paid out.

[9-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, and a command input port 308, as in the first pachinko game machine. is common, but the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and an effect button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54 . That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54 . The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 according to the drive command from the sub CPU 301 .

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal relating to the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 . The button control circuit 310 outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301 when an operation signal is input from the performance button 54 .

[9-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 233 to 245, the basic specifications of the seventh pachinko game machine will be described. Incidentally, the seventh pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function is omitted below.

In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, although variable probability control is not executed, a time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared. It is possible to progress the game in. In addition, in this seventh pachinko game machine, the variable probability control is not executed, but this is not essential. good.

In this embodiment, in a general normal game state (first normal game state described later), as a rule, left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, and in A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is a regular game. It is considered as a mode. In addition, when the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state are not distinguished, the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state are simply referred to as "time saving game state". The sub CPU 301 displays, for example, in the display area of the display device 7 how to play the regular game mode.

[9-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 233 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. Incidentally, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 233 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big win", "minor win" or "losing".

In the special symbol hit determination table, as data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the first start port 7120, there is a big hit determined as a "big hit" or "losing". The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random number value and the corresponding win/lose judgment value data (big hit judgment value data, loss judgment value data) is defined. In addition, as the data used in the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 7140, the data for big hit determination determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" The relationship between the range (width) of the random number and the corresponding win/lose determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. Incidentally, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

As shown in FIG. 233, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 7120, the main CPU 201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol big hit determination random number value. The result of the special pattern hit determination process is determined as "big hit" at a selection rate of about 1/199.8, and otherwise determined as "losing". In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the main CPU 201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number for judging the big hit of the second special symbol. The result of the processing is determined as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/199.8, a "minor win" with a selection rate of about 1/3.0, and otherwise determined as a "loss".

It should be noted that the range (width) of the random numbers determined as the "jackpot", that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above values, and can be freely changed in design as appropriate.

Further, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, it may be configured so that the "small hit" is determined. It is possible to set a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, without moving to the big hit game state, the time saving game state (C time saving game state) is directly transferred to the "time saving hit". ” may be determined.

Also, when the seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of the big win and/or the small win should be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. However, even if the seventh pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving is set to be a common probability for all settings.

Alternatively, instead of changing the selection rate of the big win or the selection rate of the small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or the opening time of the V winning mouth 7156 is changed for each set value, and the V winning mouth 7156 You may change the passage rate to , or change the number of continuous time-savings for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big hit, the probability of a small hit, the frequency of opening the V winning opening 7156 (that is, the frequency of operation of the second special electric shutter 7154), the opening time, and the number of times of continuous time reduction By adopting one or two or more of, the expected value controlled to the big hit game state may be configured so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[9-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 234 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table for determining "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" which determine the stop symbol of the special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

The "selection symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbol is a winning, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the symbol to be displayed in a stopped state.

In the special symbol determination table, the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data, and the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 7120 or the second start port 7140 is defined in association with the "selected pattern command" and the "designated pattern command". The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 89. Sometimes, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. '<'z1'.

In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 19, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command. "z3" is determined, and "zA3" is determined as the design designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 20 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. ”=“z5”<“z4”.

Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 19, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command. "z6" is determined as the symbol designation command, and "zA4" is determined as the design designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 20 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Thus, in this embodiment, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. z6"="z8"<"z7".

The range of special symbol random number values for determining the "selected symbol command", that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above values, and can be freely changed in design as appropriate.

Also, although the description is omitted for the seventh pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described for the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table determines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 232) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a table referred to when making decisions according to In addition, the first special symbol display portion 163 and the second special symbol display portion 164 display a big hit stop mode, a small win stop mode, or a losing stop mode based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. be. The program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 also stores a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine.

[9-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 235 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 235 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The hit type determination table is a table for determining the operation contents of the hit, and includes "mode of big win game state", "mode of small win game state" and "mode of subsequent game state (time saving flag, A time saving end condition). is a table that determines .

As shown in FIG. 235, the hit type determination table responds to the selection symbol command with "a mode of the big win game state", "a mode of the small win game state" and "a mode of the subsequent game state (time saving flag, A Time saving end condition)” is associated.

"Open mode of big win game state" indicates an open mode of the first big winning opening 7131 opened in the big win game state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) and the closing time (for example, 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot gaming state are defined in advance, and the opening mode of the first big winning port 7131 is as follows. It shows the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state. The maximum opening time for each round may be varied, or the closing time (round interval time) for each round may be determined differently. Furthermore, the number of times of opening and the opening time may be determined so that the first big prize winning opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

In addition, the "open mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected symbol command z6 to 8" of the small win of the second special symbol entered the second big winning port 7151 opened in the small win game state. This is an open mode when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 and shifts to the big hit game state via the second route. When the transition to the jackpot game state through this second route, the opening of the second big prize opening 7151 at the time of the small hit game state is set as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 (2 rounds After the second), a round game is executed to open the first big winning hole 7131 . In addition, when the game ball entering the second big winning opening 7151 opened in the small winning game state does not pass through the V winning opening 7156, it does not shift to the big winning game state, and the mode of the game state after that does not change. It will not be decided.

"Open mode of small winning game state" indicates the opening mode of the second big winning opening 7151 that is opened during the small winning game state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) and the closing time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning game state are defined in advance, and the maximum in the small winning game state Indicates the number of openings. It should be noted that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined differently, or the closing time for each number of times of opening may be determined differently.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (for example, 5R x 7 (first specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 525) The total number of game balls that can be put out in the winning game state (for example, 1 small win x 10 (second specified number) x 10 (number of prize balls) = 100) is set smaller, and the big win is set. It can be said that the game state is an advantageous "first special game state", and the small win game state is a "second special game state" with a lower profit than the big win game state.

In addition, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the small winning game state is set shorter than the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) in one round in the big winning game state. , the first big winning opening 7131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and the second big winning opening 7151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. It can be said that

"Aspect of subsequent game state" indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, and indicates the setting of the "time saving flag" and "A time saving end condition". In addition, in this embodiment, according to the game state ("normal game state" or "time saving game state") at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, "time saving flag" and "A time saving end Conditions" settings are configured differently.

The "time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving game state is executed and the type of the time saving game state to be executed. ”, and the time saving flag=2 indicates “B time saving game state”. In this embodiment, although the C time saving game state is not executed, when the C time saving game state is executable, the time saving flag = 3 indicates the C time saving game state.

"A time-saving end condition" is a dedicated condition for ending the A time-saving gaming state as a time-saving gaming state, and in the A time-saving gaming state, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed. The total number of times "special design total time reduction number" and the total number of times the second special design is displayed in a reduced time game state "time reduction number of second special design" By establishing either, A After the time-saving game state is terminated, the normal game state is entered.

In addition, in all the time-saving game states (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state), as a "time-saving common end condition", it is set as a condition to shift to a big winning game state or a small winning game state. Therefore, in the A time saving game state, when the "A time saving end condition" is established or the "time saving common end condition" is established, the time saving game state is ended and the normal game state is entered.

Here, as the "A time saving end condition", in addition to the "time saving number of times of the second special design", the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special design is also accumulated "special design total time saving number of times" is also a condition, In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the starting information of the first special symbol may be stored up to the number of reserved first special symbols (for example, four), and the normal game state. This is to avoid the phenomenon that the profit in the time saving game state corresponding to the "time saving number of times of the second special symbol" cannot be received when shifting to the time saving game state from. For this reason, the "special symbol total number of time reductions" is at least the safe number of times (for example, 2 times).

In this way, in addition to the "second special symbol time reduction number of times", even under the condition of "special symbol total time reduction number of times" in which the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol is accumulated, right-handed hitting is a regular game mode. In the time-saving gaming state, while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 7120, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 7140, so irregular games Except for the mode, the condition of "total number of times of saving time of special symbols" is not established, and the condition of "number of times of saving time of second special symbols" is satisfied, thereby ending the time saving game state.

In addition, as the "A time saving end condition", only the condition of "second special symbol time saving number" may be provided without providing the condition of "special symbol total time saving number of times".

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and determines the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state, the time saving flag and the A time saving end condition based on the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 235, in the normal game state, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selected symbol command "z1" is selected at 90%, after the big hit game state ends. As the "first A time saving end condition", "special symbol total time saving number of times" = 7 times and "second special symbol time saving number of times" = 1 time A time saving end condition is determined. Easily configured. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, after all the jackpot gaming states are finished, the "second A time-saving end condition" that is more advantageous for the player than the "first A time-saving end condition" is set as "special symbol It is configured to determine the A time-saving end condition on the condition that either "total time-saving number of times" = 11 times or "second special symbol time-saving number of times" = 5 times is established.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the A time-saving gaming state in the time-saving gaming state in more detail, "special symbol total time-saving number of times = 7" and "second special symbol time-saving number of times = 1" are determined as A time-saving end conditions. The time-saving gaming state when it is done is also called "first time-saving gaming state", and when "special symbol total time-saving number of times = 11" and "second special symbol time-saving number of times = 5" are determined as A time-saving end conditions The time saving game state is also referred to as "second time saving game state". In addition, the B time-saving gaming state is also referred to as “third time-saving gaming state”. In addition, as described above, "A time saving end condition" may be configured with only the condition of "second special symbol time saving number of times" without the condition of "special symbol total time saving number of times", The first time-saving gaming state may be a time-saving gaming state when "second special symbol time-saving number = 1" is determined, and the second time-saving gaming state is "second special symbol time-saving number = 5". It is good also as a time-saving game state when determined. Also, when the "first time-saving game state" and "second time-saving game state" are not clearly distinguished, they are also referred to as "A time-saving game state", and "A time-saving game state" and "B time-saving game state ( 3rd time-saving gaming state)” is also referred to as “time-saving gaming state”.

[9-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
Figures 236 and 237 are examples of a special symbol variation pattern table for the seventh pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 236 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 237 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. be. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 236 and 237 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation display time of the special symbol are associated with each other. Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the columns of "remarks" in FIGS. 236 and 237 show, for the sake of convenience, the design determination time of the special design, the effect execution contents, and the like, so as to be easy to understand.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 236 and 237 according to the gaming state, etc., refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, determines the type of special symbol, and the hit of the special symbol. A variation pattern of special symbols and a variation display time of special symbols are determined based on the result of determination processing, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection.

Further, when determining the variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . The variation pattern command is a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 7120, or a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 7140. It is configured to be identifiable.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 236, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) and the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. and a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236(3). In addition, the number of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the normal game state in detail, the normal game state in which the left-handed hitting is the regular game mode is referred to as "first normal game state", and when the time-saving game state ends, the main game state The normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the RAM 203 (that is, the second special stored in the time saving game state The normal game state in which the reserved number of symbols is consumed) is referred to as a "second normal game state".

The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1) is a variation pattern table that is selected during the first normal game state, and after the seventh pachinko gaming machine is backed up (that is, the initial value fluctuation pattern table) or after the special symbol fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times after the first normal game state is started (that is, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 236 (3) described later) It is a variation pattern table selected in the general effect state (after transition from T3).

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is a variation pattern table dedicated to the second special symbol that is selected during the second normal game state, and is selected during the "continuous battle" described later. It is a fluctuation pattern table.

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236 (3) is a variation pattern table selected during the first normal game state, and a predetermined number of special symbols after the first normal game state is started. This is a variation pattern table selected in a limited effect state until the variation display of is performed.

The shift relation of the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIGS. 236(1) to (3) will be described in detail later using FIG.

Here, in the first normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 7140, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined. (the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed). However, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is defined in preparation for the case where the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 irregularly.

In the special symbol variation pattern table T1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 236 (1), as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special The variable display time of the symbols is set to the same time (for example, 15000 ms). However, as will be described later, even if the variable display time of the same second special symbol, different effects are executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol design confirmation time is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hit-or-lose), but in the normal game state, the special symbol hit determination process Regardless of the result (hitting or losing), the symbol fixing time is all set to the same time (for example, 540 ms).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving gaming state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 237, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) and the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237(3), a special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237(3), and a special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237(4). In addition, the number of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the time-saving gaming state is not limited to four, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) is a variation pattern table selected at the time of the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, and a variation pattern selected at the time of "Sengoku rush chance" to be described later. is a table.

The special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237 (2) is a variation pattern table selected at times other than the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, and variation selected at the time of "Sengoku rush chance" pattern table.

Here, when other than the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, the conditions for both "time-saving number of second special symbols = 1" and "special symbol total number of time-savings = 7" are not established. Because it is limited to when the symbol is variably displayed (because when the 2nd special symbol is variably displayed, "the number of times of time reduction of the 2nd special symbol = 1" is established and becomes the final variation), the special symbol variation pattern table J2 , is a variation pattern table dedicated to the first special symbol, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is not determined.

The special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237 (3) is a variation pattern table selected at times other than the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state. ] is a variation pattern table selected when

The special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4) is a variation pattern table selected during the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state. It is a fluctuation pattern table selected for.

In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is determined in the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state, but the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be configured to determine a different variation pattern table.

The shift relation of the special symbol variation pattern tables J1-J4 in the time saving game state shown in FIGS. 237(1)-(4) will be described in detail later using FIG.

In the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 1 variable display time (for example, 200 ms) is determined, and when a big hit is achieved as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the second variable display time for which the special symbol variable display time is longer (for example, 89000 ms). In addition, at the time of the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, a design determination time (for example, 89000ms) is determined, which is a very long design determination time for special symbols.

This will be described in detail later using FIG. Since the specified number for use is set to 1, etc., in the first time-saving game state, the second special symbol hit determination process (variation display of the second special symbol) without accumulating the second special symbol reservation number can be only once.

In addition, as "A time saving end condition", "special symbol total time saving number" is set to be greater than or equal to the total number of "second special symbol time saving number" and "first special symbol holding number (for example, 4)" (See FIG. 235), at the time of the final change in the time-saving gaming state, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol. It corresponds to when it is played in an irregular game mode when the game is played.

In addition, in the variation pattern table J1 of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Although it is configured to be determined by a variable display time (for example, 200 ms), it may be configured to determine different times, or may be configured to be partially different. . For example, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the variation display time A (for example, 89000 ms) with a long variation display time of the special symbol is determined, and the hit determination process of the second special symbol is determined. If the result is a small hit, the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is determined to be a short fluctuation display time B (for example, 300 ms), and if the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss. may be configured such that the variable display time of the special symbol is determined to be extremely short variable display time C (for example, 200 ms).

In the variation pattern table J3 of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Three variable display times (eg, 2000 ms) or fourth variable display times longer than the third variable display time (eg, 5000 ms, 12000 ms) are configured to be determined. Also, in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time saving game state shown in FIG. In order to variably display the second special symbol from the next time onward, a third variable display time (for example, 2000 ms) with a short variable display time of the special symbol is determined.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Although the third variable display time or the fourth variable display time is determined, the third variable display time may be the same as the first variable display time (eg, 200ms). , the fourth variable display time may be the same as the second variable display time (for example, 89000 ms).

In the special symbol variation pattern table J4 in the time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 237 (4), the special symbol variation display time is the same as the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 237 (3). However, the variation pattern of the special symbol is configured so that the contents to be executed are different when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a loss.

In addition, at the time of the final change between the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is lost, the special symbol is determined. As the time, it is configured to determine a longer symbol fixing time (for example, 15000 ms) than when the first special symbol or the second special symbol hit determination process results in a big hit or a small hit.

Thus, in the final variation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, a long design determination time (for example, 15000 ms) is determined when the result of the special design hit determination process is a loss. The reason for this configuration is to display the game results (payouts, number of consecutive games, etc.) in the "Sengoku Time" together with the end of the "Sengoku Time", which will be described later, when a long pattern fixing time is displayed. .

[9-3-5. Transition diagram of special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 238 is an example of a transition diagram of a special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 238 performs left-handed hitting as a regular game mode in the first normal game state, and right-handed hitting as a regular game mode in the time-saving game state. An example of a time transition diagram is shown, and irregular game modes are excluded.

(Normal game state after power on after initialization)
First, in the first normal game state after power-on after initialization, as described above, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

In the first normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start hole 7140, and the game ball enters the first start hole 7120. As a result, the hit determination process of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed.

(When the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the normal game state)
In the normal game state, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, and when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined, after the big hit game state ends "second special symbol time saving number of times" = It shifts to the first time-saving game state in which one time is determined. When the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237(1) is selected.

It should be noted that, when the first time-saving gaming state, without the game ball entering the second start port 7140, if there is a reserved number of the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol shown in Figure 237 (2) When the table J2 is selected and the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 after the reserved number of the first special symbols is consumed, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) is selected. Become.

After the end of the first time-saving gaming state, the reserved number of second special symbols should not be stored as will be described later with reference to FIG. For this reason, after the first time-saving game state is completed, the state is shifted to the first normal game state. A special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in (3) is selected.

Then, when the number of times of the special symbol variation display exceeds 20 after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

(When the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time saving game state)
In the time-saving game state, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, and the selected symbol command "z1" is determined, "second special symbol time-saving number of times" = It shifts to the second time-saving game state in which 5 times are determined. In this second time-saving gaming state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237(3) is selected.

When it comes to the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4) is selected.

After the end of the second time-saving game state, it is common that the number of reserved second special symbols is stored, so after the end of the second time-saving game state, the state is shifted to the second normal game state. be. Then, during the second special symbol control period in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is selected.

After the end of the second normal game state (that is, after the reserved number of the second special symbols is consumed), the state is shifted to the first normal game state, and the variable display of the special symbols after the first normal game state is started. Until the number of times reaches 20, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236(3) is selected.

Then, when the number of times of the special symbol variation display exceeds 20 after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

(When the selected symbol command "z2 to 5" is determined)
When it is determined as a big hit as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the selected symbol command "z2" is determined, and when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the selected symbol command "z3" ~ 5" is determined, it will shift to the second time-saving game state, which is the same as when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state described above. omitted.

(When the selected pattern command "z6 to 8" is determined)
When it is determined as a small hit as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the game state is changed depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 7156. Therefore, the selected special symbol fluctuates. The pattern table will be different.

Here, as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, it is determined to be a small hit on the premise that the time-saving game state in which the game ball can enter the second start port 7140 has been controlled. . When shifting to the small winning game state, as described above, the "time saving common end condition" is established, and the time saving game state ends once (similarly when shifting to the big winning game state). Then, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156, it shifts to the big hit game state, and after the big hit game state ends, it shifts to the second time saving game state. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 7156, the game state does not shift to the jackpot game state, but shifts to the normal game state.

As a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, it is determined to be a small hit, and when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 7156, after the end of the small winning game state, the number of reserved second special symbols Since it is generally stored, after the time-saving game state is finished, the game state is shifted to the second normal game state. Then, during the second special symbol control period in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is selected.

After the end of the second normal game state (that is, after the reserved number of the second special symbols is consumed), the state is shifted to the first normal game state, and the variable display of the special symbols after the first normal game state is started. Until the number of times reaches 20, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236(3) is selected.

Then, when the number of times of the special symbol variation display exceeds 20 after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

As a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, it is determined to be a small hit, and when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156, it will shift to the second time-saving game state, so as described above. This is the same as when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state, and the description is omitted.

(When transitioning to B time-saving game state)
As will be described later, after the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (for example, 599 times) in the normal game state, it shifts to B time saving game state (third time saving game state). Here, the "B time-saving end condition" of the B time-saving gaming state is based on the condition that either "special symbol total time-saving number of times" = 11 times or "second special symbol time-saving number of times" = 5 times is established, It is set to be the same as the dedicated condition for ending the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, when shifting to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), the special symbol variation pattern table shifts in the same manner as when shifting to the second time-saving game state.

[9-3-6. Prefetch related data for special symbols]
FIG. 239 is an example of the special symbol look-ahead related data in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Here, "prediction" means that the game ball enters the first start port 7120 or the second start port 7140, and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) detects special symbol start information (random number for judging a big hit, symbol Random number, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.) is to analyze the start information of the acquired special symbol in advance than the lottery of the special symbol. Then, the analyzed information (read-ahead command) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "read-ahead effect" can be executed based on the read-ahead command.

FIG. 239(1) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to perform look-ahead according to the game state as look-ahead related data of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 239 (1), in the normal game state, both prefetching based on the starting information of the first special symbol and prefetching based on the starting information of the second special symbol can be executed. Also, in the time-saving game state, the big win game state, and the small win game state, only the look-ahead based on the starting information of the second special symbol can be executed.

FIG. 239(2) is an example of the structure of the look-ahead command as the analyzed information after analyzing the start information of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 239 (2), the look-ahead command is composed of "type of special symbol", which is the first special symbol or second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". there is

"Parameter 1" is win/lose information pre-analyzed as to whether it is a big win, a small win, or a loss based on the random number value for judging a big win, and FIG. is.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information obtained by pre-analyzing the special pattern (selected pattern) to be stopped and displayed based on the random number for judging the big hit and the random number of the pattern. is an example of a setting table for .

"Parameter 3" is the variation information obtained by pre-analyzing the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging reach, and the random number for selection of effect. 3 is an example of a setting table of No. 3.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbols from the prefetching of the start information of the special symbols to before the lottery of the special symbols based on the start information of the special symbols is performed is also referred to as "preliminary variation". . Moreover, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol lottery based on the starting information of the special symbol is performed is also called "the variation".

[9-3-7. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 240 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 240 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process. It is a table referred to when determining "hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 240, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (width) corresponds to the normal symbol hit/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol loss"). are stipulated. In addition, the random number value for hit determination of normal symbols is acquired in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 240, and determines normal symbol hit/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. , and the hit/lose determination value data of the normal design is determined as "normal design hit determination value data". In addition, when the obtained random number value for winning determination of the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol losing", and determines the winning/losing determination value data of the normal symbol to be "normal symbol losing determination value data". do.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the "normal symbol win" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/1.00, and the "normal symbol win" is more likely to be determined than the "normal symbol loss" is determined. ing. It should be noted that it is desirable to be configured to make it easier to determine "normal design hit" rather than "normal design loss" is determined, and the selection rate of "normal design hit" is limited to about 1/1.00 do not have.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be common (the probability of winning per normal symbol is common) regardless of the game state whether the normal game state or the time saving game state, but as described later. By varying the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 according to the game state, the degree of profit given to the player is varied according to the game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state whether the normal game state or the time-saving game state, the selection rate of the "normal symbol winning" is set in common, but the "normal symbol winning" is selected according to the game state. Different selectivities may be used. When the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' is varied according to the game state, the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' in the normal game state. It is desirable to configure Furthermore, depending on the type of time-saving game state in the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), "normal pattern per" may have different selectivity.

[9-3-8. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 241 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The normal design determination table determines the stop design of the normal design based on the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data of the normal design and the design random number value of the normal design obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126. It is a table referred to when selecting "normal symbol selection symbol data".

In the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241, the above-described normal symbol winning/losing determination value data ("normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol losing"), normal symbol random number value, normal symbol selection symbol data, and are defined in association with each other. Incidentally, the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is obtained from, for example, 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241, and determines the normal symbol selection symbol data based on the normal symbol winning determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol selection symbol data is selected as follows.

For example, when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol data if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 49, and selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol data. If the symbol random number is any one of 50-99, "f2" is selected as normal symbol selection symbol data. Further, when the normal symbol loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the normal symbol selection symbol data regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In particular, in the present embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the normal symbol selection symbol data, regardless of the game state, the normal symbol win-lose determination value data (normal symbol hit determination process) result) and the normal symbol random number value, the normal symbol selection symbol data is selected. Incidentally, as in the first pachinko game machine, the normal symbol selection symbol data may be selected according to the game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 240), and based on the acquired normal symbol win determination random number value, determines whether the normal symbol win/lose determination value data is displayed. is determined, and then the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 241) is referred to, and the normal symbol selection symbol data is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, on the basis of the obtained random number for hit determination of the normal design and the random number of the normal design, hit/lose determination value data of the normal design (win/lose of the normal design) and normal design selection design data are determined together. You may do so.

[9-3-9. Open pattern determination table for normal electric accessories]
FIG. 242 is an example of an opening pattern determination table for normal electric accessories in the seventh pachinko game machine. 242 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process (in the case of the normal symbol hit), according to the game state and the normal symbol selection pattern data. is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 7146 .

In the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242, game states, normal symbol selection pattern data, and normal electric accessory 7146 release patterns are defined in association with each other.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146" is the "first opening time" in the first open state of the second start port 7140, and the first closed state of the second start port 7140. , "second open time" in the second open state of the second start port 7140, "second wait time" in the second closed state of the second start port 7140, the second 2, the starting port 7140 is closed and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 is terminated. In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 is not limited to the configuration described above, and may be configured so that the open state and the closed state can be repeated three or more times, or the open state can be configured only once. may be configured. Furthermore, it may be configured to include an "opening time" for waiting for the first opening of the second starting port 7140 before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. When the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 the normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 .

According to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern (91H01H) is configured to determine a first opening time of 72 ms, no waiting time for the first time, no opening after the second time, and an ending time of 12 ms.

Further, according to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242, in the case of the normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, the second normal electric accessory is selected regardless of any normal symbol selection symbol data. 7146 opening pattern (91H02H) is configured to determine a first opening time of 5400 ms, a first waiting time of 120 ms, a second opening time of 72 ms, and an ending time of 12 ms.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessary 7146 differs depending on the game state, and in the normal game state, in the case of a normal symbol hit, the game ball enters the second start port 7140. is difficult "disadvantageous open mode (also referred to as "short open")" is determined, and in the case of normal symbol per in the time saving game state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 7140 " Advantageous opening mode (also referred to as "long opening") is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the open pattern of any normal electric accessory 7146 is activated, the specified number for normal electric is set to 1, and during the operation of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 ( When one game ball enters the second start port 7140 during the opening of the second start port 7140, the operation of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 ends (the second start port 7140 is closed) ). That is, for one normal symbol, only one game ball can enter the second start port 7140, and even if there is a remaining time of 5400 ms open time in the time-saving game state, the second start Port 7140 will close.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same as the same time-saving gaming state without distinction between the A time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state) and B time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state) The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 is determined, but it differs between the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) It may be configured to determine the opening pattern of the normal electric accessary 7146 .

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 may be varied according to the normal symbol selection symbol data. However, in the case of normal symbol hit in the normal game state, it becomes a "disadvantageous release mode" group than in the case of normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, and in the case of normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, in the normal game state. It is desirable that the group is "advantageous open mode" than in the case of winning the normal symbol.

[9-3-10. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 243 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, the game state, the normal symbol selection symbol data, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time are associated with each other. In addition, the column of "remarks" in FIG. 243 shows the symbol fixing time of the normal symbol for convenience so that it is easy to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 .

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, the normal symbol variation display time 414 ms is determined in the normal game state, and the normal symbol variation display time 408 ms is determined in the time saving game state. It is configured. Further, in the present embodiment, the design determination time of the normal symbols is determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the game state or the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the variable display time of the normal symbols and the fixed time of the normal symbols are all determined. It may be configured such that the variable display time of normal symbols and the design determination time of normal symbols are determined. Similarly, in the time-saving gaming state, the variable display time of the same normal symbols and the fixed time of the normal symbols are determined. It may be configured such that the variable display time and the design determination time of the normal design are determined. Furthermore, in the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), the variable display time of different normal symbols, the normal design pattern It may be configured such that a fixed time is determined.

Next, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 235 described above, the variation pattern table J1 of the special symbol in the time saving game state shown in FIG. 237, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. An example of the operation contents of the normal electric accessory 7146 in the first time-saving game state will be described with reference to the object release pattern determination table, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, and the like.

[9-3-11. Operation details of normal electric accessories in the first time-saving game state]
FIG. 244 is an example of operation contents of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 244, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126 in the first time-saving game state, the first normal symbol variation display is started. At this time, with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, the normal symbol is varied with a variation display time of 408 ms in the normal symbol display section 161, and thereafter, the normal symbol is stopped with a symbol determination time of 540 ms. Display (symbol confirmation) is performed.

When the first normal symbol has been determined and the normal symbol is hit, the normal electric accessory 7146 is opened as a long opening pattern by referring to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242 . is determined, and the second start port 7140 is open for a maximum of 5400 ms.

Then, since the specified number of normal electric accessories for the normal electric accessory 7146 is 1, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140, the operation of the normal electric accessory ends, and the second start port 7140 becomes closed.

When the game ball enters the second start hole 7140, the variation pattern table J1 of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. A variable display of the second special symbol is performed for 200 ms.

When the variation of the second special symbol is completed, "Time saving number of times of the second special symbol = 1" is established as the A time saving end condition, and the first time saving game state ends and the normal game state (first normal game state). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the first time-saving game state can be terminated quickly.

Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is completed, the second special symbol is stopped (determined symbol) with a very long symbol determination time of 89000 ms.

In addition, in the design determination of the second special symbol with the extremely long design determination time of 89000 ms, an effect (boss battle effect) related to the determination result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed in the display device 7 as will be described later. .

In addition, even if the game ball enters the second start port 7140 and the operation of the normal electric role is completed, if the number of reserved symbols of the normal pattern is stored, the second time immediately after the end of the operation of the normal electric role The variable display of normal symbols is started. That is, in the first time-saving gaming state, the second normal symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display can be started substantially at the same time.

Then, the variable display of the normal symbols in the first time-saving gaming state is performed by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. The normal symbol determination (stop display) is performed with a determination time of 540 ms.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first variable display time of the second special symbol in the first time-saving gaming state (200ms) ≤ the variable display time of the normal symbol (408ms) is configured to be established. Therefore, even if it is in the first time-saving gaming state when the second normal symbol fluctuation display starts, when the second normal symbol fluctuation display ends, the game state is already in the normal game state ( 1st normal game state).

For this reason, even if the second normal symbol determination is completed and the normal symbol is hit, the normal electric role in the normal game state is referenced by referring to the normal electric role item release pattern determination table shown in FIG. A short release (72 ms) is determined as the release pattern of the object 7146, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 7140.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the first time-saving game state is quickly terminated by determining the variable display time of the second special symbol to the extremely short first variable display time, and the normal electric accessory 7146 Since the specified number for electricity is set to 1 and the variable display time of the normal symbols in the first time-saving game state is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbols, the first time-saving game state is controlled. When the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 is not stored with the start information of the second special symbol (the number of reserved second special symbols is not stored), the game state is controlled. The variable display of the special design can be made only once.

On the other hand, when the second time-saving gaming state is controlled, the start information of the second special symbol can be stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (the number of reserved second special symbols is storable) game state is controlled.

[9-3-12. Right-handed instruction period setting table]
FIG. 245 is an example of a right-handed instruction period setting table in the seventh pachinko game machine. 245 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 245, as a "right hitting instruction condition" for instructing a right hitting instruction, as the first right hitting instruction condition "controlling the big hit game state and the small winning game state", the second right hitting instruction Three conditions are set: "during control of the time-saving game state" as the condition, and "during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state" as the third right-handed instruction condition.

"During control of the jackpot game state and the minor hit game state" as the first right-handed instruction condition is a condition that is established during the period from the start to the end of the jackpot game state or the minor hit game state.

"During control of the time-saving game state" as the second right-handed instruction condition is a condition that is satisfied during the period from the "time-saving start condition" to the "time-saving end condition". In addition, the time saving game state here does not distinguish between A time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) and B time saving game state (third time saving game state). This is the same for "during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state" as the third right-handed instruction condition.

Also, the "time saving start condition" refers to the end of the big hit game state (including the end of the big hit game state after the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 from the small hit game state). In addition, "time saving end condition" refers to either the start of the special symbol fixed time in the final variation of the time saving game state, the end of the big win game state or the end of the small win game state.

"During the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state" as the third right-handed instruction condition, when the reserved number of the second special symbols is stored at the time of the end of the time-saving game state, the second It is a condition that is satisfied during the period until the variable display of all the second special symbols corresponding to the reserved number of 2 special symbols is completed (until all the reserved numbers of the second special symbols are consumed). In addition, after the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state is over, even if the holding of the second special symbol is forcibly saved, the third right-handed instruction condition is not satisfied, and the right-handed instruction is performed. can't break

Then, when any one of the first to third right-handed instruction conditions is met, the player is notified of the right-handed instruction to hit to the right.

[9-4. Main control processing]
In the seventh pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the special symbol control process and normal symbol control performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although part of the processing is different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process and the normal symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot game state end processing (FIGS. 42 and 259). ), etc.), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, the step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[9-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 246, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S7001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S7001, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol working area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S7001 when executing the special symbol control process.

At S7002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded at S7001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S7008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S7003.

In S7003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a reserved number of second special symbols. When the main CPU 201 determines that the start information of the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S7004, and when it determines that the start information of the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S7005. Move.

In S7004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols is present. When the main CPU 201 determines that the start information of the first special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S7007, and when it determines that the start information of the first special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S7006. to

In S7005, the main CPU 201 performs shift processing to shift the second special symbol start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the second special symbol start storage area (2) to the second special The start information stored in the symbol start storage area (3) is shifted to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (2).

In S7006, the main CPU 201 performs shift processing to shift the first special symbol start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the first special symbol start storage area (2) to the first special The start information stored in the symbol start storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (3).

In S7007, the main CPU 201 stores the special symbol start information (the number of first special symbols and second special symbols held) in the first special symbol start storage area and the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203. If the command has not been stored for a certain period of time or longer, the demonstration display command is reserved for transmission. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

At S7008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of S7003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S7001 to S7008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is stored as the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variator has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 7120 or the second It may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the winning order (ball entering order) to the starting port 7140.

[9-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 246) will be described. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 247 are control state numbers of special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

At S7011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is zero. The waiting time for this special symbol is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special symbol management process, and is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of 2 msec, for example. When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol waiting time is not 0, it ends the special symbol management process, returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 246), and determines that the special symbol waiting time is 0. If so, the process moves to S7012.

At S7012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S7012, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7013. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S7013 based on the control state number read in the process of S7012.

At S7013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S7013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7014.

At S7014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S7014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7015.

At S7015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S7015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7016.

At S7016, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game state setting process. The process of S7016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this small winning game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7017.

At S7017, the main CPU 201 performs small winning game state control processing. The processing of this S7017 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this small-hit game state control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7018.

At S7018, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This process of S7018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7019.

At S7019, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S7019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7020.

At S7020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game state ending process. This process of S7020 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S7013 to S7020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 246). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[9-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 248, special symbol variable display start processing executed by main CPU 201 during special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7021, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbols. If it is determined that the state number is "0", the process proceeds to S7022.

In S7022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process for determining a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, a special symbol hit determination is performed, and hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S7022, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7023.

In S7023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be stopped. In this special symbol determination process, with reference to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "selected symbol command" or a "designated symbol command" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S7023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7024.

In S7024, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of determining the type of hit when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this hit type determination process, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 235 is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process of S7023. Furthermore, in order to determine the number of times of time reduction based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, the winning game state data indicating the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win or a small win is stored in the main RAM 203. is set in the state area when winning. After executing the process of S7024, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7025.

In S7025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection. The details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S7025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7026.

In S7026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process for setting a special symbol variable display time. In this special symbol variation display time setting process, the special symbol variation pattern table determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S7025 is referred to, and the special symbol variation is based on the determined special symbol variation pattern. Determine display time. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the variable special symbol in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let it start. After executing the process of S7026, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7027.

At S7027, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 247) is performed after the end of this special symbol variable display start process. Become. After executing the process of S7027, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7028.

At S7028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of confirming/updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the game state specifying command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7028, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7029.

At S7029, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this processing, mainly update processing of various flags (for example, a time saving flag, etc.) relating to management of the game state is performed. After executing the process of S7029, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7030.

At S7030, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In this process, transmission reservation processing of "symbol designation command" and "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol effect start command. As transmission reservation processing of the design designation command, transmission reservation processing of the design designation command determined in S7023 is performed. Further, as the transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command, transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S7025 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S7029), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S7030)) during the interrupt prohibited interval. preferably in-house.

[9-4-4. Special Symbol Variation Pattern Decision Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 248) will be described. FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7025-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. When the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, it shifts the process to S7025-2, and when it determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (that is, the time-saving gaming state). , the process moves to S7025-4.

At S7025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving gaming state. More specifically, in the second normal game state (when the special 2 control period flag is ON) after the time saving game state is completed, it was stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol control process when the starting information of the second special symbol is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-3, and if it is not during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state. If so, the process proceeds to S7025-4.

At S7025-3, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236(2).

In S7025-4, the main CPU 201 performs effect variation counter update processing for updating the effect variation counter of the main RAM 203 by subtracting 1 from it. Here, as will be described later, the "effect variation counter" is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) when the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state ends. Also, after the seventh pachinko game machine is backed up and cleared, the performance variation counter is also cleared, and the performance variation counter becomes zero.

At S7025-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect variation counter of the main RAM 203=0. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7025-6 if it determines that the production variation counter=0, and shifts the process to S7025-7 if it determines that the production variation counter=0.

At S7025-6, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1).

At S7025-7, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236(2).

At S7025-8, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-9, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not the first time-saving gaming state, it processes to S7025-12.

At S7025-9, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variation of the special symbol is the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state. When the main CPU 201 determines that the current special symbol variation is the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to S7025-10, and the current special symbol variation is the first time-saving gaming state variation. If it is determined that it is not the final change, the process moves to S7025-11.

At S7025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237(1).

At S7025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237(2).

At S7025-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variation of the special symbol is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state. When the main CPU 201 determines that the current variation of the special symbol is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, it shifts the process to S7025-13 and determines that the current special symbolic variation is not the final variation of the time-saving gaming state. If so, the process moves to S7025-14.

At S7025-13, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237(4).

At S7025-14, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237(3).

At S7025-15, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, the special symbol type (starting information type), the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process at S7022, and the special symbol determination. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for effect selection as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the area (0).

[9-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7041, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "1", the process proceeds to S7042.

In S7042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol finalization time setting process for setting a special symbol finalization time. In this special symbol design determination time setting process, the special symbol design determination time is determined based on the game state and the result (hit or lose) of the special symbol hit determination process. In the present embodiment, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 236 and 237, when the game state is normal, the special symbol symbol determination time is determined to be the first symbol determination time of 540 ms, and the second symbol determination time is set to 540 ms. When it is the final variation time of the time-saving game state of 1, the pattern fixing time of the special pattern is determined to be a very long second pattern fixing time of 89000 ms, and the final variation time of the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is determined. When it becomes a loss as a result of the hit determination processing of the special design, the design determination time of the special design is determined to be the third design determination time of 15000 ms, and if it is a time-saving game state other than the above, the design of the special design. The confirmation time is determined to be the fourth symbol confirmation time of 540 ms. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and stops displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Let After executing the process of S7042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043.

It should be noted that the symbol fixing time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the game state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol fixing time (for example, 540 msec) may be determined.

In S7043, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the seventh pachinko game machine, a ceiling counter update process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter and a time saving counter updating process of subtracting 1 from the time saving frequency counter are performed when the variable display of the special symbols is finished. When this ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time saving flag = 2 indicating the B time saving game state is set (the time saving flag is turned on), the prescribed number of times is set in the time saving number counter, and the transition to the B time saving game state is controlled. . In addition, when the time-saving number counter = 0, the time-saving flag is cleared (the time-saving flag = 0 is set), and the transition control from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is performed. The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S7043, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7044.

At S7044, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S7015 in FIG. 247) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S7044, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7045.

At S7045, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7045, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7046.

At S7046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times a special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours. After executing the process of S7046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-6. Time saving management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 250) will be described. FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-1, the main CPU 201 performs time saving counter update processing for updating the time saving counter. In particular, in the seventh pachinko game machine, the "time saving counter" in the main RAM 203 is a "first time saving counter" corresponding to the total number of special symbols and a "second time saving counter" corresponding to the number of times of the second special symbol. It is different in that it consists of two types of counters. The details of this time saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 252 . After executing the process of S7043-1, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-2.

In S7043-2, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing for updating the ceiling counter. This ceiling counter update process is the process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off, and is the same as the ceiling counter update process shown in FIG. 35 of the first pachinko game machine. . After executing the process of S7043-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-3.

In S7043-3, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition determination processing for determining the transition to the B time saving gaming state. This time-saving transition determination process is a process for preparing to transition to the B time-saving gaming state by turning on the ceiling flag and the ceiling count prohibition flag when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (for example, 599 times). 37 of the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. However, since the seventh pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high-probability gaming state, the time-saving transition determination processing executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine does not turn on the probability variation flag, and the probability variation flag is turned on and off. is determined as "off of probability variation flag". After executing the process of S7043-3, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-4.

In S7043-4, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing for transitioning to the B time saving gaming state. This time-saving transition process is a process of shifting to the B time-saving game state when the ceiling flag is ON, and is the same as the time-saving transition process shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S7043-4, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-5.

However, the time-saving transition processing executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine is different from the time-saving transition processing shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko gaming machine.
As the first difference, since the seventh pachinko game machine is not controlled to a high certainty game state, the time saving transition processing executed in the seventh pachinko game machine does not turn on the probability variation flag, and the probability variation flag The ON/OFF determination of is determined as "OFF of probability variation flag".
In addition, as the second difference, since the seventh pachinko game machine is not controlled to the C time saving game state, all determinations of ON/OFF of the time saving hit flag are determined as "off of the time saving hit flag".
As a third difference, the setting contents set in the B time saving control mode determination process (S208 shown in FIG. 38) are different. In the B time saving control mode determination processing of the seventh pachinko game machine, the time saving flag = 2 indicating the B time saving game state is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the A time saving end condition of the second time saving game state "First time saving counter = 11 (special symbol total time saving number = 11)" and "second time saving counter = 5 (second special symbol time saving number = 5)" are determined so as to have the same end condition. In addition, the number of times of time saving may be determined in the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter so as to become a different end condition from the A time saving end condition of the second time saving game state.

In S7043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not one of the “first time saving counter” and the “second time saving counter” is zero. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-6 when determining that the time saving counter=0, and moves the process to S7043-10 when determining that the time saving counter=0 is not.

In S7043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information. Here, as the time saving information, "first time saving counter", "second time saving counter", "time saving counter" for identifying whether the game state is normal game state, A time saving game state or B time saving game state Clear (set = 0) the "A time saving flag" for distinguishing the A time saving game state from the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state. After executing the process of S7043-6, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-7.

In S7043-7, the main CPU 201 refers to the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, and determines whether or not the second special symbol pending number>0 (second special symbol start storage area (1) to ( 3) It is determined whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in any of the items. If the main CPU 201 determines that the reserved number of second special symbols>0, the process proceeds to S7043-8, and if it determines that the reserved number of the second special symbols is not>0, the process proceeds to S7043. Move to -10.

In S7043-8, the main CPU 201 turns on the special 2 control period flag. This "special 2 control period flag" is a flag for identifying whether or not it is in the "second normal game state", and when the special 2 control period flag is on, it is in the second normal game state. It is shown that. After executing the process of S7043-8, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-10.

At S7043-10, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is identified whether the normal game state is the "first normal game state" or the "second normal game state" by turning on/off the special 2 control period flag. A game state designation command can be generated. After executing the process of S7043-10, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-11.

In S7043-11, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a time saving shift command when shifting to the time saving game state. In addition, the time-saving transition command that is reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7043-11, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 250).

[9-4-7. Time saving counter update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 251) will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter update process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7043-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (the time saving flag is other than 0). When the main CPU 201 determines that the time saving flag is on, the process proceeds to S7043-22, and when it determines that the time saving flag is not on, the current time saving counter update process ends.

In S7043-22, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "first time saving counter" of the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-23.

At S7043-23, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting information shifted to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203 is the second special symbol starting information.
If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the starting information of the second special symbol, it moves the process to S7043-24, and if it determines that it is not the starting information of the second special symbol, it performs this time reduction counter update process. finish.

In S7043-24, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "second time saving counter" of the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-24, the main CPU 201 ends the current time saving counter update process.

[9-4-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7051, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and returns to the special symbol control state. If it is determined that the number is "2", the process proceeds to S7052.

In S7052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7054 when judging that it is a big hit, and shifts the process to S7061 when judging that it is not a big hit.

In S7054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a big hit. In this process, an external signal (for example, a jackpot signal according to the type of special symbol) to be output to the hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 232) via the external terminal plate 184 at the time of the jackpot is generated. After that, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184 . After executing the process of S7054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7055.

At S7055, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to set the upper limit of the number of rounds. After executing the process of S7055, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7056.

At S7056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot state display process. In this jackpot state display processing, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right-handed instruction data for notifying the player of right-handed instruction is set. After executing the process of S7056, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7057.

At S7057, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined to be a big hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter). After executing the process of S7057, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7058.

At S7058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7058, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7059.

At S7059, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S7018 in FIG. 247) will be performed. . After executing the process of S7059, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7059.

At S7060, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big hit start display command. After executing the processing of S7060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

At S7061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small hit. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7063 when it determines that it is a small hit, and shifts the process to S7071 when it determines that it is not a small hit (that is, loses).

In S7063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small hit. In this processing, an external signal (for example, a small win signal, etc.) is generated which is output to the hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 232) via the external terminal board 184 when a small win is made. After that, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184 .
After executing the process of S7063, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7064.

At S7064, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of small hits to be opened in this process is, for example, 16 times. After executing the process of S7064, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7066.

In S7065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win state display process. In this small hit state display process, right hitting instruction data for notifying the player of instructing right hitting is set. After executing the process of S7065, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7066.

At S7066, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined to be a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter). After executing the process of S7066, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7067.

At S7067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7067, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7068.

At S7068, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small winning game state setting process (see S7016 in FIG. 247) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. . After executing the process of S7068, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7069.

In S7069, the main CPU 201 performs processing of reservation processing for transmission of a small winning start display command. After executing the processing of S7069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

At S7071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S7051 to S7071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 253) will be described. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7072, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S7072, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7073.

At S7073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. Also, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the starting information stored in the special symbol determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S7073, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7074.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 is referred to, and the second special symbol start storage area (1) to (3) ), when the starting information of the second special symbol is not stored in any of the above (the number of reserved second special symbols=0), the special 2 control period flag is turned off.

At S7074, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 253).

[9-4-10. Small hit game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the small winning game state setting process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game state setting process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7081, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 201 terminates the small winning game state setting process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "3", the process proceeds to S7082.

In S7082, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 235, determines the opening mode of the second big winning opening 7151 as the opening mode of the small winning game state, and opens and closes the V winning opening 7156. Determines the mode of operation of the shutter 7159 . In this embodiment, the operating mode of the V shutter 7159 is determined to open the V winning port 7156 when the second big winning port 7151 is opened. After executing the process of S7082, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7083.

At S7083, the main CPU 201 performs a second prize winning opening opening/closing control process. In this second big winning hole opening/closing control process, the opening/closing pattern data for opening/closing the second big winning hole 7151 (for example, opening time of the second big winning hole 7151, wait time , time-series control data such as the maximum number of openings). Then, control based on the generated opening/closing pattern data is started. After executing the process of S7083, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7084.

At S7084, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening opening/closing control processing. In this V winning opening opening/closing control process, operation pattern data for opening and closing the V winning opening 7156 based on the determined operation mode of the V shutter 7159 (e.g., opening time, waiting time, maximum number of openings, etc. of the V winning opening 7156) is performed. sequence control data). Then, control based on the generated operation pattern data is started. After executing the process of S7084, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7085.

At S7085, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S7085) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the end of this small hit game state setting process, the small hit game state control process (see S7017 in FIG. 247) will be performed. After executing the process of S7085, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7086.

At S7086, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the processing of S7086, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state setting processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-11. Small hit game state control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the small winning game state control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing an example of small winning game state control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7091, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 terminates the small winning game state control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "4", the process proceeds to S7092.

In S7092, the main CPU 201 determines the number of game balls entering the second large winning opening 7151 when the second special electric shutter 7154 is operated to open the second large winning opening 7151 (the second large winning opening 7151 winning number) is the maximum winning number. In this process, the value of the second big winning opening counter counted by the second big winning opening count switch 7152 (see FIG. 232) is set to the predetermined maximum winning number of the second big winning openings 7151 (for example, 10). individual) is determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines in S7092 that the number of prizes won at the second big prize opening 7151 is not the maximum number of prizes won, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7093, and at S7092 the number of prizes won at the second big prize opening 7151 reaches the maximum number of prizes won. If it is determined that there is, the process moves to S7094.

At S7093, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second big winning opening 7151 has been completely opened. In this process, it is determined whether or not the control based on the opening/closing pattern data generated in the process of S7084 (see FIG. 255) has ended.

When the main CPU 201 determines in S7093 that the second big winning opening 7151 has not been completely opened, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247). Returning, when it is determined in S7093 that the second big winning opening 7151 has been completely opened, the process proceeds to S7094.

At S<b>7094 , the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the second big winning opening 7151 . After executing the process of S7094, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7095.

At S7095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 7156 within the specified time (that is, whether or not the V winning opening switch 7157 has detected it).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7095 that the V winning has been detected, the process proceeds to S7097, and if it determines in S7095 that the V winning has not been detected, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S7105.

At S7097, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the big hit from the second route. In this process, an external signal (for example, a jackpot signal according to the type of special symbol) to be output to the hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 232) via the external terminal plate 184 at the time of the jackpot is generated. After that, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184 . After executing the process of S7097, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7098.

At S7098, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to set the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. After executing the process of S7098, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7099.

In S7099, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the second big winning opening 7151 (that is, the operation of the second special electric shutter 7154), which is first executed based on the small hit, is processed as the first round round game. That is, the big hit game state executed by determining that the V winning prize was detected (YES in S7095) is started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S7099, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7100.

At S7100, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot state display process. In this jackpot state display processing, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right-handed instruction data for notifying the player of right-handed instruction is set. After executing the process of S7100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7101.

At S7101, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined to be a big hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter). After executing the process of S7101, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7102.

At S7102, the main CPU 201 performs game state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7102, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7103.

At S7103, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening preparation process (Fig. 247) is performed. After executing the process of S7103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7104.

In S7104, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a V-hit start display command. After executing the process of S7104, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7105, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a small hit end display command. After executing the process of S7105, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7106.

At S7106, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 254 is performed. After executing the process of S7106, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-12. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7111, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "5", the process moves to S7112.

In S7112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. A count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S7112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7113.

In S7113, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the loaded round counter value is the upper limit value of the number of big hit rounds.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit, it moves the process to S7114. to S7117.

At S7114, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the big win game state ending process (Fig. 247) is performed after the big winning opening opening preparation process is finished. After executing the process of S7114, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7115.

At S7115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7115, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7116.

In S7116, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command. Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7116, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7117, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S7117, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7118.

At S7118, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the first big winning hole 7131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened in the big winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win, the big win game control process is started. If the result is a small win and the big win game control process is started by the V winning detection, the second big winning hole 7151 is selected instead of the first big winning hole 7131 as the big winning hole to be opened. You may After executing the process of S7118, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7119.

At S7119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the first big winning opening 7131, the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 7131, the maximum number of winnings to the first big winning opening 7131, and the like are set. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude the case where the first big prize opening 7131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the first big prize winning opening 7131 is opened and closed are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S7119, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7120.

In S7120, the main CPU 201 performs opening control data generation processing. In this process, opening control data for opening the first big winning hole 7131 is generated based on the information set in the various big winning hole related setting processes of S7119. Then, control based on the generated opening control data is started. After executing the process of S7120, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7121.

At S7121, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" in this manner, the large winning opening opening control process (see FIG. 247) is performed after the completion of this large winning opening opening preparation process. Become. After executing the process of S7121, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7122.

At S7122, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7123.

At S7123, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7123, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-13. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 terminates the big winning opening control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "6", the process proceeds to S7132.

In S7132, the main CPU 201 determines that the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 7131 (the winning number of the first big winning hole 7131) is the maximum number of winning balls when the first big winning hole 7131 is opened. Determine whether or not there is In this process, the value of the first big winning opening counter counted by the first big winning opening count switch 7132 (see FIG. 232) is set to the predetermined maximum winning number of the first big winning openings 7131 (for example, 7 individual) is determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines in S7132 that the number of prizes won in the first big prize opening 7131 is not the maximum number of prizes won, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7133, and in S7132 the number of prizes won in the first big prize opening 7131 is the maximum number of prizes won. If so, the process proceeds to S7134.

At S7133, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 7131 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S7119 in FIG. 257) has passed.

When the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 7131 has not passed, it ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247). . Further, when the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 7131 has passed, the process proceeds to S7134.

At S7134, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the first big winning opening 7131. FIG. After executing the process of S7134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7135.

At S7135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning opening opening control process, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see FIG. 257) is performed again. It will happen. After executing the process of S7135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7136.

At S7136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7137.

In S7137, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-14. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the jackpot game state end processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game state ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7141, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "7", the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing, returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247), and returns to the special symbol control state. If it is determined that the number is "7", the process proceeds to S7142.

At S7142, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this special symbol game end setting process, a process of setting or resetting various flag data used in the jackpot game state and various counters (for example, a round counter, a big winning opening winning counter, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S7142, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7143.

At S7143, the main CPU 201 performs state setting processing after the end of the big win. In the state setting process after the end of the big hit, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. The mode of the game state after the big hit game state (time saving flag and the number of times of time saving) is determined based on the winning game state data indicating the game state of , and the determined game state mode data is set. After executing the process of S7143, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7144.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z1", the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the first time saving counter = 7 , and set the second time saving number counter = 1. In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z2 to 8", the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the first time saving counter = 11 set, and set the second time saving number counter = 5. Then, when the game state at the time of winning is the time saving game state, the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on) for all the selected symbol commands, and the first time saving number counter = 7 is set. and set the second time saving number counter=1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to identify the A time saving game state in which the first time saving number counter = 7 and the second time saving number counter = 1 are set as the "first time saving game state", A time saving flag = 1 is set, and the A time saving flag = 2 is set to identify the A time saving game state in which the first time saving number counter = 11 and the second time saving number counter = 5 are set as the "second time saving game state" do. And a game state specification command can be generated based on the A time saving flag.

At S7144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 254 is performed. After executing the process of S7144, the main CPU 201 ends the big hit game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-6-15. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 260, normal symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 260, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. It goes without saying that

FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 260 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the normal symbol waiting time is 0 (S7300).

When it is determined in S7300 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and shifts the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7301.

At S7301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S7301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7310. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S7310 based on the control state number read in the process of S7301.

At S7310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S7310 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". The details of this normal symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7320.

At S7320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S7320 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7330.

In this normal symbol variable display ending process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended. (540 msec, for example, as shown in FIG. 243) is set in the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". The waiting time of this normal design is subtracted as a normal design timer counter in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

In addition, the design fixing time of the normal design may differ depending on the type of the normal design, and may differ according to the game state. For example, in the case of the normal game state, the fifth design confirmation time (for example, 540 msec), and in the case of the time saving game state, the sixth design confirmation time shorter than the fifth design confirmation time (for example, 132 msec).

At S7330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S7330 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs determination processing of the normal symbol derivation result (for example, normal symbol win or normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a hit for the normal symbol, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 7146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 7146. - 特許庁

In this normal electric accessory 7146 opening pattern setting process, the normal electric accessory 7146 opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. An opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 7146 release pattern.

At S7340, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This process of S7340 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second start port 7140 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S7330, When a specified number (for example, one) of game balls enters the second starting port 7140, or when the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 is completed, the second starting port 7140 is closed. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 7146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

At S7350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S7350 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the normal symbol per end process is completed, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", terminates the normal symbol control process, and proceeds to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). back to

In the normal symbol per end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of resetting (clearing) various parameters relating to the normal symbols determined in S7310 to S7340 and various random values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described normal symbol control process (S7300 to S7350) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-6-16. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 261, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 261, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S7311).

When it is determined in S7311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 260). On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7312.

At S7312, the main CPU 201 shifts the start information of the normal symbol. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the normal symbol start storage area (2) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). The start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S7312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7313.

At S7313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determining value data ("normal design winning" or "normal design losing") is determined. After executing the process of S7313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7314.

At S7314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. "Normal symbol selection symbol data" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the symbol. After executing the process of S7314, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7315.

At S7315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. decide. After executing the process of S7315, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7316.

At S7316, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol variation display time determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S7315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol variation display is performed on the normal symbol display unit 161. to start. The waiting time of this normal design is subtracted as a normal design timer counter in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process of S7316, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7317.

At S7317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (of FIG. 260 S7320) is performed. After executing the process of S7317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7318.

At S7318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. It should be noted that the variation pattern command of normal symbols reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-4-17. Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 262, switch input detection processing executed by main CPU 201 during system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The seventh pachinko game machine has a configuration of a first big winning hole count switch 7132, a second big winning hole count switch 7152, and a V winning hole switch 7157 as compared with the first pachinko game machine. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

At S7381, the main CPU 201 executes a first start opening winning detection process. After executing the process of S7381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7382.

In this first start hole winning detection process, when the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120 is detected by the first start hole switch 7121, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the first start hole 7120. It is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4).
When it is determined that there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, symbol random number, reach determination random number, effect selection random number, etc.) are acquired, and various acquired random numbers are stored in one first special symbol determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the first special symbol indicating the winning to the first starting port 7120 and the reserved number of the first special symbols is performed. The first special symbol winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random numbers. Processing will end.

At S7382, the main CPU 201 executes a second start opening winning detection process. After executing the process of S7382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7383.

In this second start hole winning detection process, when the second start hole switch 7141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 7140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second start hole 7140. It is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (3).
When it is determined that there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (3), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for judging a big hit, Symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, effect selection random numbers, etc.) are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in one second special symbol determination area in the FIFO format. Then, transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the second special symbol indicating the winning to the second starting port 7140 and the number of reserved second special symbols is performed. The second special symbol winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (3), the second start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random numbers. Processing will end.

Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol has four first special symbol start storage areas, but the second special symbol does not have three first special symbol start storage areas. Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is three. The reserved number of the first special symbols and the reserved number of the second special symbols can be freely changed in design, but it is desirable to set them to 4 or less.

At S7383, the main CPU 201 performs general winning hole passage detection processing. In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S7383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7384.

At S7384, the main CPU 201 performs first big winning opening detection processing. In the first big winning hole passage detection process, when the game ball entering the first big winning hole 7131 is detected by the first big winning hole count switch 7132, the main CPU 201 Along with setting the payout information, 1 is added to the first big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls to the first big winning hole 7131 to update it. Then, transmission reservation processing of the first large winning opening winning command indicating winning to the first large winning opening 7131 is performed. The first big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7384, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7385.

At S7385, the main CPU 201 performs a second prize winning opening detection process. In the second big winning hole passage detection process, when the second big winning hole count switch 7152 detects the game ball entering the second big winning hole 7151, the main CPU 201 detects the second big winning hole 7151. Along with setting the payout information, 1 is added to the second big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls to the second big winning hole 7151 to update it. Then, transmission reservation processing of a second large winning opening winning command indicating winning to the second large winning opening 7151 is performed. The second big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7385, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7386.

At S7386, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning opening detection process. In the V winning opening passage detection process, when passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 7156 is detected by the V winning opening switch 7157, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning opening passage flag. Then, transmission reservation processing of a V passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 7156 is performed. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156, the payout information is not set. After executing the process of S7386, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7387.

In S7387, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the process of S7387, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7388.

In this gate passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126 is detected by the passage gate switch 7127, the main CPU 201 has an empty space in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). Determine whether or not there is an area.
When it is determined that there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, normal symbol determination random numbers, normal symbol symbols) are used as normal symbol start information. Random numbers etc.) are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in one normal symbol start storage area in the FIFO format.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), the gate passage detection process is terminated without obtaining various random numbers. .

In S7388, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing the process of S7388, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation processing, referring to the look-ahead related data in FIG. , to generate lookahead commands. In addition, as shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 239, in the time saving game state, the big hit game state, and the small hit game state, the look-ahead command (second special Design look-ahead command) can only be generated. Then, prefetch command transmission reservation processing for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub-control circuit 300 is performed. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-5-1. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the game state transition in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 263 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the "first normal game state" is a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and while it is easy for a game ball to enter the first start hole 7120, It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 7140 .

The "second normal game state" is the second special symbol performed based on the second special symbol start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 when the time saving game state ends. It is the normal game state during the control period (that is, the normal game state during digestion of the reserved number of the second special symbols stored in the time saving game state). Here, the second normal game state may be left-handed or right-handed as a regular game mode, but during digestion of the reserved number of second special symbols, the second time-saving game is performed again. Since the percentage of withdrawals that shift to the state is high (approximately 70%), hitting to the right is set as the regular game mode (see FIG. 245).

In the time-saving game state consisting of the first to third time-saving game states, right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, and while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 7120, the second start port It is easy for a game ball to enter 7140. As described above, the time saving game state when "time saving number of times of the second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A time saving end condition is referred to as the "first time saving game state", and as the A time saving end condition "second The time-saving game state when the number of time-saving special symbols=5 is determined is called a "second time-saving game state", and the B time-saving game state is called a "third time-saving game state".

(Transition control of the first normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the first normal game state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 7120, "big hit" or "losing" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (Fig. 233), when a "big hit" is determined, the state shifts to a big win game state. Then, after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state, 90% shifts to the first time-saving game state in response to the selected symbol command, and 10% It shifts to the second time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 234 and 235).

Although not shown, in the first normal game state, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140 due to an irregular game mode or the like, a "jackpot" is generated based on the start information of the second special symbol. , ``small hit'' or ``losing'' is determined (see FIG. 233), and when ``big hit'' is determined, the state shifts to the big win game state, and when ``small hit'' is determined, the state shifts to the small win game state. . And after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the first normal game state, all shift to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 235).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches 599 times, the normal game state is shifted to the third time-saving game state.

(Transition control of the first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving gaming state, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140, "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" is determined (see FIG. 233), and the second special symbol start information Based on this, when "big hit" is determined, the state shifts to the big win game state, and when "small hit" is determined, the state shifts to the small win game state. In particular, in the present embodiment, when based on the start information of the second special symbol, regardless of the game state, it is determined to be a "small hit" with a high probability of about 1/3, and the second route from the small win game state. It is configured to be able to shift to a big hit game state through.

Here, in the first time-saving game state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 7120, but the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal game state remains. There are cases where In such a case, "big hit" or "losing" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 233), and when "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to the big win game state.

Then, when the game state at the time of winning the big win or the small win is the first time-saving game state, after the big win game state is finished, all the games are shifted to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 235).

Also, when it is in the first time-saving gaming state, when "losing" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol (non-winning), the first normal game from the first time-saving gaming state will transition to state.

Furthermore, in the first time-saving gaming state, when "special symbol total time-saving number of times = 7 times" is established as the A time-saving end condition due to an irregular game mode or the like, that is, the game ball enters the second start port 7140 Without doing, when seven times of "losing" determination (variation display of the first special symbol seven times) is performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol, the first normal game is performed from the first time-saving game state. will transition to state.

(Transition control of second and third time-saving gaming states)
In the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140, "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" based on the start information of the second special symbol. is determined (see FIG. 233), and when "big hit" is determined, the state shifts to the big hit game state, and when "small hit" is determined, the state shifts to the small hit game state.

Here, in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 7120, but in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game There is a case where the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal game state before shifting to the state remains. In such a case, "big hit" or "losing" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 233), and when "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to the big win game state.

Then, when the game state at the time of winning the big win or the small win is the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, after the big win game state ends, the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state (Fig. 235). reference).

Also, based on the starting information of the second special symbol, five times of "losing" determination (variation display of the first special symbol of five times) is performed, or the starting information of the first special symbol or the start of the second special symbol When 11 times of "losing" determinations (11 times of variable display of special symbols) are performed based on the information, the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends.

When the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, there is a second special symbol holding number (the second special symbol start information is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203). ), it shifts to the second normal game state. On the other hand, when the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state ends, there is no second special symbol pending number (the second special symbol start information is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 When not stored), it shifts to the first normal game state.

(Second normal game state transition control)
In the second normal game state, "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 233), and when "big hit" is determined, the big win game state. , and when a "small win" is determined, the game state shifts to a small win game state.

And after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, it shifts to the second time-saving game state again (see FIG. 235).

Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is consumed when the second time-saving gaming state ends (all the start information of the second special symbols stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 is "losing"). is determined and erased), the second normal game state ends, and the state shifts to the first normal game state.

[9-5-2. Production flow]
Next, the outline of the effect performed in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described using the flow of the entire effect. FIG. 264 is an example of the game state production flow in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The effects performed in the seventh pachinko game machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbols displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters and the like, and output from the speaker 32. , a lamp effect that emits light from the LED group 46, a effect accessory effect that drives the effect accessory group 58, a change effect of the operation mode of the effect button 54, and the like. In this embodiment, the decorative patterns are composed of three main patterns, ie, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and sub-patterns that are much smaller than the main patterns. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to this.

In addition, in the embodiment, the production based on the first special symbol lottery is also called "first special symbol production", and the production based on the second special symbol lottery is also called "second special symbol production".

(Production in the first normal game state)
In the first normal game state, executable effects are different between the general effect state and the limited effect state.

In the general performance state of the first normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach", and "super super reach" are configured to be executable as "performance of the first special symbol", At least "normal variation" and "card effect" are configured to be executable as the "second special symbol effect".

In addition, in the limited effect state of the first normal game state, at least "normal variation" and "step-up reach" are executable as "effect of the first special symbol", and "effect of the second special symbol". , at least "normal variation" and "card effect" are executable.

In addition, in the first normal game state, when the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches the ceiling value of 599 times, the "door effect" can be executed. It should be noted that the "door effect" is configured to be executable even in other game states.

In addition, as the notice effect of the "first special symbol effect" in the first normal game state, the "window notice" can be executed in the variation, and the "hold change notice" and " "flash notice" is configured to be executable.

"Normal fluctuation" is a variable mode production in which all decorative patterns start fluctuating display at high speed and stop display in order, and can be executed when the special pattern lottery is lost is.

"Normal Reach", "Super Reach", and "Super Super Reach" are exclusive effects of the first special symbol that can be executed in the general effect state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a big hit. It is a suggestive reach production. "Normal ready-to-win" is a ready-to-win effect that is performed when left and right symbols of the same kind are temporarily stopped and displayed. In "Normal Reach", if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the left and right patterns, it will be lost, and if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in the same type as the left and right patterns, it will be a big hit. In addition, in "Normal Reach", the middle pattern may develop to "Super Reach" without being stopped, and it is configured so that it can develop from "Super Reach" to "Super Super Reach". there is

And, according to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1),
Random numbers for effect selection and the like are set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "normal reach"<"super reach"<"super super reach".

Further, the "card effect" is a dedicated effect of the second special symbol, and is a ready-to-win effect suggesting that the lottery result of the second special symbol may result in a big win or a small win. The “card effect” is, for example, a effect in which a card with a predetermined pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly flipped over, characters suggesting a big win or a small win are displayed.

Further, "step-up reach" is a dedicated performance of the first special symbol that can be executed in a limited performance state, and is a ready-to-win performance suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol may result in a big win. In "step-up reach", for example, a predetermined character is displayed so that it can grow from STEP 1 to STEP 3, and if it eventually grows to STEP 3, it will be a big hit, and if it grows only to STEP 1 or STEP 2, it will be a loss.

"Door effect" is an effect that can be executed regardless of the type of special symbol, the effect time is defined indefinitely (end time is not defined), and it is also an effect that suggests the transition of each game state. . As an example of the "door effect", a half-open door is displayed from the left and right, and the half-open door is displayed rattling for a predetermined period of time, then the door is completely closed and then completely opened again. Then, it is notified that the background and the like have been changed and the game state has been changed.

In the first normal game state, the "door effect" is executed when the number of times of variable display of special symbols is the ceiling value of 599th rotation, and from the next special symbol (600th rotation), B time saving game state ( It is notified that it has shifted to the third time-saving game state).

"Window notice" is an effect that foretells the change of the stage, the effect contents of the pattern effect pattern, or the lottery result of the lottery for the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is performed. As an example of "window notice", a window is displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and predetermined notice contents are displayed in the window.

"Reservation change notice" is an example of a look-ahead effect, and before the special design lottery is performed, the special design lottery result and the special design change depending on the display mode of the reservation image showing the number of special design reservations. It is a production that suggests information.

The “flash notice” is an example of a look-ahead effect, and refers to a effect in which the LED group 46 emits predetermined light from the time when the first start port 7120 is won to the start of the change.

(Production in the first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, at least "boss battle performance", "super-shortened variation", and "door performance" are executable as "first special symbol performance", and "second special symbol performance". As such, at least the "boss battle effect" is configured to be executable.

The "ultra-shortened variation" is a variation mode effect in which all the decorative symbols are scattered and the variable display is started at high speed, and all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in an extremely short time (for example, 200 ms).

The "boss battle effect" is a dedicated effect that can be executed in the first time-saving game state, and is a ready-to-win effect suggesting that the lottery result of special symbols may result in a big win or a small win. A "boss battle effect" is, for example, a effect in which a boss character appears and the main character and the boss character confront each other. If the character is defeated ("boss battle production (defeat)"), the character loses.

As described above, in the first time-saving gaming state, since the "time-saving number of times of the second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A time-saving end condition, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, and the jackpot or If it is a small win, it shifts to a second time-saving game state, and if it is a loss, it shifts to a first normal game state. Then, a lottery for the second special pattern is performed in the first time-saving game state, and if it is a big hit or a small hit, "boss battle production (win)" is executed, and if it is a loss, "boss battle production (defeat)" is executed. be done.

Further, in the first time-saving game state, in the case where the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal game state remains, the lottery of the first special symbols is performed, and the jackpot is won. and "boss battle production (victory)" is executed, and if it is a loss, "super shortened variation" is executed.

Then, in the first time-saving gaming state, when "special symbol total time-saving number of times = 7 times" is established as the A time-saving end condition due to an irregular game mode or the like, that is, the game ball enters the second start port 7140 Instead, when the lottery of the first special pattern is carried out seven times, ``boss battle performance (winning)'' is executed if it is a big hit, and a ``door performance'' is executed if it is a loss. Here, when the "door effect" is executed in the first time-saving game state, it is notified that the game state has shifted to the first normal game state.

(Production in the second and third time-saving gaming states)
Except for the final variation of the special symbols in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, at least the ``Sengoku time performance'' is executable, and the special in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state In the final variation of the pattern, at least "Sengoku time effect", "door effect", and "continuous battle entry effect" are configured to be executable.

“Sengoku time production” refers to a series of productions performed from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small winning game state, and from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small game state. The period that is performed over the winning game state is also called "Sengoku time". The details of this "Sengoku time effect" will be described later with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG.

"Continuous battle entry effect" is a dedicated effect that can be executed in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends (Sengoku Time is end), and it is an effect that informs that a continuous battle reach will be performed next time.

As described above, when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, when there is a reserved number of second special symbols, the state is shifted to the second normal game state, and the second special symbol is reserved. When there is no number, it shifts to the first normal game state. Then, at the time of the final variation of the special symbols in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, when there is a reserved number of the second special symbols, the "continuous battle rush effect" is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed. When there is no reserved number, "door effect" is executed. Here, when the "door effect" is executed in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, it is notified that the game state has shifted to the first normal game state.

(Production in the second normal game state)
In the second normal game state, at least the "continuous battle effect" is executable as the "second special symbol effect".

"Consecutive battle effect" is a dedicated effect that can be executed in the second normal game state, and is a ready-to-win effect suggesting that the lottery result of special symbols may result in a big win or a small win. A "continuous battle effect" is, for example, a effect in which a rival character appears and the main character and the rival character face off in succession up to three times. Consecutive Battle Effect (Victory)”) results in a big hit or a small win, and when the main character is defeated (“Consecutive Battle Effect (Defeat)”), it is a loss.

In addition to the effects shown in FIG. 264, this embodiment is provided with a plurality of detailed stages that serve as the bases (motifs of effects) of various effects during jackpots and effects, which will be described in detail later.

[9-6. sub control circuit]
In order to execute the effects as described above, the contents of control of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 277. FIG.

[9-6-1. First Normal Game State Symbol Production Pattern Determination Table]
The symbol effect pattern determination table E1 for determining the symbol effect pattern in the first normal game state will be explained. FIG. 265 is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table for the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The “effect pattern” refers to information that defines display effects such as characters, voice effects, change effects of the operation mode of the effect button 54, and the like. In addition, the "symbol production pattern" is centered on the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern, and defines the display production of the related characters and the like, the sound production, the change production of the operation mode of the production button 54, etc. information. In addition to the pattern effect pattern, various display effects such as an advance notice effect pattern can be superimposed and executed.

As shown in FIG. 265, the symbol effect pattern determination table E1 in the first normal game state includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect stage defining the effect display state, and the normal game state. The number of variable display times of special symbols counted after the state is started, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "production stage" is information that defines the production display state of the production background, motif, etc. For example, "production stage 0" is the mountain village stage in the general production state of the first normal game state. "Production stage 1" indicates the castle town stage in the general production state of the first normal game state, and "Production stage 2" indicates the seaside stage in the limited production state of the first normal game state. In this embodiment, only two stages are provided in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, but three or more different stages may be provided.

Further, the "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for convenience of explanation, It is read as a selectivity and described. The selectivity may include 0% as well as 1 to 100%, and the term 0% selectivity is not excluded. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in FIGS. 267 to 277 and the like. In the present embodiment, a large number of random numbers of different random number ranges are provided, and description of the types of random numbers will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol effect pattern determination table E1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 265, even with the same special symbol variation pattern command, different symbol effect patterns (different effects) can be determined according to the effect stage. It is configured.

Further, according to the symbol effect pattern determination table E1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 265, even if the same special symbol variation pattern command is used, different symbol effect patterns production) is configured to be determinable. Then, when the special symbol variable display count = 599 and when the special symbol lottery is "losing" (that is, when transitioning to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state)), the door effect is configured to determine the effect pattern 100 for executing In addition, even if the number of variable display times of special symbols = 599, when it is a "big hit" or "small hit" in the lottery of special symbols, it does not shift to the B time saving game state (third time saving game state). Since the transition to a big win game state or a small win game state is made, a pattern performance pattern for executing a performance suggesting a big win or a small win (in the case of a second special symbol performance, a card performance) is determined. there is Note that the effect stage 2 is a stage dedicated to the limited effect state, and the number of variable display times of the special symbol is never 599, so the effect pattern 100 for executing the door effect is never determined.

[9-6-2. Determination table at the start of the second normal game state]
A start determination table for determining the symbol effect pattern determination table when the second normal game state is started will be described. FIG. 266 is an example of a determination table at the start of the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In the second normal game state, when the second normal game state is started, that is, when the first variable display of the second special pattern is started in the second normal game state, a plurality of pattern performance patterns are determined. One symbol performance pattern determination table is determined from the tables, and when starting variable display of the second special symbols after that, the symbol performance pattern determination table already determined when the second normal game state is started. will be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 266, the determination table at the start of the second normal game state includes the number of reserved second special symbols, the number of hits in the number of reserved second special symbols, the pullback information, and the pattern effect pattern. Decision tables E2 to E8 are associated with each other.

Here, "the number of hits in the reserved number of second special symbols" is the starting information (random number ), and since the number of reserved second special symbols is set to a maximum of 3, the number of reserved second special symbols is 2 (subtracted by 1) at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. number is maximum.

"Pull-back information" refers to variation information that is first determined to be a big hit or a small hit among starting information including the first variation and holding storage in the second normal game state, and in the second normal game state. When the first variable display of the second special pattern is performed, the information that is first determined as a big win or a small win is set to "1", and when the second special symbol is displayed for a second time, the first big win or small win is determined. The information to be judged is "2", the information to be judged as a big hit or a small hit first at the time of the third variation display of the second special symbol is "3", and the information to be judged as a big hit or a small hit is "3". It is set to "0" when it does not exist.

Then, from the "hit number within the reserved number of the second special symbols" and the "retraction information", after the end of this big win game state (big hit game state shifted from the small win state), it is possible to hit again with a big hit or a small hit. It is possible to grasp the "holding ream stock number" corresponding to the determined number of times.

For this reason, the determination table at the start of the second normal game state shown in FIG. , and the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the symbol effect pattern determination table for the second normal game state is determined.

[9-6-3. Second Normal Game State Symbol Production Pattern Determination Table]
The symbol effect pattern determination tables E2 to E8 for determining symbol effect patterns in the second normal game state will be described. FIG. 267 is an example of the symbol effect pattern determination table for the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The symbol effect pattern determination table E2 for the second normal game state shown in FIG. The variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from, the number of reserved second special symbols, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

Further, according to the symbol effect pattern determination table E2 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (1), even if the variation pattern command of the same special symbol, different symbols depending on the number of reserved second special symbols. An effect pattern (different effect) can be determined, and when the reserved number of second special symbols = 0 (final variation of the second normal game state), the effect indicating that the second normal game state is finished. is configured to determine the symbol effect pattern R3 in which is executed.

As shown in FIG. 267(2), the symbol effect pattern determination table E3 in the second normal game state is a table determined when per 1 variation (pullback information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks=0. There is, and the second special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol effect pattern determination table E4 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (3) is a table that is determined when per 1 variation (pullback information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, and the main control The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol effect pattern determination table E5 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (4) is a table that is determined when per one variation (pullback information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2, and the main control The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol effect pattern determination table E6 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (5) is a table determined when the second variation (pullback information 2) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 0 is determined, and the main control The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol effect pattern determination table E7 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (6) is a table determined when the second variation (pullback information 2) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 is determined, and the main control The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol effect pattern determination table E8 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (7) is a table determined when the 3rd variation hit (pullback information 3) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 0, and the main control The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

Then, according to the symbol effect pattern determination tables E2 to E8 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267, the order of fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is first determined as a big hit or a small hit (pullback information), Depending on the number of reserved consecutive stocks ("the winning number in the reserved number of second special symbols" and "pullback information"), different symbol effect patterns are configured to be determinable.

[9-6-4. Symbol effect pattern determination table for first time-saving game state]
The symbol performance pattern determination table E9 for determining the symbol performance pattern in the first time-saving game state will be described. FIG. 268 is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table for the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 268, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

Further, according to the pattern effect pattern determination table E9 of the first time-saving game state shown in FIG. When it is the variation pattern command (83H12H, see FIG. 237) of the first special symbol corresponding to the loss, the effect pattern 100 for executing the door effect is determined.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the design production patterns C4 to C9 of the second special symbol determined at the time of the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state are the boss battle production over the variation display time of the second special symbol and the design determination time. configured to run. Similarly, the performance pattern 100 determined at the time of the final variation of the first time-saving game state is constructed such that the door performance is executed over the variation display time of the first special symbol and the symbol fixing time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol production pattern C1 of the first special symbol corresponding to the big hit is configured so that the boss battle effect is executed over the variable display time of the first special symbol, and the first time-saving game. When it is the time of the final change of the state, the boss battle effect is executed again (the boss battle effect is looped and executed) over the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol.

[9-6-5. Second time-saving game state or third time-saving game state pattern production pattern determination table]
The symbol performance pattern determination tables E10 and E11 for determining the symbol performance pattern in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state will be described. FIG. 269 is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table other than the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko game machine. Moreover, FIG. 270 is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table at the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

(Other than the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state)
The symbol effect pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269 is referred to other than the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state.

In the symbol effect pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect stage, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other. ing.

Here, "production stage 30" indicates the male character stage in the second and third time-saving game states, and "production stage 31" indicates the female character stage in the second and third time-saving game states. . The "production stage 30" and "production stage 31" are stages that can be selected by the player when a predetermined selection condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, only two stages are provided as stages selectable by the player in the second and third time-saving gaming states, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, "production stage 40" indicates a premier stage for a female character that suggests that the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 1 in the second and third time-saving game states, and "production stage 41" is the second and third Shows a premier stage 1 for a male character suggesting that the number of pending stocks = 1 in the time-saving game state, and "production stage 42" is a male character that suggests the number of pending stocks ≥ 2 in the second and third time-saving gaming states. Premier stage 2 for characters is shown.

According to the pattern production pattern determination table E10 of the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Effect by different background display mode) is configured to be determinable.

However, the symbol effect patterns associated with the symbol effect pattern determination table E10 in the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state shown in FIG. Although different from the above, the decorative pattern production mode is that except for some big hits (variation pattern command 84H14H movie production), all the decorative patterns are scattered and high-speed fluctuation display is started, and the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped in order. Instead, the production of the normal variation mode in which all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed substantially at the same time is performed. This means that even in the symbol performance patterns associated with the symbol performance pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. The same is true except in one case.

(During the final change of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state)
At the time of the final variation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the symbol effect pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 270 is referred to.

In the symbol production pattern determination table E11 of the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. , and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

According to the symbol effect pattern determination table E11 of the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Different design effect patterns (different effects) can be determined.

Then, when the special symbol lottery is "losing" at the time of the final change in the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, when the number of pending special symbols ≥ 1 (second special symbol When there is a reserved number), any of the pattern production patterns F10 to F13 for executing a continuous battle entry production after performing a result production showing the game result of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state. is determined, and when the reserved number of the second special symbols is 0 (when there is no reserved number of the second special symbols), after performing the result performance, the door performance is performed. It is configured such that patterns F20 to F23 are determined. In addition, the production stages 40 to 42 are dedicated stages with the number of reserved consecutive stocks, and the special symbol lottery will not be "lost" at the time of the final change in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state. do not have.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the symbol production patterns F10 to 13 and F20 to 23 determined when the special symbol lottery is "losing" at the final change of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state are , During the variable display of the special symbols, the result effect is executed, and during the fixed display of the special symbols, the continuous battle rush effect or door effect is executed. A door presentation may be executed.

[9-6-6. Notice effect pattern determination table of window notice in first normal game state]
The notice effect pattern determination table for deciding the notice effect pattern of the window notice in the first normal game state will be explained. FIG. 271 is an example of an advance notice effect pattern determination table of the window advance notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 271, the notice effect pattern determination table of the window notice in the first normal game state includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect stage defining the effect display state, A selection rate (second random number value) is associated with an announcement effect pattern.

In the present embodiment, as the notice effect pattern, the notice effect pattern 1 that displays the characters "stage change" indicating the change of the stage, and the effect content of the pattern effect pattern "reach" that suggests reach. A notice performance pattern 2 in which characters are displayed, and a notice performance pattern 3 in which characters of ``extremely hot'' suggesting a high possibility of a big win as a lottery result of special pattern lottery are displayed. In this embodiment, only three types of forewarning effect patterns are provided, but the content of the forewarning may be subdivided and four or more display modes may be provided.

Then, when the advance notice effect pattern 1 in which characters of "stage change" indicating the stage change are displayed is determined, the effect stage 0 and the effect stage 1 in the first normal game state are alternately performed. will be switched. If three or more different stages are provided in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, the stages may be switched according to a predetermined rule (for example, a predetermined order).

[9-6-7. Suspended Notice Effect Pattern Decision Table for Suspended Change Notice in First Normal Game State]
A pending notice performance pattern determination table for determining the pending notice performance pattern of the pending change notice in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 272 is an example of a pending notice effect pattern determination table of the pending change notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 272, the holding notice effect pattern determination table of the holding change notice of the first normal game state includes the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 239) and the selection rate (third random value ) are associated with a pending notice effect pattern.

As will be described later, when a special symbol winning command is received, a pending image in a predetermined display mode is displayed based on the current effect stage and the number of pending special symbols. In the present embodiment, when the first normal game state is in the general effect state (production stages 0 and 1), "normal hold 1" is displayed as a predetermined display mode, and the first normal game state limited effect is displayed. When it is in the state (production stage 2), "normal suspension 2" is displayed as a predetermined display mode.

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the pending change notice, when it is in the general production state (production stage 0, 1) of the first normal game state, the change information of the special symbol indicates reach or more. "Special hold 1", or "Special hold 2", which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit as a lottery result of a lottery of super reach or higher and special symbols as variation information of special symbols, and the first normal When it is in the limited performance state (performance stage 2) of the game state, it can be changed to "special hold 3" suggesting that the possibility of a big hit is high as the lottery result of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the reach or more as the variation information of the special symbol. is configured to In the present embodiment, only three types of display modes are provided as the display modes of the pending change notice. good.

For example, if it is a hold notice effect pattern 10, "normal hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image at the time of winning the first start port 7120, and "normal hold 1" is changed to "special hold 1" by the change. The display mode is changed. If it is the suspension notice effect pattern 11, "special suspension 1" will be continuously displayed as the display mode of the suspension image from the time of winning to the first start port 7120 until the change.

In addition, if it is a hold notice effect pattern 20, "normal hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image at the time of winning the first start port 7120, and "normal hold 1" is changed to "special hold 2" by the change. The display mode is changed. If it is the suspension notice effect pattern 21, the “special suspension 2” is continuously displayed as the display mode of the suspension image from the time of winning to the first start port 7120 until the change.

In addition, if it is a hold notice effect pattern 30, "normal hold 2" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image at the time of winning the first start port 7120, and "normal hold 2" is changed to "special hold 3" by the change. The display mode is changed. If it is the suspension notice effect pattern 21, "special suspension 3" will be continuously displayed as the display mode of the suspension image from the time of winning to the first start port 7120 until the change.

[9-6-8. Winning notice effect pattern determination table for flash notice in first normal game state]
A winning notice performance pattern determination table for determining a winning notice performance pattern of flash notice in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 273 is an example of a win-time notice effect pattern determination table for flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 273, the first flash notice win-time notice effect pattern determination table in the normal game state includes the look-ahead command (see FIG. 239) received from the main control circuit 200 and the selection rate (fourth random value). ) are associated with the winning announcement performance pattern.

In the present embodiment, as the winning notice effect pattern, the winning notice effect pattern 1 in which the LED group 46 emits white light from the time of winning to the first start port 7120 until the change starts, and the first There is a prize-winning announcement effect pattern 2 in which the LED group 46 emits rainbow-colored light from the time of winning to the starting port 7120 until the change starts. In the present embodiment, only two types of winning notice effect patterns are provided, but three or more types of winning notice effect patterns may be provided by subdividing suggested contents.

In the present embodiment, when the advance notice effect pattern 1 at the time of winning is determined and the LED group 46 emits white light, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of a big win as a lottery result of the special pattern lottery. When the notice performance pattern 2 is determined and the LED group 46 emits rainbow color light, it is suggested that the lottery result of the lottery for the special pattern will be a big hit.

[9-6-9. Prohibited condition setting table for look-ahead effect]
A prefetch effect prohibition condition setting table for determining whether or not to execute the prefetch effect (suspended change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 274 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead effect in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 274, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect are a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of both the pending change notice and the flash notice, and prohibiting the execution of only the flash notice. A "first prohibition condition" is set.

Five common prohibition conditions 1 to 5 are set as common prohibition conditions. The "common prohibition condition 1" is established when there is a reserved number of second special symbols, and the "common prohibition condition 2" is during the control period of the second special symbol (during the variable display of the second special symbol). "Common prohibition condition 3" is met when the change display is five times before and after the stage change, "Common prohibition condition 4" is met when the full rotation effect is being displayed, and " The common prohibition condition 5" is established when the same prefetch effect is already being executed with reference to the prefetch flag.

If any one of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 5 is established, neither the pending change notice nor the flash notice will be executed.

As the first prohibition conditions, four prohibition conditions 1 to 4 are set. The "first prohibition condition 1" is established when the first start port 7120 is won in the case where the variation effect other than the normal variation is performed, and the "first prohibition condition 2" is the symbol of the first special symbol. Established when winning the first starting port 7120 during the period of design determination from 1500 ms before the determination, the "first prohibition condition 3" is within 500 ms from the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol The first starting port 7120 The "first prohibition condition 4" is established when winning at the first starting port 7120 during the demonstration display.

If any one of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the flash notice is not executed, but the pending change notice can be executed.

[9-6-10. Small hit production pattern decision table]
A small-hit performance pattern determination table for determining the performance pattern in the small-hit game state will be described. FIG. 275 is an example of a small hit effect pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 275, as a small hit effect pattern determination table, a small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) and a small hit end effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (2) with a table.

The small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) includes the small hit start display command received from the main control circuit 200 and the game state information (effect stage ), the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (fifth random number value), and the small hit start effect pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "small hit start effect pattern" is the effect that is performed at the start of the small win game state, and information that defines the display effect of characters etc., the sound effect, the change effect of the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc. Say.

In the present embodiment, as a small-hit start effect pattern determined when the small-hit start display command is received, a small-hit instructing that the normal character passes the game ball to the V winning opening 7156 in the small-hit game state. A start performance pattern 1, a small win start performance pattern 10 instructing the male character to pass the game ball through the V winning opening 7156 in the background A1 (for example, blue background) in the small win game state, and a small win game state. A small win start production pattern 11 in which the male character instructs the game ball to pass through the background A2 (for example, red background) to the V winning opening 7156, and the female character is in the background A1 (for example, blue background) in the small winning game state. A small winning start effect pattern 20 for instructing the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156, and a female character passing the game ball in the background A2 (for example, red background) to the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state. A small winning start performance pattern 21 to be instructed is provided.

And, according to the small hit start production pattern determination table shown in FIG. When it is in the game state (performance stage 20), it is configured such that a small winning start performance pattern 1 is determined as a normal small winning performance.

On the other hand, when it is in the second time-saving game state, it is possible to determine different small winning start performance patterns (different performances) based on the stages "performance stage 30" and "performance stage 31" selectable by the player. is configured to
Specifically, when it is the male character's "performance stage 30", the small winning start performance pattern 10 or the small winning performance start performance pattern 11 is determined, and when it is the female character's "performance stage 31", the small winning start performance is determined. A pattern 20 or a small winning start effect pattern 21 is determined.

In addition, as will be described later, the "production stage 41" and the "production stage 42" shift only from the "production stage 30" of the male character selected by the player, and the "production stage 40" is the female character selected by the player. The transition is made only from the "production stage 31" of the character. Therefore, when it is the "production stage 41" and the "production stage 42", the small winning start production pattern 10 or the small winning start production pattern 11 is determined similarly to the "production stage 30" of the male character, and the "production stage" is determined. 40", the small win start effect pattern 20 or the small win start effect pattern 21 is determined similarly to the female character's "production stage 31".

Furthermore, when it is in the second time-saving game state, a different small winning start effect pattern (different effect) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, the larger the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the easier it is for a male character to determine a small winning start performance pattern 11 rather than a small winning start performance pattern 10 when it is a male character performance stage (30, 41, 42), and a female character. (31, 40), the small winning start performance pattern 21 is more likely to be determined than the small winning start performance pattern 20.例文帳に追加

Thereby, when it is in the second time-saving game state, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested by the small winning start performance pattern.

The small hit end effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (2) includes the small hit end display command received from the main control circuit 200, the pending number of the second special symbols, the effect pattern for executing the door effect, and the small win. It is associated with the production stage after the end.

Here, the "small hit end production pattern" is a production performed at the end of the small winning game state, and information that defines display production of characters etc., sound production, change production of operation mode of production button 54, etc. Say. Further, as described above, the small hit end display command is a command transmitted when the small hit game state ends without the game ball passing through the V winning opening 7156 (see S7105 in FIG. 256). The time saving game state is also terminated.

In the present embodiment, as the small winning end effect patterns, a performance pattern 101 in which a door effect is executed and then a stage change effect to the effect stage 2 is executed, and after the door effect is executed, a continuous battle entry effect is executed. A production pattern 102 is provided.

Then, according to the small hit end production pattern determination table shown in FIG. When the number of reserved second special symbols is present at the end of the winning game state, the production pattern 102 and the production stage 10 are determined.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern 101 and the effect pattern 102 determined as the small-hit end effect pattern are performed at the end interval time when the small-hit game state is finished. A part may be performed in the variable display of the special design immediately after the end of the small winning game state. For example, a door effect may be executed at the end interval time of the small winning game state, and a stage change effect or a continuous battle entering effect may be executed in the variable display of the special symbols immediately after the end of the small winning game state.

[9-6-11. V passing effect pattern determination table]
A V passing effect pattern determination table for determining the V passing effect pattern in the small winning game state will be explained. FIG. 276 is an example of a V passing effect pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The “V passing effect pattern” is a effect that is performed when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state, and includes display effects such as characters, voice effects, and changes in the operation mode of the effect button 54. Refers to information that defines performances, etc.

As shown in FIG. 276, the V passage effect pattern determination table contains the V pass command received from the main control circuit 200 and the information (effect stage) of the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big hit or a small win. , the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (sixth random number value), and the V passage effect pattern are associated with each other.

In the present embodiment, the V-passing effect patterns are V-passing effect pattern 1 in which V is displayed in the normal display mode, V-passing effect pattern 10 in which V is displayed in the first display mode, and V-display in the first display mode. , V passage effect pattern 11 that displays "STOCK 1" suggesting that the number of stocks of holding stocks = 1, and V passage that displays "STOCK 2" that suggests the number of stocks of holding stocks = 2 while displaying V in the first display mode. It is provided with a performance pattern 12, a V passing performance pattern 20 which is V-displayed in a second display mode, and a V-passing performance pattern 21 which suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 and is V-displayed in a special display mode.

And, according to the V passing production pattern determination table shown in FIG. When it is the stage 20), it is configured such that the V-passing effect pattern 1 is determined as the normal V-passing effect.

On the other hand, when it is in the second time-saving game state, different V passing effect patterns (different effects) can be determined based on the effect stage.
Specifically, when the male character is in the "production stages 30, 41, 42", the V passage production pattern 10, the V passage production pattern 11, or the V passage production pattern 12 is determined, and the female character is in the "production stage 31, 42". 40", the V passing effect pattern 20 or the V passing effect pattern 21 is determined.

Furthermore, when in the second time-saving game state, different V passing effect patterns (different effects) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, in the case of male character production stages (30, 41, 42), when the number of stocks for the holding series is 1, the V passing production pattern 11 is more likely to be determined than the V passing production pattern 10. When the number of stocks≧2, the V passing effect pattern 12 is more likely to be determined than the V passing effect pattern 10.例文帳に追加Further, in the case of female character production stages (31, 40), the V passage production pattern 21 is more likely to be determined than the V passage production pattern 20 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1.

Thereby, when it is in the second time-saving game state, it is possible to suggest the number of reserved consecutive stocks by the V passing effect pattern.

Further, according to the small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) and the V passage effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The production is performed based on the same production stage selected in . As a result, it is possible to execute like a series of performances from the second time-saving game state to the small win game state, and it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG.

[9-6-12. Production stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state]
The effect stage selection table for determining the effect stage after the end of the jackpot game state will be explained. FIG. 277 is an example of an effect stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 277, the first normal game state, the second normal game state and the first time saving shown in FIG. Two effects of the production stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state in the game state and the production stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state in the second time-saving game state shown in FIG. 277 (2) It has a stage selection table.

As shown in FIG. 277(1), in the production stage selection table 1 after the end of the big win game state, the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win or a small win, the winning pattern, and the production stage correspond to each other. attached.

Here, the ``selection permission flag ON'' shown in FIG. 277(1) means that the selection permission flag is turned on ( allowed).

According to the production stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. When it is the "first special symbol_5R jackpot symbol 1" corresponding to the specified command "zA1", the transition to the first time-saving game state is performed, so that the stage for the chance to enter the Sengoku period in the first time-saving game state " Production stage 20" is selected.

According to the production stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. to 4”, if the game state at the time of winning is the second normal game state (production stage 10), the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving game state (production stage 20). In any case, the player can select "production stage 30" or "production stage 31" because the transition to the second time-saving game state occurs as a so-called first hit or pullback hit. "Selection permission flag ON" is set to make it possible.

As shown in FIG. 277 (2), the production stage selection table 2 after the end of the big win game state includes information (production stage) of the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win or a small win, and the above-mentioned V A passage effect pattern, the number of holding consecutive stocks, and the effect stage are associated with each other.

According to the effect stage selection table 2 after the end of the big win game state shown in FIG. 277 (2), the effect stage selected after the end of the big win game state depends on whether or not the number of reserved consecutive stocks is notified by the V passing effect pattern. different.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 30, when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing production pattern 10, the production stage 30 is selected again (the production stage 30 is continued). , When the V passing performance pattern 11 notifies the number of holding consecutive stocks=1, the performance stage 41 is selected, and when the V passing performance pattern 12 notifies the number of holding consecutive stocks=2, the performance stage 42 is selected. .

Further, when the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 41, when the number of holding consecutive stocks is not reported by the V passing production pattern 10, the production stage 30 is selected and the number of holding consecutive stocks is by the V passing production pattern 11.例文帳に追加=1 is reported, a performance stage 41 is selected (the performance stage 41 is continued), and when the V passing performance pattern 12 reports the number of reserved continuous stocks=2, a performance stage 42 is selected.

Further, when the game state at the time of winning is the performance stage 42, when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passage performance pattern 10 and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, the production stage 41 is selected and the V passage is performed. When the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the production pattern 10 but the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 2, the production stage 42 is selected (the production stage 42 is continued), and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1 by the V-passing production pattern 11. is notified, the production stage 42 is selected (the production stage 42 is continued).

As a result, the ``production stage 41'', which is the premier stage 1 for the male character, can suggest at least the number of reserved consecutive stocks=1 in the second and third time-saving game states, and the premier stage 2 for the male character. The "production stage 42" can suggest at least the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧2 in the second and third time-saving gaming states. Therefore, when the effects of the effect stages 41 and 42 are executed, the player can grasp the number of reserved consecutive stocks and play the game without anxiety.

Further, when the game state at the time of winning is the performance stage 31, when the V passing performance pattern 20 does not notify the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the performance stage 31 is selected (the performance stage 31 is continued), and the V passing performance is performed. When pattern 21 informs that the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1, production stage 40 is selected.

Further, when the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 40, when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passage production pattern 20 and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, the production stage 31 is selected and the V passage is performed. When the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the production pattern 20 but the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1, the production stage 40 is selected (the production stage 40 is continued), and the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 is obtained by the V-passing production pattern 21.例文帳に追加is notified, the performance stage 40 is selected (the performance stage 40 is continued).

As a result, the "production stage 40", which is the premier stage for the female character, can suggest that the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 in the second and third time-saving game states. Therefore, when the effect by the effect stage 40 is being executed, the player can be interested in how many reserved consecutive stocks there are and how long the effect stage 40 will continue.

[9-7-1. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 278, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S7500). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7510.

Note that the initialization process (S7500) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S7510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing for inputting data. In this data input process, both the read process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are performed.

In the reading process of the command input port 308, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. FIG. Further, when the operation information is input from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the input operation information is valid or invalid and is discarded. , the valid time for validating the input operation information, and the invalid period for invalidating the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are finished, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7520.

In S7520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S7510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7530.

At S7530, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, a production pattern is determined, and based on the determined production pattern, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) for operating various production devices are executed. , lamp requests, accessory requests, production button drive requests, etc.). The details of this rendering mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7540.

In S7540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 . The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7550.

In S7550, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 . The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7560.

In S7560, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 . Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7570.

At S7570, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a role product request to the role product control circuit 307 . Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7580.

At S7580, the sub CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310 . The button control circuit 310 changes the operation mode of the effect button 54 based on a message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 and performs drive control such as vibrating the effect button 54 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[9-7-2. Production Mode Determination Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 279, the details of the effect mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 278) will be described. FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing an example of effect mode determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7531, the sub CPU 301 executes effect pattern determination processing for determining the effect pattern. In this process, based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7, the mode of the sound effect output from the speaker 32, the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc. are determined. A pattern is determined. Details of this effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7532.

In S7532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7533.

In S7533, the sub CPU 301 executes processing for generating a drawing request. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S7532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7534.

In S7534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7535.

In S7535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7536.

In S7536, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product request generation process. In this process, a role item request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7537.

At S7537, the sub CPU 301 executes the process of generating the effect button drive request. In this process, an effect button drive request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 278).

[9-7-3. Effect pattern decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 280 to 282, details of effect pattern determination processing executed by sub CPU 301 during effect mode determination processing (see FIG. 279) will be described. Figures 280 to 282 are flowcharts showing an example of effect pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command".

When it is determined in S7531-1 that it is a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-2. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-3.

In S7531-2, the sub CPU 301 performs special symbol reserved number addition processing for adding the reserved number of special symbols.

In this special design reserved number addition process, it is determined whether it is a "first special design winning command" or a "second special design winning command", and when it is a "first special design winning command" , 1 is added to the number of reserved first special symbols in the work RAM 303 (counter for the number of reserved first special symbols), and when it is a "second special symbol winning command", the number of second special symbols reserved in the work RAM 303 Add 1 to (holding number counter of second special symbol). In addition, referring to the effect stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the display mode of the pending image is determined based on the current effect stage and the reserved number of special symbols added this time, and the pending image in the determined display mode is displayed on the display device 7. determine the pending display pattern to be displayed in the
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a special symbol "prefetch command".

If it is determined in S7531-3 to be a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-4. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-10.

At S7531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a pending information storage process for storing the contents of the special symbol starting information.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol prefetch command" or a "second special symbol prefetch command", and various parameters of the prefetch command (see FIG. 239) are stored in the main RAM 203. In the decorative design determination area, the first decorative design start storage area and the second decorative design start storage area of the work RAM 303 so as to correspond to the special design determination area, the first special design start storage area and the second special design start storage area Remember.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-5.

At S7531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect determination process for determining a look-ahead effect. Details of this look-ahead effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "design designation command".

If it is determined in S7531-10 that it is a "symbol designating command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "design designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-20.

At S7531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs decorative design determination processing for determining the decorative design.

In this decorative design determination process, the decorative design stop design is determined based on the type of the design designation command and the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and the determined stop design is selected. It is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 . Further, when the type of the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a big win or a small win, the information of the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to hold the game state at the time of winning. . Furthermore, if the game state at the time of winning is not the first normal game state (that is, the second normal game state and the first to third time-saving game states), 1 is added to the consecutive game counter of the work RAM 303. If the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state, the consecutive game counter of the work RAM 303 is cleared (set to 0).
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

When it is determined in S7531-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-21. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-30.

At S7531-21, the sub CPU 301 performs special symbol reserved number subtraction processing such as subtracting the reserved number of special symbols.

In this special symbol reserved number subtraction process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol variation pattern command" or a "second special symbol variation pattern command", and a "first special symbol variation pattern command" is determined. When , 1 is subtracted from the first special symbol reserved number counter of the work RAM 303, and when it is a "second special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the second special symbol reserved number counter of the work RAM 303. do. Also, a pending shift display pattern for shifting and displaying the pending image on the display device 7 is determined with respect to the pending image of the special symbol subtracted this time.
Furthermore, various parameters stored in the decorative symbol determination area, the first decorative symbol start storage area and the second decorative symbol start storage area of the work RAM 303 are transferred to the special symbol determination area, the first special symbol start storage area and the first special symbol determination area of the main RAM 203. 2 It is shifted in the same way as the special symbol start storage area.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-22.

At S7531-22, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) etc. stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs number counter update processing for updating various number counters.

In this number counter update process, when the game is in the normal game state, 1 is added to the "normal variation display number counter" of the work RAM 303 for counting the number of times the special symbols are displayed in the normal game state.
In addition, in the case of the time saving game state, when it is a variation pattern command of the first special symbol, subtract 1 from the "first time saving number sub-counter" and "second time saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303, When it is a variation pattern command of 2 special symbols, 1 is subtracted from the "second time saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303. - 特許庁
When the first look-ahead flag indicating that the pending change notice is being executed is on, the "first look-ahead number counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 to indicate that the flash notice is being executed. is on, 1 is subtracted from the "second prefetch counter" of the work RAM 303 to update it. When the first read-ahead number counter=0, the first read-ahead flag is turned off, and when the second read-ahead number counter=0, the second look-ahead flag is turned off.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-23.

At S7531-23, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "first normal game state". judge.

When it is determined in S7531-23 that the state is the "first normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-24. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "first normal game state", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-26.

At S7531-24, the sub CPU 301 performs a first symbol effect pattern determination process for determining a symbol effect pattern in the first normal game state.

In this first symbol effect pattern determination process, after acquiring the first random number value, the symbol effect pattern determination table E1 shown in FIG. A pattern performance pattern is determined on the basis of the performance stage stored in the area, the variable display frequency of the special pattern stored in the normal variable display frequency counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained first random number value.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-25.

At S7531-25, the sub CPU 301 performs a notice effect pattern determination process for deciding the notice effect pattern of the window notice of the first normal game state.

In this notice effect pattern determination processing, after obtaining the second random value, the window notice notice effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A notice effect pattern is determined based on the effect stage stored in the area and the acquired second random number value. Here, when the advance notice effect pattern 1 indicating the stage change is determined, the effect stage 0 stored in the effect stage storage area of the work RAM 303 is changed to the effect stage 1, or the effect stage 1 is changed to the effect stage 0. switch and update.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-26, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "second normal game state". judge.

When it is determined in S7531-26 that the state is the "second normal game state", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-27. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the “second normal game state”, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-29.

At S7531-27, the sub CPU 301 performs symbol effect pattern table determination processing for determining the symbol effect pattern determination table for the second normal game state.

In this symbol effect pattern table determination process, first, various parameters stored in the decorative symbol determination area and the second decorative symbol start storage area of the work RAM 303 are referred to, and "the number of hits in the reserved number of second special symbols" and " pullback information”.
Then, referring to the determination table at the start of the second normal game state shown in FIG. One of the symbol performance pattern determination tables E2 to E8 is determined based on the winning number in the reserved number of the second special symbols and the pullback information.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-28.

At S7531-28, the sub CPU 301 performs second symbol effect pattern determination processing for determining the symbol effect pattern in the second normal game state.

In this second symbol effect pattern determination process, after acquiring the first random number value, the symbol effect pattern determination table determined in S7531-27 is referred to, and the received special symbol variation pattern command and the number of the work RAM 303 A design performance pattern is determined based on the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the reserved number counter of two special symbols and the obtained first random number value.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-29, the sub CPU 301 performs a third symbol effect pattern determination process for determining a symbol effect pattern in the time saving game state.

In this third symbol effect pattern determination process, first, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and it is determined whether it is the first time-saving game state or the second and third time-saving game states.

In the third symbol effect pattern determination process, in the case of the first time-saving gaming state, after acquiring the first random number value, referring to the symbol effect pattern determination table E9 shown in FIG. A pattern effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command and the acquired first random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In the third symbol effect pattern determination process, when the second and third time-saving gaming states are present, it is determined whether or not the final variation of the time-saving gaming state is reached. Here, whether or not it is the final variation of the time saving gaming state, referring to the "first time saving number sub-counter" and "second time saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303, any time saving number sub-counter = 0 If so, it is determined to be the final variation.

In the third symbol effect pattern determination process, in the case of the second and third time-saving gaming states, when it is other than the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, with reference to the symbol effect pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. A symbol performance pattern is determined based on the special symbol variation pattern command and the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303. - 特許庁After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In the third symbol effect pattern determination process, in the case of the second and third time-saving gaming states, when it is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, with reference to the symbol effect pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. Based on the special symbol variation pattern command, the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the second special symbol pending number counter of the work RAM 303. to determine the pattern effect pattern. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command".

When it is determined in S7531-30 that it is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-31. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-32.

At S7531-31, the sub CPU 301 performs a symbol effect ending process for ending the symbol effect.

In this pattern effect end processing, referring to the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, "first time saving number sub-counter" and "second time saving number sub-counter", whether it is the final variation of the first to third time saving game state determine whether or not If it is other than the final variation of the first to third time-saving game states, pattern performance execution end data for ending the performance of the performance pattern 100 of the pattern performance pattern and the door performance are created. Further, in the case of the final variation of the first to third time-saving game states, the symbol performance is performed without creating the symbol performance execution end data in order to execute the performance over the special symbol variable display time and the symbol determination time. End the termination process.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-32, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol game end command".

When it is determined in S7531-32 that it is a "special symbol game end command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-33. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "special symbol game end command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-40.

At S7531-33, the sub CPU 301 performs an all-effect end process for ending all the effects related to the special symbol lottery, except for some effects such as the background.

In this all-effects end processing, all-effects execution end data for ending the execution of all the effects related to the lottery of special symbols is created. In the above S7531-31, even when the symbol production execution end data is not created in the case of the final variation of the first to third time saving game states, this all production execution end data allows the first to third time saving Execution of the performance by the symbol performance pattern at the time of the final variation of the final variation of the game state is finished.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "small hit start display command".

When it is determined in S7531-40 that it is the "small hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "small hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-42.

At S7531-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a small winning start effect determination process for determining a small winning start effect pattern for performing a small winning start effect.

In this small hit effect determination process, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative symbol start storage area of the work RAM 303 are referred to, and the "holding consecutive stock number", which is the number of parameters for a big hit or a small hit, is calculated, The calculated "holding ream stock number" is overwritten and stored in the work RAM 303's holding ream stock number counter.
Then, after obtaining the fifth random number value, referring to the small winning start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the acquired fifth random number, a small winning start production pattern is set. decide.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-42, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "V passing command".

If it is determined in S7531-42 that it is a "V passing command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-43. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not the "V passing command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-44.

At S7531-43, the sub CPU 301 performs a V passing effect determination process for determining a V passing effect pattern for performing a V passing effect.

In this V passing effect determination process, after obtaining the sixth random number value, the V passing effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A V passing effect pattern based on the effect stage stored in the effect stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the number of holding consecutive stocks stored in the holding consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the acquired sixth random number value. to decide.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-44, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "small hit end display command".

When it is determined in S7531-44 that it is the "small hit end display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-45. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "small hit end display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-50.

At S7531-45, the sub CPU 301 performs a small hit end effect determination process for determining an effect pattern for performing a small win end effect.

In this small-hit end effect determination process, the small-hit end effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A small winning end performance pattern and a performance stage are determined based on. Then, information on the determined performance stage is overwritten in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303 and stored.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "big hit start display command".

When it is determined at S7531-50 that it is the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-51. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-52.

At S7531-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot start effect determination process for determining a pattern for performing a jackpot start effect. In this big-hit start effect determination processing, the stop pattern storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the effect pattern of the big-hit start effect is determined according to the stop pattern (hit pattern).
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-52, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "big hit end display command".

When it is determined at S7531-52 that it is the "big hit end display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-53. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "big hit end display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-70.

At S7531-53, the sub CPU 301 performs an effect stage determination process for determining the effect stage after the end of the jackpot game state.

In this production stage determination process, the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the second time-saving game state.

If the game state at the time of winning in the production stage determination process is not the second time-saving game state (first normal game state, second normal game state and first time-saving game state), FIG. 277 ( 1) with reference to the effect stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. Based on the winning pattern, the production stage (production stage 20 or selection permission flag ON) is newly determined.

Here, when a new production stage 20 is determined, the information of the production stage 20 is overwritten and stored in the production stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the current production stage determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to S7531-54. to

Further, when the selection permission flag ON is determined, an operation effective time within the end interval time at the end of the jackpot game state is set, the initial selection stage is set as the performance stage 30, and the operation of the performance button 54 is input by the player. The selection stage of the performance stage 30 and the performance stage 31 is switched each time. Then, when the effective operation time has elapsed, the selection permission flag is turned OFF, the performance stage selected as the selection stage is newly determined, and the information of the newly determined performance stage is stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303. Overwrite and store. In addition, when the gaming state at the time of winning is the second time-saving gaming state, the selection permission flag is never turned ON. When this process ends, the process moves to S7531-54.

Further, when the game state at the time of winning in the performance stage determination process is the second time-saving game state, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative pattern start storage area of the work RAM 303 are referred to, and a big win or a small win is achieved. Then, the calculated "holding ream stock number" is overwritten in the work RAM 303 and stored in the holding ream stock number counter.
Then, referring to the production stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. A new production stage is determined based on the V passing effect pattern obtained and the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303 . After that, the newly determined performance stage information is overwritten in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303 and stored.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-54.

At S7531-54, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot end effect determination process for determining a pattern for effecting a jackpot end effect. In this jackpot end effect determination process, the stop pattern (hit pattern) stored in the stop pattern storage area of the work RAM 303, the effect stage newly determined in S7531-53, and the selection permission flag ON/OFF. A performance pattern of the end performance is determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command".

If it is determined at S7531-70 that it is a "game state specifying command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be the "game state specifying command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-80.

At S7531-71, the sub CPU 301 performs a state information update process of updating and storing the state information indicating the current game state in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 according to the type of the game state designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-72.

Also, in the state information update process of the present embodiment, when the state information is updated from the normal gaming state to the first time-saving gaming state (when the first time-saving gaming state starts), the work RAM 303 "second When "1 time saving number sub-counter" = 7 and "2nd time saving number sub counter" = 1 are set, and the state information is updated from the normal game state to the second time saving game state (the second time saving game state starts When doing), "first time saving number of times sub-counter" = 11 of work RAM 303, "second time saving number of times sub counter" = 5 will be set.

At S7531-72, the sub CPU 301 performs production stage shift determination processing for determining whether or not to shift the production stage.

In this effect stage transition determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the state information stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and the first to third time-saving game states or the second normal game state are changed. When the state information is changed to the first normal game state (when shifting to the first normal game state), the production stage 2 is determined, and the second normal game state is changed from the second and third time-saving game states. When the state information is changed to (when shifting to the second normal game state), the production stage 10 is determined, and when the state information is changed from the first normal game state to the third time-saving game state (When shifting to the B time-saving game state), the production stage 30 is determined. Next, referring to the normal variation display number counter of the work RAM 303, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the first normal game state, the production stage 0 is determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-80, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined at S7531-80 that the command is a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-81. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not a “demonstration display command”, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-90.

At S7531-81, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect pattern determination process for determining a demonstration display effect pattern for effecting a game standby effect.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-90, the sub CPU 301 also determines an effect pattern according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. FIG. For example, the cumulative payout information of the game balls is updated in response to the reception of the first big winning mouth winning command and the first big winning mouth winning command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).
[9-7-4. Look-ahead effect determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the details of the look-ahead effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 280) will be described. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing an example of prefetch effect determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7601, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether or not the current game state is the "first normal game state". do.

If it is determined in S7601 that the state is the "first normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7602. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the "first normal game state", the current look-ahead effect determination process is terminated, and the process is shifted to the animation request generation process (see FIGS. 279 and 280).

In S7602, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 274, and determines whether or not any prohibition condition among the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied.

If it is determined in S7602 that any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to S7606.

In S7603, the sub CPU 301 performs pending change notice effect determination processing for determining a hold change notice effect pattern of a pending change notice.

In this pending change notice effect determination process, after acquiring the third random value, the received prefetch command (see FIG. 239) and the acquired A pending notice effect pattern is determined based on the third random value. Then, when the suspension notice effect pattern for performing the suspension change notice is determined, the first look-ahead flag has already been set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 274) is met. (whether or not pending change notice is being executed). If the first look-ahead flag has already been set, the currently determined pending notice effect pattern is discarded, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first look-ahead flag is not set, the first look-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the first look-ahead flag is turned on), and the number counter of the first special symbol held in the work RAM 303 is referred to. Then, the number of times corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbols is set in the first look-ahead number counter of the work RAM 303, and the process is terminated.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7604.

In S7604, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 274, and determines whether or not any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied.

If it is determined in S7604 that any one of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that any one of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to S7606.

In S7605, the sub CPU 301 performs winning notice effect determination processing for determining a prize winning notice effect pattern of flash notice.

In this winning notice effect determination process, after acquiring the fourth random value, the flash notice winning notice effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Based on the fourth random number value, a winning announcement performance pattern is determined. Then, when the winning notice effect pattern for performing the flash notice is determined, the second look-ahead flag has already been set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 274) is established. (whether flash notice is being executed) or not. If the second look-ahead flag has already been set, the winning announcement performance pattern determined this time is discarded, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the second look-ahead flag is not set, the second look-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the second look-ahead flag is turned on), and the number counter of the first special symbol held in the work RAM 303 is referred to. Then, the number of times corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbols is set in the second look-ahead counter of the work RAM 303 .
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7606.

At S7606, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the received look-ahead command is a look-ahead command for the second special symbol, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 7140 in the first normal game state. judge.

In S7606, when it is determined that the received prefetch command is the second special symbol prefetch command, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7607. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received look-ahead command is not the look-ahead command of the second special symbol, the current look-ahead effect determination processing is terminated, and the processing is shifted to animation request generation processing (see FIGS. 279 and 280).

At S7607, the sub CPU 301 performs erasing processing of the prefetch information of the first special symbol. In this erasing process, the first look-ahead flag, the second look-ahead flag, the first look-ahead number counter, the second look-ahead number counter, the pending notice effect pattern, and the winning notice effect pattern are erased (=0).

Even if the prefetch effect of the pending change notice or the flash notice is performed in the first normal game state, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140, the execution of the prefetch effect is stopped. It's becoming

[9-8. Production content]
An example of the effect content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with respect to the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, and the like.

(Normal display image)
First, referring to FIG. 284, the normal display image in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 284 is an example of a normal display image in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 284, in the normal display image in the first normal game state, the left symbol 7071L as the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, the middle A pattern 7071C and a right pattern 7071R are configured to be displayable.

In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-design 7072 as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the first special design, and a second design as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design. The secondary symbol 7073 is configured to be displayed in a small size.

In this embodiment, when the special symbols are variably displayed in the first normal game state, in addition to the variability display of the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, the middle symbol 7071C and the right symbol 7071R, the special symbols are displayed. The variable display of the sub-symbol of the first sub-symbol 7072 or the second sub-symbol 7073 is also performed according to the type. This is the same for the second normal game state and the first to third time-saving game states. However, when the variable display of the special symbols is performed in the first time-saving gaming state, the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, the middle symbol 7071C and the right symbol 7071R are not displayed, and the first sub symbol 7072 or the second The variable display of only the sub-symbol 7073 is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, the main patterns of the left pattern 7071L, the middle pattern 7071C and the right pattern 7071R are composed of numbers "1 to 9" and character patterns. It will be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the sub-symbols of the first sub-symbol 7072 and the second sub-symbol 7073 are composed of symbols such as "○, ×, □, △". The combination is configured to be statically displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbols can be displayed, and according to the reserved number of the first special symbols, the first special symbol start storage area ( 1) 1st reserved image 7074a indicating that starting information is stored in 1), 2nd reserved image 7074b indicating that starting information is stored in 1st special symbol starting storage area (2), 1st special symbol A third reserved image 7074c indicating that the starting information is stored in the starting storage area (3), and a fourth reserved image 7074d indicating that the starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4). configured to be visible. In addition, corresponding to the pending image, the pending image 7075 indicating that the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner can be displayed. In this embodiment, the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbols is not displayed, but the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbols may be displayed.

(Card effect and door effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the card effect and the door effect when the second special symbol is varied and displayed in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 285 is an example of a display image for explaining card effects and door effects in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In the description of the card effects, the symbols attached in FIG. 284 are omitted because the letters are small and lack visibility and may interfere with the description of the effect contents. Also, the illustration of the first sub-symbol 7072 and the second sub-symbol 7073, which are displayed extremely small, is also omitted. This is the same for the effects described in FIGS. 286-292.

The left column (a), (b-1), (c-1), and (d-1) of FIG. 285 are the special symbol fluctuation display times=599 in the first normal game state, and the second special symbol. This is an example of the card effect executed in the symbol effect pattern A14 (see FIG. 265) when the result of the lottery is a big hit.

In addition, the right column (a), (b-2), (c-2), and (d-2) of FIG. This is an example of the door effect executed in the effect pattern 100 (see FIG. 265) without executing the card effect when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.

FIG. 285(a) is an example of the display image before starting the variable display of the 599th rotation of the second special symbol in the first normal game state.

FIG. 285(b-1) is an example of the display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the card effect is started. As shown in FIG. 285(b-1), when the pattern effect pattern A14 (see FIG. 265) is determined and the card effect is started, the chance card with the words "big win", "small win", and "loss" is turned over. Then, the cards are shuffled, and an effect is produced in which one of the cards is selected. In addition, the left, middle, and right main symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify them so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

FIG. 285(c-1) is an example of a display image when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the effect result of the card effect is displayed. As shown in FIG. 285(c-1), when one card is selected in the card effect, the card is slowly reversed, and a chance card with a big win character is displayed.

FIG. 285(d-1) is an example of a display image in which a big win is reported as a lottery result of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol ends. As shown in FIG. 285(d-1), when the chance card with the character of the big win is displayed, the main symbols of the left, middle and right symbols are displayed in reduced size at the lower right of the display area. It is displayed in a large size in the center of the area, all the main symbols are stop-displayed with the same symbols, and the player is notified of the big win.

FIG. 285(b-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the door effect is started without executing the card effect. As shown in FIG. 285(b-2), when the effect pattern 100 (see FIG. 265) is determined and the door effect is started, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right sides of the display area, and the doors are half-open for a predetermined period. A production is performed that makes the door rattle. Here, the effect pattern of the door effect does not specify the end time of the effect, and the effect of rattling the half-open door is repeatedly performed over a predetermined period until the end of the effect is instructed.

FIG. 285(c-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the door effect ends. As shown in FIG. 285 (c-2), when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (when the special symbol effect stop command is received), the effect of closing the door is performed, and all the decorative symbols are stopped. .

FIG. 285(d-2) is an example of the display image when starting the variable display of the special symbols for the 600th rotation, continuing from FIG. 285(c-2). As shown in FIG. 285 (d-2), the door is opened when starting the variable display of the 600th special symbol from the first normal game state, and the first normal game state to B time-saving game state ( 3rd time-saving game state) is notified by the background or the like. In addition, as described above in S7531-72 of FIG. 285, when the first normal game state is shifted to the B time saving game state (third time saving game state), the male character production stage 30 is used as the initial value production stage. will be determined.

(Sengoku Rush Chance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the rendering of the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving gaming state will be described. FIG. 286 is an example of a display image for explaining the production of the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In FIG. 286, when the lottery result of the second special symbol in the first time-saving gaming state is a big hit or a small hit, the symbol performance patterns C4 to C7 (see FIG. 268) are executed as the performance of the Sengoku rush chance. This is an example of a boss battle production.

FIG. 286(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving gaming state is started. As shown in FIG. 286(a), in the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving game state, as an example, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit right in the upper right of the display area and a Sengoku rush chance A background of "production stage 20" indicating the stage is displayed.

FIG. 286(b) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time-saving gaming state and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. .

Here, as described above in FIG. 237 (1) and FIG. 268, the lottery of the second special symbol performed by entering the game ball into the second start port 7140 in the first time-saving gaming state is the first The final fluctuation time of the time-saving gaming state is reached, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely short fluctuation display time (0.2 seconds), and the symbol confirmation time of the second special symbol is extremely long The symbol confirmation time (89 seconds).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 286(b), when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time-saving gaming state, the main symbol is not displayed, and the second sub-symbol 7073 is displayed as a variable display. It will stop immediately. At this time, the boss battle effect started during the variable display of the second special symbol does not end in accordance with the stop display of the second special symbol, and the boss character is continuously displayed.

FIG. 286(c) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed while the second special symbol is being displayed for confirmation. As shown in FIG. 286(c), when the second special symbol is displayed for confirmation, an effect of fighting a boss character is performed, and the boss battle effect started during the variable display of the second special symbol continues. is running.

FIG. 286(d) is an example of a display image when the effect result of the boss battle effect performed during the symbol confirmation display of the second special symbol is displayed. As shown in FIG. 286(d), when the boss character wins the battle, it is notified that the second special symbol is a big win or a small win as a result of the lottery, and the state shifts to a big win game state or a small win game state. Become.

At the end of the jackpot game state (including the case of passing through the small win game state) from the first time-saving game state, the selection permission flag is turned ON, and the player can select the Sengoku time production stage. Become.

(Selection of Production Stage by Player)
Next, referring to FIG. 287, the selection of the Sengoku Time production stage by the player will be described. FIG. 287 is an example of a display image for explaining the selection of the effect stage by the player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 277 (1), if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state and the winning symbol corresponds to the symbol designation command "zA2-4", When the game state is the second normal game state, and when the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving game state, in either case, the second time-saving game is a so-called first win or pullback win. Since the game state is shifted to the game state, it is possible for the player to select the production stage of the Sengoku time at the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state.

FIG. 287(a) is an example of a display image when selecting the Sengoku time production stage in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 286(a), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right, an effect button operation image indicating the operation of the effect button 54, and an effect A remaining time image showing the remaining time of the operation effective time of the button 54, an operation explanation image explaining the operation method of stage selection by the production button 54, a male character stage (production stage 30) and a female character stage (production stage 30) A stage selection image showing the selection of and is displayed.

FIG. 287(b) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku time effect stage is determined in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 286(b), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, when the operation effective time of the production button 54 has passed (when the remaining time image becomes zero), the selected production The stage will be decided as the production stage of Sengoku Time.

(Sengoku Time production)
Next, the Sengoku time production will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG. FIG. 288 is an example of a display image for explaining the Sengoku time effect when the male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 289 is an example of a display image for explaining the Sengoku time production when the female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 288(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku time production in the second time saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 288(a), in the Sengoku time production in the second time saving game state, as an example, a remaining number image showing the number of times the Sengoku time is displayed in the upper left of the display area shows the number of times the Sengoku time changes (second time saving number of times). , an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right, and a background of the Sengoku Time production stage are displayed. In FIG. 288(a), a star-patterned background of "production stage 41" indicating premier stage 1 for the male character (the number of reserved consecutive stocks=1) is displayed. Also, the "production stage 30" indicating the normal stage of the male character has a plain background.

FIG. 288(b) shows that the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the second time-saving gaming state, and the Sengoku time production (for example, the pattern production pattern It is an example of the display image of the effects executed by P10, P13, and P16 (see FIGS. 269 and 270). As shown in FIG. 288(b), a male character and a star-patterned background are displayed corresponding to the "production stage 41", and the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are displayed. The main symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify it. At this time, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns all start to fluctuate at high speed, and the left and right patterns do not temporarily stop in order, and all the patterns are displayed. Approximately at the same time, the production of the normal variation mode in which the stop display is performed is performed.

FIG. 288(c) shows Sengoku time production (for example, pattern production patterns P10, P13, It is an example of the display image of the effect executed by P16. As shown in FIG. 288(c), the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols stop at the same symbol. It is displayed, and it is notified that the lottery for the second special symbol has resulted in a big win or a small win. When the lottery for the second special pattern is lost, the main patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area and are stopped and displayed as scattered patterns.

FIG. 288(d) shows the Sengoku time production performed when the male character production stage is selected and the small winning game state is started (for example, the production executed by the small winning start production pattern 10 (FIG. 275). ))) is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 288(d), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the male character directs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in the background A1 (for example, blue background). At this time, the background A1 (eg, blue background) or background A2 (eg, red background) can suggest the number of retained ream stocks in advance.

FIG. 288(e) shows that the male character's production stage is selected, and the Sengoku time production performed when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state (for example, executed by the V passing production pattern 11) This is an example of the display image of the effect (see FIG. 276)). As shown in FIG. 288(e), when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state, V is displayed in the first display mode, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, the reserved consecutive stocks are displayed. "STOCK1" suggesting that the number=1 can be displayed. In this way, when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 in the male character's production stage, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be notified.

FIG. 289(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku time production in the second time saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 289(a), in the Sengoku time production in the second time saving game state, as an example, a remaining number image indicating the number of times the Sengoku time remaining variation is displayed (second time saving number) is displayed on the upper left of the display area. , an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right, and a background of the Sengoku Time production stage are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 289(a), a heart-patterned background of "production stage 40" indicating a premier stage for a female character (the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1) is displayed. In addition, the "production stage 31" indicating the normal stage of the female character has a plain background.

FIG. 289(b) shows that the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the second time-saving gaming state, and the Sengoku time production (for example, the pattern production pattern It is an example of the display image of the effects executed by P12, P15, and P18 (see FIGS. 269 and 270). As shown in FIG. 289(b), a female character and a heart-patterned background are displayed corresponding to the "production stage 40", and the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are displayed. The main symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify it. At this time, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns all start to fluctuate at high speed, and the left and right patterns do not temporarily stop in order, and all the patterns are displayed. Approximately at the same time, the production of the normal variation mode in which the stop display is performed is performed.

FIG. 289(c) shows a Sengoku time production (for example, pattern production patterns P12, P15, It is an example of the display image of the effect executed by P18. As shown in FIG. 289(c), the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols displayed in reduced form at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols stop at the same symbol. It is displayed, and it is notified that the lottery for the second special symbol has resulted in a big win or a small win. When the lottery for the second special pattern is lost, the main patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area and are stopped and displayed as scattered patterns.

In FIG. 289(d), the effect stage of the female character is selected, and the Sengoku time effect performed when the small win game state is started (for example, the effect executed by the small win start effect pattern 20 (FIG. 275) ))) is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 289(d), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the female character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in the background A1 (for example, blue background). At this time, the background A1 (eg, blue background) or background A2 (eg, red background) can suggest the number of retained ream stocks in advance.

FIG. 289(e-1) is performed when the female character effect stage is selected and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state. It is an example of the display image of the Sengoku time effect (for example, the effect executed by the V passing effect pattern 20 (see FIG. 276)). As shown in FIG. 289(e-1), when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, the V can be displayed in the second display mode.

FIG. 289(e-2) is performed when the female character effect stage is selected and the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state when the number of retained consecutive stocks≧1. It is an example of the display image of the Sengoku time effect (for example, the effect executed by the V passing effect pattern 21). As shown in FIG. 289(e-2), when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1, it is possible to display V in a special display mode.

In this way, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the female character production stage, it is possible to notify that the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 (whether or not there is the number of reserved consecutive stocks).

(Small hit game state: puncture)
Next, with reference to FIG. 290, the effect performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state (so-called puncture) will be described. FIG. 290 is an example of a display image for explaining an effect performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 290(a) is an example of the display image of the Sengoku time production performed when the male character production stage is selected and the small winning game state is started. As shown in FIG. 290(a), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the male character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156. It is assumed that the game ball did not pass through the V winning opening 7156 .

FIG. 290(b) shows an effect performed when the small hit game state ends without the game ball passing through the V winning opening 7156 (for example, an effect executed by the effect patterns 101 and 102 (see FIG. 275)). is an example of a display image of . As shown in FIG. 290(b), in the end interval time of the small winning game state, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right sides of the display area, and the half-open doors rattle over a predetermined period, and then the doors are closed. A door performance will be held.

FIG. 290 (c-1) is an effect performed when there is a reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the small hit game state after the door effect is performed (for example, effect performed by effect pattern 102) is an example of a display image of . As shown in FIG. 290 (c-1), when there is a reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state, the door is opened, and a dedicated stage (production stage) of the continuous battle in the second normal game state 10), a continuous battle rush effect is performed to notify that the game will shift to 10).

FIG. 290 (c-2) is an effect performed when there is no pending number of second special symbols at the end of the small hit game state after the door effect is performed (for example, effect executed by effect pattern 101) is an example of a display image of . As shown in FIG. 290 (c-2), when there is no reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state, the door is opened and the seaside stage in the limited production state in the first normal game state (production A stage change effect is performed to notify that the game will shift to stage 2).

(End of Sengoku Time)
Next, with reference to FIG. 291, the effect performed when the Sengoku time ends will be described. FIG. 291 is an example of a display image for explaining an effect when the Sengoku time ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 291(a) is an example of the display image of the Sengoku time production performed when the variable display of the special symbol is started in the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 291(a), a male character and a plain background are displayed corresponding to the "production stage 30", and at the lower right of the display area, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern are displayed in reduced size. The main pattern is variably displayed.

FIG. 291(b) shows a Sengoku time result production (for example, by design production patterns F10 to F13, F20 to F23) that is performed when the special pattern lottery is determined to be a loss and the special pattern is displayed in a variable display. This is an example of the display image of the effect to be executed (see FIG. 270). As shown in FIG. 291(b), as the game result of the Sengoku time, information on the number of big wins, acquisition points indicating the number of game balls paid out to the player, and the like are displayed. The main patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern, which are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area, are stopped and displayed in different patterns.

FIG. 291(c-1) is a display image of a continuous battle rush effect that is performed while special symbols are being confirmed and displayed when there is a reserved number of second special symbols when the variable display of special symbols ends. is an example. As shown in FIG. 291 (c-1), during the symbol confirmation display of the special symbols, a continuous battle entering effect that informs the transition to a dedicated stage (performance stage 10) of the continuous battle in the second normal game state. is done.

FIG. 291(c-2) is an example of the display image of the door effect that is performed during the symbol confirmation display of the special symbols when there is no pending number of the second special symbols when the variable display of the special symbols is finished. is. As shown in FIG. 291 (c-2), while the special symbol is being displayed for confirmation, a half-open door is displayed from the left and right sides of the display area, and the half-open door rattles for a predetermined period of time, and then the door closes. A door performance is performed.

(Direction of continuous battle)
Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the effect of the continuous battle in the second normal game state will be described. FIG. 292 is an example of a display image for explaining a continuous battle effect in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In FIG. 292, when the second variation is hit as the result of the lottery of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the first variation is the symbol rendering pattern R2 (see FIG. 267). , the second variation is an example in which a continuous battle effect is executed by symbol effect patterns R10 and R11 (see FIG. 267).

FIG. 292(a) is an example of a display image when the continuous battle effect in the second normal game state is started. As shown in FIG. 292(a), in the production of the continuous battle in the second normal game state, as an example, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit right in the upper right of the display area, and Displayed on the left side are 1st to 3rd round display images corresponding to the number of variable display times of the second special symbol, and a background of a continuous battle dedicated stage (production stage 10) imitating an arena in the center of the display area. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area to the extent that they can be identified by the player so as not to interfere with the performance of the continuous battle.

FIG. 292(b) is an example of the display image of the effect of the continuous battle performed when the variation display of the second special symbol of the first variation is started in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(b), as a continuous battle effect, a main character and a rival character appear and fight each other (continuous battle effect according to pattern effect pattern R2).

FIG. 292(c) is an example of the display image of the continuous battle effect performed when the variation display of the second special symbol of the first variation ends in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(c), as a result of the continuous battle, the main character is superior and draws even though the confrontation cannot be settled.

FIG. 292(d) is an example of the display image of the continuous battle effect performed when the second special symbol variation display of the second variation is started in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(d), as a continuous battle effect, a continuous battle effect (continuous battle effect by pattern effect patterns R10 and R11) is performed in which the main character and the rival character continue to face each other.

FIG. 292(e) is an example of the display image of the continuous battle effect performed when the second special symbol variation display of the second variation ends in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(e), as a result of the successive battles, the confrontation is settled and the main character wins. Further, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area are all the same symbols and are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, all the same symbols are temporarily stopped and the main symbol is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a big win or a small win has occurred.

Thus, in the seventh pachinko game machine, the transition to the first normal game state, the second normal game state, the first time-reduction game state, the second time-reduction game state and the third time-reduction game state Since an appropriate performance is performed according to each game state, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine, in the look-ahead effect (holding change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state, as described with reference to FIG. Since the propriety is determined, the look-ahead effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the seventh pachinko game machine, even when an irregular game mode is played, an appropriate performance pattern is executed in accordance with the transition of the game state to the irregular game mode. Therefore, it is possible to maintain and improve the playability.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine, as described in FIG. 244 and the like, the first time-saving game state is quickly terminated by setting the variation display time of the second special symbol to the extremely short first variation display time. , and the specified number for the normal electric accessory 7146 is set to 1, and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol. It is possible to control the first time-saving game state in which the reserved number of 2 special symbols is not stored. Also, it is possible to control the second time-saving game state for storing the number of reserved second special symbols.

Further, in the seventh pachinko game machine, as described in FIG. 286 and the like, in the production of the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving game state, the production is performed over the variable display time of the second special symbol and the design determination time. Since it is executed, the degree of freedom of performance can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as described in FIGS. 288 and 289, etc., "Sengoku Time" is a period from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small winning game state. In , since the performance based on the same performance stage is performed, it can be executed like a series of performances from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small win game state, making the game more interesting. can be improved. Furthermore, in the Sengoku time production, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested by the small winning start production pattern and the V passing production pattern, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

(others)
The seventh pachinko game machine described above can apply each other's techniques between the embodiments including the modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Also, the effects described in the seventh pachinko game machine are merely enumerations of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the seventh pachinko gaming machine as long as there is no discrepancy in the game characteristics and control.

[10. Eighth pachinko machine]
Next, the eighth pachinko game machine will be described. The eighth pachinko machine, like the third pachinko machine, is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind machine. The eighth pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of game playability, presentation contents, and the like, and along with this, some of the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are also different.

It should be noted that the eighth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the second special symbol than the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variation machine in which the starting condition of the special symbol is preferentially established. However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

In addition, the eighth pachinko game machine counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have shifted to the jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state), and when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number (for example, 100 times) , It has a "number of times limiter function" that partially regulates the game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, the eighth pachinko machine has a "count limiter function" and counts the total number of jackpot balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day. It also has a "rollout ball limiter function" that partially regulates the game state that shifts after the jackpot game state ends when a predetermined number of hit balls (for example, 100,000) is reached.

Hereinafter, in describing the eighth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are assigned to the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine, and detailed description of the configuration and processing will be omitted.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, "a game ball is entered" at a ball entrance (for example, a start opening or a big winning opening) that can provide a player with a predetermined profit (payout of a game ball, transition of a game state). "Playing the ball" is also referred to as "winning" as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the “variable display” of the symbols includes, for example, both “variable display” in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner and “stopped display” in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display".

[10-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 293, the game board unit 8010 included in the eighth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 8010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) as in the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 293 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 8010 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 8010 includes a game panel 8100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 8100, and on the front side surface of the game panel 8100, there is a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow. formed.

As shown in FIG. 293, the game board unit 8010 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine mainly includes a passage gate 8126, a second start port 8140, a normal electric The structure and arrangement of the role product unit 8145, the first special electric role product unit 8130, and the second special electric role product unit 8150 are different. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

In addition, the first start port 8120 arranged in the game area 105 of the eighth pachinko game machine is functionally common to the first start port 120 arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. However, due to the relationship with the second start port 8140, a different code from the first pachinko game machine will be used to explain again.

(passage gate)
The passage gate 8126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 8145, which will be described later, in the right area 107, and allows a right-handed game ball to pass (a left-handed game ball has difficulty or impossibility to pass). ing. The passage gate 8126 is provided with a passage gate switch 8127 (see later-described FIG. 294) for detecting passage of a game ball to the passage gate 8126 . In this embodiment, the passage gate 8126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right region 107, but the passage gate 8126 may be arranged below the ordinary electric accessory unit 8145 in the right region 107. good.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 8126, it will be used for normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination processing) and normal symbol variable display. In this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passage gate 8126, no prize ball is paid out.

Also, the passage gate 8126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating (that the special symbol for the big hit is stopped and displayed), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 8126, the accessory continuous actuating device is operated, and the jackpot game state is performed. You may make it shift to .

(First start port)
The first starting port 8120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit left-handed to enter, and a game ball hit right-handed by a game nail or the like to enter. Configured to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 8120 is provided with a first starting port switch 8121 (see FIG. 294 described later) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first starting port 8120 .

When the game ball enters the first start port 8120, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination processing), the variable display of the first special symbol, the prize balls for the first start port (for example, 3 game balls) are paid out. The processing after the game ball enters the first starting port 8120 will be described later in detail.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 8140 is located in the right region 107 and below (downstream side) a passage gate 8126 described later, and is provided in a normal electric accessory unit 8145 described later, and is a game ball hit to the right. is possible to enter (a game ball hit left is difficult or impossible to enter). The second starting port 8140 is provided with a second starting port switch 8141 for detecting entry of a game ball into the second starting port 8140 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second starting port 8140 is arranged below (downstream side) of the passage gate 8126, so that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 8126 is operating, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 8140.

When the game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination processing), the variable display of the second special symbol, the prize ball for the second starting port (for example, 1 game balls) are paid out. The processing after the game ball enters the second starting port 8140 will be described later in detail.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 8145 is arranged in the right area 107 below (downstream side) the passage gate 8126, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric accessory unit 8145 is a unit body that integrates the second start port 8140, the second start port switch 8141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start port 8140, and the normal electric accessory 8146. is.

The ordinary electric accessory 8146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter for ordinary electricity 8147 that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 8148 (see FIG. 294 described later) that operates the shutter for ordinary electricity 8147 . The normal electric accessory 8146, that is, the normal electric shutter 8147, has an open state in which a game ball can or easily enter the second start port 8140, and a game ball cannot or cannot enter the second start port 8140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states.

Specifically, the general electric shutter 8147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed near the entrance of the second start port 8140 and a flat plate-like ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second start port 8140. consists of When the general electric shutter 8147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion is positioned in a region facing the entrance of the second start port 8140 and prevents the ball from entering the second start port 8140. , the flat plate-shaped ball entry guide portion is buried in the surface of the game panel 8100 and allows the game ball to flow downward without receiving the game ball flowing down to the right region 107 . On the other hand, when the general electric shutter 8147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion is positioned in an avoidance area (for example, a gap from the top of the game nail cap to the protective glass 43) that does not face the entrance of the second start opening 8140. ) so as not to hinder the entry of the ball into the second starting port 8140, and the flat ball entry guide portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 8100 and receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, The received game ball is guided to the second starting port 8140. - 特許庁Note that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 8147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 8146 is in the open state of the second start port 8140, when a specified number (for example, one) of game balls for normal electric is entered, the opening time has not passed. Both cause the second starting port 8140 to be closed.

(First special electric accessory unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 8130 is arranged below (downstream side) the passage gate 8126, the normal electric accessory unit 8145, and the second special electric accessory unit 8150 described later in the right area 107. The first special electric accessory unit 8130 is provided upstream of at least one of the passage gate 8126, the normal electric accessory unit 8145, and the second special electric accessory unit 8150, which will be described later, in the right region 107. Alternatively, it may be provided in the left area 106 .

The first special electric accessory unit 8130 includes a first big winning hole 8131 and a first big winning hole count switch 8132 (see FIG. 294 described later) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 8131. , a unit body that integrates a first special electric shutter 8134 that can move back and forth and a first special electric solenoid 8135 (see FIG. 294 to be described later) that operates the first special electric shutter 8134 .

The first big winning hole 8131 is a winning hole that is opened at the time of a big win, and the maximum winning number (for example, 10 individual) are stipulated. Each time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 8131, prize balls for the first big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The transition of the first big winning port 8131 from the closed state to the open state is the first route when a special stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. A game in which the second big winning hole 8151 is opened by deriving a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "small hit", and the player enters the opened second big winning hole 8151. It is the time of the second route when the ball enters the V winning hole 8156 in the second big winning hole 8151 .

The first special electric shutter 8134 is operated by a first special electric solenoid 8135 (see FIG. 294 described later) to open a state in which a game ball can or easily enter the first large winning opening 8131, and a first large A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning opening 8131 can be changed.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 8134 is configured by an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivotally supported. When the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the open state, the opening/closing door falls down to the front side, the first big winning opening 8131 opens, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and the received game ball is placed in the second position. Guide to the 1st prize winning opening 8131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted to close the first big winning port 8131, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning port 8131. Become. Note that instead of the first special electric shutter 8134, a movable member that is pivotally supported at the bottom and that can be tilted to either the left or right side may be employed.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 8150 is provided below (downstream side) the passage gate 8126 and the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right area 107 . The second special electric accessory unit 8150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passage gate 8126 or the normal electric accessory unit 8145, or may be provided in the left region 106.

The second special electric accessory unit 8150 includes a second big winning hole 8151, a second big winning hole count switch 8152 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 8151, and a second big winning hole 8151. A second special electric shutter 8154 that can open and close the second special electric shutter 8154, and a second special electric solenoid 8155 (see FIG. 294 described later) that opens and closes the second big winning opening 8151 by operating this second special electric shutter 8154, A V winning opening 8156 through which the game ball entering the second big winning opening 8151 can pass, a V winning opening switch 8157 detecting that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 8156, and entering the second big winning opening 8151 A loss port 8158 through which the game ball that did not enter the V winning port 8156 among the game balls that played can pass, a V shutter 8159 that opens and closes the V winning port 8156, and this V shutter 8159 is operated to open the V winning port 8156. It is a unit integrated with a V-shutter solenoid 8160 (see FIG. 294 to be described later) that opens and closes.

The second big winning hole 8151 is a winning hole that is opened at the time of a small win. stipulated. Each time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 8151, prize balls for the second big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 8154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second large prize winning port 8151 by advancing, and a second special electric shutter 8154 is retracted backward to allow the game ball to enter the second large prize winning port 8151. It is configured so that the ball can transition between a possible or easy open state.

The V winning opening 8156 is a winning opening that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 8159, and is a winning opening that triggers control to the jackpot game state via the above-described second route when the game ball passes through.

When the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 8151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156 is regarded as the first round, and the game ball to the V winning hole 8156 (after the second round), a round game is executed to shift the first big winning port 8131 from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when it is controlled to the big hit game state through the second route, even after the game ball passes through the V winning opening 8156 (after the second round), the second big winning opening 8151 changes from the closed state to the open state. A transitional round game may be played for a predetermined number of rounds.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the first big winning opening 8131, etc., one attacker may be opened in the V winning opening and the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating the "small hit" is derived, the first big winning hole 8131 is opened, and the game ball enters the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 8131. is entered, the jackpot game state (jackpot game state through the second route) may be controlled.

The losing hole 8158 is configured such that a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 8151 but has not passed through the V winning hole 8156 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss opening 8158 is discharged out of the machine. It should be noted that, when a small hit, all the game balls that have entered the opened second big winning hole 8151 pass through the losing hole 8158, and if there is no game ball passing to the V winning hole 8156, the small winning game state It is not shifted to the jackpot game state from .

The V shutter 8159 is operated by a V shutter solenoid 8160 (see FIG. 294 to be described later) to open a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156, and a game opening to the V winning opening 8156. It is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the ball can (or easily) pass through.

In particular, in the eighth pachinko game machine, even with the same small win (small win game state), the operation mode of the V shutter 8159 (operation timing of the solenoid 8160 for the V shutter), the game to the V winning opening 8156 Different types of small hits are created, such as a "falling small hit" in which the ball cannot pass (or is difficult) and a "V small hit" in which the game ball can (or easily) pass through the V winning opening 8156. ing.

[10-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 294, the control circuit of the eighth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 294 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the eighth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 294, the eighth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 , a payout/fire control circuit 400 , and a power supply circuit 450 .

However, in the eighth pachinko game machine, the devices connected to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300 and the payout/launch control circuit 400 are partially different from the first pachinko game machine. . Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

[10-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 8148, a first special electric solenoid 8135, a second special electric solenoid 8155, and a V shutter solenoid 8160 connected to the main control circuit 200 compared to the first pachinko game machine. , 1st starting opening switch 8121, 2nd starting opening switch 8141, passage gate switch 8127, 1st big winning opening count switch 8132, 2nd big winning opening counting switch 8152, V winning opening switch 8157 are partially different. there is

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 8148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 8147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 8148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 8147 advances forward to open the second start port 8140 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 8148 . If not (if it is OFF), the general electric shutter 8147 is retracted rearward to close the second starting port 8140 .

(No. 1 special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 8135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 8134 consisting of an open/close door. When the first special electric solenoid 8135 is energized (turned ON) by the main CPU 201 , the first special electric shutter 8134 is tilted forward to open the first big prize opening 8131 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the first special electric solenoid 8135 . If it is not performed (if it is OFF), the first special electric shutter 8134 is inverted backward to close the first big prize winning opening 8131 .

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 8155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 8154 . When the second special electric solenoid 8155 is energized (turned ON) by the main CPU 201 , the second special electric shutter 8154 is retracted backward to open the second prize winning opening 8151 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 8155 . is not performed (if it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 8154 is moved forward to close the second big winning opening 8151 .

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 8160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 8159 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the V-shutter solenoid 8160 (it is ON), the V-shutter 8159 moves backward to open the V-winning opening 8156. OFF), the V-shutter 8159 is moved forward to close the V-winning opening 8156 .

(First start switch)
The first starting port switch 8121 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the first starting port 8120 .

When the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 8120 is detected by the first starting hole switch 8121, the main CPU 201 assumes that the first starting condition is satisfied, and determines that the first special symbol starting information (jackpot determination random number for use, random number for design, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.). The obtained start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (first special symbol start storage area (1) to first are stored in the special symbol start storage area (4) in order), and the first special symbol determination start condition (for example, the special electric accessory is not operating, the special symbol is not variablely displayed, etc.) is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 8120 is detected by the first start hole switch 8121, the main CPU 201 performs payout processing of the prize balls for the first start hole (for example, three game balls). to the payout/launch control circuit 400 .

(Second starting switch)
The second starting port switch 8141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the second starting port 8140 .

When the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 8140 is detected by the second starting port switch 8141, the main CPU 201 assumes that the second starting condition is met, and determines that the second special symbol starting information (jackpot judgment random number for use, random number for design, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.). The obtained start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (second special symbol start storage area (1) to second stored in the special symbol start storage area (4) in order), and the second special symbol determination start condition (for example, that the special electric accessory is not operating, that the special symbol is not variablely displayed, etc.) is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 8140 is detected by the second start hole switch 8141, the main CPU 201 performs payout processing of the prize ball for the second start hole (for example, one game ball). to the payout/launch control circuit 400 .

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is "lottery of the first special symbol", and the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is selected. The hit determination process is also called "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively called "special symbol lottery".

(Passing gate switch)
Pass gate switch 8127 is a penetration type proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to pass gate 8126 .

When the passage gate switch 8127 detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126, the main CPU 201 acquires normal symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol random number, etc.). The acquired normal symbol start information is stored in the normal symbol start storage area (normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4) of the main RAM 203 up to "the number of normal symbols held (for example, 4)". ), and when the normal pattern judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric accessory is not operating, the normal pattern variable display is not performed, etc.) is established, the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern hit judgment processing) and normal symbols are used for variable display. Even if the passage gate switch 8127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126, the prize ball is not paid out.

(1st big prize mouth count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 8132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 8131 . When the first big winning hole count switch 8132 detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 8131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 8131 per round. At the same time, the payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole.

(Second big prize mouth count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 8152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 8151 . When the second big winning hole count switch 8152 detects that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 8151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 8151, The payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the second winning hole.

(V prize opening switch)
The V winning opening switch 8157 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 8156 . When the V winning opening switch 8157 detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 8156, the main CPU 201 performs transition control to the jackpot game state. Even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 8156 is detected by the V winning opening switch 8157, the winning ball is not paid out.

[10-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, and a command input port 308, as in the first pachinko game machine. is common, but the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and an effect button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54 . That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54 . The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 according to the drive command from the sub CPU 301 .

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal relating to the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 . The button control circuit 310 outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301 when an operation signal is input from the performance button 54 .

[10-2-3. Dispensing/launching control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout/launch of game balls in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine. A payout device 82, a shooting device 6 capable of shooting game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Furthermore, in the payout/emission control circuit 400 in the eighth pachinko game machine, the total jackpot number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day is set to a predetermined number of hit balls (for example, 100,000). ), the "ball output limiter function" is activated to stop the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 6 (stop the power supply to the shooting solenoid), and Control is performed to prohibit the payout of prize balls. Control regarding this game disallowed state will be described later in detail.

[10-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 295 to 306, the basic specifications of the eighth pachinko game machine will be described. The eighth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the eighth pachinko game machine, although variable probability control is not executed, a time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is in a normal game state or a time-saving game state. It is possible to progress the game in . In addition, in this eighth pachinko game machine, variable probability control is not executed, but this is not essential. good.

In addition, in the eighth pachinko game machine, as described later, as a time-saving gaming state distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving end conditions, a "special time-saving gaming state" in which the next big hit is substantially guaranteed, and the next time It has a "general time-saving game state" in which a big hit is not guaranteed. In addition, as a time-saving game state distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving occurrence conditions), "A time-saving game state" that shifts after the end of the big hit game state triggered by a big hit, and special symbols without a big hit It has a "B time-saving game state" that shifts after the number of times of variable display reaches the ceiling value. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, from the viewpoint of the time saving end condition and the time saving transition condition, the "general time saving game state" consists of the first time saving end condition "A time saving game state". "Special time-saving gaming state" consists of "B time-saving gaming state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition, or "A time-saving gaming state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition. Also, in the present embodiment, when neither the special time-saving game state, the general time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, nor the B time-saving game state are distinguished, it is simply referred to as the “time-saving game state”.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in principle, in a general normal game state (first normal game state described later), left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. be. The sub CPU 301 displays, for example, in the display area of the display device 7 how to play the regular game mode.

[10-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 295 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 295 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big win", "minor win" or "losing".

In the special symbol hit determination table, as data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the first start port 8120, there is a big hit determined as "big hit" or "losing". The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random number value and the corresponding win/lose judgment value data (big hit judgment value data, loss judgment value data) is defined. In addition, as the data used in the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 8140, the data for big hit determination determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" The relationship between the range (width) of the random number and the corresponding win/lose determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. Incidentally, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

As shown in FIG. 295, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120, the main CPU 201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol big hit determination random number value. The result of the special pattern hit determination process is determined as "big hit" at a selection rate of about 1/319.7, and otherwise determined as "losing". In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the main CPU 201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for judging the big hit of the second special symbol. The result of the processing is determined as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7, a "minor win" with a selection rate of about 1/36.6, and otherwise determined as a "loss".

It should be noted that the range (width) of the random number determined as the "big hit" or "small hit", that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above values, and can be freely changed in design.

Further, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, it may be configured to determine a "small hit", but when configured to determine a "small hit", the first It is possible to determine "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, without moving to the big hit game state, the time saving game state (C time saving game state) is directly transferred to the "time saving hit". ” may be determined.

Also, if the eighth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of the big win and/or the small win should be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. However, even if the eighth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate for time saving is set to be a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of the big win or the selection rate of the small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or the opening time of the V winning mouth 8156 is changed for each set value, and the V winning mouth 8156 You may change the passing rate to, or change time-saving end conditions (the number of winning small hits, etc.) for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big hit, the probability of a small hit, the frequency of opening the V winning opening 8156 (that is, the frequency of operation of the second special electric shutter 8154), the opening time, and the time saving end condition By adopting one or two or more of, the expected value controlled to the big hit game state may be configured so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[10-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 296 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table for determining the "selected symbol of the special symbol" and the "symbol designation command" which determine the stop symbol of the special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

The "selected symbol of special symbol" is information for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is, This is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in order to display the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol in the display area of the display device 7 .

In the special symbol determination table, the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data, and the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 8120 or the second start port 8140 and are defined in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "symbol designation command". The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 19. Sometimes, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 20 to 59, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects "z4 ” is determined, and “zA4” is determined as the design designation command.

When the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 5, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol of the special symbol. "z5" is determined as the symbol designation command, and "zA5" is determined as the design designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 6 to 75, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 76 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the special symbol selection symbol is as follows according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. It is configured to satisfy the relational expression of the selectivity of “z1”<“z2”=“z3”.

Further, details will be described later using FIG. A small hit game state as "V small hit" in which the game ball can pass (or easily) is performed, and when "z7" is determined as the selected pattern of the special pattern, the game ball to the V winning opening 8156 A small-hit game state is performed as a "falling small-hit" that is impossible (or difficult) to pass. When the small winning game state as "V small winning" is performed, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 8156, thereby shifting to the big winning game state from the second route. On the other hand, when the small winning game state as "falling small winning" is performed, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156, and the transition to the big winning game state is made. If it is in the time saving game state, the number of small hits as the A time saving end condition described later is subtracted, and it also serves as an opportunity to end the time saving game state.

Then, in the right column of the special symbol determination table in FIG. The "total probability" of the selected symbols is shown for reference. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the total probability of the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the special symbols corresponding to the "V small hit" is about 1/48. 2, and the combined probability of the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbols corresponding to the "falling small hit" is configured to be approximately 1/152.6. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 8140, it corresponds to the selected symbol "z4" of the special symbol corresponding to the "big hit" of the first route and the "V minor hit" of the second route. The total probability of the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the special symbols, that is, when the game ball enters the second start port 8140, it shifts to the big hit game state via the first route and the second route. The probability per substance is configured to be approximately 1/41.9.

Although the description is omitted in the eighth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table defines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 294) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to the "selected pattern of". In addition, the first special symbol display portion 163 and the second special symbol display portion 164 display a big hit stop mode, a small win stop mode, or a losing stop mode based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. be. The program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 also stores a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine.

The range of special symbol random number values for determining the "selected symbol of special symbol", that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above value, and can be freely changed in design.

[10-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 297 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The big-hit type determination table is a table for determining the operation contents of the big-hit game state, and is a table for determining the "opening mode of the big-hit game state". In the eighth pachinko game machine, different jackpot type determination tables are referred to depending on whether the number of limiter times is set by the number limiter function (whether or not there is a limiter operation flag to be described later) and the number of remaining limiter times in the number limiter function. will be

The jackpot type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 297(a) is a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when the number of jackpot limiters is not set (when the limiter operation flag is 0). That is, it is a jackpot type determination table that is referred to at the time of the first jackpot (at the time of the so-called first hit) in a game state other than the A time saving game state (normal game state or B time saving game state).

The jackpot type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 297(b) is a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when the limiter operation flag=1 is set and the number of remaining jackpot limiter counts is 91 or more.

The jackpot type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 297(c) is a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when the limiter operation flag=1 is set and the number of remaining jackpot limiter counts is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 297, in the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, the selected pattern of the special pattern is associated with the “open mode of the jackpot game state”.

The "opening mode of the big winning game state" defines the maximum number of rounds of the first big winning hole 8131 opened in the big winning game state and the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 8131. - 特許庁OP waiting time (opening time), maximum opening time of each round, closing time of each round, ED waiting time (ending time), etc. are defined in the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 8131 . As the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 8131, the maximum opening time for each round may be changed, or the closing time for each round (round interval time) may be changed and defined. Furthermore, the number of times of opening and the opening time may be defined so that the first big prize winning opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" corresponding to the "selected pattern z5 to z7 of the special pattern" of the second special pattern is the second big winning port 8151 opened when the jackpot game state. It is an open mode when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 8156 passes through the second route and shifts to the big hit game state. When shifting to the big winning game state through the second route, the opening of the second big winning mouth 8151 in the small winning game state is set as the first round, and the first big winning mouth 8131 is opened from the second round onwards. A big hit game state is started.

Also, when the game ball entering the second big winning opening 8151 opened in the small winning game state does not pass through the V winning opening 8156, the big winning game state is not executed. In particular, in this embodiment, when the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156. , and the jackpot game state is essentially not executed.

As shown in FIG. 297, according to the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, depending on whether or not the limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining count of the limiter count in the count limiter function, the opening of the first big winning port 8131 The OP waiting time (opening time) and the ED waiting time (ending time) in the pattern are configured to be different.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 297, the smaller the number of remaining limiter counts in the count limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the more OP in the opening pattern of the first big winning port 8131. The waiting time (opening time) and the ED waiting time (ending time) are shortened.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on whether or not the limiter count is set by the count limiter function, and the remaining count of the limiter count in the count limiter function, the OP waiting time (opening time) and Although the ED waiting time (ending time) is configured to be different, the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that only the OP waiting time (opening time) or only the ED waiting time (ending time) is different. .

Furthermore, depending on whether or not the number of limiters is set by the number of times limiter function, and the remaining number of times of the limiter number in the number of times limiter function, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 8131, the maximum opening of each round The jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the time, the closing time of each round, and the ED waiting time (ending time) is different.

[10-3-4. Small hit type determination table]
FIG. 298 is an example of a small hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine. 298 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The small-hit type determination table is a table for determining the operation contents of the small-hit game state, and is a table for determining the "release mode of the small-hit game state". In the eighth pachinko game machine, different small hit type determination tables are referenced depending on whether or not the number of limiter times is set by the number limiter function (whether or not there is a limiter operation flag to be described later) and the number of remaining limiter times in the number limiter function. will be

The small hit type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 298(a) is a small hit type determination table that is referred to when the number of big hit limiters is not set (when the limiter operation flag is 0). That is, it is a small hit type determination table that is referred to at the time of the first small hit (so-called first hit) in a game state other than the A time saving game state (normal game state or B time saving game state).

The small hit type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 298(b) is a small hit type determination table that is referred to when the limiter operation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 91 or more.

The small hit type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 298(c) is a small hit type determination table that is referred to when the limiter operation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 298, in the small winning type determination tables 1 to 3, the selected symbol of the special symbol is associated with the "release mode of the small winning game state".

"Open mode of small winning game state" is the maximum number of times of opening the second big winning opening 8151 that is opened in the small winning game state, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 8151 and the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 stipulated. OP waiting time (opening time), maximum opening time of each number of times, closing time of each number of times, ED waiting time (ending time) and the like are defined in the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 8151 . Also, in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156, an opening waiting time, an opening time, and the like are defined. As the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156, multiple times of opening time and closing time may be defined such that the V winning opening 8156 is opened and closed multiple times like the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 8151. .

Here, at the start of the small winning game state, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 8151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are clocked at the same time. .

Then, when the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the special symbols corresponding to the "V small hit" are determined, the second big winning opening 8151 is opened up to 16 times, and the second big winning opening 8151 opens. At the time of subsequent opening, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 has passed, and the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 8156 is possible (or easy). Therefore, when the selected symbols 'z5, z6' of the special symbols corresponding to the 'V small win' are determined, the advantageous operation mode is determined as the release mode of the small win game state.

Further, when the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined, the second big prize winning port 8151 is opened once, and the first opening of the second big prize winning port 8151 is performed. Sometimes, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 has not passed, and the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 8156 is impossible (or difficult). Therefore, when the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbols corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, the disadvantageous operation mode is determined as the release mode of the small win game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the advantageous operation mode and the disadvantageous operation mode in the open mode of the small winning game state are the opening timing of the second big winning opening 8151 (operation timing of the second special electric solenoid 8155) and the V winning opening 8156 opening timing (activation timing of the V shutter solenoid 8160), but by changing the opening frequency and the opening time of the V winning opening 8156, the passage rate to the V winning opening 8156 is changed. A mode and a disadvantageous operating mode may be configured.

Then, as shown in FIG. 298, according to the small hit type determination tables 1 to 3, depending on whether or not the number of limiters is set by the number of times limiter function, and the remaining number of times of the limiter number in the number of times limiter function, the second big winning opening The OP waiting time (opening time), the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are configured to be different.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 298, the smaller the number of remaining limiter counts in the count limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the more OP The waiting time (opening time), the ED waiting time (ending time), and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are configured to be short.

In addition, in the present embodiment, depending on whether or not the limiter count is set by the count limiter function, and the remaining count of the limiter count in the count limiter function, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, Although the ED waiting time (ending time) and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are configured to be different, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 8151, the ED waiting time (ending time) Time) and at least one of the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 may be configured to differ small hit type determination tables 1-3.

Furthermore, depending on whether or not the limiter number of times is set by the number of times limiter function, and the remaining number of times of the limiter number in the number of times limiter function, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, the maximum opening of each number Time, closing time of each number of times, ED waiting time (ending time), opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156, opening time, at least one of closing time is different. may be configured.

In addition, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the small winning game state is set shorter than the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) in one round in the big winning game state. , the first big winning opening 8131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and the second big winning opening 8151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. It can be said that

[10-3-5. Game state related setting table]
FIG. 299 is an example of a game state related setting table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the game state related setting table shown in FIG. 299 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The game state related setting table is a table for setting the game state after the jackpot game state ends. In the eighth pachinko game machine, different game state-related setting tables are referred to depending on whether or not the number of limiter times is set by the number limiter function (whether or not there is a limiter operation flag) and the number of remaining limiter times in the number limiter function. It will be.

(Game state related setting table 1)
The game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) is a game state related setting table that is referred to when the number of jackpot limiters is not set (when the limiter operation flag=0). That is, at the time of the first big hit (so-called first hit) in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state), in the game state related setting table that is referred to after the end of the big win game state be.

As shown in FIG. 299(a), in the game state related setting table 1, the game state (game state at the time of winning) when it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit for the selected symbol of the special symbol. "Game state setting" consisting of "state flag" and "A time saving end condition", "limiter operation flag", and "limiter count" are associated with each other.

A “state flag” is a flag indicating the type of game state, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203 . State flag = 0 indicates "normal game state", state flag = 1 indicates "A time saving game state", and state flag = 2 indicates "B time saving game state". In this embodiment, although the C time saving game state is not executed, the state flag = 3 indicates the C time saving game state when the C time saving game state is executable.

The ``A time-saving end condition'' is a special condition for terminating the A time-saving game state as the time-saving game state, and is composed of two end conditions of ``the number of wins of small wins'' and ``the number of times of time-saving''. When one of the end conditions of "the number of wins of small prizes" and "the number of times of reduced working hours" is established, the reduced working hours game state A is ended and the normal game state is entered.

In this embodiment, "A time-saving end condition" is composed of two end conditions, "number of winning times of small wins" and "number of times of time saving", but only "number of winning times of small wins" or "time saving It may be composed only of "number of times". This is the same in the "B time saving end condition" described later.

"Number of winning small hits" indicates the number of times a small win is won in the time-saving gaming state, and is counted without distinguishing between the above-mentioned "V small win" and "falling small win". When winning the "small hit", it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156, and it becomes possible to shift to the big win game state, but when winning the "falling small win" , It is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156, and the number of winnings of the small hit is subtracted without shifting to the big hit game state, and the time saving game state is terminated. .

For example, when the number of small win wins is set to 1, if the "falling small win" wins before the "V small win", it is impossible for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156. (or difficult), the time saving game state ends without shifting to the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the number of winnings of the small hit = 255 times is set, the "V small hit (approximately 1/48.2)" is higher than the "falling small hit (approximately 1/152.6)". The probability of winning is higher in this case, and since at least 'V small win' can be won by the time the small win is won 255 times, it is possible to shift to the big win game state without terminating the time-saving game state. Until the next big hit is practically guaranteed. In the present embodiment, the time-saving game state when the number of winning times of the small hit = 1 time or 2 times is set as the first time-saving end condition is referred to as "general time-saving game state", and as the second time-saving end condition The time-saving game state when the number of winnings of small hits=255 times is set is referred to as "special time-saving game state".

In addition, when setting the number of winnings of the small hit = 255 times, the main CPU 201 sets the special time saving flag = 1 (the special time saving flag is turned on) in order to identify the special time saving game state. Similarly, the main CPU 201, when setting the number of winnings of the small hit = 1 time or 2 times, sets the special time saving flag = 0 (the special time saving flag is turned off) in order to identify that it is in the general time saving game state. ).

"Time saving number of times" indicates the total number of times that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be variably displayed in the time saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the state flag = 1 (A time-saving game state) is set, the number of times of time-saving = 10000 times is set, and the end condition of "number of times of time-saving" can not be substantially satisfied. Although the number of times is set, the number of times that the termination condition of the "number of times of time saving" can be satisfied may be set, such as the number of times of time saving = 100 times.

"Limiter operation flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the number of consecutive jackpots that have shifted to the jackpot game state in the time-saving game state by the number of times limiter function is being counted. It indicates that the number of consecutive times is being counted, and the limiter operation flag=0 indicates that the number of consecutive big hits by the number limiter function is not being counted. In addition, the limiter operation flag also corresponds to the state flag, and when the state flag = 1 indicating the A time saving game state is set, the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, and the state flag = 0 indicating the normal game state is set, the limiter operation flag is set to 0.

"Limiter number of times" indicates the number of times set at the time of the first big hit in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state). When the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, the limiter number is subtracted each time the time saving game state shifts to the jackpot game state, and when the limiter operation flag = 1 and the limiter number = 0, the number of times limiter function. is activated, and the game state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 299(d), which will be described later, is referred to.

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299 (a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, the game ball enters the first start port 8120 and the first special symbol lottery When the result is a big hit, when the selected pattern of the first special pattern is "z1" after the end of the big win game state, the state flag = 1, the number of winning times of the small win = 255 times, the number of times of time saving. = 10000 times, limiter operation flag = 1, limiter number of times = 98 times, and when the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z2", state flag = 1, number of wins of small win = 1 time, time saving The number of times = 10000 times, the limiter operation flag = 1, the limiter number of times = 100 times are set, and when the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z3", the state flag = 0 and the limiter operation flag = 0 are set. .

Further, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, the game ball enters the second start port 8140 and the second special symbol If the result of the lottery is a big win or a small win, after the big win game state (including the big win game state from the V small win), the selected pattern of the second special pattern is "z4", "z5". And when it is either "z6", the state flag = 1, the number of winnings of small hits = 1 time, the number of time saving = 10000 times, the limiter operation flag = 1, the number of limiters = 90 times are set, the second special When the selected pattern of the pattern is "z7", the status flag is set to 1, the number of wins for a small prize is set to 1, the number of times of time saving is set to 10000, the limiter operation flag is set to 1, and the number of times of limiter is set to 1.

Further, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299 (a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time saving game state, the game ball enters the first start port 8120 and the first special symbol If the lottery result is a big win, after the big win game state is over, when the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z1", the state flag = 1, the number of winnings of the small win = 255 times, Time saving times = 10000 times, limiter operation flag = 1, limiter times = 97 times are set, and when the selected pattern of the first special pattern is "z2" or "z3", the state flag = 1, winning a small hit Number of times = 1 time, time saving number of times = 10000 times, limiter operation flag = 1, limiter number of times = 99 times are set.

Further, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299 (a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time saving game state, the game ball enters the second start port 8140 and the second special symbol If the result of the lottery is a big win or a small win, after the big win game state (including the big win game state from the V small win), the selected pattern of the second special pattern is "z4", "z5". And when it is either "z6", the state flag = 1, the number of winnings of small hits = 1 time, the number of time saving = 10000 times, the limiter operation flag = 1, the number of limiters = 96 times are set, the second special When the selected pattern of the pattern is "z7", the status flag is set to 1, the number of wins for a small prize is set to 1, the number of time reductions is set to 10000, the limiter operation flag is set to 1, and the number of limiters is set to 1.

In addition, the game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined. In this case, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156, and the setting of the game state, the setting of the limiter operation flag and the limiter count are performed without shifting to the jackpot game state. will not be broken. This also applies to game state related setting tables 2 to 4, which will be described later.

Next, when the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299 (a) is arranged to organize the situation of the special symbol lottery in each game state, the time saving game when the limiter number of times of the big hit is not set The state is limited to the B time-saving game state in which the number of times of variable display of special symbols shifts after reaching the ceiling value without being triggered by a big hit. That is, the game state at the time of winning in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG.

Here, when it is in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, the game ball can enter the first start hole 8120, and the game ball can enter the second start hole 8140. Have difficulty. In addition, when it is in the time-saving gaming state (B time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, the game ball can enter the second start port 8140, and the game ball can enter the first start port 8120. It is difficult to enter the ball.

Therefore, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit will be described later. In the first normal game state, it corresponds to the first big hit determined by the lottery of the first special symbols.

In addition, when the normal game state, it is originally possible to enter the game ball into the first start port 8120, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 8140, but the time-saving game state is completed and the state is shifted to the normal game state, the reserved number of the second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is consumed.

Therefore, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In the second normal game state to be described later, a big win or a small win is determined by lottery of the second special symbols immediately after the time-saving game state ends, and the big win or the small win is pulled back.

In addition, when it is in the B time-saving gaming state, it is originally possible for the game ball to enter the second start port 8140, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 8120, but the normal game Immediately after shifting from the state to the time-saving game state, the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the normal game state is digested, and despite the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), Left-handed hitting is performed as an irregular game mode, and a game ball may enter the first start hole 8120 .

Therefore, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299 (a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), the lottery result of the first special symbol was a big hit. The case is the first special symbol in the B time-saving game state in which the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal game state is digested, or in the B time-saving game state in which the left hand is struck as an irregular game mode. It corresponds to when it is determined to be the first big hit by lottery.

In addition, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299 (a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. If there is, it corresponds to when the first big hit is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol in the B time-saving game state in which the player is hitting to the right.

(Features of limiter count)
Next, the feature of the number of limiters set by the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) will be described.

In the first normal game state, when it is determined as the first big hit by lottery of the first special symbol and the number of limiter times is set, the number of limiter times (98 times or 100 times) is different according to the selected pattern of the first special symbol. will be set.

In a second normal game state, a lottery for a second special symbol determines a big win or a small win immediately after the end of the time-saving game state, and when the number of limiter times is set, the number of limiter times differs according to the selected pattern of the second special symbol. (1 time or 90 times) will be set.

When it is determined as the first big hit by lottery of the first special symbol in the B time saving game state and the number of limiters is set, different number of limiters (97 times or 99 times) are set according to the selected symbol of the first special symbol. will be

When it is determined as the first big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol in the B time-saving game state and the number of limiters is set, different number of limiters (96 times or 1 time) are set according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol. will be

Thus, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), different "limiter times" are set according to the game state at the time of winning and the selected symbol of the special symbol. there is

In particular, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299 (a), after the jackpot game state by special symbol lottery in the B time-saving game state, the jackpot game state by special symbol lottery in the normal game state. A limiter count (97, 99, or 96) different from the limiter count (98, 100, or 90) set after the end can be set.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined as a big hit or a small hit immediately after the end of the time-saving game state by the lottery of the second special symbols in the second normal game state, and the number of limiters is set (a big hit or a small hit When it is pulled back), when it is determined as the first big hit by the first special symbol lottery in the first normal game state, and when it is determined to be the first big hit by the special symbol lottery in the B time-saving game state The game state related setting table 1 is configured so that the number of limiter times (90 times) which is smaller than that is set. In particular, in the second normal game state, the number of limiters set when the second special symbol lottery determines a big hit or a small hit immediately after the end of the time-saving game state is the special symbol variation pattern table J2 (described later). 310) corresponds to the remaining number of times of the jackpot limiter determined, and when it is pulled back to the general time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbol ends faster (digestion ), it is possible to adopt a variation pattern table of special symbols.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined, In , it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156, and the setting of the game state and the like is not performed without shifting to the jackpot game state. However, if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 8156 in a fraudulent or irregular manner and the state shifts to the big win game state, the number of times limiter function will be activated immediately after the big win game state ends (in the next big win). In order to operate, the limiter number of times (0 times) less than the number of times (90 times or 96 times) set when the selected pattern "z4 to 6" of the second special pattern corresponding to "V small hit" is set The game state related setting table 1 is configured so that

In the present embodiment, the number of limiters is set differently depending on the game state and the selected symbol of the special symbol at the time of winning. may be configured.

(Features of the number of wins for small hits)
According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), according to the game state at the time of winning and the selected pattern of the special pattern, the "number of winning times of small hits" in the A time saving end condition is configured to be different. ing. In addition, the game state related setting table 1 may be configured so that the "number of winning times of small hits" in the time saving end condition A differs according to the game state at the time of winning or the selected symbol of the special symbol.

In addition, in the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), according to the selection pattern of the first special symbol by lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the winning number of small hits = 255 times. It is possible to shift from the lottery of 1 special pattern to a special time-saving game state. However, the game state related setting table 1 is configured so that the number of winnings of the small win = 255 times can be set according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol by lottery of the second special symbol. A shift from the lottery to the special time-saving game state may be enabled. However, if it is possible to set the number of winnings of the small win = 255 times according to the selected pattern of the second special symbol, the number of winnings of the small win = 255 times is set according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol. It is desirable that the selection rate is lower than the selection rate in which the number of winnings of the small hit = 255 times is set according to the selection pattern of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), two kinds of times, ie, the number of winning times of the small hit = 1 time or 255 times, are set according to the selected pattern of the special symbol. However, as shown in the game state related setting table 2 to be described later, the number of winning times of small wins may be set to three or more types of times, ie, 1 time, 2 times or 255 times. . However, it is desirable that the number of winnings of small hits=255 is set when the first special symbol is selected by lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the game state at the time of winning and the selected pattern of the special pattern, the "small hit winning number" in the A time saving end condition is configured to be different, but all the same "small hit winning number of times” may be set.

(Game state related setting table 2)
A game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b) is a game state related setting table that is referred to when the limiter operation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 91 or more. In addition, since the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. It is a game state related setting table to be referred to. This also applies to the game state related setting table 3 and the game state related setting table 4, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 299(b), in the game state related setting table 2, "game state setting", "limiter operation flag", "subtraction value of limiter count" for the selected special symbol. ” is associated with.

According to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299 (b), when the game ball enters the first start port 8120 and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the big hit game state 299(a), similar to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), "game state setting" and "limiter operation flag" are set, but the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z1". Or when it is "z2", 1 is subtracted from the limiter count.

In addition, as described above, the limiter operation flag also corresponds to the state flag, and when the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, the state flag = 1 indicating the A time saving game state is set. Then, in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and although it is originally impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the first start port 8120, the time-saving game In this state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the first start hole 8120 by hitting left as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b), the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit means that a left-hand shot is performed as an irregular game mode in the time-saving game state. It corresponds to when a game ball enters the 1 start port 8120 and is determined to be a big hit. This is the same when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win in the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c).

Further, according to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b), when the game ball enters the second start port 8140 and the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. , When the selected symbol of the second special symbol is "z4" after the end of the big win game state (including the big win game state from the V small win), the state flag = 1, the number of winnings of the small win = 2 times. , The number of times of time saving = 10000 times, the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, 3 is subtracted from the number of limiters, and when the selected pattern of the second special pattern is "z5", the state flag = 1, the number of winnings of the small hit = 2 times, number of times of time saving = 10000 times, limiter operation flag = 1 is set, 2 is subtracted from the number of limiters, and when the selected symbol of the second special symbol is "z6" or "z7", state flag = 1, the number of winnings of small hits = 1 time, the number of times of time saving = 10000 times, the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, and 1 is subtracted from the number of limiters.

Thus, according to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299 (b), according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol, "the number of wins of small hits" and "subtraction of the number of limiters" in the A time saving end condition values” are configured differently.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state related setting table 2 is changed so that the "number of winning times of the small hit" and the "subtraction value of the number of limiters" in the time saving end condition A are different according to the selected pattern of the second special symbol. However, according to the selected pattern of the second special pattern, the game state related setting table 2 is configured so that only the ``number of winning times of small wins'' or only the ``subtraction value of the number of limiters'' in the time saving end condition A is different. You may

Furthermore, the game state related setting table 2 may be configured so that the "subtraction value of the limiter count" is different according to the selected symbol of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, regardless of the selected symbol of the second special symbol (selected symbol of the first special symbol), the game state related setting table so that the same value of "subtraction value of limiter count (for example, all 1)" is subtracted 2 may be configured.

(Game state related setting table 3)
The game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c) is a game state related setting table that is referred to when the limiter operation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of times of the limiter number of jackpots is 1 to 90. .

As shown in FIG. 299(c), in the game state related setting table 3, similarly to the game state related setting table 2, "setting of game state" and "limiter operation" are provided for the selected symbol of the special symbol. flag” and “subtraction value of limiter count” are associated with each other.

According to the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299 (c), when the game ball enters the first start port 8120 and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the big hit game state 299(b), similarly to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b), the "game state setting" and "limiter operation flag" are set, and the number of limiters is subtracted.

Further, according to the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c), when the game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. , after the end of the big win game state (including the big win game state from the V small win), the state flag = 1, the number of winning times of the small win = 1 time, and the time saving regardless of the selected pattern of any second special pattern. The number of times is set to 10000 times, the limiter operation flag is set to 1, and 1 is subtracted from the limiter number of times.

Thus, according to the game state related setting table 2 of FIG. 299 (b) and the game state related setting table 3 of FIG. The number of wins for a small win" and the "subtraction value of the number of times of limiter" are configured to be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits, the "number of winning times of small wins" and "subtraction value of number of limiters" in A time saving end condition are configured to be different, but the limiter of big hits According to the remaining number of times, only the "number of winning times of the small win" or only the "subtraction value of the number of limiter times" in the time saving end condition A may be configured to be different.

Further, it may be configured so that "the number of wins of small wins" and "subtraction value of the number of limiters" in the time-saving end condition A do not differ according to the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big wins. In such a case, the game state related setting table 2 in FIG. 299(b) is deleted, and the game state related setting table 3 in FIG. 299(c) is set with the limiter operation flag=1. , when the number of remaining jackpot limiter counts is not 0 (jackpot limiter count ≠ 0).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of remaining jackpot limiter counts reaches 90 (hereinafter also referred to as "first switching count"), the game state related setting table changes to the game state related setting table shown in FIG. Although the setting table 2 is configured to be switched (referred to) to the game state related setting table 3 of FIG.

(Game state related setting table 4)
The game state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 299(d) is a game that is referred to when the number of times limiter function is activated (the limiter operation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of times of the jackpot limiter is 0). It is a state related setting table.

As shown in FIG. 299(d), the game state related setting table 4 has "state flag=0" for setting the normal game state as the game state setting for all the selected special symbols. are mapped.

Thus, according to the game state related setting table 4 of FIG. 299 (d), when the number of consecutive big hits reaches a predetermined limiter number of times in the time saving game state, the state is forcibly shifted to the normal game state after the end of the big win game state. Then, the game state after the big win game state is ended can be regulated.

In the present embodiment, the game state related setting table 4 is configured such that when the number of consecutive big wins reaches a predetermined limiter count in the time-saving game state, the game state is forcibly shifted to the normal game state after the big win game state ends. However, the game state related setting table 4 may be constructed such that when the number of consecutive big wins reaches a predetermined limiter number of times in the time-saving game state, the game state is forcibly shifted to the game disapproval state after the big win game state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the game state related setting tables 1 to 3, except for the game state related setting table 4 that is referred to when the number of times limiter function is activated, the jackpot game by lottery of the first special symbol After the end of the state, it is configured to shift to the "special time-saving game state", "general time-saving game state" or "normal game state". It is configured to shift only to the "general time-saving gaming state" without shifting to the "time-saving gaming state" or the "general time-saving gaming state".

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state by lottery of the first special symbol, "special time-saving game state", "general time-saving game state" or "normal game state" was configured to shift. , After the jackpot game state by lottery of the first special symbol, (a) only "special time-saving game state", (b) "special time-saving game state" or "general time-saving game state", (c) "special time-saving game state" It may be configured to shift to either "game state" or "normal game state". Furthermore, after the jackpot game state by lottery of the second special symbol is completed, it is configured to shift only to the "general time-saving game state", but (a) "general time-saving game state" or "special time-saving game state" , (b) "General time-saving game state" or "Normal game state", (c) "General time-saving game state", "Special time-saving game state" or "Normal game state".

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the game state related setting tables 1 to 3, except for the game state related setting table 4 that is referred to when the number of times limiter function is activated, the jackpot game by lottery of the first special symbol After the end of the state, the state is shifted to the "special time-saving game state" at a relatively higher first rate than after the end of the jackpot game state by lottery of the second special symbols. In addition, after the big win game state by the lottery of the second special symbols is completed, the transition to the "general time-saving game state" is made at a relatively higher second rate than after the big win game state by the lottery of the first special symbols is completed. is configured as It should be noted that the first percentage and the second percentage do not exclude the fact that the ratios to be compared are 0% and 100%.

[10-3-6. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
Figures 300 and 301 are an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Figure 300 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state or special time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine, and Figure 301 shows the special symbols in the general time-saving gaming state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a fluctuation pattern table. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 300 and 301 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol variation pattern table is a table for determining the "special symbol variation pattern" and the "special symbol variation display time" as the variation mode of the special symbol.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 300 and 301 in accordance with the gaming state, etc., refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, determines the type of special symbol, and the hit of the special symbol. The variation pattern of the special symbols and the variation display time of the special symbols are determined based on the results of the determination process and the selected symbols of the special symbols.

Further, when determining the variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . The variation pattern command is a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 8120, or a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 8140. It is configured to be identifiable.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 300(a), the special symbol variation pattern table T1 contains the type of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol (win or lose), the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the random number for reach determination. , a random number for effect selection, a variation pattern of special symbols, and a variation display time of special symbols are associated with each other. Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As described above, in the normal game state, since left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, the game ball can enter the first start hole 8120 originally, and the second start hole 8140 It is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the game ball, but immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is entered, the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is Digestion will take place.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the normal game state in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol is called "first normal game state". Good, immediately after the time-saving game state is completed and transferred to the normal game state, the normal game state (based on the start-up information of the second special symbol) during digestion of the reserved number of the second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state The normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol to be played) is referred to as "second normal game state".

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a), in the first normal game state (first special symbol), the special symbol lottery result (hit-lose) and the special symbol selected symbol. , the variation pattern of different special symbols can be determined. However, in the second normal game state (second special symbol), the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined. The same variation pattern (00H) for executing the normal variation can be determined as the same loss treatment when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss.

In the present embodiment, in the second normal game state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined. Although the same variation pattern is determined when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, it may be configured to determine a different variation pattern. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined, the same variation pattern ( 00H), the same variation pattern (0AH) for executing the door opening effect (losing) may be determined.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in special time-saving gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300 (b) is the A time-saving game state in which the number of winnings of the small hit = 255 times is set as the second time-saving end condition, or the second time-saving end It is also a variation pattern table of special symbols determined in the B time-saving game state in which the number of winnings of small hits=255 times is set as a condition.

As shown in FIG. 300(b), the special symbol variation pattern table S1 contains the type of special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol (winning or losing), the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the random number for effect selection. , the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation display time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

As described above, in the special time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the first start port 8120. However, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first start port 8120 by hitting left as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player) in a special time-saving game state. Therefore, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the variation pattern table S1 of the special symbol in FIG. It corresponds to a special symbol variation pattern determined when the ball enters. This is the same for the special symbol variation pattern tables J1 to J3 shown in FIG.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300 (b), in the special time-saving game state, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the variation of the special symbol is extremely short than the normal game state. A special symbol variation pattern (10H) consisting of a display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is configured to be determinable. Thereby, in the special time-saving game state, the variable display of the special symbols can be ended (digested) much faster than in the normal game state.

Furthermore, according to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. is determined, as a loss, the same variation pattern (10H) as the variation pattern determined when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss is determined. This is because in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of winning times of the small hit in the A time-saving end condition = 255 times is set, and the time-saving gaming state is not substantially ended by the "falling small win". .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of winning times of the small hit in the A time saving end condition = 255 times is set, the time saving game state is not substantially ended by the "falling small win", but due to insurance 2, when the number of winnings of the small hit is the 255th falling small hit (the lottery result of the second special pattern is a small hit, and the selected pattern "z7" of the second special pattern corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined. , when the remaining number of winning times of the small hit is 1), a variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern 43H for executing a card effect described later) for executing an effect for ending the time-saving game state is determined. You may

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in general time-saving gaming state)
As the special symbol variation pattern table in the general time saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301 (a), the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. ) and a special symbol variation pattern table J3 are provided. In addition, the number of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the general time-saving gaming state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a) is in the general time-saving gaming state, the limiter operation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 91 or more. It is a determined special symbol variation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 301 (a), the special symbol variation pattern table J1 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol (hitting or losing), the selected symbol of the special symbol, and "A as a time saving end condition "remaining number of winning times of small hit", random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, variation pattern of special symbols, and variation display time of special symbols are associated with each other.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301 (a), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 91 or more, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss A special symbol variation pattern (11H) consisting of a shorter special symbol variation display time (for example, 3.0 seconds) than the normal game state can be determined. As a result, in the normal time-saving game state, the variable display of the special symbols can be terminated (digested) faster than in the normal game state.

In addition, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301 (a), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 91 or more, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. , and when the selected pattern "z5, z6" of the second special pattern corresponding to the "V small hit" is determined, and when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a loss, common A variation pattern (40H or 41H) of the special symbol in which the "battle effect" is executed is configured to be determinable. As a result, when the "battle effect" is executed, the "V It is possible to give the expectation of having won the "small hit".

Furthermore, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301 (a), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 91 or more, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. , and when the selected symbol "z5, z6" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "V small hit" or the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined , when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, the variation patterns (30H, 31H, 32H, 3FH) of the special symbol in which the common "card performance" is executed can be determined. As a result, when the "card effect" is executed, whether the "falling small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving game state is won, or the "V small win" that triggers the transition to the big win game state is won. It is possible to make people interested in whether it is "losing" or "losing".

Thus, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. Various performances can be executed than in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big wins corresponding to the variation pattern table J2 of the special symbols shown is 90 or less, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

The special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301 (b) is in the general time saving game state, the limiter operation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 1 to 90. It is a variation pattern table of special symbols determined in .

As shown in FIG. 301(b), the special symbol variation pattern table J2 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol (hitting or losing), the selected symbol of the special symbol, and "A as a time saving end condition "remaining number of winning times of small hit", random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, variation pattern of special symbols, and variation display time of special symbols are associated with each other.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301 (b), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 90 or less, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss , a variation pattern of special symbols having a shorter special symbol variation display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) than the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big wins is 91 or more can be determined. there is Thus, in the general time-saving game state, when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits decreases, the variable display of the special symbols can be ended (digested) more quickly.

Further, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. Unlike the fluctuation pattern table J1, the special symbol fluctuation pattern (40H or 41H) in which the "battle effect" in which the special symbol fluctuation display time is long is not determined. Thus, in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big wins is 90 or less, the variation pattern of the special symbols consisting of the variable display time of the long special symbols is not determined, and the number of times of the limiter of the big wins remains. The variable display of special symbols can be ended (digested) faster than the general time-saving game state when the number of times is 91 or more.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 90 (hereinafter also referred to as "second switching number"), the special symbol variation pattern table is the special symbol of FIG. 301 (a). 301(b) from the variation pattern table J1 to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. In particular, if the second switching number is designed to be the number of times less than 10% (1 to 10 times) is subtracted from the limiter number of times (100 times) set at the time of the first big hit, the special symbols can be changed more quickly. Since it becomes possible to switch to the variation pattern table of the special symbols whose display is terminated (digested) at an early timing, the interest in the game is further enhanced.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second switching number of times the special symbol variation pattern table switches is set to the same number of times (90) as the first switching number of times the game state related setting table switches, but the first switching number of times It may be set to a number different from the second switching number.

The special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301 (c) is in the general time-saving gaming state, the limiter operation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of times of the big hit limiter is determined when it is 0. It is a variation pattern table of special symbols. That is, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined when the number of times limiter function is activated.

As shown in FIG. 301 (c), the special symbol variation pattern table J3 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol (win-lose), the selected symbol of the special symbol, and "A as a time saving end condition "remaining number of winning times of small hits", the variation pattern of special symbols, and the variation display time of special symbols are associated with each other.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301 (c), in the general time-saving gaming state when the number of times limiter function operates, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the number of times limiter Different special symbol variation patterns (50H, 51H) are determined as compared with the general time-saving game state (special symbol variation pattern tables J1, J2) when the function does not operate. As a result, in the general time-saving game state when the number of times limiter function is activated, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win or a small win, a special dedicated performance (ending success reach) can be executed.

[10-3-7. Prefetch related data for special symbols]
FIG. 302 is an example of the special symbol prefetch related data in the eighth pachinko game machine. Here, "prediction" means that the game ball enters the first start port 8120 or the second start port 8140, and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) detects special symbol start information (random number for judging a big hit, symbol Random number, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.) is to analyze the start information of the acquired special symbol in advance than the lottery of the special symbol. Then, the analyzed information (read-ahead command) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "read-ahead effect" can be executed based on the read-ahead command.

FIG. 302(a) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to perform look-ahead according to the game state as look-ahead related data of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 302(a), in the normal game state, both prefetching based on the starting information of the first special symbol and prefetching based on the starting information of the second special symbol can be executed. Also, in the time-saving game state, the big win game state, and the small win game state, only the look-ahead based on the starting information of the second special symbol can be executed.

FIG. 302(b) is an example of the configuration of the look-ahead command as the analyzed information after analyzing the start information of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 302(b), the look-ahead command is composed of "type of special symbol", which is the first special symbol or second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". there is

"Parameter 1" is win-lose information pre-analyzed as to whether it is a big win, a small win, or a loss based on the random number value for judging a big win, and FIG. is.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information obtained by pre-analyzing the special pattern (selected pattern) to be stopped and displayed based on the random number for judging the big hit and the random number of the pattern. is an example of a setting table for .

"Parameter 3" is the variation information obtained by pre-analyzing the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging reach, and the random number for selection of effect. 3 is an example of a setting table of No. 3.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbols from the prefetching of the start information of the special symbols to before the lottery of the special symbols based on the start information of the special symbols is performed is also referred to as "preliminary variation". . Moreover, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol lottery based on the starting information of the special symbol is performed is also called "the variation".

[10-3-8. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 303 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 303 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process. It is a table referred to when determining "hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 303, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (width) corresponds to the normal symbol hit/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol loss"). are stipulated. In addition, the random number value for hit determination of normal symbols is acquired in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 303, and determines normal symbol win/lose determination value data based on the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. , and the hit/lose determination value data of the normal design is determined as "normal design hit determination value data". In addition, when the obtained random number value for winning determination of the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol losing", and determines the winning/losing determination value data of the normal symbol to be "normal symbol losing determination value data". do.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the "normal symbol win" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/1.00, and the "normal symbol win" is more likely to be determined than the "normal symbol loss" is determined. ing. It should be noted that it is desirable to be configured to make it easier to determine "normal design hit" rather than "normal design loss" is determined, and the selection rate of "normal design hit" is limited to about 1/1.00 do not have.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be common (the probability of winning per normal symbol is common) regardless of the game state whether the normal game state or the time saving game state, but as described later. By varying the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 according to the game state, the degree of profit given to the player is varied according to the game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state whether the normal game state or the time-saving game state, the selection rate of the "normal symbol winning" is set in common, but the "normal symbol winning" is selected according to the game state. Different selectivities may be used. When the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' is varied according to the game state, the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' in the normal game state. It is desirable to configure Furthermore, the selection rate of the “normal winning pattern” may be varied depending on the type of the time-saving game state between the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, or between the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state.

[10-3-9. Normal pattern judgment table]
Figure 304 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 304 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the hit/lose determination value data of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the passage gate 8126. It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected pattern of the normal pattern".

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 304 includes the above-described normal symbol winning/losing determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol losing"), normal symbol random number values, and normal symbol selection symbols. are defined in association with each other. Incidentally, the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is obtained from, for example, 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 304, and determines the selected normal symbol based on the normal symbol winning determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 304, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol selection symbol is selected as follows.

For example, when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 49, and selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol. If the symbol random number is any one of 50 to 99, "f2" is selected as the normal symbol selection symbol. Further, when the normal symbol loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the normal symbol selection symbol regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In particular, in the present embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the selected symbol of the normal symbol, regardless of the game state, the win-lose determination value data of the normal symbol (of the hit determination process of the normal symbol) result) and the symbol random number value of the normal design, the selection design of the normal design is configured to be selected. In addition, as in the first pachinko game machine, it may be configured such that the selection pattern of the normal pattern is selected according to the game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 303), and based on the acquired normal symbol win determination random number value, determines whether the normal symbol win/lose determination value data is displayed. is determined, and then the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 304) is referred to, and the normal symbol selection symbol is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, on the basis of the obtained random number value for hit determination of normal symbols and the random number value of normal symbols, hit/lose determination value data of normal symbols (hit/lose of normal symbols) and selected symbols of normal symbols are determined together. You may do so.

[10-3-10. Open pattern determination table for normal electric accessories]
FIG. 305 is an example of an opening pattern determination table for normal electric accessories in the eighth pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the opening pattern determination table for normal electric accessories shown in FIG. 305 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The open pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process (in the case of the normal symbol hit), according to the game state and the normal symbol selection pattern. is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 8146 .

In the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 305, game states, normal symbol selection symbols, and normal electric accessory 8146 release patterns are defined in association with each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146" is the "first opening time" in the first open state of the second start port 8140, and the first closed state of the second start port 8140. "first wait time" in the second opening state of the second start port 8140, "second opening time" in the second open state of the second start port 8140, "second wait time" in the second closed state of the second start port 8140, 2 It is composed of “ending time” for closing the starting port 8140 and ending the operation of the normal electric accessory 8146 . The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 is not limited to the configuration described above, and may be configured so that the open state and the closed state can be repeated three or more times, or the open state can be configured only once. may be configured. Furthermore, it may be configured such that an "opening time" for waiting for the first opening of the second starting port 8140 is provided before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 305, and determines the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 based on the game state and the selected normal symbol. When the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 the normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 .

According to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern (91H01H) is configured to determine a first opening time of 72 ms, no waiting time for the first time, no opening after the second time, and an ending time of 12 ms.

Further, according to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 305, in the case of the normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, the second normal electric accessory is selected regardless of the selected symbol of any normal symbol. The opening pattern (91H02H) of 8146 is configured to determine a first opening time of 5400 ms, a first waiting time of 120 ms, a second opening time of 72 ms, and an ending time of 12 ms.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 differs depending on the game state, and in the normal game state, in the case of a normal symbol hit, the game ball enters the second start port 8140. is difficult "disadvantageous opening mode (also referred to as "short opening")" is determined, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 8140 " Advantageous opening mode (also referred to as "long opening") is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the open pattern of any normal electric accessory 8146 is activated, the specified number for normal electric accessories is set to 1, and during the operation of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 ( When one game ball enters the second start port 8140 during the opening of the second start port 8140, the operation of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 ends (the second start port 8140 closes ). That is, for one normal symbol, only one game ball can enter the second start port 8140, and even if there is a remaining time of 5400 ms open time in the time saving game state, the second start Port 8140 will close.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the same normal electric accessory 8146 is determined as the same time-saving game state without distinction between the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, or the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state. However, it may be configured to determine the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 that is different between the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state, or the special time saving game state and the general time saving game state.

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 may be varied according to the selected pattern of the normal pattern. However, in the case of normal symbol hit in the normal game state, it becomes a "disadvantageous release mode" group than in the case of normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, and in the case of normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, in the normal game state. It is desirable that the "advantageous opening mode" group is obtained as compared with the case of winning the normal symbol.

[10-3-11. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 306 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the variation pattern table of normal symbols shown in FIG. 306 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 306, the game state, the normal symbol selection symbol, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the selected normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 .

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 306, the normal symbol variation display time 414 ms is determined in the normal game state, and the normal symbol variation display time 408 ms is determined in the time saving game state. It is configured. Further, in the present embodiment, the design determination time of the normal symbols is determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the game state or the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the variable display time of the normal symbols and the fixed time of the normal symbols are all determined. It may be configured such that the variable display time of normal symbols and the design determination time of normal symbols are determined. Similarly, in the time-saving gaming state, the variable display time of the same normal symbols and the fixed time of the normal symbols are determined. It may be configured such that the variable display time and the design confirmation time of the normal design are determined. Furthermore, even if it is configured to determine the variable display time of different normal symbols and the design determination time of normal symbols in the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state, or the special time saving game state and the general time saving game state. good.

[10-4. Main control processing]
In the eighth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the special symbol control process and normal symbol control performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although part of the processing and system timer interrupt processing are different, the rest of the processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the system timer interrupt process will be described below, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine , including the same processing as , will be explained again with different step numbers.

[10-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 307, the special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 307 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 307, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S8001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S8001, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S8001 when executing the special symbol control process.

In S8002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S8001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol variable display waiting state is in effect. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S8008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S8003.

In S8003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a reserved number of second special symbols. When the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information of the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S8004, and when it determines that the starting information of the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S8005. Move.

In S8004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols is present. When the main CPU 201 determines that the start information of the first special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S8007, and when it determines that the start information of the first special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S8006. to

In S8005, the main CPU 201 performs shift processing to shift the second special symbol start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the second special symbol start storage area (2) to the second special The start information stored in the symbol start storage area (4) is shifted to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (3).

In S8006, the main CPU 201 performs shift processing to shift the first special symbol start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the first special symbol start storage area (2) to the first special The start information stored in the symbol start storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (3).

In S8007, the main CPU 201 stores the special symbol start information (the number of first special symbols and second special symbols held) in the first special symbol start storage area and the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203. If the command has not been stored for a certain period of time or longer, the demonstration display command is reserved for transmission. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

At S8008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S8003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S8001 to S8008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is stored as the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variator has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 8120 or the second It may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the winning order (ball entering order) to the starting port 8140.

[10-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 308, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 307) will be described. FIG. 308 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

Numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 308 are control state numbers of special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

In S8011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time (special symbol timer counter) is zero. The waiting time for this special symbol is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special symbol management process, and is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of 2 msec, for example. When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol waiting time is not 0, it ends the special symbol management process, returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 307), and determines that the special symbol waiting time is 0. If so, the process proceeds to S8012.

At S8012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S8012, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8013. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S8013 based on the control state number read in the process of S8012.

In S8013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S8013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8014.

In S8014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This process of S8014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8015.

At S8015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S8015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8016.

In S8016, the main CPU 201 performs processing during closing of the small winning game. The process of S8016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this small winning game closing process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8017.

In S8017, the main CPU 201 performs processing during the small winning game opening. This process of S8017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this small hit game opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8018.

At S8018, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This process of S8018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8019.

At S8019, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S8019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8020.

At S8020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game state ending process. The process of S8020 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S8013 to S8020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 307). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[10-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 309, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 309 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8021, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308), and controls the special symbols. If it is determined that the state number is "0", the process proceeds to S8022.

In S8022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process for determining a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, a special symbol hit determination is performed, and hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S8022, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8023.

In S8023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing for determining the stop symbol of the special symbols. In this special symbol determination process, with reference to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol and the symbol designation command are determined. After executing the process of S8023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8024.

In S8024, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of determining the type of hit when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this hit type determination process, if the hit is a big hit in the special symbol hit determination process, based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of times of the limiter in the number of times limiter function ("limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 described later), One of the big hit type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 297 is determined. In addition, if it is a small hit in the special symbol hit determination process, based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of limiter times (limiter number counter) in the number limiter function, the small hit type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 298 ~ Any one of 3 small hit type determination tables is determined. Furthermore, since the game state and the like are set based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, winning game state data indicating the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win or a small win is stored in the main RAM 203. It is set in the game state storage area when winning. After executing the process of S8024, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8025.

In S8025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. A special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the like. The details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S8025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8026.

In S8026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process for setting a special symbol variable display time. In this special symbol variation display time setting process, the special symbol variation pattern table determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S8025 is referred to, and the special symbol variation is based on the determined special symbol variation pattern. Determine display time. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the variable special symbol in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let it start. After executing the process of S8026, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8027.

At S8027, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 308) is performed after the end of this special symbol variable display start process. Become. After executing the process of S8027, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8028.

At S8028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of confirming/updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8028, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8029.

At S8029, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In this process, transmission reservation processing of "symbol designation command" and "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol effect start command. As transmission reservation processing of the design designation command, transmission reservation processing of the design designation command determined in S8023 is performed. Further, as the transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command, transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S8025 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. In addition, the special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-4-4. Special Symbol Variation Pattern Decision Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 310, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 309) will be described. FIG. 310 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8025-1, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag and determines whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. That is, it is determined whether or not the state flag indicating the normal game state is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, it moves the process to S8025-2, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (that is, the time-saving gaming state). , the process moves to S8025-3.

In S8025-2, when the current game state is the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a). After executing the process of S8025-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-3, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag and determines whether or not the current game state (time saving game state) is the B time saving game state. That is, it is determined whether or not the state flag indicating the B time-saving gaming state is 2. When the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the B time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to S8025-4, and the current gaming state is not the B time saving gaming state (that is, the A time saving gaming state). If so, the process moves to S8025-5.

In S8025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b) when the current gaming state is the B time-saving gaming state. After executing the process of S8025-4, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-5, the main CPU 201 refers to the special time saving flag and determines whether or not the current game state (A time saving game state) is the special time saving game state. That is, it is determined whether or not the special time-saving flag = 1 indicating the special time-saving gaming state. When the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the special time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to S8025-6, and the current gaming state is not the special time-saving gaming state (that is, the general time-saving gaming state). If so, the process moves to S8025-7.

In S8025-6, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b) when the current gaming state is the special time-saving gaming state. After executing the process of S8025-6, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-7, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers (“limiter number counter” of the main RAM 203, which will be described later) is 91 or more in the normal time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining jackpot limiter counts is 91 or more, the process proceeds to S8025-8, and the remaining jackpot limiter count is not 91 or more (that is, the remaining jackpot limiter count is the number of times is 90 or less), the process proceeds to S8025-9.

In S8025-8, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a). After executing the process of S8025-8, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-9, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers (“limiter number counter” of the main RAM 203 to be described later) is 1 to 90 in the normal time-saving gaming state. When the main CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining jackpot limiter counts is between 1 and 90, the process proceeds to S8025-10, and the remaining jackpot limiter count is not between 1 and 90 (that is, the jackpot limiter count). remaining times=0), the process moves to S8025-11.

At S8025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b). After executing the process of S8025-10, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c). After executing the process of S8025-11, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8025-12.

At S8025-12, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and determines the special symbol type (starting information type), the determination result of the special symbol win determination process at S8022, and the special symbol hit determination process. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the selected symbol and the random number for reach determination and the random number for effect selection as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process of S8025-12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8025-13.

In S8025-13, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table and determines a special symbol variation pattern command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern. After executing the process of S8025-13, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process, and shifts the process to S8026 of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 309).

[10-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 311, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8041, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "1", the process proceeds to S8042.

In S8042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol finalization time setting process for setting a special symbol finalization time. In this special symbol design determination time setting process, the special symbol design determination time (for example, 540 ms) is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/loss). After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and stops displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Let After executing the process of S8042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8043.

It should be noted that the symbol fixing time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the game state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol fixing time (for example, 540 ms) may be determined.

In S8043, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the eighth pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, a "time saving number counter" for counting the number of time saving times as a condition for ending the time saving game state and a special pattern to shift to the B time saving game state A process of updating the "ceiling counter" for counting the number of times of variable display is performed. Also, when the time saving number counter = 0, control is performed to shift from the time saving game state to the normal game state, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition control to the B time saving game state is performed. The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S8043, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8044.

At S8044, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S8015 in FIG. 308) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S8044, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8045.

At S8045, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8045, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8046.

At S8046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times a special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours. After executing the process of S8046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-6. Time saving management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 312, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 311) will be described. FIG. 312 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving management processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8043-1, the main CPU 201 performs time saving number counter update processing for updating the time saving number counter. In this time-saving number counter update process, when the time-saving game state is set (when the state flag = 1 or 2 is set), 1 is subtracted from the "time-saving number counter" of the main RAM 203 and updated. do. After executing the process of S8043-1, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8043-2.

In S8043-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving number counter=0. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-3 when determining that the time saving counter=0, and moves the process to S8043-4 when determining that the time saving counter=0 is not.

In S8043-3, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information and shifts from the time saving game state to the normal game state. Here, as the clearing of the time saving information, the state flag, the special time saving flag, the time saving number counter, and the later-described small hit winning number counter are cleared (=0 is set). After executing the process of S8043-3, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8043-4.

In S8043-4, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing for updating the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter update process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process of S8043-4, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8043-5.

In S8043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not ceiling counter=ceiling value (eg, 999 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value, the process proceeds to S8043-6. If it is determined that the ceiling counter is not equal to the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S8043-9.

In S8043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (=0 is set). After executing the process of S8043-6, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8043-7.

In S8043-7, the main CPU 201 performs a B time saving game state setting process for shifting to the B time saving game state. In this B time-saving gaming state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving gaming state is set to 2, and the number of winnings of the small hit is set as the "B time-saving end condition" so as to shift to the "special time-saving gaming state". = 255 times, and the number of times of time saving = 10000 times. Then, the special time saving flag = 1 is set so that it can be identified that it is in the special time saving game state. In addition, in the B time saving game state setting process, the number of winning times of small hits = 1 time, the number of time saving times = 10000 times, and the special time saving flag = 0 may be set so as to shift to the "general time saving game state". After executing the process of S8043-7, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8043-8.

In S8043-8, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a time saving shift command when starting the B time saving game state. In addition, the time-saving transition command that is reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8043-8, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8043-9.

At S8043-9, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S8043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process, and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 311).

[10-4-7. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 313 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8051, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and returns to the special symbol control state. If it is determined that the number is "2", the process proceeds to S8052.

In S8052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbols and determines whether or not the game is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to the big win. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8054 when determining that it is a big hit, and shifts the process to S8061 when determining that it is not a big hit.

In S8054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a big hit. In this jackpot external signal processing, the selected pattern of the special pattern is referred to, and the external signal output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal plate 184 at the time of the jackpot is "a jackpot signal corresponding to the selected pattern of the special pattern. ' to generate. After that, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbol of the special symbol" is output to the external terminal plate 184. - 特許庁After executing the process of S8054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8055.

In S8055, the main CPU 201 performs a first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. - 特許庁Furthermore, referring to the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 above, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected symbol of the special symbol" of the big hit, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time ) is set in the waiting time for special symbols in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S8055, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8056.

In S8056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot state display process. In this jackpot state display processing, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right-handed instruction data for notifying the player of right-handed instruction is set. After executing the process of S8056, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8057.

At S8057, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined to be a big hit, the main CPU 201 clears the state flag, the special time saving flag, the time saving number counter and the small winning winning number counter. After executing the process of S8057, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8058.

At S8058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S8058, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8059.

At S8059, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening preparation process (see S8018 in FIG. 308) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. . After executing the process of S8059, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8059.

At S8060, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big hit start display command. After executing the processing of S8060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308).

In S8061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbols and refers to the selected special symbols to determine whether or not the special symbol is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to the small win. Determine whether or not there is The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8063 when it determines that it is a small hit, and shifts the process to S8071 when it determines that it is not a small hit (that is, loses).

In S8063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small hit. In the external signal processing of this small hit, the selected pattern of the special pattern is referred to, and when the selected pattern of the second special pattern "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small hit" is determined, the external terminal plate 184 is turned on. A "small hit signal" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via. After that, the generated small hit signal is output to the external terminal plate 184 . In this embodiment, when the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined, the "small hit signal" is not generated. It may be configured to generate a "small winning signal" even when the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to is determined. After executing the process of S8063, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8064.

In S8064, the main CPU 201 performs small winning start preparation setting processing. In this small hit start preparation setting process, referring to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. is set as the upper limit value of the number of small hits to be opened in the main RAM 203. Next, referring to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 above, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected symbol of the special symbol", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time ) is set in the waiting time for special symbols in the main RAM 203 . Furthermore, referring to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 above, based on the "selected symbol of the special symbol", the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156, and the determined opening waiting Time is set in the V winning opening closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. Note that the V winning control processing relating to the V shutter solenoid 8160 for opening and closing the V winning port 8156 is performed in the system timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 324 and 325) to be described later. After executing the process of S8064, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8066.

In S8065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win state display process. In this small hit state display process, right hitting instruction data for notifying the player of instructing right hitting is set. After executing the process of S8065, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8066.

In S8066, the main CPU 201 counts the number of times a small win is won as a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state, and updates a "small win win count counter" indicating the remaining number of times a small win is won. I do. The details of this small hit number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S8066, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8067.

At S8067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S8067, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8068.

At S8068, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the small winning game closing process (see S8016 in FIG. 308) will be performed. . After executing the process of S8068, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8069.

In S8069, the main CPU 201 performs processing of reservation processing for transmission of a small winning start display command. After executing the processing of S8069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308).

At S8071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S8051 to S8071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-4-8. Minor hit winning count update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the small hit number update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313) will be described. FIG. 314 is a flow chart showing an example of small hit number update processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8066-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, that is, whether or not the state flag=1 or 2. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, it shifts the process to S8066-2, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state, the small hit winning count update process. , and the process is moved to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313).

In S8066-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "small hit winning frequency counter" of the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S8066-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8066-3.

At S8066-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the counter for the number of winning small hits=0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the counter for the number of winning small wins = 0, the process proceeds to S8066-4, and if it determines that the counter for the number of winning small wins is not 0, the main CPU 201 executes a small winning number update process. It ends, and processing is moved to S8067 of special design game decision processing (figure 313 reference).

In S8066-4, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information and shifts from the time saving game state to the normal game state. Here, as the clearing of the time saving information, the state flag, the special time saving flag, the time saving number counter, and the small hit winning number counter are cleared (=0 is set). After executing the process of S8066-4, the main CPU 201 ends the small hit number update process, and shifts the process to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313).

[10-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 313) will be described. FIG. 315 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8072, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S8072, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8073.

At S8073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. Also, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the starting information stored in the special symbol determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S8073, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8074.

At S8074, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S8074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313).

[10-4-10. Small winning game closing processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the small winning game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 316 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during closing of the small winning game in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8081, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 201 terminates the small winning game closing process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "3", the process proceeds to S8082.

In S8082, the main CPU 201 loads the "minor win open number counter value". The "small hit open number counter" is a counter that counts the number of small hit open times. In addition, the count value of the small hit open number counter (small hit open number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM203. After executing the process of S8082, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8083.

In S8083, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the loaded small win open number counter value is the upper limit value of the small win open number. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8089 when determining that the upper limit of the number of openings of the small win is reached, and shifts the process to S8084 when determining that the upper limit of the number of openings of the small win is not reached.

In S8084, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the second big winning opening 8151 (the winning number of the second big winning opening 8151) in the small winning game state is the maximum winning number. In this process, the value of the second big winning opening counter counted by the second big winning opening count switch 8152 is the predetermined maximum winning number of the second big winning openings 8151 (for example, 10). No is determined. When the main CPU 201 determines that the number of prizes won at the second big prize opening 8151 is not the maximum number of prizes won, it shifts the process to S8085 and determines that the number of prizes won at the second big prize opening 8151 is the maximum number of prizes won. If so, the process moves to S8089.

In S8085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of openings of small hits. After executing the process of S8085, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8086.

In S<b>8086 , the main CPU 201 performs opening setting processing for opening the second big winning opening 8151 . In this second big winning opening opening setting process, the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. number of times counter value), the maximum opening time of the second big winning opening 8151 this time is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set in the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM203. Then, the second special winning opening opening control data for opening the second large winning opening 8151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155 . After executing the process of S8086, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8087.

At S8087, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the end of this small-hit game closed process, the small-hit game open process (see FIG. 317) is performed. Become. After executing the process of S8087, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8088.

At S8088, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S8088, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 8156 within the specified time (that is, whether or not there is detection by the V winning opening switch 8157). When the main CPU 201 determines that V winning has been detected, the process proceeds to S8090, and when determining that V winning has not been detected, the process proceeds to S8098.

At S8090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the big hit from the second route. In this processing, the selected pattern of the special pattern is referred to, and a ``jackpot signal corresponding to the selected pattern of the special pattern'' is generated as an external signal to be output to the hall computer 186 through the external terminal plate 184 at the time of the jackpot. After that, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbol of the special symbol" is output to the external terminal plate 184. - 特許庁After executing the process of S8090, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8101.

In S8091, the main CPU 201 performs second route jackpot start preparation setting processing. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, first, the jackpot type determination shown in FIG. One of the tables 1 to 3 is determined as a jackpot type determination table. Then, referring to the determined jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected symbol of the special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. set to Furthermore, with reference to the determined jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected pattern of special symbols" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is used as the main It is set to the waiting time of the special design in RAM203. After executing the process of S8101, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8092.

In S8092, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the big hit game state from the second route is started from the second round round game. After executing the process of S8092, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8093.

In S8093, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot state display process. In this jackpot state display processing, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right-handed instruction data for notifying the player of right-handed instruction is set. After executing the process of S8093, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8094.

At S8094, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined to be a big hit, the main CPU 201 clears the state flag, the special time saving flag, the time saving number counter and the small winning winning number counter. After executing the process of S8094, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8095.

At S8095, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S8095, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8096.

At S8096, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process (Fig. 308) is performed after the small winning game closing process is finished. After executing the process of S8096, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8097.

In S8097, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a V-hit start display command. After executing the process of S8097, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game open process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8098, the main CPU 201 performs small hit end preparation setting processing. In this small hit end preparation setting process, referring to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. Then, the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM203. After executing the process of S8098, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8099.

In S8099, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a small winning end display command. After executing the process of S8099, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8100.

At S8100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 315 is performed. After executing the process of S8100, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-11. Small hit game open processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the small winning game open processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 317 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during the opening of a small winning game in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8101, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 terminates the small winning game open process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "4", the process moves to S8102.

In S8102, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the second big winning opening 8151 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process (see S8086 in FIG. 316) of the second big winning opening has passed. When the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second big winning hole 8151 has not passed, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308). Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second big winning opening 8151 has passed, the process proceeds to S8103.

In S<b>8103 , the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing of the second big winning hole 8151 to close the second big winning hole 8151 . In this second big winning opening closing setting process, the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number counter value), the closing time of the second big winning opening 8151 is determined, and the determined closing time is set in the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM203. Then, the second special winning opening closing control data for closing the second special winning opening 8151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155 . After executing the process of S8103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8104.

At S8104, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "3". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the end of this small-hit game open process, the small-hit game closing process (see FIG. 316) is performed. Become. After executing the process of S8104, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-12. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) and the preparation process for opening the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 318 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8111, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "5", the process proceeds to S8112.

In S8112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value". "Round counter" is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. A count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S8112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8113.

In S8113, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the loaded round counter value is the upper limit value of the number of big hit rounds. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8114 when determining that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit value, and shifts the process to S8118 when determining that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit value.

In S8114, the main CPU 201 performs big hit end preparation setting processing. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. , the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S8114, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8115.

At S8115, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" in this manner, the jackpot game state end process (Fig. 308) is performed after the big winning opening opening preparation process is finished. After executing the process of S8115, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8116.

At S8116, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S8116, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8117.

In S8117, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command. It should be noted that the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S8117, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8118, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S8118, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8119.

In S<b>8119 , the main CPU 201 performs opening setting processing of the first big winning opening 8131 to open the first big winning opening 8131 . In this first big winning hole open setting process, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. ), the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 8131 in this round is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set in the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 . Then, the first special winning opening opening control data for opening the first special winning opening 8131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 8135 . After executing the process of S8119, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8120.

At S8120, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large winning opening opening control process (see FIG. 308) is performed after the completion of this large winning opening opening preparation process. Become. After executing the process of S8120, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8121.

At S8121, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S8121, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8122.

At S8122, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8122, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-13. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 319 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 terminates the big winning opening control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "6", the process proceeds to S8132.

In S8132, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 8131 in one round is the maximum winning number when the first big winning hole 8131 is opened. do. In this process, the value of the first big winning opening counter counted by the first big winning opening count switch 8132 is the predetermined maximum winning number of the first big winning openings 8131 (for example, 10). No is determined.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S8132 that the number of prizes won in the first big prize opening 8131 is not the maximum number of prizes won, it shifts the process to S8133, and in S8132 the number of prizes won in the first big prize opening 8131 is the maximum number of prizes won. If so, the process proceeds to S8134.

In S8133, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 8131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process (see S8119 in FIG. 318) of the first big winning opening has passed.

When the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 8131 has not elapsed, it ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308). . Further, when the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 8131 has passed, the process proceeds to S8134.

In S<b>8134 , the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing of the first big winning opening 8131 to close the first big winning opening 8131 . In this first big winning hole closing setting process, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. ), the closing time of the first big winning opening 8131 in this round is determined, and the determined closing time is set in the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 . Then, the first special winning opening closing control data for closing the first special winning opening 8131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 8135 . After executing the process of S8134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8135.

At S8135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning opening opening control process, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see FIG. 318) is performed again. It will happen. After executing the process of S8135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8136.

At S8136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S8136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8137.

In S8137, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S8137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-14. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the jackpot game state end processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 320 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8141, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "7", the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot game state end processing, returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308), and returns to the special symbol control state. If it is determined that the number is "7", the process proceeds to S8142.

At S8142, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game information initialization process. In this jackpot game information initialization processing, processing for setting or resetting the values of various flags and data used in the jackpot game state and various counters (eg, round counter, jackpot winning counter, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S8142, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8143.

In S8143, the main CPU 201 performs post-jackpot state setting processing for setting the game state after the jackpot game state is finished. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, based on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts (the value of the "limiter count counter" to be described later), one of the game state related setting tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. Determine the state-related setting table, refer to the determined game state-related setting table, and based on the game state at the time of winning and the selected pattern of the special pattern, Set time saving flag). After executing the process of S8143, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8145.

In this embodiment, first, the limiter operation flag is referred to, and if the limiter operation flag=0, the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) is determined. In addition, when the limiter operation flag = 1, when the "limiter number counter" is 91 or more (when the number of remaining limiter times of the jackpot is 91 or more), the game state related setting table shown in Fig. 299 (b) 2 is determined, and when the "limiter number counter" is 1 to 90 (when the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits is 1 to 90), the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. When the "limiter count counter" is 0 (when the remaining count of the limiter count of the jackpot is 0), the gaming state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 299(d) is determined. Then, referring to the determined game state related setting table, the game state (state flag, number of wins of small hits, number of times of time saving, special time saving flag) is set based on the selected pattern of the special pattern.

And, in this embodiment, when the limiter number counter=0 and the game state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. "State flag = 0" for setting the state is set, and after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is forcibly shifted to the normal game state.

In S8144, the main CPU 201 sets and updates the "limiter operation flag" as the limiter information, and the "limiter number counter" for counting the number of consecutive big wins in the time-saving gaming state, corresponding to the remaining number of the limiter number of big wins. Limiter information update processing is performed. The details of this limiter information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S8144, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8145.

At S8145, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 315 is performed. After executing the processing of S8145, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot game state end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-4-15. Limiter information update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 321, limiter information update processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the jackpot game state end processing (see FIG. 320) will be described. FIG. 321 is a flow chart showing an example of limiter information update processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8144-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the selected symbol of the special symbol for ending the jackpot game state is the selected symbol of the special symbol for shifting to the time-saving game state. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8144-4 when it determines that the selected symbol is a special symbol that shifts to the time-saving gaming state, and processes if it determines that it is not a special symbol that transitions to the time-saving gaming state. to S8144-2.

In S8144-2, the main CPU 201 clears the limiter count counter of the main RAM 203 (sets the limiter count counter=0). After executing the process of S8144-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8144-3.

At S8144-3, the main CPU 201 sets the limiter operation flag=0. After executing the process of S8144-3, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process, and shifts the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 320).

In S8144-4, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of consecutive big wins in the time-saving game state that has transitioned to the big win game state is being counted, that is, whether or not the limiter operation flag=1. When the main CPU 201 determines that the number of consecutive big wins that have shifted to the big win game state in the time saving game state is being counted, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8144-7, and counts the number of consecutive big wins that have changed to the big win game state in the time saving game state. If it is determined that counting is not in progress, the process proceeds to S8144-5.

At S8144-5, the main CPU 201, when not counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have shifted to the jackpot game state in the time-saving game state (when the limiter operation flag is 0), sets the limiter count to the limiter count counter of the main RAM 203. Perform limiter count setting processing to be set. In this limiter count setting process, the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) is referred to, the limiter count is determined based on the selected special symbol, and the determined limiter count is set in the limiter count counter. . After executing the process of S8144-5, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8144-6.

In S8144-6, the main CPU 201 sets the limiter operation flag=1 when the limiter count is newly set. After executing the process of S8144-6, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process, and shifts the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 320).

At S8144-7, the main CPU 201, when counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have shifted to the jackpot game state in the time-saving game state (when the limiter operation flag is 1), performs limiter count subtraction processing. In this limiter count subtraction process, based on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts (the value of the current limiter count counter), one of the game state related setting tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. A setting table is determined, the determined gaming state related setting table is referred to, and a subtraction value of the number of limiters is determined based on the selected symbol of the special symbol. Then, the limiter count counter of the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting the subtraction value of the determined limiter count. After executing the process of S8144-7, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process, and shifts the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 320).

[10-6-16. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 322, normal symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 322, the main CPU 201 stores the normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. It goes without saying that

FIG. 322 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 322 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

At S8200, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol waiting time is zero. The waiting time of this normal design is set as the waiting time of various processes of the normal design control process, and is subtracted as a normal design timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. When the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0, it ends the normal symbol control process, returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process, and the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0. If it is determined that it is, the process moves to S8201.

At S8201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S8201, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8210. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S8210 based on the control state number read in the process of S8201.

At S8210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S8210 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". The details of this normal symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8220.

At S8220, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S8220 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8230.

In this normal symbol variable display ending process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended. is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

At S8230, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S8230 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8240.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining a selected symbol (for example, a normal symbol win or a normal symbol loss) of the normal symbols that are stopped and displayed. Then, when the selected symbol of the stopped and displayed normal symbol corresponds to the normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting processing of the normal electric accessory 8146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 8146. - 特許庁

In this normal electric accessory 8146 opening pattern setting process, the normal electric accessory 8146 opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. An opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 8146 release pattern.

At S8240, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This process of S8240 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8250.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second start port 8140 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S8230, When a specified number (for example, one) of game balls enter the second starting port 8140, or when the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 is completed, the second starting port 8140 is closed. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 8146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

At S8250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S8250 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the normal symbol per end process is completed, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", terminates the normal symbol control process, and proceeds to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). back to

In the normal symbol per end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of resetting (clearing) various parameters relating to the normal symbols determined in S8210 to S8240 and various random values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described normal symbol control process (S8200 to S8250) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-6-17. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 322) will be described. FIG. 323 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 323, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S8211).

When it is determined in S8211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 322). On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8212.

At S8212, the main CPU 201 shifts the normal symbol starting information. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the normal symbol start storage area (2) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). The start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S8212, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8213.

At S8213, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determining value data ("normal design winning" or "normal design losing") is determined. After executing the process of S8213, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8214.

At S8214, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, "selected symbol of normal symbol" is determined. After executing the process of S8214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8215.

At S8215, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 306, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the selected normal symbol. decide. After executing the process of S8215, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8216.

At S8216, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol variation display time determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S8215) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol variation display is performed on the normal symbol display unit 161. to start. After executing the process of S8216, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8217.

At S8217, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (Fig. 322 S8220) is performed. After executing the process of S8217, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8218.

At S8218, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the normal symbol variation pattern command. It should be noted that the variation pattern command in the normal pattern reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-6-18. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described with reference to FIGS. 324 and 325. FIG. 324 and 325 are flowcharts showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8311, the main CPU 201 saves the protection register. After executing the process of S8311, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8312.

In S8312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, when power interruption is detected), it moves the process to S8332, and determines that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, when power interruption is not detected). If so, the process moves to S8313.

In S8313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S8313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8314.

In S<b>8314 , the main CPU 201 performs read processing of the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 . After executing the process of S8314, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8315.

At S8315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permission state based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permitted state when the game permission flag is on (=1), and indicates a game not permitted state when the game permission flag is off (=0). As described in the first pachinko game machine, the game permission flag is turned off (=game disallowed state) when the power is turned on and the power is restored and the RAM is being cleared. It is also a flag for which the game permission flag is set to ON (=game permission state) after the power is restored and after the RAM is cleared. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8317 when determining that the game is permitted, and shifts the process to S8332 when determining that the game is not permitted.

In S8317, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S8317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8318.

In S8318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. In the interrupt cycle timer update process, various timer counters such as a special symbol timer counter, a normal symbol timer counter, a V winning opening closing timer counter, and a V winning opening opening timer counter in the work area of the main RAM 203 are subtracted. After executing the process of S8318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8319.

In S8319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for judging a big hit of a random number for judging a big hit, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls. After executing the process of S8319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8320.

In S8320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S8320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8321.

At S8321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S8321, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8322.

In S8322, the main CPU 201 performs V winning control processing for opening and closing the V winning opening 8156 when the V operation flag is ON. In this V winning control process, when the V operation flag is ON and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning opening closing timer counter = 0), the small hit type determination table shown in Fig. 298 determined in S8024 , based on the "selected symbol of the special symbol", the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156, the determined opening time is set to the V winning opening opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V V winning opening control data for opening the V winning opening 8156 is output to the shutter solenoid 8160 . The V winning opening opening control data is continuously output unless the V winning opening opening timer counter is zero. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning opening opening control data is output, the opening time has elapsed (V winning opening opening timer counter = 0), the V winning opening opening control data Stop the output and turn off the V operation flag. After executing the process of S8322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8323.

At S8323, the main CPU 201 refers to the “total jackpot ball number counter” that counts the cumulative jackpot ball count of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day, and the cumulative jackpot ball count counter≧99900. It is determined whether or not. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8324 when it determines that the accumulated jackpot number counter≧99900, and shifts the process to S8328 when it determines that the accumulated jackpot number counter≧99900 does not hold.

Here, the "total jackpot ball number counter" is a counter in the work area of the main RAM 203, and is configured to be initialized (started from 0 when the power is turned on) when the power is turned on. The "total jackpot number counter" is not initialized when the power is turned on, but is initialized each time the number of shots or the number of outs (for example, 3000) of the corresponding game balls per day is counted. It may be configured as

In S8324, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of a "game disallowed state preparation command" for notifying the display device 7, the speaker 32, etc. that the state will soon shift to the game disallowed state. After executing the process of S8324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8325.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the total number of jackpot balls that is the condition for shifting to the game disallowed state is 99900 or more, which is 100 less than 100000 (100,000), the game disallowed state preparation command is issued. However, it is less than the cumulative jackpot number (100000) which is the condition for shifting to the game disallowed state, and the cumulative jackpot number (100000) which is the condition for shifting to the game disallowed state. Any number greater than or equal to the number of balls paid out (eg, 98500 to 99999) obtained by subtracting the maximum number of payouts that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (eg, 10R x 10 count x 15 prize balls = 1500) It may be configured to transmit a game disallowed state preparation command at the time of .

In S8325, the main CPU 201 refers to the “total jackpot ball number counter” and determines whether or not the total jackpot ball number counter≧100000. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8326 if it determines that the cumulative jackpot number counter≧100000, and moves the process to S8328 if it determines that the cumulative jackpot number counter≧100000 does not.

In S8326, the main CPU 201 performs a game disallowed state setting process for shifting to a game disallowed state as activation of the payout ball limiter function. In this game disallowed state setting process, the game permission flag is turned off (= 0), the cumulative jackpot number counter is set to 0, and the special symbol control state number is set to end the special symbol game. Set to 0. Furthermore, game disapproval information is output to the payout/shooting control circuit 400 in order to stop the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 6 and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82 . The game disallowed state is changed to the game permitted state after the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S8326, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8327.

At S8327, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of a "game disallowed state command" for notifying the display device 7, the speaker 32, etc. that the state has shifted to the game disallowed state. After executing the process of S8327, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8328.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the total number of jackpot balls of the game balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day reaches the number of hitting stop balls (for example, 100,000), the jackpot game state It is possible to forcibly shift to a game disapproval state from , and partially regulate the game state after the big win game state is finished.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the cumulative number of hit balls reaches the number of hit-stopped balls, it is configured to forcibly shift from the jackpot game state to the game disallowed state. When the number of balls to be stopped is reached, the state may be forcibly shifted to the normal game state after the jackpot game state is ended.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the game is in a non-permissible state, invalidation of various switches (excluding the backup clear switch 176 etc.) through which the game ball enters or passes, and shooting of the game ball from the shooting device 6 Although it is configured to prohibit and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, at least the invalidation of various switches, the prohibition of shooting game balls from the launching device 6, and the prohibition of payout of prize balls from the payout device 82 are performed. Either one may be configured to be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to shift to the game disallowed state when the total number of jackpot balls released is 100,000 (100,000) or more, but the cumulative number of jackpot balls to be shifted to the game disallowed state is free to change the design as appropriate.

At S8328, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S8328, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8329.

In S8329, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. After executing the process of S8329, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8330.

In S8330, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S8330, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8331.

In S8331, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S8329. After executing the process of S8331, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8332.

In S8332, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S8311, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[10-4-19. Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 326, switch input detection processing executed by main CPU 201 during system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 324) will be described. FIG. 326 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the eighth pachinko game machine is additionally provided with a configuration of a first big winning hole count switch 8132, a second big winning hole count switch 8152, and a V winning hole switch 8157. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

At S8401, the main CPU 201 executes a first start opening winning detection process. After executing the process of S8401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8402.

In this first start hole winning detection process, when the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 8120 is detected by the first start hole switch 8121, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the first start hole 8120. It is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When it is determined that there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, Symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, effect selection random numbers, etc.) are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in one first special symbol determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the first special symbol indicating the winning to the first starting port 8120 and the reserved number of the first special symbols is performed. The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random numbers. Processing will end.

At S8402, the main CPU 201 executes a second start opening winning detection process. After executing the process of S8402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8403.

In this second start hole winning detection process, when the second start hole switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 8140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second start hole 8140. It is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). When it is determined that there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, Symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, effect selection random numbers, etc.) are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in one second special symbol determination area in the FIFO format. Then, transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the second special symbol indicating the winning to the second starting port 8140 and the number of reserved second special symbols is performed. The second special symbol winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the second start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random numbers. Processing will end.

At S8403, the main CPU 201 performs normal winning hole passage detection processing. In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S8403, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8404.

At S8404, the main CPU 201 performs first big winning opening detection processing. In the first big winning hole passage detection process, when the first big winning hole count switch 8132 detects the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole 8131, the main CPU 201 Along with setting the payout information, 1 is added to the first big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls to the first big winning hole 8131 to update it. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when in the jackpot gaming state (when the control state number of the special symbol is 5 or 6), the main RAM 203 "total jackpot ball number counter" stores the first jackpot 8131. is updated by adding the number of prize balls (for example, 15) to be paid out when the ball is entered. Then, transmission reservation processing of the first big winning opening winning command indicating winning to the first big winning opening 8131 is performed. The first big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8404, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8405.

At S8405, the main CPU 201 performs a second prize winning opening detection process. In the second big winning hole passage detection process, when the second big winning hole count switch 8152 detects the game ball entering the second big winning hole 8151, the main CPU 201 detects the second big winning hole 8151. Along with setting the payout information, 1 is added to the second big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls to the second big winning hole 8151 to update it. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is set, the number of prize balls (for example, 15 ) are added and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of the second big winning opening winning command indicating winning to the second big winning opening 8151 is performed. The second big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8405, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8406.

In this embodiment, when the game is in the jackpot game state, a payout is made when the ball enters the first big win opening 8131 and the second big winning opening 8151 in the "total jackpot ball number counter" of the main RAM 203. Although it is configured to add the number of winning balls of the game ball, in addition to when it is in the big win game state, when it is in the small win game state (when the control state number of the special symbol = 3 or 4), the second It may be configured to add the number of game balls paid out when entering the first big winning hole 8131 and the second big winning hole 8151 . Furthermore, when it is a big hit game state (when special symbol control state number = 5, 6), or when it is a big hit game state including a small hit game state (special symbol control state number = 3 to 6 ), in addition to the number of game balls paid out when entering the first big winning hole 8131 and the second big winning hole 8151, the "total big winning ball number counter" of the main RAM 203 is added to the first start It may be configured to add the number of game balls paid out when entering the opening 8120 , the second start opening 8140 and the general winning opening 122 .

At S8406, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening detection processing. In the V winning opening passage detection process, when passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 8156 is detected by the V winning opening switch 8157, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning opening passage flag. Then, transmission reservation processing of a V passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 8156 is performed. The V passing command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 8156, the payout information is not set. After executing the process of S8406, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8407.

In S8407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the process of S8407, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S8408.

In this gate passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126 is detected by the passage gate switch 8127, the main CPU 201 has an empty space in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). Determine whether or not there is an area. When it is determined that there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, normal symbol determination random numbers, normal symbol symbols) are used as normal symbol start information. Random numbers etc.) are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in one normal symbol start storage area in the FIFO format. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), the gate passage detection process is terminated without acquiring various random numbers. .

In S8408, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing the process of S8408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generating process, referring to the look-ahead related data shown in FIG. , to generate lookahead commands. In addition, as shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 302, in the time saving game state, the big hit game state, and the small hit game state, the look-ahead command (second special Design look-ahead command) can only be generated. Then, prefetch command transmission reservation processing for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub-control circuit 300 is performed. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-5. sub control circuit]
Next, the contents of control by the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

[10-5-1. Notice production pattern decision table for time saving game state]
First, details of the announcement effect pattern determination table stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 327 is an example of the advance notice effect pattern determination table for the time saving game state in the eighth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 327, the notice effect pattern determination table of the time saving game state includes the variation pattern command of the special symbol received from the main control circuit 200 and the type of the time saving game state (special time saving game state or general time saving game state) , the selection rate (first random number value), and the announcement effect pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "effect pattern" refers to information that defines display effects such as characters, voice effects, and changes in the operation mode of the effect button 54, and the like. In addition, the "notice effect pattern" means the information of the effect suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special symbol and the effect contents to be executed among the effect patterns. In addition to the notice effect pattern, various effects such as a pattern effect pattern, which will be described later, can be superimposed and executed.

Further, the "selection rate (first random number value)" corresponds to the fact that the obtained second random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the second random number value consisting of the second random number range. However, for convenience of explanation, it is read as a selectivity and described. The selectivity may include 0% as well as 1 to 100%, and the term 0% selectivity is not excluded.

In the present embodiment, as the advance notice effect patterns, "prediction effect pattern A" that suggests in advance "falling small hit" and "prediction effect pattern B1" that suggests in advance that there is a possibility of "V small hit" and a ``notice effect pattern B2'' that develops from the notice effect pattern B1 and suggests in advance that there is a high possibility that the ``battle effect'' will be executed. In this embodiment, only three types of forewarning effect patterns are provided, but the content of the forewarning may be subdivided and four or more display modes may be provided.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the notice effect pattern determination table of the time saving game state shown in FIG. First random number value), the notice effect pattern is determined.

According to the notice effect pattern determination table of the time saving game state shown in FIG. A selection rate (first random number value) is associated with the advance notice effect pattern so that.

Furthermore, according to the notice effect pattern determination table of the time saving game state shown in FIG. It is configured.

Further, according to the notice effect pattern determination table of the time saving game state shown in FIG. It is configured.

In addition, according to the notice effect pattern determination table of the time saving game state shown in FIG. 327, "prediction effect pattern B2" is determined (executed) only when receiving the variation pattern command of the special symbol for executing the battle effect. is configured as

In addition, in the announcement effect pattern determination table of the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. is configured to be determined (executed) when a special symbol variation pattern command for executing a card effect is received, but only when a special symbol variation pattern command for executing a card effect is received A” may be determined (executed).

[10-5-2. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 328 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the eighth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 328, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S8500). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8510.

Note that the initialization process (S8500) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S8510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing for inputting data. In this data input process, both the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are performed.

In the reading process of the command input port 308, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. FIG. Further, when the operation information is input from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the input operation information is valid or invalid and is discarded. , the valid time for validating the input operation information, and the invalid period for invalidating the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are finished, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8520.

In S8520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S8510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8530.

At S8530, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, a production pattern is determined, and based on the determined production pattern, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) for operating various production devices are executed. , lamp requests, accessory requests, production button drive requests, etc.). The details of this rendering mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8540.

In S8540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 . The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8550.

In S8550, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 . The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8560.

In S8560, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 . Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8570.

At S8570, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a role product request to the role product control circuit 307 . Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8580.

At S8580, the sub CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310 . The button control circuit 310 changes the operation mode of the effect button 54 based on a message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 and performs drive control such as vibrating the effect button 54 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[10-5-3. Production Mode Determination Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 329, details of the effect mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 328) will be described. FIG. 329 is a flow chart showing an example of effect mode determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

At S8531, the sub CPU 301 executes effect pattern determination processing for determining the effect pattern. In this effect pattern determination process, based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7, the mode of the sound effect output from the speaker 32, the mode of operation of the effect button 54, etc. etc. is determined. Specifically, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the "symbol effect pattern" is determined based on the received special symbol variation pattern command. Further, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is the "variation pattern command of the special symbol" in the time saving game state, the notice performance pattern determination table of the time saving game state shown in FIG. , the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), and a selection rate (first random number value), a "notice performance pattern" is determined. In addition, a production pattern is determined according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8532.

In S8532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S8531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8533.

In S8533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S8532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8534.

In S8534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S8531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8535.

In S8535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S8531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8536.

In S8536, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product request generation process. In this process, a role item request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S8531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S8537.

In S8537, the sub CPU 301 executes the process of generating the effect button drive request. In this process, an effect button drive request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S8531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect mode determination process, and shifts the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 328).

[10-6. Game state transition diagram]
A game state to be shifted by various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be described with reference to a game state transition diagram. FIG. 330 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the game states are the normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), time-reduction game state (special time-reduction game state, general time-reduction game state), and game disapproval. State and.

As described above, the "first normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol, and left-handed hitting is the regular game mode. It is a normal game state. Therefore, in the first normal game state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120, but it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140.例文帳に追加

``Second normal game state'' is a normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, and the time-saving game state is terminated and shifted to the normal game state. Immediately after, it is a normal game state in which the reserved number of the second special symbols stored in the time saving game state is consumed. Here, the second normal game state is stipulated to be left-handed as a regular game mode, but during digestion of the reserved number of the second special symbols, the pull-back rate is shifted again to the general time-saving game state. is high, a right-handed shot may be defined as a regular game mode. As described above, the second normal game state may define left-handed hitting or right-handed hitting. Therefore, in the second normal game state, the display device 7 informs the user that the normal game mode is played. is not performed, and when the second normal game state shifts to the first normal game state, it is desirable to cause the display device 7 to notify left-handed as a regular game mode.

"Special time-saving gaming state" is a time-saving gaming state in which the number of winnings of small hits = 255 times is set as the second time-saving end condition, and "V Small win (approximately 1/48.2)” has a higher winning probability, and at least V small wins can be won by the time the small win is won 255 times. It is a guaranteed time-saving gaming state. The special time-saving game state becomes the A time-saving game state when shifted after the end of the jackpot game state, and becomes the B time-saving game state when it shifts after the variable display frequency of the special pattern reaches the ceiling value.

The "general time-saving gaming state" is a time-saving gaming state in which the number of winnings of small wins = 1 time or 2 times is set as the first time-saving end condition, and if all the won small wins are falling small wins, the big win. Since the time-saving game state ends without shifting to the game state, it is a time-saving game state in which the next big hit is not guaranteed.

In both the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 8120, while the second start port It is easy for a game ball to enter 8140.

The "game disallowed state" is a game state in which the player cannot play a game. And the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82 is prohibited.

(Transition control of the first normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 330, in the first normal game state, when the game ball enters the first start port 8120, "big hit" or "losing" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (Fig. 295), when a "big win" is determined, the state shifts to a big win game state. And after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state, according to the selected symbol of the special symbol, at a selection rate of 20% to the "special time saving game state" 296, 299).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches 999 times, the normal game state is shifted to the "special time-saving game state".

(Transition control of special time-saving gaming state)
In the special time-saving gaming state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 8140, "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" is determined based on the starting information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 295), When "big win" is determined, the game state shifts to the big win game state, and when "small win" is determined, the game state shifts to the small win game state. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the small winning game state as the V small winning is performed, it becomes possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening 8156. As a result, a transition is made to the jackpot game state from the second route.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the probability of a real hit to shift to the jackpot game state via the first route or the second route is about 1/41.9. (See FIG. 296).

Then, in the special time-saving game state, after the game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and shifts to the jackpot game state, all of them shift to the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 299). In addition, as described above, in the special time-saving game state, after the game ball enters the second start port 8140 and shifts to the big hit game state, it is configured to shift to the special time-saving game state again at a predetermined rate. You may

(Transition control of general time-saving gaming state)
In the general time-saving gaming state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 8140, "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 295), When "big win" is determined, the game state shifts to the big win game state, and when "small win" is determined, the game state shifts to the small win game state.

In the general time-saving game state, ``the number of wins of the small wins'' is subtracted as the A time-saving end condition without distinguishing between the V small win and the falling small win, but all the winning small wins are falling small wins. Then, the normal game state is shifted to the second normal game state without being able to shift to the jackpot game state. In addition, when the winning small hit is a V small win, a small winning game state as a V small win in which the game ball can (or easily) pass through the V winning opening 8156 is performed. When the ball passes through, the state shifts to the jackpot game state from the second route.

Then, in the general time-saving game state, after shifting to the big win game state via the first route or the second route, when the number of consecutive big wins by the number-of-times limiter function does not reach the limiter number of times, the general time-saving game state is resumed. After shifting to the game state, when the number of consecutive big hits by the number limiter function reaches the limiter number of times, the state shifts to the second normal game state (see FIG. 299). In addition, as described above, in the general time-saving game state, after the game ball enters the second start port 8140 and shifts to the big hit game state, it is configured to shift to the special time-saving game state again at a predetermined rate. You may

(Second normal game state transition control)
In the second normal game state, based on the start information of the second special symbol stored in the general time-saving game state, "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" is determined (see FIG. 295), " When a "big win" is determined, the game state shifts to a big win game state, and when a "small win" is determined, the game state shifts to a small win game state. If the winning small win is a V small win, a small winning game state as a V small win in which the game ball can (or easily) pass through the V winning opening 8156 is performed, and the game ball enters the V winning opening 8156. By passing through, it will shift to the jackpot game state from the second route.

Then, in the second normal game state, after shifting to the jackpot game state via the first route or the second route, it shifts to the general time-saving game state again (see FIG. 299).

In addition, in the second normal game state, it is determined that the start information of all the second special symbols stored in the general time-saving game state is "losing" or "falling small hit", and the general time-saving game state is entered. When all the reserved numbers of the stored second special symbols are consumed, the second normal game state is terminated and the game shifts to the first normal game state.

(Transition control of game disallowed state)
Regardless of the current game state, when the total number of jackpot balls put out in the jackpot game state per day reaches a predetermined number of hit-and-stop balls (for example, 100,000), the jackpot game state is exited. It will be forced to shift to the game disallowed state. This game disallowed state is shifted to the first normal game state, which is a game permitted state, when the RAM is cleared or the setting change process is performed. Further, the transition to the game disallowed state is executed as the highest priority process in the transition control in each game state.

[10-7. Production flow]
Next, an overview of effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, etc. will be described using the overall flow of effects. FIG. 331 is an example of the game state production flow in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The effects performed in the eighth pachinko game machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbols displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters and the like, and output from the speaker 32. , a lamp effect that emits light from the LED group 46, a effect accessory effect that drives the effect accessory group 58, a change effect of the operation mode of the effect button 54, and the like. In the present embodiment, the decorative patterns are composed of three main patterns, ie, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and sub-patterns that are much smaller than the main patterns. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to this.

In addition, in the embodiment, the effect based on the first special symbol lottery is also referred to as "first special symbol effect", and the effect based on the second special symbol lottery is also referred to as "second special symbol effect".

(Production in the first normal game state)
In the first normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach", "super super reach", and "full rotation reach" can be executed as the "first special symbol effect". It is

"Normal variation" is a variable mode production in which all decorative symbols start to be displayed at high speed and stopped in order, and can be executed when the special symbol lottery result is lost. It is a performance.

"Normal reach", "super reach", and "super super reach" are reach effects suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol may result in a big hit. "Normal ready-to-win" is a ready-to-win effect that is performed when left and right symbols of the same kind are temporarily stopped and displayed. In "Normal Reach", if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the left and right patterns, it will be lost, and if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in the same type as the left and right patterns, it will be a big hit. In addition, in "Normal Reach", the middle pattern may develop to "Super Reach" without being stopped, and it is configured so that it can develop from "Super Reach" to "Super Super Reach". there is

"Full rotation reach" means a state in which all the combinations of a plurality of decorative symbols for reporting a jackpot are aligned and fluctuates at a low speed. This is an effect executed only when the selected symbol "z1" of the first special symbol to be shifted to the special time-saving gaming state is determined.

Then, according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. Random numbers for effect selection and the like are set so that

In addition, in the first normal game state, the later-described "card effect" or "battle effect" may be executed at a predetermined rate. When the ``card presentation'' or ``battle presentation'' is executed in the first normal game state, the random number value for presentation selection and the like are set so that the degree of expectation for shifting to the jackpot game state is high.

(Production in special time-saving gaming state)
In the special time-saving game state, at least "super-shortened variation", "immediate winning effect", and "battle effect" are configured to be executable as the "second special symbol effect".

"Ultra-shortened variation" is a variation in which all the decorative patterns are scattered and the variable display is started at high speed, and in a very short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed with different types of patterns. It is a performance of the mode, and is a performance that can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. In addition, in the special time-saving game state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit in the "ultra-shortening variation", and the selected pattern "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined. 300(b)).

"Immediate hit production" is a variable mode in which all decorative patterns are scattered and variable display is started at high speed, and all decorative patterns are stopped and displayed with the same type of pattern in an extremely short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). When the lottery result of the special pattern is a big hit, or when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a small hit, the selected pattern "z5, z6" of the second special pattern corresponding to "V small hit" It is a rendition that can be executed when is determined.

"Battle production" means that when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected pattern "z5 , z6” is determined. "Battle production" does not suggest that you have won the "falling small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving game state, but does it win the "V small hit" that triggers the transition to the big hit game state? It is a production that suggests that it is a "losing", and for example, an enemy character appears and a production in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It is a production that informs you that you have lost when you lose.

(Production in general time-saving gaming state)
In the normal time-saving game state, different performances can be executed according to the remaining number of times of the limiter number of big hits.

Specifically, when the number of remaining jackpot limiter counts in the general time-saving gaming state is 91 or more (hereinafter also referred to as the “first half of the count limiter”), “shortening variation”, “immediate hit effect”, “card effect , and "Battle production" are configured to be executable. In addition, when the number of remaining jackpot limiter counts in the general time-saving gaming state is 90 or less (hereinafter also referred to as the “second half of the count limiter”), “ultra-shortening fluctuation”, “immediate hit performance”, and “card performance” are performed. configured to run. In addition, when the remaining number of times of the jackpot limiter number in the general time-saving game state is 0 (hereinafter also referred to as "when the number of times limiter is activated"), "ultra-shortening variation" and "ending effect" are configured to be executable. there is

“Shortened variation” is a special production of “the first half of the number of times limiter” in the general time-saving game state, in which all decorative patterns are disjointed and start variable display at high speed, shorter than normal variation, and super shortened variation In a short time (for example, 3 seconds) longer than 3 seconds, all decorative patterns are stopped and displayed with different kinds of patterns, and this is a performance that can be executed when the lottery result of the special pattern is a loss. In addition, in the "second half of the number of times limiter" and "during the operation of the number of times limiter" in the general time-saving gaming state, the "shortened variation" is switched to the above-described "ultra-shortened variation".

"Card effect" is a dedicated effect of "the first half of the number of times limiter" and "the second half of the number of times limiter" in the general time-saving game state, and is an effect that can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a loss. . The ``card presentation'' is ``losing'' whether the ``falling small win'' that triggers the end of the general time-saving gaming state or the ``V small winning'' that triggers the transition to the big winning gaming state is won. As an example, a card with a predetermined pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly flipped over, characters suggesting the lottery result of the second special pattern are displayed. .

"Ending effect" is a dedicated effect "at the time of operation of the number limiter" in the general time-saving game state, and is an effect that can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win or a small win. ``Ending effect'' is whether you have won the ``jackpot'' that shifts to the jackpot game state, or the ``V small hit'' that triggers the transition to the jackpot game state, or the opportunity to end the general time-saving game state. For example, a predetermined story is displayed, and when the story is completed, a big win or a V small win is reported, and when the story ends in the middle, a small drop is reported. It is a performance.

(Production in the second normal game state)
In the second normal game state, at least "normal variation" and "door opening effect" are executable as "second special symbol effect".

"Normal fluctuation" is an effect that can be executed when the special symbol lottery result is a loss, as described above in the effect in the first normal game state, but in the second normal game state, the second special It is configured to be executable even when the symbol lottery result is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined (see Fig. 300(a)). .

"Door opening performance" is a dedicated performance of the second normal game state, and when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a big win, the lottery result of the second special pattern is a small win, corresponding to "V small win". This is an effect that can be executed when the selected pattern "z5, z6" of the second special pattern to be played is determined, or when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a loss. As an example of the "door opening effect", a half-open door is displayed from the left and right, and the half-open door is displayed rattling for a predetermined period of time. is performed, and an indication that the door was not completely closed is displayed when it is lost.

In this embodiment, in the second normal game state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined. Although the "normal fluctuation" is configured to be executable in the case where the control is performed, the "door opening effect" may be configured to be executable. In the second normal game state, when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a small win and the selected pattern ``z7'' of the second special pattern corresponding to the ``falling small prize'' is determined, a ``door opening performance'' is performed. When executing, the same effect as when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss may be performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the "door opening effect" is configured to be executable as a dedicated effect for the second normal game state, but instead of the "door opening effect", the above-described "battle effect" is configured to be executable. You may

[10-8. Display contents of production]
Display contents of effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 will be described using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7 .

(Battle production)
First, with reference to FIG. 332, the battle production that can be executed in the first half of the number limiter in the special time-saving gaming state or the general time-saving gaming state will be described. FIG. 332 is an example of a display image explaining a battle effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The battle effect shown in FIG. 332 is a special symbol variation pattern for executing a battle effect, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table S1 of FIG. 300(b) and the special symbol variation pattern table J1 of FIG. 301(a). This is an effect by a symbol effect pattern executed based on commands (31H, 32H).

FIG. 332(a) is an example of a display image when the battle effect is started. As shown in FIG. 332(a), when the battle effect is started, an effect is performed in which the main character and the rival character appear and fight each other. Also, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area to the extent that they can be identified by the player so as not to interfere with the performance of the battle.

FIG. 332(b-1) is an example of the display image of the battle effect performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is the V small hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 31H). As shown in FIG. 332(b-1), as a result of the battle effect, the confrontation is settled and the main character wins. In addition, the decorative patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern that are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern. After that, all the same symbols are temporarily stopped and the decorative symbols are displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and the player is informed that the V small win has been achieved.

FIG. 332(b-2) is an example of the display image of the battle effect performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 32H). As shown in FIG. 332(b-2), as a result of the battle effect, the confrontation is settled and the main character is defeated. Further, the decorative patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern, which are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area, are stopped and displayed so that they are not all the same pattern.

In this way, according to the battle production executed in the general time-saving gaming state in the present embodiment, since it is not executed at the time of the "fall small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving gaming state, the general time-saving gaming state continues. While giving a sense of security in playing the game, it gives a feeling of anticipation that a V small win has been achieved, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(card production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 333, card effects that can be executed in the general time-saving game state will be described. FIG. 333 is an example of a display image explaining a card effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The card effect shown in FIG. 333 is executed based on the special symbol variation pattern commands (40H, 41H, 42H, 43H) for executing the card effect, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern tables J1 and J2 in FIG. It is a production by a pattern production pattern.

FIG. 333(a) is an example of a display image when the card effect is started. As shown in FIG. 333(a), when the card effect is started, it is a "hit" indicating a V hit, a loss, a "mode continuation" indicating the continuation of the general time-saving gaming state, a fall small hit, and a general A chance card on which "mode end" characters indicating the end of the time-saving game state is displayed is displayed, and an effect is performed in which the chance card is turned over and shuffled. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify them so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

FIG. 333(b) is an example of a common display image from when the card effect is started to when the lottery result of the second special symbol is suggested. As shown in FIG. 333(b), when the chance cards are turned over and shuffled, an effect is produced in which one of the cards is selected.

FIG. 333(c-1) is an example of a display image of a card effect performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 41H). As shown in FIG. 332(c-1), when one card is selected in the card effect, the card is slowly reversed, and a chance card with the word "hit" is displayed. . In addition, the decorative patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern that are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern. After that, all the same symbols are temporarily stopped and the decorative symbols are displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and the player is informed that the V small win has been achieved.

FIG. 333(c-2) is an example of a display image of a card effect that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a fall small hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 42H or 43H). . As shown in FIG. 332(c-2), when one card is selected in the card effect, the card is slowly flipped over, and a chance card with the words "end of mode" is displayed. will be Further, the decorative patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern, which are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area, are stopped and displayed so that they are not all the same pattern.

Although not shown, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 40H), when one card is selected in the card effect, the card is An effect is performed in which a chance card is slowly reversed and a chance card with the words "continue mode" is displayed.

Fig. 333 (d-2) shows that when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a fall small hit and the remaining number of winning times of the small hit is 2 or more (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 42H). 333(c-2) is an example of the display image of the card effect that follows. As shown in FIG. 332(d-2), after the chance card with the characters "end of mode" is displayed, a female character is displayed, and an effect indicating the continuation of the general time-saving gaming state is performed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 40H), as shown in FIGS. 332(c-2) and 332(d-2) After the chance card on which the characters "mode end" are once displayed, the female character is displayed, and an effect indicating the continuation of the general time-saving game state may be executed at a predetermined rate.

Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 41H), a chance card with the characters "end of mode" or "continue mode" is displayed. After being displayed, a specific character may be displayed, and a resurrection effect of reporting a V win may be executed at a predetermined rate.

In this way, according to the card effect executed in the general time-saving gaming state in the present embodiment, whether it is a "falling small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving gaming state or a "losing" that the general time-saving gaming state continues or "V small win" that triggers the transition to a big win game state, or "falling small win" is not desired, and the player is also interested in "losing" to make the game more interesting. can be improved.

(ending production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 334, the ending effect that can be executed when the number of times limiter is activated in the normal time-saving game state will be described. FIG. 334 is an example of a display image explaining an ending effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The ending effect shown in FIG. 334 is, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 of FIG. It is a performance by

FIG. 334(a) is an example of a display image when the ending effect is started. As shown in FIG. 334(a), when the ending effect is started, the effect of displaying a predetermined story is performed. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify them so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

Figure 334 (b-1) shows the ending effect (ending success effect) performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small V win (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 51H or 52H). is an example of a display image of . As shown in FIG. 334(b-1), the story is completed, and the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols displayed in reduced size at the lower right of the display area are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbols.

FIG. 334(c-1) is an example of the display image of the ending effect performed subsequent to FIG. 334(b-1). As shown in FIG. 334(c-1), after the story is completed, all of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the same pattern in a large size in the center of the display area, giving the player a big hit. Alternatively, it is reported that a V small hit has occurred.

FIG. 334(b-2) shows the display image of the ending effect (ending failure effect) that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a fall small hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 50H). An example. As shown in FIG. 334(b-2), the display screen is broken, and a display that the story ends in the middle is displayed.

FIG. 334(c-2) is an example of the display image of the ending effect performed subsequent to FIG. 334(b-2). As shown in FIG. 334(c-2), after the story ends in the middle, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a large size in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same pattern. . Then, the characters "mode end" indicating that the general time-saving gaming state has ended are displayed.

Thus, according to the ending effect executed in the general time-saving gaming state in the present embodiment, the number of times limiter function in the general time-saving gaming state regulates the game state to be shifted after the end of the big hit game state (normal game state In addition to being able to recognize a big win, a small V win, or a falling win, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Door opening effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the door opening effect that can be executed in the second normal game state will be described. FIG. 335 is an example of a display image explaining a door opening effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The door opening effect shown in FIG. 335 is executed based on the special symbol variation pattern command (08H, 09H, 0AH) for executing the door opening effect, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table T1 of FIG. 300(a). It is a production by the pattern production pattern to be done.

FIG. 335(a) is an example of a display image when the door opening effect is started. As shown in FIG. 335(a), when the door opening effect is started, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right, and the half-open door is displayed rattling for a predetermined period. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are reduced to the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify them so as not to interfere with the door opening effect. Is displayed.

FIG. 335(b-1) is an example of the display image of the door opening effect performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small V win (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 08H or 09H). is. As shown in FIG. 335(b-1), after the half-open door is displayed rattling for a predetermined period of time, the door is completely closed.

FIG. 335(c-1) is an example of the display image of the door opening effect performed subsequent to FIG. 335(b-1). As shown in FIG. 335(c-1), after the door is completely closed, the door is opened again, and all the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed in the same pattern. , and the player is notified of the big win or V minor win.

FIG. 335(b-2) is an example of the display image of the door opening effect performed when the second special symbol lottery result is a loss (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 0AH). As shown in FIG. 335(b-2), after the display that the half-open door rattles for a predetermined period of time, the display that the door is not completely closed is displayed.

FIG. 335(c-2) is an example of the display image of the door opening effect performed subsequent to FIG. 335(b-2). As shown in FIG. 335(c-2), after the display that the door is not completely closed is performed, the decorative patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern are placed in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same pattern. A large stop is displayed on the

Thus, according to the door opening effect executed in the second normal game state in the present embodiment, after the general time-saving game state ends, it becomes a big hit or a V small win, and it is possible to return to the general time-saving game state again. A sense of anticipation can be given, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Notice production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 336, the notice effect that can be executed in the time-saving game state will be described. FIG. 336 is an example of a display image for explaining the advance notice effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The notice effect shown in FIG. 336 is, as shown in the notice effect pattern determination table of FIG. and "announcement effect pattern B2", which develops from the notice effect pattern B1 and suggests in advance that a battle effect is highly likely to be executed.

FIG. 336(a) is an example of a display image before the announcement effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 336(a), in the center of the display area, left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed.

FIG. 336(b-1) is an example of a display image when the announcement effect by the announcement effect pattern A is executed. As shown in FIG. 336(b-1), the characters "DANGER" are displayed to indicate in advance that there is a possibility of a fall jackpot.

FIG. 336(b-2) is an example of a display image when the announcement effect by the announcement effect pattern B1 and the announcement effect pattern B2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 336(b-2), a male character is displayed from the window along with the characters "CHANCE" in order to suggest in advance that there is a possibility of a small V win.

FIG. 336(c-2) is an example of a display image when the announcement effect by the announcement effect pattern B2 subsequent to FIG. 336(b-2) is executed. As shown in FIG. 336(c-2), in order to suggest in advance that the battle production is highly likely to be executed, the window is enlarged and a female character is displayed from the enlarged window. BATTLE” is displayed.

Thus, according to the notice effect executed in the time-saving game state in the present embodiment, by the content suggested by the notice effect, the lottery result of the special symbol and the effect content to be executed are guessed, and the game is more interesting. can be improved.

Thus, in the eighth pachinko game machine, it is possible to shift to the first normal game state, the second normal game state, the special time-saving game state, and the general time-saving game state. Since the performance is performed, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the eighth pachinko game machine, the number of winnings of small wins = 255 times is set as a time saving end condition, and a "special time saving game state" in which the next big win is substantially guaranteed, and a small time saving condition as a time saving end condition. The number of winning times = 1 or 2 times is set, and by providing a ``general time-saving game state'' in which the next big win is not guaranteed, unprecedented game characteristics are created and the interest in the game is enhanced. can be improved.

<Modification of the eighth pachinko machine>
In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, as a "rollout limiter function", the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out in a jackpot game state "per day" is counted, and the cumulative number of jackpot balls is " When a predetermined number of hit-out balls (for example, 100,000) is reached, the game state to be shifted after the jackpot game state is ended is partially regulated. However, as the "ball-out limiter function", like the "number-of-times limiter function", the cumulative jackpot number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state under a specific condition (time-saving game state) is counted, and the cumulative jackpot is counted. When the number of played balls reaches the "predetermined number of played balls (for example, 50,000)", the game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game state may be partially regulated.

As a "ball output limiter function", the total number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state) is counted, and the total number of jackpot balls is the predetermined number of balls. When reaching , the process may be changed as follows in order to partially regulate the game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game state.
First, in S8325 of the system timer interrupt processing (FIG. 324), the "total jackpot ball number counter" of the main RAM 203 is referred to, and the value of the total jackpot ball number counter is set to "predetermined number of balls to be played (for example, 50,000 pieces)” or more. When it is determined that the value of the accumulated jackpot number-of-balls-out counter is equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls-out in a row", the process of S8326 may be shifted to perform the game disallowed state setting process. Further, in S8323 of the system timer interrupt process (FIG. 324), it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number of balls played in a row is less than a predetermined number (for example, 49,000). As a result, the cumulative jackpot number of balls released per day can be switched from the "predetermined number of hit balls (for example, 100,000)" to the "predetermined number of consecutive balls".
Next, in the state setting processing after the end of the big hit of S8323 in the end processing of the big hit game state (see FIG. 320), whether the selected symbol of the special symbol of the end of the big hit game state is the selected symbol of the special symbol to shift to the time saving game state determine whether or not Then, when it is not the selected pattern of the special pattern that shifts to the time-saving gaming state (when it is the selected pattern of the special pattern that shifts to the normal game state), the cumulative jackpot number counter is cleared (cumulative jackpot number counter = 0). As a result, after the jackpot game state that shifts to the normal game state ends, the cumulative jackpot ball number counter is cleared, and the cumulative jackpot count of the game balls paid out in the jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state). The number of balls can be counted.

In the eighth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 201 counts the cumulative jackpot number of balls, as shown in S8325 and S8326 of the system timer interrupt processing (Fig. 324), as the "rollout ball limiter function", and the main control is performed. Although the circuit 200 and the payout/launch control circuit 400 are configured to perform control related to the "ball payout limiter function", the payout/launch control circuit 400 counts the total number of jackpot balls paid out, and only the payout/launch control circuit 400 It may be configured to perform control related to the "ball payout limiter function".

In addition, the eighth pachinko game machine is provided with two functions of a "number of times limiter function" and a "ball output limiter function" as functions for partially regulating the game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game state. , only the "number of times limiter function" or only the "outgoing balls limiter function" may be provided.

Also, the technology described in the eighth pachinko gaming machine embodiment may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, various effects executed in the eighth pachinko game machine may be replaced with effects provided by the display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving gaming state (special time-saving gaming state, general time-saving gaming state) includes replay time (RT state) with improved replay probability of replay, assist time (AT state), or assist replay time (ART state) in which replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, big hits and small wins (V small wins, falling small wins) are achieved by winning a specific role, stopping display of a specific combination of symbols (winning a specific combination of symbols), and RT status. It may be replaced with one of winning the rush election, winning the AT state rush election, or winning the ART state rush election. Furthermore, the number of times limiter function is the number of games that can be played in any one of the RT state, AT state, and ART state. section) with the number of payouts of game media (medals/game balls).

(others)
The eighth pachinko game machine described above can apply each other's techniques between the respective embodiments including the modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Also, the effects described in the eighth pachinko game machine are merely a list of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the eighth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancies in its game characteristics and control.

[11. Ninth pachinko machine]
Next, the ninth pachinko game machine will be described. The ninth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-kind two-kind mixed machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine. The ninth pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of game playability, presentation contents, etc., and along with this, the configuration of various members arranged in the game area is also partly different.

In particular, the ninth pachinko game machine, in comparison with the third pachinko game machine, in the time-saving game state, is composed mainly of a game property that mainly fluctuates display of normal symbols, and the time-saving end of the time-saving game state. The difference is that the condition is not the number of times of variable display of special symbols, but the number of times of variable display of normal symbols.

It should be noted that the ninth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the second special symbol than the starting condition of the first special symbol It is a priority variation machine in which the starting condition of the special symbol is preferentially established. However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

Hereinafter, in describing the ninth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are given to the same components as in the first pachinko game machine, and detailed description of the configuration and processing will be omitted.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, "a game ball is entered" at a ball entrance (for example, a start opening or a big winning opening) that can provide a player with a predetermined profit (payout of a game ball, transition of a game state). "Playing the ball" is also referred to as "winning" as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the “variable display” of the symbols includes, for example, both “variable display” in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner and “stopped display” in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display".

[11-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 337, the game board unit 9010 included in the ninth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 9010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) as in the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 337 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 9010 provided in the ninth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 9010 includes a game panel 9100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 9100, and on the front side surface of the game panel 9100, there is a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow. formed.

As shown in FIG. 337, the game board unit 9010 provided in the ninth pachinko game machine is mainly different from the first pachinko game machine in that the normal figure operating area 9126 that replaces the passage gate and the second start The mouth 9140, the normal electric accessory unit 9145, the first special electric accessory unit 9130, and the second special electric accessory unit 9150 are different in configuration and arrangement. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

In addition, the first start port 9120 arranged in the game area 105 of the ninth pachinko game machine is functionally common to the first start port 120 arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. However, due to the relationship with the second start port 9140, a different code from the first pachinko game machine will be used to explain again.

(First start port)
The first starting port 9120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter, and a game ball hit to the right by a game nail or the like to enter. Configured to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 9120 is provided with a first starting port switch 9121 (see FIG. 338 described later) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first starting port 9120 .

When the game ball enters the first start port 9120, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination processing), the variable display of the first special symbol, the prize ball for the first start port (for example, 3 game balls) are paid out. The processing after the game ball enters the first starting port 9120 will be described later in detail.

(Second start port)
The second start port 9140 is located below (downstream) a first special electric role product unit 9130 to be described later in the right region 107 and above (upstream side) a normal figure operating region 9126 and a second special electric role product unit 9150. As well as being arranged, it is provided in a normal electric accessory unit 9145, which will be described later, so that a right-handed game ball can be entered (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter). The second starting port 9140 is provided with a second starting port switch 9141 for detecting entry of a game ball into the second starting port 9140 .

When the game ball enters the second start port 9140, the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination process), the variable display of the second special symbol, the prize ball for the second start port (for example, 1 game balls) are paid out. The processing after the game ball enters the second starting port 9140 will be described later in detail.

(Normal figure operating area)
The normal pattern operating area 9126 is different from the passage gate of the first pachinko game machine. , It consists of a winning opening (also called "normal operation opening") where a prize ball for the normal operation area (for example, one game ball) is paid out. Then, the normal figure operation area 9126 is arranged below (downstream side) of the first special electric accessory unit 9130, the normal electric accessory unit 9145, and the second special electric accessory unit 9150, which will be described later in the right area 107. , right-handed game balls can pass (left-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to pass).

Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 is the first big prize opening 9131 of the first special electric role product unit 9130, the second start opening 9140 of the normal electric role product unit 9145, and the second special electric role product unit 9150. When the ball does not enter any of the second big winning openings 9151, it is possible to pass through the normal figure operation area 9126. As a result, when hitting to the right in the jackpot game state, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 enters the first big prize opening 9131 by the operation of the first special electric accessory unit 9130 arranged above. Since it is easy to ball and reduces the number of game balls passing through the normal pattern operation area 9126, the normal electric accessory unit 9145 is operated by the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern operation area 9126, and the game performance is not designed. It is possible to prevent game balls from unexpectedly entering the second starting port 9140. - 特許庁In addition, when hitting to the right as an irregular game mode in the normal game state, the normal pattern operation area 9126 is not a passing gate but a normal pattern operation opening (winning opening), so the passage of the normal pattern operation area 9126 The game ball that has been played does not enter the second starting port 9140 .

In addition, the general pattern operation area 9126 is provided with a general pattern operation switch 9127 (see FIG. 338 described later) for detecting the passage of the game ball to the general pattern operation area 9126. When the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation area 9126, the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern operation area 9126 is detected by the normal pattern operation switch 9127, and the prize ball for the normal pattern operation area (for example, one game ball) A payout is performed, and normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination processing) and normal symbol variable display are performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern operation area 9126 is configured by the normal pattern operation port, but may be configured by a passage gate like the first pachinko game machine.

Moreover, the passage of the game ball to the normal figure operation area 9126 may be functioned as an opportunity for operating the accessory continuous operation device. On the premise that the condition device is operating (that the special symbol that becomes a big hit is stopped and displayed), the accessory continuous operating device is operated by the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal figure operating area 9126, and the big hit You may make it transfer to a game state.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric role product unit 9145 is located below (downstream side) the first special electric role product unit 9130 described later in the right area 107 and above (upstream side) the normal figure operating area 9126 and the second special electric role product unit 9150. It is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric accessory unit 9145 includes a second starting port 9140, a second starting port switch 9141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 9140, and an upper and lower two-stage type that can move back and forth. It is a unit body in which a general electric shutter 9147 and a general electric solenoid 9148 (see later-described FIG. 338) for operating the general electric shutter 9147 are integrated.

The general electricity shutter 9147 is retracted rearward by the operation of the general electricity solenoid 9148, and is in an open state in which a game ball can or is easily entered into the second start port 9140, and advances forward to the second start. It is configured to be displaceable to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the mouth 9140 .

Specifically, the general electric shutter 9147 has a substantially U-shaped cross-sectional view from the front-rear direction, and includes an upper upper plate 9147U on which game balls can roll, and an upper plate 9147U on which game balls can roll. It is composed of a lower lower plate 9147D and a support plate that connects and supports the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D. In addition, the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D of the general electric shutter 9147 are configured to be gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the center line perpendicular to the left-right direction of the game area 105.

When the general electric shutter 9147 advances forward and is in a closed state, the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D protrude from the surface of the game panel 9100, and the protruding lower plate 9147D closes the second start port 9140, It becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball flowing down the right region 107 to enter the second starting port 9140 . In addition, when the general electric shutter 9147 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the upper surface plate 9147U is the general winning opening 122 on the downstream side, the second special electric accessory unit 9150 or the general drawing operation area The game ball guided to 9126 and rolling on the lower surface plate 9147D is configured to be guided to the second special electric accessory unit 9150 or the general figure operation area 9126 on the downstream side.

Here, in the game panel 9100, when the general electric shutter 9147 is closed by a game nail or the like, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 is basically not guided onto the lower surface plate 9147D. It is configured to be guided on the top plate 9147U.

Further, when the general electric shutter 9147 is retracted rearward and is in an open state, the upper surface plate 9147U and the lower surface plate 9147D are retracted into the game panel 9100, and the second start port 9140 is opened.

And, when the general electricity shutter 9147 is in the open state over the opening time of the predetermined time or more, the game ball flowing down the right side region 107 passes through the upper surface plate 9147U and the lower surface plate 9147D, or the upper surface plate 9147U Or the game ball that was rolling in the lower surface plate 9147D falls, or the game ball that has been rolling on the lower surface plate 9147D falls toward the second start port 9140, the second A game ball can enter the starting port 9140 .

On the other hand, when the general electric shutter 9147 is in an open state for an open time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds or less), the game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U hits the lower plate 9147D. Even if it falls toward it, the lower plate 9147D will protrude from the surface of the game panel 9100 as soon as the opening time ends, and the game ball that has fallen from the upper plate 9147U will roll on the lower plate 9147D (by the lower plate 9147D It is caught), and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 9140. In addition, the game ball rolling on the lower surface plate 9147D falls toward the second start port 9140, so that the game ball can enter the second start port 9140, but as described above, When the general electric shutter 9147 is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided to the lower surface plate 9147D, and basically the game ball is not rolling on the lower surface plate 9147D, so the general electric shutter It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 9140 only when the 9147 is displaced to the open state once over a short opening time.

Further, in this embodiment, the route R1 until the game ball fired from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 338 described later) reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140) is shown in FIG. As indicated by the one-dot chain line, it is predetermined by the configuration of the game board unit 9010 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average arrival time until the game ball fired from the launching device 6 reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140) depends on the firing intensity of the launching device 6. can be calculated as an average of 5 seconds (approximately 4 to 6 seconds). It goes without saying that the average arrival time until the game ball fired from the launching device 6 reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140) is variable depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter 9147 for general electric power is configured as a two-stage shutter including an upper plate 9147U and a lower plate 9147D that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. The general electric shutter 9147 may be composed of a single-stage shutter having a lower plate 9147D that opens and closes the starting port 9140 . Furthermore, instead of the shutter that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the general-purpose electrical shutter 9147 may be configured with a movable member called an electric chew that can move in the left-right direction.

(First special electric accessory unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 9130 is arranged above (upstream side) in the right side area 107 than the normal figure operating area 9126, the ordinary electric accessory unit 9145 and the second special electric accessory unit 9150 described later.

The first special electric accessory unit 9130 includes a first big winning hole 9131 and a first big winning hole count switch 9132 (see FIG. 338 described later) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 9131. , and a first special electric shutter 9134 movable in the horizontal direction and a first special electric solenoid 9135 (see FIG. 338 described later) for operating the first special electric shutter 9134 are integrated as a unit body.

The first big winning hole 9131 is a big winning hole that is opened at the time of a big win, and the maximum number of winning prizes (for example, 10) are specified. Each time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 9131, prize balls for the first big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The transition of the first big winning port 9131 from the closed state to the open state is the first route when a special stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol win determination process is a "big hit" is derived. A game in which the second big prize winning port 9151 is opened by deriving a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "small hit", and the player enters the opened second big prize winning port 9151. It is the time of the second route when the ball enters the V winning hole 9156 in the second big winning hole 9151 .

The first special electric shutter 9134 is operated by the first special electric solenoid 9135 so that the game ball can enter the first large winning opening 9131 or is easily opened, and the game ball can enter the first large winning opening 9131. It is configured to be displaceable to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 9134 has a substantially fan shape in a front view, is pivotally supported at the bottom, and is composed of a blade member that is movable in the left-right direction.

When the first special electric shutter 9134 is movable in the right direction and is in an open state, the first big winning opening 9131 is opened to receive the game balls flowing down to the right side region 107, and the received game balls are placed in the first It guides to the big prize-winning mouth 9131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 9134 is moved to the left and is in a closed state, the first big prize winning port 9131 closes, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big prize winning port 9131. becomes. Instead of the first special electric shutter 9134, a door member that displaces substantially parallel and substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game panel 9100, or a protruding plate that can move back and forth with respect to the surface of the game panel 9100 You may employ a member.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 9150 is arranged below (downstream side) the first special electric accessory unit 9130 and the normal electric accessory unit 9145 in the right area 107 and above (upstream side) the normal figure operation area 9126. It is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through.

The second special electric accessory unit 9150 includes a second big winning hole 9151, a second big winning hole count switch 9152 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 9151, and a second big winning hole 9151. A second special electric shutter 9154 that can open and close the second special electric shutter 9154 and a second special electric solenoid 9155 (see FIG. 338 described later) that opens and closes the second big winning opening 9151 by operating the second special electric shutter 9154, A V winning opening 9156 through which the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 9151 can pass, a V winning opening switch 9157 (see FIG. 338 described later) that detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 9156, A normal opening 9158 through which game balls that have not entered the V winning opening 9156 out of the game balls that have entered the second big winning opening 9151 can pass, a V shutter 9159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 9156, and this V shutter 9159 is operated. 338 for opening and closing the V-shutter solenoid 9160 (see later-described FIG. 338).

The second big winning hole 9151 is a big winning hole that is opened at the time of a small win, and the maximum winning number (for example, 10) that game balls can enter the second big winning hole 9151 in one small win. is stipulated. Every time one game ball enters this second big winning hole 9151, prize balls for the second big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 9154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the opening 9151, and a closed state in which the second special electric shutter 9154 is retracted backward so that a game ball can enter the second big winning opening 9151 or is easily opened. It is configured to be displaceable between states.

The V winning opening 9156 is a winning opening that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 9159, and is a winning opening that triggers control to the jackpot game state via the above-described second route when the game ball passes through.

When the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the opening of the second big prize opening 9151 when the game ball passes through the V winning prize opening 9156 is regarded as the first round, and the game ball to the V winning prize opening 9156. (after the second round), a round game is executed to shift the first big winning port 9131 from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when controlled to the big hit game state through the second route, even after the game ball passes through the V winning opening 9156 (after the second round), the second big winning opening 9151 changes from the closed state to the open state. A transitional round game may be played for a predetermined number of rounds.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the first big winning opening 9131, etc., one V winning opening and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating the "minor hit" is derived, the first big winning hole 9131 is opened, and the game ball enters the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 9131. is entered, the jackpot game state (jackpot game state through the second route) may be controlled.

The normal opening 9158 is configured so that game balls that enter the second big winning opening 9151 but do not pass through the V winning opening 9156 enter (pass through). It should be noted that, in the small winning game state, all the game balls that entered the opened second big winning opening 9151 pass through the normal opening 9158, and if there is no game ball passing to the V winning opening 9156, the small winning The game state is not shifted to the jackpot game state.

The V shutter 9159 can be in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V winning opening 9156 and a game ball can pass through the V winning opening 9156 (or It is configured to be displaceable between an open state and an easily opened state.

In particular, in the ninth pachinko game machine, when the small winning game state is reached, the V shutter solenoid 9160 is operated to open the V winning opening 9156, and the game ball entering the second big winning opening 9151 is almost V It is configured to be able to pass through the winning opening 9156 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the route until the game ball launched from the launching device 6 reaches the second special electric accessory unit 9150 is predetermined in the same manner as the route R1, and is launched from the launching device 6. The average arrival time until the fired game ball reaches the second special electric accessory unit 9150 can be calculated as an average of 6 seconds (approximately 5 to 7 seconds), although it depends on the launch intensity of the launcher 6. . Needless to say, the average arrival time until the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 reaches the second special electric accessory unit 9150 is variable depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010 .

The layout relationship between the first special electric accessory unit 9130, the normal electric accessory unit 9145, the second special electric accessory unit 9150, and the normal figure operating area 9126 arranged in the right area 107 can be freely changed in design. is.

[11-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 338, the control circuit of the ninth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 338 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a ninth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 338, the ninth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 , a payout/fire control circuit 400 , and a power supply circuit 450 .

However, in the ninth pachinko game machine, the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 are partially different from the first pachinko game machine. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

[11-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 9148, a first special electric solenoid 9135, a second special electric solenoid 9155, and a V shutter solenoid 9160 connected to the main control circuit 200 compared to the first pachinko game machine. , 1st starting port switch 9121, 2nd starting port switch 9141, normal operation switch 9127, 1st big winning port count switch 9132, 2nd big winning port count switch 9152, V winning port switch 9157 are partially different. ing.

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 9148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 9147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 9148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 9147 is retracted rearward to open the second start port 9140 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 9148 . If not (if it is OFF), the general electric shutter 9147 is advanced forward to close the second starting port 9140 .

(No. 1 special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 9135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 9134 . When the first special electric solenoid 9135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201 , the first special electric shutter 9134 is moved to the right to open the first big prize opening 9131 . If the electricity is not supplied (if it is OFF), the first special electric shutter 9134 is moved leftward to close the first big prize winning opening 9131 .

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 9155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 9154 . When the second special electric solenoid 9155 is energized (turned ON) by the main CPU 201 , it causes the second special electric shutter 9154 to move backward to open the second big prize winning opening 9151 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 9155 . is not performed (if it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 9154 is moved forward to close the second big winning opening 9151 .

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 9160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 9159 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the V-shutter solenoid 9160 (it is ON), the V-shutter 9159 is retracted backward to open the V winning port 9156. If it is OFF), the V shutter 9159 is moved forward to close the V prize opening 9156 .

(First start switch)
The first starting port switch 9121 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the first starting port 9120 .

When the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 9120 is detected by the first starting port switch 9121, the main CPU 201 assumes that the first starting condition is satisfied, and determines that the first special symbol starting information (jackpot judgment random number for use, random number for design, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.). The obtained start information of the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), or the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 up to "the number of reserved first special symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". (Sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4)), the start condition of the first special symbol (for example, that the special electric accessory is not operating, If the special symbols are not variably displayed, etc.) is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Also, when the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 9120 is detected by the first start hole switch 9121, the main CPU 201 performs payout processing of the prize balls for the first start hole (for example, three game balls). to the payout/launch control circuit 400 .

(Second starting switch)
The second starting port switch 9141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the second starting port 9140 .

When the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 9140 is detected by the second starting port switch 9141, the main CPU 201 assumes that the second starting condition is satisfied, and determines that the second special symbol starting information (jackpot judgment random number for use, random number for design, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.). The obtained start information of the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), or the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 up to "the number of reserved second special symbols (for example, 2 pieces)". (Second special symbol start storage area (1) to second special symbol start storage area (2) in order), start condition of the second special symbol (for example, that the special electric accessory is not operating, If the special symbol variable display is not performed, etc.) is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140 is detected by the second start hole switch 9141, the main CPU 201 performs payout processing of the prize ball for the second start hole (for example, one game ball). to the payout/launch control circuit 400 .

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is "lottery of the first special symbol", and the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is selected. The hit determination process is also called "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively called "special symbol lottery".

(normal map operation switch)
Normal pattern operation switch 9127 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of game balls to normal pattern operation area 9126 .

When the normal pattern operation switch 9127 detects the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern operation area 9126, the main CPU 201 acquires the normal symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random number value, normal symbol symbol random number value, etc.). . The acquired normal symbol start information is stored in the normal symbol start storage area (normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4) of the main RAM 203 up to "the number of normal symbols held (for example, 4)". ), and when the normal pattern judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric accessory is not operating, the normal pattern variable display is not performed, etc.) is established, the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern hit judgment processing) and normal symbols are used for variable display. Also, when the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern operation area 9126 is detected by the normal pattern operation switch 9127, the main CPU 201 pays out the prize balls for the normal pattern operation area (for example, one game ball). Instruct the launch control circuit 400;

(1st big prize mouth count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 9132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 9131 . When the first big winning hole count switch 9132 detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 9131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 9131 per round. At the same time, the payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole.

(Second big prize mouth count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 9152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 9151 . When the second big winning hole count switch 9152 detects that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 9151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 9151, The payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the second winning hole.

(V prize opening switch)
The V winning opening switch 9157 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 9156 . When the V winning opening switch 9157 detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 9156, the main CPU 201 performs transition control to the jackpot game state. Even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 9156 is detected by the V winning opening switch 9157, the winning ball is not paid out.

[11-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, and a command input port 308, as in the first pachinko game machine. is common, but the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and an effect button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54 . That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54 . The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 according to the drive command from the sub CPU 301 .

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal relating to the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 . The button control circuit 310 outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301 when an operation signal is input from the performance button 54 .

[11-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 339 to 350, basic specifications of the ninth pachinko game machine will be described. Incidentally, the ninth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the ninth pachinko gaming machine, although variable probability control is not executed, a time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is in a normal game state or a time-saving game state. It is possible to progress the game in . In addition, in this ninth pachinko game machine, variable probability control is not executed, but this is not essential. good.

In addition, in the ninth pachinko game machine, as described later, as a time-saving game state distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving occurrence conditions), a big hit is used as a trigger to transition after the big win game state is completed. state”, and “B time-saving game state” in which the number of times of variable display of special symbols shifts after reaching the ceiling value without being triggered by a big hit. In addition, "A time-saving gaming state" is a time-saving gaming state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving end condition and the operation mode during the time-saving gaming state (the operation pattern of the normal electric shutter 9147), and the "first time-saving gaming state". , a ``second time-saving game state'' in which the transition to the next big win game state is easier than the first time-saving game state, and a ``third time-saving game state'' in which the transition to the next big win game state is substantially guaranteed. consists of either Also, in the present embodiment, when neither the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state is distinguished, simply "time-saving game state" say.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in principle, in a general normal game state (first normal game state described later), left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. be. The sub CPU 301 displays, for example, in the display area of the display device 7 how to play the regular game mode.

[11-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 339 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. Incidentally, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 339 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big win", "minor win" or "losing".

In the special symbol hit determination table, as data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the first start port 9120, there is a big hit determined as "big hit" or "losing". The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random number value and the corresponding win/lose judgment value data (big hit judgment value data, loss judgment value data) is defined. In addition, as the data used in the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 9140, the data for big hit determination determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" The relationship between the range (width) of the random number and the corresponding win/lose determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. Incidentally, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

As shown in FIG. 339, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 9120, the main CPU 201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol big hit determination random number value. The result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is determined as "big hit" at a selection rate of about 1/231.6, and otherwise determined as "losing". Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the main CPU 201 performs the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol big hit determination random number value. The result of the hit determination process is determined as a "big hit" at a selection rate of about 1/231.6, determined as a "small hit" at a selection rate of about 1/1.004, and otherwise determined as a "loss". do.

It should be noted that the range (width) of the random number determined as the "big hit" or "small hit", that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above values, and can be freely changed in design. In particular, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, it may be configured such that "losing" is not determined. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, it may be configured to determine either a "big win" or a "minor win".

Further, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, it may be configured to determine a "small hit", but when configured to determine a "small hit", the first It is possible to determine "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, without moving to the big hit game state, the time saving game state (C time saving game state) is directly transferred to the "time saving hit". ” may be determined.

Also, if the ninth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of the big win and/or the small win should be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. However, even if the ninth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving is set to a probability common to all settings.

Alternatively, instead of or in addition to changing the selection rate of the big win or the selection rate of the small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning mouth 9156 is changed for each set value, and the V winning mouth 9156 You may change the passing rate to, or change time-saving end conditions (the number of winning small hits, etc.) for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big hit, the probability of a small hit, the frequency of opening the V winning opening 9156 (that is, the frequency of operation of the second special electric shutter 9154), the opening time, and the time saving end condition By adopting one or two or more of, the expected value controlled to the big hit game state may be configured so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[11-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 340 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 340 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table for determining the "selected symbol of the special symbol" and the "symbol designation command" which determine the stop symbol of the special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

The "selected symbol of special symbol" is information for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is, This is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in order to display the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol in the display area of the display device 7 .

In the special symbol determination table, the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data, and the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 9120 or the second start port 9140 and are defined in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "symbol designation command". The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 340, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, The main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol of the special symbol, and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 10 to 54, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the special symbol random number value is any one of 55 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the special symbol selection symbol regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Then, "zA4" is determined as the design designation command.

When small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects the special symbol as the selected symbol " "z5" is determined, and "zA5" is determined as the design designation command. Further, when the special symbol random number value is any one of 10 to 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the special symbol random number value is any one of 20 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol random number value in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. As for the selected symbols of the symbols, the relational expression of the selectivity of "z1"<"z2"="z3" is established. In addition, the selection pattern of the special symbol determined when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is composed of only two types of "z1" and "z2". ”<“z2”.

Also, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the symbol random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. , "z5+z6"<"z7". It should be noted that, as the selected symbols of the special symbols, a relational expression of the selectivity of "z5"<"z6"<"z7" may be established.

Although the explanation is omitted in the ninth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table defines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 338) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to the "selected pattern of". Further, in the first special symbol display portion 163 and the second special symbol display portion 164, a big hit stop mode, a small win stop mode, or a losing stop mode is displayed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. be. The program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 also stores a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine.

The range of special symbol random number values for determining the "selected symbol of special symbol", that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above value, and can be freely changed in design.

[11-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 341 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The big-hit type determination table is a table for determining the operation contents of the big-hit game state, and is a table for determining the "opening mode of the big-hit game state".

As shown in FIG. 341, in the jackpot type determination table, the selected symbol of the special pattern is associated with the “open mode of the jackpot game state”.

The "opening mode of the big winning game state" defines the maximum number of rounds of the first big winning hole 9131 opened in the big winning game state and the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 9131 . The opening pattern of the first big winning hole 9131 includes OP waiting time (opening time), which is waiting for the start of the jackpot game state, maximum opening time of each round, closing time of each round, ED waiting time (ending time), etc. is stipulated. As the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 9131, the maximum opening time for each round may be changed, or the closing time for each round (round interval time) may be changed and defined. Furthermore, the number of times of opening and the opening time may be defined so that the first big prize winning opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

Here, the "open mode of the big hit game state" corresponding to the "selected pattern z5 to z7 of the special symbol" determined when the small hit determination value data of the second special symbol is obtained is the small hit game state. This is the opening mode when the game ball entering the second big winning hole 9151 that is opened passes through the second route passing through the V winning hole 9156 and shifts to the big winning game state. When transitioning to the big winning game state through the second route, the opening of the second big winning mouth 9151 in the small winning game state is regarded as the first round, and the first big winning mouth 9131 is opened from the second round onwards. A big hit game state is started. In addition, when the game ball entering the second big winning opening 9151 opened in the small winning game state does not pass through the V winning opening 9156, the big winning game state is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 341, according to the big hit type determination table, when the "special symbol selection pattern z1 to 3" determined when the first special symbol big hit determination value data is obtained, the maximum number of rounds All are configured to determine the first number of rounds (8 rounds). It should be noted that a different maximum number of rounds may be determined according to the "selected symbols z1 to 3 of special symbols".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, according to the big hit type determination table, when the "selected symbol z5 to z7 of the special symbol" determined when the small hit determination value data of the second special symbol is obtained, the special According to the selected pattern of the pattern, a third number of rounds (10 rounds) or a fourth number of rounds (4 rounds), which is less than the third number of rounds, is determined as the maximum number of rounds. . In particular, according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The fourth number of rounds (4 rounds) is more likely to be determined than the number of rounds of 3 (10 rounds).

It should be noted that at the time of "selected symbols z5 to 7 of special symbols", a different number of rounds other than "10 rounds" or "4 rounds" may be determined, or the same maximum rounds may be determined for all. It may be configured as

In addition, depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, either the OP waiting time (opening time) or the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 9131 may be configured to be different.

[11-3-4. Small hit type determination table]
FIG. 342 is an example of a small hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 342 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko game machine.

The small-hit type determination table is a table for determining the operation contents of the small-hit game state, and is a table for determining the "release mode of the small-hit game state".

As shown in FIG. 342, in the small winning type determination table, the selected symbol of the special symbol is associated with the "release mode of the small winning gaming state".

"Open mode of small winning game state" is the maximum number of times of opening the second big winning opening 9151 that is opened in the small winning game state, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 9151 and the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 stipulated. The opening pattern of the second big winning port 9151 includes OP waiting time (opening time), which is a state waiting for the start of the small winning game state, maximum opening time of each number, closing time of each number, ED waiting time (ending time) etc. are stipulated. Also, in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156, an opening waiting time, an opening time, and the like are stipulated.

Here, at the start of the small winning game state, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 9151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 are clocked simultaneously. When the big winning opening 9151 is opened, the V winning opening 9156 is also opened. Therefore, when the small winning game state is performed, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 9156 is possible (or easy). As the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156, multiple times of opening time and closing time may be defined such that the V winning opening 9156 is opened and closed multiple times like the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 9151. .

In addition, depending on the selected pattern of the special pattern, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151, the maximum opening time of each number, the closing time of each number, ED waiting time (ending time), The small hit type determination table may be configured so that at least one of the opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 is different.

In particular, depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 is changed, and the game ball can (or easily) pass through the V winning opening 9156. The small hit type determination table may be configured so that a disadvantageous operation mode in which the passage of the game ball is impossible (or difficult) is determined.

In addition, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the small winning game state is set shorter than the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) in one round in the big winning game state. , the first big winning opening 9131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and the second big winning opening 9151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. It can be said that

[11-3-5. Game state related setting table]
FIG. 343 is an example of a game state related setting table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 343 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The game state related setting table is a table for setting the game state after the jackpot game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 343, in the game state related setting table, "state "Game state setting" consisting of "flag", "general electric operation pattern" and "A time saving end condition" is associated.

A “state flag” is a flag indicating the type of game state, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203 . State flag = 0 indicates "normal game state", state flag = 1 indicates "A time saving game state", and state flag = 2 indicates "B time saving game state". In this embodiment, although the C time saving game state is not executed, the state flag = 3 indicates the "C time saving game state" when the C time saving game state is executable.

The “universal electric operation pattern” is information that defines the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140 and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203 . Normal electric operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long open pattern" described later is difficult to determine and the "short open pattern" described later is likely to be determined. In the normal electric operation pattern = 02, the “long open pattern” is more likely to be determined than when the normal electric operation pattern = 01, and the “short open pattern” is determined. indicates a difficult situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "general electric operation pattern" has a corresponding relationship with the "state flag (game state)", and when the state flag indicating the normal game state is 0, the normal electric operation pattern=00 is set. When the state flag indicating the short working hours game state A is set to 1, the normal electric operation pattern=01 or 02 is set, and when the state flag indicating the short working hours game state B=2, the electric operation pattern=02 is set. is configured as follows.

"A time-saving end condition" is a condition for ending the A time-saving game state, which is a time-saving game state, and "normal symbol variable display times" is set as the end condition as the number of times of time-saving. When the termination condition of the "variable display times of normal symbols" is established, the A time-saving game state is terminated and the state is shifted to the normal game state.

In this embodiment, the number of variable display times of normal symbols is set as the A time saving end condition, but in addition to the end condition of "variable display times of normal symbols", "number of winning times of small hits" and "special symbol ``Time saving end condition A'' may be set from a plurality of ending conditions of ``variable display count'', and when any one of the ending conditions is met, the time saving game state A may end and the game state may be shifted to the normal game state. . This is the same for the B time saving end condition described later.

Also, in addition to the end condition of "variable display number of normal symbols" as the A time reduction end condition or B time reduction end condition, when setting the end condition of "variable display number of special symbols", "variable display of special symbols" The end condition of "number of times" is preferably set to the number of variable display times less than the number of variable display times set in the end condition of "number of times of variable display of normal symbols". For example, when the normal symbol variable display count = 50 times is set as the end condition of the "normal symbol variable display frequency", the end condition of the "special symbol variable display frequency" is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. And the total number of variable display times = 10 times, or the number of variable display times of the first special symbol = 5 times and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol = 5 times Either one of the conditions is satisfied. It is desirable to set as

According to the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 343, according to the selected symbol of the special symbol, when 100 times which is "first time saving number of times" is set as the variable display number of normal symbols in the A time saving end condition, State flag = 1 and normal electric operation pattern = 01 are set, and the number of variable display times of normal symbols in the A time saving end condition is 120 times which is the "second time saving number" or "3rd time saving number" When a certain 10000 times is set, the state flag is set to 1 and the general electric operation pattern is set to 02.

In this embodiment, the time saving game state in which the state flag = 1, the general electric operation pattern = 01 and the first time saving number of times (100 times) is set is referred to as the "first time saving game state". In addition, the time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1, the normal electric operation pattern = 02, and the second time-saving number of times (120 times) is set is easier to transition to the next big hit game state than the first time-saving game state. Time-saving gaming state". In addition, the state flag = 1, the general electric operation pattern = 02, and the third time reduction game state (10000 times) are set to the next big hit game state. Time-saving gaming state".

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of times of shortening of time (the number of times of variable display of normal symbols) in the first time saving game state is set to 100 times as the number of times of shortening of time. The first time-saving number of times can be freely changed in design. In addition, the variable display number of normal symbols of the A time saving end condition in the second time saving game state is configured to be set to 120 times as the second time saving number of times, but the normal electric operation pattern in the first time saving game state = 01 is set, and as long as the general electric operation pattern = 02 is set in the second time saving game state, the second time saving number is free to change the design as long as it is equal to or greater than the first time saving number. Furthermore, the number of variable display times of normal symbols of the A time saving end condition in the third time saving game state is configured to be set to 10000 times as the third time saving number of times, but the third time saving number of times is the next big hit game. The design can be freely changed as long as it is the number of times that the transition to the state is substantially guaranteed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, although it is configured with a normal electric operation pattern, the first You may comprise so that a time saving game state, a 2nd time saving game state, and a 3rd time saving game state may be comprised. In this case, the first number of times of time saving (for example, 50 times) < the number of times of saving time (for example, 100 times) < the number of times of saving time (for example, 10000 times).

Then, according to the game state related setting table shown in FIG. 343, after the jackpot game state by lottery of the first special symbol is completed, according to the selected symbol of the special symbol, the "first time-saving game state" or the "second After the big hit game state by lottery of the second special pattern is completed, the second special pattern is selected according to the selected pattern, the second time saving game state or the third time saving game state. ” is configured to transition to

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game state by lottery of the second special symbol, the "second It is configured to shift to the time-saving gaming state. In addition, after the big win game state by the lottery of the second special symbol is completed, the shift to the "third time-saving game state" is performed at a relatively higher second rate than after the big win game state by the lottery of the first special symbol is completed. is configured to Furthermore, after the jackpot game state by lottery of the second special symbols is completed, it is configured to shift to the "second time-saving game state" at a relatively higher third rate than the "third time-saving game state". there is It should be noted that the above-mentioned first percentage, second percentage, and third percentage do not exclude the fact that the ratios to be compared are 0% and 100%.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state by lottery of the first special symbols, it is configured to shift to the "first time-saving game state" or "second time-saving game state", but the first special After the end of the jackpot game state by lottery of symbols, (a) only "first time saving game state", (b) "first time saving game state" or "normal game state", (c) "first time saving game state" ” or “third time-saving gaming state”, (d) “first time-saving gaming state”, “normal gaming state” or “second time-saving gaming state”, (e) “first time-saving gaming state”, “normal gaming state ” or “third time-saving gaming state”, (f) “first time-saving gaming state”, “second time-saving gaming state” or “third time-saving gaming state”, (g) “first time-saving gaming state”, “normal game state”, “second time-saving game state” or “third time-saving game state”.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state by lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to shift to the "second time-saving game state" or "third time-saving game state", but (a ) “Second time-saving gaming state” only, (b) “Second time-saving gaming state” or “Normal gaming state”, (c) “Second time-saving gaming state” or “First time-saving gaming state”, (d) “ Second time-saving gaming state”, “Normal gaming state” or “First time-saving gaming state”, (e) “Second time-saving gaming state”, “Normal gaming state” or “Third time-saving gaming state”, (f) “ Second time-saving gaming state”, “first time-saving gaming state” or “third time-saving gaming state”, (g) “second time-saving gaming state”, “normal game state”, “first time-saving gaming state” or “second It may be configured to shift to the 3 o'clock short game state. However, even if it is possible to shift to various game states as described above, it is desirable to maintain the relationships among the above-described first, second, and third percentages.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state related setting table is when "the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state" and when "the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state", the end of the jackpot game state Although the later game state is configured to be set in the same way, the game state after the big win game state is ended may be configured to be different according to the game state at the time of winning.

[11-3-6. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
Figures 344 and 345 are an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the ninth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 344 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 345 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the time saving game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. be. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 344 and 345 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol variation pattern table is a table for determining the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation display time. The "variation pattern of special symbols" is information that defines the variation mode of the special symbols, and at least the variation display time of the special symbols is determined.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 344 or FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbols is determined based on the result of the determination process, the selected symbols of the special symbols, and the like. Then, the main CPU 201 determines the variable display time of the special symbols based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbols.

Further, when the special symbol variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . In addition, the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern of the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 9120, or the game ball entered the second start port 9140. It is configured to be able to identify whether it is a variation pattern of the second special symbol triggered by this, and when distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second It is also called a special symbol variation pattern command.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 344 is a special symbol variation pattern table determined in the normal game state.

Here, in the normal game state, since left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, the game ball can enter the first start port 9120 originally, and the game ball can enter the second start port 9140. It is impossible (or difficult) for a ball to enter, but immediately after the time-saving game state is terminated and the state is shifted to the normal game state, the reserved number of the second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is consumed. will be done.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the normal game state in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol is called "first normal game state". No, the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol The second start port 9140 is opened based on the lottery, and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed by the game ball entering the second start port 9140) is referred to as the "second normal game state". It says.

As shown in FIG. 344, according to the special symbol variation pattern table T1, when the first normal game state (first special symbol), the lottery result of the special symbol (hitting or losing), and the selected symbol of the special symbol. , random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, variation pattern of special symbols, and variation display time of special symbols are associated with each other. Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In addition, when the second normal game state (second special symbol), the lottery result of the special symbol (hitting or losing), the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the second special symbol when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. , the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the variation display time of the special symbols are associated with each other, and when the second normal game state (second special symbol) is established, the condition for starting the second special symbol is satisfied. Depending on the number of reserved second special symbols when doing so, the variation pattern of different special symbols and the variation display time of the special symbols can be determined.

Here, the ``condition for starting the second special symbol'' means, in detail, that at least the special electric role product is not operating (not in the big win game state or the small win game state), and the second special symbol Under the condition that the variable display is not performed, the second It means that the start information of the special design is stored.

And "the number of reserved second special symbols when the condition for starting the second special symbol is satisfied" means the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (2) of the main RAM 203 It means the reserved number of second special symbols immediately before the start information of the second special symbols stored in is shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0).

For example, under the condition that the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed without the big win game state or the small win game state, when three game balls enter the second start port 9140 in succession, the second The starting information of the second special symbol based on the first game ball entering the starting port 9140 is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), and the condition for starting the second special symbol is established immediately. The reserved number of second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbols is satisfied”=0. In addition, the start information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball entering the second start port 9140 is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1), and the second start port 9140 is entered. The start information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball that has been played is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (2). Then, when the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied for the starting information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball, the second special symbol is displayed up to the second special symbol starting storage area (2). Since the start information is stored, the number of pending second special symbols immediately before being shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0) is 2, and "when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied The reserved number of second special symbols”=2. In addition, when the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied for the starting information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball, the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1). Since the start information is stored, the number of reserved second special symbols immediately before being shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0) is 1, and "when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied The reserved number of second special symbols”=1.

In this embodiment, in the case of the second normal game state (second special symbol), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit and when it is a small hit, the condition for starting the second special symbol is established. When the number of reserved second special symbols = 0, it is possible to determine the “first special symbol variation pattern (0AH)” in which the “BONUS rush effect” that informs the entry into the BONUS state described later is executed. If the number of reserved second special symbols > 0 when the condition for starting the second special symbols is satisfied, the BONUS effect performed in the big win game state and the small win game state continues. It is configured to be able to determine the "variation pattern (1AH) of the second special symbol" in which the "BONUS continuation effect" is executed.

In addition, the "first variation display time (for example, 10 seconds)" associated with the variation pattern (0AH) of the first special symbol in which the BONUS rush effect is executed is the game ball shot from the shooting device 6. is set longer than the average arrival time (for example, 5 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as “general/universal average arrival time”) until it reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second start port 9140).
Furthermore, the "first variable display time (for example, 10 seconds)" is averaged until the game ball fired from the launcher 6 reaches the second special electric accessory unit 9150 (second big winning hole 9151). It is set longer than the arrival time (for example, 6 seconds).

In addition, the "second fluctuation display time (for example, 1 second)" associated with the second special symbol fluctuation pattern (1AH) in which the BONUS continuous effect is executed is longer than the "universal electric average arrival time". set short.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned "second variable display time (for example, 1 second)" makes it appear that a plurality of big win game states or small win game states are continuing, so that the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the big win game state. It is set to be less than the OP waiting time (opening time, eg 2 seconds) and the OP waiting time (opening time, eg 2 seconds) of the small winning game state.

In this way, when the holding number of the second special symbols is 0 when the start condition of the second special symbols is satisfied, the variable display time of the second special symbols is set longer than the "general average reaching time", When the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied and the number of reserved second special symbols>0, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the "average arrival time of the general electricity". According to the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of 2 special symbols is satisfied, the game ball fired from the launching device 6 enters the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second start port 9140). The ball rate can be varied, and the player can be provided with the number of balls produced according to the designed value.

Further, when the condition for starting the second special symbol is satisfied and the number of reserved second special symbols > 0, by setting the variable display time of the second special symbol to be short, multiple times (maximum When the jackpot game states for three times) are continuously executed, the variation display time of the second special symbol executed between the plurality of jackpot game states is shortened, and the plurality of jackpot game states are seamlessly executed (a group of It can be shown like a jackpot game state).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345 is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 345, in the special symbol variation pattern table J1, the type of special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol (win-lose), the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the start condition of the second special symbol are established. The reserved number of the second special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the variation display time of the special symbols are associated with each other.

Here, in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and although it is originally impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the first start port 9120, the time-saving It is possible for a game ball to enter the first start hole 9120 by hitting left as an irregular game mode (disadvantageous to the player) in the game state. Therefore, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the variation pattern table J1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. It corresponds to the variation pattern of the special design determined when the ball is played.

Also in the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345, when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, the condition for starting the second special symbol is established in the same manner as the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. "First special symbol variation pattern (0AH)" and "Second special symbol variation pattern (1AH)" can be determined by referring to the reserved number of second special symbols when doing so.

[11-3-7. Prefetch related data for special symbols]
FIG. 346 is an example of prefetch related data of special symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Here, "prediction" means that the game ball enters the first start port 9120 or the second start port 9140, and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) detects special symbol start information (random number for judging a big hit, symbol Random number, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.) is to analyze the start information of the acquired special symbol in advance than the lottery of the special symbol. Then, the analyzed information (read-ahead command) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "read-ahead effect" can be executed based on the read-ahead command.

FIG. 346(a) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to perform look-ahead according to the game state as look-ahead related data of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), in the normal game state, both prefetching based on the starting information of the first special symbol and prefetching based on the starting information of the second special symbol can be executed. Also, in the time-saving game state, the big win game state, and the small win game state, only the look-ahead based on the starting information of the second special symbol can be executed.

FIG. 346(b) is an example of the structure of the look-ahead command as the analyzed information after analyzing the start information of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 346(b), the look-ahead command consists of a "special symbol type" indicating whether it is the first special symbol or a second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". there is

"Parameter 1" is win/lose information pre-analyzed as to whether it is a big win, a small win, or a loss based on the random number value for judging a big win, and FIG. is.

"Parameter 2" is symbol information obtained by pre-analyzing the special symbol (selected symbol) to be stopped and displayed based on the random number for judging the big hit and the symbol random number. is an example of a setting table for .

"Parameter 3" is the variation information obtained by pre-analyzing the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for big hit determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection. 3 is an example of a setting table of No. 3.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbols from the prefetching of the start information of the special symbols to before the lottery of the special symbols based on the start information of the special symbols is performed is also referred to as "preliminary variation". . Moreover, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol lottery based on the starting information of the special symbol is performed is also called "the variation".

[11-3-8. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 347 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 347 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process. It is a table referred to when determining "ordinary design winning" or "ordinary design losing" by lottery.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 347, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (width) and the normal symbol win/lose determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol lose") are provided. are defined in association with each other. In addition, the random number value for hit determination of normal symbols is acquired in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 347, and determines normal symbol hit/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. , and the hit/lose determination value data of the normal design is determined as "normal design hit determination value data". Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "normal symbol win" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/68.5. In addition, when the obtained random number value for winning determination of normal symbols is 957 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "normal symbol losing", and sets the winning/losing determination value data of normal symbols to "normal symbol losing determination value data". to decide.

In addition, the range (width) of the random number value for the hit determination of the normal symbol determined as "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss", that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state whether the normal game state or the time-saving game state, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be common (the probability of winning per normal symbol is common), which will be described later. By varying the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140 according to the game state (general electric operation pattern), the degree of profit given to the player is varied according to the game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state whether the normal game state or the time-saving game state, the selection rate of the "normal symbol winning" is set in common, but the "normal symbol winning" is selected according to the game state. Different selectivities may be used. When the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' is varied according to the game state, the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' in the normal game state. It is desirable to configure Furthermore, the selection rate of the “normal pattern winning” may be varied depending on the types of the A time-saving gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state.

[11-3-9. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 348 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 348 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko game machine.

The normal design determination table determines the stop design of the normal design based on the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data of the normal design and the design random number value of the normal design acquired when the game ball passes through the normal design operation area 9126. It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected pattern of normal patterns" to be determined.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 348 includes the above-described normal symbol winning/losing determination value data ("normal symbol winning determination value data" or "normal symbol losing determination value data"), normal symbol symbol random numbers, It is defined in correspondence with the selected pattern of the normal pattern. Incidentally, the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is obtained from, for example, 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 348, and determines the selected normal symbol based on the normal symbol winning determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 348, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol selection symbols are selected as follows.

For example, when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 49, and selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol. If the symbol random number is any one of 50 to 99, "f2" is selected as the selected symbol of the normal symbol. Further, when the normal symbol loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the normal symbol selection symbol regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In addition, the range (width) of the symbol random number value of the normal symbols in which the "selected symbol of the normal symbol" is selected, that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above value, and the design can be freely changed as appropriate.

In particular, in the present embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, in selecting the selected symbol of the normal symbol, regardless of the game state, the win-lose determination value data of the normal symbol (of the hit determination process of the normal symbol) result) and the symbol random number value of the normal design, the selection design of the normal design is configured to be selected. In addition, as in the first pachinko game machine, it may be configured such that the selection pattern of the normal pattern is selected according to the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 347), and based on the acquired normal symbol hit determination random number value, the normal symbol hit/lose determination value data is displayed. is determined, and then the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 348) is referred to, and the normal symbol selection symbol is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, on the basis of the obtained random number value for hit determination of normal symbols and the random number value of normal symbols, hit/lose determination value data of normal symbols (hit/lose of normal symbols) and selected symbols of normal symbols are determined together. You may do so.

[11-3-10. Second start port opening pattern determination table]
FIG. 349 is an example of an opening pattern determination table for the second starting port in the ninth pachinko game machine. In addition, the opening pattern determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG. 349 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko game machine.

The opening pattern determination table of the second starting port, when it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, according to the game state (normal operation pattern) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol, as the operation mode of the normal electric shutter 9147 It is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140 .

In the opening pattern determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG. 349, the game state (general electric operation pattern), the selected pattern of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140 are defined in correspondence. ing.

In addition, the "opening pattern of the second start port" includes the "first open time" in the first open state of the second start port 9140, and the "first wait time" in the first closed state of the second start port 9140. time", "second opening time" in the second open state of the second start port 9140, "second wait time" in the second closed state of the second start port 9140, closing the second start port 9140 and an "ending time" for terminating the operation of the general electric shutter 9147.

The main CPU 201 refers to the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in FIG. 349, and selects the opening pattern for the second starting port 9140 based on the game state (normal operation pattern) and the normal symbol selection. decide. After determining the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140 , the main CPU 201 transmits a second starting port opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the second starting port 9140 to the sub CPU 301 .

In this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second starting port, the disadvantageous “short opening pattern (91H01H)” in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is short and the advantageous “long opening pattern (91H01H)” in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is long are used. It has two types of open patterns: the open pattern (91H02H). In addition, as the opening pattern of the second starting port, three or more opening patterns may be provided.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is set even if the game ball rolling on the upper surface plate 9147U of the general electric shutter 9147 falls toward the lower surface plate 9147D. , the lower plate 9147D immediately protrudes, and the game ball dropped from the upper plate 9147U rolls on the lower plate 9147D (is caught by the lower plate 9147D). is set. For this reason, even if it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, when the "short open pattern (91H01H)" is performed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 9140, It is configured to be treated as a failure in practice.

In addition, during the opening time of the "long opening pattern (91H02H)", even if the game ball rolling on the upper surface plate 9147U of the shutter 9147 for general electricity falls toward the lower surface plate 9147D, the lower surface plate 9147D A long time (for example, 5.4 seconds) is set for the game ball to pass through the lower plate 9147D without protruding and enter the second starting port 9140.

According to the opening pattern determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG. Also, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f2", the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting port ("long opening pattern ( 91H02H)" is not determined).

In addition, when the general electric operation pattern associated with the first normal game state is 01, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f1", the opening pattern of the second starting port is "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined, and when the normal symbol selection symbol is "f2", the opening pattern of the second start opening is determined to be "long opening pattern (91H02H)".

In addition, when the general electric operation pattern associated with the second normal game state and the third normal game state = 02, even when the selected pattern of the normal symbol is "f1", the normal symbol is selected. Also when the symbol is "f2", the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second start opening.

For this reason, normal electric operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the “long open pattern” is difficult to determine and the “short open pattern” is easily determined. In the normal electric operation pattern = 02, the "long open pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short open pattern" is less likely to be determined than when the normal electric operation pattern = 01. It indicates the state.

In addition, in the right column of the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in FIG. 349, "random number for hit judgment of normal symbol (see FIG. 347)" and "random number of symbol for normal symbol (see FIG. 348)" , and the "long opening probability" that the "long opening pattern" is executed is shown for reference. In this embodiment, when the normal electric operation pattern = 00, the normal pattern per hit is about 1/68.5, but the long open pattern is not determined, so the "long open probability" is is 0. In addition, when the normal electric operation pattern is 01, the normal symbol hit is about 1/68.5, and the selection rate of the normal symbol selection symbol "f2" for which the long open pattern is determined is 51/101. Therefore, the "long open probability" is approximately 1/135.6. In addition, when the normal electric operation pattern is 01, the normal symbol hit is about 1/68.5, and the long open pattern is determined by all the normal symbol selection symbols (101/101), The "long open probability" is approximately 1/68.5.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the specified number for general electric power is set to three, and the opening pattern of any of the second start ports is determined, and even if the second start port 9140 is opened, the second start When three game balls enter the opening 9140, the opening pattern of the second starting opening ends (the second starting opening 9140 closes). That is, for one normal symbol, only three game balls can enter the second start port 9140, and even if there is a remaining time of 5400 ms open time in the time-saving game state, the second start Port 9140 will be closed.

[11-3-11. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 350 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table is a table for determining the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time. The "variation pattern of normal symbols" is information that defines the variation mode of normal symbols, and at least the variable display time of normal symbols is determined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and refers to the game state, the normal symbol selected symbol, the current opening pattern of the second starting opening, the previous opening pattern of the second starting opening, and the normal symbol. A variation pattern of normal symbols is determined based on the random number value for performance and the number of reserved normal symbols. Then, the main CPU 201 determines the variation display time of the normal symbols based on the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols. Further, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 .

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, the game state, the normal symbol selection pattern, the current opening pattern of the second starting opening, the last opening pattern of the second starting opening, and the production of the normal symbol. The random number value, the reserved number of normal symbols, the variation pattern of the normal symbols, and the variable display time of the normal symbols are associated with each other. In addition, in this embodiment, the time saving game state is common without distinguishing between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state.

According to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. The pattern variation pattern (01H or 02H) is configured to be determinable. However, the normal symbol variation pattern (01H) associated with the longest normal symbol variation display time (for example, 30 seconds) that can be determined in the normal game state is the longest normal symbol that can be determined in the time saving game state. It is a normal symbol variation pattern associated with a normal symbol variation display time shorter than a normal symbol variation pattern (16H) associated with a variation display time (for example, 60 seconds).

Further, according to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. is associated with the opening pattern, and when the opening pattern of the second starting port this time is "long opening pattern (91H02H)", the normal symbol variation pattern ( 13H-16H) are determined. Also, even if it is the selected pattern (f1, f2) of the normal pattern determined at the time of the normal pattern hit, when the opening pattern of the second start port this time is "short opening pattern (91H01H)", time saving It is configured to determine the variation patterns (11H, 12H) of the normal symbols in which the effect of losing in the game state is executed.

Then, according to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. , when the opening pattern of the second starting port this time is "long opening pattern (91H02H)" than when it is "short opening pattern (91H01H)", the fluctuation display time of normal symbols is relatively long (For example, 40 seconds, 60 seconds) are associated with normal symbol variation patterns (13H, 15H or 16H) are configured to be determinable.

In this way, in the time-saving game state, the variable display time of normal symbols is relatively longer in the "long open pattern" than in the "short open pattern", so that the player becomes the "long open pattern". It is possible to execute a performance that makes people expect something, and to improve the interest of the game in the time-saving game state.

Also, according to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. , When the opening pattern of the previous second starting port is "no opening" or "short opening pattern (91H01H)", the third fluctuation display time (for example, 15 seconds, 12 seconds, 40 seconds) is associated with the normal symbol variation pattern (13H to 15H) is configured to be determinable, and when the opening pattern of the previous second starting port is "long opening pattern (91H02H)", the normal symbol A normal symbol variation pattern (16H) associated with a fourth variation display time (for example, 60 seconds) longer than the third variation display time as the variation display time can be determined.

Thus, in the time-saving game state, when the "long open pattern" is continuously performed, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is relatively long, so the "long open pattern" is continuously performed for a short period of time. is performed, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 9140 more than expected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the common time-saving game state is set without distinguishing between the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state. It may be configured such that different normal symbol variation patterns are determined in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state.

[11-4. Main control processing]
In the ninth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the special symbol control process and normal symbol control performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although part of the processing and system timer interrupt processing are different, the rest of the processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the system timer interrupt process will be described below, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine , including the same processing as , will be explained again with different step numbers.

[11-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 351, the special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 351 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 351, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S9001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S9001, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the special symbol working area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S9001 when executing the special symbol control process.

In S9002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S9001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S9008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S9003.

In S9003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a reserved number of second special symbols. When the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information of the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S9004, and when it determines that the starting information of the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S9005. Move.

In S9004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a reserved number of first special symbols. When the main CPU 201 determines that the start information of the first special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S9007, and when it determines that the start information of the first special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S9006. to

In S9005, the main CPU 201 performs shift processing to shift the second special symbol start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0), and stored in the second special symbol start storage area (2). The start information is shifted to the second special symbol start storage area (1). In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved number of the second special symbol before shifting the starting information is temporarily stored in the main RAM 203 as "the reserved number of the second special symbol when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied". memorize to

In S9006, the main CPU 201 performs shift processing to shift the first special symbol start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0), and the first special symbol start storage area (2) to the first The start information stored in the special symbol start storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (3).

In S9007, the main CPU 201 stores the special symbol starting information (the number of reserved first and second special symbols) in the first special symbol starting storage area and the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203. If the command has not been stored for a certain period of time or longer, the demonstration display command is reserved for transmission. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

At S9008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of S9003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S9001 to S9008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is stored as the ninth pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variator has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 9120 or the second It may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the winning order (ball entering order) to the starting port 9140.

[11-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 352, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 351) will be described. FIG. 352 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 352 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

In S9011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time (special symbol timer counter) is zero. The waiting time for this special symbol is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special symbol management process, and is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of 2 msec, for example. When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol waiting time is not 0, it ends the special symbol management process, returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 351), and determines that the special symbol waiting time is 0. If so, the process proceeds to S9012.

At S9012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S9012, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9013. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S9013 based on the control state number read out in the process of S9012.

In S9013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S9013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9014.

In S9014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The processing of this S9014 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9015.

At S9015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The processing of this S9015 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9016.

In S9016, the main CPU 201 performs processing during closing of the small winning game. The process of S9016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this small winning game closing process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9017.

In S9017, the main CPU 201 performs processing during small winning game opening. The process of S9017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this small hit game opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 359 . If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9018.

At S9018, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S9018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9019.

At S9019, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S9019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9020.

In S9020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game state ending process. The processing of this S9020 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S9013 to S9020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 351). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[11-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9021, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352), and controls the special symbols. If it is determined that the state number is "0", the process proceeds to S9022.

In S9022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol win determination process for determining a big win, a small win or a loss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 339 is referred to, and the special symbol jackpot determination random value as the special symbol start information shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0). Hit determination of special symbols is performed based on, and hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S9022, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9023.

In S9023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing for determining the stop symbol of the special symbols. In this special symbol determination process, with reference to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol and the symbol specifying command are determined. After executing the process of S9023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9024.

In S9024, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of determining the type of hit when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this hit type determination process, when the special symbol hit determination process is a big win, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is determined, and when the special symbol hit determination process is a small win, FIG. Determine the small hit type determination table shown in . Furthermore, since the game state and the like are set based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, winning game state data indicating the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win or a small win is stored in the main RAM 203. It is set in the game state storage area when winning. After executing the process of S9024, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9025.

In S9025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. Based on the type, the result of the hit determination process of the special design, the selected design of the special design, the number of reserved second special designs when the start condition of the second special design is satisfied, etc., the variation pattern of the special design and the special design to determine the variation pattern command. Specifically, when the state flag is referred to and the normal game state is determined, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. And the result of the hit determination process of the special design (hitting and dropping), the selected design of the special design, the number of reserved second special designs when the start condition of the second special design is satisfied, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for selection of production Based on, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined. Further, when referring to the state flag and in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. Based on the result of the hit determination process (hit-lose), the selected pattern of the special pattern, and the number of the second special pattern held when the start condition of the second special pattern is satisfied, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation of the special symbol Determine the pattern command. After executing the process of S9025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9026.

In S9026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process for setting a special symbol variable display time. In this special symbol variation display time setting process, the special symbol variation pattern table determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S9025 is referred to, and the special symbol variation is based on the determined special symbol variation pattern. Determine display time. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the variable special symbol in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let it start. After executing the process of S9026, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9027.

At S9027, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 352) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. Become. After executing the process of S9027, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9028.

At S9028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of confirming/updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9028, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9029.

At S9029, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In this process, transmission reservation processing of "symbol designation command" and "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol effect start command. As transmission reservation processing of the design designation command, transmission reservation processing of the design designation command determined in S9023 is performed. Further, as the transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command, transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S9025 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. In addition, the special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 354, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 354 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9041, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "1", the process proceeds to S9042.

In S9042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol finalization time setting process for setting a special symbol finalization time. In this special symbol design determination time setting process, the special symbol design determination time (for example, 540 ms) is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/loss). After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and stops displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Let After executing the process of S9042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9043.

It should be noted that the symbol fixing time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the game state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol fixing time (for example, 540 ms) may be determined.

In S9043, the main CPU 201 performs B time-saving gaming state transition determination processing. In the ninth pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, the "ceiling counter" for counting the number of variable display times of the special symbols to shift to the B time-saving game state is updated, and the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. When it reaches, it will control the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. The details of this B time-saving gaming state transition determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S9043, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9044.

At S9044, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S9015 in FIG. 352) is performed after the completion of this special symbol variable display end process. becomes. After executing the process of S9044, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9045.

At S9045, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9045, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9046.

At S9046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times a special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours. After executing the process of S9046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-5. B time-saving game state transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the B time-saving game state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 354) will be described. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing an example of the B time-saving gaming state transition determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9043-4, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing for updating the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter update process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process of S9043-4, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9043-5.

In S9043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether ceiling counter=ceiling value (eg, 600 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter=ceiling value, the process proceeds to S9043-6, and if it determines that the ceiling counter=ceiling value does not, the process proceeds to S9043-9.

In S9043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (=0 is set). After executing the process of S9043-6, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9043-7.

At S9043-7, the main CPU 201 performs a B time saving game state setting process for shifting to the B time saving game state. In this B time-saving gaming state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving gaming state is set to 2, the normal electric operation pattern is set to 02, and the normal symbol variable display count is set to 600 as the “B time-saving end condition”. Set the number of times to the time saving number counter. In addition, in the B time saving game state setting process, the normal electric operation pattern = 01 may be set, and as the "B time saving end condition", the number of variable display times of normal symbols = 100 times, 120 times, 10000 times etc. You can set the number of times. After executing the process of S9043-7, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9043-8.

In S9043-8, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a time saving shift command when starting the B time saving game state. In addition, the time-saving transition command that is reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9043-8, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9043-9.

At S9043-9, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the B time-saving game state transition determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 354).

[11-4-6. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 356, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. Figure 356 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9051, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and returns to the special symbol control state. If it is determined that the number is "2", the process proceeds to S9052.

At S9052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbols and determines whether or not the game is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to the big win. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9054 when determining that it is a big hit, and shifts the process to S9061 when determining that it is not a big hit.

In S9054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a big hit. In this jackpot external signal processing, the selected pattern of the special pattern is referred to, and the external signal output to the hall computer 186 through the external terminal plate 184 in the jackpot game state is "a signal corresponding to the selected pattern of the special pattern." Generate a jackpot signal. After that, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbol of the special symbol" is output to the external terminal plate 184. - 特許庁After executing the process of S9054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9055.

In S9055, the main CPU 201 performs a first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. - 特許庁Furthermore, with reference to the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. ) is set in the waiting time for special symbols in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S9055, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9056.

In S9056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot state display process. In this jackpot state display processing, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right-handed instruction data for notifying the player of right-handed instruction is set. After executing the process of S9056, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9057.

At S9057, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined to be a big hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the state flag, normal electric operation pattern, and time saving number counter. After executing the process of S9057, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9058.

At S9058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9058, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9059.

At S9059, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S9018 in FIG. 352) will be performed. . After executing the process of S9059, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9059.

In S9060, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big hit start display command. After executing the processing of S9060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352).

In S9061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbols and refers to the selected special symbols to determine whether or not the special symbol is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to the small win. Determine whether or not there is The main CPU 201 moves the process to S9063 if it determines that it is a small win, and moves the process to S9071 if it determines that it is not a small win (that is, loses).

In S9063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small hit. In the external signal processing of this small hit, the selected pattern of the special pattern is referred to, and the external signal output to the hall computer 186 through the external terminal plate 184 in the small hit game state is "to the selected pattern of the special pattern. Generate a small hit signal according to. After that, the generated small hit signal is output to the external terminal plate 184 . After executing the process of S9063, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9064.

In S9064, the main CPU 201 performs small winning start preparation setting processing. In this small hit start preparation setting process, the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. is set as the upper limit value of the number of small hits to be opened in the main RAM 203. Next, referring to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected symbol of the special symbol", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time ) is set in the waiting time for special symbols in the main RAM 203 .

Furthermore, in the small hit start preparation setting process, referring to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. The time is determined, the determined open waiting time is set in the V winning opening closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. The V winning control processing for the V shutter solenoid 9160 for opening and closing the V winning port 9156 is performed in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 366) to be described later. After executing the process of S9064, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9066.

In S9065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win state display process. In this small hit state display process, right hitting instruction data for notifying the player of instructing right hitting is set. After executing the process of S9065, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9067.

At S9067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9067, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9068.

At S9068, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the small hit game closing process (see S9016 in FIG. 352) will be performed. . After executing the process of S9068, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9069.

At S<b>9069 , the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a small winning start display command. After executing the processing of S9069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352).

At S9071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S9051 to S9071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-7. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 356) will be described. FIG. 357 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9072, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S9072, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9073.

At S9073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. Also, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the starting information stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S9073, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9074.

At S9074, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S9074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 356).

[11-4-8. Small winning game closing processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 358, the small winning game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 358 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during closing of the small winning game in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9081, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 terminates the small winning game closing process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "3", the process proceeds to S9082.

In S9082, the main CPU 201 loads the "minor win open number counter value". The "small hit open number counter" is a counter that counts the number of small hit open times. In addition, the count value of the small hit open number counter (small hit open number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM203. After executing the process of S9082, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9083.

In S9083, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the loaded small win open count counter value is the upper limit value of the small win open count. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9089 when determining that the number of times of opening the small win is the upper limit, and shifts the process to S9084 when determining that the number of times of opening the small win is not the upper limit.

In S9084, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the second big winning opening 9151 (the winning number of the second big winning opening 9151) in the small winning game state is the maximum winning number. In this process, the value of the second big winning opening counter counted by the second big winning opening count switch 9152 is the predetermined maximum winning number of the second big winning openings 9151 (for example, 10). No is determined. When the main CPU 201 determines that the number of prizes won at the second big prize opening 9151 is not the maximum number of prizes won, it shifts the process to S9085 and determines that the number of prizes won at the second big prize opening 9151 is the maximum number of prizes won. If so, the process moves to S9089.

In S9085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small hit opening count counter value. After executing the process of S9085, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9086.

In S<b>9086 , the main CPU 201 performs opening setting processing of the second big winning opening 9151 to open the second big winning opening 9151 . In this second big winning opening opening setting process, the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. number of times counter value), the maximum opening time of the second big winning opening 9151 this time is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set in the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM203. Then, the second special winning opening opening control data for opening the second large winning opening 9151 is generated for the second special power solenoid 9155 . As a result, the second big winning opening 9151 is opened. After executing the process of S9086, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9087.

At S9087, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the end of this small-hit game closing process, the small-hit game open process (see FIG. 359) is performed. Become. After executing the process of S9087, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9088.

At S9088, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9088, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

At S9089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 9156 within the specified time (that is, whether or not the V winning opening switch 9157 has detected it). If the main CPU 201 determines that V winning has been detected, the process proceeds to S9090, and if it determines that V winning has not been detected, the process proceeds to S9098.

At S9090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the big hit from the second route. In this processing, the selected pattern of the special pattern is referred to, and a ``jackpot signal corresponding to the selected pattern of the special pattern'' is generated as an external signal to be output to the hall computer 186 through the external terminal plate 184 at the time of the jackpot. After that, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbol of the special symbol" is output to the external terminal plate 184. - 特許庁After executing the process of S9090, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9101.

In S9091, the main CPU 201 performs second route jackpot start preparation setting processing. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the RAM 203 is set. Furthermore, with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set to the waiting time of the special pattern. After executing the process of S9101, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9092.

In S9092, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the big hit game state from the second route is started from the second round round game. After executing the process of S9092, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9093.

In S9093, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot state display process. In this jackpot state display processing, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right-handed instruction data for notifying the player of right-handed instruction is set. After executing the process of S9093, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9094.

At S9094, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined to be a big hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the state flag, normal electric operation pattern, and time saving number counter. After executing the process of S9094, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9095.

At S9095, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9095, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9096.

At S9096, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process (Fig. 352) is performed after the end of this small winning game closing process. After executing the process of S9096, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9097.

In S9097, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a V-hit start display command. After executing the process of S9097, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game open process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9098, the main CPU 201 performs small hit end preparation setting processing. In this small hit end preparation setting process, the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 is referred to, and the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the small hit. Then, the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM203. After executing the process of S9098, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9099.

In S9099, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a small winning end display command. After executing the process of S9099, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9100.

At S9100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 357 is performed. After executing the process of S9100, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-9. Small hit game open processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 359, the small winning game open process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 359 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during the small winning game opening in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9101, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 terminates the small winning game open process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "4", the process moves to S9102.

At S9102, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the second big winning opening 9151 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process (see S9086 in FIG. 358) of the second big winning opening has passed. When the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second big winning hole 9151 has not elapsed, it ends the small winning game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352). Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second big winning opening 9151 has passed, the process proceeds to S9103.

In S<b>9103 , the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing of the second big winning opening 9151 to close the second big winning opening 9151 . In this second big winning opening closing setting process, the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. The closing time of the second big winning opening 9151 is determined based on the number counter value), and the determined closing time is set in the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM203. Then, the second special winning opening closing control data for closing the second special winning opening 9151 is generated for the second special power solenoid 9155 . As a result, the second big winning opening 9151 is closed. After executing the process of S9103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9104.

At S9104, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the end of this small-hit game open process, the small-hit game closing process (see FIG. 358) is performed. Become. After executing the process of S9104, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-10. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 360, the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) and the preparation process for opening the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 360 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9111, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "5", the process moves to S9112.

In S9112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value". "Round counter" is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. A count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S9112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9113.

In S9113, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the loaded round counter value is the upper limit value of the number of big hit rounds. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9114 when determining that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit value, and shifts the process to S9118 when determining that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit value.

In S<b>9114 , the main CPU 201 performs big hit end preparation setting processing. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. , the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S9114, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9115.

At S9115, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot game state ending process (Fig. 352) is performed after the big winning opening opening preparation process is finished. After executing the process of S9115, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9116.

At S9116, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9116, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9117.

In S9117, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command. It should be noted that the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S9117, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9118, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S9118, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9119.

In S<b>9119 , the main CPU 201 performs opening setting processing for opening the first big winning hole 9131 . In the opening setting process for the first big winning hole, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 9131 in the round is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set in the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM203. Then, the first special winning opening opening control data for opening the first special winning opening 9131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 9135 . As a result, the first big winning opening 9131 is opened. After executing the process of S9119, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9120.

At S9120, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" in this manner, the large winning opening opening control process (see FIG. 352) is performed after the completion of this large winning opening opening preparation process. Become. After executing the process of S9120, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9121.

At S9121, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9121, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9122.

At S9122, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9122, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-11. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 361, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 201 terminates the big winning opening control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "6", the process proceeds to S9132.

In S9132, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 9131 in one round is the maximum winning number when the first big winning hole 9131 is opened. do. In this process, whether the value of the first big winning opening counter counted by the first big winning opening count switch 9132 is the value of the maximum winning number of the first big winning openings 9131 defined in advance (for example, 10). No is determined.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S9132 that the number of prizes won in the first big prize opening 9131 is not the maximum number of prizes won, it shifts the process to S9133, and in S9132 the number of prizes won in the first big prize opening 9131 is the maximum number of prizes won. If so, the process proceeds to S9134.

At S9133, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 9131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process (see S9119 in FIG. 360) of the first big winning opening has passed.

When the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 9131 has not elapsed, it ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352). . Further, when the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 9131 has passed, the process proceeds to S9134.

In S<b>9134 , the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing of the first big winning hole 9131 to close the first big winning hole 9131 . In the closing setting processing of the first big winning hole, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The closing time of the first big winning opening 9131 in the round is determined, and the determined closing time is set in the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM203. Then, the first special winning opening closing control data for closing the first special winning opening 9131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 9135 . As a result, the first big winning opening 9131 is closed. After executing the process of S9134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9135.

At S9135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning opening opening control process, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see FIG. 360) is performed again. It will happen. After executing the process of S9135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9136.

At S9136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9137.

In S9137, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S9137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-12. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the jackpot game state end processing executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 362 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game state end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9141, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "7", the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing, returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352), and returns to the special symbol control state. If it is determined that the number is "7", the process proceeds to S9142.

At S9142, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game information initialization process. In this jackpot game information initialization processing, processing for setting or resetting the values of various flags and data used in the jackpot game state and various counters (eg, round counter, jackpot winning counter, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S9142, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9143.

In S9143, the main CPU 201 performs post-jackpot state setting processing for setting the game state after the jackpot game state is finished. In the state setting process after the end of the jackpot, referring to the game state related setting table shown in FIG. Set the variable display number of normal symbols as). After executing the process of S9143, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9144.

In this embodiment, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z1", the state flag indicating the A time-saving gaming state is set to 1, and the general electric operation pattern is set to 02, and the normal symbol is variable. The number of times of display = 120 times is set in the time saving counter. In addition, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, and the general electric operation pattern is set to 01, and the normal symbol is variable. The number of times of display = 100 times is set in the time saving counter. In addition, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z4", "z6" or "z7", the state flag indicating the A time saving game state is set to 1, and the general electric operation pattern is set to 02, The number of variable display times of normal symbols = 120 times is set in the time saving number counter. Further, when the selected symbol of the special symbol is "z5", the state flag indicating the A time-saving gaming state is set to 1, the normal electric operation pattern is set to 02, and the number of variable display times of the normal symbol is 10000. Set the number of times to the time saving number counter.

At S9144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 357 is performed. After executing the processing of S9144, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot game state end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-13. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 363, normal symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 363, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol starting information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is established, as in the special symbol control process. It goes without saying that

FIG. 363 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 363 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

At S9200, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol waiting time is zero. The waiting time of this normal design is set as the waiting time of various processes of the normal design control process, and is subtracted as a normal design timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. When the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0, it ends the normal symbol control process, returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process, and the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0. If it is determined that it is, the process moves to S9201.

At S9201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S9201, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9210. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processing after S9210 based on the control state number read in the processing of S9201.

At S9210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S9210 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start process, a normal symbol hit determination process, a normal symbol determination process, a second start opening pattern determination process, a normal symbol variation pattern determination process, etc. are performed. This will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9220.

At S9220, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S9220 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9230.

In this normal symbol variable display ending process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended. is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

At S9230, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S9230 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9240.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining a selected symbol (for example, a normal symbol win or a normal symbol loss) of the normal symbols that are stopped and displayed. When the main CPU 201 determines that the selected symbol of the stopped and displayed normal symbol corresponds to the winning of the normal symbol, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and the result of the winning determination processing of the normal symbol is a loss. , the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

At S9240, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This process of S9240 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9250.

In this ordinary electric accessary product opening process, the main CPU 201 refers to the opening pattern determination table for the second start opening shown in FIG. In accordance with the operation of the opening pattern of the second starting port, the general electric shutter 9147 is operated to open and close the second starting port 9140 . Then, when the specified number (for example, 3) of the game balls for the general electricity enters the second start port 9140, or the operation of the determined second start port opening pattern is completed, the second start port 9140 The closed state is set, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4", and the normal electric accessary product opening process is terminated.

At S9250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S9250 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". In this normal per symbol end process, the update of the number of times of time saving and the determination of the end of the number of times of time saving are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described normal symbol control process (S9200 to S9250) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-14. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 364, the details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363) will be described. FIG. 364 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 364, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S9211).

When it is determined in S9211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363). On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9212.

At S9212, the main CPU 201 shifts the normal symbol starting information. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the normal symbol start storage area (2) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). The start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S9212, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9213.

At S9213, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the data ("normal design win" or "normal design loss"). After executing the process of S9213, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9214.

At S9214, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, "selected symbol of normal symbol" is determined. After executing the process of S9214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9215.

In S<b>9215 , the main CPU 201 performs opening pattern determination processing for the second opening. After executing the process of S9215, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9216.

In the second starting port opening pattern determination process, the main CPU 201 first stores the data of the second starting port opening pattern stored in the starting port opening pattern storage area (0) of the main RAM 203 in the starting port opening pattern storage area ( 1). The data of the opening pattern of the second starting opening stored in the opening pattern storage area (1) is overwritten and erased by shifting the data of the opening pattern of the second starting opening. As a result, the data of the second starting port opening pattern stored in this starting port opening pattern storage area (0) corresponds to the "second starting port opening pattern determined this time", and the starting port opening pattern storage area ( 1) corresponds to the "previously determined opening pattern of the second starting port".

In addition, in the opening pattern determination processing for the second start opening, when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined, the main CPU 201 shifts the data of the opening pattern for the second start opening, and then performs the second opening pattern shown in FIG. By referring to the opening pattern determination table of the starting opening, the opening pattern of the second starting opening is determined based on the game state (normal operation pattern) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the second starting opening determined this time is determined. The opening pattern is stored in the starting port opening pattern storage area (0) of the main RAM 203 .

At S9216, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Based on the opening pattern of the starting opening, the opening pattern of the previous second starting opening stored in the starting opening opening pattern storage area (1), the random number for normal symbol production, and the number of reserved normal symbols, A variation pattern of normal symbols is determined. Then, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350 and determines the normal symbol variation display time based on the determined normal symbol variation pattern. After executing the process of S9216, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9217.

At S9217, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol variation display time determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S9216) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol variation display is performed on the normal symbol display section 161. to start. After executing the process of S9217, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9218.

At S9218, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (of FIG. 363 S9220) is performed. After executing the process of S9218, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9219.

At S9219, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the normal symbol variation pattern command. It should be noted that the variation pattern command in the normal pattern reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9219, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process, and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363).

[11-4-15. End processing per normal symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 365, details of the normal symbol per end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363) will be described. FIG. 365 is a flow chart showing an example of normal per symbol end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9251, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 determines that the normal symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 terminates the normal symbol winning end process, returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363), and returns to the normal symbol control state. If it is determined that the number is "4", the process proceeds to S9252.

In S9252, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving number counter update process for updating the time saving number counter. In this time-saving number counter update process, when the time-saving game state is set (when the state flag = 1 or 2 is set), 1 is subtracted from the "time-saving number counter" of the main RAM 203 and updated. do. As a result, the number of times of variable display of normal symbols can be counted as the number of times of time saving. After executing the process of S9252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9253.

In S<b>9253 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving number counter=0. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9254 when determining that the time saving counter=0, and moves the process to S9255 when determining that the time saving counter=0 is not.

In S9254, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information and shifts from the time saving game state to the normal game state. Here, as the clearing of the time saving information, the state flag, the general electric operation pattern and the time saving number counter are cleared (=0 is set). After executing the process of S9254, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9255.

At S9255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9255, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9256.

At S9256, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", the normal symbol variable display start process (see S9210 in FIG. 363) is performed after the end process of the normal symbol per end process. becomes. After executing the process of S9256, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol winning end process, and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal per symbol end process, the time saving number counter update process as shown in S9252 to S9254 above, the time saving number of times end determination is performed, but the normal symbol variable display end process ( S9220 in FIG. 363) may be configured to perform.

[11-4-16. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 366, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described. FIG. 366 is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9311, the main CPU 201 saves the protection register. After executing the process of S9311, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9312.

In S9312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, the power interruption is detected), it moves the process to S9344, and determines that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, the power interruption is not detected). If so, the process moves to S9313.

In S9313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S9313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9314.

In S<b>9314 , the main CPU 201 performs read processing of the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 . After executing the process of S9314, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9315.

At S9315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permission state based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permitted state when the game permission flag is on (=1), and indicates a game not permitted state when the game permission flag is off (=0). As described in the first pachinko game machine, the game permission flag is turned off (=game disallowed state) when the power is turned on and the power is restored and the RAM is being cleared. It is also a flag for which the game permission flag is set to ON (=game permission state) after the power is restored and after the RAM is cleared. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9317 when determining that the game is permitted, and shifts the process to S9344 when determining that the game is not permitted.

In S9317, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S9317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9318.

In S9318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. In the interrupt cycle timer update process, various timer counters such as a special symbol timer counter, a normal symbol timer counter, a V winning opening closing timer counter, and a V winning opening opening timer counter in the work area of the main RAM 203 are subtracted. After executing the process of S9318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9319.

In S9319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for judging a big hit of a random number for judging a big hit, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls. After executing the process of S9319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9320.

In S9320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S9320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9330.

In S<b>9330 , the main CPU 201 performs V winning control processing for opening and closing the V winning opening 9156 when the V operation flag is ON. In this V winning control process, when the V operation flag is ON and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning opening closing timer counter=0), the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the "selected pattern of special symbols", the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156, the determined opening time is set in the V winning opening opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V shutter solenoid 9160 On the other hand, the V winning opening opening control data for opening the V winning opening 9156 is output. The V winning opening opening control data is continuously output unless the V winning opening opening timer counter is zero. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning opening opening control data is output, the opening time has elapsed (V winning opening opening timer counter = 0), the V winning opening opening control data Stop the output and turn off the V operation flag. After executing the process of S9330, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9340.

At S9340, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S9340, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9341.

In S9341, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. After executing the process of S9341, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9342.

In S9342, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S9342, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9343.

In S9343, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S9341. After executing the process of S9343, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9344.

In S9344, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S9311, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[11-4-17. Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 367, switch input detection processing executed by main CPU 201 during system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 366) will be described. FIG. 367 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The ninth pachinko game machine is provided with a configuration of a first big winning hole count switch 9132, a second big winning hole count switch 9152, and a V winning hole switch 9157 compared to the first pachinko game machine. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

At S9401, the main CPU 201 executes a first start opening winning detection process. After executing the process of S9401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9402.

In this first start hole winning detection process, when the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 9120 is detected by the first start hole switch 9121, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the first start hole 9120. It is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0) and the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined that there is an empty area in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first special symbol start information Various random numbers (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for patterns, random numbers for judging reach, random numbers for selecting effects, etc.) are acquired, and the various random numbers obtained are stored in FIFO (First In, First Out) format. stored in one storage area. Then, transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the first special symbol indicating the winning to the first starting port 9120 and the reserved number of the first special symbols is performed. The first special symbol winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random numbers. Processing will end.

At S9402, the main CPU 201 executes a second start opening winning detection process. After executing the process of S9402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9403.

In this second start hole winning detection process, when the second start hole switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second start hole 9140. It is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (2). When it is determined that there is an empty area in any of the special symbol determination storage area (0), the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (2), as the start information of the second special symbol Various random numbers (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for patterns, random numbers for judging reach, random numbers for selecting effects, etc.) are obtained, and the obtained random numbers are stored in one storage area in FIFO format. Then, transmission reservation processing of the second special symbol winning command indicating the winning to the second start port 9140 and the reserved number of the second special symbols is performed. The second special symbol winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the second start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random numbers. Processing will end.

At S9403, the main CPU 201 performs normal winning hole passage detection processing. In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S9403, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9404.

At S9404, the main CPU 201 performs first big winning opening detection processing. In the first big winning hole passage detection process, when the first big winning hole count switch 9132 detects the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole 9131, the main CPU 201 Along with setting the payout information, 1 is added to the first big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls to the first big winning hole 9131 to update it. Then, transmission reservation processing of a first big winning opening winning command indicating winning to the first big winning opening 9131 is performed. The first big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9404, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9405.

At S9405, the main CPU 201 performs a second prize winning opening detection process. In the second big winning hole passage detection process, when the second big winning hole count switch 9152 detects that the game ball enters the second big winning hole 9151, the main CPU 201 detects the second big winning hole 9151. Along with setting the payout information, 1 is added to the second big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls to the second big winning hole 9151 to update it. Then, transmission reservation processing of a second large winning opening winning command indicating winning to the second large winning opening 9151 is performed. The second big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9405, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9406.

In S9406, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening detection processing. In the V winning opening passage detection process, when passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 9156 is detected by the V winning opening switch 9157, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning opening passage flag. Then, transmission reservation processing of a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 9156 is performed. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 9156, the payout information is not set. After executing the process of S9406, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9407.

In S9407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the process of S9407, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S9408.

In this gate passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern operation area 9126 is detected by the normal pattern operation switch 9127, the main CPU 201 detects the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). ) has an empty area. When it is determined that there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, normal symbol determination random numbers, normal symbol symbols) are used as normal symbol start information. Random numbers etc.) are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in one normal symbol start storage area in the FIFO format. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), the gate passage detection process is terminated without obtaining various random numbers. .

In S9408, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing the process of S9408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation processing, referring to the look-ahead related data in FIG. , to generate lookahead commands. In addition, as shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 346, in the time saving game state, the big hit game state, and the small hit game state, the look-ahead command (second special Design look-ahead command) can only be generated. Then, prefetch command transmission reservation processing for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub-control circuit 300 is performed. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[11-5. sub control circuit]
Next, the contents of control of the sub-control circuit 300 that performs control based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 200 will be described.

[11-5-1. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 368, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 368 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the ninth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 368, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S9500). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9510.

Note that the initialization process (S9500) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S9510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing for inputting data. In this data input process, both the read process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are performed.

In the reading process of the command input port 308, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. FIG. Further, when the operation information is input from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the input operation information is valid or invalid and is discarded. , the valid time for validating the input operation information, and the invalid period for invalidating the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are finished, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9520.

In S9520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S9510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9530.

In this command analysis process, when the read command is the winning command of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 301 stores the "sub-side first special symbol reserved number counter" of the work RAM 303 as the winning command of the first special symbol. The reserved number corresponding to the winning command of the second special symbol is set, and when it is the winning command of the second special symbol, the number of reserved corresponding to the winning command of the second special symbol is set in the "sub-side second special symbol reserved number counter" of the work RAM 303. - 特許庁Also, if the read command is a game state designation command, the game state information corresponding to the game state designation command is set in the "sub-side game state area" of the work RAM 303 .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the read command is the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 first sets and holds (ON) the BONUS flag in the "BONUS state flag area" of the work RAM 303. do. Subsequently, in order to count the number of consecutive times of the small winning game state and the big winning game state in the BONUS state described later, 1 is added to the "consecutive number counter" of the work RAM 303 . In addition, the "BONUS flag" and "consecutive number counter" are set when the last big hit game state in the BONUS state ends (when the read command is a big hit end display command, the sub-side second special symbol reserved number counter = 0), the stored information is cleared (OFF or set to 0).

In addition, when the read command is the first big winning mouth winning command or the second big winning mouth winning command, the sub CPU 301 counts and displays the number of game balls in the acquired game ball number image, which will be described later. , add payout information (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the first big winning mouth win command or the second big winning mouth winning command to the "acquired game ball number counter" of the work RAM 303 . In addition, the "acquired game ball number counter" indicates that the game state information in the "sub-side game state area" by the sub CPU 301 is the normal game state, and the "sub-side second special symbol reserved number counter" = 0. is cleared when it is determined that

At S9530, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, a production pattern is determined, and based on the determined production pattern, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) for operating various production devices are executed. , lamp requests, accessory requests, production button drive requests, etc.). The details of this rendering mode determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9540.

In S9540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 . The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9550.

In S9550, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 . The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9560.

In S9560, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 . Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9570.

At S9570, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a role product request to the role product control circuit 307 . Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9580.

At S9580, the sub CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310 . The button control circuit 310 changes the operation mode of the effect button 54 based on a message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 and performs drive control such as vibrating the effect button 54 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[11-5-2. Production Mode Determination Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 369, details of the effect mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 368) will be described. FIG. 369 is a flow chart showing an example of effect mode determination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9531, the sub CPU 301 executes effect pattern determination processing for determining the effect pattern. In this effect pattern determination process, based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect such as characters displayed on the display device 7, the mode of the sound effect output from the speaker 32, the effect button 54, etc. to determine the production pattern that defines the operation mode of . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9532.

Here, as described above, the ``effect pattern'' refers to information that defines the display effects of characters and the like, the voice effects, the operation mode of the effect button 54, and the like. Of these, during variable display of special symbols or normal symbols, predetermined decorative symbols are variably displayed (variable display and stop display) in at least the display device 7 in a predetermined variable manner, and the stationary displayed decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped manner. , information of "fluctuation effect" that informs of a predetermined lottery result. Further, the predetermined decorative symbols include a "first decorative symbol (main symbol)" which is displayed large and easy for the player to recognize, and a "second decorative symbol (secondary symbol)" which is displayed small and difficult for the player to recognize. Pattern)” is provided. Depending on the type of design effect pattern, information for displaying a predetermined character is also included in addition to variable display of a predetermined decorative design.

In addition, the "small hit effect pattern" refers to the information of the effect performed in the small win game state among the effect patterns, and the "big hit effect pattern" is the effect pattern in the big win game state. Refers to information about the performance to be performed. In addition to the pattern effect pattern, the small win effect pattern, and the big win effect pattern, various effect patterns are provided, and the effects of the various effect patterns can be superimposed and executed.

(An example of production pattern determination processing at the time of receiving the variation pattern command of the first special symbol)
In this embodiment, in the production pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is the first special symbol variation pattern command, when the game is normal, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 of FIG. A ``first pattern performance pattern'' for variably displaying a first decorative pattern (main pattern) and a second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) is determined so that the performance content shown in the "remark column" is executed. Further, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is the first special symbol variation pattern command, when the time-saving gaming state is set, the effects shown in the "remark column" of the special symbol variation pattern table J1 of FIG. A ``second pattern performance pattern'' for variably displaying a second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) without displaying a first decorative pattern (main pattern) is determined so as to be executed.

In this way, when the time-saving game state is set, the second decorative pattern (secondary pattern) is variably displayed without displaying the first decorative pattern (main pattern) as a variable effect related to the lottery result of the first special pattern. Since the "second symbol effect pattern" is determined, the effect by the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not performed, and the variable effect related to the lottery result of the first special symbol is the sixth symbol effect pattern described later. It is possible to prevent hindrance to the fluctuation performance regarding the lottery result of the normal symbol.

(An example of production pattern determination processing at the time of receiving the variation pattern command of the second special symbol)
Also, in the production pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, when it corresponds to the "variation pattern of the first special symbol (0AH)", as shown in FIG. As described above, a BONUS entry effect for notifying entry into a BONUS state, which will be described later, is executed, and the second decorative pattern (secondary pattern) is variably displayed without displaying the first decorative pattern (main pattern). 3 pattern effect pattern” is determined. Further, when corresponding to the "variation pattern (1AH) of the second special symbol", as shown in FIG. A ``fourth pattern effect pattern'' for variably displaying the second decorative pattern (secondary pattern) is determined. In addition, although it is an extremely rare case (1/65536) in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern (00H) corresponding to a loss, the first decorative symbol (main symbol ) is not displayed, and the ``fifth pattern effect pattern'' for variably displaying the second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) is determined.

Thus, the third symbol performance pattern (BONUS rush performance) or the fourth symbol performance pattern (BONUS continuation performance) is determined as a variable performance when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, As shown in FIG. 372 to be described later, since the production related to the "small hit production pattern" and the "big hit production pattern" is executed, the variation production related to the lottery result of the second special symbol and the hit performed in the small winning game state The performance and the winning performance performed in the jackpot game state can be made to look like a series of winning performances (BONUS performance), and the amusement of the game can be further improved.

(An example of production pattern determination processing when receiving a normal pattern variation pattern command)
Further, in the production pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a variation pattern command of normal symbols, when the game state is normal, the production related to the normal symbols (the production of the first decorative symbols) is not executed. Although the effect pattern is not determined at the time of the time saving game state, based on the received normal symbol variation pattern command, the effect contents shown in the "remark column" of the normal symbol variation pattern table in Fig. 350 are executed. Thus, the "sixth symbol effect pattern" for variably displaying the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is determined.

In this way, in the normal game state, the variation performance regarding the normal symbols is not executed, but in the time-saving game state, the sixth symbol performance pattern is determined as the variation performance regarding the lottery result of the normal symbols, so the first pattern performance pattern is determined. The effect will be performed by the decorative pattern (main pattern).

Further, in the time-saving game state, the third symbol performance pattern or the fourth symbol performance pattern is determined as the variable performance when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, so that the normal symbols are related. Both the variable performance and the variable performance related to the lottery result of the second special symbol can be executed, and the amusement of the game in the time-saving game state can be further improved.

(An example of production pattern determination processing when receiving a small hit start display command)
Further, in the effect pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a small hit start display command, the "consecutive number counter" of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the first BONUS effect is executed. ” is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, when the "consecutive number counter" = 1 (when the first small hit game state from the BONUS state), the "first BONUS effect (first time )” to be executed is determined, and when the “consecutive number counter” is equal to or greater than 2 (in the second or later small winning game state from the BONUS state), FIG. "Second small hit effect pattern" for executing "first BONUS effect (second and subsequent times)" as shown in (f) is determined.

Further, as described above, in the small winning game state, when passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 9156 is detected, the V passage command is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the sub-control circuit 300 . In the effect pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is the V passing command, the sub CPU 301 determines the "V passing notification effect pattern" for executing the V passing notification effect. In this effect pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a V passing command, the "consecutive number counter" of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and when the "consecutive number counter"=1 (from the BONUS state) At the time of the small winning game state for the first time), the ``V passing notification effect pattern'' is determined, and when the ``consecutive number counter'' = 2 or more (when the second or later small winning game state from the BONUS state) , "V passing notification effect pattern" is not determined.

(An example of production pattern determination processing at the time of receiving the jackpot start display command)
Further, in the effect pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a big hit start display command, the "consecutive number counter" of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the "jackpot effect pattern" for executing the second BONUS effect is determined. It is determined. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the "consecutive number counter" = 1 (from the BONUS state to the first big hit game state), the "second BONUS "Effect (at start)" and "Second BONUS effect (during opening)" are determined, and when "consecutive number counter" = 2 or more (the second and subsequent jackpots from the BONUS state In the gaming state), a "second big win effect pattern" in which a "second BONUS effect (during opening)" as shown in FIG. 372(d) to be described later is executed is determined.

In S9532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S9531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9533.

In S<b>9533 , the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S9532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9534.

In S9534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S9531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9535.

In S9535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S9531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9536.

In S9536, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product request generation process. In this process, a role item request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S9531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S9537.

At S9537, the sub CPU 301 executes a process of generating an effect button drive request. In this process, an effect button drive request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S9531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect mode determination process, and shifts the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 368).

[11-6. Game state transition diagram]
A game state to be shifted by various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be described with reference to a game state transition diagram. FIG. 370 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In the ninth pachinko game machine, as game states, there are provided a normal game state mainly having a game property related to the lottery of the first special symbols and a time-saving game state mainly having a game property related to the lottery of the normal symbols. .

When the normal game state is distinguished in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol is called "first normal game state", and the second special symbol. The normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the starting information is called "second normal game state".

As described above, the "first normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol, and left-handed hitting is the regular game mode. It is a normal game state. Therefore, in the first normal game state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 9120, but it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.例文帳に追加

"Second normal game state" is a normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, and in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol variable display frequency is the final. When it is the number of times of time saving, the second start port 9140 is opened based on the lottery of the normal symbols, and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed by the game ball entering the second start port 9140. is. Here, in the second normal game state, left-handed hitting is defined as a regular game mode, but when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the withdrawal is shifted to the time-saving game state again. Since the ratio is extremely high, hitting to the right may be defined as a regular game mode. As described above, the second normal game state may define left-handed hitting or right-handed hitting. Therefore, in the second normal game state, the display device 7 informs the user that the normal game mode is played. is not performed, and when the second normal game state shifts to the first normal game state, it is desirable to cause the display device 7 to notify left-handed as a regular game mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the starting information of the second special symbol is also referred to as "BONUS state", and the "BONUS state" is the same as the above-mentioned "second 2 normal game state", a state including a time-saving game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, a big win game state, and a small win game state. .

As described above, the time-saving gaming state is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving transition condition (time-saving occurrence condition). It is provided with a "B time-saving game state" in which the number of times of variable display of special symbols shifts after reaching the ceiling value without using as a trigger. In addition, "A time-saving gaming state" is a time-saving gaming state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving end condition and the operation mode during the time-saving gaming state (the operation pattern of the normal electric shutter 9147), and the "first time-saving gaming state". , a ``second time-saving game state'' in which the transition to the next big win game state is easier than the first time-saving game state, and a ``third time-saving game state'' in which the transition to the next big win game state is substantially guaranteed. consists of either

In the "first time-saving game state", the state flag = 1 and the general electric operation pattern = 01 are set, and the first time-saving number of times as the time-saving number of times of the A time-saving end conditions (variable display times of normal symbols = 100 times) It is a time-saving game state that has been set, and is a time-saving game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode. In the first time-saving game state, the normal electric operation pattern = 01 is set, so that the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol determination process, and the second start port open pattern determination process shown in FIG. The first long opening probability that the long opening pattern is executed based on the symbol lottery, etc." is set to about 1/135.6 (see FIG. 349). As described above, even if the short open pattern is executed, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the second starting port 9140, and even if it is determined that the normal symbol hit , is configured to be treated as a loss.

In the "second time-saving game state", the state flag = 1 and the normal electric operation pattern = 02 are set, and the second time-saving number of times as the time-saving number of times of the A time-saving end conditions (variable display number of normal symbols = 120 times) It is a time-saving game state that has been set, and is a time-saving game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode. In the second time-saving game state, the normal electric operation pattern=02 is set, so that the second long opening probability based on the drawing of normal symbols is set to about 1/68.5. In addition, in the second time saving game state, a second long opening probability higher than the first long opening probability of the first time saving game state is set, and the second time saving game state is set to have a second time saving higher than the first time saving number of times in the first time saving game state. Since the number of times is set, it is a time-saving game state in which it is easier to shift to the next jackpot game state than in the first time-saving game state.

In the "3rd time-saving game state", the state flag = 1 and the general electric operation pattern = 02 are set, and the 3rd time-saving number of times (variable display times of normal symbols = 10000 times) is set as the time-saving number of A time-saving end conditions. It is a time-saving game state that has been set, and is a time-saving game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode. In the third time-saving game state, the normal electric operation pattern=02 is set, so that the second long opening probability based on the drawing of normal symbols is set to about 1/68.5. In the third time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving number of times (normal symbol variable display number = 10000 times) is set as the time-saving number of times to substantially guarantee the transition to the next big hit gaming state. This is a time-saving game state in which the transition to the jackpot game state is substantially guaranteed.

In the "B time-saving game state", the state flag = 2 and the general electric operation pattern = 02 are set, and the 4th time-saving number of times (variable display times of normal symbols = 600 times) is set as the time-saving number of B time-saving end conditions. It is a time-saving game state in which hitting to the right is a regular game mode. In the B time-saving game state, the normal electric operation pattern=02 is set, so that the second long opening probability based on the drawing of normal symbols is set to about 1/68.5.

(Transition control of the first normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the first normal game state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 9120, "big hit" or "losing" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (Fig. 339), when a "big hit" is determined, the state shifts to a big win game state. Then, after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the starting information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state, the "first time-saving game state" at a selection rate of 90% according to the selected symbol of the special symbol. , and at a selection rate of 10%, it will shift to the "second time-saving game state" (see FIG. 343).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches 600 times, the normal game state is shifted to the "B time saving game state".

(Transition control of the first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation area 9126 and wins the first long opening probability (about 1/135.6) based on the normal pattern lottery etc., the second start port 9140 is opened, and the game ball can enter the second start port 9140.

When the game ball enters the second start port 9140, the start information of the second special symbol is acquired, and the acquired start information of the second special symbol is the special symbol determination storage area (0), the second special symbol start It is stored in FIFO format in either the storage area (1) or the second special symbol start storage area (2). That is, when the game ball enters the second start port 9140, it is possible to store the start information of the second special symbol for a maximum of three times for the variation and the reserved number of the second special symbol (two). It has become. Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the "first time-saving game state" is shifted to the "BONUS state".

Also, in the first time-saving gaming state, when the variable display of the normal symbol of the first time-saving number of times is completed without the game ball entering the second start port 9140, from the "first time-saving gaming state" to the "first It will shift to "normal game state".

(Transition control of the second time-saving game state)
In the second time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation area 9126 and wins the second long opening probability (about 1/68.5) based on the normal pattern lottery etc., the second start port 9140 is opened, and the game ball can enter the second start port 9140.

When the game ball enters the second start port 9140, similarly to the first time-saving gaming state, the starting information of the second special symbol for a maximum of three times is stored, and from the "second time-saving gaming state" to the "BONUS state". will be migrated.

Also, in the second time-saving gaming state, when the variable display of the normal pattern of the second number of time-savings ends without the game ball entering the second start port 9140, from the "second time-saving gaming state" to the "first It will shift to "normal game state".

(Transition control of third time-saving game state)
In the third time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation area 9126 and wins the second long opening probability (about 1/68.5) based on the normal pattern lottery etc., the second start port 9140 is opened, and the game ball can enter the second start port 9140.

When the game ball enters the second start port 9140, as in the first time-saving gaming state, the starting information of the second special symbol for a maximum of three times is stored, and from the "third time-saving gaming state" to the "BONUS state". will be migrated.

In addition, in the third time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving number of times (variable display times of normal symbols = 10000 times) is the number of times that the transition to the next big hit gaming state is substantially guaranteed. It does not substantially shift from the time-saving game state to the first normal game state.

(Transition control of B time-saving gaming state)
In the B time-saving gaming state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation area 9126 and wins the second long opening probability (about 1/68.5) based on the normal pattern lottery etc., the second start port 9140 It is opened, and the game ball can enter the second start port 9140 .

When the game ball enters the second start port 9140, as in the first time-saving game state, the start information of the second special symbol for up to three times is stored, and the "B time-saving game state" shifts to the "BONUS state". will do.

In addition, even in the B time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving number of times (normal symbol variable display count = 600 times) is the number of times that is substantially guaranteed to shift to the next big hit game state, and "B time-saving game state” to the “first normal game state”.

(Transition control of BONUS state)
In the BONUS state, first, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed based on the starting information for the second special symbol.

Here, in the lottery for the second special symbol, although the big hit probability is set to about 1/231.6, the small hit probability is set to about 1/1.004, and the total probability is 65535/65536. A big hit or a small hit is determined with a probability of (see FIG. 339). In this embodiment, when the small winning game state is performed by winning the small winning, the game ball entering the second big winning opening 9151 can almost pass through the V winning opening 9156. (See FIGS. 337 and 342), when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 9156, the game shifts to the jackpot game state from the second route.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting port 9140, it is configured to be able to shift to the big hit game state at about 1/1 (65535/65536), and the second special The game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the starting information of the symbol is made to correspond to the BONUS state like the big win game state and the small win game state.

In the BONUS state, after the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, a big win game state from the first route triggered by the big win or a big win game state from the second route triggered by the small win is executed. will be In addition, in the BONUS state, since the starting information of the second special symbols for a maximum of 3 times is stored, a maximum of 3 times of the jackpot game state can be executed continuously.

Then, in the BONUS state, when all the jackpot game states triggered by the starting information of the second special symbol are finished, the selection rate of 90% according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol "second time saving game state ”, and shifts to the “third time-saving game state” at a selection rate of 10% (see FIG. 343).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the normal game state is selected, the first game feature is aimed at the big hit game state by drawing the first special symbol. Since it is composed of the second game property aiming for the long opening of 9140, it not only mixes the so-called type 1 pachinko machine and the so-called type 2 pachinko game machine, but also provides unprecedented game properties. It is possible to create and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the long opening probability differs depending on the general electric operation pattern in the time saving game state, it is possible to enjoy a plurality of time saving game states with different long opening probability, and to further improve the interest of the game. can be done.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed (the game ball enters the second starting port 9140), so that it is possible to shift to the big hit game state substantially (about 1/1). Since it is configured to be, when it is in the time-saving gaming state, the second game property aiming for the long opening of the second start port 9140 by lottery of normal symbols, and the result of transition to a plurality of time-saving gaming states , it is possible to give more interest and improve the amusement of the game.

[11-7. Display contents of production]
Display contents of effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 will be described using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7 .

(Basic configuration of display image)
First, with reference to FIG. 371, the basic configuration of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described. FIG. 371 is an example of an explanatory diagram of a basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 in the ninth pachinko game machine. FIG. 371(a) shows the basic configuration of the display image in the first normal game state, and FIG. 371(b) shows the basic configuration of the display image in the time-saving game state excluding the BONUS state.

(Basic Configuration of Display Image in First Normal Game State)
As shown in FIG. 371(a), the basic configuration of the display image in the first normal game state is that the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 7. A pattern 9071L, a middle pattern 9071C, and a right pattern 9071R are configured to be displayable.

In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-design 9072 as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the first special design, and a second design as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design. A sub-symbol 9073 and a third sub-symbol 9075 as a sub-symbol of a decorative design corresponding to a normal symbol are configured to be displayed in a small size.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the first normal game state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols of the left symbol 9071L, the middle symbol 9071C and the right symbol 9071R, the Variable display of the 1 sub-symbol 9072 is also performed. Also, when the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the first normal game state, only the third sub-symbol 9075 is variably displayed, and the main symbols of the decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbols are not displayed. become. When the second special symbol is variably displayed, only the second sub-symbol 9073 is variably displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, which will be described later in the presentation of the BONUS state, is performed. will not be displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbols can be displayed, and according to the reserved number of the first special symbols, the first special symbol start storage area ( 1) 1st reserved image 9074a indicating that starting information is stored in 1), 2nd reserved image 9074b indicating that starting information is stored in 1st special design start storage area (2), 1st special design A third reserved image 9074c indicating that the starting information is stored in the starting storage area (3), and a fourth reserved image 9074d indicating that the starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4). configured to be visible. In addition, corresponding to the pending image, the pending image 9075 indicating that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner can be displayed. In this embodiment, the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbols is not displayed in the first normal game state, but the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbols can be displayed. good too.

(Basic configuration of display image in time-saving gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 371(b), the basic configuration of the display image in the time-saving gaming state excluding the BONUS state is that the left symbol as the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is placed on the central side of the display area of the display device 7. 9076L, middle pattern 9076C and right pattern 9076R are configured to be displayable.

In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, as in the first normal game state, a first sub-symbol 9072 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second sub-symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. The symbol 9073 and the third sub-symbol 9075 corresponding to the normal symbol are configured to be small and displayable.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the time-saving gaming state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols of the left symbol 9076L, the middle symbol 9076C and the right symbol 9076R, the third sub symbol 9075 is displayed. A variable display is also performed. Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the time-saving gaming state, the variable display of only the first sub-symbol 9072 is performed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. It will not be done.

A reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of normal symbols can be displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and start information is stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) according to the reserved number of normal symbols. 1st reserved image 9077a indicating that it is stored, 2nd reserved image 9077b indicating that the start information is stored in the normal pattern start storage area (2), start information is normally in the design start storage area (3) A third reserved image 9077c indicating that the information is stored and a fourth reserved image 9077d that indicates that the start information is stored in the normal symbol start storage area (4) are configured to be displayable. Further, corresponding to the reserved image, the reserved image 9078 indicating that the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed can be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not displayed in the time saving game state, but the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be displayable.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 7, a right-handed instruction image 9079 for instructing right-handed as a regular game mode can be displayed.

On the upper left of the display area of the display device 7, a time saving frequency image 9080 indicating the remaining number of time saving times in the time saving end condition is configured to be displayable. In addition, in the third time-saving game state, when the third time-saving number of times (variable display times of normal symbols = 10000 times) is set, as the time-saving number of times image 9080, it is guaranteed to shift to the next big hit game state. The infinity symbol "∞" will be displayed to indicate that

Thus, in the first normal game state, the main pattern and the reserved image of the decorative symbols are the first special symbols so as to make it easy to recognize the first game feature aiming at the big win game state by lottery of the first special symbols. , and in the time-saving gaming state, the main pattern and the reserved image of the decorative pattern are normal patterns so that the second game property aiming for the long opening of the second start port 9140 is easily recognized by the lottery of the normal patterns. corresponds to Then, in the time-saving game state, the variation performance of the main symbols (the left symbol 9076L, the middle symbol 9076C and the right symbol 9076R) of the decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbols is performed. That is, the first decorative pattern (main pattern) becomes a pattern corresponding to the first special pattern in the normal game state, and is replaced with a pattern corresponding to the normal pattern in the time-saving game state.

(Direction of BONUS state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 372, BONUS state including the game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, the big win game state, and the small win game state I will explain the production of.

In addition, in the effect of the BONUS state, the first sub-symbol 9072, the second sub-symbol 9073, the third sub-symbol 9075 and the right-handed instruction image 9079 described in FIG. Since there is a possibility that the In addition, the first sub-symbol 9072, the second sub-symbol 9073 and the third sub-symbol 9075 are the game state during the control period of the second special symbol (second normal game state and time-saving game state), it is configured to be always displayable, but it is configured to be non-display in the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

FIG. 372(a) shows that when the game ball enters the second starting port 9140 and the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the second special symbol holding number = 0, "the first special symbol This is an example of the display image of the "BONUS rush effect" that can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time.

As shown in FIG. 372(a), in the "BONUS entry effect", as an example, a right-handed instruction image 9079 and a congratulatory image for notifying entry into the BONUS state are displayed in the display area. ing. This "BONUS rush effect" is a combination of "first variable display time (eg, 10 seconds)" and "symbol determination time (eg, 540 ms)" associated with the first special symbol variation pattern (0AH). It is executable over In addition, in the "BONUS entry effect", only the second sub-design 9073 as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design is variably displayed, and the main design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design is configured not to be displayed.

FIG. 372(b) is an example of the display image of "first BONUS effect (first time)" which is performed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the BONUS state shifts to the first small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 372(b), in the "first BONUS effect (first time)", as an example, a right-handed instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and a right-handed instruction are displayed in the display area. Then, a V instruction image such as "Aim for V!" for instructing the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 9156 in the second big winning opening 9151 is displayed. In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the "first BONUS effect (first time)", when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156, a V passage notification effect is also executed to notify that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 9156. It is possible.

Figure 372 (c), after the game ball passes through the V winning a prize mouth 9156 in the first small winning game state, at the start of the first big winning game state (opening time of the first big winning game state) "Second BONUS It is an example of the display image of "Production (at start)".

As shown in FIG. 372(c), in the "second BONUS effect (at the start)", as an example, a right-handed instruction image 9079 is displayed in the display area, and "4500 BONUS" regarding the number of game balls that the player can obtain in the BONUS state. !!” is displayed.

As described above, when the BONUS state is entered, a maximum of three jackpot game states can be continuously executed. The number of game balls (4500 = 1500 x 3 times) that the player can obtain is displayed.

The image of the number of game balls to be obtained displayed in this manner is constructed so as to be able to display as an image the number of balls to be obtained in all combinations corresponding to the number of game balls that the player can obtain in the jackpot game state for up to three times. ing. For example, in the above-described FIG. 343, if the second special symbol has a 10R hit that can be obtained 1500 shots and a 4R hit that can be obtained 600 shots, an image corresponding to 4500 shots for 3 times per 10R. , an image corresponding to 3600 shots of 2 shots per 10R and 1 shot per 4R, an image corresponding to 2700 shots of 1 shot per 10R and 2 shots of 4R, and an image corresponding to 1800 shots of 3 shots per 4R. , can be displayed respectively.

In addition, if the player is unable to win the game ball up to three times into the second starting port 9140 due to a cause such as ball clogging, an image corresponding to one hit (corresponding to 1500 shots) image, an image corresponding to 600 shots), or an image corresponding to two hits (an image corresponding to 3000 shots, an image corresponding to 2100 shots, an image corresponding to 1200 shots) may be displayed. . In this case, there is a possibility that the player loses interest because the maximum jackpot is not awarded. It is possible to achieve the effect of becoming

In the present embodiment, the game ball number image to be obtained is configured to be displayed in the "second BONUS effect (at the start)" at the start of the first big win game state. It may be configured to be displayed in the “first BONUS effect (first time)” after the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 9156 at a certain time.

FIG. 372(d) is an example of a display image of "second BONUS effect (during opening)" performed in the jackpot game state after the opening time of the first jackpot game state has passed (during the round of the jackpot game state). .

As shown in FIG. 372(d), in the "second BONUS effect (during opening)", as an example, a right-handed instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and a first large player are displayed in the display area. It is configured to display an acquired game ball number image that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player by entering the game balls into the winning opening 9131 and the second big winning opening 9151 .

In this embodiment, the acquired game ball number image is the number of game balls acquired by the player in the small winning game state and the big winning game state. is configured to display the total number of game balls won by the player due to the entry of the ball, but the number of game balls won by the player in the jackpot game state is the number of game balls entered into the first big prize winning port 9131. It may be configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player by hitting the ball. Furthermore, the acquired game ball number image displays the total number of game balls acquired by the player by entering the first big winning hole 9131, the second big winning hole 9151 and the general winning hole 122. It may be configured to

FIG. 372(e) shows that after the jackpot game state is completed, when the start condition of the second special symbol is established, the number of reserved second special symbols > 0 (that is, the second special symbol start storage area (1 ) or when the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (2)), "the second special symbol variation pattern (1AH)" is determined, and the second and subsequent It is an example of the display image of "BONUS continuation effect" which can be performed during the variable display of 2 special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 372(e), in the "BONUS continuation effect", as an example, a right-handed instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and an acquired game ball number image are displayed in the display area. is displayed, and an effect is performed such that the BONUS effect performed in the big win game state or the small win game state continues. This "BONUS continuation effect" consists of "second variable display time (eg, 1 second)" and "symbol determination time (eg, 540 ms)" associated with the second special symbol variation pattern (1AH). It is executable over In addition, in the "BONUS continuation effect", only the second sub-design 9073 as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design is displayed variably, and the main design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design is configured not to be displayed.

FIG. 372(f) is an example of a display image of "first BONUS effect (second and subsequent times)" which is performed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the transition to the small winning game state of the second and subsequent times is performed. .

As shown in FIG. 372(f), in the "first BONUS effect (second and subsequent times)", as an example, a right-handed instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a V instruction image, and an acquired game are displayed in the display area. It is configured to display a ball count image. Also, as described above, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 9156 when FIG. 372(b) is displayed, the V passage notification effect can be executed, but when FIG. 372(f) is displayed Even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 9156, it is desirable not to execute the V passage notification effect. When the V-passing notification performance is not executed, a plurality of big winning game states can be seamlessly shown to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that while FIG. 372(f) may be displayed, the V-passing notification effect may be executed. It is desirable to execute the V-passing notification effect in an execution time shorter than the execution time of the V-passing notification effect executed when 372(b) is displayed.

After the game ball passes through the V winning opening 9156 in the small winning game state after the second time, the state shifts to the big winning game state, but at the start of the big winning game state after the second time, as shown in FIG. 372(d), the "second BONUS effect (during opening)" as shown in FIG. .

In this way, as the performance of the BONUS state, the "BONUS rush performance" or the "BONUS continuation performance" is executed as the variable performance during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the "first BONUS performance" is executed in the small winning game state. , and the "second BONUS effect" is executed in the jackpot game state. Since the effects executed in the "BONUS rush effect", "first BONUS effect", "second BONUS effect" and "BONUS continuation effect" are associated with each other, a group It is possible to execute a well-coordinated performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, during the variable display of the second special symbol from the second time onward, in the small winning game state and the big winning game state, without performing special effects such as those shown in FIGS. 372 (a) to (c), Since an effect similar to the "second BONUS effect (during opening)" in the big win game state as shown in d) is performed, a plurality of big win game states can be shown seamlessly (like a group of big win game states). It is possible to improve the interest of the game more.

Also, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time, in the small winning game state and the big winning game state, special effects such as those shown in FIGS. can be notified in advance, and the number of game balls that the player can obtain in the BONUS state can be notified in advance, thereby increasing the joy of the player and improving the amusement of the game.

<Modification of the ninth pachinko machine>
Incidentally, the technique described in the ninth embodiment of the pachinko game machine may be applied to the slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, various effects executed in the ninth pachinko game machine may be replaced with effects by display devices, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state and third time-saving game state) is a replay time (RT state) with an improved replay probability of replay , an assist time (AT state) in which a predetermined minor win or operation of the stop button is notified, or an assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and the assist time are simultaneously controlled. In addition, a big win or a small win means winning a specific role, stopping display of a combination of specific symbols (winning a combination of specific symbols), winning a rush win in RT state, or AT state. It may be replaced with either winning the rush election in the ART state or winning the rush election in the ART state.

(others)
The above-mentioned ninth pachinko game machine can apply each other's technique between each embodiment including a modification. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Also, the effects described in the ninth pachinko game machine are merely a list of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the ninth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancies in its game characteristics and control.

Techniques related to the present invention will be added below.
<Appendix: Fourth pachinko machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game ball enters a starting hole, a special pattern is variably displayed on a pattern display device, and the jackpot game state is controlled on the condition that the display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode ( A so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) or a movable member of a variable prize winning device (large prize winning port) is changed from a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize, based on the ball entering the game machine into the starting port. Also known is a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game state on the condition that a game ball that has entered a variable winning device enters a specific area provided in the variable winning device (so-called two-type gaming machines). ).

In addition to the big winning opening and the starting opening, the game area is provided with a passing gate for activating normal symbols, and when a game ball passes through the passing gate, a lottery for normal symbols is performed. When the lottery for this normal pattern is won, a movable member (so-called electric tulip) provided at a specific starting port is opened.
Most of the game machines equipped with such movable members have a time-saving game state in which the movable members are easy to open per unit time and a non-time-saving game state in which the movable members are difficult to open per unit time, in order to increase the interest of the game. game state (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2009-273866

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, for the operation of the movable member provided at a specific start port, the game ball passed through the passage gate when it was in a time-saving game state, or the game ball passed through the passage gate when it was in a non-time-saving game state. The players were interested only in passing the game, and there were further points to be improved in order to improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a game board (e.g., game panels 3100 and 4100) formed with a game area in which game balls flow down, and a starting area ( For example, starting area detection means (for example, first starting opening switch 3121) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 3120), and the passage area provided in the game area (first passage gate 3126A) A passing area detection means (for example, a first passing gate switch 3127A) that detects the entry of a game ball, and a start variable that is provided in the game area and can be changed between an open state that is easy to accept a game ball and a closed state that is difficult to accept. On the condition that the game ball is detected by the winning device (for example, the normal electric accessory 3146) and the passing area detection means, open/close determination as to whether or not to change the start variable winning device from the closed state to the open state normal game determination means (for example, the main CPU 201), and the normal symbol display device is caused to start variable display of the normal symbols, and after a predetermined variable display time elapses, the normal symbol display device is controlled to stop and display the normal symbols. normal symbol display control means (for example, main CPU 201), opening mode determination means (for example, main CPU 201) for determining an opening mode for changing the starting variable winning device between the open state and the closed state, and the normal When a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol display control means, opening/closing control is performed to change the starting variable winning device between the open state and the closed state according to the opening mode determined by the opening mode determination means. Starting opening/closing control means (for example, main CPU 201) and a special condition triggered by the detection of the game ball by the starting area detection means (for example, C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed) By establishing, A game state control means (e.g., main CPU 201) that shifts to a predetermined game state (e.g., C time-saving game state) and controls the shifted game state,
The normal game determination means performs the open/close determination based on the game state when the variable display of normal symbols is started by the normal symbol display control means, and the opening mode determination means is the normal symbol display control means. It is characterized in that the opening mode can be determined based on the game state when a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the variable starting prize winning device detection means (for example, the second start opening switch 3141) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the variable starting prize winning device and the starting region detection means When a game ball is detected and a first transition condition (for example, when a stop display mode indicating a "jackpot" is derived) is established, a special game advantageous to the player is controlled. Triggered by the detection of the game ball by the first special game control means (for example, the main CPU 201) and the start variable winning device detection means, the second transition condition (for example, the game ball that entered the V attacker 3152 passes through the V winning opening) is established, a second special game control means (for example, main CPU 201) for controlling the special game,
It is desirable that the second transition condition is set to be more easily established than the first transition condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs special game determination for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player, on condition that the game ball is detected by the starting area detection means. Means (for example, main CPU 201) and special symbol display control for causing the special symbol display device to start variable display of the special symbols and, after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, to stop and display the special symbols on the special symbol display device. means (for example, main CPU 201),
When the game state control means determines that the special game is not controlled by the special game determination means, and the special symbol display control means stops and displays a specific special symbol (for example, a C time saving symbol, etc.). , Specific game state (for example, time-saving game state consisting of A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state and C time-saving game state), it is desirable to be able to control the specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, and the second variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols. A plurality of variable time tables (for example, special symbols shown in FIGS. 113 to 116) in which the selection rate of the variable display time of each special symbol is defined differently for the variable display time of the plurality of special symbols included at least Variation time table storage means (e.g., main ROM 202) that stores the variation pattern table), and predetermined change conditions (e.g., small hit symbol switching information, presence or absence of limiter function operation, etc.) The variation time table Variation time table determination means (for example, main CPU 201) for determining one variation time table from among a plurality of variation time tables stored in storage means, and special symbol variation time determination means for determining variable display time of special symbols. (For example, the main CPU 201),
It is desirable that the special symbol variation time determination means can determine the variable display time of the special symbols based on the variation time table determined by the variation time table determination means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes special symbol determination means (for example, main CPU 201) that determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device according to the determination result of the special game determination means. , and
The special symbol determining means, when it is determined by the special game determining means to control the first special game capable of imparting the first profit, selects a first special special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol ), and when it is determined to control a second special game capable of giving a second profit with a lower profit rate than the first profit, a second special special symbol (for example , "symbol opening winning" symbol corresponding to the small winning symbol switching information), and the variable time table determining means stops and displays the second special special symbol by the special symbol display control means. Then, when determining the variable display time of the special symbol from the next time onward, the plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means (for example, the normal game state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to (3) A special variation time table can be determined from among the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 and the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 114 (1) to (3). is desirable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes special game number counting means (for example, main CPU 201) for counting the number of times the special game is controlled under a specific condition (A time-saving game state). ,
The game state control means can shift to a normal game state that is disadvantageous to the player when a specific number of times (for example, limiter number) is counted by the special game number counting means, and the variable time table determination means can When a specific number of times is counted by the special game number counting means, the second variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the first variable display time of the special symbols until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is desirable to be able to determine a specific variation time table (for example, special symbol variation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 shown in FIG. 116) with a high execution rate.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state control means, when the special symbol display control means stop-displays the specific special symbol (for example, C time saving symbol), causes the specific game state ( For example, a time-saving game state consisting of A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state and C time-saving game state, mainly C time-saving game state), and after the first end condition is established (for example, one special symbol variable display), the control of the specific game state is finished, and when the first special special symbol (eg, jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the specific game state (eg , A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state and C time-saving game state, mainly A time-saving game state), and after the second end condition is established (for example, 100 times of special symbols It is desirable that the control of the specific game state is terminated in the variable display), and that the first termination condition and the second termination condition are different termination conditions.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game board is provided in the game area so that the starting area is in the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the passing area and is adjacent to the passing area. , It is desirable that the game ball that has passed through the passing area is configured to be able to pass through the starting area.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Appendix: The fifth pachinko machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, you can control the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the game machine enters the start hole, change the big win hole to an open state, and enter the big win hole. There is known a game machine that controls a jackpot game state on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (so-called two-type game machine). When controlled to such a big winning game state, the big winning hole is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds × 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy to enter the game ball, and the big winning hole is opened. A prize ball corresponding to the entering game ball is paid out, and the player can obtain the game ball.

In addition to the big winning opening and the starting opening, the game area is provided with a passing opening for activating normal symbols. When the lottery for this normal pattern is won, a movable member (so-called electric tulip) provided at a specific starting port is opened. Most of the game machines equipped with such movable members have a time-saving game state in which the movable members are easy to open per unit time and a non-time-saving game state in which the movable members are difficult to open per unit time, in order to increase the interest of the game. In the time-saving game state, the lottery opportunities for special symbols are increased (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2009-273866

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, even with a gaming machine having a time-saving gaming state as in Patent Document 1, if the chance that a player can acquire a gaming ball is only a lottery of special symbols, the gaming performance becomes monotonous. Therefore, there were further points to be improved in order to improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a game board (for example, a game panel 5100) formed with a game area in which game balls flow down and a normal area (for example, a , 1st passage 5126A, 2nd passage 5126B) for detecting the entry of game balls (for example, 1st passage switch 5127A, 2nd passage switch 5127B), and provided in the game area A first variable prize winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 5146) that can change between an open state that is easy to accept game balls and a closed state that is difficult to accept game balls, and an open state that is provided in the game area and is easy to accept game balls. A second variable winning device (for example, a special electric accessory 5133) that can be changed to an unacceptable closed state, and the first variable winning device is opened on the condition that a game ball is detected by the normal area detection means. Normal opening/closing determination means (for example, main CPU 201) for determining whether to change the state to open/close, and first variable winning device detection means (for example, starting 5141), a special benefit (for example, a small win) for opening the second variable winning device on the condition that a game ball is detected by the first variable winning device detection means, and the second variable winning device. Whether or not to give one of a plurality of types of benefits including a state benefit (e.g., time-saving win) that allows a predetermined game state to be controlled without opening the variable winning device. and a normal game state in which the first variable prize winning device is unlikely to be in the open state, or a specific game state in which the first variable prize winning device is likely to be in the open state (for example, A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that performs control to execute the time saving game state),
The profit grant determination means makes it easier to determine that either the special benefit or the state benefit is granted rather than determining that neither the special benefit nor the state benefit is granted, and the game state control. The means is characterized in that the specific game state can be executed when the profit grant determination means determines to grant the state profit.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit award determination means is a first special game (for example, a jackpot game state) and a second special game (for example, a small A winning game state) and a plurality of types of profits including the state profit are determined whether or not to give any profit, and the second special game is performed rather than the first special game. It is desirable that it is easy to determine by giving

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a predetermined number of determinations (for example, the number of time reductions per time) are made by the profit provision determination means in the specific game state, the normal game is started from the specific game state. The state can be executed, and when it is determined by the profit grant determination means that the state profit is to be granted before the predetermined number of determinations are performed, the specific game state is maintained until the predetermined number of determinations are performed again. It should be feasible.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state is a first specific game state that can be executed after the profit provision determination means determines that the special profit will be provided (for example, A short-time game state ), and a second specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) that can be executed after it is determined that the state profit is given by the profit giving determination means, and the first specific game state is the first It is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 2 specific game state (for example, the number of times of time reduction is large), and the game state control means, when the first specific game state is being executed, the profit grant determination means. When it is determined that the state profit is given by, it is desirable that the first specific game state can be continuously executed without executing the second specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes effect means for performing a predetermined effect (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32 and the LED group 46),
The effect means is capable of executing a common special effect (for example, a bonus time basic effect or a bonus time special effect) that can be executed over a plurality of the special benefits when the special benefit is given. and, when it is determined by the profit provision determination means that the state benefit is to be provided, a continuous special effect (for example, a rewind effect) suggesting that the special effect is to be continued further extended can be performed. is desirable.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Appendix: The sixth pachinko machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, you can control the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the game machine enters the start hole, change the big win hole to an open state, and enter the big win hole. There is known a game machine that controls a jackpot game state on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (so-called two-type game machine). When controlled to such a big winning game state, the big winning hole is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds × 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy to enter the game ball, and the big winning hole is opened. A prize ball (game ball) corresponding to the entered game ball can be paid out.

Then, based on the result of the lottery of special symbols, after performing the first reach production (long reach, SP reach) in order to improve the interest of the game, the second reach production (SPSP reach) is developed. ) is known (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2013-236850 A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, it has been desired to increase the interest in the game by increasing the relevance of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, etc., and further improving the effects such as the ready-to-win effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of identification symbols when a predetermined start condition is established,
A sub that controls the production execution means (for example, the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED group 46, the production accessory group 58, and the production button device 6310 that performs a predetermined production when the identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner. A control circuit 300 and a sub CPU 301),
The effect executing means performs a second effect (for example, The road to the final battle) can be executed, and by performing a third effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) different from the first effect, the second effect execution condition (for example, five character icons display) is established, a fourth effect (for example, the road to the decisive battle) can be executed, and the second effect and the fourth effect are the same type of specific effect (for example, 10 characters It is characterized by being able to execute a performance aiming to collect icons.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect executing means includes, as the first effect, a staged effect in which the effect progresses step by step (for example, cherry blossom accumulation notice) and predetermined development information (for example, Character icon) can be displayed (for example, a character image indicating the number of character icons, such as "1 person united", etc., or the icon display image lights up in the West army icon display part, etc. It is desirable that it is possible to perform it with a presentation such as being displayed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the third effect, the effect executing means temporarily causes the identification symbol that is being displayed to be displayed in a temporary stop manner, and causes the identification symbol that is displayed to be temporarily stopped and displayed. A second development capable of displaying predetermined development information (eg, a character icon) each time the pseudo-continuous effect in which the identification pattern is again variably displayed can be performed a plurality of times, and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed each time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. It is desirable to be able to perform display effects (for example, effects such as static display of one or more character icons, lighting display of icon display images in the West army icon display section, etc.).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect operation unit (for example, the first effect operation unit 6311 and the second effect operation unit 6312 of the effect button device 6310) that allows the player to operate the effect. and
The effect executing means provides, as the specific effect, an operation effect that causes the player to operate the effect operation unit a predetermined number of times (for example, a one-time operation effect in the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle). ), and it is preferable that the number of operations of the operation presentation in the second presentation is larger than the number of operations of the operation presentation in the fourth presentation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect execution means performs the second effect or the fourth effect so that the third effect execution condition (for example, less than 10 character icons) is satisfied. When established, a fifth production (for example, confrontation reach) can be executed, and as the specific production, predetermined development information is displayed, and a development progression production that progresses according to the displayed development information (for example, 10 character icons) can be performed, and as the fifth effect, a development effect related to the development information displayed in progress in the development progress effect (for example, support It is desirable to be able to perform an icon effect).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, starting information obtaining means (for example, main CPU 201) for obtaining starting information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; First special game determination means (eg, main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a first special game (eg, big win game) advantageous to the player, and acquired by the start information acquisition means Second special game determination means (for example, , the main CPU 201), the first special game is controlled on the condition that the first special game determination means determines that the first special game is to be controlled, and the second special game determination means determines the Special game control means (for example, main CPU201) for controlling the second special game on the condition that it is determined to control the second special game, the first special game determination means and the second special game When the predetermined starting condition is established in a state in which the determination means cannot make a determination, a reserve storage means (for example, a special Before the main RAM 203 having a symbol start storage area, the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means make a determination, based on the start information stored in the reservation storage means, the Predetermination means capable of determining whether or not to control the first special game or the second special game (for example, main CPU201), and based on the result of determination by the predetermination means, a predetermined Pre-production execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46, production accessory group 58, and production button device 6310 that can perform advance production (for example, lotus flower notice) over the production period A sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301) for
The preliminary effect executing means can continue the preliminary effect even if the second special game is controlled by the special game control means during the predetermined effect period. is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the starting information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201) acquires the starting information when the first starting condition or the second starting condition is established; Special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player based on the received start information, and the special game determination means cannot perform determination. When the first starting condition is satisfied in the state, a first reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol start memory When the main RAM 203 having areas (1) to (4) and the second starting condition are established in a state in which the special game determination means cannot make a determination, the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means Second reservation storage means (for example, main RAM 203 having second special symbol start storage areas (1) and (2)) capable of storing up to the second reservation number, and the special game determination means make a determination Before performing, based on the start information stored in the first reservation storage means or the second reservation storage means, prior determination means capable of determining whether to control the special game (for example, the main CPU 201) and preliminary production execution means (for example, the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED A sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the group 46, the performance accessory group 58 and the performance button device 6310, and a sub CPU 301),
The preliminary effect execution means, when a predetermined number (for example, two) of start information is stored in the second reservation storage means, is based on the start information stored in the first reservation storage means. It is desirable to be able to perform a pending pre-production.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect operation unit (for example, the first effect operation unit 6311 and the second effect operation unit 6312 of the effect button device 6310) that allows the player to operate the effect. and an operation detecting means (for example, the first to third operating part detection switches of the effect button device 6310) for detecting an operation to the effect operating part, and whether the operation detected by the operation detecting means is valid or invalid. and an operation determination means (for example, sub CPU 301) that determines whether
When there is a reception time during which a plurality of operations can be received on the performance operation unit, the operation determination means invalidates the operation on the performance operation unit during the start preparation period set as the opening time of the reception time. It is determined that the end preparation period set at the end time of the reception time is invalid for the operation to the effect operation unit, and the operation valid period set from the end of the start preparation period to the start of the end preparation period determines that the operation to the effect operation unit is valid, and can set an operation invalid period from when the operation detected in the operation valid period is determined to be valid until when the next operation is determined to be valid. , The operation invalid period is preferably set to a different period according to an effect based on an operation determined to be valid during the operation valid period.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect operation unit (for example, effect button device 6310) that allows the player to operate the effect and can execute a plurality of types of operation modes, and the effect operation unit Operation display effect execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46, effect accessory group 58 and effect button A sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the device 6310, a sub-CPU 301),
It is preferable that the operation display effect executing means performs the operation display effect in accordance with a change in the operation mode of the effect operation unit to be operated.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player can operate the effect, and the effect operation unit (for example, the effect button device 6310) capable of executing a plurality of types of operation modes, and the predetermined effect by the player. When a predetermined condition including the elapse of a predetermined period of time from the time the game is played is established, operation mode restoring means (for example, button control circuit 310, sub-control circuit 300 and sub CPU 301).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first starting condition is satisfied, the variable display of the first notification symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is started, and when a predetermined variation time elapses, the first First notification symbol display control means (for example, main CPU 201) for stopping and displaying notification symbols in a predetermined stop mode; is started, and when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, a second notification symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that stops and displays the second notification symbol in a predetermined stop mode, and the first notification symbol display control means specify When the first notification symbol is stop-displayed in the stop mode or the second notification symbol is stop-displayed in a specific stop mode by the second notification symbol display control means, the specific game state is controlled from the normal game state. Game state control means (e.g., main CPU 201) and external information output means (e.g., external terminal board 184) for outputting external information related to the game to a predetermined external device,
The variable display of the first notification symbol by the first notification symbol display control means and the variation display of the second notification symbol by the second notification symbol display control means can be executed in parallel, and the game state control means is , in the specific game state, when the stop display of the first information symbol and the second information symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, the normal game state is controlled from the specific game state, and the external information output means controls the game In addition to continuously outputting specific external information (for example, external information 3) during the output period from when the specific game state is controlled by the state control means until when the normal game state is controlled, the specific game When the variable display of the first notification symbol by the first notification symbol display control means is started when the state is controlled, a first additional period until the stop display of the first notification symbol is performed; When the variable display of the second notification symbols by the second notification symbol display control means is started while the specific game state is being controlled, a second addition is performed until the stop display of the second notification symbols is performed. It is desirable to continue to output the specific external information even for a period of time.

In addition, "development information" is information displayed when a game or effect progresses, such as character information indicating the content of the effect that will progress from now on, character icon information indicating a predetermined character, and It is information such as number information that displays the number of character icons, number information that displays the number of pseudo-runs that have already been performed, and time information until the performance that will progress from now on. It means

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Appendix: Seventh Pachinko Machine (Part 1)>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, a game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the game machine enters the start hole, changes the big win hole to an open state, and changes the big win hole 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines (so-called two-type pachinko gaming machines) that control a jackpot game state on the condition that a game ball hit enters a specific area. Furthermore, by inserting a predetermined number of medals or the like and operating the start lever, a plurality of reels are rotated, and a specific number of medals, a bonus game, or the like is played based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed. A game machine (a reel-type game machine called a so-called slot machine) is also known that provides a privilege.

In addition, in pachinko machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, the game state (low probability game state, high probability game state) in which the lottery probability of special symbols is different, and the rate of entering the starting hole is different. A plurality of game states such as a set game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) are provided (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2013-59682

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Further, it has been desired to improve the amusement of the game by performing an appropriate effect according to the game state of the game machine, the game situation, and the like.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a seventh pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of identification symbols,
Effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32 and the LED group 46, a sub-CPU 301), and the game state is shifted, and the shifted game state is controlled. A game state control means (for example, main CPU 201),
The game state control means is a special game state (for example, a big win game state or a small win game state) capable of imparting an advantageous privilege to the player when the execution result of the variable display of the identification symbols satisfies a special condition. state), and a normal game state (for example, a first normal game state) and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to control at least the game state with the game state (for example, the first to third time-saving game states and the second normal game state), and the production execution means performs a plurality of types of normal production in the normal game state One of the normal effects (for example, effects such as normal reach performed when hitting left) can be executed, and in the specific game state, one specific effect out of a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, hitting right) Boss battle production, Sengoku time production, battle production, etc.) can be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of types of normal effects may be a plurality of types of normal effects that can be executed by variably displaying the identification pattern that satisfies the special condition (for example, a window notice in the variation). , normal reach, etc.), and a plurality of types of pre-normal effects that can be executed in the variable display of the identification pattern before the variable display of the identification pattern that satisfies the special condition (for example, pre-reading effect in advance variation) , should be included at least.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of types of pre-normal effects include a first pre-normal effect (for example, a flash notice at the time of winning a prize at the start opening) and a second pre-normal effect ( For example, pending change notice, etc.) At least including, the production execution means, when a predetermined condition is established at the start time of the pre-normal production (for example, at the time of winning the starting port), the It is desirable that the second preliminary normal effect can be executed while the first preliminary normal effect is not executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect execution means sets a specific condition different from the predetermined condition (e.g., common prohibition condition 1, "second special symbol When there is a reserved number", etc.) is established, it is desirable that neither the first pre-normal effect nor the second pre-normal effect be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state (for example, the second time-saving game state) is a normal display state (for example, a male character stage or a female character stage) and the normal display state. It is a game state in which a special display state with a different display state (for example, a premier stage suggesting the number of stocks on hold) can be executed. production) and a second specific production (for example, production in a background display mode by a female character stage), wherein the production execution means performs the first specific production or the second specific production in the normal display state. However, it is desirable that neither the first specific effect nor the second specific effect be executed in the special display state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (for example, a second time-saving game state) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and the first specific game state. At least a second specific game state (for example, a second normal game state) different from the state, and the effect execution means executes any one of a plurality of types of effect modes that define the effect state. means and production mode selection means for selecting the production mode executed by the production mode execution means, and the production mode execution means selects at least the first specific production mode in the first specific game state. (for example, male character stage) and a second specific production mode (for example, female character stage) different from the first mode. The production mode selection means enables the player to select at least one of the first specific production mode and the second specific production mode when a predetermined selection condition is satisfied. is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined selection condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification symbols executed in the second specific game state, the special condition is satisfied. While it can be established in the special game state shifted based on, when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific game state, the special game shifted based on the special condition It is desirable that it cannot be established in the state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the performance mode execution means satisfies the special condition in the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the first specific game state, the special condition It is desirable that the effect mode being executed when is satisfied is continued in the first specific game state after the end of the special game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises starting information acquiring means for acquiring starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and whether or not the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means satisfies the special condition. and a special condition determining means for determining whether the identification pattern variable display has already been executed or when the identification pattern variable display cannot be executed, the starting information acquired by the starting information acquisition means is held for a predetermined number. and a pending storage means capable of storing up to
The effect execution means executes a special effect (for example, display of the number of held consecutive stocks by a V passing effect pattern) when starting information satisfying the special condition is stored in the holding storage means in the special game state. It is possible, and when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific game state, the special effect can be executed in the special game state shifted based on the special condition. On the other hand, when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the second specific game state, in the special game state shifted based on the special condition, the holding storage means It is desirable not to execute the special effect even when the start information satisfying the special condition is stored.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pattern in which the predetermined condition can be established can be established according to the execution state of the variable display of the identification symbols being executed at the start time of the preliminary normal effect. The first predetermined condition establishment pattern (for example, the first prohibition condition 3 "when the first start opening is won within 500 ms from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol", etc.) and the start of the pre-normal production A second predetermined condition establishment pattern that can be established when the variable display of the identification pattern is not executed at the time (for example, the first prohibition condition 4 "when the first start opening is won during the demonstration display"). and preferably include at least

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention stops the first identification symbol in a predetermined stop mode after variably displaying the first identification symbol for a predetermined variation time, as execution of variable display of the first identification symbol. A first identification pattern variable display control means to be displayed, and switching to one of the variation pattern tables from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables defining a plurality of variation patterns for determining at least the variation time of the first identification pattern. A variation pattern table switching means, and a variation pattern table switched by the variation pattern table switching means to determine a variation pattern, and a variation time determination for determining a variation time of the first identification pattern based on the determined variation pattern. comprising means and
As a pattern in which the specific condition can be satisfied, a first specific condition that can be satisfied when a predetermined normal effect is being executed with the variable display of the identification pattern that is being executed at the start time of the preliminary normal effect. Establishment patterns (for example, common prohibition conditions 4 and 5, such as "during display of all rotation effects, when the same prefetch effect is already being executed") and the variation pattern table switching means at the start time of the preliminary normal effect A second specific condition establishment pattern that can be established after a predetermined number of times or before the predetermined number of times that the variation pattern table is switched by (for example, common prohibition condition 3 "5 times before and after stage switching It is desirable to include "when within the fluctuation display").

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention stops the first identification symbol in a predetermined stop mode after variably displaying the first identification symbol for a predetermined variation time, as execution of variable display of the first identification symbol. First identification pattern variable display control means for displaying, and as execution of variable display of the second identification pattern, after the second identification pattern is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time, the second identification pattern is stopped in a predetermined stop mode. A second identification pattern variable display control means for displaying,
As a pattern in which the specific condition can be established, the second identification pattern is variably displayed by the second identification pattern variable display control means, and the second identification pattern is variably displayed by the second identification pattern variable display control means. A third specific condition establishment pattern that can be established when the should be included.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Appendix: Seventh Pachinko Machine (Part 2)>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, a game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the game machine enters the start hole, changes the big win hole to an open state, and changes the big win hole 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines (so-called two-type pachinko gaming machines) that control a jackpot game state on the condition that a game ball hit enters a specific area. Furthermore, by inserting a predetermined number of medals or the like and operating the start lever, a plurality of reels are rotated, and a specific number of medals, a bonus game, or the like is played based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed. A game machine (a reel-type game machine called a so-called slot machine) is also known that provides a privilege.

In addition, in pachinko machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, the game state (low probability game state, high probability game state) in which the lottery probability of special symbols is different, and the rate of entering the starting hole is different. A plurality of game states such as a set game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) are provided (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2013-59682

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Further, it has been desired to maintain and improve the game performance by setting an appropriate game state according to the game performance of the gaming machine and performing appropriate processing.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of maintaining and improving game playability.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention provides at least one of a first identification symbol (eg, first special symbol) and a second identification symbol (eg, second special symbol). Identification symbol variable display control means (for example, main CPU 201) for stopping and displaying the identification symbol in a predetermined stop mode after variably displaying it for a predetermined variation time, and effect execution means (for example, display A sub-control circuit 300 that controls the device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46, a sub-CPU 301), and a game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that shifts the game state and controls the shifted game state. prepared,
The game state control means can provide a privilege advantageous to the player when a stop state of at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol satisfies a special condition. A special game state (for example, a big win game state or a small win game state) can be shifted to, and a normal game state (for example, a normal game state) and the normal It has at least a game state of a specific game state (for example, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the game state, and the normal game state is a first normal game state (for example, a first normal game state). And, a second normal game state different from the first normal game state (for example, a second normal game state), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (for example, a first time-saving game state), a second specific game state different from the first specific game state (for example, a second time-saving game state), and a third specific game different from the first specific game state and the second specific game state state (for example, a third time-saving game state), and the game state control means, when the number of fluctuations in which the identification symbol is changed has reached a predetermined specific number of times, the normal It is characterized in that it is possible to shift from the game state to the third specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first normal game state is a game state in which mainly the first identification symbols are variably displayed, and the second normal game state is a game state in which the second identification symbols are mainly displayed. It is a game state in which the display is variably displayed, and at least one of the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state is a game state in which the second identification symbols are mainly variably displayed. It is desirable to have

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state control means is capable of shifting to the second normal game state after the end of the first specific game state or the second specific game state; It is desirable to be able to shift to the first normal game state after the end of the second normal game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the identification symbol variable display control means, in the first specific game state, the stop mode of the first identification symbol does not satisfy the special condition (for example, losing). When variably displaying the first identification pattern that becomes When the first identification symbol to be satisfied (for example, in the case of a big win or a small win) is changed and displayed, the first identification is performed by a second change time (for example, 89 seconds) longer than the first change time. When the symbol is variably displayed and the second identification symbol is variably displayed when the stop mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, in the case of a big hit or a small hit), the first variation time is set. In addition, it is desirable that the second identification pattern can be variably displayed for a variation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) equal to or less than the second variation time.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the identification symbol variable display control means, in the second specific game state, the stop mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, a big win or a small win). When the second identification pattern that becomes a hit is variably displayed, a third variable time (for example, 2 seconds) and a fourth variable time longer than the third variable time (for example, 5 seconds or 12 seconds), and it is possible to variably display the second identification symbol by any variation time including, and the stop mode of the first identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, a big hit or a small win When the first identification pattern is variably displayed, it is possible to variably display the first identification pattern by the third variation time, while the first identification is variably displayed by the fourth variation time. The design is not variably displayed, and the effect execution means variably displays the second identification design by the third variation time and when the first identification design is variably displayed by the fourth variation time. , the same production (for example, the production of the normal variation mode as the production of the decorative pattern) can be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the identification symbol variable display control means variably displays the second identification symbol when the number of times of variation reaches the specific number of times, the second identification symbol It is possible to variably display the second identification pattern by the same 5th variation time (for example, 15 seconds) regardless of the stop mode of, and the effect execution means determines that the number of times of variation reaches the specific number of times. When the second identification pattern is variably displayed, the stop mode of the second identification pattern satisfies the special condition when the second identification pattern is variably displayed according to the fifth variation time. It is desirable that different effects (for example, card effects or door opening effects) can be executed depending on when the special condition is not satisfied and when the special condition is not satisfied.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises starting information obtaining means for obtaining starting information when a predetermined starting condition is established, and determining the special condition based on the starting information obtained by the starting information obtaining means. special condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied; and starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means when the variable display of the identification pattern has already been executed or the variable display of the identification pattern cannot be executed. and a pending storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined pending number,
The production pattern determination means, in the second normal game state, provides different effects according to the number of start information items that satisfy the special condition stored in the reservation storage means and the result of determination by the special condition determination means. It is desirable to be able to determine the pattern.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect executing means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a door opening effect) for which the end time of the effect is not defined.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises starting information obtaining means for obtaining starting information when a predetermined starting condition is established, and determining the special condition based on the starting information obtained by the starting information obtaining means. special condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied; and starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means when the variable display of the identification pattern has already been executed or the variable display of the identification pattern cannot be executed. and a pending storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined pending number,
The effect executing means controls at least one of the first specific game state or the second specific game state by the game state control means, and controls the first specific game state or the second specific game state. When the first identification symbol is variably displayed when the end condition of the 2 specific game state is satisfied, and the starting information corresponding to the second identification symbol is stored in the holding storage means, the second normal When a first transition effect (for example, continuous battle entry effect) for shifting to a game state is executed, and the start information corresponding to the second identification symbol is not stored in the reservation storage means, the first transition effect is executed. It is desirable to execute the special effect (eg door opening effect) without executing the transition effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect execution means controls the third specific game state by the game state control means, and the end condition of the controlled third specific game state is When the first identification pattern is variably displayed when established, the special effect can be executed at the start of the variability display of the first identification pattern, and the special effect is performed along with the stop display of the first identification pattern. It is desirable to end execution of the rendition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises starting information obtaining means for obtaining starting information when a predetermined starting condition is established, and determining the special condition based on the starting information obtained by the starting information obtaining means. special condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied; and starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means when the variable display of the identification pattern has already been executed or the variable display of the identification pattern cannot be executed. and a pending storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined pending number,
When the special game state (for example, the small winning game state) is controlled and the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, when the V winning opening is not passed) , the special effect can be executed, and when the starting information corresponding to the second identification pattern is stored in the reservation storage means, the second normal game state is entered after the special effect is completed. 1 transition effect (for example, continuous battle entry effect) is executed, and if the start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is not stored in the holding storage means, the game enters the first normal game state after the end of the special effect. It is desirable to execute a first transition effect (for example, a stage change effect) for transitioning.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to maintain and improve playability.

<Appendix: The 8th pachinko machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, a game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the game machine enters the start hole, changes the big win hole to an open state, and changes the big win hole 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines (so-called two-type pachinko gaming machines) that control a jackpot game state on the condition that a game ball hit enters a specific area.

Furthermore, in pachinko machines, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game, there are also so-called 1 type 2 type pachinko machines, which are a mixture of the so-called 1 type pachinko machine and the so-called 2 type pachinko machine. known (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2009-178259 A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, it is desired not only to mix the so-called type 1 type pachinko game machine and the so-called type 2 type pachinko game machine, but also to create a game that has never existed before and to improve the interest of the game. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., an eighth pachinko gaming machine) includes main control means (e.g., main control circuit 200, main CPU 201) capable of executing control related to game progress. and an effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301) capable of executing control related to the effect,
The main control means includes: game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition; special condition determination means for determining whether or not the game execution result satisfies a special condition; A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied; and a game state in which the game is executed. Controllable gaming state control means, and game execution mode determination for determining a game execution mode (e.g., variation pattern of special symbols) which is executed based on the game execution means and for notifying the game execution result. comprising means and
The performance control means can execute any one of a plurality of performances by means of a predetermined performance execution means, and the game state control means can control a normal game state and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is characterized by being controllable to any game state including at least a specific game state (for example, time-saving game state).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game state includes a predetermined special game state (for example, a small winning game state) and a game value given to the player more than the predetermined special game state. A relatively high specific special game state (for example, a big hit game state), and the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (for example, a big hit game state of the selected symbol z1) and the above It is desirable to include a second specific special game state (for example, a jackpot game state of the selected symbol z2) different from the first specific special game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of times the special game state is executed (for example, the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of game values given to the player (for example, the cumulative number of jackpot balls) is Threshold determining means capable of determining whether or not a predetermined threshold has been reached, and limiting means ( For example, it is desirable to have a main control circuit 200 that controls the number of times limiter function or the ball output limiter function.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state control means can control a game disabled state (for example, a game disallowed state) in which the player is disabled from playing a game, and the special game state is executed. a threshold value determination means capable of determining whether or not the number of times (for example, the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of game values given to the player (for example, the cumulative number of jackpot balls) has reached a predetermined threshold; Limiting means (for example, a main control circuit 200 for controlling a number limiter function or a payout ball limiter function) capable of controlling the game state controlled by the game state control means to the game disabled state based on the determination of the threshold value determination means. and is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect control means does not perform notification related to the threshold value before the threshold value determination means determines that the predetermined threshold value has been reached. When it is determined by the determination means that the threshold has been reached, it is desirable that the predetermined effect executing means notifies (eg, executes an ending effect) that the predetermined threshold has been reached.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first table associated with the game execution mode (for example, a special symbol variation pattern table J1) and a second table different from the first table (for example, , a special symbol variation pattern table J2) and a table storage means (for example, main ROM 202) that stores a table containing at least
The game execution mode determination means can determine the execution mode including the game execution time as the game execution mode using any one of the tables stored in the table storage means, and the second table is It is preferable that the table is associated with an execution mode (for example, a special symbol variation pattern 10H) including the execution time of the game that is relatively shorter than that of the first table.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining threshold value (for example, the remaining number of times of the jackpot limiter count) until reaching the predetermined threshold value is a predetermined value, It is possible to determine the execution mode of the game using the first table, and when the remaining threshold value until reaching the predetermined threshold value is a specific value different from the predetermined value, the second table is used to determine the game execution mode. It is desirable to be able to determine how the game will run.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first specific special game state is executed, the threshold determination means sets a first threshold as the predetermined threshold (for example, a limiter count of 98). times) can be set, and when the second specific special game state is executed, a second threshold different from the first threshold as the predetermined threshold (for example, the limiter number of times is 100) It is desirable to be configurable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state control means controls that the predetermined special game state is set a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times a small win is won) when the specific game state is controlled. 1 time, 255 times, etc.), the game state can be controlled to the normal game state after the predetermined special game state is completed, and the threshold determination means has shifted to the predetermined special game state. After executing a process of counting a predetermined count value (for example, a subtraction value of the limiter count) to the threshold value based on the above, it is possible to determine whether the counted threshold value has reached the predetermined threshold value. is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined special game state includes a first predetermined special game state (for example, a small winning game state of the selected symbol z5) and the first predetermined special game state. includes a different second predetermined special game state (for example, a small hit game state of the selected symbol z6), and the threshold value determination means, when the state is shifted to the first predetermined special game state, the predetermined As the count value, a first count value (for example, the subtraction value of the limiter count is 2) is counted as the threshold value, and when the transition to the second predetermined special game state occurs, a value different from the first count value is used. It is desirable to count a certain second count value (eg, a limiter count subtracted value of 1) to the threshold.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining threshold value until reaching the predetermined threshold value is a predetermined value, the predetermined predetermined number of times is set to a first predetermined number of times ( For example, the number of winnings of a small hit is 1 time), and if the remaining threshold value until reaching the predetermined threshold value is a specific value different from the predetermined value, the first predetermined number of times It is desirable to set a second specified number of times (for example, the number of times a small win is won is two times) that is larger than the specified number of times.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and the special game state. A second specific game state that can be executed without (for example, B time-saving game state), and the threshold value determination means is the special game state that first transitions from a game state other than the first specific game state (for example, When the first hit) is a special game state shifted from the normal game state, a third threshold (for example, limiter number of times is 98 times or 100 times) can be set as the predetermined threshold, and the first When the special game state first shifted from the game state other than the specific game state is the special game state shifted from the second specific game state, the fourth different from the third threshold as the predetermined threshold (for example, the number of limiter times is 99) can be set.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and the special game state. A second specific game state that can be executed without (for example, B time-saving game state), and the game execution mode determination means is a threshold value determined by the threshold value determination means during execution of the first specific game state While it is possible to determine the execution mode of the game (for example, the special symbol variation pattern according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 to J4), the threshold value determination means during the execution of the second specific game state It is desirable that the execution mode of the game (for example, the special symbol variation pattern according to the special symbol variation pattern table S1) can be determined regardless of the threshold value determined by.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises special game control mode determination means for determining the control mode of the special game state (for example, opening mode of the big win game state or the small win game state),
It is desirable that the special game control mode determination means can determine the control mode of the special game state based on the remaining threshold value until the predetermined threshold value is reached.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., eighth pachinko gaming machine) includes main control means (e.g., main control circuit 200, main control means) capable of executing control related to game progress. CPU 201) and effect control means (for example, sub-control circuit 300, sub-CPU 301) capable of executing control related to effects executed by effect execution means,
The main control means includes: game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition; special condition determination means for determining whether or not the game execution result satisfies a special condition; A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied; and a game state in which the game is executed. and a controllable game state control means,
The game state control means is capable of controlling any game state including at least a normal game state and a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and The specific game state is a normal specific game state (for example, a general time-saving game state) that can be terminated when the first end condition (for example, the number of winnings of a small hit is 1 time) is satisfied, and the first end condition A special specific game state (e.g., special time-saving game state) that can be terminated when a second end condition (e.g., the number of winnings of small wins is 255 times) different from is satisfied. .

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game state includes a predetermined special game state (for example, a small winning game state) that can be shifted to when a predetermined special condition is established, and a specific special condition. A specific special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that can be transitioned to when established, and in which the game value given to the player is relatively higher than the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state The special game state includes the first specific special game state (for example, the jackpot game state of the selected pattern z2) and the second specific special game state different from the first specific special game state (for example, the selected pattern z1). jackpot game state), wherein the game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to the normal specific game state after the end of the first specific special game state, and the second specific special game state; It is desirable to be able to control the game state to the special specific game state after the end.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first end condition is an end condition with a relatively higher probability of being satisfied than the second end condition.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game state includes a predetermined special game state (for example, a small winning game state) that can be shifted to when a predetermined special condition is established, and a specific special condition. A specific special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that can be transitioned to when established, and in which the game value given to the player is relatively higher than the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state The special game state includes the first specific special game state (for example, the jackpot game state of the selected pattern z2) and the second specific special game state different from the first specific special game state (for example, the selected pattern z1). The first end condition is that the predetermined special game state is the first specified number of times (for example, the number of times a small win is won is once) during the execution of the normal specific game state. It is a condition that is satisfied when executed, and the second end condition is a second specified number of times that the predetermined special game state is greater than the first number of times during execution of the special specific game state (for example, , the number of winnings of small wins is preferably 255 times).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state control means is capable of satisfying neither the first end condition nor the second end condition during execution of the normal specific game state or the special specific game state. When a different third termination condition (for example, the number of times of time saving is 10000 times) is met, it is desirable to be able to terminate either the normal specific game state or the special specific game state being executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the third end condition is an end condition that is met at a relatively lower rate than the first end condition is met during execution of the normal specific game state. is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game executing means executes a first game (for example, lottery for a first special symbol) when a first starting condition among the predetermined starting conditions is met. a possible first game execution means, and a second game different from the first game (for example, a second a second game execution means capable of executing a special symbol lottery),
A relatively higher ratio of transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the first game execution means than transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the second game execution means. It is desirable to shift to the special specific game state after the end of the special game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game executing means executes a first game (for example, lottery for a first special symbol) when a first starting condition among the predetermined starting conditions is met. a possible first game execution means, and a second game different from the first game (for example, a second a second game execution means capable of executing a special symbol lottery),
A relatively higher ratio of transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the second game execution means than transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the first game execution means. It is desirable to shift to the normal specific game state after the end of the special game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game executing means executes a first game (for example, lottery for a first special symbol) when a first starting condition among the predetermined starting conditions is met. a possible first game execution means, and a second game different from the first game (for example, a second a second game execution means capable of executing a special symbol lottery),
In the case of transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the first game execution means, any one of the normal game state, the normal specific game state and the special specific game state after the end of the special game state. While it is possible to shift at a predetermined rate, when it shifts to the special game state based on the execution result of the second game execution means, the normal game state and the special specific game after the end of the special game state It is desirable to shift to the normal specific game state without shifting to the state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game state includes a predetermined special game state (for example, a small winning game state) that can be shifted to when a predetermined special condition is established, and a specific special condition. A specific special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that can be transitioned to when established, and the game value given to the player is relatively higher than the predetermined special game state. The special game state includes a first specific special game state (for example, the jackpot game state of the selected pattern z2) and a second specific special game state different from the first specific special game state (for example, the selected pattern z1). The predetermined special game state is a first predetermined condition that can be shifted to when a first predetermined condition (for example, a small hit of a selected symbol z7) is established among the predetermined special conditions. and a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition among the predetermined special conditions (e.g., V small hit of selected symbols z5, 6). is established, and a second predetermined special game state (for example, a small win game state of V small win) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined special game state, The effect control means includes a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a continuation end effect by a card effect) related to the establishment of the first predetermined condition when the first predetermined condition is satisfied, and the second predetermined effect. a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a winning effect by a battle effect or a door opening effect) relating to the establishment of the second predetermined condition when the condition is satisfied, and the specific effect executing means. is capable of executing the specific effect when the second predetermined condition can be satisfied in any game state of the normal specific game state and the special specific game state, and the predetermined effect executing means is the While the predetermined effect can be executed when the first predetermined condition can be satisfied in the normal specific game state, the predetermined effect is not executed when the first predetermined condition can be satisfied in the special specific game state. is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific effect executing means is capable of executing the specific effect when the second predetermined condition is satisfied while being controlled in the normal game state. Then, it is desirable that the predetermined effect executing means is capable of not executing the predetermined effect when the first predetermined condition is satisfied while being controlled to the normal game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect control means provides a special effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for shifting to the special game state (for example, a notice effect by the notice effect pattern B1 or the notice effect pattern B2). Equipped with a special effect execution means capable of executing
The special effect executing means is capable of executing the special effect in any game of a game in which the special condition is satisfied and a game in which the special condition is not satisfied when the normal specific game state is controlled, When the game is controlled to the special specific game state, it is desirable that the special performance can be executed in a game in which the special condition is established, but the special performance is not executed in a game in which the special condition is not established.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control means controls a game execution time that can determine the execution time of the game (for example, the variable display time of special symbols) to be executed based on the game execution means. having decision means,
It is preferable that the game execution time determination means can determine a game in which the normal specific game state has a relatively longer variation time than the special specific game state in a game in which the special condition is not established.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Appendix: The ninth pachinko machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, a game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the game machine enters the start hole, changes the big win hole to an open state, and changes the big win hole 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines (so-called two-type pachinko gaming machines) that control a jackpot game state on the condition that a game ball hit enters a specific area.

Furthermore, in pachinko machines, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game, there are also so-called 1 type 2 type pachinko machines, which are a mixture of the so-called 1 type pachinko machine and the so-called 2 type pachinko machine. known (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2009-178259 A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, it is desired not only to mix the so-called type 1 type pachinko game machine and the so-called type 2 type pachinko game machine, but also to create a game that has never existed before and to improve the interest of the game. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a ninth pachinko gaming machine) provides a starting variation display game execution means (for example, main control circuit 200 and sub control circuit 300) capable of executing a starting variation display game (for example, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to special symbols) based on A specific variable display game capable of executing a specific variable display game (for example, variable display of normal symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to normal symbols, etc.) based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area (for example, normal pattern operation area 9126) execution means (for example, the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300, etc.); and special determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 for performing a lottery for special symbols) for determining whether or not the starting variation display game satisfies a special result. , a specific determination means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a lottery for normal symbols) for determining whether the specific variation display game satisfies a predetermined result; and the starting variation display game based on the determination result of the special determination means When it is determined that the execution result satisfies the special result, the first displacement device (for example, the first special electric role product unit 9130 or the second special electric role product unit 9150) provided in the game area is replaced with the game medium. First displacement device operation control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of shifting from a difficult-to-win state to an easy-to-win state, and execution of the specific variation display game based on the determination result of the specific determination means When it is determined that the result satisfies the predetermined result, the second displacement device (for example, the normal electric accessory unit 9145) provided in the game area is displaced from a state in which it is difficult for the game medium to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize. a second displacement device operation control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of controlling a game state;
The game state control means can be controlled to any game state including at least a normal game state and a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The special result includes at least a first special result (for example, a big win) and a second special result (for example, a small win) that gives a relatively smaller game value to the player than the first special result. The predetermined result includes a first predetermined result (for example, short opening of the second start port 9140) and a second predetermined result in which the time to make the second displacement device easier to win is longer than the first predetermined result. and a predetermined result (for example, long opening of the second starting port 9140).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state control means changes the normal game state on condition that the specific variation display game is executed a specific number of times while being controlled to the specific game state. It is desirable to be able to control

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state is a first specific game state (for example, a first time-saving game state), and the second predetermined game state is determined by the specific determination means rather than the first specific game state. It is desirable to include at least a second specific game state (for example, a second time-saving game state or a third time-saving game state) with a relatively high rate of being determined as a result.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, holding means (for example, the main RAM 203 having a special symbol start storage area) capable of holding the execution of the start variation display game for a predetermined number of times, and the start variation display game (e.g., a variation pattern of special symbols) can be determined by starting variation display mode determination means (e.g., main CPU 201),
The starting variation display mode determination means sets a first time period (for example, 10 seconds) if the starting variation display game is not suspended by the suspending means when the start condition for the starting variation display game is satisfied. A first variation display mode (for example, a variation pattern 0AH of a first special symbol) that can vary over a period of time is determined, and when the start condition for the start variation display game is satisfied, the start variation display is performed by the holding means. When the game is suspended, a second variable display mode (for example, a second special pattern variation that can be changed over a second time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the first time It is desirable to be able to determine pattern 1AH).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first time is an average time required for the game medium shot from the shooting device to reach the second displacement device (e.g., an average electrical arrival time). 5 seconds), and the second time is the time it takes for the game medium shot from the shooting device to reach the second displacement device. It is desirable that the time be shorter than the average time (for example, 1 second of the second variable display time).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second displacement device is provided downstream of the first displacement device and upstream of the specific region, and the specific region is the first displacement device. It is provided below the game area than the 1st displacement device and the 2nd displacement device, and the 1st displacement device or the 2nd displacement device is in an easy winning state, so that the frequency of passing to the specific area is relatively Lower is desirable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises specific variation display mode determination means (eg, main CPU 201) capable of determining a variation display mode (eg, normal symbol variation pattern) of the specific variation display game, The specific variation display mode determination means satisfies the second predetermined result based on the determination result of the specific determination means more than when it is determined that the first predetermined result is satisfied based on the determination result of the specific determination means. When it is determined that the fluctuation display mode (for example, normal pattern fluctuation pattern 13H, 15H or 16H) that can fluctuate over a relatively long time (for example, 15 seconds, 40 seconds or 60 seconds) is determined It should be possible.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises specific variation display mode determination means (eg, main CPU 201) capable of determining a variation display mode (eg, normal symbol variation pattern) of the specific variation display game, The specific variation display mode determining means sets a third time (for example, 15 seconds, 12 second or 40 seconds) can be determined (for example, normal symbol variation patterns 13H to 15H), and the execution result of the specific variation display game that changed last time is the second predetermined In the case of the result, a fourth variation display mode (eg, normal symbol variation pattern 16H) that can vary over a fourth time (eg, 60 seconds) that is longer than the third time should be determinable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises specific variation display mode determination means (eg, main CPU 201) capable of determining a variation display mode (eg, normal symbol variation pattern) of the specific variation display game, The specific variation display mode determination means is a variation display mode (for example, 3 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) that can vary over a relatively shorter variation time (for example, 3 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) in the specific game state than in the normal game state For example, normal symbol variation patterns 10H, 11H, etc.) can be determined, and the longest variation time (eg, 30 seconds) that can be determined during the normal game state. Variation display mode (eg, Normal symbol variation pattern 01H) is a variation display mode that can vary over the longest variation time (eg, 60 seconds) that can be determined in the specific game state (eg, normal symbol variation pattern 16H) than A variable display mode with a short variable time is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32 and the LED group 46) is provided, and the The effect executing means is capable of executing effects related to the variable display of the starting variable display game in the normal game state, but does not execute effects related to the variable display of the specific variable display game, and performs the specific variable display in the specific game state. It is desirable that an effect related to the variable display of the game can be executed, and that an effect related to the variable display of the starting variable display game can also be executed when the execution result of the specific variable display game reaches the predetermined result.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32 and the LED group 46), and the starting A holding means (for example, a main RAM 203 having a special symbol start storage area) capable of holding the execution of the variable display game for a predetermined number is provided, and the effect execution means is such that the starting variable display game satisfies the special result. and when the start variation display game is not suspended by the suspension means when the start condition for the start variation display game is satisfied, a first effect (for example, BONUS rush effect) is executed. , when the starting variation display game satisfies the special result and the starting variation display game is suspended by the suspending means when the start condition for the starting variation display game is satisfied, It is desirable to execute a second effect (for example, continuous BONUS effect) different from the first effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32 and the LED group 46), and the starting Suspension means (for example, main RAM 203 having a special symbol start storage area) capable of suspending the execution of the variation display game for a predetermined number of times; When satisfying the condition, a special game state control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of controlling a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined number of game values can be awarded to the player after the establishment of the special result; wherein the effect executing means determines that the starting variation display game is not suspended by the suspending means when the starting variation display game when the special result is satisfied satisfies the start condition of the starting variation display game. In this case, it is possible to display the expected number of game media to be acquired (for example, display of the image of the number of game balls expected to be acquired) regarding the number of game values that the player can acquire at the start of the special game state, thereby satisfying the special result. If the starting variation display game is suspended by the suspending means when the condition for starting the starting variation display game is satisfied, the starting variation display game was executed last time at the start of the special game state. It is desirable to be able to display the acquired game media number display (for example, display of acquired game ball number image) regarding the number of game values acquired in the special game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start variation display game executing means executes the first start variation display game ( For example, a first start variation display game execution means capable of executing a first special symbol and a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second start area (for example, a second start port 9140) a second start variation display game execution means capable of executing a second start variation display game (for example, variable display of a second special symbol and decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol) based on passage of the game medium; and the effect executing means causes the second start variation display game to be performed by the holding means when the second start variation display game satisfies the special result and the conditions for starting the second start variation display game are met. When the variable display game is not suspended, the first effect is executed, the second start variable display game satisfies the special result, and the start condition of the second start variable display game is If the second starting variation display game is suspended by the suspending means when established, it is desirable to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start variation display game executing means executes the first start variation display game ( For example, a first start variation display game execution means capable of executing a first special symbol and a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second start area (for example, a second start port 9140) a second start variation display game execution means capable of executing a second start variation display game (for example, variable display of a second special symbol and decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol) based on passage of the game medium; The special determination means determines whether the first starting variation display game satisfies the special result or is a loss that does not satisfy the special result (for example, a first special symbol lottery and second special determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that draws a second special symbol) for determining whether the second starting variation display game satisfies the special result or is a loss. The first special determination means has a relatively higher probability of determining that the failure than determining that the special result is satisfied, and the second special determination means determines that the failure It is desirable that the probability of determining that the special result is satisfied is relatively high.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second time is set to be less than or equal to the time (for example, 2 seconds) in which the first displacement device is ready for winning.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

7 display device 200 main control circuit 201 main CPU
202 main ROM
203 Main RAM
300 sub control circuit 301 sub CPU
9010 Game board unit 9100 Game panel 9120 First starting port 9126 Normal figure operating area 9130 First special electric accessory unit 9131 First big winning port 9140 Second starting port 9145 Ordinary electric accessory unit 9150 Second special electric accessory unit 9151 2nd Grand Prize Opening 9156 V Prize Opening

Claims (1)

game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
special condition determination means for determining whether or not the execution result of the game satisfies a special condition;
a special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the game is completed when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied;
The game state in which the game is executed includes at least a normal game state, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a non-playable state that disables the player from playing. game state control means capable of controlling the state;
game execution mode determination means for determining a game execution mode for being executed based on the game execution means and for notifying the execution result of the game;
threshold determination means capable of determining whether or not the number of times the special game state is executed or the number of game values given to the player reaches a predetermined threshold;
A limiting means capable of controlling the game state controlled by the game state control means to the normal game state or the game impossible state based on the determination of the threshold value determination means,
The special game state includes a predetermined special game state and a specific special game state in which the game value given to the player is relatively higher than the predetermined special game state,
The game state control means is
When the predetermined special game state is executed a predetermined number of times while being controlled to the specific game state, the game state can be controlled to the normal game state after the predetermined special game state is completed,
The threshold determination means is
It is possible to determine whether or not the counted threshold reaches the predetermined threshold after executing a process of counting a predetermined count value as the threshold based on the transition to the predetermined special game state. A game machine characterized by

Images